Online Marketing Made Easy with Amy Porterfield

Entrepreneur Magazine: The Six-Figure Solopreneur World

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#733: Deck the Halls, Not Your Calendar: How to Manage Your Time This Holiday Season

19 november 2024 | 26 min

#732: This ONE Podcast Strategy Has Made Over 6-Figures with Jenna Kutcher

14 november 2024 | 43 min

#731: 2025 Business Planning Made Easy: Map Out Your Most Successful Year Yet

12 november 2024 | 32 min

#730: Reframe Your Brain, Set Goals That Scare You, and Get What You Want

7 november 2024 | 71 min

#729: 3 Easy Holiday Offer Ideas to End the Year Strong

5 november 2024 | 20 min

#728: Scale to Success: How to Transition from Operator to Owner with CEO Stacy Tuschl

31 oktober 2024 | 58 min

Everything you need to know to start scaling your small business and reclaiming your freedom as an entrepreneur.

Start scaling like a pro! Join Stacy Tuschl for expert tips and practical strategies on transitioning from operator to true owner of your business.

In this episode, you’ll hear about:

(7:31) What it really means to transition from an operator to an owner in your business
(9:31) Why solopreneurs often get maxed out at around $150,000 per year
(12:23) Strategies for successfully hiring and outsourcing for the first time
(18:21) How to ensure new hires pay for themselves within 90 days
(22:57) A deep dive into Stacy’s 5 step profitable outsourcing framework
(37:39) A real-life success story of someone in Stacy’s life who transitioned from operator to owner
(40:51) Common scaling mistakes that could be holding you back (& how to avoid them!)
(47:06) Everything you can learn from Stacy’s FREE masterclass!

Listen in because it's time to step into your owner era and start running your business like a pro!

Resources Mentioned in the Episode

Protect Your Profit FREE Masterclass

Never Lose An Employee Again”: Keys To Employee Engagement And Retention feat. Joey Coleman

Two Weeks Notice by Amy Porterfield

Follow Stacy

Well-Oiled Operations with Stacy Tuschl podcast

stacytuschl.com

Follow Amy

#339: Facebook Ad Strategies To Grow Your Audience Now (No Matter Where You Are In Your Business) with Salome Schillack

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#727: My Morning Routine (& How To Create One That Works For You, Not Against You)

29 oktober 2024 | 21 min

#726: From Clicks to Conversions: Nail Your Holiday Ads with Expert Salome Schillack

24 oktober 2024 | 43 min

Maximizing your sales during the holiday season, optimizing your social media ads, and making this year your most profitable to date.

Make more money this holiday season! Join social media ad expert Salome Schillack for her top strategies on selling more products during the holidays.

In this episode, we discuss:

(6:25) The most common mistakes businesses make with ads during the holiday season and how you can avoid them
(8:18) Why the holidays are the perfect time to grow your audience
(12:51) How to identify underperforming ads before it’s too late
(17:31) Top strategies for audience targeting
(20:41) Tips for crafting an ad that stands out in a crowded holiday market
(24:23) The best time to start running your holiday ads
(28:00) The role of organic content in supporting your ad campaigns
(31:09) Cost-effective methods to reach your advertising goals
(33:08) Why you should start building your holiday ads NOW!

Listen in and remember, it's never too early to get started. Here's to making this your most profitable holiday season yet!

Resources Mentioned in the Episode

Digital Course Academy

Foundational Facebook and Instagram Ads Digital Course

Follow Salome

The Launch Lounge podcast

instagram.com/the_launch_lounge

thelaunchlounge.com

Follow Amy

The Wolf Is At The Door by Ben Angel

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#725: After 15 Years of Being in Business, I Can’t Believe I’m Still Learning This Crucial Lesson

22 oktober 2024 | 20 min

BONUS: Competing with AI: Future-Proofing Your Business in a Digital World with Ben Angel

21 oktober 2024 | 59 min

Wondering how AI will impact the future of entrepreneurship? Here’s everything you need to know to protect your business from the dangers of AI while using it to your advantage.

Will AI replace your online business? Hear Ben Angel’s expert insights on the benefits, dangers, and opportunities for the future of AI for entrepreneurs.

In this episode, we discuss:

(6:20) All of the ways AI will impact business owners
(9:38) Tips for managing any fear or overwhelm you may feel about AI
(13:44) Questions you should ask as an entrepreneur navigating an AI world
(16:53) Practical strategies to help you prepare for a future with AI
(18:42) How to create a personalized AI roadmap that aligns with your specific goals and objectives
(28:02) The truth about plagiarism and AI plus tips for reducing the risk of AI stealing information from your digital course
(36:12) Why AI will never actually replace you
(45:38) The benefits of AI for entrepreneurs
(51:35) Everything you will learn in Ben’s new book!

Listen in because this conversation might just change the way you think about AI and your online business!

Resources Mentioned in the Episode

Unstoppable by Ben Angel

The Dark Side of ChatGPT: Employees & Businesses Need to Prepare Now

Follow Ben

instagram.com/benangelauthor

facebook.com/yourwaytothetop

Follow Amy

Save your seat at my FREE live masterclass: 5 No Fuss Steps To Creating a Profitable Digital Course From Scratch!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#724: DCA 2024 Recap: 3 Strategies That Skyrocketed My Digital Course Academy Success

17 oktober 2024 | 41 min

#723: How to Find Your Single-Task Focus as a Multi-Tasking Business Owner

15 oktober 2024 | 15 min

#722: The Beginner's Blueprint to Passive Income with Digital Downloads with Cody Berman

10 oktober 2024 | 40 min

#721: How I'm Managing My Anxiety and Depression (& Why I'm Talking About It)

8 oktober 2024 | 26 min

BONUS: Unfollow or Stay? Reimagining Relationships in the Age of Polarization with Brit Barron

7 oktober 2024 | 46 min

#720: Start Small: How 50 Email Subscribers Can Change Your Business TODAY

3 oktober 2024 | 47 min

#719: Think Like a CEO: How to Get Scrappy, Solve Challenges, and Succeed

1 oktober 2024 | 27 min

#718: Unlikely Online Income: How You Can Turn Any Skill into a Digital Course with Dr. Sonia Chopra

26 september 2024 | 47 min

#717: How to Identify Your Profitable Course Topic (In Just 15 Minutes)

24 september 2024 | 29 min

#716: How Relaunching Can Simplify Your Business (and Increase Your Revenue!)

19 september 2024 | 54 min

#715: Overwhelm is Expensive: How to Stop Paying the Price and FINALLY Start Your Digital Course

17 september 2024 | 29 min

BONUS: How Focusing on the 5% Will Win You Customers for Life with Will Guidara

16 september 2024 | 65 min

Applying the principles of hospitality to ANY business, wowing your customers, and making your brand stand out from the crowd with Will Guidara.

Today, I'm back in the studio with the fabulous Jasmine Star, and, my friend, this conversation is a must-listen. We sat down with a true hospitality extraordinaire, Will Guidara! Will turned his restaurant Eleven Madison Park into the #1 in the world, wrote the game-changing book "Unreasonable Hospitality" (trust me, you have to read it!), and was a guest star on Season 3 of one of my favorite shows, "The Bear."

In this episode, Will pulls back the curtain on the power of "unreasonable hospitality," tells you how to create experiences so incredible that your customers keep coming back, and shares tips for being the best leader possible for your amazing team.

Today, you’ll learn about:

(6:12) The difference between customer service and hospitality (and how this relates to your business!)
(12:08) Will’s top 3 tips for moving towards greatness as a leader
(19:52) How to deliver positive and constructive criticism/feedback to your team
(24:26) Will’s perspective on “going against the grain” and the true meaning of “unreasonable hospitality”
(35:49) The importance of supporting, understanding, and fully seeing your team
(45:52) Will’s 95/5 rule for managing your finances
(50:03) Advice for applying these hospitality principals to your small or online business

Listen in and think about how you can apply "unreasonable hospitality" in your own business!

Resources Mentioned In Episode

Save your seat at my FREE live masterclass: 5 No Fuss Steps To Creating a Profitable Digital Course From Scratch!

Subscribe to the Pre-Meal Newsletter

Unreasonable Hospitality by Will Guidara

The Bear on FX

TED Talk: The Secret Ingredients of Great Hospitality

Follow Will

linkedin.com/in/willguidara

instagram.com/wguidara

unreasonablehospitality.com

Follow Jasmine

The Jasmine Star Show podcast

instagram.com/jasminestar

jasminestar.com

Follow Amy

Free Guide: Surprisingly Simple Ways To Turn Your Knowledge Into A Digital Course

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#714: The Minimum Viable Course: How To Create Your Online Course NOW & Build It Over Time

12 september 2024 | 32 min

Structuring your course content to scale, refining after your first launch, and starting your digital course journey today!

So, I've had the same digital course since 2019, and even though it looks pretty different today than it did back then, it still has the same foundation. My friend, we all have to start somewhere! And your course will also improve with time, but it can only evolve if you take that first step.

If you've been daydreaming about creating your very first digital course but feel overwhelmed by the idea, this episode is for you! You don't need to make a huge, complex course to launch. In fact, I encourage you to embrace the idea of “just start” so you can create your digital course right now and build it over time!

Today, I share my formula to help you decide on your digital course topic, show you how to design your modules for expansion, and share my top strategies for improving your course after the initial launch.

Every moment you spend doubting yourself and thinking “I'm not ready” could have been spent sharing your brilliant knowledge with your future students! The time is NOW to create a course that scales in value (and price!) as you refine and expand it.

In this episode, you’ll hear:

(4:02) My simple formula to identify your digital course topic
(7:28) Tips for outlining the content in your digital course modules
(11:14) How to structure your course for easy expansion over time
(13:47) Strategies for improving your course after that initial launch
(16:32) Advice for pricing your course in alignment to the growing course value
(18:29) Proof that starting with a small launch is better than not starting at all

Listen in and take that first step towards becoming a digital course creator today!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#713: Digital Course Doubt: Do I Know How to Teach My Content?

10 september 2024 | 24 min

#712: Dealing with Disaster in Italy: 4 Ways I’m Transforming my Customer Support Strategy After an Overseas Ordeal

5 september 2024 | 33 min

#711: Digital Course Doubt: Is It Too Much Money?

3 september 2024 | 26 min

#710: How to Deliver a Digital Course Your Audience REALLY Wants

29 augusti 2024 | 45 min

BONUS: How To Run A Business That's Tailor Made For You with Astrologist & AstroTwin, Ophira Edut

28 augusti 2024 | 59 min

#709: Digital Course Doubt: Do I Have the Right Experience?

27 augusti 2024 | 23 min

#708: Beyond the Billable Hour: How to Transition from 1-on-1 Work to a Digital Course

22 augusti 2024 | 37 min

#707: Digital Course Doubt: Do I Have Enough Time?

20 augusti 2024 | 29 min

#706: 5 Emotions Your Audience Should Feel to Buy Your Product: Writing Edition with Founder of The Copy Posse, Alex Cattoni

15 augusti 2024 | 48 min

Expert formulas, blueprints, and tips for writing emotional and persuasive copy that will grow your online business.

You already know enough to make a digital course! Need proof? Use my Free Guide: Surprisingly Simple Ways To Turn Your Knowledge Into A Digital Course!

Take your copywriting to the next level! Hear Alex Cattoni’s expert formulas, blueprints, and quick tips on improving your copy and growing your business.

You’ll learn:

(7:46) What makes Copy Posse so unique and why Alex started the community
(12:08) Advice for tuning out the market competitors to focus on your own path
(16:49) Tips for approaching copywriting for the first time and understanding messaging vs. marketing
(20:55) A major copywriting step that most entrepreneurs overlook
(22:42) Alex’s formula for emotionally connecting with your buyer
(28:16) How to show your audience that you have the solution they’ve been looking for
(35:38) Top qualities to look for when hiring a copywriter

Listen in and start to uplevel your copy TODAY by using "The Emotional Buyer’s Journey" and "The 5 P's".

Resources Mentioned in the Episode:

Copy Posse

Influence by Robert Cialdini

Ray Edwards

Follow Alex

instagram.com/copyposse

alexcattoni.com

Follow Amy

Free Guide: Surprisingly Simple Ways To Turn Your Knowledge Into A Digital Course

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#705: Digital Course Doubt: Is My Email List Too Small?

13 augusti 2024 | 25 min

Why your small and engaged email list will sell more than a large disinterested one.

NEW: You already know enough to make a digital course! Need proof? Use my Free Guide: Surprisingly Simple Ways To Turn Your Knowledge Into A Digital Course!

I truly believe that email lists scale your business, sell your offer, and connect with your audience like nothing else. But can you still sell your digital courses with a small email list? Well, of course you can! If you've been holding back from launching your digital course because you think your list isn't big enough, I'm here to remind you that no email list is too small to sell. In this episode, I share my top scrappy strategies and amazing real-life student success stories that prove you can still sell with an email list under 500.

In this episode, you’ll learn:

(5:44) Why a small engaged email list is more valuable than a large disinterested one
(8:54) Scrappy strategies for optimizing your small email list
(11:36) A reminder that you have to start from somewhere!
(15:12) How my incredible student generated $58,000 in revenue with only 400 people on her email list

Listen in because you'll walk away today more motivated than ever to get started right where you're at!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Resources Mentioned in the Episode

Digital Course Academy

Facebook ads

Google ads

Instagram ads

Follow Dayana

instagram.com/dayana_aleksandrova_

dayanaaleksandrova.com

Follow Amy

Free Guide: Surprisingly Simple Ways To Turn Your Knowledge Into A Digital Course

#704: How To Have Emails EVERYONE Opens (Which Means MORE Money!) with Founder of Subjectline.com, Jay Schwedelson

8 augusti 2024 | 40 min

How to get more clicks on your offer with the help of an eye-catching email subject line.

You already know enough to make a digital course! Need proof? Use my Free Guide: Surprisingly Simple Ways To Turn Your Knowledge Into A Digital Course!

My guest today is none other than the incredible Jay Schwedelson, a true email marketing genius who is here to share his game-changing strategies that will completely uplevel your email game overnight. Jay is the president and CEO of Outcome Media and the founder of the fantastic marketing event company GURU Media Hub.

Today, we talk about:

(4:29) Why the subject line of your email is so crucial and top tips for boosting your open rate
(10:56) A super easy-to-use tool for optimizing your subject line
(17:54) A behind-the-scenes look at how Jay built and collects leads for subjectline.com
(23:45) Understanding social vs. email marketing and actionable strategies to grow your email list today
(28:53) The importance of your call-to-action button
(32:11) How to get FREE access to the best information about the world of email marketing

Listen in because trust me – all it takes is a few minor tweaks to make your emails stand out in a crowded inbox!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Resources Mentioned in the Episode

Follow Jay

Do This, NOT That podcast

instagram.com/jayschwedelson

jayschwedelson.com

Follow Amy

Get my FREE Webinar Blueprint here!

#703: The Case for Creating Your Digital Course

6 augusti 2024 | 23 min

#702: 6 Online Income Opportunities You Can Start Today

1 augusti 2024 | 30 min

#701: Feeling Alone In Your Entrepreneurial Journey? Join Us!

30 juli 2024 | 19 min

#700: Why You Shouldn’t Wait Your Turn with Sprinkles Founder Candace Nelson

25 juli 2024 | 48 min

#699: You Deserve More Than a Summer Friday

23 juli 2024 | 18 min

Why the “perks” at your 9-5 job will never beat the freedom of entrepreneurship.

Feeling a bit overwhelmed by the grind lately? Wondering if being an entrepreneur is really worth it? Well, I want you to STOP right there and tune in because this episode is guaranteed to lift your spirits, remind you why you started your own business, and give you a real good laugh!

Today, you'll hear some absolutely hilarious "perks" my team members experienced at their old 9-5 jobs. Spoiler alert: You'll leave this episode so happy you left your 9-5 – or be even more motivated than ever to hand in your resignation letter. Think Top Banana awards and "flex" Fridays (but if you work 10+ hours Monday to Thursday)!

Let's be honest – being an entrepreneur is super challenging…but it's also so incredibly rewarding! My friend, there have been plenty of days when I've wanted to give up, when I felt like I was the only one who didn't have it all figured out and I was struggling to reach my goals. But you know what? Those tough days are just a natural part of the journey and are often beautiful opportunities to grow as a business owner and person.

Tune in for:

(2:31) Proof that there are ebbs and flows all throughout entrepreneurship
(5:27) Understanding the illusion of security at a 9-5 job
(10:21) The “perks” of working for someone else instead of being your own boss
(15:52) Advice for overcoming the fear of leaving your job

Listen in because being an entrepreneur is the best choice you could ever make, and this episode is all the proof you'll need!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#698: How to Pivot & Rebrand as an Entrepreneur after Building a Business with Jessica Zweig

18 juli 2024 | 53 min

Why the best move for you and your business might be to sell it and how you can tackle this pivot.

Have you ever thought about selling your business? No, it doesn't mean you're giving up on your entrepreneurial dream or that you no longer love what you've built! Pivoting as an entrepreneur can open the door to so many exciting new opportunities. And my amazing guest for this episode is the perfect example of how making a change could be your best move ever.

I'm thrilled to welcome my dear friend and powerhouse entrepreneur, Jessica Zweig, on the show today. Jessica didn't just pivot in her career; she made a courageous leap into a whole new area of business. She's here to share her journey, from building multi-seven-figure businesses to making the bold decision to sell and reinvent her path.

Honestly – can you imagine if you were the exact same person you were as a teenager? No way! We all evolve over time, and the same goes for our businesses. I mean, if I think about the difference between my first year as an entrepreneur and my 15th year – it's massive! Change is a natural part of growth, my sweet friend.

Whether you're just starting out or have been in the game for years, this chat is filled with valuable insights on rebranding, managing burnout, and the often unspoken dream to sell your business.

Today, you’ll hear about:

(11:09) When Jessica knew it was time to sell her first business
(17:26) What to do when you’re burnt out with your business but still want to be an entrepreneur
(26:44) Advice for letting go of your personal connection to your business
(29:43) Why Jessica’s new company is completely aligned with her evolved life goals
(39:24) How to give yourself the permission to dream big
(41:41) A sneak peek into Jessica’s brand new book The Light Work

Listen in if you're feeling ready for the next chapter of your business and your life. I’m right here cheering you on!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#697: Roadblocks and Rewards: How Setbacks Can Actually Grow Your Business

16 juli 2024 | 15 min

Growing your business is going to be your biggest challenge. Here’s the powerful mindset shift that will get you through!

Looking back, I wish I had invested just as much, if not more, into understanding how to create a strong entrepreneurial mindset as I did in courses, strategies, and coaching. Yep, you read that right, my friend. Because, believe it or not, when times start to get tough as you build your business (and trust me—they absolutely will), managing your mindset is the thing that will get you through!

If you're going through a difficult time in your business right now, today's episode is just what you need to hear! I reveal the powerful mindset shift that helped me overcome the toughest challenges in my 15-year entrepreneurial journey. Now, this reframe isn't what you'd usually hear in the online space, but I promise it will be your secret weapon for boosting your resilience and embracing the hustle.

Entrepreneurs with great mindsets who are willing to put in the work to bounce back from setbacks are the ones who will thrive the most in their businesses and in life. You, my friend, deserve to be one of those people! You'll walk away from this episode ready to take the necessary risks of being a business owner, manage the fear that comes with them, and stop that pesky habit of comparing yourself to others.

Today, I talk about:

(3:23) Understanding that running a business means you have to be willing to take massive risks
(6:03) How to stop comparing yourself to others and recognize the necessary hustle of entrepreneurship
(9:12) Why entrepreneurship is two steps forward, one step back – and advice for effectively managing the setbacks
(11:38) The importance of investing in your mindset just as much as you invest in your business

Listen in, and be sure to share this message with a fellow entrepreneur who could use a boost!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#696: How I Quit Social Media & Still Grew My Business 165% with Kate Kordsmeier

11 juli 2024 | 45 min

Why quitting social media could be the best move you can make to scale your business with Kate Kordsmeier.

I want you to take a moment to imagine what your life and business would look like if you decided to completely quit social media. No more endless scrolling on TikTok or marketing on Instagram – would you still thrive? Well, guess what? My guest today, the fabulous Kate Kordsmeier, actually quit social media in 2021 and saw her business grow by a whopping 165%. It is possible, my friend!

Now, if you know me, you know that I have a love-hate relationship with social media. There are things about it that I don't particularly like, but I also see the many benefits it brings to my business. So, today's conversation was both uncomfortable and super eye-opening for me!

Kate is an entrepreneur and the CEO of an online business called "Success With Soul," where she helps women become entrepreneurs without the burnout. And today, she's here to encourage you to reframe how you connect, market, and scale your businesses in the digital age. She opens up about why she permanently logged off socials, how you can determine if it's the right move for you, and shares strategies for growing your business, email list, and creativity without being so reliant on social media.

You became an entrepreneur because you wanted to live life on your terms. So, if you've ever felt tied down to your Instagram, questioned the ROI from Facebook, or simply don’t find joy in using social media, listen in because this episode might just be the wake-up call you never knew you needed!

In this episode, you’ll learn:

(5:17) Why Kate decided to completely quit social media
(10:27) Strategies for growing your email list without social and the importance of SEO
(20:08) How to know if quitting social media is right for you and the steps you can take to start distancing yourself
(28:25) The incredible creative opportunities with marketing off of social
(31:56) The common misconceptions about social media and tips for using it amongst other parts of your business

Get Kate's Templates & Trainings at her Success With Soul Shop >> amyporterfield.com/successwithsoul

***Use code AMY30 for 30% off your purchase.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#695: Create Your 9-to-5 Exit Strategy in 5 Simple Steps

9 juli 2024 | 17 min

My top 5 tips to successfully leave your corporate job and start your dream business today.

You've finally taken the courageous leap to quit your 9-5 and start building the business of your dreams? So…what's next? Well – the very first step is to listen to this episode! I’m not lying when I say that today's episode is one I wish I had when I left my corporate job and started my own business 15 years ago.

I'm lifting the curtain on the most important steps you can take as a first-time entrepreneur that I know will set you and your business up for success right from the start! And these tips aren't just for newbies. Even if you're a seasoned pro, you might find yourself listening along and reflecting back on your early days – or you could realize that you might have skipped one or two of these crucial steps!

My sweet friend, you'll hear all the details about why I'm so grateful I started to build a thriving email list early on, how I've learned to use all the feedback from my audience, and exactly where I like to reinvest my profit back into my business.

Today, I talk about:

(3:43) Tips for setting a realistic revenue goal for your first year (instead of trying to make millions!)
(5:41) The best ways to connect and learn from your audience
(8:07) Why it’s so important to grow and nurture your email list
(10:17) How to connect with a community of other entrepreneurs
(13:29) Where to reinvest your profit back into your business

Listen in and get ready to have the business, freedom, and life you’ve always wanted! The time to start is NOW.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#694: What Your Customer Wants and Can't Tell You with Melina Palmer

3 juli 2024 | 52 min

Using human behavior to tweak your sales page and take your marketing to the next level with Melina Palmer.

Ever wondered why some people choose to buy and others skip your offer? Well, did you know you can use the science of human behavior to answer that question and completely uplevel your marketing? My friend, understanding how your customers think, communicate, and how they make purchasing decisions is essential for ALL online marketers, digital course creators, and entrepreneurs. Yep – that means you!

In this episode, I'm so excited to chat with applied behavioral economist Melina Palmer! She brings the science of human behavior to the world of marketing to help you truly understand your ideal customer and get them to add your offer directly into their cart!

Melina has all the answers to your burning questions and shares her simple yet brilliant, actionable strategies for connecting with your customers. Because once you do, you can adjust your sales pages, pricing, and copy to maximize your sales!

From identifying exactly what your customer is searching for to reframing your message using data and statistics to make your offers irresistible, this conversation is jam-packed with pure marketing gold!

Today, you’ll learn:

(3:20) What an applied behavioral economist does
(8:26) Actionable strategies you can use to better understand your customers and actually convert
(13:54) Tips for reframing and anchoring your messaging to resonate deeper with your potential customer
(19:55) Applying human behavior directly to your marketing
(29:23) The truth about scarcity, “VIP” offers, and luxury branding
(34:01) Deciding whether your business is one of quality or one of value and using it to tweak your marketing and pricing
(42:49) Melina’s top advice to immediately improve how you're connecting with your audience

Listen in and apply these tips and tricks to your business right now! You literally can not afford to wait another minute.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#693: The Mid-Year Reset to Help You Hit Your 2024 Revenue Goals

2 juli 2024 | 24 min

Feeling behind? Here are 3 quick ways to boost your revenue and get back on track toward your annual goals.

Can you believe it? We're already halfway through the year! Time is absolutely flying my friend, and if you're feeling those Sunday Scaries about meeting your annual goals, know that you're not alone. But the good news is you can turn your anxiety into action and start to close the gap between your goals and your actual numbers TODAY!

If you're feeling a bit behind in reaching your annual goals – don't worry, I've got you covered. In this episode, we're gearing up for the ultimate mid-year business reset! I'm lifting the curtain on three of my favorite tried and true "low-lift" strategies to quickly boost your revenue and get you right back on track toward your goals.

Whether you're way more behind than you had anticipated or just need a little nudge, these tips are designed to help you finish the year out strong.

Plus, I reveal my secret go-to tool that keeps me super organized and incredibly focused on my goals all year long. Just imagine ringing in 2025 with a massive sense of accomplishment (and relief!), knowing you've hit your target and then some!

Today, I discuss:

(3:35) Why you need to be paying attention to your numbers
(8:33) Leveraging your pre-existing skills to craft a special low-cost offer
(10:30) How to design a simple and quick yet high-converting workshop course
(13:42) Tips for using affiliate marketing to boost your revenue
(17:21) The best way to stay organized and plan for your long-term goals

Listen in and remember that whether you're behind your goal or not, it doesn't determine your worth! There is still a ton of opportunity to make 2024 your best year yet.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#692: How To Create Your First Website (& Upgrade Later)

27 juni 2024 | 39 min

A behind-the-scenes look at the tools and strategies my team used for our beautiful website refresh.

When you're building your online business, can you really only rely on social media to scale? The quick answer – NO! While social media is excellent for outreach, you just aren't going to get the same stability, control, and conversion rates as a website.

But, I know what you're thinking: Amy, how do I even start to build an entire website?! I totally understand how nerve-racking it can be when you’re launching your first website. Mine only had a gray header, my name in black with a shadow, and super cheesy graphics. My friend, we all have to start somewhere! But lucky for you, creating a functional and beautiful website now is actually a whole lot easier and faster than you might think.

Today, I share the practical tools, tips, and strategies my team used in our recent website remodel. That's right – you're getting a behind-the-scenes look at how we refreshed our website and a step-by-step walkthrough of the entire redesign process.

Whether you're building a website for the first time or want to uplevel your current one, this episode will help you make a great first impression with your visitors and avoid the mistakes I made early on. Plus, I talk about my favorite platform for website building and how to make your website incredibly engaging and high-converting.

In this episode, you’ll learn:

(5:28) Website function vs. website beauty and designing effectively and efficiency
(10:47) The main goals I had in mind for my website redesign
(13:36) Why website expert Jen Olmstead believes website templates can completely transform your online presence
(19:22) Understanding the three essential pages for your website: homepage, about page, and blog page
(24:45) How a User Experience Specialist and an SEO Expert can take your website to the next level
(28:40) Everything you need to know about adding images to your website
(30:23) Tips for starting small and scaling later

Listen in and get started on creating a website that not only looks amazing but also aligns with your business goals!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#691: How to Make Money Online: Social Media vs. Email List

25 juni 2024 | 28 min

Prioritizing your email list to connect directly with potential buyers and scale your business.

What if I told you that you’re just one email away from boosting your revenue by thousands! My friend, the moment you shift your focus towards growing and nurturing your email list instead of chasing social media followers is the moment when your business will truly take off.

I know, I know – I sound like a broken record, but your email list is really THAT important! You might feel like it takes too long, you've tried everything, or you would rather focus on your social media. Well if that rings true to you, I'm here today to challenge that mindset and help you recognize the incredible value of email list marketing.

In this episode, I share all the reasons why your email list should take center stage over your social media followers. While social media is great for organic marketing, having a large following doesn't always translate into revenue. Your email list is your direct line to your audience of buyers where you get to make a bigger impact on the market all while scaling your unstoppable business! Honestly – what more could you ask for?!

Today, I talk about:

(5:51) Proof that email lists are more effective for scaling your business than having social media followers
(10:01) The surprising difference in conversion rates between social media marketing and email marketing
(13:17) Real-life examples of when email marketing made thousands for my business
(19:09) Why a revenue boost is always just one email away
(20:46) Tips for staying consistent, putting in the effort, and having a direct relationship with your audience

Listen in because when you have a thriving email list, you have the power to strengthen your client relationships, provide massive value, and sell your offer like never before.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

BONUS: Dream Bigger, Fail Harder with Uncle Nearest Founder & CEO, Fawn Weaver

24 juni 2024 | 69 min

Embracing your confidence, launching your wealth, and leading your business to the top.

My friend, are you ready for some real-deal inspiration as strong and delicious as Uncle Nearest whiskey? I know I am! Today, I am joined once again by the fabulous Jasmine Star to bring you another powerhouse conversation. And trust me, you'll want to listen to this one on repeat.

We have the incredible Fawn Weaver, CEO of the award-winning Uncle Nearest whiskey brand, in the room with us for this episode. She is an absolute force and one of six Black women in America to found and lead a $1 billion company! But today, we're not just talking about her whiskey – Fawn is here to share her brilliant entrepreneurial insights and show you how to apply them directly to your growing business.

Fawn's journey from homelessness to building an empire is beyond inspiring, and lucky for you, she is all about sharing her success secrets in real time! You get a front row seat to her wisdom on overcoming barriers as a Black woman in business, embracing your confidence, building extreme wealth, and being a rockstar leader for your team. I'm telling you – you're going to walk away today feeling unbelievably energized and ready to take on the world!

And if all of that isn't enough, you'll get an inside look at the brilliant marketing strategies that launched her small business to the very top.

In this episode, we discuss:

(5:42) The importance of owning your real estate – both online and physical
(23:24) Understanding the history and African influence on Tennessee whiskey and the story behind Uncle Nearest
(29:06) Practical tips to start raising serious money for your business as a woman or person of color
(34:29) How Fawn recovered when her bank account was negative $1.4 million
(42:25) Advice for owning a room, embodying your confidence, and standing strong in your identity
(48:28) The most effective way to make your smaller brand stand out amongst the biggest companies
(52:46) Fawn’s top marketing strategies to drive sales and scale your business super quickly

Listen in and soak up all of the advice from a woman who has truly reshaped the business world. Cheers!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#690: The Lead Magnet Playbook: A Step-By-Step Guide for Creating Lead Magnets That Convert

20 juni 2024 | 59 min

Creating an irresistible lead magnet to grow your email list and scale your business.

Let me tell you – I would never have built the amazing business I have today without my incredible email list. If you're not prioritizing your email list right now, my friend, consider this your sign to do it!

Why you may ask? Well, these days, social media just isn't enough – you absolutely need a thriving email list to scale your business. And one of the best ways to build an email list is by having a powerful lead magnet! In this episode, I share (literally!) each and every tip, trick, and actionable strategy I have for creating lead magnets that your ideal customers won't be able to resist. Trust me – you’re gonna want to get out a pen and paper!

Basically, a lead magnet is a free offer or resource that you give to your audience in exchange for their email. Once you have that info, you're on your way to building an email list that practically sells for you!

Today, I walk you through every single step, from coming up with ideas to designing to promoting your lead magnet. Seriously, these have been a total game-changer for my business, and of course, I want the exact same for you!

In this episode, you’ll learn:

(5:48) A few simple questions to ask yourself to help you decide on a topic for your lead magnet
(11:39) The most common and effective types of lead magnets
(26:14) My top strategies to keep in mind when creating your lead magnet
(32:22) The best and easiest ways to design your lead magnet (no graphic design skills needed!)
(35:59) How to optimize your landing page and your thank you page
(41:22) Tips for choosing a landing page URL and integrating it into your email service provider
(44:39) Why you need to get peer reviews and feedback on your lead magnet
(46:53) Resources for promoting your lead magnet – even if you don’t have a website yet

To help you determine the topic of your lead magnet, there are a few simple questions you can ask yourself. Remember…the purpose of your lead magnet is to help your ICA solve an immediate problem or pain point!

#1: What is the best place to start the conversation with your ICA?
#2: What is the number one question you get asked all the time?
#3: What topic do you feel like you could talk about for hours on end?
#4: What should your ICA be asking you that they are not asking yet?
$5: What is your ICA most afraid of?
#6: What could help your ICA right this minute?
#7: What is something your ICA isn’t expecting from you, yet if you offered it for free, it would knock their socks off?
#8: How can you get your ICA unstuck or out of overwhelm?
#9 What are your ICA’s biggest pain points and/or desires? What would help ease their pain or help fulfill a desire?
#10: What does my ICA need to understand, be aware of or believe, in order to want or need my program, product, or service?

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#689: Incentives That Work: How To Build A Culture Of Excellence In Your Small Business

18 juni 2024 | 25 min

Promoting a work environment where your team feels supported, encouraged, and motivated to grow your business.

Picture this: You – leading a brilliant team that not only meets every expectation you set but exceeds them AND they do it all without feeling overwhelmed or burnt out. Sign me up! While I’m not perfect, I honestly believe that my fabulous team has cracked the code for creating and fostering a culture of growth and excellence for every single member of our team.

My friend, as business owners, our success is directly tied to the performance of our team members. That's why we need to make sure they feel extremely supported, encouraged, and motivated to put their best foot forward each and every day.

From creating incentives to giving consistent recognition and implementing a game plan to prevent burnout – my team has tried it all! So, in this episode, I share exactly how we do it so you can apply it directly to your thriving business.

But what if you don't have a team?! Trust me – whether you only have one other team member, a virtual assistant, or a small team of contractors, these strategies can be applied in so many different ways.

Today, you’ll hear about:

(4:20) How we structure our annual bonuses for each team member
(7:34) Why we have a four-day work week, the holidays we take off, and the value of unlimited PTO
(14:09) The importance of understanding what motivates and lights up your team
(15:25) Tips for encouraging your team to perform without pushing them too hard or creating burnout
(19:49) Advice for promoting a supportive and appreciative work environment

Listen in and take these strategies to your team today! I promise you – your team and your business will uplevel in no time!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#688: How To Break Free From The Fear You Have Around Money with Mel Abraham

13 juni 2024 | 56 min

Understanding your finances, investing like a pro, and reaching the financial freedom you’ve always wanted.

As an entrepreneur, I'm sure you know how important it is to understand your finances. You're the one who's solely responsible for bringing it in every month, and it can be super stressful and confusing, right?!

I'll be honest – when I first started my entrepreneurial journey, I really struggled with my finances. I didn't know how to plan ahead, invest, or make smart financial decisions, and I made a lot of mistakes in those early days. But it doesn't have to be the same for you!

Today, you're in the best hands to learn those skills and much more with brilliant CPA and extremely successful entrepreneur Mel Abraham. He's here to share two super simple yet powerful money concepts he coaches his clients on. And if you haven't heard of his book "Building Your Money Machine," you're in for a treat! It's an incredible resource with practical and actionable steps to help you build a solid foundation for financial success.

Mel also opens up on how he managed an extremely scary cancer diagnosis. It was then that he saw the financial challenges small business owners face and decided to put his principles into his book. My friend, with Mel's wisdom, you can build wealth like never before and finally achieve the financial freedom you've always wanted.

Today, we discuss:

(7:59) How Mel’s cancer journey affected his business
(12:40) Understanding why you might have a fear of making financial decisions
(21:07) The importance of having open conversations about money and having a backup plan
(24:35) Using the “wealth priority ladder” to create a good financial foundation, have priorities, and maximize the returns of every single dollar
(32:35) Tips and tricks for investing your money for financial freedom
(38:03) How to be debt free in your retirement
(44:13) Everything you will learn from Mel’s brilliant book!

Listen in and take control of your finances today! Trust me – this is an episode you don't want to miss.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#687: Calm Amidst Chaos: How To Keep Calm When Things Go Wrong

11 juni 2024 | 14 min

How to avoid having “desperate energy”, making frantic decisions, and being in complete panic mode in your business.

If I had to guess, I would say that you've experienced moments in your entrepreneurship journey where things just didn't go as planned. You know, those launches that don't take off, promos that fail to convert, or your email list subscribers that keep going away? It's incredibly frustrating, and you may be tempted to move on to the next project or pick up the pieces immediately. But hold on! Before you do that, I need you to listen to this episode!

It's completely natural to feel a sense of desperation when things don't go your way, but I’m telling you my friend, you really don't want to get caught up in what I call "desperate energy." This energy can cause you to panic and frantically scramble to find a solution without making a second thought, and it's so not helpful for your business!

Oh, and I've been guilty of this myself, and even my brilliant CEO called me out about it a few months ago. So I know that people don't want to work with someone who has this habit! In today's episode, I share my top advice for avoiding making frantic and desperate decisions for your business when things aren’t going according to plan.

In this episode, I talk about:

3:05: What “desperate energy” really means for your business
4:05: My experience with having desperate energy when I’m stressed out
7:23: Practical strategies for closing revenue gaps in your business to avoid making frantic decisions
11:02: Why you need to stay cool, calm, and confident in your interactions and relationships

Listen in and embrace these tips! I promise you’ll stay cool, calm, and confident in all of your interactions and relationships.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#686: From Anonymous to A-List: How Susie Moore Built Her Business From The Ground Up By Leveraging Media

6 juni 2024 | 57 min

Mastering your media strategy so you can connect directly with your ideal audience, gain credibility, and scale your business.

Imagine if you had the chance to directly connect with your target audience, share your story, your passion, your advice, and really make an impact with your incredible business. Well, what if I told you that is all possible once you know the secrets to an amazing media strategy?

Enter life coach and media strategy extraordinaire Susie Moore! Susie started life coaching as a side hustle, turned it into a full-time gig, and now has one of the most impressive resumes of media publications I've ever seen. We're talking Marie Claire, Business Insider, Forbes – you name it. In this episode, she's here to share how she perfected her media strategy so you can do it, too!

You'll learn how to nail your pitch, secure those media placements, and build the confidence to go after the biggest opportunities. Even if you're unsure if your story is compelling enough to tell, Susie reminds you that you always have value to offer! Plus, she even has a 3-minute intuition hack to help you write a publication that resonates.

Today, we talk about:

(5:37) How Susie turned her 9-5 into a full time gig
(10:35) The power of context in the media and how Susie used it to uplevel her content
(14:49) What media editors and producers are they actually looking for
(17:40) Key elements to include in your media pitch so it stands out from the crowd
(23:47) The importance of collaborating with publications who are aligned with your message
(30:44) Tips for brainstorming life topics to write about (even if you think you don’t have a “compelling” personal story to tell!)
(36:55) Susie’s perspective on the use of AI in media content
(39:34) Advice for finding the confidence to put yourself out there and go after big media opportunities
(45:47) How to become your own PR team

Listen in and get the credibility you and your business deserves!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#685: The #1 Thing You Can Do As An Entrepreneur To Avoid Burnout

4 juni 2024 | 13 min

Turning your FOMO (Fear Of Missing Out) into JOMO (Joy Of Missing Out) so you never feel burnt out again.

Ever feel like you’re just stretched way too thin? Oh, I know I have! As entrepreneurs, it's so incredibly easy to become overextended. We all want to grab every opportunity that comes our way, take on every task, and say yes to every chance we can for more exposure. Trust me my sweet friend, saying yes to everything might seem like the right thing to do at first, but it's a super slippery slope.

Early in my entrepreneurial journey, I used to take every single opportunity I was given because of the fear that I might miss out on something. That's right – I was feeling the dreaded FOMO (Fear Of Missing Out). But, I would get SO burnt out SO quickly! That is, until I eventually realized that most of the things I was doing weren't actually in service of my long-term goals as a business owner.

So, in this episode, I’m here to share my biggest pieces of advice for avoiding burnout, open up about my experiences with it (so you can learn from them, of course!), and share my tips and tricks for prioritizing what's truly most important to you and your business.

Today, you’ll hear about:

2:27: The importance of setting goals for your business and how I set my quarterly and yearly goals
4:06: Advice for knowing when to say “no” to opportunities
9:36: Why you need to get super clear on the season you're in, your values, and your priorities
11:13: Questions to ask yourself that will help define exactly what you want

Listen and get ready to turn that FOMO into JOMO (Joy Of Missing Out)!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#684: Online Operations Playbook: Key Strategies for Success from My Team

30 maj 2024 | 41 min

Streamline your business operations, prevent costly mistakes, and scale faster than you ever thought possible.

One of my favorite compliments we get for our business is when people say, "Your business runs like a well-oiled machine!" It's such a great feeling knowing that all the hard work is paying off and my customers are noticing. The secret? My fantastic Operations Department! They have streamlined everything for the business, saved my team valuable time, prevented costly mistakes, and helped me scale quicker than ever before.

Which is why, in this episode, I'm so excited to introduce you to my brilliant Ops Department – a dynamic duo who makes everything behind the scenes flow seamlessly.

They work on everything from legal and HR to launches, budget structuring, and event management – the list goes on! They’ve shared the five key strategies they use to streamline processes, improve efficiency, and bring my mission and core values to life!

Now my friend, I know that not everyone has (or needs) an entire Ops team like I do, but don't worry – these strategies apply to every entrepreneur and every business, no matter how big or small. Whether you're working alone or with a team, these tips are guaranteed to help you work smarter, faster, and with less stress.

Today, you’ll hear about:

7:14: My team’s step-by-step process for streamlining our business operations through standard operating procedures (SOPs)
17:50: Tips and tricks for leveraging AI to improve SOPs
20:39: How to create a comprehensive spreadsheet/“Program at a Glance” (PAG) for your virtual events
27:11: Why you need a quarterly tool audit to look at value and consolidate your work
29:04: My Ops team’s simple three stage process for mastering interviews

Listen in and learn how to streamline your business operations and transform your hustle into a well-oiled machine.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#683: Lessons Learned: 15 Years of Hard-Earned Entrepreneurial Wisdom

28 maj 2024 | 33 min

How you can apply the lessons I’ve learned over 15 years of entrepreneurship to your growing business.

I'm super excited that you're here today, my friend! Why? Because I just celebrated something very special – 15 years of entrepreneurship! Can you believe it? Over the past 15 incredible years, I've learned more about myself and my business than I ever thought was possible. And I'm ready to share the biggest and most important takeaways I've learned with you right here and right now!

But, I'm only lifting this curtain on one condition! I want you to take away everything I say today and apply it directly to your business so that you can grow, scale, and create the freedom-focused business you've always dreamt of. Because let's face it, even on the hardest days, entrepreneurship beats a 9-5 job every single time.

Trust me – I know firsthand just how difficult entrepreneurship is, but please know that you're not alone! You'll have the best and most challenging days of your life, and I'll be right here to cheer you on every step of the way. So, if you're deep in the trenches or have seen them before, this episode will be one you'll want to put on repeat!

Today, I talk about:

3:43: How I’ve learned to have “thick skin” in entrepreneurship (even though I’m a super sensitive person!)
10:20: Practical tools for managing depression, anxiety, and self-care
16:46: Why you need to be known for and prioritize one niche as an entrepreneur
19:45: Advice for separating business relationships from true friendships
24:02: Tips for maintaining a team, hiring the right people, and having difficult conversations
26:34: Understanding that every challenge you face is happening FOR you

Listen in and keep reminding yourself what you’re working towards. Keep going because freedom is just around the corner, my friend!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#682: Socially-Programmed Anxiety: What Is It and How Is It Affecting Your Definition of Success? With Kara Loewentheil

23 maj 2024 | 64 min

Rewiring your brain to create new beliefs and live the life you want on your terms.

If you know me, you know I’ve always said that being an entrepreneur is 80% about your mindset. The webinars, list building, and funnels can all be taught, but getting your head in the right space is what will truly set you apart as a business owner!

But did you know that as female entrepreneurs, we are actually socially programmed to have more anxiety, more stress, and more self-doubt? This makes it so incredibly challenging to embody that bold and unapologetic mindset. Lucky for you, my guest today is here to help you create brand new beliefs and lead you directly to the life you've always wanted!

In this episode, I sit down with the fabulous Kara Loewentheil, a former lawyer turned master life coach, who literally spends her days helping women rewire their brains for success. Yes, you read that right! Today, we're talking all about hacking your mindset using cognitive change strategies to unlearn those frustrating societal expectations.

Over my 15 years of entrepreneurship, I've changed my mindset around lots of things, like money, my worth, and taking up space. But, even millions of dollars later, I still have a lot to learn. And I'm telling you – I learned so much from this chat with Kara, and I know you will, too!

Today, we discuss:

5:35: What it actually means to be a feminist and how Kara teaches women to liberate themselves and achieve their dream life on their terms
12:19: Tips for releasing the daily societal pressures put on you as a woman
17:54: Why women are socialized to prioritize others' needs over their own (and how this can manifest in motherhood!)
23:03: Being bold with your money as a female entrepreneur
29:49: How to reprogram your brain to stop negative self-talk and build new beliefs
33:40: Advice for overcoming the societal conditioning that leads to guilt, anxiety, and stress in women
37:40: Changing your perspective on time management to be more present in daily life
43:37: The steps women should take to run their businesses boldly, confidently, and courageously
51:01: Why Kara wrote her life-changing book

Listen in and start showing up for yourself in a stronger and more consistent way in every aspect of your life!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

BONUS: Go Against The Grain To Grow Your Business with Gary Vaynerchuk

22 maj 2024 | 66 min

Going against the grain in entrepreneurship, mastering social media marketing, and watching your online business take off with Gary Vee and Jasmine Star.

If you've been putting in the work to grow your amazing online business, you've probably stumbled across the name Gary Vaynerchuk (or Gary Vee!) a time or two. And if you've been working on showing up authentically as an entrepreneur, you've absolutely heard of my dear friend, Jasmine Star.

Well, today is your lucky day because they're both here to share some game-changing wisdom on going against the grain in entrepreneurship and having the confidence to take huge risks for growth.

Gary's unbelievable new book, "Day Trading Attention: How to Actually Build Brand and Sales in the New Social Media World" is just about to hit shelves, and this episode gives you a sneak peek into its brilliance. Think of it like a roadmap for navigating the world of online marketing, content creation, and brand building. Listen, I could rave forever about this book, but in this episode, we're diving into super simple, detailed, and actionable strategies for using social media to grow your business.

Now, social media has grown a lot in recent years, and I have a bit of a love-hate relationship with it. But Gary has been a fantastic resource as I've learned to master social media platforms and become more comfortable posting authentically.

Ready to take your business to the next level? Spoiler alert: you've got to think outside the box, have complete courage, and take unconventional approaches. It's all about getting in the dirt of entrepreneurship and learning to love it, my friends!

Today, you’ll hear about:

(9:20) How going against the grain has helped Gary build his business and his advice for anyone who needs the courage to be unconventional
(16:13) Why you need to embrace and respect “the dirt" of entrepreneurship for long-term success
(21:57) Understanding the three movements in social media: algorithmic, interest-based, and personalized content
(29:09) Overcoming insecurities and fear of regret so you don't miss out on opportunities
(33:14) Gary’s top three actionable strategies for launching your business with social media and ads
(42:52) Mindset shifts for showing up as your full, confident, and non-judgemental self
(48:12) A sneak peak into the amazing practical tips you will find in Gary’s book
(55:06) The importance of finding your niche and creating content that is fun to resonate with your audience

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#681: Mastermind Recap: My Weekend With 6 Top Female Entrepreneurs

21 maj 2024 | 21 min

A behind the scenes look into a mastermind weekend with some of the most brilliant female entrepreneurs I know.

I want you to imagine all of the entrepreneurial goodness that can happen when a group of brilliant powerhouse women come together for a whole weekend just to brainstorm and mastermind their businesses. Sounds unbelievable, right?

Well, I just got back from one of these weekends with a group of fabulous business gals, and let me tell you, it was a game-changer! Trust me my friend, being a part of a group like this will take your business to new heights and give you all the support and motivation your heart desires.

We spent the weekend in a beautiful hotel, chatting in the lobby and sharing our top tips for upleveling our companies. Now, it was strictly business, but we also had a ton of fun! Today, I reveal my top takeaways from the weekend, lift the curtain on exactly how we structured it, and give you all of the tips and tricks you need so you can create your very own mastermind group just like ours!

If you're dreaming of having your own circle of business besties, then this episode is for you.

In this episode, you’ll hear:

4:20: The difference between the way men and women talk about business
7:08: How we structured our mastermind weekend
9:49: Why everyone in the group supported each other despite being in the same niche
13:00: Tips and tricks for planning your very own mastermind weekend!
17:39: The importance of setting a positive tone and solid structure before the meeting

Listen in and get involved with a group or start one of your own now. You and your business deserve to have an incredible and rock-solid support system!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#680: Experiencing Content Creation Burnout? 5 Powerful Strategies I Swear By

16 maj 2024 | 36 min

Reclaiming your valuable time by efficiently and efficiently releasing high-quality content.

If you’re just starting to build your online business, want to be the go-to expert in your field, or simply looking to impress your audience with game-changing tips and tricks, releasing consistent, high-quality content is absolutely crucial!

My friend, creating content is way more than just sharing information. It’s like building a bridge that connects you directly to your audience. I'm telling you – this is such an incredibly powerful tool that holds the potential to literally change lives!

But let's face it, creating SO much content can make you feel super burnt out and extremely frustrated. Coming up with fresh ideas multiple times a week? Yeah, it’s tough stuff. That's why, in this episode, I'm so excited to share the 5 brilliant strategies my team and I have been using for years (I'm talking since the very beginning) for creating content effectively and efficiently.

Whether you're a solopreneur or you have a team, these tips will take your content game to the next level. The best part? Because the content is so streamlined, you get to reclaim your valuable time and that sweet sweet freedom! You’ll walk away feeling more confident and equipped than ever to consistently release fantastic content.

Today, I cover:

3:35: Our top strategies for mastering the art of inspiration, tapping into your creativity, and overcoming mental roadblocks
15:12: My favorite organization tools and management systems for increasing the efficiency of content creation
19:12: Tips and tricks for repurposing your existing content
22:13: How to integrate AI tools into your content process
26:41: Advice for infusing each piece of content with intention and purpose

Listen in and start creating those beautiful connections with your audience!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#679: Strategic Vulnerability: How I Share Online About My Life & Business

14 maj 2024 | 24 min

The motto that’s been encouraging me to be more authentic and vulnerable with my audience.

Have you ever found yourself just about to make a post on social media, but then you stopped to ask: Is this a tad too personal? Maybe a tiny bit cringey? Do I really want to risk oversharing with my loyal audience? Well, my friend, buckle up because this episode is just for you! Trust me – you're gonna want to hit replay on this one.

Let's be honest, being vulnerable and authentic online isn't exactly in my comfort zone. Give me an hour to tell you how to build an email list, embrace your entrepreneurial mindset, or craft an unstoppable digital course any day! But, sharing the details of my personal life online? Now, that's quite the battle. However, I have to say that once I started opening up to my audience on a deeper level, I really felt incredible!

At the end of the day, people want to do business with humans they connect with! Not faceless brands behind a screen. So, in this episode, I reveal how I'm stepping up my online authenticity game, share the brilliant motto that's been my guiding light, and explain why expressing your true self will make you the best leader you can possibly be for your business.

Today, you’ll hear about:

6:47: Why my motto for sharing personal content is "scars over scabs"
12:03: Advice for using your vulnerable “scabs” to connect with your audience on a deeper level
14:24: Understanding that being a great leader is directly tied to being open, sharing life lessons, and embracing imperfections
18:06: How to learn from those who are a few steps ahead of you

Listen in and start being unapologetic online today! Your audience is just waiting to get to know the real you.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#678: Building a Digital Empire: Expert Insights from Nathan Chan of Foundr Magazine

9 maj 2024 | 53 min

Mastering the art of interviewing, optimizing your online marketing, and scaling your business in record time with Nathan Chan.

Let me ask you something – have you ever listened to a podcast episode or live speech that left you so incredibly inspired and motivated that you felt like you could take on the world? Well, that's exactly how I feel every single time I listen to my guest today speak!

I'm not exaggerating when I say that today's episode is one of my absolute favorites to date! Trust me my friend, as a business owner, you're going to be absolutely obsessed with the amount of wisdom that this conversation holds.

I'm talking about the one and only Nathan Chan, the genius entrepreneur behind Foundr. Nathan started Foundr as a small digital magazine, and it quickly became one of the most valuable tools with so many fantastic resources made specifically for entrepreneurs like you and me.

In this episode, Nathan lifts the curtain on all the highs and lows he experienced while building his amazing brand. From resilience to creativity to a passionate pursuit of his vision, Nathan's journey is truly a mini-masterclass in entrepreneurship.

The best part? He's an incredible interviewer who has interviewed over 100 billionaires! And lucky for you, he also shares his tips and tricks for mastering these high-level interviews.

Today, you’ll hear about:

5:16: Why Nathan started Foundr and how he overcame his biggest challenges
14:31: How to make money, expand, and diversify with a digital magazine
21:00: All of the lessons learned from Nathan’s brilliant podcast guests
30:15: Tips and tricks for finding a perfect product-market fit
34:31: Why the most successful founders aren’t afraid of messiness or obsession
37:32: Nathan’s expert advice for crafting the perfect interview
41:03: The most needle-moving strategies for your online marketing

Listen in and then listen in again to really soak up all the juicy insights and take some notes! I promise you – it's that good.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#677: Why Friendships Are Crucial In Entrepreneurship

7 maj 2024 | 20 min

Here’s why your female friendships are your most valuable asset as a woman in business.

Today, I just want to drop in and share a little heart-to-heart with you. I know how often it can feel like entrepreneurship is an entirely solo journey. But I'm here to tell you this doesn't have to be the case! I truly believe that having a fabulous circle of girlfriends is the key to thriving in your business, having every resource at your fingertips, and simply maintaining your sanity.

Your besties are your rock when the going gets tough, your cheer squad during your milestones, and the best asset you could ask for when you need advice. Seriously, finding your group of fellow women in business who fully understand the hustle of entrepreneurship will totally transform your perspective on the industry.

I can't even begin to express how much I cherish my friendships. From those late-night voice memo pep talks to celebrating every win, no matter how small, and having deep conversations about our challenges – these moments mean everything to me. So, of course, I want these moments for you too!

In this episode, I open up about how and why I'm prioritizing my friendships, even when it feels impossible to juggle with my busy schedule. Consider this your loving reminder to give your friendships the attention they deserve!

Today, I talk about:

4:22: The importance of open communication and active effort in your friendships
9:26: Tips for prioritizing check-ins and initiating conversations
12:29: How to separate (or combine!) business and non-business friendships
13:47: A super fun exercise for staying connected with your closest friends!
17:01: An invitation to be more intentional with your friendships

Listen in because these connections mean more than just business – they're about support, happiness, and genuine care. You and your business deserve it!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#676: Mini-Training: How To Plan Out Your Promo Calendar & Revenue For The Year

2 maj 2024 | 55 min

BE SURE TO SNAG THE FREE TEMPLATE THAT GOES HAND IN HAND WITH THIS EPISODE! You can grab it here!

My proven step-by-step strategy for planning out your entire promotional calendar and reaching your huge revenue goals!

Picture this: you kicking off your year with a crystal clear vision of what's possible for your business and a rock-solid plan to reach those revenue goals? It's not too good to be true, my friend! In fact, it's totally possible by simply planning your promotional calendar and mapping out your revenue goals a year in advance. I’m telling you – these are 2 business growing staples that will have you scaling year after year after year!

Now, I know it can be overwhelming to plan so far ahead, especially if numbers aren't your thing (I'm pointing to myself here). But as an entrepreneur, I can't emphasize enough how important it is to understand every aspect of your business, and revenue planning is a massive part of what will make you successful.

Want to know how my team gets so much done in a single year and why we continue to hit our big goals? It’s because we plan for them! I know it's only May, but trust me – it's never too late or too early to start planning.

So, grab a pen and paper or open that note-taking Google doc because, in this episode, I'm guiding you through a step-by-step strategy to create a fully-fledged promo calendar and revenue plan.

Today, I cover:

7:56: Questions to ask when reflecting on your last 12 months
9:20: A simple exercise for brainstorming your big ideas
10:35: How to get super intentional when designing your next year
12:45: Advice for deciding on your non-negotiables
15:49: A tangible guide for planning your revenue goals and identifying opportunities for more profit
25:55: The importance of understanding your numbers
30:58: Why you should never focus on the ‘how’ in your planning stage
33:35: Tips for taking a step back to audit, check, and prune your draft
38:15: Making informed decisions about your promotion and launch calendar
44:20: How to break down your finalized yearly revenue projections by quarters

Listen in and check out my revenue planning template freebie, pulled directly from my own business. Apply it to yours today and you’ll be thanking yourself in the future!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#675: What To Do When You Launch At The Same Time As Your Peers

30 april 2024 | 19 min

Avoiding distractions, comparisons, and insecurities during a launch.

Ever found yourself in a situation where you put a massive amount of effort into creating an amazing digital course or webinar and have marketed it brilliantly, only to realize that everyone around you is launching a similar offer at the EXACT same time? If this has happened to you, you know just how overwhelming it is!

Well, my friend, I completely understand this feeling because it literally just happened to me when I launched my Subscribed Bootcamp! I felt like every heavy hitter in the industry was launching their own bootcamp at the same time, and honestly, I panicked. But I know now there was no reason to! Trust me – it’s a natural feeling, but you can't let your insecurities or urges to compare yourself to your peers get the best of you!

I've never talked about this topic on the podcast before, but it's an important one. In this episode, I walk you through how I've managed these feelings through more than a few of my launches! I also share some tips on avoiding distractions during a launch and using this friendly competition to your advantage.

In this episode, I cover:

4:54: Why you should always question and revisit your first thoughts
7:21: Tips for avoiding distractions and comparisons during a launch
11:09: How to use healthy competition to light your fire
12:53: My inversion problem solving exercise
15:33: Deciding on your unique abundance motto

Listen in and stay focused on YOUR goals, YOUR strategies, and YOUR audience. Remember, your biggest enemy during a launch is a pesky inner critic!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#674: The Psychology of A Successful Entrepreneur With Love Life Expert & Confidence Coach, Matthew Hussey

25 april 2024 | 57 min

Here’s why upleveling your love life will uplevel your business with Matthew Hussey!

Do you ever dream of a reality where you're absolutely killing it in your career and your love life? Well, it's not just a dream anymore! I've got an absolutely brilliant guest joining me today with tons of expert tips and incredible guidance to help you achieve both!

Matthew Hussey is a love life genius, a New York Times bestselling author, and the mastermind behind the #1 love advice YouTube channel with over half a billion views! Trust me, you're in for a treat!

I know you might be thinking, "Why should I care if I'm not single?" Well, my sweet friend, this episode isn't just about finding love. We're diving deep into the psychology of entrepreneurship and how the same qualities that make you successful in love will make you successful in business.

Matthew opens up about his journey from shy guy to multimillion-dollar entrepreneur and how confidence and vulnerability are the keys to personal and professional growth. When you've got both love and success on your side, there's no limit to what you can do!

Plus, whether you're flying solo, feeling stuck in your relationship, or needing a confidence boost, Matthew's new book "Love Life: How to Raise Your Standards, Find Your Person, and Live Happily (No Matter What)'' has got you covered!

Today, you’ll hear about:

4:22: Why Matthew was initially passionate about helping people find love
12:53: Advice for combatting imposter syndrome, embracing self-acceptance, and stepping into your confidence
22:59: The importance of being vulnerable in your personal and professional life
27:37: Matthew’s biggest lessons learned from building his multimillion dollar business
32:48: The similarities between being successful in entrepreneurship and being successful in love
39:12: Why Matthew wrote his new book

Listen in and pre-order your copy of Matthew's book now. Get ready to uplevel your love game AND your business game today!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#673: My Entrepreneur's Bookshelf: Must-Read Books for 2024

23 april 2024 | 19 min

Why I believe my 2024 bookshelf will expand my knowledge, spark creativity and boost my mental health.

Want to know a super simple yet super effective secret to success as an entrepreneur? Of course, you do – it's reading as much as possible! Believe it or not, reading books isn't just a fabulous way to expand your knowledge, but it will also help unleash your creativity, uplevel your business wisdom, and boost your mental health!

Now, I'm not going to recommend the usual business or finance books that you've probably already read. Instead, my sweet friend, I have some exciting titles that are on my personal reading list for 2024, passed along to me by my brilliant friends and incredibly successful peers. I'm on a mission this year to broaden my perspectives and learn a ton of new things beyond my entrepreneurial niche. And, of course, I also love a light beach read in between!

I know that you're extremely busy building your business, and finding the time to do anything within your packed calendar can be a challenge. That's why I also share my top tips and tricks to help you make reading a daily habit, no matter how chaotic your schedule may seem.

In this episode, you’ll hear:

1:16: Tips for finding time to read within your busy schedule
5:54: A book for building your business that can thrive without you being directly involved
8:33: A book for mastering self-improvement and the ability to learn new skills
10:08: A book that highlights the importance of courage and managing expectations
12:27: A book for transforming self-sabotage into power and building your emotional intelligence
15:09: My favorite fun reads and page-turning biographies

Listen in and get ready to learn all about your next literary obsession! I’ll be there flipping pages right alongside you.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#672: The One Word That Led Me to Have My Best Year in Business Yet

18 april 2024 | 20 min

A simple strategy for remembering what you’re working toward in 2024!

Have you ever heard of selecting a personal word of the year? It's like having a roadmap to steer you through your year. Maybe you've even tried it yourself, with words like fitness, peace, or relationships. But, my friend, have you ever considered choosing a word of the year for your business?

Last year, I did this exercise with my team, and it completely transformed the way I see my business. I'm telling you – this word became our guiding light and played a massive role in helping us achieve one of our best years ever! And since every year is unique, we took the opportunity to choose a different word that aligns with our specific goals for this year.

But enough about my business! In this episode, I'm here for YOU. I reveal my top tips, tricks, and strategies to help you dial in on your goals for 2024 and choose a word of the year that aligns with your big dreams. It's time to push the boundaries of what you thought was possible for your business and get crystal clear on what's in store for you!

Today, you’ll hear all about:

3:10: Why ‘unreasonable’ was my company’s word of the year in 2023
7:15: How my team chose our word for 2024
9:54: Three tips for deciding on the word of the year for YOUR business
12:45: A fun and tangible strategy for always remembering who you are and what you’re working towards

Listen and pick your word of the year now! And don't forget to drop me a line on Instagram to make it official.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#671: A Look Inside My Membership: Momentum

16 april 2024 | 49 min

How my exclusive Momentum membership has scaled my business and upleveled my community.

Today's episode is very close to my heart because I’m sharing something with you that has had a massive impact on scaling my business: my exclusive membership program called Momentum. I'm super excited to give you a sneak peek into this fantastic community!

If you didn't know about my membership program before, don't worry! It's probably because it's reserved for students of Digital Course Academy. So, in this episode, I want to lift the curtain and share the details about this incredible membership with ALL of you. Since its launch in 2019, we've been working so hard to fine-tune and perfect the program, ensuring our members receive the best possible content and support.

Now, some of you might be thinking that memberships sound too complicated or too advanced for your community, but trust me, they will work wonders for your business no matter where you are in your entrepreneurial journey. And even if you're not quite ready to start your own membership program, keep this information in mind for later – it will come in handy sooner than you think!

To give you a complete picture of what makes Momentum so special, I've enlisted the help of my fabulous team. You'll hear insights on everything from cultivating our friendly community to our content delivery methods and how we’ve overcome every challenge.

Today, I cover:

5:50: Front end memberships vs. back end memberships
9:40: Behind-the-scenes of my Momentum membership community
13:20: How Momentum is organized within our membership hub
16:28: The 4 deliverables we roll out every month without overwhelming our members
23:29: Why it's possible to create and sell a memberships even with a small team or no team at all
28:07: Strategies for creating a supportive community with empowered members
32:44: Tips and tricks for keeping your retention rate high
37:15: The most common challenges we’ve faced and how my team overcame them

Listen in if you're curious about how memberships work or thinking about starting your own! This episode is packed with value that you won't want to miss.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#670: Excel At 1-on-1 Coaching, Public Speaking, & High Converting Lead Magnets with Mike Pacchione

11 april 2024 | 49 min

Mastering the art of public speaking, crafting irresistible lead magnets, and building a six-figure business with Mike Pacchione.

My friend, my guest today has built an amazing six-figure business working just four days a week with no ads or staff outside of a virtual assistant. I know, it sounds too good to be true! But lucky for you he's here to share all the secrets of how you can do the same.

I’m thrilled to welcome my long-time friend, brilliant speaker, and speech coach extraordinaire, Mike Pacchione! Mike helps executives, athletes, and entrepreneurs just like you deliver top-notch presentations that leave audiences wanting more. Trust me – this guy knows his stuff!

Mike is so good that I hired him two years in a row for some of my biggest presentations. Not only were they extremely successful, but he helped me so feel confident in front of all of those people!

In this episode, Mike shares his expert wisdom on public speaking that will translate perfectly into your online webinars, courses, masterclasses, and even on stage! Plus, he opens up about his transition from a 9-5 employee to a successful entrepreneur. If you've been questioning taking the leap into full-time entrepreneurship, Mike's story will have you ready to jump! Check out his website for some awesome freebies!

Today, we discuss:

5:48: Mike’s fascinating transition from his corporate job into entrepreneurship
16:33: How Mike overcame his entrepreneurial imposter syndrome and overwhelm
23:33: Brilliant strategies for avoiding burnout or overwork while still meeting client expectations
30:31: Tips for crafting irresistible lead magnets and freebies to grow (and keep!) your email list
36:15: Expert advice for speaking on stage

Listen in, get ready to take some notes, and learn from the best of the best. Believe me, this episode is jam-packed with entrepreneurial gold!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#669: The Genius Business Idea I Wish I Had Thought of Sooner

9 april 2024 | 18 min

Standing out in the online marketing world by adapting to the trends and innovating your launch process!

I have some super exciting news to share with you today (drum roll please)! I'm thrilled to announce that I've created a brand new department at my company! I genuinely believe this department will be a total game-changer for my students, the collaboration within my teams, and streamlining content creation.

Now, you may be wondering why YOU should care about the inner workings of MY business. Here's the thing – I always find so much value in learning how other people have built and structured their businesses, especially as online business owners with remote teams.

That's why, in this episode, I pull back the curtain on the structure of my teams and departments so that you can apply what I've learned to your own business. My friend, I want you to have teams that not only help you scale but are also an incredibly valuable asset to your students!

Even if you're just starting your entrepreneurship journey or running a one-person show, I still want you to tune into this episode! It's always a brilliant idea to look ahead and visualize what's possible for you. Trust me – building out your teams is not as far away as it may seem! And if you're looking to restructure your teams, this will be just what you need to hear.

Today, I share:

4:00 A behind the scenes of my teams and departments
6:12 Why I decided to combine my content and community departments
11:53 Advice for building a team that will best support your students
13:58 How to be more intentional and mindful with your team structures

Listen in and start to apply these tips and tricks to your company and community. I’ll be cheering you on as your business takes to greater heights!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

BONUS: Reel Success: How 3 Short Videos and A Quiz Attracted 30K Subscribers with Harley Jordan

8 april 2024 | 48 min

Here’s how Harley Jordan gained over 30,000 new email list subscribers with just three Instagram reels.

My friend, buckle up because today's episode is completely impromptu and a bit out of the box! When I heard there was a woman who managed to gain over 30,000 email list subscribers with just THREE Instagram reels (seriously…can you believe it?!) – I couldn't wait one more minute to pick her brain!

In this episode, I chat with my new friend and incredible social media strategist, Harley Jordan, as she shares all the juicy details about how she came up with this genius idea and the steps she took to make it happen.

But that's not all! Harley also highlights her top social media strategies for growing your business online, how she deals with negative comments, and the secrets of staying motivated and resilient towards your goals. Harley is a true inspiration and a refreshing rule-breaker, so trust me – you won't want to miss our unbelievably valuable conversation!

Today, you’ll hear about:

6:33: Harley’s background as a social media strategist
8:15: Why Harley decided to make her quiz and how she launched it
15:24: Exactly how Harley’s Instagram reels went insanely viral
21:30: Advice for managing negative comments and misunderstandings
24:46: How to leverage a quiz to sell your offer and build your email list
33:04: Tips for optimizing and embracing your social media presence
35:16: Simple strategies for crafting the perfect Instagram reel and staying ahead of trends
39:49: Why quizzes are so effective for scaling your business

Listen in and head over to Harley’s quiz now!

Harley's Website
Harley's Instagram
Harley's 🦊🐈‍⬛🐰🦌♥️ Insta Reels (DM "Quiz")

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#668: Secrets from a Multi-Million Dollar Marketing Team

4 april 2024 | 41 min

Standing out in the online marketing world by adapting to the trends and innovating your launch process!

My friend, I totally understand how hard you’re working to stand out in the marketing world – it has become an incredibly challenging task! I'm lucky enough to have a fabulous marketing team behind me that constantly encourages me to experiment with new strategies and trends when it comes time to launch my programs.

Now, I know you're asking yourself, "Amy, what if I don't have an entire marketing team?" Don't worry! Today, I'm lifting the curtain on how my team and I navigate the ever-evolving marketing trends without feeling overwhelmed or distracted. We've found that staying up-to-date with trends is all about finding a balance between being flexible enough to adapt and innovate, yet staying grounded in those core strategies that always work.

So, in this episode, I share the top four strategies my marketing team uses to continue to test and improve our methods in alignment with what's happening in the industry. The best part? These strategies are (as always) tried, proven successful, and completely applicable to small businesses and solopreneurs. Believe me – this episode is jam packed with value no matter where you are in your journey!

Today, you’ll hear about

4:31: Why mastering data driven refinement will increase your creativity
10:11: Strategies for gathering data as a small business or solopreneur
11:48: Our secret to success “rinse and repeat” method
15:33: How to use a high converting webinar as a sales vehicle
21:02: Tools to simplify your launch process
25:08: Breaking down our 360 marketing mindset
28:53: Tips and tricks for optimizing your off-season

Listen in, pick a strategy (or all four!), and put it into action TODAY. Your business is just waiting to thrive, and I promise this is your golden ticket to success.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#667: Courage to Quit: How Two Weeks Notice Readers Have Found Freedom in Entrepreneurship

2 april 2024 | 26 min

Success stories from “Two Weeks Notice” readers who took the leap into entrepreneurship!

My friend, can you believe it's been an entire year since my book “Two Weeks Notice” was released?! I'm deeply grateful for all of your support and the opportunity to share this journey with you. Watching how my readers have taken massive strides towards their dreams has been so incredibly rewarding.

Now, I didn't write this book for myself – I wrote it just for YOU. I wanted to provide the guidance and strategies I wish I had when I was getting started. And in this episode, I'm sharing some inspiring success stories from my readers that will absolutely light you up!

If you're feeling undervalued in your 9-5, lacking the joy you felt 10 years ago at your job, dreaming of making a career pivot, or know you’re meant for something greater, this episode is perfect for you. Believe me – if these readers can take the leap, I know you can do the same!

If you have yet to start your journey towards personal and financial freedom, I totally understand. Changes like these are scary! But, with "Two Weeks Notice," you have all the tools you need at your fingertips, and I'm here to guide you every step of the way.

In this episode,

4:40: How to DSD (Do Something Different) your way into a whole new life and realize your incredible value
11:03: Why you need to choose your specific exit date from your 9-5
13:38: Actionable advice for finding your unique passion and purpose
18:40: Tips for making the next step in your journey no matter your circumstances

Are you ready to take control of your life? Listen in and get ready to make your biggest dreams a reality – I’m cheering you on!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#666: April Fool’s Takeover: Why Telling Your Story Will Not Help Your Business with Donald Miller

1 april 2024 | 42 min

#665: Trends And Strategies For Membership Businesses In The World Of AI With Stu McLaren

28 mars 2024 | 49 min

Leveraging AI tools to build scalable course memberships with Stu McLaren.

I'm sure you know that AI has become a massive part of our world over the past few years, and it's become so integrated into our daily lives and businesses. For my business, it has been absolutely mindblowing to see just how much it has streamlined processes, increased efficiency, and grown our numbers in so many areas.

My sweet friend, if you want to grow your online business beyond your digital courses, you might want to start thinking about memberships! So, it's good that I brought Stu McLaren back to the podcast to talk all about leveraging AI to build some incredible course memberships.

Stu is truly THE membership genius, and he's my go-to guy when it comes to learning how to create and launch scalable memberships. He has helped countless experts, authors, speakers, and business owners just like you translate their skills into recurring revenue through memberships. Believe me – you literally can’t afford to miss his expert strategies, tips, and advice for crafting your membership!

So, if you're curious about AI, if you've been thinking about creating a membership, or if you already have a membership and want it to continue to thrive, this is the episode for you!

Today, we discuss:

4:28: The ways AI has streamled Q&A processes and content personalization for Stu’s business
12:15: Strategies to make your knowledge stand out from AI tools
16:22: Navigating AI’s impact on course memberships
24:13: How to use AI to free up more of your valuable time
26:23: Why you need to create a course membership for your online business
31:18: The keys to highly successful memberships
39:45 Everything you will learn in Stu's FREE Live Workshop

Listen in and get ready to connect deeper with your beautiful community, scale your business, and free up way more time to spend doing the things you love!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#664: 5 Steps To Creating The Best Version Of Yourself (& Your Business): Part 2

26 mars 2024 | 15 min

My checklist to help you evaluate your progress, stay on track, and reach.

Hey there, my friend! I'm so excited to share with you Part 2 of The Multi-Millionaire Mindset: Five Things to Do for Dramatic Growth. But if you still need to check out Part 1, make sure to do that first, and then come back here for the next step!

In this part, I give you a super simple and incredibly helpful checklist that you can use every quarter to evaluate your progress in those five areas. It doesn't matter whether you're a seasoned entrepreneur or a newbie – this checklist will be your secret weapon for achieving your goals. I've personally used this strategy and checklist in quarterly meetings with my team so I can guarantee it's been proven successful.

But let me tell you, it's not just about checking off boxes on a list. It's all about taking action and making moves towards your goals. That's why I also share some tips and tricks for staying right on schedule and avoiding any distractions.

In this episode, I cover:

2:19: A refresher of the 5 things that you should focus on each quarter for growth
3:22: How my team uses quarterly check-ins to help us reach our goals
6:19: Tips and tools for staying on track
9:12: A checklist for evaluating your progress in personal and business growth
11:57: How to get your hands on my special freebie!

Listen in, and if you know someone who's working hard to build their business and could use this checklist, please don't hesitate to send them my way!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#663: Backstage Pass: My Customer Experience Team Shares Their Top Strategies

21 mars 2024 | 38 min

Building a business free of overwhelm with an efficient customer experience department.

Today, I'm feeling grateful for running my business for the past 15 years! I've had the pleasure of building incredible teams along the way, including my customer experience department. I'm so proud of the crucial role they've played in supporting both our company and our students.

In this episode, I share my CX team’s strategies for managing time, avoiding overwhelm, and handling all responsibilities effectively. Trust me, customer service is not just about responding to emails and questions – it's about using every interaction as an opportunity to showcase your company values and turn one-time buyers into lifelong brand supporters!

Even if you're just starting out, you'll eventually need to build a team as your business grows, and having a CX department that takes care of all the details so you can focus on creating amazing courses, memberships, and masterminds can make all the difference.

You’ll hear all about:

4:07: Hiring people who are cultural fits with a willingness to help in other departments
9:05: How my CX team protects their time, sets daily goals, and avoids email overwhelm
15:47: Tools for automating repetitive tasks
19:37: Tips for using guided responses to increase efficiency and accuracy when replying to customers
24:32: Three customizable AI prompts for crafting thoughtful guided responses
27:52: The importance of having a quality control checklist

Make these strategies your own so that you can build a business free from overwhelm!

Customizable ChatGPT prompts for crafting effective guided responses:

Prompt #1 for if you often see students having issues finding your trainings:

My students occasionally encounter difficulties accessing a weekly live video I host. Can you create a helpful and empathetic response explaining the common steps to troubleshoot this? Please include guidance on finding the video pinned to the Facebook Group… and tell them to make sure they’re connected to WIFI rather than data on their phone if the video is not streaming well. Also, add a note offering further assistance if these steps don't resolve the issue.

Prompt #2 for students who feel behind in your course:

Write a compassionate and constructive response for students who have not been able to start my course and feel behind due to their life circumstances. The response should acknowledge their concerns, and provide suggestions on how to make the most of the course materials. Include the reminder students can go at their own pace because they have lifetime access to the course. Add in advice to download the step-by-step PDFs, and take advantage of personalized support options like the weekly Q&As I host. End the response inviting them to reach out with specific areas they’re struggling with, and tell them I am happy to help further.

Prompt #3 for ensuring students can easily log into your course:

I need a guided response for technical support questions related to my students not being able to log into their course that’s hosted on Kajabi. The response should be easy to understand for non-technical users. Include this login link and steps to check their spam folder for the email containing their password details. Provide an option for them to reply if the problem persists.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#662: The Multi-Millionaire Mindset: 5 Things To Do For Dramatic Growth: Part 1

19 mars 2024 | 19 min

This is the only goal-setting and productivity strategy you will need for 2024!

Can you believe we're almost through the first quarter of 2024?! Time is flying by so quickly, and you might be feeling like you're falling behind on reaching those big goals you set for yourself in January. But don't worry, my friend! I'm here to help you out with the ultimate strategy for goal setting and productivity that will make you achieve more and stress less in 2024!

We all have big dreams at the start of the year, but sometimes, they can fade away quicker than expected. But with the mindset shift I talk about in this episode, your big goals will become more manageable, you'll make business decisions with confidence, and you'll feel like the best version of yourself and the entrepreneur you've always wanted to be in no time!

Plus, I'm going to break down this strategy into two podcast episodes. In this first part, I'll share what the strategy is all about and how I apply it in my own life and business. And in the second part, I'll give you practical tips on implementing it into YOUR own life and business. So be sure to mark your calendar for March 26th!

Today, you’ll hear about:

2:44: A small mindset shift for making your big goals less overwhelming
5:31: Why you need to prioritize internal self-awareness and external self-care
9:44: Strategies for taking inventory of your current experience and the desires for your future self
14:54: A reminder that expansion and massive results don’t happen overnight but you can still enjoy the ride!

Listen in and get going on the journey to achieve your goals TODAY! Trust me, my friend, you'll be looking back at them way quicker than you think!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#661: The Copywriting Tips & Trends You Don’t Wanna Snooze On In 2024 with Laura Belgray

14 mars 2024 | 62 min

My friend, today's episode is truly a treat! My fantastic guest and I go way back (I'm talking 15 incredible years) and she is a real-deal copywriting genius who had her first million-dollar year just as she turned 50. She's here to share all of her proven copywriting tips and tricks and empower you to follow your dreams, no matter your age!

I'm so excited to welcome Laura Belgray back to the show! You might know her as the brilliant mind behind "Talking Shrimp," the co-creator of "The Copy Cure," and the author of the hilariously titled book "Tough Titties" – yes, you read that right!

Now, Laura's not your average award-winning copywriter; she's on a mission to help entrepreneurs just like you find their unique voice and then monetize it. From writing for massive clients to teaching business owners to craft their own game-changing copy, her insights are like a breath of fresh air!

Today, we discuss:

6:28: How to get paid just for being yourself in the online space
14:37: Why it’s never too late to chase your dreams
21:31: Laura’s “relaxed timeline” approach to business
31:52: The wonderful ways Laura’s lifestyle differs from mine
34:10: Advice for finding your version of success on your own terms
38:19: Tips and tricks for writing a killer email subject line
44:50: Copywriting trends, newsletter hacks, and the importance of sounding human in the rise of AI
49:11: Behind-the-scenes of Laura’s book, “Tough Titties”

Listen in because embracing your authentic self doesn’t just feel amazing – it's an absolute gift for your business!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#660: Learn To Love What It Takes To Get What You Want

12 mars 2024 | 20 min

Why embracing the uncomfortable moments will always get you closer to what you want.

I have a feeling that this episode is going to be exactly what you need to hear right now – especially if you're having one of those days where nothing seems to be going right, and you're questioning why you even started your entrepreneurial journey in the first place. Don't worry, my friend, we've all been there!

Before I go on stage to talk to a large audience or have to analyze the numbers for my business, I get super nervous and uncomfortable, too. But, I've learned to lean into and really love these moments of discomfort because they always push me towards taking action, allow me to have life-changing financial freedom, and get me one step closer to my goals!

In this episode, I deep dive into the brilliant idea of “learning to love what it takes to get what you want." I truly believe that this mindset shift has been crucial to my success as an entrepreneur. As you already know, entrepreneurship is a rollercoaster ride with both high highs and low lows. This is all just part of the journey – why not learn to love it?!

Today, you’ll hear about:

3:01: Why you need to shift your mindset about the hard work you’ve been doing
5:56: Tips for prioritizing your focus, passion, and drive in the pursuit of your goals
7:29: Real-life examples of how I’ve learned to love being uncomfortable to get what I want for my business
12:15: A reminder that every day does NOT need to be a great day as an entrepreneur

Listen in and embrace the discomfort because, trust me, that's where all the magic happens!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#659: Your Profitable Webinar Prep Guide: Turn Your Webinars into Revenue Streams

7 mars 2024 | 52 min

Here’s how webinars will take your marketing, sales, and audience connections to the next level.

I know how hard you work to create fabulous digital courses, memberships, coaching modules, and masterminds. So, I also know it's incredibly discouraging when you're struggling to sell these products online. My friend, selling products online is one of the most challenging aspects of owning an online business! And if you’re relying solely on your website's sales page, it can be even more difficult.

Although sales pages are great (I use them too!), they don't always get the job done. The missing piece is often a face-to-face personal touch. And that's where webinars come in! Webinars are one of my favorite tools for combining your marketing with actual valuable content for your audience. Webinars are also perfect for sparking conversations, increasing your sales, building trust, and even growing your email list.

I know – it almost sounds too good to be true! But believe me, the secret success of webinars is backed by real data from my business and from thousands of my students who have created digital courses and sold them through webinars. So, today, I'm lifting the curtain on preparing and perfecting your webinar!

In this episode, I cover:

9:54: Tips for understanding your ideal customer avatars (ICAs)
13:38: My webinar promise from my previous launch of Digital Course Academy
16:20: A step-by-step guide for structuring your webinar
22:21: How to craft exciting and fast-paced slides
27:35: Advice for an efficient Q&A session
31:59: Transforming your webinars from one-time events to lasting resources
40:22: 3 tasks and action items to give to a VA when preparing for a webinar
42:41: What is your pre-webinar ritual?

Listen in and remember that webinars aren't just about selling. They're about connecting, inspiring, and empowering your audience. Trust me, you won't regret giving them a try!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#658: What To Look For When Hiring A Right Hand Person

5 mars 2024 | 30 min

Every lesson, tip, and strategy I’ve learned from my first year with my CEO.

As an entrepreneur, I completely understand that your business is your baby, and you've put in a ton of hard work to build it from scratch. So, the thought of handing over some of your responsibilities and bringing in a CEO can be pretty nerve-racking. But trust me, if you want to make a big impact on the world (which I know you do), you have to let others in and delegate those larger leadership roles!

That's why I want to share with you all the lessons, tips, and strategies I've learned from my first-year with Jaws, my fabulous CEO. Now, before you think hiring a CEO is years away from where you are now, think again! Whether you're just starting out or want to make the leap to the next level, this conversation is for you. I’ve said it before and I’ll say it again – hiring is one of the best decisions you can make for your business!

I don't believe there's any special prize for doing everything by yourself – it’s okay to ask for help. I promise you'll get to where you want to go so much faster with the right support! Just imagine the possibilities when you're free to shine in your zone of genius while your CEO handles the nitty-gritty.

Today, you’ll hear about:

3:43: What is an integrator?
4:48: Being mindful of codependency to avoid emotional distractions
9:08: How to get super clear on the roles and responsibilities for you and your CEO
13:22: Why you have to take a backseat, be a mentor, and let go of your ego
16:11: Tips for developing a healthy relationship with your CEO
21:03: The importance of regular and positive communication

Listen in for all you need to know about making that big hire. Then, stand back and watch your business take off!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#657: Pinterest for Email Growth: Tried & True Strategies with Jenna Kutcher

29 februari 2024 | 45 min

Why Pinterest is the most low-risk way to direct tons of traffic, leads, and sales to your business.

Imagine spending just one hour a week, or even less, to unlock unbelievable amounts of traffic, leads, and sales. My friend, it's all possible when you start to step up your Pinterest game! Pinterest is not your average social media platform, actually, it's not even social media at all (more on that later!) – it's a pure ROI goldmine that's just waiting to be explored.

To help guide us through everything Pinterest has to offer, I'm joined by the amazing Jenna Kutcher. Jenna is a multimillion-dollar business owner, New York Times best-selling author, and truly fabulous Pinterest expert.

Today, she shares her proven strategies to help you effortlessly generate engagement toward your website, blog, sales page, or wherever your heart desires. And the best part? No constant posting, no social media fatigue, and no more fighting a difficult algorithm.

If you're just getting started in entrepreneurship, feel nervous about showing your face on social media to grow your email list, or you're still in the side hustle phase of your business, this episode is for you! With Pinterest, you can organically direct a ton of traffic to your company in the most low-risk way possible.

You’ll hear all about:

4:18: How Pinterest completely shifted Jenna’s business strategy
6:15: The ways Pinterest is different than social media
10:44: Why you should focus on monthly views on Pinterest, not followers
13:00: The anatomy of a perfect pin and the science behind the algorithm
20:41: Tips for reviving an old Pinterest account
23:09: The importance of the captions on your pins
30:20: Understanding the trends on Pinterest
34:18: Everything to know about optimizing your pins for traffic and engagement

Listen in and see for yourself how easy, doable, and economical it is to grow your email list and your business on Pinterest. Trust me, you'll love it!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#656: How To Normalize Fear & Allow It To Propel You Into Action

27 februari 2024 | 16 min

Confronting the root of your fears and making unapologetic business decisions.

Recently, one of my consultants gave me a massive wake-up call by telling me that I'm making all my decisions from a place of fear. Well, no one wants to hear that! At first, this was really hard for me to take in, and to be honest, I felt a lot of shame. But then I realized he gave me this feedback so I could work through it and be the best version of myself possible! Which is, of course, exactly what I want for you!

Now, my sweet friend, fear is one of the most challenging emotions to overcome, especially when you're faced with making big decisions for your business. Will this hurt someone's feelings? Is this going to affect my revenue? Am I going to look foolish in front of my team? But I want you to remember that it's always better to make a million wrong decisions and learn from them than to sit on the sidelines and never take action!

Trust me – I'm right there with you in my journey towards having complete confidence in my business decisions. So, in this episode, I share some strategies that have helped me understand the root of my fear, adjust my mindset, and make those brave unapologetic decisions.

Today, you’ll hear about:

2:02: A key question to ask yourself when you get self-critical or feel shame
5:26: Advice for unlearning the negative stories we tell ourselves
7:33: How to identify and get to the root of your fear-based decision-making
9:19: Why every emotion you feel is completely normal and can be worked on
13:16: Tips for embracing the discomfort and seeing your best results yet!

Listen in if you've been making decisions based on fear, and give yourself permission to move forward, even if you don't have all the answers!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#655: Self-Confidence vs. Self-Worth & How It Determines The Level Of Your Success with Jamie Kern Lima

22 februari 2024 | 49 min

Tuning into your intuition, trusting yourself, and taking your business to new heights with Jamie Kern Lima

Today, we're not talking about your typical marketing strategies, growing your email lists, or crafting digital courses. No, my friend, today we're talking about something even more important for you and your business – your self-worth! I know, I know, this topic is a little different, but trust me, upleveling your self-worth will create that rock-solid foundation for taking your business to new heights.

If you feel like you've hit a ceiling in your business despite all of your hard work, a low self-worth might be acting as an invisible barrier. But don’t worry! I’ve invited the best of the best to help you out. My fabulous guest today, Jamie Kern Lima, believes that doubling your self-worth can actually double your net worth. I like those numbers!

Jamie is the same incredible woman who created IT Cosmetics from her living room and later struck a billion-dollar deal with L'Oreal. So, she knows what she's talking about! And let me tell you, when I realized that self-worth was THIS important, it was a total game-changer for me and my business.

We also touch on Jamie's new unbelievable book, "Worthy," which is full of so many juicy tips and tricks that will truly change the way you walk through life.

In this episode, we discuss:

10:55: The difference between self-confidence and self-worth
21:14: Strategies Jamie used to overcome her lowest self-worth moments
30:09: How to know if you’re in “survival mode” and the impact it has on your business
34:21: Advice for tuning into your intuition, trusting it, and embracing your most authentic self
36:37: Everything you can expect when you dive into “Worthy”

Listen in because everything becomes possible when you believe you're enough. Your dreams, ambitions, and goals all align with your self-worth!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#654: 5 Female Influencers & Entrepreneurs Who Inspire Me To Be Bolder

20 februari 2024 | 27 min

Lessons I’ve learned from 5 incredible businesswomen who happen to be very different from me.

One of the most beautiful parts of entrepreneurship is the opportunity to connect with so many amazing people from all walks of life with all kinds of perspectives. You might come across someone completely different from you and you don't necessarily agree with everything they say – but the way they show up in their life and for their business is somehow intriguing and inspiring.

My friend, these are the types of people that you can truly learn the MOST from! That's why, in this episode, I'm doing something a little different – I'm sharing 5 incredible female entrepreneurs and influencers who have made me feel uncomfortable in the best way possible. Because I believe that the most significant growth comes from moments when you're uncomfortable.

Each of these fabulous women are so different from me personality-wise, but they've all pushed me to make bolder decisions, take risks, and be an all-around badass entrepreneur. Honestly, what more could you want?

In this episode, I highlight:

5:36: How Leila Hormozi embraces vulnerability, boldness, and inspires confidence in others
9:32: Lauryn Bosstick's unapologetic and authentic approach to building a brand, despite being in an industry that can be superficial
13:29: The way Codie Sanchez shares business strategies and real-world examples to help others build businesses
17:21: Reese Witherspoon's ability to transform her acting career into a successful business model
19:43: The teachings of Dr. Anita Phillips on the importance of embracing and nurturing emotions rather than suppressing them with the help of your community

So, listen in and get ready to push yourself to be the best version of yourself you can be!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

BONUS: New Gmail & Yahoo Email Authentication Requirements For Online Marketers with Alyssa Dulin

19 februari 2024 | 38 min

An urgent message for anyone who markets their business online – which includes you!

I'm here today with a super important bonus episode you literally can't afford to miss! My friend, if you're listening to this podcast, I know you're working incredibly hard to market your business online, so listen up.

The email deliverability systems of Gmail and Yahoo are undergoing some major changes. This means your beautifully crafted marketing emails might not be hitting your customer's inbox! But don't worry, I've called in an expert to help us all stay ahead of the game.

My guest, Alyssa Dulin, is the head of deliverability at Convertkit and sends over 2 billion emails a month! So, you can rest assured that we're in the best hands possible!

In this episode, she covers everything you need to know about email deliverability: from what it is and why it's so crucial to fully understanding the latest changes with Gmail and Yahoo, and most importantly, how you can navigate through all of this without getting sent to "Gmail jail". (But even if you do, Alyssa has tips for getting out right away!)

Today, we discuss:

5:24: Why email deliverability is so important
7:19: Breaking down the major authentication changes happening with Gmail and Yahoo
12:46: Tips for reducing the amount of clicks on the new “one-click unsubscribe button”
15:41: How to avoid email spam complaints and tools for “list bombing” prevention
27:43: Steps to take if you get put in “Gmail jail”

Listen in, and be sure to implement everything you learn today right now! Your inbox and your business depend on it.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#653: A Proven, Profitable Strategy To Mastering Live Events For Course Creators with Darnyelle Jervey Harmon

15 februari 2024 | 53 min

Your step-by-step guide for hosting virtual live events and making millions with Darnyelle Jervey Harmon.

As an entrepreneur, you've probably attended a couple of live events, and sometimes, you might even feel the itch to host one yourself. But planning the entire thing can feel like a lot of work, right? Well, what if I told you that you could host your very own live event, plan it with ease, and make millions in sales, all without leaving the comfort of your home? The secret? Virtual live events!

I'm so excited to introduce you to Darnyelle Jervey Harmon, who is the best of the best when it comes to hosting million-dollar live events. She started out just like many of you, working a 9-5 and turning her side hustle into a million-dollar business. And she did it all primarily through hosting these virtual live events.

With virtual live events, you can turn a few clicks into big sales, have your offer flying off the digital shelves, and bring together an incredible community. Darnyelle shares her step-by-step strategy for onboarding tons of new students without breaking the bank or your sanity.

And to my solopreneur friends, it's not about the number of attendees; it's about the quality of your engagement. So, even with a smaller audience, your impact can be life-changing!

In this episode, you’ll hear all about:

5:04: What exactly does a virtual live event showcase?
10:33: Breaking down the “run of show” for your virtual event
17:59: Key factors to consider before you start planning your event
22:05: Strategies for encouraging meaningful audience interaction
24:45: How to get your ideal customer to sign up and attend your event
33:20: Designing a system to ensure everything runs smoothly from start to finish
37:26: The metrics you should be tracking outside of sales
40:49: Tips for effectively following up with attendees after the event

So, listen in and start envisioning your virtual live event today! Put your plan together, choose a date, and just watch your sales soar.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#652: How Couple’s Therapy Gave Me Business Advice

13 februari 2024 | 25 min

How my time at couples therapy inspired me to improve my business.

I bet you didn't think a couples therapy retreat could provide some super valuable insights on improving your online business? I know it sounds crazy, but hear me out. Hobi and I recently attended a 4 day, totally unplugged couples therapy retreat and it was absolutely incredible!

Now, you might be thinking, "Amy…you and Hobi have a great relationship – why therapy?" Well, we wanted to take our already good relationship to the next level! And, my sweet friend, striving for greatness in both your personal and professional life is always a wonderful idea.

But let's be honest, it takes a ton of effort, vulnerability, and hard work! So, in this episode, I share some practical tips, tricks, and takeaways from our couples therapy retreat that you can apply directly to your business to take it from good to great.

Today, I discuss:

3:43: What happened during our time at the retreat
7:37: Practical strategies for playing full out in your life and your business
10:40: Why you should always be looking for improvement
14:29: How to get a complete buy-in from your partner
18:24: My biggest takeaway from couples therapy

Listen in and start putting in some of that extra TLC for yourself and for your business! Because, there’s no better time than NOW to uplevel your life.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#651: Gutsy Entrepreneurship: How To Nurture Community For Yourself & Your Business with Community-Building Expert, Natalie Franke

8 februari 2024 | 56 min

Building a supportive and thriving community for you and your small business with Natalie Franke.

My friend, you and I both know that entrepreneurship can get pretty lonely at times. But, lucky for us, having a community can be as small as two people who connect and support each other. And, let's face it, the pandemic taught us all about the importance of connection, both online and in-person.

Being a part of a community is so much more important for small business owners than you might think! Community helps us keep going even when things get tough and allows us the opportunity to learn from an array of wonderful people. Plus, science has literally shown that we thrive the most when we have supportive people around us!

That's why I'm excited to introduce you to my guest today, Natalie Franke. She's a community-building mastermind and the Head of Community at Flodesk. Natalie has helped thousands of small business owners cultivate communities, and today, she's here to share her expertise with you.

But, we acknowledge that stepping into a community can be a bit intimidating, which is why we also chat about Natalie's fabulous book, Gutsy. It's your guidebook to uncovering the unapologetic courage within you and building up the confidence to make your unique impact on this world.

In this episode, we discuss:

10:11: Why community is an entrepreneur's secret to success
16:05: The inspiring story behind Rising Tide Society
22:38: Tips for tapping into a community to fuel your small business and your emotional wellbeing
28:37: The first steps for getting involved in a community
32:17: How to conquer any anxiety or negativity around online communities
41:27: Advice on taking a leap toward your dreams, shaking off fear, and making the change you desire

Listen in because a big, beautiful community is out there just waiting for you to find them. And I'm here to cheer you on every step of the way!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#650: $100 Million Dollar Leads: My 3 Takeaways From Alex Hormozi’s Latest Book

6 februari 2024 | 25 min

Grow your email list through strong leads, automation, and mastering the art of building clientele.

Have you ever read a book and felt like you just had to share everything you learned with everyone you know?! Well, that's exactly how I felt while reading Alex Hormozi's new book that everyone in the business world is raving about $100 Million Leads. If you haven't heard of Alex before, let me tell you, he's the real deal - a hugely successful entrepreneur, investor, and author of 3 best-selling books!

So, why am I recommending this book to you? Because, my friend, I know you're working super hard on growing your email lists, and what better way to learn than from the best in the game? This book is all about how Alex has mastered the art of building clientele and gathering leads, ultimately turning his standard fitness business into the incredible life he has today.

Whether you're just starting out, working on your side hustle, or aiming to finally hit that million-dollar mark, these tips are guaranteed to help you out. That's why, in this episode, I'm sharing some of my favorite takeaways from Alex's book about automating and scaling your business through solid leads.

Today, you’ll hear about:

2:15: Every reason why if Alex can do it, you can too!
5:24: Alex's Core Four lead generation strategies
10:14: Tips for maximizing online content creation and nurturing leads
12:43: Examples, tricks, and processes to keep up your content creation momentum
18:07: Alex's golden give-to-ask ratio rule

Listen in and dream big, my sweet friend! Because Alex's insights can get you to your goals, no matter where you're starting from. And trust me – I’m only scratching the surface of this game-changing book, so be sure to get yourself a copy and dive in deeper!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#649: My Email Marketing Makeover: 3 New Strategies I’m Trying This Year

1 februari 2024 | 39 min

Three practical strategies I’m implementing into my email marketing strategy for 2024.

I don't know about you, but I feel like now is the perfect time to freshen up my email marketing strategies. I've been doing this for a while now, and I know that what has always worked for me won't necessarily work forever. My friends, change and evolution are wonderful things!

Last year was my most successful year yet, and you know what made the difference? I stepped out of my comfort zone and tried new things, even if they scared me a bit. That's why, in 2024, I'm fully adopting this mindset and trying out three brand new strategies to grow my email list.

Usually, I like to have all the details sorted out before sharing them with you. But this time, I'm inviting you to join me in real-time for this exciting marketing experiment! In this episode, I'm lifting the curtain on how I'm implementing these tactics into my marketing strategy to take my engagement, email list numbers, and sales to the next level.

Today, you’ll hear about:

5:04: Why I’m such a strong believer of consultants and coaches
8:14: The ways I’m optimizing my podcast and website to prioritize their growth
14:27: My plans to revamp my newsletter and create a more personalized experience
23:18: 5 strategies I’m using to boost my email list engagement
31:03: The importance of data-driven experiments and keeping your audience in mind when testing

Listen in and make this year your year of evolution and shaking things up! It's time to grow those email list numbers and reach your most profitable year yet.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#648: Age Is Just a Number: Why You Can Still Find Success In Your 40s, 50s And Beyond

30 januari 2024 | 27 min

Here’s why it’s never too late to kickstart your side hustle and build your dream life.

I hear way too many of my older Digital Course Academy students worry that they're too late to the game, are discouraged by their age, or think they're too far behind to ever catch up.

Well, here's the truth, my sweet friend – age is just a number, and you're never too old to start! In fact, some of the most successful entrepreneurs start a little later because, let's face it, life experience is a total game-changer.

Take it from me – on my 47th birthday, I woke up feeling so lucky and appreciative of my maturity, the wisdom I've gained, and my capacity to care for myself and my business. As I get older, I'm also getting smarter, stronger, and I feel the best I have in years.

So, if you're thinking of starting a new career, you're an empty nester, or looking for a new passion project in your retirement, I have some great news for you: you can make that leap today!

In this episode, I dive into:

4:30: Real life proof that age is just a number
9:38: How to avoid comparing yourself to younger generations
13:33: Why you need to prioritize feeling your very best
17:06: Reframing your negative thoughts as positive mantras and mottos
20:18: The true value of an older voice in high level rooms

Listen in and get ready to keep learning new things and facing new adventures, no matter how old you are!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#647: Actionable Steps To Manage Your Money Like A Boss with Tiffany Aliche, The Budgetnista

25 januari 2024 | 50 min

How to get ahead with your small business finances to maximize your business success.

If I could give you one piece of advice based on my past regrets, it's to get financially educated early on in your business. Trust me, my friend, understanding how to play the game of business finances will make things so much easier for you further down the line!

But, I know how scary and overwhelming talking about money can be, so I've brought in an expert to make things a whole lot easier – Tiffany "The Budgetnista" Aliche. Not only is she a fabulous financial educator, she's also a New York Times bestselling author, star of Netflix's "Get Smart with Money," and co-host of the incredible podcast “Brown Ambition”. She's here to share her step-by-step guide on building wealth unapologetically for you and your small business.

Tiffany knows that your money is the backbone of your business, and if your financial flow is even a little bit off, you might be setting yourself up for trouble. That's why in this episode, we're talking about everything (and I mean EVERYTHING) from budgeting to saving to investing for your small business!

Today, we dig into:

4:30: The difference between financial fullness and financial freedom
5:55: Simple tips for beginners in business budgeting
10:01: Why you need to save money just like squirrels save acorns
14:00: The importance of your personal and business credit score
19:01: Advice for getting started in investments
28:17: Everything you need to know before making your side hustle a full time gig
32:31: How to separate your business and personal bank accounts

Listen in and start prioritizing your business finances TODAY. Your business deserves it!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#646: It’s Time To Quit: 4 Steps To Quit Your Job & Be Your Own Boss

23 januari 2024 | 27 min

A step-by-step guide for leaving your 9-5 and starting your thriving online business.

Have you been dreaming of ditching the 9-5 grind and turning your side hustle into a full-time gig? Or maybe you're finally ready to go all-in with entrepreneurship? If that sounds like you, you're in the right place!

I totally get it, my friend – taking that first step can be super intimidating, but don't worry, I'm here to help. Today, I'm sharing my tips and strategies to give you the courage and the strength to make your transition.

These are the exact steps I took when I left my job to start my online business, and trust me, there's nothing more rewarding than being your own boss and living life on your terms.

This step-by-step guide is pulled straight from my book, Two Weeks Notice, and is all about putting in your notice, preparing the launch of your business, and 'unbossing' yourself. The best part? You don't need any experience or resources to get started!

Tune in for:

5:01: Why you need to schedule your exit/start date
8:27: A checklist of actions to take during the "runway" phase of starting your online business
11:52: Tips for putting yourself out there online through social media, a podcast, a blog, etc.
16:53: The best way to hold yourself accountable when getting started
20:10: How to give your notice without burning bridges

Listen in and start the first day of the rest of your life as a successful and thriving entrepreneur. You deserve it, my friend!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out.

#645: How To Message Your Digital Product Or Service To Instantly Sell

18 januari 2024 | 40 min

Simple strategies for writing irresistible copy that helps sell your product instantly.

My friend, I know your goal as an online business owner is to attract as many people as you can to your life-changing product. And believe me, you can't do that without some killer copywriting skills – or the text and words that sell your product and inspire action. Having an incredible offer is fantastic, but selling it can be tricky if your audience isn’t drawn to your sales page.

I've successfully launched Digital Course Academy so many times, but I continue to tweak my copy frameworks to get even better results than before! So, even if your product has been in the market for years, there's always room for adjustments to align with industry trends or the evolving needs of your audience.

Today, I'm sharing some super easy strategies I've tried and tested to boost your messaging game and talk to your audience on a human level – without any of that fancy language and jargon no one understands.

Whether you're writing emails, social media posts, or copy for your website and sales page, these tips will help you create content that people will love!

In this episode, I share:

4:29: How to clearly define the problem your offer solves
6:21: Simple tips for writing personalized, intimate, and effective sales copy
12:12: A real life example of how to use a statistic in your messaging
16:46: The two frameworks my team uses to write copy in the right place at the right time
26:58: Why you should be testing and updating sales copy in real-time during launches
29:57: Tips and strategies for writing for social media and email

Listen in and get ready to sell your product instantly with these impactful copywriting tips. Soon enough, you'll be a pro at writing content that your audience can't resist!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#644: You Are Your Niche: How To Stand Out In A Saturated Industry

16 januari 2024 | 26 min

Here’s why there’s always enough room for you in a saturated market.

As an entrepreneur, I bet you've heard about market saturation a million times. Well, we’re talking about it some more today, BUT we’re focusing on reframing your emotions and feelings around it. Because trust me sweet friend, with the right mindset, you can succeed in any market, no matter how saturated it may seem!

So, why am I talking about this? I see many hopeful students in Digital Course Academy who hit the brakes because they feel like the market is just too crowded for them. But, let me tell you, that's simply not true – and I have proof!

When I started as a social media manager nearly 15 years ago, it felt like every other person I talked to was doing the exact same thing as me. But, I didn't let the noise of oversaturation get to me, and I was able to grow the business I have today. And I know you can do it too!

In this episode, I’m diving into:

3:44: Questions to ask yourself that challenge the idea that the market is too saturated
5:24: Math that proves making sales is all about honing your marketing skills
12:20: Tips for embracing what makes you unique and attracting your ideal audience
15:23: How I focus on my niche rather than worry about a saturated market
19:14: Reminders to help you break free from this false narrative

Listen in and kick off your dream business. Remember, the market may be saturated, but your uniqueness and what you bring to the table are just waiting to shine through!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#643: Behind the Scenes: 5 Strategies My Community Team Uses for Empowering Students and Streamlining Operations

11 januari 2024 | 41 min

Grab the freebie for this episode by heading here!

Tips, tools, and strategies for building the most engaged online community.

When you're building your online business, you have such a special opportunity to connect with your community on a personal level. I truly can't tell you how much joy and pride I feel in building my own community. It's so gratifying and I hold it very close to my heart, so of course, I want you to have the same experience!

If you've been dreaming of transforming your audience into a thriving community, this episode is perfect for getting started! In my business, I have an entire team dedicated to my community. Sylvia, Brittani, and Megan are simply amazing, and they have so kindly shared their top 5 strategies for keeping up with and using community engagement to grow and improve your business.

And don't worry if you're a team of one or just starting out in entrepreneurship! These behind-the-scenes strategies are super versatile and adaptable, so they'll work for you no matter where you are in your business journey.

In this episode, I discuss:

4:45: The art of calendar creation and batching to foster a more engaged community
13:01: Strategies for optimizing your live interactions with students
18:08: The importance of developing deep relationships with students and how we keep track of their success stories
22:09: Advice for implementing an advisor program to provide diverse perspectives and support during launches
24:38: Tips and tools for collecting and analyzing student feedback
31:25: How to track data and metrics to make informed business decisions

Remember, my dear friend, your community is truly the heart and soul of your business. So listen in and start getting the most out of the fantastic people and community you've built with your incredible gifts!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#642: How We’re Increasing Profit Margins This Year and How You Can Too!

9 januari 2024 | 29 min

Optimize your future launches by getting intentional about your profit margins.

Buckle up, my friend, because today we're diving into all things numbers and how to increase your profit margins! I know, I know, it's definitely a bit daunting when you’re first getting started, but it’s one of the most important things you can do!

With a bit of practice and dedication, you'll be on track to use your profit margins to better understand and scale your business. After all, it's your profit margin that allows you to pay yourself more, reward your team, and invest back into your business.

In this episode, I share the four key things my team focuses on to maintain our profit margin (if we're happy with it) or increase it. I want you to steal these techniques and tools for yourself so you can make the most intentional decisions and plan for future launches!

Today, I cover:

2:48: What exactly your profit margin is and how to choose your benchmark
8:49: Tips for budgeting and planning for future launches to maintain a healthy profit margin
14:25: Advice for making intentional expense decisions that align with your business goals
16:05: Why you need to be reviewing your recurring expenses
20:14: The importance of being transparent with your team about numbers

Listen in and remember, if your profit margins aren't where you want them to be, it's absolutely okay! We're all constantly learning and growing, and you're already on the path to bettering yourself and your business.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#641: Podcasting Secrets & Strategies For Dominating The Charts with Hala Taha, Founder Of YAP Media

4 januari 2024 | 44 min

How LinkedIn can elevate your podcast and your business with Hala Taha.

If you're listening to the Online Marketing Made Easy show, I'm guessing you're a fan of podcasts, right? If you've ever thought about starting a podcast or wanted to leverage LinkedIn to grow your podcast and business, this is the perfect episode to get started. And I'm telling you – this conversation is not just for all of you; I also found it incredibly valuable for me and my podcast!

Enter Hala Taha, the fabulous founder YAP Media, the host of the Young and Profiting podcast, and massive LinkedIn influencer. I've recently been working with Hala and her podcast network, and it's been such a blast!

Hala's a natural go-getter who left her corporate job to follow her entrepreneurial dreams. Now, she's constantly topping the Apple Podcast charts and working with the biggest and brightest in the online space.

We talk about the LinkedIn strategies she uses to grow her business and her podcast. She's absolutely mastered the LinkedIn algorithm and is sharing all of her publishing and engagement hacks with you!

In this episode, you’ll hear about:

4:09: When Hala knew it was time leave the corporate world and dive into entrepreneurship
7:40: Advice for starting a side-hustle podcast
11:08: Strategies for consistently ranking as a top podcast
13:44: Common mistakes for both newbies and seasoned podcasters
18:58: How and when to start monetizing your podcast
24:10: Creating a podcast network
26:06: The biggest challenges Hala faced when scaling her business
30:18: Tips for boosting your LinkedIn audience and engagement
33:52: Why it’s never too late to start your podcast!

Listen in, my friend, because the opportunities are endless. LinkedIn's organic reach is a goldmine just waiting to be tapped, and Hala is spilling all the secrets!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#640: How To Use Manifestation As A Tool For Achieving Success In Your Business with Gabby Bernstein

2 januari 2024 | 45 min

Everything you need to know about manifesting your big goals with Gabby Bernstein.

Sweet friend, I'm so excited to have you here for the first episode of 2024! Today is so much fun, and I guarantee it'll help you start your new year off with a bang! We're diving head first into manifestation – a topic often overlooked on the podcast amid all the marketing, digital courses, and list-building talk. But trust me, it's super important and it all relates back to your business!

Honestly, I’m right there with you and fairly new to the manifestation game. But, lucky for us, we have the incredible Gabby Bernstein here to guide us through it all. Gabby is a bestselling author, spiritual leader, manifestation expert, and the host of the mega-popular podcast Dear Gabby. She even manifested meeting Oprah, so you know she's the real deal!

So, whether you dream of being your own boss, doubling your revenue, or shifting your mindset to abundance mode in 2024, this episode is the perfect launching pad for massive success in the new year.

In this episode, you’ll hear all about:

5:38: How manifestation relates to your business, funnels, list building, and taking action
9:51: A step-by-step framework for manifesting beginners
16:38: Tips for managing resistance or “faking” manifestation
18:27: The most common mistakes people make when getting started
23:45: Why you have to release all control to manifest successfully
30:41: The ways gratitude factors into the manifestation

Listen in, and get ready to manifest your biggest dreams. It's a new year, new opportunity, and we're ready to kick off right!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#639: Unveiling Our New Wellness Tracker: A Data-Driven Approach To Work Wellbeing (Yours To Copy)

28 december 2023 | 44 min

How to stay on top of your team’s well-being by measuring happiness levels.

Believe me – the success of your business is SO dependent on how passionate your team is about their work. But it's not just about being productive; it's about staying motivated, prioritizing your well-being, and preventing burnout. And I want you to catch any signs of unhappiness in your company before it's too late!

We recently rolled out a wellness tracker for our entire team. It's been a bit of a challenge to figure out how to measure abstract things like happiness and stress, but I'm so excited to share how it's been playing out!

My friends, this wellness tracker is like a dashboard for the heartbeat of your company. By comparing your team's stress/happiness metrics to your goals, you can physically see the trajectory of your company culture. (And it’s not as complicated as it sounds, I promise!)

It's amazing how much easier it is to tweak things when you can actually look at why stress levels are creeping up or how much happiness is starting to dip.

In this episode, I break down:

7:38: The importance of prioritizing intentional margin to offset potential errors or overwhelming moments
13:38: My core value of nurturing a loyal, happy, and positive work environment
17:25: Our first indicator that reflects the team stress and happiness averages
23:34: Why we track shout-outs and celebrations
27:11: The power of listening and implementing team ideas
30:09: Project management tools we use to organize and track our goals
32:57: How to keep your wellness tracker simple and tailored to your needs

Listen in and get ready to transform your work culture – no matter the size of your team. Because, my friend, your success starts with feeling great and passionate about what you do!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#638: How To Strategically Approach Your 2024 Business Plans

26 december 2023 | 27 min

Everything I learned in 2023 and how I’m applying those lessons to my plans for 2024.

Can you believe there are only four days left in 2023?! My sweet friend, I'm so excited about what the new year will bring for your business! So today, I’m sharing my plans for my company going into 2024 so you can get inspired to dream up new strategies and implement game-changing tools into your business.

2023 was an incredible year for us, with more Digital Course Academy students than ever (I'm talking record-breaking), and some of my goals for 2024 might surprise you!

It's so important to reflect on the past so you can get super specific, clear, and realistic about your goals for the future. Because, I want you to be prepared for 2024 and surround yourself with the right people, tools, and opportunities no matter the challenges that may come up.

Plus, I share the most valuable lessons I learned in 2023 so you can take them and apply them to your business! From turning to mentors to hiring a CEO, I learned so much about myself and the structure of my business.

In this episode, I talk about:

3:25: Reflections on 2023 – the most successful in my 14 years of business
5:17: Why growth won't be our primary focus in 2024
9:17: Embracing my motto "less is more" without sacrificing excellence
10:07: The departmental changes we’re applying next year
13:01: The top lessons I learned this past year
21:20: How to prepare yourself for your dream business

As you gear up for 2024, listen in and take a cue from my playbook. Cheers to the exciting new adventures that await us on our entrepreneurial journey!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#637: My Customers Have Bought All My Offers… What’s Next For Them?

21 december 2023 | 38 min

Encouraging your loyal customers to continue purchasing from you after your digital course.

So you've hit your revenue goal by selling your digital courses, and you've got some amazing loyal customers, woohoo! But what's next? Once your customers complete your course, you need to find a way to keep them engaged and craving more.

Don't worry, my friend, I've got your back! Today, I'm sharing some game-changing strategies to turn your customers into long-term digital best friends. I use these tactics in my business, so you know they've been tested and proven successful!

Keeping your loyal customers happy is a massive component of your business success. I talk about how to make your affiliate marketing and membership programs top-notch so you can keep the momentum going and hit your goals every year of your business!

In this episode, I talk about:

8:26: An in-depth look at my affiliate program's recipe for success
13:53: Why I'd never launch an affiliate program without being an affiliate myself
21:03: Tips for adding an exclusive membership program for your digital course customers
24:34: Understanding that running a membership program takes effort, time, and consistency
26:25: How I keep my Momentum Membership students engaged with live trainings, Q&A sessions, and community building

Listen in, because you've got some homework to do! I’m telling you – encouraging your loyal customers to engage and purchase from you is the key to creating those powerful, long-lasting relationships.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#636: How To Embrace Your Fears Around Money & Make More With Financial Expert Farnoosh Torabi

20 december 2023 | 57 min

Conquer your financial fears and step into your financial freedom with Farnoosh Torabi.

My friend, I want you to feel smart about how you spend your money, how you make your money, and how you look at your money. I want you to feel super competent, which means you should gather as much knowledge about your finances as physically possible!

As entrepreneurs, I truly believe we should be more open about talking about money! We all go through good, bad, and ugly phases of finances, so why not share our experiences to help each other out?

Here to tell all and ease any of your money worries is the brilliant Farnoosh Torabi, a former CNBC host, a multi-bestselling financial author, and host of the So Money podcast.

Her mission is to help you conquer your financial fears. And we have a shared passion for guiding others towards their richest, happiest lives, so trust me, you're in the best hands!

You’ll hear about:

6:27: Farnoosh’s various income streams
8:42: Why Farnoosh’s parents shaped her view on personal finance
11:35: Advice on standing out in a saturated industry
14:10: How to define what financial freedom means to you
17:53: Habits to build a rock-solid financial foundation
25:53: Tips for facing your fears
43:03: Overcoming unhealthy narratives about money
46:54: What you can expect from Farnoosh’s new book, "A Healthy State of Panic”

This isn't just about personal finances. It's about feeling fantastic about your relationship with money. So, listen in and take control of your financial future!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#635: My “Year Of Yes”: How Networking Changed My Life

19 december 2023 | 25 min

Embrace your “Year of Yes” and watch your business, personal development, and connections thrive.

If you know me, you know that deep down, I'm a huge introvert. To be honest, the idea of promoting my book, Two Weeks Notice, and doing interviews, speaking on stages, and going to networking events was terrifying!

But, I decided that 2023 would be my year of saying YES! I had a strong desire to share my book with the world and get it into the hands of those who needed it. So, every tear, every uncomfortable moment – it was all worth it.

Today, I share my tips on stepping out of your comfort zone, embracing the unknown, and making 2024 your most successful year yet.

During my “Year of Yes, I took risks, faced rejection, and welcomed vulnerability. And guess what? My business skyrocketed, my personal growth was massive, and my book launch was epic! Now, my sweet friend – it's your turn.

Tune in for:

7:00: The key to getting super clear on your goals
10:23: How to appreciate your growth and the lessons learned no matter the outcome
15:22: A reminder that difficult moments are only in seasons – not forever
17:31: Tips for embracing discomfort and saying yes to every opportunity
18:23: Understanding the power of in-person connections (especially for an online business!)

So, listen in because I learned so much from my “Year of Yes”, and I want the exact same results for you!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#634: The Million Dollar Course Creators Club: Four Student Success Stories

14 december 2023 | 52 min

#633: How To Adopt My “No Wrong Turns” Mindset

12 december 2023 | 18 min

#632: How To Craft The Perfect Digital Course Module From Scratch

7 december 2023 | 39 min

Your Ultimate Guide to Crafting the Perfect Modules for Student Success

Keep your students’ motivated and engaged by crafting seamless modules for your digital course.

While I typically talk about marketing on this podcast, today, I’m taking a beat to focus on the heart of your thriving online business – your exceptional product. In my case, of course, this is digital courses. But even more than that, it’s my seamless digital course modules.

Trust me, you can’t just throw content together and hope it sticks. Designing the best digital course is all about organizing it in a way that delivers a transformation so smoothly that your students soak it up like a sponge!

Oh, and I’m not just scratching the surface, my friends. I’m deep-diving into the art and science behind designing the perfect modules that are sure to leave a lasting impression on your students.

In this episode, I cover:

3:08: Why you need to design course modules in the first place
7:30: How to get your students into action throughout every step of your course
13:32: Top frameworks for upleveling the course value
18:53: Simple strategies for supercharging engagement
28:51: The easiest way to keep your students motivated and help them make progress through the course
31:24: Tips for incorporating content for every learning style

Listen in and consider this episode your golden ticket to creating top-notch digital course modules. Your students and your business will thank you!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#631: Collaboration Vs. Competition: Sharing Strategies Not Secrets

5 december 2023 | 27 min

Using collaboration and competition to push yourself and your business to new heights.

I'm sure you've heard the phrase "collaboration over competition" a million times. But, my friend, I'm here to tell you that it's not always true. As business owners, it's so important to use collaboration AND competition to thrive – let me explain!

Competition keeps us motivated and driven, and I truly believe that the most useful competition is actually with ourselves. For me, it's all about setting and achieving my goals and constantly pushing myself to be the best entrepreneur I can be.

At the same time, collaboration is also key! Sharing ideas and strategies with like-minded people in my network is incredibly valuable. For example, I love connecting with other course creators to share insights and tips on creating and launching the best courses.

In this episode, you’ll hear about:

4:13: Why I stick to self-competition
7:55: How to be intentional with industry analysis
12:18: Questions to ask when reflecting on your motivations
13:54: Healthy vs. unhealthy collaboration
18:49: Examples of viewing competition through the lens of collaboration

You all know it’s my mission to help as many entrepreneurs as possible, so listen in to hear why leveraging collaboration AND competition is essential in fueling that goal!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#630: Stay-At-Home-Mom Turned Business Icon: Entrepreneurship & Marketing with Alli Webb, Co-Founder of Drybar

30 november 2023 | 48 min

How to turn your next big idea into a household brand with Alli Webb.

Ever wished you had a personal stylist to give you a fabulous blowout before recording your next live video or digital course? Just imagine that confidence boost!

Now, you might be wondering what a blowout has to do with marketing. Well, let me tell you about Alli Webb, the queen of blowouts and the brilliant mind behind Drybar, the most iconic blowout business ever!

Alli's here to share her journey, from her days as a hairstylist to starting a family to selling Drybar and all the lessons learned in between. Her new book, The Messy Truth (don't you love that title?) is a must-read if you're looking for an authentic picture of what entrepreneurship actually looks like – the good, the bad, and the ugly!

With over 150 locations, a successful line of products, and a multi-million dollar household brand, Alli's story is a prime example of turning your dreams into reality. She reminds you that perfection is overrated and that you don't have to have everything figured out to build something incredible.

In this episode, Alli tells you all about:

4:06: The highs and lows of building Drybar’s successful brand
11:57: How Drybar grew in an already saturated industry
20:00: Tips for delegating and letting go of control with confidence
26:13: Drybar’s bright yellow brand and memorable marketing
30:30: The importance of learning as you go
33:22: Advice for being present in your personal life while building your business
37:24: Why The Messy Truth is for both new and seasoned entrepreneurs

Remember my friend – it's never too late to start, and there are no wrong turns in your entrepreneurial journey. So, listen to the episode, stay persistent, and make your dreams a reality, just like Alli did!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#629: How To Balance Your Business During The Holiday Bustle

28 november 2023 | 27 min

Tips to prepare your business for a restful holiday season and exciting new year.

How was your Thanksgiving feast? I hope it was fantastic, and you're all set to dive into your end-of-year planning! I know the holiday season can be overwhelming with family gatherings, business goals, and a seemingly never-ending to-do list, but I'm here to help make things a whole lot easier for you.

Picture this: You, waking up on January 1, 2024, feeling excited and ready for the new year all because you've set up your business for success this holiday season. It's such a great feeling to have everything in order and fully enjoy the holiday festivities without worrying about work (that's what entrepreneurship is all about, right?).

I don't claim to have all the answers, but I do have some tips that are sure to give you some relief! So, let's make this holiday season stress-free and the most enjoyable yet.

In this episode, you’ll hear about:

6:02: Two initiatives I focus on for October-November to ready the biz for December
8:23: Questions to ask yourself to make clear year-end intentions
11:42: A checklist to prepare your company to take off the final week of 2023
16:15: A fun way to set the stage for an exciting new year with your team
17:41: Tips for fine-tuning your ideal week and reviewing your scheduling

Happy holidays, my sweet friends! Listen in and put on your planning hat because you deserve to take time for yourselves and your loved ones during this special time of the year.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#628: The $100k Milestone: My Proven Strategies to Scale Up

22 november 2023 | 30 min

How I doubled my business revenue in just one year.

It might seem impossible to double your revenue in just one year, but if I can do it, so can you! In this episode, I share seven key strategies to achieve your six-figure vision.

What if I told you that you can make a bigger impact and establish yourself as an expert by doing less? I’m here to help you do just that by getting clear on your core offer and mapping out your revenue goals.

I’m taking you through how I set up my calendar for the year and break it down into content creation, promotion, and vacation (trust me on that last one!).

Plus, I can’t talk about my journey to my first $100,000 without mentioning the team that helped me get there. I share all about how to get started with a virtual assistant and what a game-changer that’s going to be for your business.

I cover:

3:31: How to create a map of your revenue goals
7:24: The three questions I want you to ask yourself about your core offer
11:54: Examples of supplemental offers that can elevate your launch
15:20: Why it’s so important to establish your content (and personal) calendar at the start of the year
18:42: Ideas for developing weekly original content for your audience
22:17: How to prepare for your your first hire

Curious to learn how I went from $50k to $100k in one year? I get into all the details in this episode!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#627: 10 Entrepreneurs' Stories of Gratitude

21 november 2023 | 30 min

Taking a moment to be thankful for every step of your entrepreneurship journey.

Friends – this is not just any episode. This is a beautiful celebration of the entrepreneurial journey, and honestly, I was left in tears. With Thanksgiving just around the corner, I thought it was the perfect time to spread some gratitude and share real-life, heartwarming success stories from hard-working entrepreneurs just like you.

I am so so grateful for entrepreneurship and all it brings. From impacting my student's lives to building a wonderful team to living life on my own terms – I could go on and on! But today, I’m passing the mic off to my incredible students.

They share their unique entrepreneurial adventures and what aspects they're most thankful for. If you're going through a rough patch, know that they have each walked in your shoes, and their stories today might just be the spark you need to ignite your gratitude flame and light up your path.

My students are grateful to entrepreneurship for:

10:16: Their personal evolution, bigger community, an expanded perspective
13:16: Flexibility in their schedule for more precious family time
17:41: The journey with all of its challenges and rewards
22:04: Reduced stress and getting to enjoy life on their terms
24:19: Doing what they love in alignment with their values
26:39: The opportunity to tap into and master their inner gifts and talents

So tune in, listen up, and take a moment for yourself. Reflect on your journey, the support you have, and the leaps you've made for your life and your business!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#626: Hiring A Virtual Assistant: What To Delegate & How To Manage With Tricia Sciortino

16 november 2023 | 44 min

Every reason why finding a virtual assistant is one of the best hires you’ll make.

Want to know a secret? It's NEVER too early to hire a virtual assistant! In fact, you’ll be stunned by how much they can change and supercharge anything and everything for your business. Before hiring a VA, there were so many tasks that I needed help with, and now I only focus on building my brand, attracting my audience, and making more money.

Here's why I'm telling you this – by hiring a VA, you, the brilliant entrepreneur, get to focus on what you do best while delegating the rest to a committed assistant. Can you feel the weight lifting off your shoulders?

And lucky for you, here to walk you through finding, hiring, and managing the perfect VA is Tricia Sciortino, the fabulous CEO at BELAY, one of the fastest-growing virtual staffing companies in the US.

Personally, I found my current VA four years ago on BELAY, and it was the perfect resource for getting started. I was so nervous about hiring someone full-time and didn't know if I was ready. Plus, I didn't want to spend hours searching and vetting candidates online. Thankfully, BELAY took care of all of that for me!

In the episode, Tricia tells you all about:

10:51: How a virtual assistant can take your business to the next level
15:03: The qualities to look for in a VA, and key questions to ask when hiring
20:50: The ways a VA can help you in areas like social media, podcasting, and launching digital courses
26:14: Why VA’s will ignite creativity and ideation in your marketing processes
29:40: Tips for effectively training your VA to execute tasks seamlessly
32:53: How a VA contributes to your scalability

Listen in and remember to ask these questions in the interview process for your new VA:

- Your client has not delegated anything to you this week – what are you going to do?

- What steps would you take to make this relationship successful?

- What strategic questions would you ask to serve your client best?

- What excites you about being a virtual assistant?

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#625: This Pep Talk Saved My Career

14 november 2023 | 18 min

You have two choices: Get up or stay down.

Sometimes, all you need is an honest, tough love pep talk to get yourself back in the game. If you find yourself playing small or getting caught in a cycle of comparison, this episode is for you, my friend.

I’m sharing a version of the pep talk that my mentor Marie Forleo gave to me 14 years ago when she recognized I needed to get back into action. Her advice about celebrating every win made such a profound impact on me.

I’m challenging you to measure yourself against your previous self, not what anyone else is doing. There’s nothing wrong with peeking over the fence, but if it starts to bring you down, I want you to stop right there.

Every step you take on the journey to your big, audacious goal is an accomplishment worth celebrating – never forget that.

I also share:

3:44: What happened when I leaned into my feelings of insecurity and unworthiness after my second launch
5:23: What Marie said to me that transformed my definition of success
8:15: My pep talk for anyone who’s taking themselves out of the game
11:05: What Dan Sullivan’s The Gap and The Gain taught me about measuring progress

As an entrepreneur, it’s inevitable to go through a funk every now and then. When that happens, I want you to press play on this pep talk and get yourself back out there.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#624: 8 Ways to Address Money Objections From Your Audience

9 november 2023 | 28 min

A potential customer just told you your course isn’t in their budget…now what?

Price objections are by far the most common roadblocks in sales, regardless of the industry you're in or the product you're selling. Luckily, I’ve got eight tried-and-tested strategies to help your potential customers make confident decisions when it comes to investing in your digital course.

I believe that if somebody really wants to be in your course, over time, they'll find a way to make it happen. It’s your job to understand and speak directly to what’s keeping them on the fence.

Between hosting live Q&A sessions, working with a concierge team, and laying the foundation for what potential buyers can expect, it all comes down to one thing: Trust.

If you’re ready to mitigate price objections from the start, you’re in the right place, my friend!

You'll hear all about:

4:58: What to do in the four-to-six week period before opening enrollment
8:18: Why I think everyone should have a refund policy, especially for your first digital course launch
11:10: When (and when not) to offer a payment plan
13:54: Why I prefer to go live with my audience instead of relying on an FAQ page
16:33: My invaluable experience working with a concierge team
19:31: How to address money objections in your marketing efforts
22:09: A creative way to help your audience pay for your digital course

So, when you hear potential students share their hesitation about paying for your course, despite how badly they want to join, turn on this episode and create an action plan.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#623: I Procrastinate Too… This Is How I Avoid It

7 november 2023 | 26 min

Supercharge your focus, say goodbye to procrastination, and crush your to-do list.

Let's face it - procrastination is an entrepreneur's arch-nemesis. Sometimes, staying on track feels impossible, especially when some tasks just don't light you up inside.

Sure, not every day will be exciting when running a business. But that's the beauty of entrepreneurship – you get to call the shots and build your dream career on your terms.

Here's a little secret – I struggle with procrastination, too. But I've learned some tricks along the way that have helped me stay focused and productive. Today, I’m passing those tips on to you!

I invited my incredible social media manager Stacey Moran to join me on this episode and together, we’re sharing everything you need to know so you can crush your to-do list and feel fantastic about your work.

My friends, if you're ready to conquer procrastination, effectively manage your valuable time, and dive headfirst into your zone of genius, look no further.

You'll hear all about:

4:15: Auditing your day to figure out when you're the most productive
7:07: Why late-night creativity is a real thing and how to make it work for you
8:33: Recognizing the leading causes of procrastination so you can get ahead of them
11:24: What to do when a task feels way too daunting
14:06: Tackling difficult (but super important!) tasks that require hours of your full focus
18:04: How to channel your zone of genius, get support, delegate, and automate

So, the next time you want to move that due date or feel stuck, I want you to hear my voice saying, "You've got this!" Tune in to say goodbye to procrastination and hello to productivity.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#622: Jen Gottlieb’s Guide To Be Seen, Build Credibility, Influence & Authority

2 november 2023 | 56 min

Mastering personal branding, networking, and media relationships to become the go-to person in your field with Jen Gottlieb.

You've got a killer product, streamlined processes, and top-notch marketing, but there's one thing missing: that real-deal genuine connection with your clients. Without an authenticity factor, there's no way that your brand can reach its fullest potential. But don't worry, I’ve got you!

In this episode, you're getting all the expert advice you need to shine your brightest and become the go-to person in your field.

The fabulous Jen Gottlieb joins me today to share her invaluable wisdom on showing up authentically and making a lasting impression on your clients. You’re in the BEST hands with the queen of personal branding and a true powerhouse connector!

Showing up in your business isn't just about being on camera or using social media. That's why Jen dives into some tactical strategies from her new book, "Be Seen."

We're talking in-person AND online networking, building relationships with media contacts, overcoming rejection, and creating a thriving community. Get ready because you're going to be making a mark in your industry in no time!

We dig into:

7:46: Mindset shifts to increase your visibility
11:56: Tips for tapping into your creativity and the uniqueness of your business
17:29: Effective strategies for networking in physical and online environments
22:18: A super simple and tactical exercise for fostering relationships with media contacts
28:36: Taking action on the thing you’re most afraid to do
31:32: The first steps of creating and sustaining an engaged community
43:27: A real-life case study that proves anyone can make a difference

This conversation is an absolute goldmine of insider insights that will give your business that edge you’ve been craving. Tune in now to make sure your gifts never go unnoticed!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#621: Time Mastery: Automate & Elevate What You Do In A Day

31 oktober 2023 | 24 min

Maximizing every minute of your day with these essential time management strategies.

As a business owner, your time is literally as valuable as pure gold. When you use it wisely, it's like a revenue-generating machine. But if you're not, you could be missing out on some serious cash.

Today, I'm here to share all of my favorite time-saving tips and habits so you can take control of your day and focus on the stuff that actually moves the needle in your business.

Believe me friend, you'll get to sit back and watch your entire life transform the minute you start to apply these simple yet effective streamlining hacks into your day. More free time to do the things you love, a happier team (if you have one), AND a thriving business… what more could you ask for?!

I dive into work management programs you can implement TODAY, share actionable strategies for up-leveling your efficiency, and offer mindset shifts to supercharge your productivity.

I’m talking:

1:37: The top ways to automate and delegate your busy day
5:10: How to review and trim your offerings
7:25: Streamlining your internal operations by creating SOPs (Standard Operating Procedures)
9:50: The beauty of the zero inbox rule for email management
11:35: Why you need to empower your employees
13:24: Allotting yourself less time to complete your tasks
14:13: Advice for limiting negative content consumption
14:56: The mutually beneficial 4-day workweek
16:01: Tips for evaluating your performance on the daily
17:23: The One-Minute Rule

Tune in and start smooth sailing through your workday – you deserve it!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed, and if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#620: 3 Funnels That Have Made Millions In My Business

26 oktober 2023 | 42 min

Master your marketing funnels to build lasting customer connections while making millions.

If you've ever been unsure about funnels or think they're just another "bro-marketing" tactic, I'm here to change your mind! Funnels are actually a fantastic way to build meaningful customer relationships and revolutionize your business.

Funnels have generated millions for my business because I view them as more than just a tool to make a sale – they're an opportunity to connect with potential clients, prove your value, and showcase why your offer is the perfect fit for them.

In fact, starting small and refining as you go is a wonderful strategy – my team and I do it all the time.

Today, you’re getting a behind-the-scenes look at the three primary types of funnels I swear by in my own business and step-by-step advice on how to use them. Get excited my friend, because you're about to reach your dream of consistent success and financial freedom that got you into entrepreneurship in the first place!

By the end of this episode, you'll know all about navigating the ToFu, MoFu, and BoFu (yes, those are the technical terms) and why split testing is crucial for optimizing your client flow and refining your landing pages. Click here to snag that free resource!

I cover:

4:00: Validating your offer and understanding your client's needs
6:51: How to use split testing to optimize conversion rates and measure the success of your landing pages
10:42: The framework for an effective list-building funnel
20:12: A peek into the simple inner workings of my multimillion-dollar essential sales funnel
28:05: The newest funnel I use to build trust with potential customers

Tune in for a complete guide to understanding and incorporating funnels into your marketing strategy!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#619: "The Reinvention Formula”: Actionable Steps For Leaving Your 9 to 5 with Craig Siegel

25 oktober 2023 | 46 min

Leave behind your 9 to 5 and live the life you’ve always dreamed of with Craig Siegel.

If you're ready to leave your current 9 to 5, but you've been dancing on the sidelines, thinking you're not good enough, or just waiting for the right moment, consider this episode your ultimate wake-up call! It's NEVER too late to hit that reset button, redefine your path, and create the life you've always dreamed of.

I know what you might be thinking – "Can I really do that? What will people say? Am I even ready for this?" Trust me my friend, every entrepreneur has asked those questions. But the truth is – with a positive mindset, supportive community, and real determination, you can reach true freedom and fulfillment.

When it comes to reinvention, Craig Siegel has seen it all. He left Wall Street just three years ago to pursue a completely different life path. Today, he has a successful podcast, a best-selling book, and an incredible career. Craig is walking proof that there is always time to pivot and reinvent yourself. Just imagine where you could be in three short years if you start today.

We cover:

8:28: Overcoming any hesitation in the pursuit of your purpose
11:32: Strategies for stepping out of your comfort zone
13:41: Why you don't need to have all (or any!) of the answers to get started
17:41: Cultivating a positive mindset and supportive community
27:21: The top non-negotiables for reinvention
25:30: Getting total clarity on your passions and strengths
29:25: Breaking free from limiting beliefs and choosing the “second thought”

Craig said, “Staying comfortable is a death sentence.” This hit me hard! Your journey to greatness only starts when you step out of your cozy bubble and embrace the unknown. What if it goes right? What if you fly? So, hit play and get ready to rewrite your life story!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#618: Pivoting with Purpose: The Art of Adjusting Your Business Goals

24 oktober 2023 | 19 min

Move your goals without sacrificing your revenue or breaking promises.

As a business owner, I always set goals for each year and quarter depending on the project or offering we have going on. But the truth is – goals don't always pan out as we hope. Life throws curveballs, and suddenly, that ambitious plan feels like a stretch. Not to fear! This is where the concept of "Move the Goal" comes in handy.

When it's clear you aren't going to meet a goal, you need to sit down, reevaluate, and decide how to pivot. And let me tell you, moving a goal does NOT feel good! As someone who values commitment, changing a plan can feel like a broken promise.

But, dear friend – please don’t be too hard on yourself if you’re in this position. It’s perfectly okay to do if you're smart about it. In this episode, I share all of my tips for effectively moving your goals so you can avoid losing significant revenue.

It's not always an easy process, but with the right approach, you can do it in a way that won't let yourself or your team down. I cover what to expect when you move your goals, things you need to know before changing them, and how to adapt so it’s not a setback.

You'll hear about:

3:41: The reasons you might want to move a goal
6:12: Why I hate changing plans and would much rather reach the goals I set
8:30: Everything you need to know before changing your goal
12:18: Questions you should ask yourself to make sure you’re doing it for the right reasons
14:12: Finding that balance between sticking with the plan and being flexible

Sometimes, you set safe goals to avoid feeling disappointed. But you know what they say – growth only happens when you step out of your comfort zone, and your goals should always motivate you to be the best version of yourself. Tune in because I promise this advice will save you lots of sleepless nights!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#617: The Surprising Connection Between Muscle Health and Business Performance with Dr. Gabrielle Lyon

19 oktober 2023 | 50 min

Avoid burnout, boost your energy, and watch your business take off with Dr. Gabrielle Lyon.

You're growing your business and dialing in on list growth, digital courses, and marketing strategies, but what if I told you there's something even more important than any of that? Your health.

That's right, prioritizing your wellness is the game-changer that is going to revolutionize your business and life.

If you’re an entrepreneur, you're working long hours, crashing from time to time, and putting your health at the bottom of your priority list. But guess what? The most successful entrepreneurs know that their health is the key to a sustainable business.

Now you may be thinking, “Amy, where in the world do you find time to focus on your nutrition?”

Story of my life, my friend! I've always struggled with maintaining my weight while balancing a packed schedule.

But I’m telling you – my business and my body were thanking me the second I started incorporating more protein into my diet, sticking to a workout routine, and living a healthier lifestyle.

That’s why I'm so excited to introduce you to my guest, Dr. Gabrielle Lyon, a mastermind in functional medicine. In this episode, she shares her simple approach to health that will integrate seamlessly into your busy entrepreneurial life.

We dive into:

11:10: Tips for avoiding burnout, ensuring vitality, and changing the trajectory of your life (& your business)
15:05: The power of building and maintaining muscle
21:05: How to design a no-nonsense diet for your busy schedule
28:23: Strategies you can implement TODAY to boost your energy
31:37: Advice for breaking free from shame and showing up fully for your business

Your business will only ever be as successful and sustainable as your health. Listen in because your business, wellness, and future are about to get a complete makeover.

Visit our show notes page!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#616: My Launch Diary: Highs & Lows Of The Digital Course Academy Launch

17 oktober 2023 | 51 min

The inside scoop on every feeling and thought I had before AND after my most successful launch yet.

Buckle up, because I've got something super exciting to share with you today. I'm taking you behind the scenes of my biggest Digital Course Academy launch to date! That's right – you’re getting an inside look into my mind before AND after the launch, including the good, the nerve-wracking, and the oh-so-rewarding moments. There are no secrets here!

Now, why am I telling you this? Well, dear friend, I want you to know that it's perfectly normal to feel doubt, excitement, and nervousness when launching a new offering.

Even after 14 years in the game, I still experience that same wide range of emotions. The good news is, I now know how to manage them. The stress is real, no doubt about it. But once that cart closes, it's the most incredible feeling in the world.

I open up about all my thoughts and emotions during the lead-up to the launch, how I prepared myself for the anxieties, and offer some tips on coping with the post-launch blues.

Plus, I highlight strategies for leading your team to provide the best customer support possible and share every tool we used to make this launch a huge success!

You’ll hear all about:

4:10: How my customer service, operations, and marketing teams prepared for the launch
8:26: Tips for shifting your mindset and keeping your worries at bay
18:02: Why every challenge you’ll face during the launch is completely worth it
23:17: The power of real-time connections and customer feedback
28:18: Perfecting your email lists, messaging, and social media ads
34:55: How we conquered every tech issue and improved our systems

No matter how your launch turns out, whether you hit your goal or face challenges, it's always worth it knowing you’ve made a positive impact on a client’s life. So listen in and get ready to take off in your next launch!

Visit our show notes page!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#615: The Power of Focusing on Your Core Competencies: INBOUND 2023 Replay

12 oktober 2023 | 44 min

EXCLUSIVE: My fireside chat with HubSpot’s Director of New Media, Kyle Denhoff

HubSpot’s INBOUND Marketing & Sales Conference is an absolute treasure trove of knowledge that’s jam-packed with insights on marketing, sales, business, and all the latest trends that are shaping our world.

And guess what? I had the incredible opportunity to take the stage at the 2023 event for a fireside chat with Kyle Denhoff, HubSpot's very own Director of New Media.

We dove deep into the tried and true strategies of cultivating a thriving online community and forging a path to entrepreneurial success.

In this episode, you’ll hear me spill the tea on everything that’s helped me create a highly profitable digital course business that I love, including:

Why creating an email list is crucial for online businesses (plus growth strategies that have worked for me)
What I do to build authenticity and connection on social media
Why focusing on your core competencies is the key to long standing success
My biggest takeaways from growing an audience through podcasting
The dos and don’ts of building a highly engaged and happy team

… Plus much, much more!

Tune in right now to hear an insightful conversation about all-things audience building, content creation, and strategic planning in the world of digital courses and online businesses.

Enjoy!

Visit the show notes!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#614: Why I Decided To Cancel My Coaching Program Days Before It Launched

10 oktober 2023 | 35 min

#613: Teach Your Content Like A Pro: How To Create A Flagship Framework With Rory Vaden

5 oktober 2023 | 61 min

Supercharge your teaching game with the magic of visual frameworks with Rory Vaden

If you have a digital course and are an expert in what you teach (but struggle with actually teaching it), then one of the biggest pieces of advice I can give you is to take your content and put it into a framework.

What’s a framework, you ask? Think of a framework like a roadmap or a well-constructed skeleton for your thoughts. It allows you to break down intricate concepts into manageable, comprehensible pieces for your audience.

If you’ve been listening for a while, you’ve probably even heard me say something like “I have a framework for that”! because I’ve found that using them has made me a much more effective teacher.

Most importantly, teaching in frameworks has helped my students understand and apply my content better.

Like anything, there’s an art and science to creating frameworks. Enter: My guest for this episode, Rory Vaden.

Rory is an expert when it comes to helping entrepreneurs find their uniqueness, create captivating content, and a world-class presentation craft -- and in this episode, he shares the A to Z playbook on creating content frameworks.

You’ll learn:

Why teaching in frameworks is so crucial to being an effective educator
An A to Z process on how to create effective content frameworks
7 questions you can ask yourself to help you generate ideas for frameworks
How to become “unstuck” on framework ideas and them quickly

He’s even going to break down one of his own teaching frameworks that you can use as a reference.

Ready to dive in? Pull out your notepad and press play on this episode!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#612: How A Digital Course Business Gives You The Gift Of Being Family Focused

3 oktober 2023 | 16 min

#611: Top Ways My Team Uses AI To Increase Efficiency, Creativity, & Intentional Margins

28 september 2023 | 29 min

Curious to know how my team and I are leveraging the incredible power of AI to supercharge our strategies?

From community engagement to content creation, marketing, and operations, you better believe that we are leveraging this powerhouse technology to the max.

You’re going to hear:

The exact AI-powered tasks that are doing wonders in my company
Specific ways different departments within my company are using AI
Effective prompts that you can plug into ChatGPT

… And much, much more!

To make things easy, I've put together a resource that's packed with all the prompts I'll be revealing today. You can snag it here so you don’t have to worry about writing everything down while you listen to the episode.

And before you dive in, I’ll leave you with a powerful statement from my dear friend, online marketer, AI enthusiast, Emily Hirsh:

“Those who ignore AI are waving goodbye to incredible opportunities.”So, sweet friend, let's ensure you're not missing out on anything groundbreaking.Tune in now to unravel the exciting ways AI is transforming businesses – and yours might just be next.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[06:11] My content team uses AI whenever they need to come up with inspiration or encounter roadblocks. AI can generate outlines and help refine content further.
[11:27] The community team uses AI to name and describe our community meetups and discussion events. It's great for titles and social media.
[14:40] The operations team uses AI to conduct research, organize data, draft emails, messages, and tasks. It helps save time and is more efficient.
[16:59] My ops team uses AI to process, brainstorm, and summarize meeting notes. They can organize it into a table and prompt for next steps and ideas.
[19:06] We use SOPs for everything in every department. We're still working out the right prompt to get AI to create and improve on SOPs.
[19:24] The marketing team uses AI to generate themes, story ideas, and captivating social media captions. It's like having a writing partner.
[21:26] My senior marketing content manager uses AI across the board for podcast asset generation. It also helps to enhance SEO of these assets.
[23:37] She's also used it for brainstorming marketing initiatives and re-engagement campaigns. This creates a huge jump start for our copywriter.
[24:50] Our graphic designer uses AI features in Canva to enhance designs and create captivating visuals that elevate our brand presence.
[26:14] My copywriter has been using AI to brainstorm a lot. It's like an idea thesaurus that can supply a better way to explain a concept.
[27:20] AI is an essential part of the toolkit, but keep in mind that it complements human expertise.

Visit our show notes here!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#610: Myth Busters Series: “Launching A Digital Course Costs Too Much Money” (Ft. Lisa Nunamaker)

26 september 2023 | 16 min

Making your DCA investment back is easy -- here’s how Lisa Nunamaker did it in her first launch

Have you ever thought to yourself, “I’d love to create a digital course, but it costs too much money?”

Maybe you think it’s too expensive, or that you’d have to quit your full time job, or you’re concerned you won’t get any return on your upfront investments. I get it!

Whatever it is for you, you’re feeling hesitant about starting a digital course because you have financial concerns -- and my sweet friend, you’re not alone.

In fact, “creating and launching a digital course costs too much money” is one of the most common objections people have around diving into creating and launching a digital course business.

But here’s the thing. It’s a total myth, and I want to show you why this should not be a barrier to creating a successful digital course.

And to do that, I’m going to share the inspiring story of my Digital Course Academy student, Lisa Nunamaker.

Lisa had a head full of ideas for her digital course -- but was concerned about the cost of taking DCA. So she sat down and crunched the numbers, and realized that she would only need to sign up 10 students in order to make her money back!

And guess what? In the first launch of her course, Garden Graphics Tool Kit, she enrolled 66 students and made a whopping $44,000 in sales! Not to mention, she went on to launch her course a second time and raked in an additional $20,000!

Lisa’s example is proof that it is possible to make your initial digital course investment back very quickly, and set you on the right path for future entrepreneurial success.

Tune in to hear more about Lisa’s story, and this myth be totally debunked!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:19] I'm sharing a story of one of my students that might inspire you if you feel like funds are preventing you from starting your digital course.
[05:53] Lisa Nunamaker is a teacher who has a business that teaches garden design and landscape graphics to budding designers around the world.
[06:30] When she heard about DCA, her head was swimming with ideas, but she was concerned with the cost.
[07:00] After crunching the numbers, she realized that if she could sign up 10 students the investment would be worth it.
[07:16] She enrolled in DCA in February of 2021. She launched her first course. Garden Graphics Toolkit, even though it wasn't totally finished.
[08:15] She enrolled 67 students and made $44,000. Her second launch generated $20,000. She then started a membership and generated $8,800.
[09:41] Taking the plunge was worth it. Lisa loved creating the course while she was in the class.
[11:15] DCA helped give her the tools that she needed to build a business on the side and be propelled forward.
[13:21] To uncover your course potential, think about how much you want to make. Then decide on a price and how many people need to sign up.
[14:32] DCA is about helping you create your course in the simplest way possible.

#609: A Masterclass in Entrepreneurship: Powerhouse Women Panel Replay with Lindsey Schwartz, Ronne Brown, & Lori Harder

21 september 2023 | 43 min

I had the incredible opportunity to speak at the renowned Powerhouse Women event, and let me tell you, it was an absolute game-changer.

Picture this: A gathering of fierce and fabulous female entrepreneurs, all on a mission to skyrocket their success. This event is the brainchild of my wonderful friend and founder of Powerhouse Women, Lindsey Schwartz, and let me tell you, she knows how to put on a show!

Lindsey invited me, Ronne Brown of GirlCEO, and the ever-inspiring Lori Harder of H2GLO, to join her on stage for a live podcast panel.

We fielded burning questions straight from the audience about building businesses from the ground up, navigating the shifting landscapes of digital courses, memberships, and masterminds, and of course, the behind-the-scenes magic that fuels our own entrepreneurial journeys.

The beauty of it all? Each of us brings our unique flair, perspectives and ideas to the table -- and in this episode, you’re getting access to all of it.

You’ll hear:

The 3 most essential things you should do to create momentum in your new business
How a personal brand can help you grow your business
Ways to keep your offer fresh and exciting over a long period of time
What’s next for the membership and digital course industry

Plus much, much more! I've got a strong hunch that you're going to savor every single second of this podcast. So press play on this episode and get ready to have your entrepreneurial spirit ignited.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#608: Myth Busters Series: “I Don’t Have Enough Content to Create A Digital Course” (Ft. Alissa Jenkins & Katy Caldwell)

19 september 2023 | 14 min

#607: A Step-by-Step For Creating Accountability Pods To Support Your Digital Course Students

14 september 2023 | 35 min

A deep dive into Accountability Pods (& how they’ve helped my digital course students succeed)

Agree or disagree: As a digital course creator, you want your students to thrive in your course and go on to accomplish whatever goals they set out to achieve using the information that you’ve taught them.

I’d hedge a bet that you agree.

That’s why it’s so important as the captain of your digital course ship to foster an environment of accountability within your community. It’s been a crucial part of what’s made my courses so successful.

In fact, what drives the remarkable transformations my students undergo during Digital Course Academy’s intensive nine-week journey is thanks to what I lovingly call “Accountability Pods.”

And after helping thousands of students launch digital courses over the years, I've fine tuned an effective system that will guide you in creating your own accountability program for your course.

Not only will this system make your students’ course experience better, but it will also streamline the facilitation process for you.

Throughout this episode, I'll unveil the five core strategies I use to lay the foundation for an Accountability Pod program in my courses.

You’ll also hear real life stories of how my students have leveraged their Accountability Pods not only to craft profitable digital courses, but also to forge lasting friendships.

So if your digital course needs a little boost in the accountability department, then tune in and pay close attention! And if you’ve yet to launch your course, this episode is sure to spark ideas for your future course development and offerings for your audience.

So, grab your notepad, roll up your sleeves, and let's dive right in!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#606: Myth Busters Series: “I’m Not Credible Enough To Launch A Digital Course” (Ft. Radhika Lucas)

12 september 2023 | 20 min

Concerned about credibility? Hear why “I’m not credible enough” to launch a course is a total myth

Have you ever thought to yourself, “I’d love to create a digital course, but I don’t have the credibility to teach it?”

Maybe you have a lot of knowledge in a certain area, but you don’t have a formal education in it…

Or maybe you’re an expert in something, but you’ve never taught it before…

Whatever it is for you, you’re feeling hesitant about starting a digital course because you don’t think you’re credible enough -- and my sweet friend, you’re not alone.

In fact, “I’m not credible enough” is one of the most common objections people have around diving into creating and launching a digital course business.

But here’s the thing. It’s a total myth, and I want to show you why this should not be a barrier to creating a successful digital course.

And to do that, I’m going to share the inspiring story of my Digital Course Academy student, Radhika Lucas.

Even though Radhika didn’t have a formal education in her area of focus, she created a highly successful course and made back her DCA investment in just one launch.

Radhika’s example is proof that with dedication, passion, and the right guidance from DCA, success is within reach for anyone, even if you don’t consider yourself to be an expert.

Tune in to hear more about Radhika’s story, and the myth of “not having enough credibility” be totally debunked!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#605: How My First Ten Strategy Generated $40,000 In Revenue For These Students

7 september 2023 | 55 min

#604: Myth Busters Series: “I Don’t Have Enough Time To Create A Digital Course” (Ft. Mallory Rose)

5 september 2023 | 18 min

#603: Use Your Smart Phone To Boost Your Digital Course Sales With Nicole Burke Of Gardenary

31 augusti 2023 | 73 min

Pull out your smartphone: Easy ways to boost digital course sales with video (with Nicole Burke)

Ever wonder what the big deal is about using video in your business?

In this episode, I delve into the incredible success story of Nicole Burke, one of my standout Digital Course Academy students.

Nicole, the brilliant mind behind Gardenary, has taken her business to new heights by harnessing the power of video in her marketing strategy.

I understand the hesitation that comes with video -- it used to intimidate me too! But let me assure you, it's a game-changer that can transform your business, just as it did for Nicole.

And here's the kicker: You don't need a pro videographer or a hefty budget to create engaging, converting videos for your audience.

In this episode, Nicole spills all her video secrets, sharing the insights and strategies that have propelled her on platforms like Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, and Pinterest.

Even if you're a one-person operation armed only with a smartphone, Nicole's tips will empower you to step confidently into the world of video content.

You’ll learn:

How Nicole generates captivating content ideas
The ‘nuts and bolts of posting including the ideal frequency and video length
Advice on user-friendly and affordable video equipment and software
Tried and true strategies to go viral
How to move past feeling uncomfortable on camera

So if you're eager to unlock the potential of video and supercharge your digital course sales, pop in your earbuds and give this episode your full attention!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#602: Myth Busters Series: “My Email List Is Too Small To Launch My Digital Course” (Ft. Jan Ditchfield)

29 augusti 2023 | 15 min

Small list, big Revenue: Jan Ditchfield's path to digital course success

Ever found yourself thinking you don't have enough time, money, credibility, or a large enough audience to create a successful digital course? Well, you're not alone.

Over the years I’ve found that many of my Digital Course Academy students started off feeling this way -- but still go on to create wildly successful digital courses.

One of these students is Jan Ditchfield, a former award-winning fundraiser and revenue generation strategist. Burnt out from being told what to do at her 9 to 5, she took a leap of faith and ventured into the world of entrepreneurship and digital courses.

What I love about her story is that Jen had a small email list and small social media following – yet she managed to rake in an impressive $18,425 from 29 enrollments -- completely ad-free – in her very first launch.

Since joining Digital Course Academy, Jan's journey has led her to over $145,000 in revenue, and she's well on her way to a multiple 6-figure business. How incredible is that?

In this episode, you’re going to hear more about Jan’s story, and how she blew the idea that you need a massive email list to achieve substantial revenue completely out of the water.

Jan’s journey is sure to leave you inspired! As you listen, I hope you start dreaming big, and consider the immense potential your small email list holds.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#601: Course Creation Pitfalls: Avoid the 5 Most Common Errors

24 augusti 2023 | 49 min

These are the 5 biggest mistakes I see course creators make (plus ways you can avoid making them)

I’ve been in digital marketing for a while now, and over the years I’ve noticed that there are five errors that digital course creators commonly make when they’re first getting started.

Now, making mistakes is a part of the entrepreneurial game. I’ve made plenty, and I know that I’ll keep making more. And what’s great is that every time you make a mistake, you can learn from it.

But here’s the thing. The mistakes that I talk about in this episode are things that can seriously impact your ability to create a digital course that not only makes you a lot of money but also makes an impact on people’s lives.

Now here’s the really good news. I’m also going to give you strategies to sidestep these mistakes so you don’t have to deal with the headache and stress that all-too-many people have made, including myself.

These are strategies that I cover in my signature course, Digital Course Academy, so you will be getting some of my paid content for absolutely free.

And just a word to the wise, this is a jam-packed episode, so if you haven’t already, be sure to bust out your notebook or a Google Doc so you can take some notes.

It’s my hope that by being aware of these pitfalls and taking the steps to avoid them, you’ll feel confident as you move forward in your own digital course creation journey.

Enjoy!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#600: Switching Your Niche: How To Know If It’s The Right Move For Your Business

22 augusti 2023 | 32 min

Unsure about switching your business niche? Here’s what you need to know

There’s a five-letter word that gets thrown around all the time in the entrepreneurial world, and for good reason.

The word I’m referring to is N-I-C-H-E, and the reason that it’s talked about so much is that having a niche -- or a thing that you’re known for in business -- is incredibly important if you want to stand out from the pack and serve your audience at the highest level.

But what if you feel like your digital course niche simply isn’t working for you? Maybe you’re not selling very much, or something just feels off about it.

The question becomes whether you should keep on keepin’ on with your current niche, or move on to something different.

And that’s what today’s episode is all about. The decision to change your niche can be a tough one, sweet friend, so I’m going to walk you through some things that might make the process a little bit easier for you.

You’ll hear:

4 questions to ask yourself before you switch your niche
My experience with switching niches early on my business
How to carry the momentum of your current niche into your new one
What you can expect if you switch to a niche that’s entirely different

I promise, this episode might just be the gut check that you need if you’re thinking about going in a different direction. So pop in your earbuds, and give it a listen!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#599: How To Use AI To Nail Your Online Course Topic

17 augusti 2023 | 29 min

How to prompt ChatGPT to brainstorm topic ideas for your digital course

In this episode, I’m diving deep into one of the most common questions I get from you all - how to pick that *perfect* topic for your digital course. Don't worry; it's totally normal to feel a bit overwhelmed but trust me, it's not as scary as it seems!

So, get ready to unleash the power of the "Sweet Spot Test"! It's a proven process that'll help you nail down the best course ideas that your audience will love.

But wait, there's more! We've got an exciting twist for you. Ever heard of ChatGPT? It's the AI everyone's buzzing about! And here's the kicker - you can use it to expand your course ideas even further! I know, super cool, right? 🤖💡

Now, here's the thing - ChatGPT is fantastic, but it can be a little intimidating if you've never used it before. No worries, though! In this episode, we'll hold your hand and show you how to get started, making it a breeze.

So, what can you expect in this episode? Well, grab your favorite beverage and get comfy, because we've got a treat for you. We'll not only reveal the four magical questions to help you find your Sweet Spot, but we'll also show you how to make ChatGPT your new brainstorming buddy. Together, we'll brew up some fantastic ideas for your dream course topic! ☕💡

And if you've been struggling to figure out your niche, fret not! With the Sweet Spot Test and ChatGPT by your side, you'll be amazed at how we'll help you zero in on a course topic that's just *perfect* for you.

So, join me in this exciting episode as we take a laid-back approach to demystify the world of digital course topics. Trust me, after this, you'll be brimming with confidence to tackle your course creation journey like a pro!

Ready to dive in? Hit that play button now and let's get this AI-powered party started! 🎉🎧

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#598: 4 Ways To Avoid Burnout

15 augusti 2023 | 27 min

Say bye-bye to business burnout with these 4 strategies

Burnout. It’s the dreaded B word that most entrepreneurs experience at one point in their business journey or another, and it’s not a fun place to be.

Not only do you feel like the weight of the world is on your shoulders, but the passion you once had for your business -- and that drive to move forward -- seems to totally dissipate because you’re so overwhelmed.

I don’t know about you, but the reason that I left the corporate world in the first place was because I wanted to love what I do, not to be totally exhausted by it. I want to wake up in the morning feeling energized and excited, not fearful and frustrated.

Can you relate? If so, pay close attention to this episode -- because over the years, I’ve discovered the ‘secret sauce’ to having a successful business, sans the burnout.

I only wish I would have discovered what these four things are sooner!

So if you’re on the brink of a business burnout, and want to banish it from your business for good, then grab a beverage of your choice, pop in your earpods, and get ready to take some notes.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:57] Burnout is common in the entrepreneurial world. I've experienced it firsthand, and I've heard stories from my students.
[06:49] I got burned out working one-on-one with clients about two years into my business. I decided to fire all of my paying clients and do something different.
[08:07] My most recent burnout was after I launched Two Weeks Notice. But this time I had the tools and knew what I needed to do to protect myself.
[09:37] Creating a digital course has been a game-changer for my mental health. It’s helped many of my students avoid burnout too.
[11:11] Digital courses could be the best asset in your business to protect you. It provides consistency and lessens the amount of hustle you have to do.
[12:13] Total burnout comes from constantly having to start from scratch and create something new.
[14:16] A digital course can increase revenue. You can also put a course on Evergreen, meaning that it’s automated and for sale every day.
[15:52] Time blocking can help avoid burnout. It helps you get really clear on the action items you'll be doing during the day. It also helps avoid context switching.
[19:14] A four-day workweek can also help you avoid burnout. I’ve invited my team to have a four-day workweek and it’s transformed our mental health.
[21:46] 1. Create a digital course. 2. Eventually, put a course on evergreen. 3. Time blocking. 4. Explore incorporating a four-day workweek.
[22:58] What are you doing to protect yourself from burnout?

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

BONUS: Your Business Doesn't Fit The Digital Course Mold? These Surprising Success Stories Will Make You Think Twice

14 augusti 2023 | 57 min

#597: Real Estate Investing Or Art Journaling: How A Digital Course Creates Profit, No Matter Your Industry [Interview with Jaren Sustar & Teresa Merriman]

10 augusti 2023 | 56 min

What 2 of my students have done to create profitable, sustainable businesses by creating a digital course

If you’re anything like me, you like to have all of your facts straight before making any big business decisions.

In fact, a big part of my decision-making process is learning about other business owners who’ve done something similar, and what their experience was like.

I always find that hearing stories from those who’ve gone before me helps ease my mind about doing something new.

So if you’ve been considering creating a digital course, but aren’t 100% sure whether it’s the right decision-- or if your business will translate well into this type of model -- then pay close attention to what you hear in this episode.

I sit down with two of my DCA graduates who started their digital course journeys with very different backgrounds. My student Jaren was a real estate investor, while my student Teresa sold art journals at festivals. Apples and oranges, I tell ya!

We dive into the reasons they decided to create a digital course in the first place, the nuts and bolts of their course launches, the challenges they faced along the way -- and here’s the fun part -- how a digital course has changed their lives and businesses for the better.

I hope that if you’re struggling with the decision of whether to create a digital course, then these interviews will give you an honest look at what life could be like for you.

Happy listening!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:50] Jaren Sustar is a real estate investor and founder of Finance Cowboy. His digital course helps people find and manage rental properties or flips.
[05:02] Teresa Merriman created a course about travel art journaling. She even filmed her course in Croatia.
[07:09] Jaren began his career as a truck driver. He transitioned into sales and also started buying real estate. Finance Cowboy was born in 2021.
[12:21] Jaren joined List Builders Society and grew his list from 700 to 14,000 people.
[13:02] After taking DCA, Jaron added a course to his business. The course allowed him to go really deep and take his students to the next level.
[16:14] Jaren’s course is called The Rental Academy. He charged $3,000 and built a waiting list of 1200 people for his first launch. He made over $200,000.
[23:56] Having a course has allowed Jaren to hire four full-time employees and coaches.
[29:56] Teresa has been an exhibiting artist since 2005. She makes beautiful ornate leather-bound journals.
[31:03] During the pandemic, Teresa began offering a limited series online. She had an audience.
[33:45] Teresa heard about digital courses and decided to niche down by focusing on travel journaling.
[38:28] Teresa's course launch consisted of social media and emails. It was $497 and she sold 32 in her first launch.
[42:42] She's now prepared to better describe and talk about her course when she does her second launch.
[47:10] Teresa created a membership and has an in-person art retreat coming up this fall. Today she has more freedom with her time and makes a greater impact.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#596: What’s Your Digital Course Profit Potential?

8 augusti 2023 | 24 min

#595: Is 1-on-1 Work Holding You Back? How to Help More People (& Make More Money!) with an Online Course

3 augusti 2023 | 38 min

Scale your impact without maxing out your calendar

Imagine this scenario. You’re a business owner who works one-on-one with clients. You love what you do, you have a lot of knowledge to share, and you’re making money. Most of all, you love the feeling you get from helping your clients achieve their goals.

But the thing is, you’re starting to get the feeling that one-on-one work is holding back your growth potential.

I’m sure you’ve heard the phrase ‘time is money’ -- and in a lot of business models, this old saying rings true because your ability to change more lives and make more money is totally dependent upon the number of hours in the day.

But the thing is, it doesn’t have to be like this -- and creating a digital course is one way that you can significantly scale your impact and your income without maxing out your calendar.

Take it from me. When I first started my business, I worked one-on-one with clients as a social media consultant. Not only was I stressed beyond belief, but there was a cap on my income potential and how many people I could help.

Transitioning my business from client work to selling digital courses has allowed me to make more money, create more impact, and live a life that’s completely on my terms.

So if you’ve ever been curious whether this type of business model is limiting your growth potential, then pay close attention to this episode.

In it, I share four telltale signs that one-on-one work is holding you back, along with true stories of how some of my DCA Students have scaled their businesses with a digital course.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#594: Is a Digital Course Right For You?

1 augusti 2023 | 20 min

#593: Strategies For Creating Massive Success As A Multi-Passionate Entrepreneur with Chalene Johnson

27 juli 2023 | 51 min

From flipping cars to fitness empire & beyond: How Chalene Johnson continues to build multi-million dollar businesses

Today I have a guest on the show who truly knocks my socks off (in the best way possible).

Chalene Johnson has been building businesses since she was a college student at Michigan State University, where she launched an auto swap meet in order to pay for her tuition.

Now I don’t know about you, but when I was in college, I definitely wasn’t thinking like an entrepreneur.

Since her college days, Chalene has built and sold multiple multi-million dollar businesses that have stood the test of time.

Today, she’s a multiple 8-figure CEO, fitness leader, marketing expert, social media rockstar, and is the host of two podcasts, The Chalene Show and Build Your Tribe.

She even holds the Guinness Book of World Records title for the most fitness videos filmed by an individual. I mean, how cool is that?

And what I love most about Chalene is that she’s multi-passionate. She’s launched and scaled businesses in multiple industries, and has found success in each.

In this episode, Chalene and I chat about how she’s built a diverse and thriving entrepreneurial career that’s stood the test of time. You’ll hear:

The biggest lesson Chalene has learned when it comes to developing business ideas
A step-by-step process you can use to figure out what your ‘thing’ is (or what your ‘things’ are)
How to know when it’s the right time to add a new income stream to your business
Tips on how to build an audience that sticks with you for the long haul
Chalene’s secret for how she built two highly successful podcasts
How Chalene has reframed her ADHD as one of her superpowers

There is never a dull moment with Chalene -- so get ready for a fun, action-packed and incredibly informative episode!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#592: What Does A 10% Edge REALLY Mean & Are You Overthinking It?

25 juli 2023 | 23 min

How to deal with imposter syndrome when you’re teaching other people

Have you ever questioned whether you’re qualified enough to teach a digital course? Or worried that your students might already know all the good stuff.

As an online educator, I’ve felt this way many times -- and it’s something that I still have to consciously work on, even 14 years into my business.

The truth is, I know I don’t need to be years ahead of my audience to make an impact -- I just need what I call a 10% edge. In other words, I only need to know a little bit more than them, and be a little bit further along in my journey.

And because not too long ago, I was exactly where many of my students are today, I remember what it was like. I’m able to empathize with their struggles even better and recall experiences in more detail.

In this episode, I’m diving into what having a 10% edge really means, and how I deal with imposter syndrome when I start to doubt myself.

You’ll hear:

How to embrace your 10% edge and feel confident sharing it with the world
Different ways you can reframe your imposter syndrome when it shows up
Why it’s actually ok to struggle for answers (& how it helps in the long run)
Real-life stories of how I’ve overcome feeling like I don’t know enough

This is a great listen for anyone that’s ever dealt with imposter syndrome -- so pop in those earpods and press play on this insightful episode.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#591: Update Your Course Content In 5 Simple Phases

20 juli 2023 | 27 min

>>> HEAD HERE TO GRAB THE FREEBIE FOR THIS EPISODE: Your Course Update Bundle!

Need a content update? Here’s my simple 5-phase process for updating course content

The thought of updating your course content can be daunting. I know that because I’ve felt this way many times before.

Sometimes the thought of giving your course content a refresh can feel so overwhelming that you start to question whether you should even update it in the first place.

But let me tell you sweet friend, making sure your course content is fresh, current, and packed full of value is incredibly important as a digital course creator -- and getting down in the trenches to make those updates is simply a part of the job.

I’ve done more than my fair share of course content updates, and I’ve learned a lot over the years. In fact, I think it’s safe to say that I have my process boiled down to a fine science.

Now here’s the good news. In this episode, I’m sharing the exact 5-phase process I use to stay organized, execute efficiently, and ensure that no detail is missed when I make my course content updates.

And here’s the icing on the cake. I have some really great tools and resources to go along with this episode that you can download and use to stay on track. Stick around to the end to hear how to snag them.

So if you’re ready to update your course content without all the stress, then grab something to take notes with and pay close attention to this episode.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#590: Meet My New CEO! A Candid Conversation With Jawesy

18 juli 2023 | 36 min

#589: A Real-Life Look At Making The Switch From A Personal Brand To A Company Brand With Clint Salter

13 juli 2023 | 45 min

Curious about making the switch? Here’s what you need to know about transitioning from a personal brand to a company brand (with Clint Salter)

Have you ever wondered what it would look like to make the switch from having a personal brand to a company brand?

I’m right there with you. There are so many great things about being the face of my business, but I’ll be honest -- I don’t really see myself doing TikTok and Instagram reels when I’m 90 years old.

It would be so nice (at some point way down the line) to transition from the personal brand I have today, to one where my name, face, and likeness are not associated with it.

But how do you do that gracefully? And what does that look like in real life? That’s the topic I’m exploring today with my guest Clint Salter.

Clint is an award-winning entrepreneur and best-selling author who’s on a mission to revolutionize the dance industry. Over the past 21 years, he’s created and sold five companies, from the dance studio he started at age 16 to the largest coaching membership for dance studio owners globally.

He’s a brilliant business owner and also has firsthand experience going from a personal brand to a company brand.

In this episode, Clint shares:

The 5 specific steps he took to switch from a personal to a company brand
The biggest challenges he’s faced from the transition, plus lessons he learned
How he seamlessly integrated coaching into his company brand
The mindset he embraced that allowed him to build businesses bigger than him

This was such an insightful conversation, so if you’ve ever considered what it would be like to make the switch in your business like I have, be sure to tune in!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Bonus: What’s Up With Threads? Jasmine Star And I Give Our Honest Review

11 juli 2023 | 41 min

#588: From A Season Of Yes To A Season Of Rest: Why I’m Intentionally Slowing Down In My Business

11 juli 2023 | 17 min

#587: Overwhelmed By Marketing Metrics? Learn Which Ones I Track & Why

6 juli 2023 | 36 min

#586: Beyond Pay and Perks: How to Build a Team that Stays for the Long Haul

5 juli 2023 | 17 min

#585: Truly Become An LGBTQ+ Ally & Run An Inclusive Business With Hank Paul

28 juni 2023 | 50 min

What being an LGBTQ+ ally really means & how it can help your business’ long-term growth

One of the most important things you can do as an entrepreneur is to ensure you are running an inclusive business. Not only is it the right thing to do as a human, but it can also help your business’ long-term growth.

This has been a big initiative of mine over the past several years, and something that I’ve committed to daily.

But here’s the thing. Many of the conversations about LGBTQ+ inclusion didn’t start happening until pretty recently, so you still might have a lot of questions about the whole topic in general.

Heck, you might even feel intimidated about what it actually means to become an ally, and what an inclusive business looks like in real life – and guess what? That’s OK!

The fact that you’re interested in learning how to create a world where everyone is valued and respected is a great place to start -- and here to answer all of your questions on how to run an inclusive business is my student, Hank Paul.

Hank is an award-winning wedding photographer, writer, Queer inclusion strategist, and creator of Authentic Allyship Academy, where they teach students how to inclusify their businesses and become confident and knowledgeable allies.

In this episode, they share:

Specific ways you can be more LGBTQ+ inclusive in your business
How being LGBTQ+ inclusive help facilitate long-term business growth
The biggest misconceptions that businesses have about LGBTQ+ allyship
How to avoid being a performative ally, and become an authentic ally

Plus much, much more! I promise, sweet friend, if you’ve wanted to become more inclusive in your business but have been unsure of where to start, then this episode is for you.

So pop in your earpods, grab a tasty beverage, and give this episode your full attention.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#584: Your Zone Of Genius Misses You: How To Find Your Way Back

27 juni 2023 | 17 min

You can’t do it all: How to work inside your zone of genius and let go of everything else

Do you feel like you’re in a constant juggling act in your business?

When you’re an entrepreneur, things are bound to be busy – and sure, feeling overwhelmed at times is something to be expected.

But if you feel like you always have a million plates spinning in the air, then it’s high time you start focusing on the things inside your zone of genius, and let go of all the other tasks that someone else can do for you.

Passing the torch to an employee, a contractor or a VA can be really difficult, and I know this from personal experience.

For ten full years, I insisted on editing my own videos. I thought that because I knew exactly what edits I wanted to make, I could do it quicker than anyone else could. Sure, I was ok at editing videos -- but it sure as heck was not the best use of my time.

And when I finally hired someone to do this for me, I found that with a little training and investment on the front end, they were able to do it much more efficiently than I could – leaving me time to work on the things in my business that not only turn the needle, but light me up.

In this episode, I share what it means to work inside your zone of genius, why that’s important, and how to get back to it if you get lost.

This is a great listen for any business owner who feels like they are literally doing it all -- so pop in your earpods and tune in.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:33] If you've ever felt overwhelmed in your business, I would suggest making a conscious effort to work more in your zone of genius.
[05:11] Working in your zone of genius is doing the things that you are most proficient in. The work is fulfilling, because it makes you feel good.
[06:02] An example of this for me is being on stage. I'm nervous at first, but at the end I feel energized and grounded.
[07:34] If there are things that make you feel low energy or have a really low vibe, these may be the things that you might need to find some help with. You should also hire someone if they can do the same thing in half the time.
[08:29] An example of this is when I used to edit all of my own course videos. Editing videos isn't in my zone of genius. I was making excuses, because I was scared.
[11:35] Prioritizing your zone of genius comes down to getting clear on what the important areas of your business are. For me, it's launching my digital courses, my membership, and my podcast.
[13:50] When you plan for the next year, sit down and journal and really discover where your zone of genius is. Check in every season and ask where my zone of genius is now.
[15:19] Superwoman syndrome is where you feel like you need to do everything and don't want to slow down and take the time to teach.
[15:49] A good leader refuses to spend time on tasks that aren't in their zone of genius. They find the right people to support them and take the time to onboard and teach them.
[16:23] Take out your journal and jot down some areas where you're operating in your zone of genius and where you're operating outside of your zone of genius. DM me @AmyPorterfield.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#583: How I Plan My Podcast Topics: A Step-by-Step Batching Process

22 juni 2023 | 48 min

#582: The Listening Mindset: My Secret For Understanding My Audience Intimately

20 juni 2023 | 17 min

#581: Create A Profitable Business That Keeps Growing Even When You’re Offline With Steph Taylor

15 juni 2023 | 47 min

#580: How To Show Up Professionally When You’re Struggling Personally

13 juni 2023 | 26 min

#579: Must-Know Online Marketing Industry Updates & Trends For 2023

8 juni 2023 | 45 min

Is Your Business Keeping Up? The Top 7 Digital Marketing Updates & Trends To Be Aware Of The State Of The Digital Course Industry & What You Can Expect In The Next Year

Holy smokes, things in the digital marketing world are moving fast. From chatbots to ChatGPT, it seems like there’s some new technology popping up on the market every single day.

With so much changing, it’s hard to know what technology is going to benefit your business the most, and what you should invest both your time and money into.

Not to mention, it can be really intimidating to try something new when you know nothing about it. I’ll be honest -- I’ve definitely been pushed out of my comfort zone as I’ve implemented some of these new marketing trends in my own business.

Doing something new is always a little bit scary, but I’ve found that when you’re open to it, and are willing to spend a little time learning, then it’s more than worth it in the long run.

And here’s the good news, sweet friend. I’ve done a roundup of the seven biggest marketing industry technologies that you can take advantage of right now, and I’ve tested out each and every one of them for you.

I’ve done all of the research, all of the homework, and have tons of insight on all of the trends and updates that I’m sure you’re curious about – and I’m sharing it all in this episode.

So if you are ready to level up your marketing plan and serve your audience at an even higher level, then grab something to take notes with and press play on this episode.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#578: What To Do When You’re Maxed Out & Ready To Quit With Rebecca Blackburn

7 juni 2023 | 45 min

A 3-step process for living more, working less, and lightening your mental load with Rebecca Blackburn

We’ve all been there before….

Maybe you’ve got what feels like a hundred plates spinning in the air, and one of them is about to come crashing down.

Or maybe your business is going really well, but it’s taking over your entire life -- and you’re struggling to find time for what’s most important.

Whatever the situation may be for you, feeling like you’re underwater isn’t a good place to be. If you let that feeling go unaddressed for too long, it could potentially lead to burnout and resentment towards your business -- and we definitely don’t want that!

So when you’re completely maxed out, it’s crucially important that you take a pause, assess what’s happening, and get back into alignment.

Here to help you in doing that is Rebecca Blackburn. She’s a highly sought-after life coach who helps overwhelmed female entrepreneurs restructure their lives so they can work less, live more, and still achieve success at the highest level.

Rebecca’s going to share a simple 3-step process that will help you regain ownership of your life, and take intentional action on how it’s going to look moving forward.

Tune in to hear:

How to identify what’s most important in your life, and prioritize it
The bad habits you might not realize you’re doing that are only wasting your time
Tips on how to lighten the ‘mental load’ that many women bear
How to get rid of the guilt you feel when you don’t get to everything on your to-do list

Plus much, much more! I absolutely loved this conversation with Rebecca, and it’s my hope that you take away just as much from it as I did.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#577: Rejection In Business: How I Coped When Things Don’t Go My Way

6 juni 2023 | 19 min

The rejection that rocked my world, and what I learned about the way that I cope

If you know me, you know that I’m a sensitive person. I take things that people say about me to heart, and when I feel the slightest bit rejected, it takes an emotional toll.

So when I was turned down for a huge media opportunity during my book launch, you can imagine just how hurt I was.

If I could go back and do it all over I would, because the disappointment and sadness that I felt as a result of this rejection really brought me down during what should have been a really exciting time for me.

But here’s the good news. This experience has made me take a long, hard look at how my own expectations play a role in how I handle things when they don’t go my way -- and moving forward, I’ll have an entirely new perspective.

I’ve also recommitted to some simple mindset shifts that I know will help me in the future when things don’t go as I thought they would.

In this episode, you’ll hear about this entire experience -- how I handled it, what went wrong, and what I’m committed to doing moving forward.

This is a very honest and vulnerable conversation, and a topic that’s so important to talk about as entrepreneurs -- because allowing something that’s completely out of your control to get the very best of you is simply not worth it, sweet friend.

So if you feel rejection as deeply as I do, I hope this episode helps you reframe your thoughts so you can keep moving forward as the very best version of yourself.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#576: How To Scale Your Business Using The StoryBrand Framework With Dr. J.J. Peterson & April Hawkins

1 juni 2023 | 49 min

#575: Are You Willing To Start From Scratch? Why Your Capacity For Zero Is Crucial As An Entrepreneur

30 maj 2023 | 28 min

Your willingness to start from scratch as a business owner is crucial to finding long-term success -- here’s why

If you’re considering starting a business, one of the things that you absolutely need to be prepared for is to start from the very bottom.

I don’t say that to be negative -- I say it because all-too often, people go into entrepreneurship with rose colored glasses, and then get discouraged when they realize that they don’t have any social media followers or an email list that tumbleweeds could blow through.

When you’re first starting out in business, you’ve got to be OK with starting from scratch. And because you’re likely doing something that’s brand new to you, you’ve also got to be OK with not having the same clout that you might have had in your career.

Sure, you might have a ton of experience on your resume and an excellent track record -- but you’ve probably never owned and operated a business before. And it’s a whole different ball game!

So that’s why it’s so important that as an entrepreneur you have a strong capacity for zero. You’ve got to be willing to start with nothing, get in the trenches, and do the hard work.

Now here’s the good news, sweet friend. You won’t be in this place forever! With time, effort, and the right strategies, your business is sure to grow.

But when you start in the right frame of mind, and know in your heart that things don’t happen overnight, you’ll be much better equipped to handle all of the ups and downs that come along with the wildly exciting ride of entrepreneurship.

In this episode, I’m diving into what it means to have a strong capacity for zero, and how you can strengthen yours. So pop in your earbuds, grab a beverage of your choice and enjoy!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#574: Steal My Lead Magnet Launch Checklist

25 maj 2023 | 38 min

#573: What’s Your Weakness? (Hint: It’s Probably Not What You Think)

23 maj 2023 | 20 min

Your perceived weakness can actually be your superpower -- here’s why

If you know me, you know that I can be a very sensitive person. I take what people say to heart, and when I feel any sort of negativity, or rejection, I internalize it.

Being sensitive has always been something I’ve looked at as a weakness, especially as a business owner -- and it certainly doesn’t help that our culture places a lot of emphasis on entrepreneurs being ‘tough.’

But through the help of my dear friend and mentor, Michael Hyatt, I’ve come to realize that being sensitive as a business owner isn’t actually a bad thing at all. In fact, my sensitivity allows me to be a better leader for my students, especially those who are just starting out.

So how did I unwind years of social conditioning and turn what I’ve perceived as a weakness my whole life into a strength? In this episode, you’ll find out.

You’ll also hear:

How to be more aware of negative self-talk, and stop it in its tracks
Why the language you use to describe yourself is so important
Real life examples of how my team members turned their weaknesses into superpowers
An exercise you can do NOW to rewire the negative thoughts you have about yourself

After listening to this episode, you might have an entirely new perspective on how you think about yourself, and feel that much more confident as an entrepreneur.

So if that sounds good to you, pop in your earbuds and press play on this episode!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#572: ChatGPT, AI, & How To Use It In Your Marketing with Emily Hirsh

18 maj 2023 | 40 min

#571: Learning To Love The F-Word… Failure

16 maj 2023 | 20 min

#570: How to Earn Cash For Your Business Without Creating Any Products With Pat Flynn

11 maj 2023 | 42 min

Pat Flynn shares his top strategies on how to generate a significant income through affiliate marketing

Have you ever been strapped for cash in your business? If you’re like most new business owners, the answer is probably HECK YES!

I know I’ve been in a pinch before, and one of the greatest ways you can earn some extra money -- without having to create a new product -- is through affiliate marketing.

I’ll be honest, affiliate marketing has been a big part of my business strategy. Not only has it helped me get through some of those months when cash was tight, but it’s also allowed me the ability to invest money back into my business.

And one of the people that I’ve looked to over the years when it comes to all things affiliate marketing is Pat Flynn.

He’s a bestselling author, the creator of The Smart Passive Income Blog, and the host of the highly rated Smart Passive Income Podcast -- where he shares weekly interviews, strategies, and advice for building an online business through affiliate revenue.

In a nutshell, he’s the best of the best when it comes to affiliate marketing, and in this episode, he’s going to share the affiliate marketing campaigns that have really turned the needle for him over the years.

These are strategies that go well beyond including links in a blog post, so if you’ve dabbled with affiliate marketing and are ready to take a deeper dive, then hit the play button on this episode and get ready to start earning some extra money.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#569: Embracing The Cringe: The Cultural Movement That’s All About Owning The Most Awkward Parts Of Yourself

9 maj 2023 | 11 min

Sharing something you used to find embarrassing is now the norm -- here’s how it can benefit you in business

There’s an image that’s been circulating the internet that shows a picture of a cow with the caption “I am cringe but I am free.” Have you seen it?

While at first glance this appears to be your silly run-of-the-mill internet meme, its message is actually much deeper than that -- and I’ll be honest, I’m here for it.

This meme is all about embracing the things about yourself that make you want to cringe, all of the experiences you’ve been too embarrassed to share, and all of those little quirks and idiosyncrasies that have traditionally been looked at as ‘uncool.’

Yes, sweet friend. There’s been a huge cultural shift towards letting go of what other people think of you and learning to love those weird parts of yourself that you’ve been taught to shun by society.

I can tell you from experience that there’s a huge sense of relief and freedom that comes from letting go of caring about what others think, especially when you’re the face of your business like I am.

In this episode, I explore this idea of living alongside the cringe -- what it means, and the many ways that it can help you thrive in life, and in business.

So if you’ve ever been afraid to show up as yourself and do what makes you happy, then this episode is for you, sweet friend. Happy listening!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#568: Affiliate Marketing 101: What I’ve Done To Earn $300K Per Quarter In Affiliate Revenue

4 maj 2023 | 38 min

Grab the freebie for this episode here! >>> The Perfect Email Template To Land Your Next Affiliate Partnership Pitch A step-by-step breakdown on how to get started with affiliate marketing

Would you believe me if I told you that I make over one million dollars in affiliate revenue each year?

It’s true – and believe me, I’m not telling you this to brag. I’m telling you this because you, too, can make substantial income through affiliate marketing.

Affiliate marketing is when content creators earn a commission by promoting a product or service from another company using an affiliate link. When someone clicks on your affiliate link and makes a purchase, you’ll receive a payout.

So if you’ve ever heard the phrase “make money while you sleep,” this is it, my friend. It’s one of the best ways out there to make passive income – but like anything in business, you’ve got to go into it with a plan.

Over the years, I’ve fine tuned my affiliate marketing strategy and I’m so excited to break it all down for you in this episode.

You’ll hear:

How to identify the best brands for you to partner with
What to say in your pitch email to potential affiliate partners
Why relationships are key when it comes to affiliate marketing
The best places to promote your affiliate links
A breakdown of all the spreadsheets I use to stay organized

So grab your beverage of choice, something to take notes with, and press play on this incredibly informative episode.

P.S. To help you absolutely nail your pitch emails to potential affiliate partners, I’m giving you a FREE pitch email template -- click here to snag it!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:17] Affiliate marketing is a way to earn commissions by promoting affiliate programs or offers.
[05:15] Identify the brands and companies that you could potentially partner with. Make a list of all of the software and tools that you use in your business.
[07:09] Put everything into a spreadsheet and lean into the products and services that you use and that might benefit your audience.
[09:15] Go to each website and look for an affiliate link. You can also look for a contact and send them a pitch email.
[10:26] Attach a media kit or a one sheet that states what you do, who you serve, and compelling stats about your business. Get on a call.
[12:00] Relationships are really important when it comes to affiliate marketing. Think about courses you've taken, and people who you've worked with.
[15:18] Look for opportunities where you can add great value for your students and readers, and where you can benefit in your business monetarily.
[21:59] Ask: Is this something I actually use? Is it something that my audience might use? Does the price point fit my audience? Do I have the space to promote this?
[27:56] Documents to stay organized: Tab 1 - Affiliate Master Spreadsheet; Tab 2 - List of companies you've established a partnership with; Tab 3 - Incoming requests.
[30:01] The Affiliate Revenue Spreadsheet tracks money coming in from your partnerships. Set a goal for each quarter or year.
[34:43] Action steps: Brainstorm a list of tools and resources that you've used to grow your business or to enhance your personal life.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#567: How To Ditch Your Employee Mindset And Think Like An Entrepreneur

2 maj 2023 | 21 min

Let go of your employee mindset and start thinking like the entrepreneur that you are

Congrats! You’re officially a business owner. You have the LLC, you’re making money, you’re setting your schedule, and the icing on the cake is that you can work from wherever in the world that you want.

You’ve ditched the golden handcuffs and have set out to create a life of your own design -- and on paper, it’s everything you’ve always wanted.

The thing is, even though you’re technically your own boss, you still feel like you’re working for someone else because you feel obligated to answer those late-night text messages from your clients or ask for approval to take some time off.

I get it, sweet friend, because I’ve been in this awkward “in between” stage of entrepreneurship, too -- where you have your own business, but feel like you have to be available for your clients at any given time.

In fact, for a couple of years after I started my own business, I still felt like I was working for someone else because my clients had such a strong grip on me. Even though I was a business owner, I was operating with an employee mindset.

Eventually, I hit a breaking point -- and it was then that I discovered a new way of thinking that helped me fully step into entrepreneurship.

In this episode, I share my experience of shifting from being self-employed with an employee mindset, to thinking like an entrepreneur -- and how it helped me grow my business while enjoying all the freedoms that entrepreneurship can bring.

You’ll learn:

The difference between being self-employed and an entrepreneur
How to determine if you’re still thinking like an employee
What you can do to start thinking like an entrepreneur
The difference between a scarcity mindset and an abundance mindset (& why it’s important)

This is a great listen for anyone in business, whether you’re just getting started or have been in the game for a while (and have yet to experience what it means to be a true entrepreneur).

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:25] So many entrepreneurs feel like they still work for someone else even when they are working for themselves.
[04:37] It takes work to shift from being self-employed with an employee mindset to becoming a true entrepreneur.
[05:43] When I first started as a business owner, it was difficult because my clients had extremely high expectations and unmanageable deadlines.
[08:30] I realized I was done with client work when I was on a tarmac being screamed at by a client.
[09:23] Operating with a scarcity mindset is the quickest way to play small as an entrepreneur. Yousee limitations as opposed to opportunities.
[12:43] After the tarmac incident, I started to unboss myself and make the mental shift from an employee to being an entrepreneur.
[15:33] To live in abundance, start operating with the belief that there's enough money and enough success to go around.
[17:23] When you shift your thinking, you'll start to run your business and your life exactly how you want, and fully step into your own as an entrepreneur.
[17:38] Homework: Open up your notebook and write down all the ways you are operating with an employee mindset.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#566: How to Create a Tailored Customer Experience using AI with Stu McLaren

27 april 2023 | 47 min

Stu McClaren shares how AI is changing the face of digital marketing (& what you can do to keep up)

Whether you’re apprehensive about AI or you’re all about it, one thing is for sure – it’s taking the digital marketing world by storm.

I won’t lie – there have been a lot of changes in online marketing over the past fourteen years that I’ve been an entrepreneur, from the rise of SEO to social media. But this, sweet friend, is a really big one — and I want to talk about it!

Here to discuss all-things futuristic is Stu McLaren, my work husband who also happens to be the ‘go-to-guy’ for all things memberships.

He’s worked with tens of thousands of authors, speakers, coaches, consultants, and business owners to transform what they know, love, and do into recurring revenue.

And in this episode, he’s going to share insights on how the learning industry, specifically, is changing as AI continues to transform the marketing landscape, and how you can make sure your business doesn’t get left in the dust.

You’ll also hear:

A tried and true framework that you can use to future-proof your online business
Different ways you can take advantage of AI as a content creator
How you can prevent your students from getting the dreaded “content complex”
The ‘secret sauce’ Peloton has used to maintain a 92% membership retention rate

This is a great listen for any business owner, whether you’re just getting started or you’re a seasoned entrepreneur. So press play right now and enjoy this fun and informative conversation with Stu McLaren.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#565: Stop Wasting Time: Why Being “Outcome-Oriented” Is The Key To Efficiency & Growth

25 april 2023 | 20 min

What it means to be outcome-oriented (and how it can help you be more efficient with your time) – a strategy featured in Fast Company

If you know me, then you know that I’m all about time management. In fact, being an effective manager of my time is what’s allowed me to only work four days a week, and grow my business like gangbusters.

So when I came across an article in Fast Company called “How (and why) you should practice ‘anti-time management,’” it caught me way off-guard.

Anti-time management? What does that even mean? And why on Earth would you not want to manage your time?

Turns out, this article has way more than a catchy headline – because as I dug into it, I found that there’s a whole different approach to time management that I’d never heard of before.

It’s all about focusing on your final outcome, or what success looks like after you’ve achieved your goal – and by doing that, you end up saving a lot of time that you would have otherwise wasted spinning your wheels.

If that has your head spinning, don’t worry – because in this episode, I’m going to break it all down for you.

You’ll hear:

Why focusing on outcomes helps you achieve more (while doing less)
Ways to become more outcome-oriented as a business owner
How I almost made a huge mistake in my business but got back on track by focusing on the outcome

So if you’ve ever struggled with managing your time (or you’re a huge time management nerd like me), then tune into this episode to learn about this refreshing new approach.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#564: How To Choose Higher Quality Thoughts With Spiritual Thought Leader Danielle LaPorte

20 april 2023 | 42 min

How to let your heart guide you through the most difficult parts of entrepreneurship

As a business owner, there’s so much focus on what your mind tells you to do.

Case and point: When you’re facing a challenge in your business, what do you do? You research. You look at the data. You strategize. You think from your head.

Even as a total data nerd myself, I’ve realized over the years that it’s just as important to tap into your heart as it is your mind.

In fact, your heart is the most neglected form of intelligence that you have -- and according to my guest on this episode, Danielle LaPorte, you can actually use it to navigate your journey as an entrepreneur.

Danielle is one of the most acclaimed spiritual thought leaders of our time, who in Oprah Winfrey’s words, “is uniquely connecting the world together with a spiritual energy that matters.”

I love this conversation with her, because I’ll be honest -- letting my heart play a role in some of the bigger decisions that I make in business hasn’t always been the easiest thing for me. Like everything, it’s been something I’ve had to practice.

In this episode, you’ll hear:

What a heart-centered business is, and how you can create one
How to overcome the low-level feelings of not “being enough”
A new way to face challenging moments by choosing higher quality thoughts

… Plus so much more! I promise, you’ll get tons out of this episode – so go someplace comfy, pop in your Airpods and enjoy!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#563: How To Drop The Guilt When Saying “No”

18 april 2023 | 17 min

Why do entrepreneurs like Brendon Burchard, Jenna Kutcher & Jamie Kern Lima say “No” more than “Yes”

One of the most important skills for a business owner is their ability to say “No” to ideas, opportunities, and offers that are out of alignment with their mission.

Now, I’ll be honest -- this is much harder than it sounds, and it’s something that I’ve really struggled with over the years.

As a notorious people-pleaser, I’ve said “yes” to doing things that I don’t want to do because I feel guilty saying no. Not to mention, when you’re a new entrepreneur (and you don’t have a ton of opportunities coming your way to begin with), it can be even harder to turn things down.

There’s a quote I love by author Alain de Botton that says, "What kills us isn't one big thing, but thousands of tiny obligations we can't turn down for fear of disappointing others."

This, sweet friend, could not be more true. And the good news is, I have a really simple exercise that you can do to determine which opportunities are a “Heck yes!” and those you can politely decline -- and it all comes down to asking yourself a single question.

It’s the same question that some of the most brilliant entrepreneurs out there – like Brendon Burchard, Jenna Kutcher, and Jamie Kern Lima – have used to evaluate what opportunities to embrace, and which ones to pass on.

In this episode, you’ll hear what that question is, along with:

How you can get crystal clear on your mission (and stay aligned with it)
What to do when you feel guilty for saying “No” to things
Why NOT returning a favor is 100% OK

Whether you’re just getting started in business or are a seasoned entrepreneur, this is a great listen – so get comfy and press play on this episode!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#562: Tax Strategies That Sound Illegal (But Aren’t) With Candy Valentino

13 april 2023 | 39 min

Simple strategies to build long-term wealth, save on taxes, and recession-proof your small business

Did you know that 73% of Americans say that their finances are the number one stressor in their life?

It’s true, sweet friend. Money (and lack thereof) is top of mind for the large majority of people -- more than family, or even work. I don’t know about you, but I think that statistic is quite concerning!

And I’ll be honest, if you’re worried about your finances -- and you want to make a change -- it’s really hard to know where to even begin.

It seems like there’s so many ‘financial gurus’ out there touting a “think and grow rich” mentality that, quite honestly, is just a bunch of fluff.

That’s what I love about my guest on today’s episode, business and finance expert Candy Valentino. She’ll be the first to admit that building long term wealth takes much more than positive thinking – it takes good old fashioned hard work.

She’s able to break down wealth creation with practical, actionable strategies that anyone can use. And the proof’s in the pudding, because it’s these exact strategies that she used to escape poverty, create a multi-million dollar empire, and become financially free by the age of 40.

I’m super excited to share this episode with you. Not only will you take away Candy’s essential wealth building strategies, but you’ll also hear:

The many tax benefits of having your own business (even if it’s a side hustle)
Tax strategies that can help you give as little to the IRS as possible
Whether or not starting a business during a recession is a good idea
Ways to recession-proof your small business

Just a heads up – you’ll probably want to take notes on this! So get comfy, open up that Google Doc and get ready for an incredibly informative conversation.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#561: Should Your Passion Stay A Hobby Or Become A Business?

11 april 2023 | 13 min

Why so many entrepreneurs get stuck trying to build a passion-based business

Have you ever been told that in order to be successful, you need to build a business that’s based on your passion? I’ve heard it time and time again, and I’ll be honest – this “advice” couldn’t be further from the truth.

When I first started my business, I wasn’t passionate about what I was doing. And [spoiler alert!] even these days I don’t wake up and think, “I’m so excited to help someone create a digital course today.”

Don’t get me wrong – I absolutely love serving my audience.

But instead of starting a business that was solely based on my passion, I started a business based on what I was good at. And by doing this, over the years I’ve built something that’s wildly successful, gives me freedom, and fulfills me.

So if you’re on the fence about whether or not to start a business because you’re not passionate about one specific thing, don’t let it stop you from moving forward.

And if you do have a passion for something – and are unsure if it should stay a hobby or become a business – there are definitely some things to consider, which you’ll hear in this episode.

You’ll also learn:

The questions you should ask yourself when you want to start a business
Why entrepreneurs with passion-based businesses often get stuck
How to define value you bring to the world with my Sweet Spot framework

This is a topic that I am, in fact, very *passionate* about – so I hope you enjoy it!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#560: Steal My Mini-Promo Strategy For A Quick Revenue Boost

6 april 2023 | 32 min

#559: Business Travel 101: 3 Things I Do To Set Myself Up For Success

4 april 2023 | 20 min

#558: What I Include In My Brand Voice Guide (& How It’s Served Me Really Well)

30 mars 2023 | 39 min

Grab the freebie for this episode here! >>> The Brand Voice Guide Outline You Wish You Had Sooner If you want to develop your brand voice, here’s where you should start

When people think of a brand, they often think of what they look like visually – from its logo to its color palette.

But one often overlooked (and equally important) aspect to a business’s brand is its voice. Your brand voice is your brand’s unique personality -- what you sound like to the rest of the world -- and it’s oh-so important when it comes to standing out from the crowd.

One way to figure out if you have a well-established brand voice is by asking yourself, “If my logo or visual branding didn’t appear alongside my content, would people even know it's me or my company?”

Be honest! If the answer is no, then you might need to spend some time developing your brand voice.

Once you’ve really honed in on how you want to sound to your audience, you can create a brand voice guide – which will serve as your guiding star when it comes to all things content creation.

In fact, my brand voice guide has been a crucial part of how I’ve been able to have my team, and various contractors, write content that sounds like I could have written it myself.

In this episode, I’m diving into what I include in my own brand voice guide, along with exercises you can do to hone in and perfect your own. You’ll learn:

Why your voice is such an important piece of your brand
What I include in my brand voice guide, plus a few examples
Exercises to help you develop your own brand voice
Examples of companies that have a well-developed brand voice

Plus much, much more! I promise this episode is a great listen for any business owner looking to polish their branding, whether you’re just getting started or have been in the game for a while.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[01:39] Your brand voice should be consistent throughout all of your communication.
[08:35] Get an NDA signed before sharing your brand voice guide with employees or contractors.
[09:46] The first section should be an introduction to your business and the value you offer. This is also known as a mission or brand statement.
[11:37] The next section is an overview of your audience, or ideal customer Avatar. Include 5 to 10 bullet points from demographics to desires and fears.
[13:16] The next section is your brand values. Brand values help you frame your brand story in a way that resonates with your target audience.
[15:53] The next section is your biography. It's important that you determine how you want people to talk about you.
[18:09] The next section is your brand personality. This is how you want to sound to your audience.
[25:52] You can also include a section on your tone, or the overall attitude and mood that you create in your communication.
[30:07] You can use the “this but never that” formula to describe your tone.
[33:14] The final section is essential content. Grab some A+ examples of your own content that can be used as a reference.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#557: 4 Popular Pieces Of Business Advice I’m Sick & Tired Of Hearing

28 mars 2023 | 17 min

How I’ve completely ignored these 4 pieces of popular business advice and still found success

Have you ever been given a piece of business advice that makes you roll your eyes?

I know I have. In fact, there are four pieces of advice that I’ve heard on repeat over the years that I believe can be more detrimental than helpful -- especially if you’re first getting started in business.

The thing is, this is really popular business advice. You see it all over Facebook and Instagram, it’s published in business media outlets, and I can’t even tell you how many times I’ve heard a successful entrepreneur say it Live from stage, or while presenting a webinar.

Sure, I’ll bet it’s been helpful for some people. But for me, it’s been more discouraging than motivating.

And because this advice is so mainstream (cough cough, played out), it’s made me feel like following it is the only way to be successful in business – and I’m here to tell you that it’s not.

So, sweet friend, in this episode, I’m flipping the script -- and it’s my hope that if this advice has left a salty taste in your mouth, like it has mine, you might be able to gain a new perspective.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:18] As entrepreneurs, we receive a lot of advice. I'm going to talk about advice that I'm sick and tired of hearing.
[06:45] #1: Follow your passion. This does more harm than good. For most of us, following your passion isn't reality.
[09:10] #2: If you want to be successful, you have to constantly be learning. Consuming a ton of content without taking dedicated action isn't going to get you anywhere.
[10:40] #3: In order to succeed you have to hustle. Sacrificing everything that’s important to you is a recipe for burnout.
[14:02] #4: You've got to be fearless. We should listen to rational fears that are wired into our brains to protect us.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#556: How To Take Your Small Business To Multi-million Dollar Success with Donald Miller

23 mars 2023 | 40 min

#555: The Mindset I Adopt When I Don't Know The First Step & Have To Figure It Out

21 mars 2023 | 18 min

99% of entrepreneurship is having to ‘figure things out’ – here’s the process I use when I don’t know where to start

I don’t know if anyone has ever told you this, but 99% of entrepreneurship is figuring things out when you have no idea what to do.

That’s not an exact statistic, but you get the point.

I can’t tell you how many times I've set a goal without having the slightest clue on the first step to take. And I’m talking about big goals – like writing a book, and adding an entire sales department to my team.

For me, having to get a little scrappy in order to figure something out is one of the most exciting parts of being an entrepreneur. I like being resourceful, I like learning new things, and I also get a ton of satisfaction out of creating something from nothing.

But the thing is, the fact that ‘figuring it out’ is exciting and not overwhelming to me is because I have a very specific mindset I adopt when I’m facing a new challenge.

And in this episode, I’m going to share what that mindset is. You’ll also hear:

Why being resourceful is the key to figuring anything out
How to create an identity around the fact that you’re a resourceful person
The specific steps I take when I’m clueless on how to accomplish my goals
The mantra I tell myself when I start to feel overwhelmed

If you’ve ever not done something because you don’t know how to do it, then this episode is for you, sweet friend. So pop in those earpods and give this episode your full attention!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:38] The first thing to do when you don't know what to do is to create an identity around being a resourceful person.
[08:18] Break your goal into small segments or phases. Take small steps and as you complete them move on to the next one.
[09:55] If you're not sure how to do something, reach out to someone who has already done it. Then put together a plan and get into action.
[13:18] Clarity comes with each step and action creates momentum.
[14:24] When you embrace mistakes, that’s when the magic happens.
[16:22] Homework: List five things that you've always wanted to do in your business but haven't because you don't know how.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#554: Proven Webinar Selling Strategies That Aren’t Sleazy Or Pushy with Colin Boyd

16 mars 2023 | 62 min

Learn to communicate in a way that converts with one of the top virtual selling experts

I’ll be honest – I don’t think selling, or pitching, comes easily to anyone.

Even if you’re a super confident and likable person, communicating in a way that converts is a skill that most people really need to dedicate time to learning, especially when you’re selling virtually.

Long ago, when I first started hosting webinars, I dreaded the time that I had to start pitching. The last thing I wanted to do was come off as pushy, so I would get a lot of anxiety around promoting my products.

It’s gotten easier with time, but man-oh-man do I wish this learning curve is something I could have fast-tracked!

That’s why I invited Colin Boyd to the show. He advises some of the biggest names in the world to confidently offer value and create webinars that convert, and in this episode, he’s spilling his strategies!

In this episode, Colin shares:

Why selling is all about helping your audience make a decision
Tangible ways to become more confident when you sell
How to successfully pitch without sounding pushy or salesy
What a conversion story is and how you can identify yours

… Plus so much more! So if the thought of pitching during your webinar has your stomach in knots, be sure to tune into this episode because it’s packed full of strategies that will help you sell like a pro.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[09:42] Colin shares how he got his start.
[12:45] Colin discovered that marketing and speaking are fundamental to business.
[15:02] A webinar that sells is about helping people make a decision as opposed to just gathering more information.
[19:08] The offer opens the door for your potential customers to enter a transformational space.
[22:01] There are three levels of certainty within an offer..
[24:20] Stories are a big part of a webinar. The audience sees their story in a conversion story.
[27:30] Conversion story framework: 1. Are you like me? 2. Can you lead me? 3. Is there a path I can follow?
[30:16] Use a conversion story instead of an origin story. Find a moment in your life when you had a transformational moment with what you're offering.
[34:18] All you need is one irresistible presentation that you can refine and scale to create the business of your dreams.
[37:41] Sell the experience of your course, not the process of it. Describe the results, not the steps.
[41:23] Too much information is one of the biggest mistakes in webinars. Infusion selling is speaking your content in a way that sells your offer.
[49:05] Q&As should be prepared.
[51:55] When creating a webinar, find 3 or 4 key ideas to share.
[55:40] Ask: 1. What beliefs do I need to shift in order for people to make a commitment? 2. What's something valuable I can share? 3. How can I show the vehicle in a really unique and simple way?

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#553: Is Calling Your Team Your “Family” Harming Your Company?

14 mars 2023 | 19 min

According to Harvard Business Review, there are toxic effects of branding your workplace a “family”

Have you ever worked for a company and part of the internal culture was for team members to call each other ‘family?’

I know I have – and until very recently, I never really put a whole lot of thought into it. To be honest, I always looked at it as something positive, as if being part of the ‘family’ meant that I was valued more.

In my own business, I’m super guilty of calling my team a ‘work family’, and of course, it’s been well-intentioned.

But after reading this really insightful article in the Harvard Business Review, I’m starting to realize the negative effects this might have on someone.

Not only can it make it more difficult for your team to set healthy boundaries, but it also can make parting ways harder, which is something I’ve experienced firsthand.

The article brings up a lot of good points – all of which you’ll hear in this episode. Nowadays, I’m trying to figure out how I can make my company feel inclusive, foster a closeness, and set boundaries, without calling us a family.

I’ll raise my hand and be the first one to say that this is something I’m still working on, but it’s a big goal of mine in the coming year.

Tune in to hear my thoughts, and what I’m doing to shift the focus from “We’re in this together” to “We’re working towards the same goal.”

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:26] I love the idea of my team being my work family. I love us feeling close, having each other's backs, and celebrating each other outside of work.
[06:23] A family never disconnects from each other. With employees, that should never be the case.
[08:23] I used to send messages later than I would like. Now, I pause and schedule the message for the morning.
[10:57] Calling your team a family can make it more difficult to set boundaries.
[13:53] Shift your mentality from a place of ‘we're all in this together’ to ‘we're all working on a similar purpose.’
[15:09] There has been a recalibration of work and many people have been quitting their jobs because they want more out of life.
[17:24] I want a lot of love in my company, but I also want to set boundaries so people don’t feel like they have to eat, breathe, and live in this company.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#552: How To Find, Hire, & Onboard A Content Support Contractor

9 mars 2023 | 53 min

Grab the freebie for this episode by heading here! There’s a lot that goes into hiring a content support contractor – here’s where to start

If you’re at a point in your business where you could use a little extra help creating content, you should 100% consider hiring a contractor.

Not only will it allow you to spend more time in your zone of genius, but you can also bring them on for just a few hours or on an as-needed basis, which isn’t an option with a full-time employee.

Over the years, I’ve relied on skilled content contractors to create content for my audience. Under my (and my team’s) direction, they’ve done everything from writing email copy to producing high-traffic lead magnets, and more!

But here’s the thing. It takes quite a bit of work and lots of communication to bring on a content support contractor and have it work successfully.

Luckily, I’ve got it boiled down to a fine science – so I know exactly what I’m looking for, where to find that person, and how to onboard them so the relationship is a win/win for everyone involved.

And that’s what I’m diving into in this episode. You’ll hear:

Why hiring a contractor over a full-time employee can be more beneficial in the beginning
The importance of providing lots of support and resources for your contractor
The best places to find a content support contractor, and how to vet them
How to onboard contractors and offer constructive feedback

So if you’re thinking about hiring a contractor to help you create content, be sure to tune in – because these strategies will definitely set you in the right direction.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[08:28] Set realistic goals and timelines with contractors, because they will have other clients. Be clear on how many hours you will need them.
[11:13] Doing everything yourself will lead to grief and overwhelm. When it's time to scale, you have to believe other people can do it better than you.
[15:33] Another person can offer a fresh perspective with your content.
[16:29] We've found some people on Fiverr, Create & Cultivate, Creative Mornings, and LinkedIn, but referrals are my favorite way to find contractors.
[19:23] Ask for samples or a paid project test run. Give them time to ask questions and set a deadline. Assign a task to familiarize them with your content.
[23:05] We have an Asana checklist to make sure we have everything we need from our contractors, and that they’re provided with access to what they need.
[27:00] Agree on how often you'll meet and if it will be virtual or in person. Provide your voice and brand guides up front to avoid extra editing.
[30:34] Ask how they prefer to receive feedback and share your feedback style.
[39:45] We use Asana to set up projects and tasks for contractors. Include all of the necessary support documents and be as specific as possible.
[45:16] Make sure they create their work on your Google drive. You want access to all of your stuff created by them.
[48:27] Action steps: Get clear on the hours and budget. Begin your search and onboard with everything I've shared. Give them a project test run.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#551: The Anti-Niche: Jen Hatmaker's Approach To Creating A Highly Engaged Community

8 mars 2023 | 62 min

How going against conventional business wisdom has served Jen Hatmaker really well

My guest on this episode, Jen Hatmaker, has created something that so many personal brands strive to create – and that’s a highly engaged community that’s in it for the long-haul.

I’m not talking about a community that sticks with you for a couple years. I’m talking about a community that stays with you for decades.

Jen has been an entrepreneur since the early 2000s, and one of the key pieces of her longstanding success as an author, podcaster, and speaker is the band of fiercely loyal women who’ve grown alongside her through the many seasons of life, and business.

And here’s the thing that’s really interesting. Jen has created her community by not tying herself to a specific niche or platform – which as you probably know, goes against most conventional business wisdom, including my own.

As you’ll hear her say in this interview, “[My community] may not come to me for one specific thing, but they do come to me for all the things” – and that, my friend, is something to be admired.

This conversation was so much fun, and opened my eyes up to a lot of different perspectives. Tune in to hear:

How to create a business that’s truly community-focused
Why perceiving yourself as a ‘part’ of the community, instead of the leader of it, helps build trust
Why being relatable and transparent helps you build a loyal audience

… Plus so much more! Jen is highly entertaining, and it’s my hope that you will learn so much from her, just as I have.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[07:28] Jen Hatmaker is a writer, speaker, and podcaster who loves to serve women.
[11:53] Jen’s offerings have evolved from books to a podcast, book club, and a course.
[16:00] Jen shares what it means to have a community based business.
[25:05] Navigating her divorce publicly was very challenging. Instead of pretending it wasn’t happening, she chose to be authentic.
[30:34] Life happens. Create a team that can take care of your business when you can't be there.
[39:07] If you're lonely, others are too. Be the initiator and make friends with people who may be lonely too.
[43:49] Jen took her first solo trip after getting her divorce, which was empowering. She went to Maine for a month and vowed to do a trip each year.
[52:07] It's been a joy for Jen to create a business based on real life.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#550: The Cost of Context Switching & How You Can Minimize It

7 mars 2023 | 11 min

Toggling between apps negatively impacts your focus – here’s how to minimize it (and still get stuff done)

On any given day, I have a number of apps open on my computer and my phone to help me run my business -- from Asana, to Voxer, to Kajabi where I host my digital courses.

Thank goodness for these platforms, because let’s be real – even just ten years ago, having an online business was much more difficult because this sort of technology just wasn’t available.

And while these applications allow online businesses to run seamlessly, I recently read a study that reported that the average person spends five work weeks – or nine percent of their annual time at work – context switching, a.k.a reorienting themselves after toggling to something new.

That’s a lot of wasted time, and beyond that, constantly having to readjust takes a toll on your ability to focus.

This article really got me thinking about some different ways that I could minimize context switching in my workday -- and since I’ve put some of them into practice, I’ve noticed that I’m much better able to stay in the zone.

In this episode, I’m sharing the four ways I avoid context switching throughout the day, and how it’s helped me to be more productive.

So close out of all those apps on your phone, pop in your earpods, and get ready to focus on this informative episode.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:22] Context switching is going from one application to another. Average users toggle between apps nearly 1,200 times a day.
[04:41] Context switching increases the brain's production of cortisol.
[06:31] I plan out my ideal work week and set themes for each work day.
[07:22] I have guidelines in place for Slack. I don't want my team to have to stop and check the app every time there's a notification.
[08:11] Look at all the tools you use and how you use them to decide if there's any way you could simplify the process.
[08:47] The most important thing you can do is give yourself permission to stay focused and in the zone. Setting timers is a great way to do this.
[10:47] Homework: What do you plan to do in order to reduce context switching? DM @AmyPorterfield with one thing you're going to do in the next 24 hours.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#549: Cut Through The Noise: How To Create A Unique Personal Brand With Rory Vaden

2 mars 2023 | 59 min

Simple strategies to build your personal brand, monetize your message, and increase your influence

If you’re first getting started with your personal brand, you’re probably wondering how the heck you’re going to cut through all the noise and position yourself as the go-to leader in your space.

I get it – the digital world is crowded, and getting to that point can seem pretty overwhelming. But the good news is, it’s more possible to have an influential personal brand today than ever before.

Now, I’ll come right out and say that there’s a lot more that goes into brand-building than having a Tik Tok video go viral.

Sure, that might get you a few more social media followers in the short-term, but in order to build a brand that will stand the test of time, you need to be much more strategic about it.

That’s why I invited Rory Vaden to the show – because when it comes to personal branding, he’s the guy you want to listen to. >> Be sure to grab your free brand call with his team here!

Rory is a New York Times bestselling author, Inc. Magazine Top 100 Leadership Speaker, the Co-Founder of Brand Builders Group and the host of the highly rated Influential Personal Brand Podcast.

In this episode, he’ll share simple brand-building strategies you can implement today, including:

The greatest secret to growing a highly engaged audience online
Simple strategies to become a well-established leader in your space
The Brand DNA Helix and how you can use it to grow your business
How to increase your influence and monetize your message

I absolutely loved this conversation with Rory, and learned so much from him. I hope you enjoy it as much as I did.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#548: 5 Lessons From The Road: My Podcast Tour For Two Weeks Notice

28 februari 2023 | 25 min

After doing 100 podcast interviews about my new book, here’s what I learned

To call the podcast tour I did to promote my book, Two Weeks Notice, a whirlwind would be an understatement.

I did 100 podcast interviews (yes, you read that right!) over the course of a few months, traveling to multiple different cities throughout the United States.

It was both rewarding and exhausting… and I won’t lie, I had to pinch myself a couple of times, because writing a book – and then going on the road to promote it – has literally been a dream come true for me.

Now if you’ve been with me for a while, you probably know that I’ve learned so much throughout the entire experience of writing, pre-selling, and promoting a book. The podcast tour was no exception.

In true Amy Porterfield fashion, I prepared as must as I possibly could. I didn’t want to sound like a broken record, and it was also incredibly important to me to share its message in a way that was really meaningful for listeners.

I’m happy to report that all of my preparation paid off – but of course, there were some things I learned along the way (and in retrospect) that I wanted to share with you.

In this episode, you’ll hear the 5 biggest lessons I learned, which I can guarantee will be helpful if you write a book, or do a podcast tour, at some point in your journey. And what’s great is you can also apply the lessons I share to other areas of your business, too.

So pop in your earpods, cozy on up and tune in!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#547: My Readers Have Spoken: What Two Weeks Notice Meant To Them

23 februari 2023 | 46 min

#546: Your Why Is Louder Than Your Worries: How To Overcome Self-Doubt

21 februari 2023 | 23 min

When your inner monologue starts to get nasty, remember that YOU ARE ENOUGH

I’m going to let you in on something that I don’t really talk about a whole lot.

And it’s that I can be downright mean to myself during times when I should be proud of myself.

When people that I care about are happy for me or congratulating me for something I’ve achieved, I’m often thinking of things that I could have done better instead of giving myself a pat on the back.

Now, I know that this part of my personality is part of what fuels my ambition, pushes me to improve, and to better serve my audience.

But I’ll be honest -- it’s no way to live, and I can’t ever imagine telling someone else some of the things that the little voice inside my head has told me over the years.

So when my inner monologue starts to get really nasty, I have to nip it in the bud -- and I do that by remembering my Why.

Your Why, my sweet friend, can help you overcome all the obstacles that you face in your entrepreneurial journey – during the times that you’re down on yourself, when you’re worried, and when you want to just throw in the towel and quit.

In this episode, you’ll hear my Whys, and exactly how I use them to flip the script on my self-doubt and negativity.

You’ll also hear two incredible stories from my own students, and how they’ve used their Whys to persevere through incredibly difficult experiences in their lives and businesses.

So get comfy, grab a Kleenex, and get ready for an incredibly heartfelt episode.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#545: Behind-the-Scenes: My 4-Phase Book Marketing Blueprint Revealed

16 februari 2023 | 32 min

#544: The Pros & Cons Of A Personal Vs. A Company Brand

14 februari 2023 | 17 min

The decision to have a personal brand or a company brand is a strategic one – here’s what you should consider

If you’re thinking about starting a business, have you thought about whether you want to have a personal brand or a company brand?

To clarify, a personal brand is one like mine. I’m the face of the company, my name is my website URL, and it’s me that you hear on my podcast. A company brand is one where the business is completely independent of your name – like Starbucks or Kajabi.

When I first started my business many moons ago, it was clear to me that a personal brand was the way to go.

But as my business continues to evolve, I’m getting curious about what it would look like to transition to a company brand – and if that’s even possible – because let’s be real, I don’t see myself doing Instagram Reels at 90 years old.

In fact, my dear friend Michael Hyatt recently transitioned his personal brand to Full Focus, and it’s been a really great move for his business, and his personal life.

I won’t lie, seeing him do this has me thinking about my own future, and I’m breaking down exactly what’s on my mind in this episode. Tune in to hear:

The pros and cons of a personal brand and a company brand
Why I decided to have a personal brand vs. a company brand when starting my business
The roadblocks I’m encountering at this point in my entrepreneurial journey
What new and established business owners should consider when it comes to their brand

This is a great listen for anyone who is thinking about starting their own business or already has one.

Oh, and when it comes to my personal brand, don’t worry -- I’m not going anywhere anytime soon.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#543: An Identity Shift To Unlock Your Greatest Potential With Anthony Trucks

9 februari 2023 | 56 min

Learn the simple framework for achieving both success and fulfillment

As entrepreneurs, we often measure success by how much money we make, how many followers we have on Instagram, or material possessions – because let’s face it, we live in a culture that places a lot of value on those sorts of things.

But the truth is, people with all the money, success, and fame in the world are often unfulfilled. Think about it -- how many times have you heard of (or known) a person who seems to have everything, but isn’t happy?

The good news is, it’s possible to be a goal-crushing entrepreneur without sacrificing things that bring you joy in your life. Yes, sweet friend, you can achieve success and be fulfilled at the same time.

And my guest Anthony Trucks has a really simple framework for it.

Anthony is a former NFL Athlete, American Ninja Warrior, international speaker, host of the “Aww Shift” podcast, author of the “Identity Shift” book, and the founder of Identity Shift coaching.

He uses cutting-edge research in science and psychology to upgrade how you operate so you can elevate your life and business to reach your full potential.

In this episode, Anthony shares:

How to use fulfillment as the true measurement of your success
The two types of identities that determine success or failure
How to identify the identity you align with, and use it to your advantage
A solution-based process for finding success and creating work that inspires you

I really mean it when I say that Anthony is an impressive guy, so you don’t want to miss this one. I hope you get as much out of this conversation as I did!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#542: Why I Show Up Online As 100% Myself

7 februari 2023 | 14 min

Authenticity and the digital world: How to get clear on what you’re all about

If you know me, then you know that I have a wildly vocal inner monologue that often tells me things that aren’t true.

For instance, when I get a negative comment or criticism online, I’ve got to take a deep breath, center myself, and block some of those negative thoughts that start to creep in.

It’s been something I’ve had to practice over the years, especially as I’m continuing to put myself more and more out there online.

And one of the things that has really helped me do this is remembering that I cannot be for everyone. Not everybody that crosses my path online is going to like me, and guess what? That’s A-OK.

This is something I learned from my dear friend, Jasmine Star, who's been one of my entrepreneurial besties for as long as I can remember.

You only need a small fraction of people to resonate with you -- and heck -- buy from you, in order to build a successful online business.

That’s why I make it a point to show up as authentically as I can online – and being true to myself in this way makes me even prouder of the business I’m creating.

It requires that you ask yourself some questions to really figure out who you are and what you stand for – and that’s what this episode is all about.

Tune in to hear my thoughts on authenticity in the digital world and what you can do to stay true to yourself.

Happy listening!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#541: Science-Backed Data On How Thoughts Influence Your Success with Michael Hyatt

2 februari 2023 | 50 min

Michael Hyatt shares new research from his new book, Mind Your Mindset

I’ll be the first one to admit that my thoughts – aka the little voice in my head -- have gotten in my way more times than I care to admit.

It’s told me terrible stories like, “You’re not good enough,” and “You can’t do this” – and guess what? Those narratives, even though they’re not true, are all rooted in past experiences I’ve had in my life.

According to research spearheaded by my mentor Michael Hyatt and his daughter Megan, it’s not unusual for 50% of our memories to be false or distorted. And yet we create stories around what’s possible based on those faulty memories.

Now, here’s the good news. It’s scientifically proven that you can engineer your thoughts for success, and in this episode, you’ll hear how.

Michael joins me to talk about performance psychology, neuroscience, and the cognitive science around success, which is all uncovered in his new book Mind Your Mindset.

Tune in to hear:

How and why your thoughts influence your success
3 simple steps you can take to rewire your negative thoughts
What to do when that negative mindset continues to persist
Examples of how everyday people have engineered their mindset for success

… Plus, much, much more! So if you’re sick and tired of old stories getting in your way, pop in your earbuds and press play! Trust me, you don’t want to miss this one.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#540: How to Empower Your Students to Build Self-Trust

31 januari 2023 | 33 min

#539: 5 Strategic Launch Pivots That Boosted My Course Enrollments

26 januari 2023 | 40 min

Online marketing strategies you can use for a wildly successful course launch

Warning: This episode is juicy.

And when I say juicy, I mean jam-packed with online marketing strategies that you can use to boost enrollments for your digital course in a really big way.

In fact, these are the exact strategies that I used for my most recent Digital Course Academy launch, and let me tell you, they are *fire.*

If you’ve been with me for a while, you know that our previous DCA launch left us a little underwhelmed, so for this most recent one, we decided to shake things up a little bit.

We made tweaks to our marketing, community, and customer support strategies, and holy smokes, I’m so glad that we did.

In this episode, you’re going to get all the strategic details on the pivots we made – down to the why, the how, and the results.

You’ll also learn how you can apply the lessons we learned to your own business, whether you’ve had zero course launches, or a handful of them.

What you’re about to hear will help you to plan a wildly successful launch, or majorly enhance the one you already have planned – Scout’s honor!

P.S. You’re definitely going to want to take notes on this one. So open up that Google Doc and get ready to type your heart out!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:00] I'm revealing a few strategies that we made in my September Digital Course Academy launch that made all the difference.
[05:41] We moved the pre-launch runway quiz to the top of the funnel. We also moved away from scheduled Facebook Live videos.
[06:07] Some of our best ad costs are from quiz leads.Putting the quiz at the top of the funnel allowed us to fill up our list with great leads.
[11:10] I offered three different surprise Lives hosted on Zoom. Each one had a different call to action at the end.
[19:32] Sometimes I try marketing strategies that make me feel a little anxious. I'm willing to get feedback and then evaluate how I feel about certain strategies.
[23:03] We made three big changes to our Facebook community.
[31:16] We were able to completely pivot our customer experience on the fly. That’s why I always say leave room for magic.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#538: Business Networking Lessons From The World's Most Connected Influencer, Joe Polish

25 januari 2023 | 67 min

#537: How To Have Difficult Conversations With Your Team

24 januari 2023 | 16 min

#536: 2 Million Followers in 2 Years: The Power of Video to Explode your Brand with Shadè Zahrai

19 januari 2023 | 56 min

Tangible, actionable strategies to grow your business through video

If you’ve been with me for a while, you know that doing videos on social media has always been a bit of a challenge for me. I get a little bit self-conscious and let’s just say being a perfectionist doesn’t help either.

But here’s the thing. I know that harnessing the power of video can literally make your business -- and your social media following -- explode (in the best way possible).

My guest in this episode, Shadè Zahrai, knows this all too well. As principal and director of Influenceo Global – a positive-leadership consultancy – Shadè consults, trains, and coaches leaders and teams from startups to Fortune-500s.

When the pandemic hit, Shadè had to get scrappy. She started experimenting with videos on social media, and even though she didn’t love being on camera at first, she started seeing a lot of traction.

And when I say traction, I mean she gained 2 million followers. Yes, two million. She took her business global, started securing Fortune 500 clients, and the rest is history.

In this episode, Shadè shares the steps she took to get there, including:

Tangible, actionable strategies to grow your business through video
How you can use the “5 C’s” to leverage social media and video
Tips for making your videos pop and gain traction
3 mind pits you should be aware of and tangible ways to overcome them

This is an action-packed episode, so buckle up!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#535: Losing An Employee: How To Learn From The Experience, Let Go, & Move On

17 januari 2023 | 27 min

4 things you should always remember when a team member quits

In my many years of entrepreneurship, one of the most challenging things I’ve experienced is having a team member quit.

If you’ve ever been through this before, I’m sure you can relate. Afterall, your business is your baby – so when someone decides to hit the ground running in another direction, it’s hard not to take it personally.

Recently, I had 3 people leave in a very short period of time. And even though I’ve lost employees before, this time was a little different because I wasn’t really expecting it.

I won’t lie, it’s been an emotionally difficult experience. But here’s the thing – it’s also brought some really important learning lessons to the forefront – lessons that I know I’ll take with me for years to come.

In this episode, I share what those lessons are, along with how I’ve managed to let go of the experience and move on.

It’s my hope that this will help you immensely as you continue to grow your business, expand your team, and experience everything (both good and bad) that comes along with it.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[01:43] Losing a team member is one of the hardest parts about entrepreneurship.
[02:50] We recently lost three people on our marketing team. The whole experience brought some really important lessons to the forefront.
[03:47] As an entrepreneur, you will lose people. Most of us don't love the HR part of being an entrepreneur.
[05:24] You need employees to grow and scale your business. You can't do big amazing things all alone.
[06:10] Losing employees is simply part of business. You can't take it personally if you want to keep moving forward.
[08:34] The Entrepreneurial Operating System (EOS) says that you cannot create a role for someone else. Find someone to fill a role that makes good business sense.
[12:18] We had one of the people who left fill out an exit interview. We were surprised by what she wrote. As managers, we need to ask the right questions.
[14:52] Make sure that you're very clear on the role that you're hiring for in the first place.
[17:15] Slow down when it's time to hire someone. What are they going to do? Are they able to make decisions? Does the team understand their role?
[18:06] Even though losing an employee is emotionally and financially difficult, there's always a lesson in the experience.
[20:02] Always conduct an exit interview. Ask: What would have made your job better? What would make the company better? What could I have done better?

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#534: Your A-Z Guide For Creating A Highly Engaged Paid Online Community

12 januari 2023 | 39 min

Grab the freebie for this episode by heading here! My Paid Facebook Bootcamp had a 66% engagement rate – here’s what we did

As my dear listener, I wanted to share something I’m incredibly proud of with you -- and it’s that one of my recent Paid Bootcamps, Course Confident, had a 66% engagement rate in our private Facebook Group.

Yes, you read that right – 66%.

Now if you know me, you know that I’m not usually one to toot my own horn. But that engagement rate is outstanding, and I owe it all to some new strategies that we tried out at Team Porterfield for the very first time.

From having a very clear purpose from the get-go, to creating a very special shared language for members to use throughout the Paid Bootcamp, there was a lot of thought that went into our strategy.

And guess what? I’m walking you through every single thing that we did in order to get people talking to each other and excited about what’s ahead, along with how we stayed organized throughout the entire thing so it went off without a hitch.

I’m even giving you access to all of the templates we used to create our Bootcamp calendar and post copy, click here to snag that valuable free resource!

But just a heads up -- this episode is an extension of #532: Free Vs. Paid Bootcamps: Lessons Learned That Might Help You Decide What’s Best For You. So if you haven’t listened to that yet, pop on over there before listening to this.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#533: How To Set (& Enforce) Boundaries As An Entrepreneur

10 januari 2023 | 20 min

Establishing healthy boundaries (and sticking to them) is the key to getting ahead in business

As an entrepreneur, setting boundaries can be really difficult because you often feel like you need to do things (that you don’t necessarily want to do) in order to create the business you’ve always dreamt of.

Sure, you could speak at that Live event and get in front of a new audience – but it would mean you’d miss your daughter’s dance recital.

Or, you could go on that much-anticipated girls’ weekend with your BFFs, but it’s smack dab in the middle of your pre-launch runway so you know you’d be distracted the entire time.

Figuring out where to draw the line with certain things in your business (and your personal life) is tricky because there’s not always a clear answer.

Believe me, this is something I’ve struggled with over the years – but now that I’m 14 years into entrepreneurship, I’ve *finally* figured out a way to establish healthy boundaries, and most importantly, stick to them.

And here’s the thing. If I can do it, you can too – and that’s why I wanted to share my best boundary-setting tips with you in this episode.

Tune in to hear:

Why resentment is an indicator that you need to set more boundaries
My process for setting healthy boundaries that I can actually enforce
What it means to ‘choose your hard’ and why that’s important

…. Plus much, much more! This is important to hear no matter what stage of business you’re in. So buckle up and get ready to become a boss at setting healthy boundaries.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#532: Free Vs. Paid Bootcamps: Lessons Learned That Might Help You Decide What’s Best For You

5 januari 2023 | 37 min

After years of running free Facebook bootcamps, my team and I decided that we needed to make some changes.

Not only was engagement plummeting in our free groups, but we noticed that people were just joining so they could spam everyone.

If you know me, you know that my goal in all that I do is to serve my audience at a really high level.

No matter how they land in my world, I want them to walk away with valuable content that helps them achieve their business goals -- so the fact that so many people were joining and quickly losing interest (despite all that I was putting out there) simply wasn’t going to cut it.

I’d heard good things about paid bootcamps from some of my peers (and also some of my more advanced students!) so we decided to give them a whirl.

It was a totally new marketing strategy for us, so we went into it with an open mind and a willingness to learn.

I won’t lie to you – we had LOTS of learning lessons – which I’m about to share with you in this episode.

You’ll hear exactly what we did – along with what we got right, what we got wrong, and how the experience will inform what we do moving forward.

So if you’ve ever been curious about paid bootcamps, grab your pen and paper and get ready to take some notes!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:57] We recently questioned whether our free bootcamps were working as well as they used to. This year we decided to host two paid bootcamps, and we learned six lessons.
[05:33] I'm not letting go of webinars. I tested a paid bootcamp into a webinar, and I'm glad I did. It all comes down to adding the right kind of value.
[06:27] 1. We knew we needed to shake things up. Our engagement was dropping. It was time to freshen things up and learn something new.
[10:06] 2. Recruiting the best bootcamp members. We want people who will gain the most from the experience by being fully engaged and ready to do the work.
[12:09] When people pay, they pay attention. SUSCRIBED was $37.00 and Course Confident was $47.00. There was also a $97 VIP option.
[13:44] 3. It's all about the projections you make. We didn't hit our goals. If you set a goal for something you've never done, and you don't hit that goal, it's not a failure.
[17:10] 4. We saw our engagement soar. People showed up and were far more invested than I've ever seen. Our overall average engagement was 65%.
[18:30] We gave people the exact action steps that they needed to do next. We offered accountability groups, and even had our DCA advisors share videos of how they put the lessons into action.
[20:41] 5. A great way to qualify people for the next step to get what they need. I extended the invitation to continue on with one of my programs for the people who were ready. Super low pressure.
[24:45] 6. Survey the bootcampers to find out what they really want. Ask people what they want their bonus training to be about (three options) and turn it into a masterclass.
[27:54] In 2021, free bootcamps converted around 5%. This year we converted at 25%. If you were in one of my bootcamps, thank you for putting your trust in me.
[29:43] Action items. Take inventory of what you're doing right now. 1. What's working? 2. What's not working? 3. Set a date to try something new. 4. Dive in and plan something brand new.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#531: The 4-Step Checklist I Use Before Adding Something New To Your Business

3 januari 2023 | 19 min

What I do to ‘check myself' when I have a shiny new idea

If I had a dollar for every time I had a new idea for my business, I’d be a very rich woman. And I’ll be honest, one of the most fun (and rewarding) parts of being an entrepreneur is the opportunity to experiment and try new things.

But one of the biggest lessons I’ve learned over the years is that you shouldn’t always go full steam ahead on adding new offers to your business -- whether it be a course, a workshop, Live or Virtual event, or something else.

It’s smart to err on the side of caution, and really evaluate whether it’s going to be something that adds value to your audience, and increases your bottom line.

And here’s why:

If you spin the wheels trying to make every idea that you have happen, you’re going to lose focus on something that might already be working really well.

Now, there are certainly times when you should add something new to your business. I’ve done this many times.

But every time I have a shiny new idea that I just can’t stop thinking about, I force myself to take a pause, and run through my simple, 4-step ‘checklist’ to make sure that it’s really something that is going to benefit my business.

And guess what? I’m sharing that exact 4-step checklist with you in this episode, so you can use it whenever you find yourself in a similar situation.

So grab your notebook and be sure to take notes, because what you’re about to hear could save you a lot of time and money in the long run.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#530: Exclusive Sneak Peek: A Chapter From Two Weeks Notice (My Book!)

29 december 2022 | 39 min

Listen to Two Weeks Notice; Chapter 2: Unbossing: How To Give Your Notice

Picture this:

It’s a Sunday night. You’ve just enjoyed dinner, and now it’s time to relax and unwind with a glass of red and a true crime documentary on the couch.

But just as you sit down, snuggle up with a blanket and reach for the tv remote, it hits you. You know what I’m talking about.

The Sunday Scaries.

AKA, that queasy feeling you get in the pit of your stomach that shows up like clockwork because you’re dreading the work week ahead.

I won’t lie, when I was working a 9 to 5 job, I got this feeling almost every week – and it was not enjoyable. I dreamt of a life where I was excited by my work and one where I wasn’t beholden to someone else’s time.

More than anything in the world, I wanted freedom.

If you can relate to this at all -- and know deep in your soul that you are meant to be your own boss (and live a life where the Sunday Scaries are not even a thing) -- then this episode is for you.

Because in it, I give you a sneak peek of Chapter 2 from my book, Two Weeks Notice: Find the Courage to Quit Your Job, Make More Money, Work Where You Want, and Change the World, which is called “Unbossing: How To Give Your Notice” – and guess what? You’re going to hear the exact steps you can take to start moving toward the entrepreneurial life of your dreams.

It’s also full chock-full of lessons I’ve learned over the years and stories from myself and my students.

So pop in those earbuds, and get ready to be inspired.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#529: My Favorite End-of-Year Journal Prompts Revealed (& Yours To Take!)

27 december 2022 | 24 min

#528: From My Students To Your Ears: List Growth Questions Answered

22 december 2022 | 68 min

A sneak peek into my List Builders Society Monthly Q&A

The number one thing that stops people in their tracks when it comes to growing their business is that they don’t have an email list.

If I could shout this from the rooftops, I would – because it’s that important.

But the thing is, trying to figure out what your audience wants, and getting to know them intimately overnight just doesn’t automatically happen -- so when it comes to growing your email list, there are usually a lot of questions.

And that’s why I’m so excited for you to listen to this episode -- because you are getting full access to one of my List Builders Society Monthly Q&A’s, which you guessed it -- is all about list building.

Let me just tell you, these questions from my students are good -- and there are probably some asked in this Q&A that haven’t even crossed your mind.

So if you want to ramp up your list-building game, then pull up a Google Doc and get ready to take some notes because this episode is chock-full of tangible strategies you can implement right now to start growing your email list, and your business.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:59] One of the most important assets you can create in your business is an email list.
[06:52] If you're struggling with growing your list, ask: Are you meeting them where they are? Are you getting your lead magnet in front of your ICA enough?
[10:44] Question: Where should I host my lead magnet videos?
[11:42] Question: How many #1 welcome emails do I need?
[13:04] Question: Should I hold back content to get people to subscribe?
[18:32] Question: Should I do more than sending a weekly email?
[20:08] Question: What’st the best free way to deliver lead magnet?
[24:49] Question: Should I have more than one lead magnet?
[34:53] Question: Should I start with a digital course or a membership?
[41:59] Question: Can I build my email list in only a month?
[45:56] Question: How specific should my ICA be?
[54:10] Question: How can I re-engage my podcast audience?
[55:51] Question: How do I rebrand my Facebook group?
[57:59] Question: What are your tips for getting a better conversion rate?

Head here to grab the list-building masterclass & goodies!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#527: Your Task List Can Wait: Prioritize Your Mental Health First

20 december 2022 | 13 min

Don’t let your task list get the best of you -- give yourself some space, and some grace

Have you ever been so in the weeds with your task list that you don’t even know where to start?

I know I have, and let’s be honest -- watching your Asana tasks grow in real-time certainly isn’t a good feeling.

In fact, I recently had an experience where I became so overwhelmed by what I had on my plate, and had to ask my team for additional time on things that were already overdue.

As the captain of the ship, I won’t lie – I felt kind of bad about it. Like I was almost letting my team down for not getting them the deliverables they needed, when they needed them.

I had to take a step back, look at the situation from a 30,000 foot view, and realize that my task list does not own me.

And here’s the thing. Checking off those Asana tasks, as great as that would have made me feel, is not nearly as important as prioritizing my own mental health. I needed a little breather, and you know what? That’s 100% ok.

So if you’re feeling like your task list is getting the best of you, tune in to this episode to hear how I give myself space, and grace, in super-busy times.

I can assure you, by taking that little extra time for yourself when you need it, your work (and how you show up as a leader) will be that much better.

Enjoy!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:52] I was exhausted from my launch and didn't want to do the three hours of podcasts that I had scheduled.
[06:05] The work I do is important, but it's not life or death. We can make pivots and reschedule.
[07:04] If my team sees me saying that I need more space and moving things around, then they know that they can do that too.
[08:40] Using a time management tool like Asana, we can see what is planned and move things around if needed.
[10:19] Strength sometimes means showing up and being vulnerable. I know if I take a little extra time, my work will be so much better.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#526: How To Get Back Into Alignment When Burnout Comes Knocking: A Conversation With Mary Hyatt

15 december 2022 | 56 min

Take an approach to business that partners with your heart, body, and soul, instead of adding to your task list

Did you know that 92% of small business owners have experienced mental health struggles over the past two years?

Between recovering from the pandemic and the constant pressure of hustle culture, entrepreneurs all over the world are prone -- more than ever -- to burnout and depression.

I’ll be honest, there have been plenty of times throughout my entrepreneurial journey that I’ve felt totally depleted.

And although it’s so tempting just to get back on the horse and keep grinding through those tough times, it’s so very important to take a pause.

Give yourself the time and space that you need, and then move forward -- because if left unaddressed, burnout can lead to some pretty serious mental health issues.

That’s why I wanted to have my dear friend Mary Hyatt on the show. Mary is a holistic mindset coach who helps entrepreneurs create a life and business that lights them up from the inside, and doesn’t burn them out.

She’s coached some of the top female entrepreneurs, C-Suite executives, and business owners in the country, and also has built a 7-figure business -- one that she operates from a place of grace and ease.

In this episode, Mary will share:

How to get back into alignment with your most authentic self (and your business) when you’re burnt out
Why tapping into the language of the body is so important when making stressful decisions
How living in true soul alignment can make a drastic impact on your business
What you can do to have a life, and business that feels good

This is a really great listen – so if you’re interested in learning a holistic, action-oriented approach to overcoming your burnout, then pop in your earbuds and tune in!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[07:27] Mary helps women get back in touch with their emotions, body, and own internal wisdom to design a life and business they love.
[09:54] Being in alignment is having structural integrity with the most true parts of who you are.
[14:19] The first step is radical honesty or admitting that you're feeling deprived in some area of your life or business.
[18:40] A coach can help you say "what if" when leaving a situation that isn't working.
[20:23] Our physical bodies are a compass that helps us orient back to wholeness. Our bodies hold 80% of the wisdom available to us.
[27:29] We all have an amazing source of wisdom and have the answers inside of ourselves.
[29:52] Embodiment work recognizing that we have other bodies like physical, emotional, and a connection to something higher than ourselves.
[32:20] Four factors of aligned action include your energetic capacity, your emotional capacity, what you value most, and the season of life that you’re in.
[39:23] Having soul alignment can make your business sustainable for the long run.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#525: How To Become A Master Decision Maker (& Troubleshooter)

13 december 2022 | 15 min

Decision fatigue is a real thing – here’s how to move past it

I’m sure you’ve heard before that one of the key characteristics of great leaders is their ability to make informed decisions quickly.

And if you’re a business owner, then you fully understand just how many decisions you need to make on a day-to-day basis.

Whether it’s a small decision -- like how you want your email signature to look, or something larger, like whether or not to hire a team -- making decisions is not always easy.

And I’ll be honest, even though I’ve honed my decision-making skills over the years, there are times where I simply just don’t want to make them.

Yes, sweet friend. Decision fatigue is a very real thing, and I’ve dealt with it a lot in my business over the years.

So what do you do when you’re faced with making a decision that you just don’t feel like making -- especially when you don’t have a CEO to help guide you? And to take it one step further, does the fact that you struggle with making decisions make you inept as a leader?

In this episode, I explore this – along with the three specific things I do in my own business when I’ve got to make a call on something and all I want to do is pass the buck to someone else.

You’ll walk away with the tools to become a master decision maker (and troubleshooter), and make your next decision swiftly and confidently.

Enjoy!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:08] One of the qualities of a great leader is the ability to make informed decisions quickly, but hat happens when you're sick of making decisions?
[07:46] Remind yourself that with every decision you make, you can change direction if you need to.
[10:03] Surround yourself with a few people who you trust that can help you make decisions.
[11:58] Tell yourself: I am a master decision maker. I'm also a master troubleshooter.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#524: How To Monetize Your Instagram (Without Changing Your Content Strategy) With Natasha Willis

8 december 2022 | 51 min

#523: Is Your Fear Of Success Sabotaging Your Business?

6 december 2022 | 17 min

#522: The Gratitude Series: Glo Atanmo

1 december 2022 | 12 min

How to create time freedom, location freedom, and financial freedom in your life

One of the most rewarding parts of being an entrepreneur is having the ability to create freedom in all aspects of your life – and my guest on this episode, creator and educator Glo Atanmo, is doing just that.

She’s has created a life of her own design – working just a couple months out of the year, traveling the world, and making an incredible living doing what she absolutely loves.

But how?

Tune in to hear how Glo has set up her life in a way that works for her, and how she prioritizes what matters most while earning a significant income.

I promise, this will leave you feeling incredibly inspired.

Plus, this episode is part of our Week of Gratitude & Giving – which means that I’m giving away a GRAND PRIZE!

Stick around to the end to hear how you can win:

A one-year subscription to the Full Focus Planner
A 6-month membership to Social Curator
A copy of my book, Two Weeks Notice
All of my Two Weeks Notice pre-order bonuses
A one-year membership to GrowthDay
The Barefoot Dreams blanket

Happy listening!

P.S. Thank YOU, my dear listener, for tuning in and being part of my own entrepreneurial journey. I’m grateful for you!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:57] Glo looks at freedom in three categories: time, financial, and location.
[03:16] She’s visited 93 countries and 6 continents, and gets paid to travel as a travel blogger.
[04:38] Glo has categorized her priorities, built relationships, and played the long game.
[06:56] Glo's seasonable framework: Winter is for learning new skills; Spring is for making revenue; Summer is for celebrating success; Fall is for listening to feedback, trends, and the market.
[10:08] Enter to win the grand prize by going to @AmyPorterfield on Instagram, finding the post for today's episode, and leave a comment with what you are most grateful for.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#521: The Gratitude Series: Yours Truly!

30 november 2022 | 16 min

The journey of entrepreneurship is a trip – full of ups, downs, and unimaginable joy

If I told you that five years from now, you’d be getting a text from one of your all-time favorite entrepreneurs, to make sure their launch didn’t clash with yours – would you laugh?

Right now, things like…

…generating seven-figure revenue

…having a 25-person team

…being friends with the entrepreneurs you admire…

May seem improbable… even impossible. But the truth is, you don’t know what’s ahead for you. Your wildest dreams probably don’t even equate to what’s actually going to unfold.

In this episode, I offer a reminder of everything you’ve been working so hard to build - as I reflect on the highs and lows of building a wildly successful business from nothing.

I remember like yesterday how hard those early years were. And if you’d told me then that I’d have what I do now (the team, the revenue, the community, and a heart full of gratitude), I’d have laughed too.

As for what I’m most grateful for in entrepreneurship…

You’re probably experiencing it right now. And in this special episode, I hope you’ll realize that this experience is what will make you.

And don’t forget, this episode is part of our Week of Gratitude & Giving – and you know what that means – I’m giving away a GRAND PRIZE. It includes:

A one-year subscription to the Full Focus Planner
A 6-month membership to Social Curator
A copy of my book, Two Weeks Notice
All of my Two Weeks Notice pre-order bonuses
A one-year membership to GrowthDay
The Barefoot Dreams blanket

Listen to the very end to hear how to enter.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#520: The Gratitude Series: Jasmine Star

29 november 2022 | 9 min

Jasmine Star opens up about the friendships she’s truly grateful for in this heartwarming episode

There are so many things to be grateful for as an entrepreneur -- the opportunity to do what you love, work from anywhere, and call all of the shots, just to name a few.

But one thing on the list that often gets overlooked are those incredible friendships with other entrepreneurs that you create along your journey.

It’s those entrepreneurial friends who can help you through the tough times in ways that other supportive people in your life simply can’t – not because they don’t want to, but because they don’t know exactly what you’re going through.

For me, Jasmine Star has been one of those friends. She’s been with me for the ups, the downs, and everything in between. And I’m there for her, too.

I won’t lie, what Jasmine shares in this episode brought me to tears. I was reminded of how grateful I am for her friendship, and also that I’m able to show up in a way that makes an impact on her, too.

This very special episode is part of our Week of Gratitude & Giving – and you know what that means – I’m giving away a GRAND PRIZE. It includes:

A one year subscription to the Full Focus Planner
A 6 month membership to Social Curator
A copy of my book, Two Weeks Notice
All of my Two Weeks Notice pre-order bonuses
A one year membership to GrowthDay
The Barefoot Dreams blanket

Listen to the very end to hear how to enter.

Enjoy!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#519: The Gratitude Series: Anthony Trucks

28 november 2022 | 19 min

How to set your scale, build a life that you want, and practice gratitude

In this very special episode, you’ll hear from Anthony Trucks – a former NFL Athlete, American Ninja Warrior on NBC, speaker, podcast host and founder of Identity Shift coaching.

As a foster kid raised in poverty, life was incredibly difficult for Anthony growing up. But after experiencing setback after setback, he learned how to transform his obstacles into achievements and completely shifted his identity.

Anthony shares his incredible story of growth, the impact entrepreneurship has had on him, and steps you can take to create a life that’s intentional.

And guess what? This is the first day of our Week of Gratitude & Giving – and as part of it, I’m giving away a GRAND PRIZE! It includes:

A one-year subscription to the Full Focus Planner
A 6-month membership to Social Curator
A copy of my book, Two Weeks Notice
All of my Two Weeks Notice pre-order bonuses
A 6-month membership to GrowthDay
The Barefoot Dreams blanket

Stick around to the end of the episode to hear how to enter.

And as always, thank YOU, my dear listener, for tuning in and being part of this entrepreneurial journey.

Enjoy!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:08] We are kicking off our Week of Gratitude & Giving. Each day this week, I'm releasing a very special clip from some of my entrepreneurial friends.
[04:48] I'm giving away a grand prize that includes a one-year subscription to the Full Focus Planner, a 6 month membership to Social Curator, a signed copy Two Weeks Notice and all of the bonuses, a membership to GrowthDay and a Barefoot Dreams Blanket.
[06:11] Each episode has a new way of entering which you’ll hear at the end of each episode. The more you participate the more entries you get.
[07:15] Anthony Trucks is a former NFL player and American Ninja Warrior. He now teaches people how to make identity shifts happen.
[09:20] Identity is a big piece of who we see ourselves to be, and you can always shift who we see ourselves to be.
[12:16] Entrepreneurship is what changed Anthony's life. He set it up in a way to provide value, which allowed him to upgrade his identity.
[15:03] In his new identity, Anthony sets his own scale, schedules time to meet that scale’s level, and isn’t afraid to do the ‘dark work’ that allows him to shine.
[17:08] Enter the giveaway today with a snapshot of this episode. Share it to your Instagram story and tag @AmyPorterfield with what you're grateful for. Use the hashtag #OMMEGratitude.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#518: Sweeten the Deal: How To Create a Bonus Package That Gets Your Audience to Buy

23 november 2022 | 36 min

#517: When To Give Up Or See It Through When Something Fails In Your Business

22 november 2022 | 20 min

What to do when you start to wonder “Am I really good enough?”

Have you ever wondered “Am I good enough?” when something hasn’t gone exactly according to plan in your business?

I know I have.

Recently, I’ve been questioning if I have what it takes to be ok TikTok. I’ve invested a ton of time and energy into the platform and I’m just not picking up steam like I had hoped when I originally committed to it.

This isn’t the first time I’ve doubted myself when it comes to doing something in my business, and believe me, there are plenty of things I’ve attempted before that have gone completely sideways.

And what I’ve learned through the ups and downs of entrepreneurship is that sometimes things simply don’t work out. It doesn’t mean you’re a bad business owner, or you don’t have the chops to be successful, or that you should automatically give up.

No, sweet friend. You’ve got to give yourself some grace, and remind yourself that you are good enough -- period. And if you decide that it’s the best decision to throw in the towel, that’s ok too. Not everything is going to be a ‘Win.’

And that’s why I wanted to record this episode for you -- so you can hear firsthand that you’re not alone, and also what I remind myself when those low level feelings start to creep in.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[07:11] Being authentic matters, even if the platform isn't for you or the other way around. Some things don't work out, even when you pour time and energy into them.
[08:49] If you're committed to something and say you're going to do it for a certain amount of time, remove the option to not show up.
[10:21] You can quit if things are no longer serving you or bringing you joy, but don't quit if you're just fearful that it's just not going to work.
[12:26] I know I'm good enough, even if my audience on TikTok isn't there yet. I'm going to stick it out, and I'm growing because of it. Remember to remind yourself that you’re good enough!
[14:21] Not everything you do in your business will be a win nor does it even have to be. Being an entrepreneur means that you're not always going to hit home runs.
[15:58] Everything I do is to help other people realize freedom. That might not look like a hundred thousand TikTok followers and that's okay.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#516: 72% Of Entrepreneurs Struggle With Mental Health: Proven Ways To Deal With This with Lori Gottlieb

17 november 2022 | 41 min

A renowned psychotherapist shares how to navigate the most difficult parts of being a business owner

I wholeheartedly believe that entrepreneurship can be one of the best gifts you can give yourself. It can bring you freedom to design your life the way that you want to, all while doing something that you love.

But as you probably already know, if not managed well, the stress of being a business owner can really take a toll on you. On the daily, entrepreneurs deal with things like decision fatigue, loneliness, and burnout.

In fact, I recently read an alarming statistic that 72% of entrepreneurs struggle with mental health, and I’ll be honest -- that number feels far too high, and a little close to home!

It’s one of my goals to bring more awareness to this issue that affects so many people in business, and that’s why I invited Lori Gottlieb to be a guest on the show.

Lori is a renowned psychotherapist and New York Times bestselling author of Maybe You Should Talk to Someone, which now has a journal to go along with it. (Listen to find out how to get a chance to win one of these!)

In addition to her clinical practice, she is co-host of the popular Dear Therapists podcast, and writes The Atlantic’s weekly Dear Therapist advice column.

In this important conversation, Lori shares how to:

Find balance between vulnerability and being viewed as an expert
Lean on your own intuition more when making stressful decisions
Tap into more acceptance and enjoyment when things change, versus fear
Navigate loneliness as an entrepreneur

Plus much, much more!

I’ll go ahead and call it right here -- this episode is going to be a fan-favorite. I hope you enjoy it as much as I do.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#515: Behind-the-Scenes Of My Latest DCA Launch: The Highs, Lows, & Magical Moments

15 november 2022 | 27 min

How we got scrappy, rallied together, and did something we’ve never done before in the history of my business

If you’ve ever been through a digital course launch, you know that it’s usually an ‘all hands on deck’ sort of situation.

Things are happening fast. You’re making split-second decisions. And whether you’ve got a team of two or 20, everybody is in the trenches with you.

I’ve been through more course launches than I can count on two hands, and as much prep as my team and I do to make sure everything goes smoothly, there’s always a few things that don’t go according to plan.

But guess what? Those little hiccups -- where you’re forced to get creative (and a little scrappy) -- are what create the magic.

Not only do you learn a ton in the process of troubleshooting, but there’s a really incredible energy and camaraderie that’s created amongst the team.

In this episode, my Director of Customer Experience, Josh, joins me for a behind-the-scenes recap of our September 2022 Digital Course Academy launch -- our largest launch of the year.

You’ll get an honest look at our best moments, our toughest moments, the magical ones, and everything in between.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:30] We got a flood of emails during our launch. Josh and his team answered over 7,000 emails in 9 days.
[05:32] The customer experience department also fielded over 600 concierge phone calls.
[09:16] We got scrappy, and everybody jumped in to help. We created a support schedule and had ‘power hours.’
[12:39] You’ve got to make answering emails a priority, otherwise you’re leaving money on the table.
[14:02] During a launch, it’s important to have people around you that will give you pep talks to help change your mindset when things get stressful.
[18:57] When you need to close a gap, I recommend that you DSD, or do something different.
[22:07] It's okay to pivot during a launch when you see a need. Trying new things and experimenting is always a great thing.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#514: An Honest (& Vulnerable) Conversation About Divorce, Break-Ups, & Transitions As An Entrepreneur (with Meghan Linsey and Patrice Washington)

10 november 2022 | 74 min

#513: Are Unhealthy Attachments Stalling Your Business, Success, & Revenue?

8 november 2022 | 20 min

Einstein said it best: You can’t keep doing the same thing and expect different results

I’ve said it before and I’ll say it again: The book The Gap & The Gain by Dan Sullivan and Dr. Benjamin Hardy has been an absolute game changer for my business -- so much, in fact, that I’ve dedicated two episodes to exploring its concepts.

The first episode, which I highly recommend you listen to, is all about the importance of being grateful for how much you’ve accomplished (The Gain), as opposed to focusing on what you haven’t (The Gap). You can check it out here.

But in this episode, sweet friend, I dive into another major theme of the book: Unhealthy attachments.

You’ve likely heard about unhealthy attachments when it comes to romantic relationships, but you don’t hear much about them when it comes to growing your business.

It’s really important to be aware of as an entrepreneur, because holding on to something if it’s not working -- a goal, product, employee, etc. – can be counterproductive to scaling and growth.

I know I’ve had unhealthy attachments to certain parts of my business in the past, and you’ll hear about how I unraveled some of them in this episode.

You’ll also have an opportunity to analyze your own business -- what’s working, what’s not, and how to let go of what isn’t serving you.

I hope you find these concepts as fascinating and enlightening as I do. Enjoy!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Your Exclusive Invite to My Book Launch Squad: Will You Help Me Spread the Word?

7 november 2022 | 11 min

#512: Master Your Inner Critic & Build A Thriving Business With Melissa Ambrosini

3 november 2022 | 46 min

How to harness your inner mean girl and fall in love with the person looking at you in the mirror

If re-learning to love yourself, knocking your business goals out of the park, and mastering work-life integration sounds good to you, then you’re going to want to hear this episode with my guest Melissa Ambrosini.

She’s a multiple bestselling author, keynote and TEDx speaker, #1 podcast host, and queen of mastering your Mean Girl. Oh, and she’s also been coined a “Self-help Guru” by Elle Magazine… no big deal.

I loved this conversation with Melissa because it’s filled with tangible, heart-felt honesty -- which, let’s be real, we can all use -- especially when we let social media get the best of us and start to compare our lives and businesses to others’.

She opens up about her own journey of hitting rock bottom, taking radical responsibility for her health and happiness, and going on to start a business that truly lights her up.

We also talk about something that is so important to do as female entrepreneurs -- which is taking control of that negative, fear-based voice inside your head saying you can’t do something -- whether it’s starting that digital course you’ve always wanted to, hiring your first employee, or going Live for the first time.

I think you’ll find this to be an incredibly inspiring episode, so if you’re ready, grab a hot, spiced beverage of your choice and press play!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#511: Are You Living In The Gap? Or The Gain?

1 november 2022 | 19 min

Instead of measuring what you’ve missed, measure how far you’ve come

If you’ve been with me for a while, you’ve probably heard me talk about the book The Gap & The Gain by Dan Sullivan and Dr. Benjamin Hardy.

I won’t lie, this book has had a profound impact on my business, because it’s rewired the way I think about success and achievement.

In fact, for most of my career, I’ve held myself to a really rigid set of goals -- and if I didn’t meet them, I’d beat myself up over it.

Instead of focusing on all that I did accomplish, I’d zero in on how far off I was from reaching my goal.

This, sweet friend, is called living in The Gap, and it’s fairly common with high achievers and entrepreneurs. It's a really terrible place to hang out, because no matter how much you accomplish, there will always be a moving target that’s out of reach.

The Gain is a much better place to live. So, what is The Gain? Well, it’s all about feeling grateful for the progress you do make, which in turn drives motivation, confidence, and future success. *Gasp!* That’s right, I said future success!

I’m so much happier now that I’m living in The Gain. Yes, I can acknowledge that I didn’t meet my goals, and yes, I can brainstorm ways to improve -- but I’ll tell ‘ya – having appreciation for how far I’ve come makes a big difference in my quality of life overall.

In this episode, you’ll hear more about the concept of The Gap and The Gain, why living in The Gain can absolutely change your life for the better, and steps you can take to get there.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#510: Follow This Simple Payment Recovery Process To Boost Your Revenue

27 oktober 2022 | 36 min

Wisdom Wednesday: A Simple Way To Use A Quiz As An Effective Marketing Strategy

26 oktober 2022 | 6 min

#509: How To Know When To Quit

25 oktober 2022 | 30 min

Work will always be there, so make time for experiences that truly light you up

Having passion for your business is a good thing. Afterall, your excitement and enthusiasm is quite literally the fuel that keeps the wheels in motion, and gets you through hard times.

But whether you’re new to the entrepreneurial game or have already found success, there may come a time when you get so wrapped up in your business that everything else in your life falls to the wayside.

Maybe you stop hanging out with your friends, taking vacations, or spending time doing the things that you love or exploring new hobbies outside of work.

Or, if you’re like me, maybe you come to the stark -- and somewhat embarrassing – realization that without your business, you’re not even sure who you are. You don’t have any hobbies to talk about, and can’t remember the last time you did something ‘just for fun.’

In fact, during my five-week sabbatical, I became acutely aware that the core of my being -- my entire identity -- is almost solely tied to the success of my business.

The whole experience gave me a reality check that left me feeling a bit sad and empty. Of course my business brings me joy -- but it’s important that I have other things, outside of work, that make me happy and give me purpose.

In this episode, I uncover how I’m making room in my life for those moments and experiences that light me up, outside of Amy Porterfield, Inc.

And I won’t lie -- taking the time to do fun things when I feel like I have a million plates spinning in the air can be tough… but I know deep down that it’s worth it.

So if you have ever been asked the question, “What do you do for fun?” and have had a hard time coming up with an answer, this episode is for you.

Happy listening!

P.S.- If you want to hear more about the many realizations I had during my sabbatical, check out episode #478: 5 Weeks Unplugged: Lessons From My Sabbatical.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#508: 3 Unexpected Ways A Subscription Box Could Boost Your Online Business Revenue With Julie Ball

20 oktober 2022 | 58 min

How adding a subscription box to your online business can be a game-changer for your bottom line

Have you ever thought about adding a subscription box to your business?

If you haven’t, I definitely encourage you to consider it! Not only can a subscription box be a game-changer for your bottom line, but it can also be a great add-on benefit to support your audience even further.

I know, I know. You’re probably thinking, “But Amy, I’ve got enough on my plate with my business already… and this just sounds complicated.”

But here’s the thing. Adding a subscription box to your existing business is actually really simple to execute -- and my guest on this episode, Julie Ball, is going to share exactly how to do it.

Julie founded and recently sold Sparkle Hustle Grow, a monthly subscription and online community for female entrepreneurs. As a subscription box business coach, she teaches aspiring subscription box business owners how to turn their ideas into reality.

In this episode, she shares why you might want to consider adding a subscription box to your digital course or online business, plus:

How to decide what the focus of your subscription box should be
What you need to know about the subscription box industry
Her step-by-step process on how to get started with your subscription box
Three ways you can incorporate a subscription box into your existing business

This was a really enlightening conversation, and I’m excited for you to hear it!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[07:51] Julie left her corporate career in 2011 and launched her subscription box business in 2016. She replaced her full-time income in nine months.
[11:54] She had the subscription box business for six years and then sold it.
[12:37] Julie shares three simple ways to add a subscription box to an existing business.
[18:32] There are five simple steps to get started with your subscription box business.
[24:06] Buy your products in bulk or wholesale. The manufacturer price should be about 50% of retail price.
[30:03] The first and last days of the sales cycle (the 1st and 30th) are important. Renewal day is in the middle of the sales cycle (the 15th). Shipping day is a couple days after closing out the sales cycle.
[33:21] About 95% of subscribers renew, so each monthly "launch" doesn't feel as heavy. Having a community helped prevent churn.
[36:08] A welcome box is a one-time product. You send it at the onset of a program. It’s perfect for courses, affiliate programs, or summits.
[39:54] It’s important to get clear on what your version of success is.
[41:20] She had a dream life session with her family, and it became clear that it was time to sell the business. It sold in 94 days for multiple six figures.
[47:18] Julie's next season is all about focusing on her family and doubling down on subscription box coaching.
[49:35] The biggest successes for Julie were being able to leave her corporate job, replace her husband's income, and sell her business.
[53:10] Amy's biggest takeaway: Research the marketplace and pitch Two Weeks Notice to be in subscription boxes.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Wisdom Wednesday: How Your Eulogy Can Help You Live A Purposeful Life

19 oktober 2022 | 6 min

#507: 9 to 5 Burnout: Is It Time To Make A Change?

18 oktober 2022 | 12 min

Hustle culture tells you that burnout is normal, but I’m here to tell you it’s no way to live

It’s a Sunday night. The kids are in bed, and you’re about to relax and unwind with a glass of Pinot and a true crime documentary on Netflix.

But just as you sit down on the couch and turn on the tv, you get this uncomfortable feeling in the pit of your stomach…. You know the one.

Enter: The Sunday Scaries -- an unavoidable mix of nervousness and dread about your week ahead. All of the sudden, your mind becomes completely consumed by the thought of how much you don’t want to dive into work in the morning.

Whether you’re anxious about what you have on your plate, a big meeting with higher-ups, or how you’re going to have to sit through six straight hours of Zoom meetings and pretend to be invested, this unsettling feeling week after week is a big indicator that you’re burnt out from your job.

Unfortunately, our culture has become so obsessed with ‘hustling’ and the constant grind, that the Sunday Scaries -- along with other work stress and anxiety -- start to feel normal after a while.

But I’m here to tell you that this is not normal -- and because we spend so much of our lives working, it’s really important that you don’t dread showing up at your job every day.

In this episode, I uncover four telltale signs of burnout that you might not even realize you’re experiencing, plus incremental changes you can make to improve your work life.

So pop in your Airpods, grab a hot beverage and tune in -- especially if you’ve ever experienced the Sunday Scaries.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#506: Becoming An Expert: How To Position Yourself As An Authority in Your Field

13 oktober 2022 | 37 min

Grab your freebie for this episode here! You don’t have to go back to school or have a million followers on Instagram to be the go-to resource in your industry

Positioning yourself as the go-to expert in your industry can be a game-changer for your business. Not only does it help you gain exposure, but it also helps you create and build trust with your audience, which is extremely important.

But in such a competitive digital marketplace, how on Earth do you go about doing that? Sure, you’re super knowledgeable about what you do, but you wouldn’t really consider yourself to be an expert.

The good news is, you don’t need to go back to school and get an advanced degree, write a book, or have a million followers on Instagram in order to be viewed as a master in your area of business.

All it takes is getting clear on the unique value you bring to the marketplace, articulating it really well, and knowing just a little bit more than your ideal audience in your specific niche. 10 percent more, to be exact!

This isn’t something that happens overnight. In fact, it took me several years to nail down ‘what my thing is’ and how I provide value to my audience (much more on that in the episode).

That’s why it’s important to do the work upfront, early on in your business journey, so you can be viewed as an expert from the get-go. And don’t fret -- if you already have an established business, what you’re about to learn can help you pivot so that you’re seen as that #1 go-to resource even more.

In this episode, you will:

Go through a self-reflection exercise that will help you define what your unique “thing” is
Get super clear on the value that you offer to others, and learn how to clearly articulate it to your audience
Hear how I define my “thing” today, versus when I was starting out
Learn tangible ways to become an expert in your specific area of business
Take away strategies on how to position yourself as a go-to authority in your field

Just a heads up -- because you’ll be doing some writing exercises, you’ll want a pen and notebook handy. I also recommend you listen to this in a place that’s free of distractions if you want to get the most out of it.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#505: The Beauty Of Finding Purpose Outside Of Work

11 oktober 2022 | 19 min

{SPECIAL ANNOUNCEMENT} My Book Is Available For Pre-Order!

10 oktober 2022 | 10 min

#504: Understanding and Using Stocks to Support Your Entrepreneurial Journey with Teri Ijeoma

6 oktober 2022 | 52 min

Wisdom Wednesday: An Entrepreneurs Checklist For Organizing An Affordable & Fun Photoshoot

5 oktober 2022 | 7 min

#503: The Do’s & Don’ts Of Hiring

4 oktober 2022 | 18 min

From making your first hire to expanding your team, here’s what you need to know

Your business is your baby. You nurture it, love it, and put a ton of time and energy into its growth. It’s no wonder that the thought of hiring your first employee (or expanding your team even more) makes you a little bit nervous.

Not only can it be hard to let go of certain pieces of your business, but making a financial investment in someone else -- without a guarantee that they are going to add value -- can be pretty scary.

Believe me, I’ve been there. It took me six years to make my first full-time hire because I was so afraid of giving up control – and let’s be real, I wasn’t exactly 100% sure of how I was going to pay the rent if she did not perform in the way that I needed her to. And yes, I’m talking about Chloe! ;)

Luckily, Chloe added major value to my business immediately, and since bringing her on seven years ago I’ve expanded my team to over 20 people. In the process I’ve learned a TON about hiring and assembling a crew of talented people that work together like a well-oiled machine. I’ve gotten a lot of things right, just as many of them wrong, and in this episode I’m going to share them all with you.

Tune in to hear:

When the best time is to hire your first employee
The one crucial role you should hire for first
What I learned from my very first hiring blitz
How to ensure that your new hire is a good fit

So if you have ever been curious about the hiring process, or think you might be ready to make your first full-time hire, go someplace you can focus and press play on this episode!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:04] Waiting far too long for my first full-time hire. I struggled for a year and a half before hiring Chloe full-time. The lesson? Hire before you think you are ready.
[06:31] Hire someone who is going to help you with traffic. As in, someone to help drive traffic to your business and will help you to convert.
[08:39] Virtual assistants give you space to think. They can help with social media, support, communication, proofreading, and more!
[13:16] Hire one person at a time and give them 90 full days to learn what they need to learn. We have 30,60, and 90 day tasks and goals for new hires.
[15:39] We do have an understanding that anytime during the first 90 days if the person isn't a great fit, we will let them know. It doesn't happen often, but it's an option. By hiring one person at a time that person also gets a lot more support.
[16:22] The best way to learn what works for you is to start hiring and see what works. Take action!
[16:39] Don't wait too long to hire. Hire before you think you're ready. Hire early on and find someone who can help with traffic and conversions. Do hire one person at a time.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#502: Personality Types Of A Digital Course Student + 5 Ways To Get To The Finish Line

29 september 2022 | 66 min

Knowing your personality type can help you confidently move through a digital course

Have you ever purchased a digital course, and later felt guilty for one of these reasons?

It took you longer than expected to complete the course
You had great momentum in the beginning, but then gave up halfway through
You never even started the course
You bought it and then forgot that you had it

If you answered “yes”, then read on, sweet friend, because I’m here to tell you that you should NOT feel guilty about any of those things – and here’s why:

Number one: there is no right or wrong way to take a digital course. In fact, over the past 13 years in this industry, I’ve observed five personality types that move through digital courses in very different ways.

Some of these personality types complete a course rather quickly, while others can take years. The point is, they all get through it and take action with their newfound knowledge.

Number two: Just because you purchased a course and didn’t finish it (or heck, maybe you didn’t even start it), does not mean that you shouldn’t consider taking another one.

Believe me, I know what it’s like to feel as if you’ve wasted money on something. But I also know what it’s like to have a digital course completely change your life, and everything about your business.

That’s why I encourage you to stop feeling guilty about the past, and give digital courses another chance – because with the right action plan, you can get through it. If you do, chances are it’ll open up a whole new realm of possibilities in your business.

In this episode, you’ll hear from some of my Digital Course Academy students who share what personality type they are, what it was like going through the course the way they did, and what they found along the way.

And for those of you who are caught in an endless shame spiral -- don’t fret, because you’ll take away five strategies to ensure that you successfully work through your next digital course in a way that works with your life.

So if you’re ready to let go of your guilt and rock your next digital course, then pop in your earbuds and tune in!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Wisdom Wednesday: An Effective Strategy For Creating Binge-Worthy Content

28 september 2022 | 4 min

#501: How To Identify What’s Important & Let Go Of What’s Not

27 september 2022 | 23 min

5 questions to help you get really clear on what you want

Getting clear on what you want as a business owner sounds like it would be easy, but in reality, it can be pretty tough – especially if you’re a one-woman show in the early stages of business.

I get it. When I first went off on my own, I felt the need to say ‘yes’ to everything because I didn’t want to leave any opportunities on the table. I had no idea where to spend my time or focus because everything felt equally important.

But let me tell you, sweet friend -- giving your time and energy to things that do not serve you is a one-way ticket to some serious overwhelm.

That’s why it’s so important to get really crystal clear on what you want now, so you don’t end up spinning your wheels on things that don’t bring value to your life or business.

In this episode, I revisit a conversation I had with my dear friend and mentor, Marie Forleo, who’s done a lot of work in her own life to get laser-focused on what’s important, eliminate overwhelm, and manage her time like a boss.

You’ll hear the two mantras that Marie lives by, as well as a series of questions that you can ask yourself to help identify what’s important and let go of what’s not.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:01] When you know what's important, you can ignore what's not.
[06:07] Ask yourself: What do I want? Journal about what you want. Start writing whatever comes to you.
[06:54] Then ask: What do I want in the next 365 days? Journal this too.
[07:01] The final prompt is: What do I want in the next six months? Doing this exercise will create clarity.
[08:26] Make an effort to say no to what is not going to serve you. This is one of the hardest lessons I've learned.
[09:17] What are the top three to five projects that you need to focus on? No more than five. If you're a one-person show, no more than three. What do you need to let go of in this season to focus on what's most important.
[13:20] “I don't do overwhelm.” Saying that you are overwhelmed does not serve you.
[16:42] When you're overwhelmed, confused, or stressed, put your head down and think what can I do to move forward in the direction that I want to move, and things will start to make more sense.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#500: Why Time Stress Is Crippling Your Success with Marie Forleo

22 september 2022 | 59 min

How to go from being stressed about time to a time genius

Have you ever felt like no matter how many hours you put into your business, you’re just not doing enough?

You’re hustling from the beginning of your day until the very end, but despite the fact that you’re running on empty, you still feel like you’ve got to do more.

If this sounds familiar, you sweet friend, are not alone.

You’ve fallen into what my guest in this episode, Marie Forleo, calls the time stress trap, which is the belief that if you're not producing 24/7, you don't want your dreams bad enough.

This, my friend, is extremely toxic -- and unfortunately as business owners, we are conditioned to believe that we’ve got to be going non-stop in order to achieve any sort of success.

I know I’ve been there before, and so has Marie -- who once became so paralyzed by her own time stress that her body started to shut down.

In this episode, Marie tells her story of overcoming time stress, and shares specific strategies that you can use to find freedom and spaciousness in your schedule.

How to become a master prioritizer and better manage your time
Ways to stay grounded and focused during your busiest times
Different mantras to support you when things get really stressful

… And so much more. So if you ever feel like you’ve been on the toxic time treadmill, pause -- take a deep breath -- and listen to this episode.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Wisdom Wednesday: The 10-Year Test That Will Change Everything

21 september 2022 | 6 min

#499: TikTok Intimidates Me, So I’ve Decided To Do It My Way

20 september 2022 | 16 min

After 2 years of being almost radio silent on TikTok, I’m giving it another go

If you’ve been with me for a while, you know that being in front of the camera has always been a challenge for me. It feels like there’s so much pressure to be ‘on,’ and being the perfectionist that I am, I often struggle being 100% satisfied with the content I record.

So imagine how I felt in 2020 when TikTok absolutely exploded in the United States.

Yes, I was excited to have a new platform that offered a HUGE opportunity to grow and nurture an audience. And yes, I was also loving the fun, fresh and exciting content.

But… I’ve got to be honest. It just wasn’t a place that I wanted to show up -- literally and figuratively -- for a multitude of reasons. I can probably count on one hand the number of TikToks I’ve made over the past two years.

Fast forward to today, and I’ve recommitted myself to the social media platform that has taken the world by storm -- and the good news is, I’m in a much better place this time around.

But here’s the thing. I’m going to do TikTok my way because a) it has to work with my life, and b) if you commit to showing up, you’ve got to show up authentically if you want an audience that sticks with you for the long haul.

In other words, you won’t see me dancing -- but you WILL see a more casual, less ‘prepared’ version of me. ;)

I hope that by listening to this episode, you’ll be encouraged to do something that might scare you a little bit, but also excites you. Like I always say, getting outside of your comfort zone and doing something different is absolutely key if you want to grow your business.

So if you’re in need of a little nudge, tune into this episode (and be sure to check me out on TikTok!)

P.S. I’m giving away a FREE set of Airpods, so if you’re in the market for some fresh new ear gear, stay tuned until the very end to hear how to enter.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#498: How She Generated $41,000 From Her List of 937: A Launch Success Story with Rachel Gainsbrugh

15 september 2022 | 48 min

A pharmacist turned entrepreneur shares her journey to ditching the golden handcuffs

If you have a 9 to 5 and you’ve been thinking about leaving it to start your own business, chances are you have some fear around taking the leap -- especially if you are in a profession that compensates you well, financially or otherwise.

I can totally relate to that, because just over 13 years ago I was in a similar place. I was working full-time for Tony Robbins, in a position that so many people would have loved to have. I had a great salary, benefits, and the opportunity to travel the world.

From the outside looking in, my job looked like a dream -- but I was tired of working long hours and time away from my loved ones, being stressed about someone else’s business, and I knew there was much more out there for me as a business owner.

Once I made the decision to do my own thing, I quit my job and never looked back -- but in all honesty, arriving at that point wasn’t easy.

Employers often make jobs really hard to leave, especially if you are highly paid, or work for a company that offers really great perks – like yoga classes throughout the day or heck, I’ve even heard of some offices that have a beer tap in the break room.

These are all really great things, but what these businesses don’t offer is freedom. They’ve got you locked in golden handcuffs, and they’ve got the key.

In this interview, I talk to my student, Rachel Gainsbrugh, who built up the courage to ditch her cushy job as a pharmacist to pursue her dream of being an entrepreneur.

And guess what? She made over $40,000 in her very first launch, and went on to 3X her pharmacist salary. Yes, you read that right. She tripled her salary after she left her pharmacist career.

So if you’re afraid of giving up the golden handcuffs, tune in to this episode because Rachel’s story is a very inspiring one. In it, you’ll hear:

Rachel’s advice on how to make the leap into entrepreneurship
A breakdown of her first launch that generated $41,000
The unique launch strategies she used that I think are sheer genius
The hard lessons she’s learned along the way

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Wisdom Wednesday: Every Entrepreneur Needs To Know (& Do) This For Success

14 september 2022 | 6 min

#497: Do Something Different: A Method For Getting Unstuck

13 september 2022 | 21 min

#496: Expansive Business Models: From Digital Courses To Service-Based Business & Everything In Between

8 september 2022 | 41 min

A digital course doesn’t have to be your one and only offer

I’m sure you’ve probably heard the proverb ‘There are many paths to the top of the mountain, but the view is always the same.’

I hate to get all cheesy on you, but it’s true -- especially when it comes to your business. There are endless ways you can go about creating the business of your dreams, and having a digital course as the core driver is just one of them.

I know, I know, you’re probably thinking ‘But Amy, you are always talking about how having a digital course as your primary offer is the simplest way to run a business’ -- and I wholeheartedly believe that. But hear me out.

A digital course can be a big part or a small part of your business. For me, it’s a big part because I discovered early on that this approach offers me the flexibility that I want and need in my life…

… But it’s not the only way. In fact, having a digital course as one of your offers -- not your only offer -- can be incredibly lucrative.

In this episode, you’ll hear real-life audio clips from a few of my students who have made digital courses a small part of their business. They shed light on how they’ve made digital courses work within their business, and all the things they’ve learned along the way. Plus, I kick it off with the many benefits of offering a digital course, regardless of your approach.

So if you’ve ever thought that having a digital course won’t work with your business, I urge you to listen to this episode -- because I promise you, it’s possible -- and it’s a strategy that will only help you grow.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Wisdom Wednesday: This Simple Strategy Grows My Email List By Thousands Each Month

7 september 2022 | 5 min

#495: Lacking Self-Worth? Try These 4 Practices

6 september 2022 | 13 min

When you feel like a total failure, these 4 strategies will get you back on track

If you’re a living, breathing human being, then I’d hedge a bet that there have been times where you’ve doubted yourself and your capabilities as an entrepreneur. In fact, you’ve probably even wondered, ‘Am I even cut out for this?’

Believe me, sweet friend -- I’ve been there. One minute you're on top of the world and feeling as confident can be, and the next you’re questioning everything and feeling like a total failure.

Maybe you sent an email to your list with an incorrect link, missing a huge sales opportunity (been there!). Or maybe you saw a competitor on social media absolutely crush their launch and you start to compare yourself to them, which is never a good thing (also been there).

As business owners, there are so many different triggers that can immediately launch us into feelings of inadequacy -- so what are we supposed to do when our self-worth feels like it’s just been trampled by a herd of elephants?

Over the years, I’ve come up with a handful of ways to get back on track when I start to doubt myself, and I’m sharing them in this episode. You’ll hear:

The strategy I use to make positive thinking a practice
How to refresh your mindset and restore your belief in yourself
The books I always come back to that remind me of my self-worth
Ways you can lean into your community for support

This is a great episode to listen to, regardless of where you are in your business journey.

Happy listening!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:27] Give equal airtime to positive thinking. Don't beat yourself up, but if you do give just as much time to positive thoughts.
[05:03] Take a trip down memory lane. Take a pen and paper and write down things that you've accomplished in the last year or the last five years. This refreshes your memory and illustrates how you've stuck with something or accomplished something.
[06:50] Read or listen to something that's inspiring. Getting inspired every single day will get you to the place you need to be in. Keep a go to inspiration folder.
[09:06] I want you to brag! It's so important to surround yourself with a community of like-minded people. Have a place where you can share your wins with people who will actually understand your level of accomplishment.
[11:18] You are worth it. You are important. It's important that you get your message out into the world. On the days that you're not feeling it, try some of these methods.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#494: {Student Success} From Deleting Her Email List To Doubling It During Her Launch with Isobel Anderson

1 september 2022 | 57 min

When you make a BIG mistake, pull up your bootstraps, get scrappy, and use it as a learning experience

Have you ever made a careless mistake in your business that could have potentially been catastrophic?

I know I have. In fact, back in my Tony Robbins days I accidentally canceled a Masterclass the night before it was supposed to start. I was absolutely mortified, angry at myself, and had no idea how to recover from it.

But here’s the thing that I couldn’t see at the time: Making big mistakes, like the one I made years ago, are bound to happen -- no matter how careful and cautious you think you’re being. You’ve just gotta pull yourself up by the bootstraps, get a little scrappy, and use the experience as a learning opportunity.

That’s what my guest on this episode (and DCA student!), Isobel Anderson, did when she deleted her entire email list three months before her launch.

Some business owners would absolutely crumble if this happened to them, but Isobel did the exact opposite.

Instead of getting down on herself and giving up, she flexed her entrepreneurial mindset muscles by asking, “How can this be good?” -- and guess what? She went on to rebuild her email list to twice its original size.

Yes, you read that right.

In this episode, Isobel shares her story of how she used the experience of deleting her email list to better herself as an entrepreneur, plus exactly what she did to double the size of her list. She also shares:

Her experience with adding tiers to a launch -- the good, the bad and the ugly
How adding Live coaching to her latest launch proved to be incredibly lucrative
What she plans to do next in order to take her business to the next level

This is a great listen for anyone, regardless of where you are in your business -- and I know you’ll find Isobel as inspiring as I do.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Wisdom Wednesday: The Power Of Improving 1% Each Day

31 augusti 2022 | 6 min

#493: Don’t Jump Ship Before The Entrepreneurial Magic Happens

30 augusti 2022 | 15 min

Shiny object syndrome has the potential to devastate your business

Shiny object syndrome is a real thing, and you’d better believe that it can throw you off course in ways that are devastating to your business and everything you’ve been working towards.

I don’t mean to sound harsh, but it's the cold, hard truth. If you are constantly going after the ‘next best thing’ then you are wasting time, energy and focus on something that might not be in alignment with your business goals.

Now, don’t get me wrong. It’s super easy to get distracted by new ways of making money that are fun and exciting, especially if they’re something you could do with your eyes closed. I’ve been there, believe me.

But what I know from my own experience in creating a multi-million dollar digital business is that time, focus, and a willingness to play the long game are absolutely essential if you are serious about achieving your long-term goals (more on the importance of playing the long game in this episode).

In other words, don’t change lanes before the magic happens.

Now, I’m not discouraging you from considering new opportunities. But what I do encourage is for you to be discerning about them.

In fact, there are a series of questions that I ask myself every time something shiny and new comes my way that help me determine if it’s going to be something that supports growth in my business, or hurts it -- and I share them in this episode. I also talk a bit about when you should consider changing lanes, and go in another direction.

Are you ready? If so, pop in your earbuds, and tune in!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:11] Going for something you know you'll crush it and because it’s in your comfort zone is playing small. In your heart, you know you should keep your head down and keep creating what you are creating at the moment.
[05:26] We can't only do things in our business that we are inherently good at. You don't stretch yourself if you are only doing things that come second nature to you.
[06:29] Whenever you make a decision about something that doesn't align with where your goals are, stop yourself and do a gut check.
[08:27] Your income will increase each time you launch your course, and you'll end up making more than you could have made from that distracting opportunity.
[10:45] Being uncomfortable and continuing to move forward anyway is when the magic happens.
[11:41] When you stay in your lane and you start to be known for something, you'll come to a point where all of a sudden it will feel like you're in the flow.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#492: 4 Steps To Create A Lucrative & Fun Side-Hustle While At Your 9-5

25 augusti 2022 | 35 min

Growing your side-hustle while working full-time is easier than you might think

Does the thought of building your own business while working your 9 to 5 job absolutely overwhelm you? If so, I can guarantee that you’re not alone.

I felt the same way when I realized that I wanted to start my own business. At the time I was working for Tony Robbins, and I remember thinking, ‘I want this more than anything -- but how on Earth am I going to do it?’

But here’s the good news -- it’s possible, and doing both doesn’t have to feel defeating. While growing your side-hustle while also working full-time is definitely a commitment, pulling it off is more possible than you think.

It’s true, sweet friend -- and I have proof. In this episode, you’ll hear about a handful of my own students who have successfully juggled having a full-time job and growing their business at the same time, and exactly how they’ve made it happen.

And here’s the really good news. I also share a 4-step framework that you can use to lay a solid foundation for your online business, and I promise – it’s simple, completely manageable, and doesn’t require a ton of your time. Sounds pretty great, right?

So if you are in the throes of cubicle life and are on the fence about getting your side-hustle started, this one is for you. Grab your journal, go someplace free of distractions, and listen closely -- because this episode is sure to set you up for success.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[08:11] Step 1: Schedule your tiger time! You need a system that makes time to drive your business forward. This is the part of the day that you fiercely protect like a tiger.
[12:51] William is a full-time elementary teacher and a biblical parenting coach. He worked through DCA and launched his first course. His client list is growing, and he's also a speaker all while teaching full time. You can create your dream business while working and being present with your family.
[14:18] Step 2: Create a lead magnet and set up your ESP or email service provider. This is a platform that houses your email list with tools and resources.
[17:40] Roberta created her side-hustle while being a full-time corporate launch manager. She struggled with time issues and worked on her launches in fifteen-minute time blocks. She's been massively successful and shows why it's so important to get clear on your tiger time.
[20:14] Step 3: Put together an offer. You need the time to put together the offer, set up your ESP, and create your lead magnet. You can do this by setting aside tiger time.
[21:29] Offers that might work well include a guide or PDF workbook, a limited one-on-one or group coaching offer, or a lower ticket challenge.
[27:11] Brooke does bookkeeping and owns and operates a local business called The Welcome Basket. After DCA, she created a course to teach others to start their own welcome basket business. She also offers coaching. She had so much going on, she had to take a step back and put courses on evergreen where they still earn for her.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Wisdom Wednesday: The Sweet Spot For Enticing Landing Page Copy

24 augusti 2022 | 5 min

#491: Feel Like You’re A Broken Record: Ideas For Reinvigorating Your Content

23 augusti 2022 | 15 min

How to put a fresh new spin on your core content

Do you ever feel like a broken record? Like you’re saying the same thing over, and over, and over again?

I know I sure do, and I have to constantly remind myself that even though it feels like I’m not adding anything new to the conversation, I actually am -- and that’s because only a small portion of my audience hears the content that I’m putting out there at a single time.

Just to put things into perspective, the average Instagram story view rate is between 2.5% and 5.4% -- which is exactly the reason why you need to repeat your message several times.

Not to mention, I’m a firm believer in something that my old boss, Tony Robbins, always says, and that’s “repetition is the mother of all skill” -- meaning you have to hear something or do something consistently in order to master it. So even if your audience is hearing your message multiple times, that’s actually great, because that’s when they’ll truly start to grasp it.

Even though it’s extremely important to repeat your message, that doesn’t mean that you have to be telling the same stories, or teaching your content in the same way.

No, sweet friend. Change it up! Give your content a refresh from time to time to keep things interesting and exciting -- a mini-makeover, if you will.

I know, you’re probably thinking, “Ok Amy, that all sounds great, but how the heck do I do that? Creating content is hard enough as it is.” And that’s exactly what you’re about to hear.

In this episode, I share what I do to get myself thinking creatively and put a new spin on the same message that I’ve been preaching from the rooftops since 2009. I promise all it takes is using your brain in new ways to get the ball rolling.

So if you feel like your content is getting stale and you’re ready to change it up while staying true to your message, tune into this episode and take some notes!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:35] Lately I've been feeling like I've been saying the same things over and over again. I start to wonder if I'm adding anything new or worth listening to?
[05:19] I believe it's always important to stay new and current in your business, but my friend Stu McLaren says that "if you're not repeating yourself and sharing the same things over and over again, you're not saying it enough."
[05:56] When we say something we think our entire audience hears it. The truth is even if we're lucky maybe a quarter of our audience will hear it or see it.
[08:01] We need to put our message out there several times. If we're tired of telling the same stories, we need to dig deeper and find some new stories that drill the same message home.
[10:09] Whenever you have a content block, remember that all of the content that you've already done can be repurposed.
[11:39] Expand your mind and content ideas will flow. Read books and listen to new podcasts. Fuel your brain every day and learn something new.
[12:34] If you have a content block, go back to your old content or fuel your brain with new ideas.
[13:52] How are you going to expand your mind? What sounds like fun? What sounds interesting and doable? Once you're clear on that add it to your goals for this quarter.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#490: The Business Model I Swear By: Live Launch, Go Evergreen, Repeat!

18 augusti 2022 | 37 min

This formula has put the epic battle between live launching and evergreen to bed once and for all

If you have a course or product that you’re ready to launch, you might be wondering which is better: Live launching or evergreen?

You’ve probably heard pros and cons about both of them -- Live launching is more lucrative but far more involved, while evergreen may be slightly less of a money-maker but allows you to put your product sales on autopilot and do whatever your little heart desires. (Please note that I’m very aware this isn’t always the case but for many of my students, it has been.)

It’s quite the conundrum, isn’t it? But here’s the good news. After 13 years in the launch game, I have developed a business model that has given me the best of both worlds and put the epic battle between Live launching and Evergreen to bed once and for all.

It won’t run you into the ground, offers longevity, scales well, and gives you multiple streams of revenue. Most importantly, it offers you flexibility as an entrepreneur -- which is what we’re all after, isn’t it?

In this episode, I reveal what that business model is, plus:

How to have an evergreen product that actually turns a profit
Examples of what I’ve seen work, and what I’ve seen work really well
Conversion rate stats from my own Live launches and evergreen products
How to determine what products should be evergreen, and what should be offered on a Live launch

So if you’re an entrepreneur who is still trying to get your business to a place where you can leave your full-time job, support your family, or offer you more flexibility, I encourage you to go someplace quiet and listen closely to this episode -- because it might just change the course of your business for the better.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:33] The best way to build a successful evergreen product is by perfecting it through live launching first!
[06:56] If you skip the live webinars and move right into evergreen, you're leaving money on the table. Hosting live webinars allows you to become a highly skilled marketer in your business.
[08:42] There will come a time when you are ready to graduate to evergreen.
[10:28] My students, Annie Chang and her sister discovered through a live launch what her students actually wanted in an evergreen product. They also launched a successful membership program. Her live launches convert at double of her evergreen.
[13:45] My DCA live launch conversion rate is 9%. My List Builders Society is around 5% to 6%.
[15:45] Once you are happy with your results, ask if it would make sense to launch your product at evergreen.
[17:32] When your live launch alongside your audience, you get to see their insecurities, questions, and objections in real time.
[26:47] Guidelines: 1. Focus on one product at a time. 2. Spend time working on conversion before moving to evergreen. 3. Live launching > Evergreen > What's my next live launch offer. Repeat live launching until it's time to move to evergreen.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Wisdom Wednesday: The BEST Way To Use Instagram For Email List Growth

17 augusti 2022 | 9 min

#489: How To Use Your Intuition To Make Quick And Confident Decisions

16 augusti 2022 | 10 min

What research says about “trusting your gut” and how women’s brains are optimized for rapid intuitive decision-making

As a business owner, you know just how many tough decisions you are faced with each and every day. It can be exhausting, confusing, and stressful -- especially when you’ve got some skin in the game.

I’ve said it before and I’ll say it again -- the ability to make quick and confident decisions is key in business. It’s certainly not easy, but it’s a very important skill to master if you want to live up to your potential as an entrepreneur.

Luckily, there are a million different techniques you can use to help you become a better decision-maker, from SWOT diagrams, to mind maps and other analysis tools. But here’s the thing -- it doesn’t have to be that complicated.

In fact, there’s a very simple tool you can use to make tough decisions that’s an excellent alternative to painstaking fact gathering and analysis -- and that’s leaning on your intuition.

I know, I know. That sounds a little woo-woo. But your intuition is a very real thing, and it’s scientifically proven.

Don’t believe me? Listen to the episode to find out what researchers say about “trusting your gut” and how women’s brains are actually optimized for rapid intuitive decision-making. You’ll also hear:

How to be more aware of your intuition and what it’s telling you
The difference between a ‘gut feeling’ and fear
Why your gut is referred to as your ‘second brain’ by scientists
The exact process I use when I am faced with a tough decision

So if you’re on the fence about listening to this episode, trust your gut and give it a go -- I promise, if you struggle with decisions, you’ll thank me later.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:12] How do you make the right decision when the answer isn't always easy? 1. Lean in to your intuition. Intuition is that sense of knowing with the right decision actually is before you even make it.
[05:23] Women's brains are optimized for rabid intuitive decision-making. We can combine our logical mind and intuition.
[06:22] Pay attention to your gut. There are neurotransmitters inside your stomach firing up. Scientists refer to our gut as our second brain.
[07:02] Turn inward. Do a mediation exercise and then journal about it. Make the decision, then pay attention to how you feel and the thoughts that come up.
[09:13] If you make a decision, and things don't work out as planned, you get to choose a different path. Don't beat yourself up, just leave the option of choosing a different path open.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#488: My Response To The Anti-Live Launch Chat: A Wellness Checklist

11 augusti 2022 | 41 min

I’m living proof that a Live launch can be done without running yourself into the ground

I’m sure you’ve heard the recent Live Launches vs. Evergreen debate on social media recently. And if you haven’t heard, here’s the TLDR version: people claim Live launching is a thing of the past, and Evergreen is the way to go.

Yes, Live launches can be exhausting, and yes, they do require a lot of preparation. But they are also incredibly powerful, and can bring you an out-of-this-world return on investment if you do them right.

Believe me, I understand the argument. Over the past 13 years I’ve had more than my fair share of Live launches that have completely run me into the ground. It’s no fun, and I would not wish that upon anyone.

But here’s the thing -- it doesn’t have to be that way, and I assure you that there’s a beautiful way for Live launches and an evergreen offer to coexist in your business that brings you a ton of flexibility, freedom, and so much more.

I know, I know. You're probably wondering how on God’s great Earth it’s possible to emerge from a Live launch feeling like a million bucks, and I’ll give you a clue: It’s all about being intentional.

Yes, sweet friend. There are specific things you can do to ensure that you are prioritizing your mental and emotional well-being, and also executing a flawless launch.

So in response to the anti-Live launch chatter on social media, I’ve come up with a Live Launch Wellness Checklist that you can use to keep yourself in check and make sure that you’re taking care of yourself before, during and after your Live launch.

I promise, when you show up for yourself first, you’ll fall in love with your business structure AND fall in love with Live launching.

Happy listening!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Wisdom Wednesday: 3 Clarifying Questions For A Profitable Lead Magnet

10 augusti 2022 | 5 min

#487: How To Define Success On Your Terms

9 augusti 2022 | 12 min

Newsflash: Success is not measurable, nor is it an end destination

Let’s face it -- we live in a culture that is obsessed with success. Now, that’s not necessarily a bad thing, because as business owners, the desire to be successful is what drives us to learn, to take risks, and grow, right?

But when we define success solely by how much money we have in the bank, how many degrees we have hanging on the wall, or how many followers we have on social media, then “success” is impossible to achieve because we are culturally programmed to want more, and more, and more.

There’s a quote I love from John D. Rockefeller, America’s first billionaire, that says “If your only goal is to become rich, you will never achieve it.” And that couldn’t be more true.

That’s why it is incredibly important to define what success means to you beyond what is visible for everyone to see -- and when you do, you’ll be so much more fulfilled as a business owner, and as a human being.

I get it -- it’s easy to get caught up in money and fame. But I’m here to tell you, sweet friend, that success is not measurable, nor is it an end destination. I can guarantee that when you define success according to your values, you will find more joy in life than you ever could have imagined -- I know I have!

In this episode, I share my journey of defining success on my own terms, and how it has greatly impacted my life. I also share some different ways that you can go about defining success that you probably have never considered.I promise, after listening to this episode, you will feel -- and truly believe -- that you are incredibly successful.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#486: 1 Digital Course, 1 Evergreen Funnel, 6-Figures: How This Mom Of 2 Made It Happen with Jessica Berk

4 augusti 2022 | 46 min

The simple strategy that earns this busy mom $100K per month, and counting

If you ever thought creating a thriving digital course while having young children was impossible, my guest today -- Jessica Berk – will prove you wrong. She’s a mom to two beautiful young girls, and the owner of a wildly successful online business, Awesome Little Sleepers.

What’s so impressive about Jessica is that she was able to take a pain point of hers -- having a toddler who was protesting sleep at night -- and turn it into a digital product that has helped thousands of parents all over the country get their children to sleep easily, and stay sleeping throughout the night.

Now, here’s the kicker. Jessica made $200,000 in her first year of business, and continues to make around $100,000 per month to this day. Yes, sweet friend, you read that right -- and I’m here to tell you that it’s possible for you, too.

In this episode, Jessica shares her story of how Awesome Little Sleepers came to be, and what she’s done to earn her incredible success, including:

How she knew it was time to go from one-on-one coaching to creating a digital course
The strategy behind her first launch and what made it so successful
What she’s done to grow her email list and the one thing that’s made the most impact
How she’s managed to find her flow -- being a mom, running a household, and building a business -- at the same time

Jessica is truly an inspiration, and I’m so excited for you to listen to this episode!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#485: Behind-The-Scenes With Crime Junkie Podcast Host, Ashley Flowers

3 augusti 2022 | 51 min

What happens when you leave your 9 to 5, pursue your passion, and create one of the most downloaded podcasts in history

If you’ve ever listened to the podcast Crime Junkie, you know just how addictive it is. The suspense, combined with the gripping yet straightforward storytelling makes it one of the most enthralling podcasts out there. I, for one, am a loyal listener, and a self-declared Crime Junkie.

But perhaps what’s most impressive about Crime Junkie is its host, Ashley Flowers, who launched the podcast in 2017 while working a super 9 to 5 job. Since its debut, Crime Junkie has remained at the top of the charts and gets 9 million downloads a month. Yes, you read that right – 9 MILLION!

So how did Ashley do it? How did she make the decision to leave her cushy corporate job, invest in her side hustle, and take the leap into entrepreneurship? And how on God’s good Earth did she grow it so quickly?

In this episode, you’ll find out. Yes, sweet friend, Ashley is revealing her own story on how she went from a corporate job to becoming a highly successful digital entrepreneur at the helm of an entire podcast network.

This was a really fun and informative conversation, and in it, Ashley shares:

How she took the leap from working a full time job to pursuing her passion
A behind-the-scenes look at her work-week, and how she manages it all
Her best tips on how to grip listeners with a good story
The inspiration behind her first book, and her book-writing process

So get comfy, pop in those earbuds and get ready to hear Ashley Flowers like you’ve never heard her before.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Wisdom Wednesday: How To Get 1,000 TikTok Followers

3 augusti 2022 | 6 min

#484: Hindsight is 20/20: 3 Things I Wish I Did When I First Started Out

2 augusti 2022 | 21 min

I only wish someone would have told me these things 13 years ago

If you’re a human on planet Earth, then there have probably been a million times that you have said, “If only I knew then what I know now, I would have ____________.”

Yes, sweet friend. Hindsight is 20/20, and it’s always so much easier to analyze and evaluate situations when you’re looking back on them in the past, than when you’re in the present moment.

It’s also easy to look back and blame yourself for any “mistakes” that you made, but the thing is, you were making the best decision you could based on the limited knowledge you had at the time.

I mean, let’s be real -- I think we all thought that overplucking our eyebrows in the early 2000s was a great idea, but here we are in 2022 spending a small fortune on trying to get those big, beautiful brows back that we once had.

All jokes aside, in this episode I’m sharing the three biggest things I wish I would have known early on -- things that would have given me a ton of momentum in my business and that would have made an impact on what it looks like today.

I’m also going to share a couple of things I did do that really moved the needle. Things that I hope you consider doing, too.

As you know, it’s my goal to share my own experiences with you -- both good and bad -- so you can learn from them and create the digital business of your dreams.

So if you’re ready, pop in those earbuds and tune in!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:40] Create regular and consistent content. I struggled and procrastinated with writing blog posts. I didn't hone in on my content system until I started my podcast in 2013. My profits tripled once I started producing regular content.
[09:01] I wish I would have made a quick cash injection while I was formulating and working on my long-term revenue goals. Digital courses were my long game. I should have had a simple offer on the table while building up to my course.
[11:53] I wish I wouldn't have said YES to everything. I needed to push myself, but I really needed to be more discerning from the get-go. Focus on what makes sense to you, your business, and your long-term goals.
[16:32] Early on, I followed a step-by-step framework. For me, that was Marie Forleo's B-School. Digital Course Academy is also a step-by-step framework.
[17:57] Surround yourself with a community of like-minded entrepreneurs. I surround myself with a great peer group through a mastermind.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#483: How To Be Curious As An Entrepreneur with Calan Breckon

28 juli 2022 | 53 min

Why curiosity helps mitigate the fears that come along with entrepreneurship

Fear can be an excellent motivator in business, but it can also completely consume you -- if you let it. Unfortunately, all too many entrepreneurs fall victim to their own fears and as a result, become completely overwhelmed.

If you can relate to this, then read on, sweet friend, because my guest on today’s episode (and former student!), Calan Breckon, has a really beautiful approach to business – and that’s through curiosity, not fear.

Calan is a Business Coach & Consultant, writer, educator and podcast co-host of Gay Men Going Deeper.

His business is thriving -- but it hasn’t always been that way. In fact, it took a lot of curiosity, exploration, and a failed launch for Calan to land on a direction for his business that truly lit him up. But by staying curious and asking himself some really difficult questions, he was able to create the digital business of his dreams.

Today, Calan teaches clients all over the world profitable action steps for creating a successful online business while also building a solid mental foundation -- something that is incredibly important.

In this episode, Calan opens up about his own journey, and how being curious can help alleviate some of the fears that come along with entrepreneurship. You will also hear:

Calan’s step-by-step exercise on how to identify your 3 core values
How to create a business that is in alignment with your core values
Why personal development is so important as an entrepreneur
What it looks like to evolve as an entrepreneur (and why it’s okay to do so)

Plus, so much more. So if you’re ready to move from fear to curiosity, grab a pen and paper and get ready to identify your core values!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[12:47] Your business grows at the rate that you are personally growing. You can never outperform your self-image and what you believe about yourself.
[16:09] Calan defaulted to the things he loved in his business. He loves tech and brought all of those aspects to their new business. His colleagues prefer doing the forward-facing stuff.
[18:31] Through his journey of curiosity Calan discovered what really lights him up and that's getting on calls and helping people.
[22:54] In every relationship communication is key. There needs to be an ability to have those difficult conversations and integrate your business with your core values.
[28:39] Calan’s process for identifying your core values or the things that you feel are the most important in relation to how you live your life.
[31:23] Get a pen and paper and identify the following: a time in your life when you were happiest both personally and professionally, a time in your life when you were the most proud personally and professionally, times when you felt the most fulfilled and satisfied.
[33:02] Make a list of your top 10 core values and compare them to one another. Once you discover your top core values use them as guideposts for making decisions in your life.
[41:10] It's also important to take a step back and analyze what is working and what's not working and why it may not be working.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

Wisdom Wednesday: A Content Tip For Course Creators

27 juli 2022 | 7 min

#482: Entrepreneurship Rule #1: You Have To Get In The Game

26 juli 2022 | 18 min

Spoiler alert: You cannot win a game you do not play

Do you ever think back to when you were a kid playing sports, and what you felt like as you stood on the sidelines of the soccer field, or the ice skating rink, or basketball court?

For me, it was cheerleading.

If you were anything like me, you were probably a little bit nervous (ok… let’s be real -- a lot nervous). Your palms were sweaty, you felt your heart beating through your chest, and even though you had been practicing for weeks, you were afraid to get out there.

All of a sudden your coach looks at you and says, “Go.” She gives you a nudge, and just like that, game on – it’s go time.

And somehow, once you’re in motion all your fear disappears. All of that nervous energy turns into adrenaline and you think to yourself, “I’ve got this.”

You feel incredible because you’re doing it, and you didn’t think you could.

Now, you’re probably wondering why I’m sharing sports analogies with you, and I’ll tell you, sweet friend -- it’s because if you want to be successful as an entrepreneur, you have to be able to get in the game, get into motion without hesitation.

You have to be willing to take calculated risks, willing to fail, and willing to put yourself out there without feeling 100% ready. If I’ve learned one thing over the years, it’s that there’s power in being in the game, even if it’s imperfect.

In this episode, you’ll hear about a recent experience where my own ability to take a calculated risk was put to the test. Yes, it was uncomfortable… and yes, I was afraid I was going to embarrass myself. But I did it, and let me tell you, it was totally worth it.

So if you’re ready to hear what it is, grab your favorite iced beverage, turn up the volume, and tune in. And I promise, no more sports analogies. ;)

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:25] You know that being an entrepreneur is so much more than owning a business or multiple businesses. Managing your mindset can be more difficult than any of the other tasks that we do.
[03:10] Failure only gives you the opportunity to grow. It's hard to get in this frame of mind, when things aren't going well, but remind yourself that you're learning and growing.
[04:31] Hobie and I bought an NFT. When the auction happened, I realized that I didn't know what I needed until I got in the game and tried it.
[06:53] That night, I realized that I learned five things that I never would have learned by reading books or watching videos, or asking questions. I had to get off the sidelines and get into action!
[10:42] You do not know what you need to know until you get in the game. Where are you standing on the sidelines? There's a point where you need to cut bait and get in the game.
[14:21] If you're struggling in an area or chasing a goal or chasing a dream, and you're clear on what you want, then where do you need to get in the game now?
[16:25] Remember, no time is going to be perfect. Getting in the game will be the best education that you could possibly imagine.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#481: How To Stop Juggling ALL The Things With Shunta Grant

21 juli 2022 | 52 min

Learn how to be intentional with how you organize and spend your time

If I could make a wild guess, I’d say that ‘entrepreneur’ is just one of the many hats that you wear. In fact, you probably have a laundry list of roles that you fill on a day-to-day basis -- mother, father, wife, husband, fur-parent, housekeeper, chef, chauffeur, personal shopper, gardener, accountant -- the list goes on.

And with all that you’ve got going on in your life, I’m sure you’ve probably wondered, “How the heck do I keep up with everything and have a successful business?”

Sweet friend, if I had a dollar every time I asked myself that question, I’d be quite rich. And when I do, I remind myself that I don’t have to hustle through it all. Life is so much more fulfilling when you have more white space, more quiet time with loved ones, and more time for yourself.

But like many things, that’s easier said than done. In order to achieve that sort of balance, you have to be intentional with how you organize and spend your time – and my guest on this episode is an expert when it comes to doing that.

Her name is Shunta Grant, and she’s on a mission to help women live lives of intention, leading with self-awareness and self-love. Sounds pretty great, right?

I loved this conversation with Shunta because I learned so much about how I can set habits and routines that compliment my life, and I won’t lie – her philosophy is a bit different from many others in this space.

So if you’re ready to stop going through the motions and start living in the present, tune in to hear:

The difference between being productive and being efficient
Strategies on how to balance being an entrepreneur and a parent without falling victim to the hustle mentality
How to create a routine that connects you to who you are and what you want

The philosophy behind her brand, Best Today

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[06:33] Shunta began her career as an attorney. She realized that she wanted to create resources that plan humanity first, as opposed to doing and doing.
[07:50] Everything they do is built on the four principles of proaction, intentionality, self-awareness, and self-love. We need all four to live an intentional life and grow an intentional business.
[11:03] If you're clear on who you are and what you want, you will produce the things you want. Slow down and make sure the destination is the place where you want to be.
[13:22] Who are you? What do you want? Sit down and write out the answers to these questions and give yourself the freedom to dream.
[19:06] It's okay to throw the idea of balance out the window. Ask yourself what you really want? Honor the season that you are in. It's a container, not a restriction. Caring for children is a season.
[24:06] 1. Honor the season you are in. 2. Stop comparing. 3. Take the time to prune those things that aren't feeding what's the most important.
[30:00] We all have routines, they just may not all be healthy. We need to create healthy routines, so that when we feel triggers we know what positive action we'll take.
[35:03] A lot of people don't believe they are worthy to live an intentional life. You are worthy of the effort it takes to live an intentional life. You were born worthy.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#480: Time Blocking 101: How I Schedule My Time In 4 Easy Steps

19 juli 2022 | 15 min

How time blocking has transformed my life, my business and my stress levels

Close your eyes and imagine this super dreamy scenario:

You wake up in the morning excited for the workday, and are crystal clear on what you have to accomplish.

You feel 100% prepared because you know exactly what’s expected of you.

You have all of the information you need to be successful at your fingertips.

You cruise through each task effortlessly, and even have time to take several breaks.

You end the day feeling productive, successful, and not the least bit overwhelmed.

This is not some sort of weird alternate universe. In fact, this exact workday is easily achievable, and I know that because I live and breathe it every. single. day.

Yes, sweet friend. I have developed a very specific formula for structuring my workdays, and time blocking is a big part of it. It helps me stay clear and focused on what my outcomes are, and knock out my task list without context switching.

Let me tell you, this little formula of mine has helped me immensely in my business, and I am so excited to share it with you. In this episode, you’ll hear:

What time blocking is and why it’s been a game changer for my business
The specific tools I use to block out my days, and how I go about it step-by-step
How I’m able to take multiple breaks a day and still be productive
How I use the Full Focus Planner alongside technology to stay on track

So if you’re ready to transform your work days for the better, pop in those earbuds and give this episode a listen. I promise, you’ll thank me.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:38] There's an art and a science to how I block my time. It took me a few years to nail it down, but now I have a very specific formula to help me stay on track.
[03:30] Time blocking is crucial to my business, because it helps me get really clear about the action items I'm going to be doing that day.
[04:14] It all starts with Google Calendar and my project management tool Asana. You can even use it if you have a one-man or one-woman show.
[10:52] I also use my Full Focus planner to get the most out of my time blocks. I use it to identify my top three priorities for the day. Come rain or shine, these three things get done!
[13:27] Recap: Schedule time blocks along with non-negotiables. Time blocks are assigned to me in Asana with more specifics. I write down my three priorities for the next day. If something doesn't get done, we reschedule.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#479: Money In The Bank: 6 Fun Strategies For A Quick Cash Injection

14 juli 2022 | 27 min

Use these tried and true strategies if you want to make money quickly

How many times have you wanted to invest in yourself or in your business but you didn’t have the extra cash on hand to make it happen?

Maybe you really wanted to learn how to create, launch and sell your digital course by taking Digital Course Academy, or finally hire that virtual assistant that you so desperately need.

There’s nothing worse than having a resource at your fingertips (that you know will help take you to the next level) but not being able to spend money on it -- because let’s be real, life is pretty darn expensive.

I get it, I’ve been there… many times.

And that’s why I’m so excited to share five different strategies you can use for a quick cash injection into your business.

Sweet friend, I only wish I would have had these in my back pocket when I first got started and was super strapped for cash, because they’re just that good. And best of all, they’re really easy to implement.

So if you’re ready to learn how you can easily make a quick buck (or thousands) and provide value to your audience, then grab a notepad and tune into this episode that will certainly be a game changer for you and your business.

Enjoy this step-by-step episode!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[07:47] 1. Offer limited online or in-person one-on-one sessions. You have knowledge and know-how in a specific area, and other people would love to learn from you.
[11:33] 2. Offer limited group coaching spots. Follow the same steps as above but tweak some of your pricing.
[13:06] 3. Audit your spending habits. Find hidden dollars and cut back a little on the pleasure spending. See how much you can save by temporarily eliminating some of your purchases.
[17:32] 4. Host a lower ticket challenge. Teach similar strategies or practices that you would teach in your group or one-on-one sessions.
[20:46] 5. Create a PDF guide or worksheet of something you already teach and you know your audience loves. Then sell this guide or worksheet for a low-cost.
[22:57] 6. Offer your insight through market research. Use legit online survey companies like Swagbucks, Survey Junkie, and User Interviews.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#478: 5 Weeks Unplugged: Lessons From My Sabbatical

12 juli 2022 | 24 min

The unexpected gift I received from taking 5 weeks off.

I just got back from a five-week-long sabbatical, and holy smokes, sweet friend — it was so much different than I thought it would be.

Now, if you have been with me for a while (or listened to Sabbatical 101: How I’m Prepping for 30 Days Away From My Business), you know that taking an extended time away from my business is something that I have been wanting to do for years. It took a lot of preparation, hard work, and countless lattes — but I made it happen!

Going into it I had some expectations about how things would go. I knew that I would have the time of my life at Chloe’s wedding in Mexico and that I’d create some really great memories with my family at our new lake house. I also knew that being away from my business might cause some anxiety, but heck, that’s what skinny margs are for, right?

But something happened over the course of my sabbatical that I didn’t expect. As I got further and further away from my business, I realized A LOT about myself that I wasn’t necessarily ready to confront. There was an emotional and eye-opening component to my time away that I was not prepared for — and if you know me, you know I like to be prepared.

Now, don’t get me wrong, I am SO glad that I took this sabbatical, and in the end, I walked away with a life-changing gift…

… But would I do it again? You’ll just have to tune in to find out.

Here’s a glance at this episode…

[03:01] I just finished my five-week sabbatical!
[04:47] The good: I loved spending so much time with Hobie. I went at a slower pace and took the time to really take care of myself.
[07:03] The bad: It was really difficult to disconnect. After Mexico, my head started to spiral around work. I had anxiety, which was alarming to me.
[09:26] The ugly: Was that I realized that my identity was in my work. I felt restless when not checking things off of a list. I started to get FOMO.
[11:23] The flip side of identifying with my work so strongly is that I really love my work and feel great about it. I love my team, my students, and all of you listeners!
[12:33] The gift: I need to explore who I am beyond my work. I need to feel loved, supported, and accomplished even if I don’t have a thriving business.
[13:17] Would I take five weeks off again. No! Five weeks is too much. I’m thinking two weeks each quarter might be more fitting for me personally.
[20:09] You might wonder how I was even able to take so much time off of my business. I’ve created a program called Systems That Scale which is all about how I run my business.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

“I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.”

#477: Have A Digital Course In The Works? 5 Ways To Keep Your Audience Engaged Until Your Launch

7 juli 2022 | 25 min

The must-dos to make sure your audience is ready for your digital course

Imagine this scenario:

You’ve got a solid email list. You’ve built up your social media following. You’ve got an engaged audience, they’re resonating with your content, and they want more. You know that the next step would be to serve up a digital course…

But here’s the thing. You don’t have a course… yet! Not only do you not have a course, you don’t even have it mapped out.

This is a great problem to have -- and the good news is, you are about to learn how to bridge that gap until you have your digital course up and running.

And let me tell you, this period of time -- when you have an audience who is genuinely excited and interested in your topic -- is very important, because the last thing you want to do is lose their attention.

In this episode, you’re going to learn what you absolutely must do to make sure that you’re creating content that will set your audience up perfectly for moving into your digital course when the time comes.

You’ll also take away five tangible ways that you can stay top of mind while you work diligently behind the scenes to bring your box office digital course to life.

I hope you have your listening ears on because this episode is jam packed full of my best tips and tricks -- so tune in and enjoy!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:11] Before you launch, do a 30-60 day pre launch runway to build momentum and attract a bigger audience.
[08:38] Be mindful about what you're putting out there. Find your ideal customer avatar, and create content for them that aligns with your future course.
[11:16] Ask yourself: Where is my audience now and where do they need to be? What do they need to learn? What mindset shifts do they need to make?
[12:17] Strategy 1: Tell stories about how you or other people have gotten results through your process.
[12:57] Strategy 2: Take them behind the scenes. People love it when you share little tidbits about your life and business.
[14:55] Strategy 3: Hint to your audience that you have a program coming their way. Have conversations that help them move forward towards your course.
[18:21] Strategy 4: Create a waitlist landing page and segment the emails that come in through that page. Ask your audience to sign up to get the latest news.
[20:12] During your pre-launch runway, create weekly content that's aligned with your upcoming course. Email your subscribers and share a lead magnet weekly.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#476: I’m Writing A Book! A Look At The Good, The Bad, and The Ugly

5 juli 2022 | 25 min

If you’ve ever considered writing a book, here’s what you need to know

If you have been listening for the past few months, you’ve probably heard me mention that I’m writing a book. This has been a dream of mine for as long as I can remember, and with a lot of hard work and a little help from the universe, it’s happening.

I have been in full-swing book writing mode, and as a ‘first-timer,’ I’m learning a lot. It’s been quite the process, and there’s much more to it than I initially anticipated -- but let me tell you, it’s been incredibly rewarding to see this little dream of mine come to life.

Perhaps what I’m most excited about is the fact that I know this book is going to help so many women find the confidence to leave behind what’s no longer serving them, and move into what lights them up. To me, that makes all the latte-fueled early mornings worth it.

And because writing a book can be a game-changer for your content marketing strategy, I figured that I would give you the full report on what my experience has been like so far. In this episode, you’ll hear:

My inspiration for writing this book, and what pushed me to make it happen
What was most important to me in a publisher, and how I chose one
What the book writing process has been like and the challenges I’ve had
My experience working with a book editor

If you’ve ever considered writing a book, you’re definitely going to want to check out this episode -- so grab your pen and paper, and tune in!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:09] The inspiration for my book comes from an avatar that I serve — a woman who is still in her 9 to 5 job, but knows there’s more out there for her.
[08:53] It's my goal to give women (and men) permission to make a pivot in their life and leave whatever doesn't serve them anymore.
[09:24] I also wanted to show people how to launch and grow a successful online business once they take the leap into entrepreneurship.
[11:58] I have two agents who helped me navigate meetings with publishers. I ended up landing a deal with Hay House, who gave me a great advance.
[15:16] Rehashing stories from the past and digging up past experiences was a much bigger challenge than I thought it would be.
[20:37] Get on the waitlist for Two Weeks Notice to get fabulous bonuses, the latest details, and be part of the launch.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#475: Changing The Face Of Investing & Leaving A Legacy with Arlan Hamilton

30 juni 2022 | 62 min

From living in the SFO airport to running $20M in VC funds, Arlan shares her incredible journey

My guest on this episode is an absolute inspiration -- and I don’t say that lightly. Her name is Arlan Hamilton, and she is the managing partner of Backstage Capital, a company that she founded while houseless.

Backstage Capital is a new kind of Venture Capitalism (VC) -- one that invests in founders who are people of color, women, and/or LGBTQ+. Arlan identifies as all three.

And as if running 20 million dollars in VC funds isn’t enough to fill her plate, she’s also an author, speaker, and host of her own podcast, Your First Million. Her other company, Runner, connects inclusive companies with operations talent.

Arlan is doing really big things in a really big way. I admire her so much -- not only is she making the business landscape a heck of a lot better for underrepresented founders and entrepreneurs, but she is creating a legacy for generations to come.

I am SO excited for you to hear this important conversation, sweet friend, because it’s pretty powerful. In our interview, you’ll hear:

Arlan’s journey to becoming an activist entrepreneur
Ways you can support people of color, women, and the LGBTQ+ entrepreneurial communities
How to deal with rejection while still moving forward
What you can do to be a good candidate for gaining an investor

I hope this episode is just as insightful and inspiring for you as it was for me. So if you’re ready to meet Arlan, pop in your Airpods, get comfy, and enjoy!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:07] A decade ago, Arlan Hamilton didn't know what a venture capitalist was. Now, she represents people who aren't traditionally represented in the venture capital space.
[04:03] She had big goals and dreams, but she didn't think that venture capital would get her somewhere.
[10:39] Arlan was on the cover of Fast Company, along with other black women on the cover were Oprah, Beyoncé, and Serena Williams. Her venture capital firm has invested in over 200 companies so far.
[25:53] Before you attempt to fundraise, get dialed in on what you truly need. When making a pitch, lean in to what is great about your company. Investors like it when you can show profit or have a large waiting list.
[33:44] Runner is another company Arlan has that connects talent with great companies. It helps inclusive companies find assistants.
[41:39] Arlan shares the amazing story of how she ended up sitting in the front row of a Janet Jackson concert, and how later in life, she was able to do the same for other concert goers.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#474: Ways To Shake Things Up When You (& Your Team) Need A Reset

28 juni 2022 | 17 min

If your usual routine has you feeling uninspired, try doing something different

Do you ever get that feeling that you need to shake things up a bit in your business?

Maybe things have started to feel a little bit stagnant, or you’re not as excited about your online business as you once were. Maybe you feel like you’re just going through the motions, and are getting bored. Or maybe you’re just in need of some good old fashioned fun and quality time spent with your team.

Whatever it might be for you, I’m a true believer in shaking things up from time to time. I find that by doing something different -- just for the heck of it -- I come back feeling more creative, more energized, and more excited than ever about my business.

Recently, I started to get that itch to mix it up, so I did something that I’ve never done in Team Amy Porterfield history -- and let me tell you, it was so worth it.

In this episode, you’ll hear exactly what I did to connect, reset, and have some fun with my team -- plus some other ideas of things you can do when you start to feel a bit uninspired by your usual routine.

And more than anything, I hope this helps you realize that it’s not always about the hustle and grind. Taking the time to laugh, have fun, and experience new things -- whether it’s with your team or on your own -- will only help you become a better entrepreneur.

Happy listening!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:36] Every quarter I meet up with my leadership team for a meeting. We do a lot of brainstorming, deep diving, and troubleshooting.
[07:18] Usually we get straight to work, but it's been an intense quarter, and I wanted to shake things up. I decided to take everyone to Disneyland.
[10:53] After returning from Disneyland, we had a great meeting. I attribute the meeting’s success to the fact that we had fun and connected the day before.
[12:15] You don’t need to do anything expensive to shake things up. You can do a volunteer day, go on a picnic, hike, or just be in nature.
[13:00] If you're a solopreneur, you can shake things up by going on a retreat, an inspiring trip, or attending an event. It’s all about doing something different.
[14:15] You can also consider a total immersion weekend. Go somewhere you haven’t been and brainstorm on ways to improve your business.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#473: Let's Cut The Fluff: How Are You, Really? with Jenna Kutcher

23 juni 2022 | 43 min

How to ditch the golden handcuffs and create a life on your terms

As a photographer, influencer, course creator, author, and host of the wildly popular Goal Digger podcast, Jenna Kutcher is one of the most talented content creators out there. I love and respect Jenna so much not only because she is a digital marketing extraordinaire, but she’s hands down one of the most grounded women that I know.

And despite all of her success, what’s most impressive about Jenna is that her driving force has never really been about the hustle. She’s embraced the simple notion that we -- women especially -- crave a life of fulfillment, and has managed to create a life on her own terms while building an incredibly lucrative business.

It’s possible, friend, and Jenna is living proof.

Now normally when Jenna is on the show, we talk shop about all things online marketing (in fact, she recently joined me for an episode about how to launch a podcast – check it out here if you missed it.)

But in this conversation, we talk about the things that are important in becoming a successful entrepreneur but all-too-often get overlooked – like your sense of identity, whether or not your work is aligning with your values, and your purpose.

On paper, these things might not sound like a big deal, but trust me on this one -- they are -- and that’s why I am so excited to share this episode with you. In it, Jenna and I discuss:

How to take inventory of your life and what to do with the information that surfaces
The meaning of ‘golden handcuffs’ and how you can get out of them
What to do if you feel like you’ve traded your 9 to 5 job for a 24/7 business
How to overcome the fear of asking for help when you need it most
The inspiration for her new book How Are You, Really?: Living Your Truth One Answer at a Time

So whether you’re still in the throws of the 9 to 5 grind, have just started your business, or are an established online entrepreneur, this episode has something for everyone -- because in the end, I think it’s safe to say that we all desire the same thing -- to be fulfilled.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[06:07] Reframing is extremely powerful, and can be helpful when you find yourself fearful of something.
[07:42] If you want to find ways to do more meaningful work, look at your calendar ahead and take a life inventory. Are you passionate about it? Does it align with your values? Does it bring you joy?
[10:38] Learn how to rest in the present outside of work, so that when you are in work-mode, you’re laser-focused.
[15:06] Golden handcuffs are benefits like unlimited vacation that make people feel stuck in the workplace. Do these really add value to your life?
[19:28] Entrepreneurship can get you to a life of freedom and choice, but you have to have a "why" that’s stronger than your work.
[24:24] The more you ask for help, the easier it becomes to ask for and receive it. Accept help if you want to live out your vision.
[28:39] You never know when the power of your story will inspire someone else to keep showing up in their life. You could literally change someone's trajectory.
[33:02] How Are You, Really?: Living Your Truth One Answer at a Time is Jenna's new book for women who are looking to come home to themselves.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#472: Perfectionism Vs. Procrastination: What’s REALLY Happening

21 juni 2022 | 13 min

Being a perfectionist only holds you back from taking action

If I were a gambling woman, I’d bet there’s been a couple of times where you’ve really struggled to make a decision, or procrastinated taking action on something because it wasn’t 100% perfect. Maybe it was a really big decision, like whether or not you should launch your business or a podcast. Or maybe it was something smaller, like deploying a new ad, or lead magnet.

As entrepreneurs, we are faced with decision after decision, day after day. Quite frankly, It can be exhausting. But I’m going to clue you in on something really important: It’s crucial that you’re able to make an informed decision quickly if you want to truly grow your business.

So many people procrastinate taking action because they are striving for perfection. But I’m here to tell you, sweet friend, that hemming and hawing over something only means one thing -- you’re delaying the inevitable.

While you’re wasting precious time, you could be gaining momentum and getting results. And even if you totally fail, you have an opportunity to learn from your mistakes and then knock it out of the park the next time.

As my old boss Tony Robbins says, it’s all about taking massive action -- and I can confidently say that my own ability to take action on things quickly has been a big contributor to my own success.

And that’s why I thought I’d share some of my own thoughts and experiences on this topic so that if you struggle with making decisions, or think your perfectionism is holding you back, you will have a much easier time the next time around.

Alright, friend. Grab that iced latte and get ready to make your next decision quickly and confidently, like a real boss.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#471: 6 Tactical Strategies To Keep Your Evergreen Students Engaged From Start To Finish

16 juni 2022 | 39 min

When your students fall off the horse, use these strategies to get them back on

If you have an evergreen course, then this episode is for you, sweet friend because I’m diving deep into an issue that most evergreen course creators face -- and that’s losing the attention and engagement of your students.

And even if you haven’t created your evergreen course yet, if you’ve ever taken one, you know exactly what I’m talking about. You’re cruising through the modules, taking notes, learning a ton, and then all of the sudden… life happens. Your focus shifts to something else that’s going on (your family, your job, or the final season of Ozark), and you fall off the proverbial evergreen course horse.

Without you being there live to cheer your students on to the finish line, some dropoff is bound to happen. After all, we’re all human. Let’s be real -- it even happens in my evergreen course, List Builders Society, and I’ve been in the game for 13 years now!

Luckily, I have some tools in my arsenal to help combat the dreaded engagement drop-off that I’m going to share with you in this episode. Over the years, I’ve found that these strategies have significantly helped keep my audience interested and engaged, which is a win-win for everyone.

So if you want your students to show up bright-eyed and bushy-tailed, excited, and ready to learn throughout the entire duration of your course, then open up that Google doc and get ready to take notes -- because this episode is packed with my very best tips.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#470: How I Overcame My Fear Of Getting Personal On Social Media

14 juni 2022 | 15 min

Opening up on social media can be hard, but it will pay off in the long run

Have you ever truly thought about what life was like before social media?

I may be dating myself, but I remember writing notes to friends and family and dropping them in the mail, snapping pictures with Polaroid cameras, and calling a friend (whose phone number I knew by heart) when I needed some social interaction, instead of scrolling through Instagram.

It was a totally different time -- not any better, and not any worse than it is now -- but I will say that the connection you felt from sharing your life with a few close friends as opposed to hundreds or thousands on social media was something really special.

Life was a bit more mysterious because everything we did wasn’t available for everybody to see, let alone have an opinion about.

I won’t lie -- I have struggled with posting about my personal life on social media, and if you take a look at my Instagram feed you’ll see that while there are some personal posts sprinkled throughout, it’s mostly business content.

I’m pretty reserved when it comes to opening up about my marriage, my insecurities, and being a step-mom for a couple of reasons, which you’ll hear about in this episode.

That being said, over time, I realized that in order to have the business that I dreamt of having, I needed to let my audience in – and little by little, that’s just what I did.

So I thought it would be great to share how I’ve managed to overcome some of the anxiety I’ve had about sharing personal content on social platforms because let’s be real, it can be intimidating to do if you’re a private person -- but it’s also a necessary part of being an online entrepreneur in 2022.

In this episode, you’ll hear:

The limiting beliefs that held me back from posting personal content for years
How I’ve managed to overcome anxiety about letting people into my personal life online
What it's like to have a partner who doesn’t love social media, and how we’ve found a way to make it enjoyable and comfortable for both of us

Happy listening!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#469: How To Get Exactly What You Want with Julie Solomon

9 juni 2022 | 43 min

Your playbook on how to establish boundaries, stop people-pleasing and release control

One of my best gal pals Julie Solomon is the textbook definition of a triple threat entrepreneur. She’s the host of The Influencer Podcast, has launched several successful online programs and masterminds, and is a first-time author of the much-anticipated book, Get What You Want.

I respect and admire Julie so much because she’s all about helping online entrepreneurs master the skillsets needed to go from having a side hustle to a profitable, sustainable business. And what I find most impressive about her is that she is all about helping women to turn their own messages into movements, and empowering them to impact the world. She really is an entrepreneur after my own heart.

In this episode, Julie shares her best tools and advice for creating a life and business that lights you up -- and as you know, this is crucially important as an entrepreneur. You’ll learn:

Ways to be productive without being in a ‘hustle state’
The 3 tools to freedom that will help you establish boundaries, stop people-pleasing, and release control
How to step out of your comfort zone in order to land amazing PR opportunities
Tips on how to communicate with clarity and confidence
The inspiration behind her new book, Get What You Want

Not only will you learn some hot tips on how to become the best entrepreneurial version of yourself possible, but I know that you’ll walk away loving Julie just as much as I do.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#468: 3 Pieces of Advice That Have Made Me A Better Entrepreneur

7 juni 2022 | 18 min

#467: How To Host A Live Virtual Event That Will Wow Your Audience

2 juni 2022 | 40 min

My step-by-step process for pulling off an online event like a pro

Lights… Camera…. Start video?

Live events sure look a whole lot different these days than they used to, wouldn’t you say?

When I first started my entrepreneurial journey 13 years ago, in-person events were really the only way to get your community together in one place at the same time. Today, we have countless options available to connect with our audiences Live, and most of them don’t even require us to leave the house.

Don’t get me wrong, in-person events are great, and are still an excellent option depending on what your goals are -- but there are also many things to consider, which I’ll talk about in this episode.

What I really want to share with you is how you can pull off a live, virtual event like a pro -- because let me tell you, I have found immense value in connecting with my students in this way -- and not just monetarily.

But just like a Live in-person event, a Live virtual event takes a good amount of planning and preparation -- and there’s also a lot going on behind the scenes when the camera is rolling that you might not even be aware of.

The good news is, I’ve got my virtual events running like a well-oiled machine, and in this episode, I’m sharing my top tips on how to host one that will blow your customer’s socks off. You’ll learn:

The pros and cons of live in-person events and Live virtual events
How far in advance you should start planning your event
What to consider when planning your content, and how to create a theme
How to determine whether you should sell at your event, or simply nurture
The technology I use to pull my Live virtual events off without a hitch
Where you can host your virtual event if you don’t want to host at home

Alright, friend. Tune in, take notes, and get ready to rock your virtual stage.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[06:15] Let’s talk about Live virtual events versus in-person events. Virtual events have a huge ROI. They have a larger outreach and attendance rate. They are more accessible and lower cost for attendees. More people equals more sales. It's also more cost-effective and great for introverts.
[11:56] Six key decisions include: When are you having it? What is your theme? How long will it be? Will you be selling? What platform will you use? Where will you host it?
[12:19] When will you host your event? Get those dates on the calendar. It takes time to plan, organize, and fill up the event.
[13:50] What will your theme be? Choosing the theme comes down to who's your audience, whether it's a bonus and the season of the event.
[17:00] Will you be selling or is this a bonus event to nurture your audience or a mix of both? Selling from stage can be seamless, but you have to plan for it.
[18:48] What platform will you host on? We are using Vimeo for our virtual live events. You always need a backup plan when it comes to using technology.
[20:38] Where will you host your virtual event? If you have the space and availability to host it at home, it will save a lot of time and stress. You could also rent an Airbnb or event space.
[35:36] I challenge you to host a virtual live event this year. It has immense value and strengthens your relationship with your audience. Start working through the six key decisions.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#466: A Tangible Approach For Tripling Your Time Management Capacity with Ed Mylett

1 juni 2022 | 52 min

Ed shares his best mindset tips for achieving happiness and success simultaneously

My guest on this episode is a top business leader, peak performance expert, and global keynote speaker who just happens to be the go-to guy for building happiness and success simultaneously -- and let’s be real, who doesn’t want to do that?!

His name is Ed Mylett, and if you haven’t heard any of his content before, listen closely because he is someone whom I highly respect in both business and life.

And here’s the thing about Ed. He’s one of the fastest-growing business personalities in the history of social media, with an uncanny ability to cut through the noise with his straightforward messaging. But Ed isn’t just an influencer who “talks the talk.” He’s a self-made millionaire who has built one of the most prolific financial service businesses the world has ever seen, among many others.

Now, a big part of what’s made Ed such a successful entrepreneur is his mindset. And if you’ve been listening for a while, you know that achieving success in anything takes more than just strategy and tactics -- it takes a bulletproof mindset, too.

Ed is truly a master of mindset, and in this episode, he shares the habits that have helped make him the entrepreneur that he is today. You’ll learn:

The key to managing overwhelm when setting out to achieve life goals
What a single action thought, or association can do to transform how you feel
The concept around “One More” and how it can reshape your mindset
How changing your identity can influence each part of your life
What anyone can do to triple their time management capacity
How can asking yourself the right questions can advance the quality of your life
How repetition can produce serious results

As you can see, this episode is jam-packed with ways to become the best entrepreneur (and human) that you can be.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[11:07] When you think of the power of one more, flip the script. What if the opportunity was taken away from you.?
[12:22] Self-confidence is the process of keeping the promises you make to yourself. Doing one more can make you superhuman.
[15:10] Successful people aren't lucky. They just notice the things around them that they are thinking about.
[16:31] Overwhelm is trying to process results that are higher than your identity level. You create the emotion because you're starting to exceed your identity.
[20:03] The trilogy of identity is faith, intention, and association. If you have faith, carry it with you, focus on your intention, and associate yourself with people who are achieving at a higher level.
[22:23] Let your mess be your message.
[37:42] Live your life with intention and realize how precious it really is.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#465: How I’m Prepping for 30 Days Away From My Business

31 maj 2022 | 25 min

Here’s how to pull off a sabbatical and make sure you actually enjoy taking it

Have you ever thought about taking a sabbatical?

When I say sabbatical, I mean taking an extended period of time away from your business or work to travel, pursue your interests, or heck, just relax.

I don’t know about you, but for many years I thought that only people with careers in higher education were “allowed” to take a sabbatical because I’ve never heard about anyone in a typical 9 to 5 jetting off for a month (or more) to do whatever their heart pleases.

That’s why I am beyond grateful to have my own business, which gives me so much – especially the opportunity to create the life I want to live. And guess what? Taking a sabbatical is a part of it.

Four years ago I made the commitment to take a sabbatical, and this summer I’m actually doing it. I’ll be taking 30 whole days away from my business to relax, spend quality time with friends and family, and completely disconnect.

Yes, I said it: Completely disconnect. There will be no check-ins, emails, Slack messages, or Asana tasks. I’m going off the grid from my business, and I’ve got my team set up to win.

I know, I know. You’re probably thinking, “But Amy, you’re obsessed with your business. How on Earth can you be confident that everything will run smoothly AND be totally present while you’re away?”

And that’s what this episode is all about. In it, I’ll share:

How far in advance I started planning for my sabbatical
What I’m doing to make sure I have enough content stockpiled
The systems I have in place to ensure everything runs on autopilot
What I’m most nervous about and excited for
How to approach your boss about taking a sabbatical if you’re in a 9 to 5 job

So if you’ve ever considered taking a little break from your business, tune in to hear exactly what I’m doing to set myself (and my team) up for success.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:08] I'm taking a sabbatical -- 30 days to rest, recharge, and spend quality time with my friends and family.
[08:25] By completely disconnecting from your business for an extended period of time, you can come back with so much more energy, creativity, and innovation.
[10:30] I am stockpiling videos, media, podcasts, and other content for when I’m out. My team had to get any recording requests to me in advance.
[11:22] My executive assistant and I have been mindful of my calendar leading up to the sabbatical. We've also thought about how I'll ease back in when I return.
[12:58] Taking a sabbatical does take financial resources and planning. You want to have things squared away before you go.
[13:59] If you still have a 9 to 5 job, you'll most likely have to get approval from your boss. Explain to them how they will benefit from your time away.
[15:49] I'm equally excited and nervous about my sabbatical. This will be a challenge for me to fully let go of what’s going on in my business.
[17:11] I'm excited because I think I'll come back even better. I'll be recharged and ready to go.
[20:36] It was important to spend my sabbatical somewhere other than my home because I don't trust myself to not text my team or get involved in the business.
[22:56] Take out your journal and write down where you want to go, and then DM me @AmyPorterfield on Instagram and let me know.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#464: What Your Enneagram Results Really Mean About You As An Entrepreneur With Ian Morgan Cron

26 maj 2022 | 49 min

How you use your strengths and weaknesses to your advantage

An Enneagram is much more than just a funny word.

It’s a system of personality typing that identifies nine types of people and how they relate to one another and the world. It’s not just a powerful tool for personal growth, but also a great resource for transforming relationships in your personal and professional lives.

You’ve probably heard me talk about Enneagrams on this podcast before because I love this tool SO MUCH. Understanding my own personality -- including my strengths and weaknesses -- as well as how I relate to others has helped me enormously in my business, from hiring the right people to improving my leadership skills.

That’s why I’m so excited to have Ian Morgan Cron on the show. He’s the real deal when it comes to Enneagrams and a pioneer in the modern Enneagram movement. In this eye-opening episode, we discuss:

What the Enneagram is and how you can use it to transform your life
The nine different Enneagram personalities
How to utilize your strengths as a leader based on your personality type
What your Enneagram results tell you about how to set up and run your business
If your Enneagram results indicate if you’ll be successful as an entrepreneur

I promise you that this conversation will leave you with a much better understanding of yourself as a leader, and ways that you can hone in on your specific strengths to build a stronger business.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#463: How To Create More White Space & Still Succeed

24 maj 2022 | 17 min

What’s the point of working your life away? Instead, let’s do less and make more. If you’re a new business owner or are ramping up to launch your business soon, I would hedge a bet that you have some ideas about what it takes to become incredibly successful. In fact, you’re probably thinking that in order to make the kind of money that you want and stay ahead of the game, you’ll need to be working constantly.

But what I’m about to tell you will most likely surprise you, because it goes against what we hear from many entrepreneurs who are in the public eye, and most conventional wisdom.

Ready for it?

Lean in a little closer…

You do not need to work your life away to be incredibly profitable in your online business.

I wish I would’ve realized this much earlier because now that I’m 13 years into it, I know that the best entrepreneurs value their downtime away from their business.

Honestly, I have a little guilt about how much time I spent working when I was ramping up, and in retrospect, I know I could have done even better if I would have allowed for a little bit of rest in my life.

I know, I know… you’re probably thinking that there’s no way you’ll be able to achieve what you want unless you’re constantly grinding. And that may be true for the first couple of years when you’re just getting started, but once you’ve gotten into a good groove and are making money, you’ve got to ask yourself, what am I doing this for?

These days I am all about creating a life and business on my terms, and if you’ve been tuning in for a while, you know that last year I transitioned my team to a 4-day workweek. And guess what? We are still meeting our goals, and I’m still able to have a multi-million dollar business. In letting go of my ‘hustle hard’ mentality, I’ve gained so much more than I ever could have imagined -- and I know you will too.

So if you feel like you’re burning the candle at both ends, tune in to this episode for some peace of mind, and to hear firsthand how I’ve created a successful business without sacrificing what’s most important.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#462: 8 Simple But Powerful Strategies I Used To Hit 1 Million Podcast Downloads

19 maj 2022 | 40 min

The step-by-step playbook I used to nearly double my podcast downloads

If you’ve listened to Online Marketing Made Easy for a while, you know that a) it’s been a true labor of love, and b) a) it’s come a loooooong way since I first started it nine years ago.

It’s taken a lot of hard work and late nights burning the midnight oil to become what it is today -- and it's all paid off because we recently hit a MAJOR milestone -- 1 million downloads in a single month. That’s almost DOUBLE the downloads from the previous month! I’m beyond proud of my team, and so incredibly grateful for our listeners!

But like anything, achieving this goal took a willingness to try something that we’ve never done before, and as always, a little bit of trial and error. Luckily, our perfect storm of strategies worked like a charm, and I am so excited to share them with you in this episode.

Whether you have a podcast now or are looking to start one soon, this episode will give you a step-by-step playbook on how to increase your downloads in a really big way.

I share the exact steps of what I did -- not only covering the strategies themselves but everything from the software we used, to where we placed ads -- so grab a pen and paper because you’re definitely going to want to take notes.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[07:57] In December of 2021, we went from being just shy of 600,000 downloads to over one million in January.
[08:42] Strategy #1: We created a quiz that made a curated playlist for listeners. We used Interact to make the quiz, created a landing page for the quiz, and directed listeners to podcasts that would best help them using a PDF.
[14:14] Strategy #2: We did two types of ads during our promo week.
[17:32] Strategy #3: We used Instagram Live for Coffee and Coaching. During the live coaching, I was plugging the quiz.
[20:53] Strategy #4: We were strategic about our promo email sequence – making sure to keep our subscribers engaged.
[22:49] Strategy #6: We drove visitors from our website to our promo using a pop-up box and a sky bar banner.
[25:06] Strategy #7: We got scrappy and sent out an email to our students and asked them to help us reach that 1 million mark. If you are a student who helped, I greatly appreciate it!
[28:37] Strategy #8: Be super intentional about what episode or episodes you release during your promo week. We wanted a big-name guest and that was my friend Brendon Burchard.
[35:30] Action items: Pull out your calendar and select a few dates that would be good for a promo like this!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#461: If You Want Lasting Success, Step Up Your (Long) Game

17 maj 2022 | 23 min

This strategy has been used for centuries by the most brilliant minds in business

In a world where most people play the short game, playing the long game offers a big advantage because it ensures your success as an entrepreneur for your entire career.

If you ask me, that sounds pretty great. So, why doesn’t everybody do it?

The reason why so many entrepreneurs forgo playing the long game (or completely fail at it) is because it’s not exactly easy to do. It takes patience, hard work, and the right mindset in order to master it. Plus, it requires long-term consistency and dedication, which -- let’s face it -- doesn’t sound very exciting, and it’s certainly not sexy.

But I’m here to tell you that it works. This has been one of the keys to my own success in business, despite the fact that it doesn’t come naturally to me.

Yes, friend, I’m not ashamed to admit that sometimes I get distracted by shiny short-term outcomes, and let my emotions get the best of me when challenges arise or when I feel the overwhelming pressure to stay ahead of the curve.

That’s why I constantly remind myself that there’s a reason why it’s said that success is a marathon, not a sprint. It’s because the long game is a time-tested strategy that has been used for centuries by the most brilliant minds in business.

In this episode, I not only share how playing the long game can help you get ahead in business, but the mindset you need in order to play the game correctly.

You’ll hear:

What to tell yourself when you want to give up completely
How to use your failures to help push you forward
Why setting long-term goals is key, and can help you win the game
Examples of how the long game has gotten me through challenges in my business

Alright, friend. I hope that you enjoy this episode, and after listening to it, you’ll be in-it-to-win-it, for the long haul.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:45] Playing the long game is all about your mindset, especially when things don't work out the way that you want them to.
[11:32] If you're playing the long game, then a failure should just be your opportunity to fix something or make it better.
[12:31] Don't be afraid to set audacious long-term goals. With a 3-year plan, you will show up differently versus a 6-month plan.
[14:21] Sometimes it takes a while to achieve the benchmarks and goals that you set for your business. It might be much longer than you thought it would take.
[18:13] You launch, you learn, you tweak, and then you repeat. This is a formula for success!
[19:58] You are no longer allowed to have that conversation in your head that you're going to give up or jump ship!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#460: How To Set Up A Flexible Business With Annie Chang: From Live Launching To A Membership To Evergreen Success

12 maj 2022 | 42 min

The co-founder of Olea & Fig shares how she generated $200K in digital course revenue in less than 2 years

There is, quite literally, nothing that brings me greater joy than to see my students become incredibly successful. It’s what drives me to keep creating, teaching, and pushing myself to be the best version of myself that I can be.

And that’s why I’m so excited to share this student success story with you. In this episode I’m chatting with one of my students, Annie Chang of Olea and Fig -- an online business that helps women solopreneurs become the “go-to” in their markets by attracting the right customers online.

Annie and her business partner and sister, Terrie, used what they learned in Digital Course Academy to create a thriving online business that works for them. Not only did they generate $200,000 in revenue from their digital course after only two years of being in business, but Annie was even able to take an eight-month maternity leave.

Yes, friend -- you read that correctly. Eight months. If that’s not the definition of a flexible (and ideal) work environment, then I don’t know what is.

The thing is, they set up their business in a way that all comes back to listening to their audience. And if you’ve been tuning in to this podcast for a while, you know that tapping into your audience’s wants and needs is crucial to having a successful online business.

In this episode, Annie shares:

How they launched their core program with two completely different offers
When they knew it was time to add a membership program to their business
Their most successful strategy for selling during live launches
How to run an automated challenge and keep the engagement up
Ways to serve two audiences with the same program

This was a super fun and informative conversation, and it’s my hope that Annie and Terrie’s story will give you a little peek at what’s possible.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#459: 4 Ways To Make Sure You’re Growing Along With Your Business

10 maj 2022 | 15 min

There’s a reason it’s said that investing in yourself is the best investment you can make

Newsflash: As your business grows, you need to grow too.

You’re probably thinking, “Well, duh, Amy -- that’s obvious.” And I agree, it is. But the thing is, all-too-many entrepreneurs completely neglect their own growth and development as their business grows.

It’s super easy to do, and believe me, I can relate. You’re so focused and invested in making your business the very best it can be, that you forget about the person behind the scenes, in the trenches, doing all the hard work: Yourself.

You, my friend, are the force behind your business’ success. By giving it everything you’ve got (and more), it’s easy to be left feeling a bit drained and uninspired, which is not a great state to be in if you want to continue achieving. So that’s why it’s crucially important to invest in yourself, so you continue to grow right along with your thriving business.

It doesn’t need to be anything major, friend -- and as you’ll see, what I do in order to continue growing is very simple. Think about it like a little tune-up. Every once in a while, you have to take a pause, check yourself, and take a little time to ensure that you’re running on all cylinders.

Believe me, after listening to this episode, you’ll understand why it’s said that the best investment you can make is in yourself.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#458: You Asked, I Answered: 6 List Building Questions I Hear Most Often

5 maj 2022 | 30 min

#457: Embracing Radical Confidence With Lisa Bilyeu

4 maj 2022 | 53 min

#456: A Lesson In Comparison: You Vs. Other Entrepreneurs

3 maj 2022 | 14 min

What I do to turn jealous thoughts into something productive

Raise your hand if you’ve ever had a jealousy hangover. You know, the lingering envy you have after seeing another entrepreneur achieve something that you want in your own business.

I’ll be the first to admit, I’ve had a jealousy hangover or two and as you’d expect, they’re no fun. But instead of letting these unsettled feelings get the best of me (which I’m 100% guilty of doing in the past), I use them to my advantage.

Yes, friend -- I have a few tricks up my sleeve that I use every single time I start comparing myself to other entrepreneurs. They not only help me steer clear of the dreaded jealousy hangover, but they also get me closer to focusing and achieving what I want. In this episode, I share:

The exact questions I ask myself when I start comparing myself to others
How to pinpoint where your jealousy comes from
Ways to use feelings of envy in a productive way
What I do to turn resentment of other entrepreneurs into excitement for them and motivation for myself

By shifting the way you think about other entrepreneurs’ success, I promise you’ll find that it brings you closer to achieving everything you’ve ever wanted and more.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:00] If you're feeling jealous or envious of another online business owner, ask yourself what they have that you want. What do they have that I want? You could use these envious feelings in a more productive way.
[06:22] Get clear on your why, and you might uncover something that you hadn't even thought of. Then ask why I want that. This can give you clarity.
[08:27] If you really work on your insecurities the next time you feel jealousy, it will be easier to cheer that person on and think I want that too.
[10:15] The next time you feel bad, jealous, or envious toward another entrepreneur, just stop and notice it. It's okay to feel those feelings. Then you can turn that jealousy into something productive. Write down that thought in your phone or your journal.
[11:03] What are you jealous about? What did they have that I wanted? Why do I want that? What will it bring me? How will it make me feel? What are some small steps I can take to get there? Take action on those steps!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#455: How to Plan Your Next Program Video Shoot Without Breaking The Bank

28 april 2022 | 40 min

Learn my tried and true process for shooting like a pro each and every time

You’ve laid out your course modules and lessons. You’ve written your scripts. You’ve listened to your pump-up song on full blast, and you’re ready to record your course videos. There’s only one minor problem -- you have absolutely no idea where to start, and what to do.

Good news, my sweet friend. I’m going to tell you exactly what I do to create high-quality videos that look professional and don’t break the bank.

My process for recording my course videos runs like a well-oiled machine. I don’t say that to brag, friend – believe me, it’s taken a lot of trial and error over the years to nail it down. And thanks to the many learning lessons I’ve had along the way, I now have a tried and true process for hitting the record button like a pro.

I am so excited to share this process with you because I know it is going to save you a ton of time, and also a ton of money. Tune in to hear my tricks of the trade, including:

The system I use to plan and organize my time and assets
How to select your outfits and shoot location
Where to find an inexpensive videographer and editor
The tools I swear by to record my course videos

After you listen to this episode, you’ll be shooting your course videos like a pro -- and I for one, can’t wait to see them.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:54] I recently recorded all of the training videos for my List Builders Society course and realized I would have paid for a high-quality video creation process when I was first getting started.
[05:55] You must first organize your schedule and assets. Give yourself plenty of time to plan everything out.
[07:14] You can write out your script and use a teleprompter or use bullet points to guide you. Create a filming schedule once you know your modules.
[07:48] I have my outfits for each video planned along with the video, link to the script, and filming notes listed out in three columns in a Google doc.
[11:02] Call in support and tell your family and loved ones that you need quiet time without any distractions.
[12:15] Plan your outfits for direct-to-camera shots so you don’t scramble to find one at the last minute. Select one outfit per module to mix it up.
[14:50] Shoot at your house if it's an option. Recording at home makes things easier, allows you to be relaxed, and saves money.
[17:59] Early on, it's probably best to forgo a videographer, but it is helpful to hire someone knowledgeable to set up your studio.
[23:05] Lighting is important for direct-to-camera videos, so plan for it in advance. You might be able to find a student to help you, or an inexpensive lighting kit.
[25:48] Account for editing time. You can record all scenes by yourself, but it saves valuable time and energy to hire someone to edit your videos.
[29:44] I use bullet points for live videos, and a script and teleprompter for recorded videos. I like PromptSmart, BIGVU, and Ecamm.
[34:18] Action item: Use this guide to plan your next video shoot.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#454: The 10 Minute Daily Challenge That Will Set You Up For Success

26 april 2022 | 15 min

If you’re ready to grow personally and professionally, try this simple practice

If you’ve been with me a while, you know that I am a huge fan of journaling. Without a doubt, this super simple practice has helped me calm my busy mind, foster my creativity, and stay organized. It has brought so much to my personal and professional life that I can’t even imagine what things would be like if I didn’t do it every day.

But here’s the thing -- journaling, just like anything, is a practice. You’ve got to commit to it, and you also need to understand that it can take a bit of time to get into a good groove. I can’t tell you how many times I’ve sat down with every intention of getting all of my thoughts out, only to stare at a blank page for what feels like hours.

Thanks to the help of some of my mentors and coaches, I’ve got this whole journaling thing down. In this episode, I share exactly what I do to set myself up for success, tame any negative thoughts that come up while I’m writing, and make sure I get the most out of this powerful practice.

Tune in to hear:

How I set up my daily journaling routine, and why I set it up this way
Questions and prompts to ask yourself when you’re not sure what to write about
How to normalize judgemental thoughts you might have when writing
Ways to neutralize your language when you’re letting it all out
What to do if you find negative thoughts spiraling out of control while journaling

By the time you’re done listening to this episode, you’ll have a whole new approach to journaling -- one that helps you be more productive, positive, and kinder to yourself.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#453: Why Memberships Are The Future Of Online Businesses With Stu McLaren

21 april 2022 | 50 min

If you’re looking to scale your business, memberships may be right for you

If you have a business that you’re looking to scale, are looking for a way to further support your students, or if you’ve ever thought about adding a membership, this episode is for you.

Stu McLaren joins me for a chat about all-things memberships -- how to determine if it’s the right model for your business, why they’re exploding in popularity, and how they've changed over the past couple of years.

And believe me – there is, quite literally, no better person to advise you when it comes to this sort of thing. For the past 12 years, Stu has worked intimately with tens of thousands of authors, speakers, coaches, consultants and business owners to transform what they know and love into recurring revenue through membership sites.

Tune in to learn:

How to determine what kind of membership is best for your business
The recent changes memberships have faced and what that means for you
Why memberships are more important now than ever before
What types of businesses work best with the membership model

Happy listening!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:26] Stu created a membership in 2008, because he wanted to grow his business it allowed him to scale his business without demanding a ton of time or energy.
[09:08] There are four different types of memberships including product-based, service-based, knowledge-based, and community-based memberships.
[25:57] Creating a positive experience in the first 30 days can triple the lifetime membership time. Take a close look at your onboarding methods.
[30:29] It's important to understand the lifeline of a membership and change marketing strategies as it grows.
[32:35] Teaching people your passion is a great use of a membership site. Don't overlook the gifts you have. You could create a business around your skill sets.
[35:48] If starting out, look at a knowledge-based membership. You can design your business however you want.
[39:42] Stu is hosting a Live Workshop that will assess if your market is a good fit for a membership site and more! It's live and free.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#452: Earth To Amy: How To Stay Grounded When You’re Wearing A Million Hats

19 april 2022 | 16 min

If you’re overwhelmed in your business – you’re not alone, these exercises can help.

I absolutely love being an entrepreneur. I love the variety, the challenge of it, the people I get to learn from, and most importantly, the people I have the honor of teaching. I’m also incredibly grateful for the fact that I get to wake up every morning and do something that lights me up.

Being an entrepreneur is a lot at times -- and I’m sure you can relate. I won’t lie -- I’m going through a time where I feel like the weight of the world (and my business) is on my shoulders. I have a hundred plates spinning in the air, and at any given moment, one could drop.

Luckily, I have a few grounding tools and exercises in my arsenal to help redirect my overwhelm, and come back to planet Earth when I start to lose my footing. Over the years, I’ve found that these little tricks have helped me get through even the toughest of times -- and I’m sharing them in this episode. You’ll learn:

What I tell myself to quiet my mind when things are stressful
The strategy I use to pull myself out of busy business overwhelm
The two things I’ve incorporated into my daily routine to keep me grounded
Why being with yourself, and others, is the key to overcoming difficult times

So if you’re feeling the stress of doing a million different things and wearing a million different hats, tune in and take notes!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:34] When things get tough, I remind myself that I'm in a season and this too shall pass. It helps me rein in negative thoughts and have a much better mindset.
[06:05] You’ve got to be grateful for both the good and the bad. There's ebbs, and there's flows with everything in life.
[07:01] I have to strategically think about how to get through the tough times when things are overwhelming. One thing I do is call on friends and leaders in the industry and ask questions.
[08:27] I meditate for 10 minutes a day using the Calm app. I've made it a goal to be consistent on Monday through Friday. I also do breathing exercises.
[12:07] When I have too many plates spinning in the air, I have to be honest with myself. I can't be afraid to ask for support from my team and delegate when I need to. It also helps having a VA.
[14:00] There's no shame in putting off a few items on your calendar. Time moves quickly, and it will be here like that. Give yourself room to breathe.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#451: Money Mindset Must-Haves For Every Entrepreneur With Anthony O'Neal

14 april 2022 | 53 min

Why your income potential has everything to do with your mindset

Question for you, friend. When you first started your business, what made you most excited? Let me guess -- building something incredible, having the opportunity to help others and give back, and being your own boss topped the list.

And while I’m sure making a ton of money was also on that list, I’d hedge a bet that creating budgets was not.

I can’t say I know too many online marketing entrepreneurs that get excited about the money management aspect of creating wealth -- because let’s be real, it can be intimidating and very tricky, especially when you have no idea where to start.

But here’s the thing. It’s incredibly important, and proper management of your money can make or break your business.

That’s why I’m so excited for you to listen to this episode, where I chat with Anthony O’Neal -- a number one national bestselling author, speaker, financial expert, and host of the popular YouTube series and The Table Podcast with Anthony O’Neal.

What’s great about Anthony is that he’s able to explain things in a way that is super relatable and easy to understand for those of us (ahem, yours truly) that don’t particularly enjoy putting together budgets and spreadsheets.

In this episode, we answer those questions that most business owners have when they’re getting started, like:

How do you budget when your monthly income varies?
How do you set revenue goals that are in alignment with your business goals?
When should you start paying yourself, and how much?
What happens when you don’t meet your revenue goals?

Plus, Anthony shares how changing your mindset around money serves as the foundation for creating financial growth and freedom, plus simple tips on how to put it into practice.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[06:30] Anthony knew nothing about finances and racked up tons of college debt. He decided that he needed to change his decisions in order to change his future. Dave Ramsey helped him change his mindset around money, and learn how to have a debt-free true ownership life.
[11:00] If you’re first starting out in business, create vision of where you're going with your money that’s based on your last quarter. Your budget should be based off of the bare minimum that you'll be bringing in.
[13:40] It’s important to have a budget for your personal life and a budget for your business life.
[21:10] You should not feel guilty for having money. It's a blessing to be blessed.
[27:03] If you want to meet your revenue goals, shift your money mindset. Go deeper into your ‘why.’ What are you actually trying to do? Does your ‘why’ make you cry (in a good way)?
[36:51] Everyone eventually needs a financial advisor. As your income grows, your need for wisdom grows. Grow with someone who can properly advise you.
[42:41] The best piece of money advice that Anthony has received is that for every dollar brought in, give God ten cents. This is about being generous and a good steward of money.

Grab the free resource for this episode by heading here!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#450: How to Bounce Back After a Disappointing Launch

12 april 2022 | 18 min

Failure to launch is not the end of the world, it’s an opportunity to do better

Say this out loud:

Failed launches happen, and it's ok when they do.

Say it again, and this time, actually believe it!

It’s true, friend -- failed launches are simply a part of being a digital marketer, and you’ve just got to accept it. It doesn’t matter if you are the most successful course creator on this planet or just getting started -- they happen to everyone, including me.

Over the years I’ve done dozens of launches, and one thing I’ve learned is that the bad launch fairy does not discriminate. She will literally take the launch that you spent the most time on -- the one that you were certain would be a smashing success -- and turn it into a complete flop with a poof of her wand, leaving you disheartened and totally confused.

Well, that’s what it can seem like anyways -- and if you’ve ever had a launch that didn’t go as well as you expected, I’m sure you can relate!

The question is, how do you move on from that failed launch and make sure that the next one blows it out of the park? #Spoileralert, it has everything to do with your mindset. And as hard as it can be to pull yourself up from your bootstraps and march onward, you’ve just got to do it.

In this episode, you’ll hear:

The mindset I embrace to move on from disappointing launches
What I discuss in my team debrief meetings after a launch doesn’t go as planned
Ways you can learn from your failed launch and go on to create something 10x better

Are you ready? Let’s get started.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

[Bonus Episode] Consumer Habits That Will Affect Your Business & Why Brand Loyalty Is Changing

8 april 2022 | 54 min

#449: Why NOW Is The Best Time To Launch A Podcast With Jenna Kutcher

7 april 2022 | 50 min

Learn how to launch and grow your podcast from the best in the industry.

If you’ve been listening to Online Marketing Made Easy for a while, you know that one of the questions I always ask my guests is, “What would you do if you had to start your business all over again? What would you focus on first?”

And for me, answering that question is super easy. Without a shadow of a doubt, I would start a podcast from day one. Yes, friend, it’s true. Online Marketing Made Easy has brought so much more to my business than I ever thought possible, and it’s also been such a great creative outlet for me.

Not only does a podcast help you develop a presence for your brand and directly connect with your target audience, but you can also make great money in the process. My team and I just recently had our first 1 million downloads month, and I could not be more proud. It’s taken a lot of hard work, changing directions, and trying out new things -- but it’s been well worth the effort.

So in the spirit of all-things podcast, I thought I’d invite Jenna Kutcher, the host of the Goal Digger podcast, on to the show to share a few words of wisdom. Jenna is the crème de la crème of podcasters and content creators, so I know you’ll be just as excited as I was to hear what she has to say.

In this interview, you’ll hear Jenna and I discuss:

How to set realistic production and metrics goals
Tips on how to monetize your podcast and when to start
When is “too late” to create and launch a podcast
The pros and cons of being part of a podcast network

Do you have your listening ears on? Good -- because if you’ve ever considered starting a podcast, you definitely want to listen closely.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[08:05] The key to a successful podcast is to find a way to produce content sustainably. Have systems in place that allow you to show up and keep running.
[10:45] Don't let things that don't matter hold you up. Find out what you are doing and why. A podcast can be a top of funnel, establish you as an expert, or become an interview opportunity. Get clear on your goal.
[12:41] Set a goal for your podcast. Could it be a list builder, a way to establish credibility, or a means to pivot your business? Your results will depend on what that goal is.
[16:52] Monetize from day one. People will continue to go back to early episodes. You could use it as a list builder or an affiliate play.
[20:53] It's not too late to start a podcast. No one will approach it like you will. Listeners listen to multiple shows.
[26:14] Subscriptions or paid models are becoming popular. Jenna likes the idea of creating value for free and giving away content.
[34:54] Jenna loves that people are inviting her voice into their lives. Podcasts are a reference library to so many different topics. If the host isn't an expert, they can bring an expert in.
[38:29] Jenna has a free masterclass on how to podcast. It shares all the beginning information, so there's no second-guessing.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#448: Steal These Mantras To Keep You Going Personally & Professionally

5 april 2022 | 17 min

#447: This Sales Strategy Converted at 44% & Now I'm Teaching It To You

31 mars 2022 | 43 min

In a world of automation, personal connection is what our clients were really craving.

I am beyond excited for you to listen to this episode because this sales strategy is going to blow your socks off. I recently used this strategy for the first time, and let me tell you, my entire team was floored at not only how many sales we got, but how much richer it made our launch.

But here’s the thing -- it’s not fancy, it’s not complicated, and considering that we are all in the world of digital marketing, it might surprise you to hear that the success of this sales strategy had everything to do with human interaction.

Yes, my friend! Call me old school, but there is tremendous value in personal connection with other people that gets lost in this brave new world of automation. And considering we’re just now emerging from a pandemic that has drastically limited our ability to interact with others, that ‘human touch’ is needed much more now than ever.

Now, I’m not making a dig on digital, because it’s what pays my bills and it’s what allows me to help so many online business owners around the world. But let’s be real -- one-on-one interaction with another person allows us as marketers to appeal to their most basic instincts as buyers. Such as…

What are their pain points?
What are their fears?
What do they not only want, but what do they need?

This is the first time in my 13 years of entrepreneurship that I’ve used this strategy, and it absolutely crushed the goals that my team and I set up front. And here’s the good news: It’s super easy to replicate, and I’m going to share how to do it step-by-step.

In this episode, you’ll learn:

What a live concierge team is, and how they can help you convert customers
How to put together a concierge team, even if you don’t have any team members
The tools and technology you need to set your concierge team up for success
Goals and metrics you should measure
What I plan to do differently after implementing this strategy for the first time

Are you ready? Let’s dive in.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:14] We create a concierge team that helped potential students understand whether the course was right for them or not.
[06:58] Consider adding something like this to your own launch strategy. Especially if you have a program that's $500 or more. You can use this strategy even if you don't have a team.
[11:20] Use the tools that work best for you. We used Calendly, Zoom, and created email tags for people interested in our calls.
[28:51] Set goals for your concierge team. You may want to consider tracking sales and offer a prize for milestones and high conversions.
[32:57] Here are a few important lessons we learned: 1. Have your team block their time. 2. Allow flexibility with a range of times. 3. Make a schedule for your team to provide coverage throughout the day. 4. Have concierge meetings before the cart opens. 5. Create a simple URL page to promote the team.
[37:35] Action items: Write a list of people who love to connect and are willing to promote your program. Put together resources for them. Set goals. Have fun!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#446: The Art of Delegation & Why It's The Best Thing I've Ever Done

29 mars 2022 | 24 min

Once I learned to let go, my business grew exponentially

If you’re anything like me, you like to have a hand in every single aspect of your business. After all, your business is where you spend the majority of your time, focus, and energy -- so why wouldn’t you want to feel like you’re 100% in control of it?

As you can probably tell, delegation is something that I’ve struggled with for a very long time. In fact, if I had a dollar for every time I said (or thought) “It’ll be easier if I do it myself,” or “It’ll be faster if I just do it,” I’d be a very rich woman.

But I’ll let you in on a little secret now that I’m on the other side of it: This is no way to grow, run, or scale a successful business. Not only do you burn yourself out by spinning the wheels on things that are outside of your zone of genius, but your growth will be limited because there’s only one you, and #spoileralert, you can’t possibly do everything because you’re human.

Trust me on this one. Once you are able to put your trust in somebody else who is equally or more capable of accomplishing the job or task at hand, things run a lot smoother, you’re less stressed out, and you are able to spend time doing the things that are going to actually help your business grow.

I know, I know. It’s difficult to let go of things that you’re used to being in control of. But that’s the thing with growth, right? It’s not always easy, but the growing pains are totally worth the end result.

So if you’ve been struggling with passing the torch, tune into this episode to learn:

The mindset I’ve embraced in order to let go of some of the most important pieces of my business
How to identify your ‘zone of genius' and make sure you stay working within it
Ways to overcome the “I can do it faster and better” mentality
The lessons I’ve learned from letting go and trusting others

Sneak away for a little bit (maybe even delegate your next task, if you dare… ) and tune into this episode that I hope will help you find the confidence to let go.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#445: 'How to Do The Work' and Release Negative Thinking with Dr. Nicole LaPera

24 mars 2022 | 66 min

Why your thoughts have everything to your success in life and business

I am so excited for you to listen to this episode because my guest is someone who helped get me out of a really difficult time in my life -- a time that I’ve shared about on this podcast.

Her name is Dr. Nicole LaPera. She’s a Cornell-trained holistic psychologist, and thanks to her book, How to Do The Work, I learned some really great tools on how to examine and correct the negative thought patterns I was having last year that led to a bit of a depression.

If you’ve been tuning in to Online Marketing Made Easy for a while, you’ve heard a lot about this period of time in the beginning of 2021, right after our move to Nashville. It took a big toll on my personal and professional life, so that’s why I’m getting super vulnerable in this interview and diving into all-things mental health.

By the way, I am so glad that mental health is a topic that is losing its stigma, and becoming a bigger part of everyday conversation -- because let’s be honest, it has a direct effect on how we show up in the world every single day.

Trust me on this one. Dr. Nicole’s approach is much different than some of the other types of therapy and personal development work that are out there, and you can expect to walk away from this episode with her unique perspective on how to:

Recognize toxic patterns and how they manifest
Heal from personal trauma so you can show up as the best version of yourself in life and in business
Make permanent shifts in your thought patterns
Take your mental health and healing into your own hands

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[06:54] When Nicole was young, she struggled with anxiety. Her curiosity around her struggles inspired her to pursue a career in psychology so she could help others understand themselves and create change in the world.
[09:02] After having a successful private practice, she felt inspired to look at new ways to create change to help people online. She wanted to share her stories and her tools, so she started The Holistic Psychologist.
[10:53] The work emphasizes the daily nature of change required. Many of us are stuck because we're not living consciously. We need to be conscious in real time, so we don't repeat the old habits.
[16:14] Set random alarms on your phone to check in with yourself. Ask, “How present am I? Am I fully immersed in whatever I'm doing?” Use your senses to come back to being present.
[30:59] We have the choice to shift from disempowerment to empowerment, so long as we are doing things consciously and checking in with ourselves.
[37:42] Make sure you get the nutrients that your brain needs to function. Geting enough sleep at night, your breathing, and taking care of your body are great ways to start.
[41:36] Learn how to stay committed and connected to your truth and your vision in business. Be discerning about what you hear, and know what you stand for!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#444: My Top 5 All-Time Favorite Online Marketing Made Easy Episodes

22 mars 2022 | 24 min

After 9 years of having my own podcast, I always come back to these

This episode was super fun for me to create because I got to revisit my very favorite Online Marketing Made Easy episodes -- the ones that really struck a chord with me, and have stuck with me after all these years!

Now, narrowing down the list from 500 episodes to just five was no small task because I honest-to-God love each and every one of them. But I hunkered down and recalled the ones I still think about often, and I am really excited to share them with you.

If you’ve been with me for a while, and have already listened to these in the past, even better because as you know, learning something over and over again is how you truly master it. There are so many golden nuggets that will really help you dial in on everything from creating better habits, to talking about your product and becoming a better storyteller.

But before we get to it, can I just say that I am still in awe over the fact that my team and I have created 500 episodes of Online Marketing Made Easy? What started as just a glimmer in my eye in 2013 has grown to become a living, breathing, and constantly evolving outlet that allows me to share the many things I’ve learned in my journey of online entrepreneurship.

I’m not telling you this to brag, sweet friend -- I am sharing this with you because I am living proof that it’s possible to create a highly successful podcast that not only grows your business, but one that helps other people -- even if you don’t think you can.

And with that, here are my all-time top five.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#443: The Mini Ad Training: 4 Key Principles For High-Converting, Low-Cost Ads

17 mars 2022 | 31 min

Increasing your conversion rate just got that much easier

Creating a high-converting ad on a budget may seem super tricky, but it’s actually quite simple if you play your cards right.

Believe me, I’ve had my fair share of ads that have completely flopped, and am no stranger to that feeling in your stomach when you realize that you just spent a ton of money and have absolutely nothing to show for it.

What’s almost worse than that is having to try it all again without the certainty that you’re going to get a return on your investment. It’s not an easy place to be, my friend, and I’ve been there too.

So here’s the good news. I’ve done allllll the trial and error for you over the past 13 years of being an online marketing entrepreneur, and have learned a thing or two about how to create ads that convert without spending (and wasting) a ton of money.

In this episode, I share the four principles that I LIVE BY when creating ads for my own business. To this day, I run through this list to make sure that my ads are hitting the mark in each of these areas, and it hasn’t done me wrong.

My hope is that you take these principles, apply them to your own ads, and then watch your conversions continue to grow over time.

And for the cherry on top, you can snag a free resource with a roundup of my top-performing ads in the notes below -- because let’s be real, seeing some examples in person will be that much more helpful when you go to create your own ads.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#442: The Not-To-Do List: 3 Things to Avoid to Stay on Your Game

15 mars 2022 | 18 min

A successful business has everything to do with how you approach your day

Imagine this scenario:

Your business is doing great. You’re meeting your goals, things are on track, and overall, you’re feeling extra proud of what you’ve accomplished this year.

But let’s keep it real -- you’re also feeling a little bit burnt out from pouring every ounce of your soul into your business, and some things are starting to slip because… you’re a living, breathing human.

Maybe you’re packing your days so tight that you have absolutely no room to breathe, or you’re losing focus on the tasks in front of you because your mind is constantly occupied with something else. Or maybe you’re feeling overwhelmed and disorganized, and have no idea where to even start.

Can you relate?

I don’t know about you, but it’s this time of year -- the end of Q1 -- that I tend to get a little frazzled, and because of that, start to lose sight of the goals and intentions that I set for myself at the beginning of the year. And if you’ve been a listener for some time, you probably know that my goals set the tone for my entire business -- and I keep them front and center (so they pretty much stare at me blankly in the face every day.)

So that’s why in this shorty episode, I’m sharing my list of three things that you can avoid doing to stay on top of your game, and move forward with a clear mind and ready to take on that new product launch, or podcast, or rebrand, or whatever goals you have set for yourself and your business.

It’s time to tighten up, friend -- are you ready?

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#441: Normalizing Mental Health For Entrepreneurs With Gabby Bernstein

10 mars 2022 | 44 min

Ways to improve your mental health, reduce anxiety, and be happy

Have you ever thought about what it would feel like to wake up each morning without any anxiety whatsoever?

Sounds pretty incredible, I must say. But for so many entrepreneurs, waking up without any stress or fear about what’s ahead is nothing short of a pipe dream. Owning a business is hard work, and at times can 100% make you feel like the weight of the world is on your shoulders.

I’m sure you can relate to this feeling. I know I can, and have in the past.

But here’s the thing. The stress, fear, and anxiety that you experience is only getting in the way of your success in business. And let’s be real for a second here. Is it even worth trading your happiness for success? For me, it’s definitely not, and I tend to be an anxious person.

That’s why I absolutely adore my guest in this episode -- because time and time again, I’ve come back to her strategies to find balance emotionally and spiritually.

Her name is Gabby Bernstein, and she’s been helping people find a sense of freedom and inner peace for the past 16 years.

She’s a New York Times best-selling author of eight books, and host of her own podcast, Dear Gabby, where she helps guests become the happiest versions of themselves in real-time.

But what’s really special about Gabby is that she doesn’t just talk the talk, she’s walked the walk, too. Her own struggles with addiction and depression are what fueled her to align with her true purpose and become a much better version of herself.

In this episode, you’ll learn:

Self-regulation techniques for working through anxiety
Mindset shifts that will help you transform your thoughts
Ways to identify negative patterns and how to change them
How Gabby has used her own struggles to become stronger

I hope you love this interview as much as I did and take away some strategies on how you can make waking up without anxiety your reality.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[07:32] With entrepreneurs, there's often a lot of doing and less being. Some of this is from being inspired, but some of it can be from feelings of inadequacy or worry.
[10:55] One self-regulation technique is to be aware of what's happening with yourself internally. Breathing can help with this.
[12:56] Another technique you can practice is to create grounding with your right hand on your heart. Close your eyes and breathe, inhale and exhale slowly.
[20:57] In order to identify patterns that make us unhappy, we must become a witness to the patterns. Take notice of what triggers you, and how you respond.
[24:50] Gabby's journey through her work and trauma recovery is the basis of Happy Days. Being a workaholic was really taking her down, but after continuously asking herself why, she started cracking into painful discomfort.
[30:28] Trauma has been given shame, so people minimize it. We all have trauma that still shows up in our lives now. It’s important to address it, and get out of the toxic cycle of trigger, fear, and acting out.
[38:25] Biggest takeaway: We should all have compassion for ourselves and the people around us.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#440: White Knuckling, Letting Go, & Trusting The Process

8 mars 2022 | 15 min

When you attract instead of chase, the Universe won’t disappoint

When I think of white-knuckling, I imagine myself driving through snow-covered switchbacks of a steep mountainside, someplace like Colorado.

My hands are gripping the steering wheel so tight that my knuckles turn white -- because if I take my eyes off the road for a split second, or hit one little patch of black ice, it could be an absolute disaster.

If you’ve ever driven through the mountains you probably know what I’m talking about, and it can be terrifying.

But white-knuckling doesn’t just happen when driving through precarious terrain. It also happens in business, and entrepreneurs -- including yours truly -- are guilty of it all the time.

Instead of gripping the steering wheel for dear life, you’re holding on to some piece of your business that you are desperately trying to control -- maybe it’s your social media, your quarterly revenue goals, or the new lead magnet you created that just isn’t hitting the mark.

You zero in on the details so closely that you start to obsess over them, and sooner or later, they start to consume every ounce of you. You feel like you’re constantly chasing something that you just can’t seem to reach.

Does any of this sound familiar?

I white-knuckled everything about this podcast for a long time, and it took a toll on both me and my team. But in learning to let it go and trusting more in the universe, I found that the podcast became more successful than ever.

And that’s why I recorded this little shorty episode for you -- because I wanted to share a bit more about how loosening the reins on something you care deeply about can bring you so much more than you ever imagined, and do it a whole lot faster.

Enjoy, my friend!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:43] White knuckling is holding on to something really tight and trying to control every aspect of it. One thing that I've white-knuckled for a long time is this podcast.
[07:38] I realized my podcast wasn't fun anymore, and I was obsessing about the metrics. I lost the joy I used to have in creating it, and it was difficult to be creative. I decided to let go of the expectations I had about my podcast.
[08:49] The following two weeks after I let go, we saw a rise in the number of downloads and more opportunities became available.
[09:28] There has to be something in your business that you are white-knuckling. With so much control, the creativity doesn't flow anymore.
[10:21] My new motto is “I don't chase, I attract.” I’ve decided just to let it be.
[12:12] Let go of expectations, and attraction will organically happen.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#439: 9 Things I'd Do If I Started My Business All Over Again

3 mars 2022 | 39 min

Lessons I’ve learned that will save you time, money, and lots of stress

If you have recently taken the deep dive into entrepreneurship, then this episode is for you.

Yes, you, friend! The brave soul with the beautiful vision, the passionate achiever who believes in their business with every ounce of their soul, and the one who’s willing to put in the hard work while also saving that sweet, sweet space for what really matters in life.

But let’s be real… entrepreneurship is really hard, especially when you’re just getting started. It’s totally normal to feel uncertain about yourself, or like you’re way in over your head, or that you keep spinning your wheels and just can’t get out of that cycle.

I’m here to tell you that those feelings are 100% a part of being an entrepreneur. Believe me, I’ve been there, and after 13 years of figuring it all out (with many mistakes along the way), I’ve had some time to look back and reflect on what it is that I would do differently with my business if I had to start over from scratch.

In no way am I saying that I would take back the mistakes that I’ve made -- because I’ve learned so much from each and every one of them. But I am hoping that there will be something on this list that will save you time, money, and unnecessary stress from the get-go.

And what’s really exciting is that sooner than later, you’ll have your own list of things that you’ll be sharing with your own community on your very own podcast (more on why you should get your podcast started NOW in the episode.)

Grab a pen and paper (or your Full Focus Planner) and settle in to hear the top nine things that I would do differently in my business if I had to do it all over again.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#438: Shiny Objects Syndrome? Here’s Your Quick Fix

1 mars 2022 | 12 min

New projects may be fun and exciting, but do they align with your goals?

Imagine this scenario:

Things are going great in your online business -- you’ve created your ideal work week, you’re on track to meet your quarterly goals, and you have more time than you’ve ever had to focus on in your personal life.

And then… you have an idea.

Not just any idea, but the most brilliant idea that has ever popped into your head. It’s sexy, it’s fun, and quite honestly, it’s all you can think about.

But the thing is, this brilliant idea of yours isn’t exactly in alignment with the goals that you’ve set for yourself. In fact, it’s not even close.

This, my friend, is called Shiny Object Syndrome, and it plagues millions of entrepreneurs all over the world -- including yours truly.

I’m sure you can relate. Instead of focusing on the tasks that will get you closer to achieving your goals, you get sidetracked by an idea or project that feels new and exciting -- because, let’s be real, launching a new product or course is way more thrilling than refining and improving the one you already have.

But here’s the good news, sweet friend. As someone who is by nature drawn to all things shiny, I have come up with a few ways to hold myself accountable to my goals, stay focused, and still manage to work in a little bit of razzle-dazzle along the way.

In this episode, you’ll learn:

The one physical item I use that helps me stay on task
How I ensure that my goals get (and keep) me excited
What I do to keep my eye on the prize

The personality type you need to have on your team to help hold you accountable

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#437: How To Troubleshoot A Lead Magnet That’s Not Converting

24 februari 2022 | 37 min

Tried and true steps to crafting an irresistible lead magnet

Have you ever poured your blood, sweat, and tears into creating a lead magnet only to have it fail miserably?

If so, two things: 1) Welcome to the club, and 2) Don’t spend any more time worrying about it because you’re going to learn A LOT about how to create a highly successful lead magnet in this episode.

The truth is, creating a lead magnet that converts is both an art and a science, which means there are a million and one reasons why yours might not be hitting the mark.

You might find that making small tweaks to your design or copy could help boost conversions, or on the flip side, you might need to rethink your entire strategy and create something brand new.

More often than not, it takes time and good old-fashioned trial and error to get it right -- and there's absolutely no harm in that. Because each version of your lead magnet, especially the ones that fall flat, will show you what’s not working so you can make changes and improve. Plus, who said this whole lead magnet thing was going to be easy anyways? ;)

Here’s what you can expect to take away from this episode:

Easy things you can tweak to increase your conversions
Ways to get valuable feedback from your Ideal Customer Avatar
Tips on getting your lead magnet in front of a larger audience
When to know if it’s time to scrap your lead magnet and start over from scratch

Here’s a glance at this episode...

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#436: You've Been Setting Goals Wrong: Here’s Why & What To Do About It

22 februari 2022 | 13 min

#435: Coffee with Marie Forleo: Chatting About Purpose, Time Stress, & Eliminating A Workaholic Mentality

17 februari 2022 | 67 min

The woman inspiring millions shares her best tips on creating a “figure-it-out” mindset

The guest for this special episode needs no formal introduction, because she is honest-to-God, that big of a deal. She’s got wit, she’s got wisdom, and I am without a doubt her number one fangirl.

I am so excited to welcome back Marie Forleo to Online Marketing Made Easy.

Marie is, quite literally, the Queen of a socially conscious digital empire that touches millions of people every day. Plus, her energy and optimism is unmatched, and there’s nobody more deserving of such hype.

If you’ve tuned into any previous episodes with Marie as a guest, you surely understand why I keep having her back (I mean… if you know, you know.)

And if you don’t know Marie, here’s the formal introduction: She’s a highly successful entrepreneur, writer, and philanthropist who helps people dream big, take meaningful action, and create lasting results.

She’s also a New York Times bestselling author for her book, Everything is Figureoutable, the host of the award-winning show, MarieTV, and a philanthropist, which we’ll dive into in this episode.

But what’s really special is that over the past 13 years, Marie has gone from being my mentor and business coach to one of my dearest friends (whom I still look up to just as much as I did when we first met at the Frank Kern conference years ago), and I couldn’t think of a better person to navigate the ever-changing world of online marketing with.

I’m super excited to share this episode with you, especially because it’s a little different than interviews we’ve done in the past. This time around, we kept it super casual (as friends do!) and just let the conversation go wherever we felt like taking it.

In this episode, we discuss:

Why you should reflect on your start as an entrepreneur
How to hustle without becoming a workaholic
The importance of creating a company with purpose
And leaning into those little nudges

So grab your coffee (or spicy skinny margarita depending on what time of the day it is), and turn it up for my friend, Marie Forleo.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[11:15] Marie wanted her business to help people beyond what she was teaching them. She didn't grow up with a lot of money, but she knew that having a scarcity mindset wasn't a good way to live. She committed to give 10% of what she earned to an organization that's doing good in the world.
[15:37] B-School helps people unpack what a purpose driven formula might look like for them. Part of Marie’s purpose-driven formula is offering scholarships.
[19:32] Time is the most precious non-renewable resource that we all have. Are you investing and lining up your time with what is most important to you?
[27:44] If Marie does anything in her business that doesn't feel right, she learns from that and doesn't do it again. It's her mission and desire to live in joy and creativity. She uses social media as a tool, but she doesn't have to be there all the time.
[33:49] People are recognizing some of the negative impacts of social media and spending less time on it. Cultivate your own list outside of social, which also allows you to turn around a profit more quickly.
[41:41] One of the most important things Marie has done for herself is take a coach training which introduced her to the idea that she could work from anywhere.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#434: Thriving As An Introvert In An Extrovert Career

15 februari 2022 | 13 min

I’m living proof that introverts can be successful online entrepreneurs

Here’s one thing that may surprise you about me…

I’m an introvert to my core.

I know, I know. You’re probably thinking, “But Amy, you host a podcast! You do Facebook Lives all the time! You do in-person events with tons of people watching you! There’s absolutely no way you’re an introvert.”

But it’s true. And I am certainly not the only introvert in an ”extrovert career.” In fact, some of the best actors in the world, like Meryl Streep, Julia Roberts, Tom Hanks -- are introverts doing their thing in an industry that is dominated by extroverts. (And no, I’m not comparing myself in any way, shape or form to these magnificent humans, just proving a point!)

Of course, there are things I do all the time that make me slightly uncomfortable (ahem, anything in front of the camera), but like anything in business, you make a plan, stick to it, and overcome your challenges. Plus, if it doesn’t make you uncomfortable, are you really pushing yourself to grow? #truthbomb

I wear my introvert badge with pride -- and if you’re an introvert, you should too, my sweet friend. In no way does being an introvert make you any less talented, capable, or successful. And if I’m being completely honest, knowing how to take care of yourself, and allowing yourself that much-needed “me” time when you really need it, is something to be proud of.

So in this episode, I’m going to share ways that I nurture my inner introvert while still growing a successful business that requires me to be out in front of the world. You’ll learn:

The ways I mentally prepare myself for stepping out of my comfort zone
What I do to recover after “putting myself out there” and how I pump myself up for the next time
How I avoid complete overwhelm in an industry that demands you constantly be “on”

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:40] Even as an introvert, it’s absolutely possible to be a highly successful entrepreneur. I'm going to share the ways I handle being an introvert in a business that requires me to be out in front of the world.
[05:19] I sometimes dread doing big, live events like Entrepreneur Experience, because it forces me to get out of my comfort zone. That’s why I remind myself how I feel after -- which is fantastic. It’s definitely worth it to feel a little uncomfortable and awkward in order to get you to where you want to be.
[07:50] After any live event or situation where I put myself out there, I need to book some alone time with my family. Now I plan for it and work it into my schedule.
[10:51] There are moments that I have to show up as an extrovert. While it can be uncomfortable, I do it because it’s important to create a community where people feel a connection to me.
[11:41] I am always in-tune and aware of what's going on in my body. When I start to resent an experience or an engagement, I know I'm being someone that I am not. While I’m willing to step into a place that is uncomfortable, I'm able to recognize when I’m staying there too long.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#433: How To Create An Ideal Week for Optimal Focus, Productivity, & Well-Being

10 februari 2022 | 25 min

Accomplish your business (& personal) goals AND have more freedom

Say these three words out loud:

Ideal work week.

Say them again.

Ideal work week.

Be honest… have you ever heard three words that sound so beautiful?

If you would have asked me to envision my ideal work week back in my corporate days, I probably would have laughed -- because I was so far off from having one.

Even in the early days of being my own boss, let me tell you, my work weeks were far less than ideal. It’s taken A LOT of trial and error (11 years of it, in fact) to nail it down -- but the good news is, I’ve finally perfected it.

That’s right, my friend -- I have set up my work week in a way that allows me to work towards my goals AND have the free time to spend with the ones that I love.

It’s helped me be more focused, productive, and… here’s the clincher… I don’t even work Fridays anymore (You can learn all about my 4-day work week in this episode.)

Here’s what you’ll learn in this episode:

What it means to “theme” your weekdays to maximize productivity
How to set boundaries based on your weekly schedule
Tips and tricks on working with a Virtual Assistant to plan the week ahead
Simple ways to stay organized and on-task

My hope is that you’ll be able to implement some of the strategies I share so that you, too, can accomplish your goals AND live life on your terms. Sounds ideal, right? ;-)

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#432: Navigating True Friendships As An Entrepreneur

8 februari 2022 | 17 min

Why I keep my business close and my friends even closer

I love my friends. I mean, L-O-V-E. I am so beyond grateful for them -- they understand me, I understand them, and they’re the type of people I know always have my back.

But as you’ll hear in this episode, this hasn’t always been the case. It’s taken many years, lots of tears, and countless hard conversations to get to a place where I am 100% confident that the friends I have in my life are MY PEOPLE.

Let me back up a bit and explain why.

As an entrepreneur, friendships can be especially tough. Even friendships that you’ve had for years can take a big turn when you make the decision to ditch the 9 to 5 and commit to growing a business.

Your priorities and conversations shift when you become an entrepreneur -- your business is your baby, after all. Instead of catching up on the latest episode of Billions over skinny spicy margaritas at happy hour, you’re now rapid-fire texting your friend about your upcoming product launch, or your new copywriter that just can’t seem to nail your brand’s voice.

Over time, this dynamic can wear on a relationship. At some point, you feel like your friend starts to resent you, judges your decisions, or simply isn’t interested in what you have to say anymore.

Can you relate?

And if your friends are ALSO entrepreneurs, that’s a whole different ballgame that’s equally as tricky to navigate.

Regardless of if your friend is a 9 to 5er or an entrepreneur like you, it’s not that you don’t love them or aren’t grateful for having them in your life. It’s that friendships have seasons, and if I’ve learned anything over the last 14 years of having my own business, it’s totally ok to move on – sometimes it’s the best thing we can do to grow.

In this episode, I’ll get really deep about my own friendships, and share with you:

What I’ve learned about navigating friendships as an entrepreneur
The qualities I look for in a friend, and why
How I know it’s time to move on from a friendship or lean into it

I even open up about something I’ve NEVER talked about on the podcast -- the challenges I’ve had being a boss to my best friend in the world (and former CMO), Chloe -- my Cho Cho.

This shortie episode is SUPER personal and near and dear to my heart, so I hope you enjoy listening.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#431: Why Women Should Be Investing (& How To Do It Well) with Bola Sokunbi

3 februari 2022 | 46 min

Start investing today and put your money to work.

When I first started investing and making my money work for me… I was super intimidated!

In fact, the immediate thought that comes to mind when I think “investor” is a middle-aged man, in a dark suit, briskly walking down a city street with a Starbucks coffee in hand. Maybe he’s wearing a fitted t-shirt instead of a button-down -- if he’s got a little swag.

I am, quite literally, describing Bobby Axelrod from Billions. I love Bobby’s character, but… I think you would agree, that’s definitely NOT ME. ;-)

Google doesn’t think it’s me, either. In fact, if you do a Google image search of “investor,” guess what turns up? Ninety-nine percent of the images that populate are of the guy I just described above (ahem, Bobby) -- and no women.

It’s no wonder I feel slightly uncomfortable thinking about investing -- because women, especially millennials and older, have been so conditioned to think that you have to be a man (and have a ton of money) to invest.

But here’s the thing…

That impression is totally wrong. The game has changed, and women are investing money like never before (and Google, if you’re reading this, please push some female investor images to your first page, okay?)

Investing money doesn’t have to mean putting millions of dollars into a hedge fund -- it simply means making your money work for you over time. The key here is, though, that you have to actually GET STARTED investing in order to be successful in it, and that my friend, is often the biggest hurdle.

That’s why I’m so excited for you to hear the interview I had with Bola Sokunbi, who is the go-to expert for investing, whether you’re an experienced investor or just starting out -- and definitely if you’re a female investor.

She’s a Certified Financial Education Instructor, best-selling author, speaker, writer, podcaster, social media influencer, and a mama to twins -- which makes her THAT much more impressive.

In our interview, we discuss:

How to get started investing, even if you NEVER thought you’d be able to
Some of the barriers to investing that women face, and how we’re overcoming them
Tips on investing your money smarter so you can retire before the age of 65
The good, the bad, and the ugly about cryptocurrency, and if it's right for you

Think of it like Investing 101, with a little extra kick. ;-)

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#430: 5 Goals I’m Committing To This Year

1 februari 2022 | 28 min

The strategies I’m using to feel great AND accomplish my goals in 2022 .

That’s right, friend! I am getting fully transparent with you about what I am doing to set myself up for success in 2022.

I have always been big on goal setting, planning, and setting intentions for the year ahead (it’s a BIG part of why I’ve seen such success as an entrepreneur)…

… but as you know, I struggled with some unexpected depression and anxiety in 2021. This year, I am determined to get ahead of it.

That’s why I’m trying out some FRESH approaches to goal setting that will not only help me to achieve some really cool things both personally and professionally, but ALSO get me in the right mindset before taking on each challenge that I set for myself.

Because let’s be honest -- ”success” and “achievement” are not only about what you accomplish, they’re just as much about how you FEEL.

In this episode, I’ll share:

The goal-setting strategy I LOVE that puts emphasis on how you want to feel, not what you do
The 5 goals that I’ve set for myself in 2022, why I chose to set those particular goals, and how I plan to achieve them
How I set goals that are challenging yet attainable

I’m hoping that by listening to this episode, you’ll hold me accountable, stay motivated to accomplish the goals you’ve already set for yourself in 2022, AND be inspired to get back on the horse if you’ve fallen victim to the infamous #QuittersDay (more on that in the episode.)

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:01] One new thing I’m trying in 2022 is identifying the core feelings that I want to experience this year. I want to feel trusting, courageous, energized, in the zone, and luminous while I'm working on my goals and after I achieve them.
[10:27] Take action: What are 3-5 feelings you want to experience over and over again this year? Think about how you want to feel and write it down.
[11:08] Goal #1: Do the 29029 challenge. This is where you climb a mountain a certain amount of times (in a certain amount of time). All in all, it adds up to the equivalent of climbing Everest.
[14:20] Goal #2: Create a certification program for my business. I don't know what it looks like, but I’m going to put together ideas this year and launch it in 2023.
[15:39] Goal #3: Take a sabbatical. I've been dreaming of taking a sabbatical for years, but in 2022 I’m actually doing it. I'm taking off the last half of May and the entire month of June to spend at my lake house.
[17:50] Goal #4: Create a project plan for my new book. My book won’t launch until January of 2023, but I need to have an entire project promotion plan dialed in by 3/31.
[21:40] Goal #5: Create a 3-year vision of my company. I want to scale the business and incorporate different models that I’ve never tried before, which means I need to plan further out.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#429: 6 High Performance Habits To Transform Your Life & Business with Brendon Burchard

27 januari 2022 | 74 min

The world’s leading life coach reveals what gives high-achievers the edge

If you’re ever scrolling through your social media feeds and you see a personal development quote that strikes a chord with you (in all the right ways), it’s most likely from today’s podcast guest.

His name is Brendan Burchard, and I have a hunch that you’ve probably heard of him. ;-)

He is a 3-time New York Times bestselling author (if you haven’t read his book High-Performance Habits, then READ.IT.NOW.), a globally respected high-performance coach, and one of the world’s most-watched, followed, and quoted personal development trainers in the world.

You’ve heard me talk about Brendan on the podcast a ton, and it’s because he is the OG of digital content and online education. Seriously! He was an influencer before it even became cool.

And beyond that, Brendan is one of the first people that inspired me to ditch the corporate world and embrace entrepreneurship (more on our first meeting, and what he said to get me to take action, in the episode.)

We talk all-things ambition and achievement, PLUS:

Brendan’s surprising journey to becoming one of the most sought after high-performance coaches in the world
How to move on from the victim mentality after two really tough years of the pandemic
6 specific habits you should commit to if you want to be successful in the long term, and how to put them in your daily practice
Two areas of marketing Brendan would focus on if he had to rebuild his business from scratch
The BEST piece of advice Brendan has ever gotten, and his most proud piece of content that resulted from that advice

After listening to this episode, you’ll 100% understand why I am such a Brendan Burchard #fangirl.

Plus, just to make things extra fun, I’ve created a free quiz that you can take to get a curated Online Marketing Made Easy playlist that is specific to where you are on your entrepreneurial journey.

Here’s a glance at this episode.

[29:20] High-Performance Habit #1: Seek Clarity. High performers, more often than underperformers, seek clarity. Doing so requires discipline in asking for help and finding out who you are.
[30:41] High-Performance Habit #2: Generate Energy. High performers do things specifically to stimulate mental, emotional, and physical energy, like practicing meditation, exercising frequently, and eating well.
[31:41] High-Performance Habit #3: Raise Necessity. Necessity means that you have the psychological need for success. There needs to be a clear reason for doing what you’re doing and the meaning behind it.
[35:54] High-Performance Habit #4: Become More Productive. High performers are determined to continuously increase their productivity and do things like blocking time, and taking a break every 50 minutes to recharge.
[41:03] High-Performance Habit #5: Develop Influence. We must have influence for people to believe in us, buy from us, cheer for us, or open doors for us.
[44:42] High-Performance Habit #6: Demonstrate Courage. Courage means that you take action even when there’s risk, doubt, or uncertainty. High performers are also not afraid to speak up for themselves and others.
[01:09:40] Take action: What is your biggest takeaway? Take a screenshot, tag @amyporterfield on Instagram, and share your biggest takeaway from this episode.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#428: 430 Episodes, 9 Years, Over 34 Million Downloads & The Truth About My Podcast

25 januari 2022 | 15 min

The good, the bad, and the ugly about the platform that reaches millions

Have you ever thought about starting a podcast, only to later question if you have what it takes (time, energy, experience, expertise) to do it?

If this sounds anything like you, then read on my friend--because I’m about to share the honest-to-God TRUTH about how I feel about podcasting, and my personal experience creating hundreds of episodes of Online Marketing Made Easy.

And even if you haven’t considered starting a podcast, here’s why you should tune in:

The podcast industry has absolutely blown up in the past few years, and with that, so have listeners. Fifty-five percent of people in the United States listen to podcasts–that’s up 51% from 2019!

I’m no mathematician, but I do know that’s a BIG increase in listenership, and an even BIGGER opportunity to target (and reach) your audience.

But… just because podcasts are getting a lot of traction, does that mean that it’s the right platform for you? My hope is that this episode helps you to figure that out.

In it, I’ll break down:

What I absolutely love about podcasting and how it can help you to grow your online business, too
My top 3 takeaways from creating hundreds of episodes of Online Marketing Made Easy
The biggest struggles that I have had along the way, and what to consider before getting started
What has made the countless Bulletproof coffee-fueled nights all worth it

For those of you that have been with me for a while, you know that the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast has been a true labor of love--and for that reason, I am especially excited to share this episode with you.

Plus, just to make things extra fun, I’ve created a free quiz that you can take to get a curated Online Marketing Made Easy playlist that is specific to where you are on your entrepreneurial journey.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#427: Land Your Dream Media Opportunity with Jen Gottlieb

20 januari 2022 | 57 min

Simple Strategies For Driving Major Traffic To Your Biz

In this episode, PR master Jen Gottlieb, teaches you how to find dream PR opportunities for your business.

Whether you’re looking to be featured in an article, get your podcast or blog featured, or land a spot as a guest on someone else’s show, pursuing PR opportunities in your business means MORE traffic to your business. Period.

Traffic to your website… your podcast… your newsletter… and so much more.

Jen is the co-founder of the acclaimed PR company, Super Connector Media and has been featured in Forbes, Business Insider, CBS, Good Morning America, Goop, and more.

And today, she’s giving you a step-by-step approach for landing PR opportunities that will make you jump up and down with excitement, including:

How to find the perfect opportunities that align with your goals
How to make an irresistible pitch they can’t say “no” to
How to craft a story that effortlessly grabs media attention
What you can do TODAY to have the tools to land a PR opportunity by next week

This episode is for you even if you’re just starting out – even if your business is still teeny tiny.

Because your business deserves to be seen and you’re the perfect person to speak to your area of expertise.

Factor in Jen’s expert guidance, put it all together, and you get a media feature in the making.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[08:29] PR is important because it gives you credibility and authority. This is a huge asset for entrepreneurs or anyone who has a story they want to share.
[12:07] Getting media hits boils down to your relationships, clear messaging, timely topics, and getting clear on where you want to be featured.
[19:55] We don't always realize the things that already exist in our life. Take inventory on relationships and mindset.
[21:24] The Top 20 Tool.
Make four columns on a piece of paper. Put your goal on top.
Left column is People. List 20 people you've ever met who have some type of media connection.
Influence. Rank influential on a scale of 1-10.
Help. Rank how likely they would help you on a scale of 1-10.
Grand total. Sum of previous three columns.
Reach out and ask the top score people. Provide value to others.
[32:38] Make a top-five media hit list. These are things that are already working for people doing things similar to what you are doing.
[37:18] When pitching, speak to the audience. They care about what's happening now, so tie your pitch with a timely topic.
[38:55] Creating a winning pitch.
1. Have a timely news hook.
2. Pitch the value-packed topic first and yourself second.
3. Back up your claims with statistics by linking to studies.
4. Add talking points.
5. Stand for what you believe in.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#426: 62% Of Top Business Executives Do This & You Should Too!

18 januari 2022 | 14 min

Learn To Trust Your Gut In Business

In this quick episode, I’m pulling back the curtain on one of the hardest lessons I’ve learned as an entrepreneur.

It’s not having hard conversations.

Not making revenue projections.

Not keeping a tidy to-do list or a pretty project plan.

In this episode, I’m talking about trusting your gut as an entrepreneur. Which is a tall order. We all want to trust our gut… but it’s not always that simple.

Because every day, entrepreneurs…

→ Navigate fear

→ Bear responsibility for the success – or lack of success – in our biz

→ Feel the weight of the effects that our big and small decisions make on others

→ And, if we’re being honest, try hard not to question our own ability

Right?

“Going with your gut” can get muddled and lost between ALL we’ve got going on.

But it’s also a non-negotiable in entrepreneurship.

So after 13 years of running my own online business, I’m sharing how I’ve learned to hone this instinct and stick to my guns…

…including one big mistake I made by hushing my inner nudges and going ahead with a decision anyways.

So give this episode a listen and let my lessons learned be your lessons learned.

Cheers to you, friend, as we learn how to slow down, listen, and trust ourselves.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:35] Should you trust your gut? 62% of top business execs let their gut lead the way and always trust it.
[05:25] There's a significant difference between being too picky and knowing in your gut that it's the wrong choice.
[07:20] Notice what your initial gut feeling is and then notice what happens next. Are you being too picky? Are you really feeling something that you need to pay attention to?
[10:32] After making a decision, start journaling. When doubt starts to creep back in, go back and read about why you made the decision in the first place.
[11:13] If you feel it in your bones and it doesn't work out as planned, it was still meant to be.
[13:25] Being in tune and having the ability to trust yourself puts you on a whole different level. Go with your gut!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#425: Project Planning Mastery: A Step-By-Step For How To Stay Organized

13 januari 2022 | 35 min

Follow The Plan. Master The Project.

My team is incredible but I can be reasonable.

We’re not at 100% in everything in our business.

But our project plans…?

They’re pretty dang bulletproof.

So in this episode, I’m walking you through the exact steps of how I create a project plan in my business from conceptualization to completion (and even what we do to make sure the next attempt of that project is 10x easier.)

I’ve laid this episode out like a step-by-step guide to project planning mastery so you can reduce overwhelm in your business and maybe, just maybe, become known as the business owner that smashes deadlines every time with room to spare.

I believe that for you, my friend!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[06:52] A project plan is a process to bring an idea or concept to life through planning and organization.
[09:43] 1. Identify the main focus of the project plan.
[10:42] 2. Outline the project. Make categories and then break it down into each task. What tasks need to happen to complete the category?
[14:51] 3. Set dates. Identify the most important dates in your plan. Put all the dates in your calendar. Give each task a final due date.
[20:00] 4. Identify key players. If you have a team of one or more, you need to assign each task to the correct person.
[22:49] 5. Finalize the outline and add any details, resources, or SOPs to each task. Your project plan is almost complete. Add descriptions, additional details, and links to SOPs.
[27:13] 6. Final review and check-ins. Take a moment and review your plan from top to bottom. Look at tasks, dates, assignees, and triple check everything to make sure that it's correct.
[29:04] 7. Make a copy. You've done all this hard work, you might as well use it again. Create that copy before you start using it. Have a master template that you can duplicate any time you like.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#424: 4 Unsexy Skills That Have Made Me A Better Entrepreneur & Leader

11 januari 2022 | 15 min

What I Practice Every Day For Swoon-Worthy Results

What?

You thought entrepreneurship was all glistening social media posts and champagne toasts?

Juuuust kidding.

If you’ve started a business – full time or on the side – you KNOW there are plenty of unglamorous moments.

But in this episode, I’m sharing four very specific skills that you probably wouldn’t list on a Bumble profile…but that will definitely make you a more effective and successful entrepreneur and leader.

Promise.

Things like the ability to leverage. Or being a proactive planner. Or how I’ve learned to be an effective communicator in my business (and what that’s looked like in different situations.)

Sneak away for a few minutes, dive into this shortie episode, and steal the four unsexy business-making traits that I’ve developed inside my business (so you can build them into yours!)

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:35] 1. Effective communication skills. In the past, I've shielded myself from negative conversations. I use the Radical Candor method to communicate when something goes wrong.
[06:47] 2. Your ability to leverage. When you leverage you still have a pulse on the project, you're just not doing everything. This is choosing who you want to collaborate with and letting them own it, but they're still doing regular check-ins with you.
[09:37] 3. Be willing to admit when you are wrong. If something's not working in your business, look inward and ask how I can change my communication style or whatever is causing the problem.
[11:42] 4. You have to be a proactive planner. A proactive planner is looking ahead six months or a year. How can you scale or improve the business in the next three years? Check out EOS.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#423: How To Find Support In Other Female Entrepreneurs With Lori Harder

6 januari 2022 | 59 min

My guest on this podcast is making big – and I mean, BIG – waves in their industry.

Lori Harder is a self-love specialist, fitness model, author, and podcast host.

And in her spare time – wink, wink – Lori has started multiple multi-million dollar businesses which include online courses, a membership, and an upcoming sparkling rosé launch.

A girl after my own heart!

In this episode, Lori and I talk about our most embarrassing moments as entrepreneurs who have swung a thousand times…and missed 990.

But more than that, Lori is sharing the mindset tools that have contributed the most to her success throughout years of starting and growing businesses.

Including:

How to stay upbeat (even when things get really, really hard)
How to find inspiration to get creative (even when you really, really don’t feel like it)
How to find support among other entrepreneurs
Her tips for building a massively successful business
What it’s been like launching a physical product and the lessons she’s learned from her latest venture

So if you’re in the mood for a little fun and a whole lot of noteworthy nuggets, join me for this special conversation with Lori Harder.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[07:16] Lori was getting very burnt out. She wrote a list of what she wanted her life to look like. She wanted the next thing she did to connect and collaborate with people.
[15:38] Creating a community and talking about core values is the number one thing that Lori has learned. The vision is built on better collaboration and opportunity within our own community.
[18:38] Lite Pink has all-female investors.
[29:10] As Lori made fundraising calls, she was learning along the way. Educating around these opportunities as a way to get more of our dreams out there. We can become a part of and support the things that we are truly passionate about.
[33:05] To get into creation mode for something new, you need to switch what you are listening to and reading.
[37:14] On challenging days, keep moving and don't think about it. Don't internalize the pressure. Free yourself up to do what you need to do.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#422: Lessons Learned From Social Media Bullies

4 januari 2022 | 12 min

#421: From Court Rooms To TikTok: The Korean Vegan’s Journey Of Reinvention

30 december 2021 | 58 min

Talking Life And Career Transitions Over Curry

Like soooo many of us, Joanne Lee Molinaro hopped on to TikTok in July of 2020 as a way of coping with the isolation of quarantine.

But as fate would have it, a post of her making Korean braised potatoes for dinner (while her husband taught a piano lesson in the background) went viral and The Korean Vegan was officially on the map.

But it’s not just her red chili paste mushroom pasta or vegan kimchi cheese fries that gathers the masses and leaves them hankering for more.

My guest on today’s episode is no stranger to enduring (and leveraging) major life transitions… and she’s using her platform to share stories that challenge and inspire.

Joanne, a lawyer turned full-time creator and New York Times bestselling author, is a child to immigrant parents who at times found themselves in near-starvation situations in what is now known as North Korea.

She shares about this among many of her other heroic tales through her social media platforms. And with over 3.5 million fans, it’s clear that her storytelling and vulnerability are what people are craving… along with her tasty chocolate chip paht cookie recipe.

In this episode, we chat about:

Transitioning and pivoting in life and careers
The idea of reinvention and how it’s never too late in order to align with your design to create a life that lights you up
The power and influence of storytelling and vulnerability
And so much more!

Whether you find yourself in a moment of transition, you’re dreaming of making a career jump (that may or may not make sense to those around you), or you simply love a story that moves you to your core, you’re going to love my conversation with Joanne.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[Insert transcript brief]

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#420: Unlearning The Hustle Mentality (& How I Got It Wrong)

28 december 2021 | 13 min

An Entrepreneur’s Permission To UnHustle

I L - O - V - E new entrepreneurs.

There’s no drive or determination like the early days of starting a business…but with that comes a few habits that become hard to break.

Like taking that drive and willingness to do what it takes and forgetting that you’re running a marathon…not a sprint.

A “hustle, hustle, hustle” mentality can be the default setting for high achievers (like many entrepreneurs are.) But it’s also been the flag that successful entrepreneurs have loudly and proudly flown for the last decade.

And I made the mistake of falling into the hustle culture trap myself in the early days of my business.

So in this episode, I want to talk about the turning point when I realized hustling my days, nights, and weekends away wasn’t cutting it anymore

Plus how I undid the thoughts of what I “should be” as an entrepreneur and even the “hustle-over-everything” beliefs I brought into my business.

Whether you’re just starting out or you’re a long-timer like me, I hope this short and sweet conversation is one more reminder that your *whole* life deserves your attention.

And that doing *all* the things isn’t always what’s best for your biz.

So take a deep breath and click to listen. Your permission to unhustle is inside!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:29] The one thing that I would do differently in my business is that I wouldn't have hustled to get to where I am today.
[04:42] The first years are the most difficult. Once you start to see traction and double down on what's working, the hustle can stop or at least slow down.
[06:50] What I believe now is that you can have an amazing personal life with white space and downtime as well as an amazing business.
[09:03] The questions we ask allow us to work smarter. It took courage to allow me to switch to a four-day workweek. My team and I put in a system and a plan. Then we got to work!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#419: She Was Forced To Slow Down (And Then Her Business Grew!) With Kate Northrup Watts

23 december 2021 | 48 min

Say Bye-Bye To Business Burnout

Working less and earning more is the battle cry of online entrepreneurs everywhere.

It’s why we start our own gig in the first place, right? More cash coming in, less hours glued to a screen.

My guest on today’s episode, Kate Northrup Watts, had her life changed when she was forced to slow down and as a result, her entrepreneurial hustle came to a halt.

But then, the unthinkable happened.

Kate experienced more growth in her business than the year before.

And she’s breaking it aaaaall down during our conversation in this episode.

In it, Kate’s putting the kibosh on hustling your way to the top. So, if you’ve been looking for permission to do less in your business without sacrificing revenue or growth… this is it.

In this episode, Kate and I talk about:

Exactly how Kate slowed down, worked less, and earned more
How to identify how much pressure you feel (instead of convincing yourself that “it’s fine”...when it’s not)
How us achiever-types can begin to reframe asking for help, instead of doing all the things out of pride (GUILTY)
Why Kate only goes for hyper-focused offers in her biz (and why you should too)

You don’t have to burn it all on the way to the top. In fact, you won’t get to the top if you’re running at 1,000 miles an hour.

So hang up your hustle culture cleats, and listen to my less-is-more conversation with Kate Northrup Watts.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[06:18] Kate was an online entrepreneur, who worked whenever she wanted until she got pregnant. She suddenly had no energy and needed to sleep 14 hours a day. She was forced to dial it back.
[08:36] She ended up working less than she ever had and made more money than previously!
[11:33] Not being able to sleep and not having good digestion are signs that something is off and you may be experiencing overwhelm.
[14:49] Instead of trying to do everything, ask for help. Reframe in your mind how getting help makes you more available for the important stuff.
[21:42] You'll have so much more time and energy when you cut some offerings and go all in on a few things only.
[33:53] Cyclical work is using the wisdom of nature to guide your creative processes. You may produce fewer things but what you do make will be more robust.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#418: A New (& Better) Way To Look At Imposter Syndrome

21 december 2021 | 15 min

#417: 33 Million Downloads & 870K Social Followers: Proven Organic Reach Strategies I Love

16 december 2021 | 25 min

Attraction Strategies That Keep Your Pennies In Your Pocket

Today’s episode is dedicated to all my entrepreneurs who are balling on a budget.

Whether you’re just starting out (and don’t have two nickels to rub together) or you’re a seasoned entrepreneur looking to double down on organic strategies that work, I’ve got something for you.

In this episode, I’m teaching you my favorite and most effective strategies for boosting your organic reach.

When I say “reach”, I mean people laying eyes on your business and/or offers online.

And when I say “organic,” I mean getting in front of those people without spending a dime. Oooooh yeah.

I’ve used these strategies to promote lead magnets, podcast episodes, and so much more during all of my 13 years in business.

A.K.A -- these strategies will grow as you do.

In this episode, I’ll take you through the “how” and the “why” behind each one, including:

How to get more traffic to your website or blog (even if your website is SUPER simple)
How to win over Google so it puts your content in front of the right people for you
How to get in front of other people’s audiences to grow your own (in a way that makes you both feel great about it!)
Why simplifying your strategy actually helps you reach more people

You and I won’t part ways until you feel 100% confident about which organic reach strategy is best for you and the right next steps to getting it DONE.

So click here to listen and rest easy knowing that your business can grow while your wallet takes the day off.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not following, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#416: My Birthday Episode: Hard-Earned Lessons I’ve Learned This Year

14 december 2021 | 18 min

#415: Eulogies, Sales Funnels, & What They Won’t Tell You In Business School with Donald Miller

9 december 2021 | 51 min

My guest on this episode is a master at putting together an enthralling plotline. However, his narrative of choice isn’t film. It’s not even just marketing.

It’s life, and life by design.

Donald Miller is an author, speaker, and the founder and CEO of StoryBrand -- a globally recognized branding framework used by the industry leaders like Pantene, Intel, Berkshire Hathaway, and Zaxby’s.

In this episode, Donald joins me to discuss what’s really, really working in online marketing today.

We talk about the specific type of practical knowledge required to propel success… and why they’re not teaching it in top 20 business schools.

But more than that, Donald and I also talk about how entrepreneurship gives us the ability to control much more than just conversion rates and content delivery.

When we direct our work, we have more freedom to decide on our setting. Our key players. Our next chapter.

In this episode, Donald and I discuss:

Why people don’t buy from you when they open your sales email (and the moment when they definitely DO buy)
When to be in your customers’ inbox to land a sale and the foolproof way to never miss that window
The missing pieces of information the best and brightest entrepreneurs know (and how you can leverage them for your own success)
When to worry about credentials and when to forge your own path
How to become more enthralled in your own story than you are in others

And so much more!

Click here to listen to my conversation with Donald Miller. You’ll not only walk away with clearly defined action to take in your email marketing, but you’ll be more inspired to take a hold of the plotline your life is following -- and decide exactly how your business plays into it.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:07] A lot of the stuff we learn in business school isn't necessary to grow a business. The best kind of business education is working for a company and developing yourself to become more valuable on the open market.
[06:38] Personal productivity strategies include separating primary projects that are important from secondary projects.
[10:37] Don's morning ritual includes reading his eulogy -- find out why!
[14:55] Narrative traction is when you engage in a story, because you're hoping for a certain outcome. Too many people don't engage in the outcome of their own lives.
[17:31] Don shares a messaging strategy that we can use right now. Create a story that points out the customer's problems (red), talk about your solutions (yellow), and describe the customer's life if they buy your product (green). Your story needs all three colors.
[22:36] Marketing and building a sales funnel. A one-liner is one sentence that gets your customer engaged with your product. Your landing page invites people into a story. The third part is a lead generator like a webinar or PDF. Nurture and sales campaigns are after getting an email address.
[31:05] Your main goal is to connect your customer's problem to your solution. Failing to close the deal means failing to connect their problem with your product.

#414: How To DIY Your Own Mastermind (& Do It Right)

6 december 2021 | 16 min

Masterminds.

You hear a lot about them, but do you know what it really means to be a part of one?

Let me break it down for you.

A mastermind is a small group of entrepreneurs that keep you on track, troubleshoot with you, offer fresh insights into your business, and help you move forward.

No matter if your roadblocks are technical or maaaybe you’re stuck in your head more than anything… these people get it. They’re playing all out. And they’re here to help you move forward.

I truly don’t think I’d be here today if it weren’t for two things...

One, investing in myself. And two, surrounding myself with people who build me up, support me, and, honestly, call me out when I need to be called out.

So in this episode, I’m breaking down exactly how to DIY your own mastermind -- no matter what stage your business is in, with no cost required.

Because an accountability group or mastermind is right for EVERYONE.

Introverts and extroverts alike.

Long time business owners and those still rocking the side hustle.

Together in this episode, we’ll talk about:

How often to meet
The ideal number of people to have in your mastermind
What you should *definitely* include in your mastermind meetings
Plus the one role that holds it all together

It’s a lonely business if you’re trying to do it alone… so don’t. Give yourself the support all entrepreneurs so desperately need. You’ll thank yourself over and over again.

So click to listen and prepare to make a few calls… your mastermind awaits!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:51] I got here by investing in my business and myself. In the beginning, I started out with a paid mastermind and always surrounded myself with people doing something similar to me who have valuable insights.
[08:52] There needs to be one or two people who will take the reins. Get clear on when you meet and think about how you want to structure it. I like hot seats where each person gets 10 minutes to talk, and then we give feedback.
[14:06] Make a list of three to five people that you might want to include in your accountability or mastermind group. Put some feelers out in Facebook groups and find your group!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#413: How To Make Every Word Count When You're Selling & Serving with Roger Love

2 december 2021 | 62 min

Speak Strategically, Sell Confidently, Serve Authentically

Voice coach and speech trainer to the stars, Roger Love, joins me on this episode…

And that might have you wondering, “Amy, why on earth would you bring a voice coach on to teach entrepreneurs? This whole Nashville move is going straight to your head.”

Don’t worry, friends. The day I pick up a guitar and a microphone will be the day hell freezes over.

And while Roger has honed his expertise working with the likes of Reese Witherspoon, John Mayer, Bradley Cooper, and Selena Gomez…

He’s not running through scales today. Your long-forgotten arpeggios can stay that way.

Roger joins me on the podcast to teach you, my beautiful entrepreneurs, how to communicate more effectively on behalf of your business and command any room with your presentation skills.

In this episode, Roger masterfully explains how entrepreneurs (AKA YOU!) can powerfully and simply shift how you speak to sell more confidently, build trust with your audience, and present yourself in a way that screams, “Hello world, you’re going to want to pay attention to this!”

Imagine showing up to your next masterclass or podcast interview with the persuasion, charm, and influence of Bradley Cooper, himself.

Irresistible.

So go ahead and dive into my incredible masterclass-style interview with Roger Love. You’ll walk away from our conversation with:

Strategies and tips from the expert himself to feeling more confident (and true to your heart) when you’re selling
The reason why tone + emotion > words when it comes to getting your audience to trust you and pay attention to what you have to say (and how to use this to your strength)
Techniques for avoiding pesky filler words like, “Um” and “Uh” during a masterclass, Live video, or podcast

Here’s to the best and brightest version of yourself showing up in every Live you do, my friend!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[10:13] Roger shares why it's important to be intentional with how you communicate. We need to be able to move people emotionally!
[14:14] We were born with an instrument that we either learned how to use or didn't. We can all tune up our instruments (our voice) and become great speakers.
[16:34] Want to become more confident? Start speaking in melody. When we speak we create melodies or the patterns that go up and down -- learn how to do this the right way.
[23:50] When we get nervous our breathing gets shallow and fast. Slow down your breathing before going live. Breath in through your nose and close your lips.
[30:24] It's wonderful to smile, but smiling makes the corners of your mouth go wide which makes your voice sound more nasal. Smile when you're not speaking. Smile with your eyes and your voice.
[39:23] Make your commas and periods have longer silence. You don't have to slow down the words, you can just increase the silence. Silence is where you give your audience a chance to feel.
[43:47] How to avoid all the pesky filler words like um or uh. These filler words are used to avoid silence, and we already know that silence is amazing.
[56:05] Action Steps: Book a Facebook Live this week. Speak live on camera and practice one thing you learned today. Practice can make the techniques second-hand.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#412: My Live Video Secrets For Feeling Confident & Calm (Even When You're Not)

30 november 2021 | 24 min

All the greats have a routine.

Before every match, Rafael Nadal situates his socks so they’re exactly the same height, no more than 15 cm high, and the sponsor’s logo is parallel to the ground.

John Legend eats half a rotisserie chicken before every show. (Hey, whatever works!)

Before going onstage, Game of Thrones actor Kit Harington kisses a crucifix three times, eats three Haribo gummy bears, and takes (yep) three sips of water.

Superstition or not, athletes, artists, and leaders of all walks have found unique ways to get in the zone. Helping yourself into a place where you feel confident and ready to tackle the task in front of you? I’ll cosign that, every time!

That’s why in this episode, I’m talking about the different routines that I’ve developed over the years that help me go live on video with confidence, regardless of how I feel.

Because I’ll be honest, being on video has NEVER been in my comfort zone... it still isn’t.

But after years of practice, I’ve found a few foolproof rituals to get me in the zone and help me deliver content on video that I feel really great about (even if I didn’t feel like pressing the GO LIVE button.)

But here’s the kicker! Not all live video is created equally. So in this episode, I’m sharing what I do before Facebook Lives, live Q&As, and my masterclasses to prepare for the unique pressures of different styles of live video.

You’ll walk away with specific examples and inspiration for your own pre-video routines so you can show up more readily for your audience, feel more confident, and hit your live-video stride much sooner.

You can leverage live video in your business, even if the idea makes you break out in hives. You owe it to your audience to share what you have for them...and after you’ve gone live a time or two, I think you’ll realize this whole live video thing isn’t as scary as we make it out to be.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:38] You need an easy setup. Keep your equipment and location simple.
[05:58] It's a lot easier when you do your video consistently. Doing video on a regular basis can make it become just a part of how you do business.
[07:22] Create your own routine! I have three routines for three different types of videos.
[17:52] Here are 3 steps you can use to create confidence on video! 1. Set things up, like your location and equipment, so video is easy. 2. Identify the types of videos you are going to do and create a routine for each of them. 3. Do video more often so it's not a novelty -- I suggest at least once a week.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not follwing, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#411: A Day-by-Day Sneak Peek Into My Work Week

24 november 2021 | 62 min

My Day-To-Day Life As An 8-Figure Online Business Owner

Three years ago, I shared an episode chronicling a “week in the life” with me, both professionally and personally.

And since then, just about everything has changed.

The size of my team… what I’m focusing on… my big, risky goals… what I sell in my business… even my address looks wildly different.

Well, for me, learning how other entrepreneurs and mentors plan, prioritize, execute, and live day-to-day life has significantly influenced and inspired how I set up my own week.

And I thought, heck! You might be curious to know how I schedule and prioritize my days, and how exactly I navigate through sooo many action items in a continuously growing business. (So you can do the same!)

So, I decided to do it again. To record an episode that’s fully transparent with you about what a week looks like three years further into my business.

In this episode, I’m doing a morning and evening check-in Sunday through Thursday night so you can ride shotgun with me through all the lessons learned, the hard stuff, and the victories, too.

I’m sharing what I'm working on and what I'm focused on right now, including a lot of behind the scenes, action items, insights, and the small moments that make up my week.

It’s going to be personal… including the good, the bad, and the ugly.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#410: What Happens When A Launch Doesn’t Go As Planned

22 november 2021 | 15 min

From elementary school days and color-coordinated folders …

To my corporate days and making a name for myself as the girl with the checklists, the one you could depend on to know exactly what comes next…

I’ve always been a girl with a plan.

But I’ve learned, much to my dismay, that even when you have an airtight plan… things don’t always turn out the way you’d hoped. Especially in business. Especially when that business is your business.

So today, I want to talk about how to handle launches… promotions… or just moments in your business that don’t shake out according to plan. (From a girl who’s seen her fair share!) I’ll be sharing a moment from my own business that I won’t call a failure… but I definitely wouldn’t call a success.

It was a particular launch that I had sky-high hopes for (and a project plan that would make Clea and Joanna from Home Edit proud, proud, proud.)

But it still. didn’t. work. Not like I’d expected it to, at least.

I’m talking about the feelings, hindsight realizations, and, of course, the lessons learned from this (and many) failures (a.k.a unmet expectations) inside my business.

Plus, you know I have a word of encouragement and a little tough love for you, dear online entrepreneur, for those days where things don’t go exactly to plan in YOUR business.

Spoiler alert… your business isn’t defined by those moments. In fact, your business is *made* in those moments.

Here’s a glance at this episode... [0:54] I have discovered that I have an all or nothing mentality, and friend, it doesn’t serve me! [6:01] I want to start looking at things where I’m going to do my best and enjoy the journey, not just focusing on accomplishing things. It’s my new mission to enjoy the process, not the outcome. [7:39] Imagine adopting a mindset where you’re going to do the best you can, and just showing up and going through the process is just as important as the goal that you set. [11:02] Not hitting your number or your goal isn’t a failure. Remember that we make our own goals, and we are in it for the long haul. We are on this journey together.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#409: From Social Posts To Weekly Content: Create Your 3-Month Content Calendar Step-By-Step

18 november 2021 | 31 min

Content creation dread is about to become a thing of the past!

Because in this workshop-style episode, I’m laying out exactly how to put together 3 months worth of content in just a few hours.

Yep! An entire business quarter worth of digital content -- from free weekly content to social media posts to holiday and promotional pieces -- strategized, laid out, and ready to schedule in just a handful of hours.

In this episode, we’ll be diving deep into content creation strategy together, covering topics like:

How to identify big topics that will leave your audience clamoring for more
How big promotions should factor into your content plans
How to leverage holidays and themes to communicate well with your perfect audience
How to incorporate a “set-it-and-forget-it” rhythm into your content creation routine
And so much more

Book half a day on your calendar and get ready to master creating content -- that’s all you’ll need!

You’ll knock out an entire business quarter’s worth of content and I’ll walk you through exactly how in today’s episode.

Plus, I’ve put together a free three-month content calendar so you can simply plug in your dates and content and find yourself with a high-converting content calendar to replicate time after time.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:28] Content is the original content that you create every week with your message and your ideas. It can be in the form of a podcast, blog, video show, or live social content.
[04:38] Identify ideas that your ideal community wants to learn or know about. Brainstorm a list of ideas and write them down. What excites them? What makes you their solution? What crosses the invisible bridge?
[10:25] You can use holidays and themes to guide your content and come up with topic ideas. You can even use hashtag holidays like national donut day.
[11:25] Set a timer for 20 minutes and head back into your weekly content. What resonated with lots of comments and what was shared? Choose a topic or two that you can expand on or shed new light on.
[13:21] Start to fill out your calendar. This should only take 30 to 45 minutes. Put in dates for the upcoming 3 months. Fill out your important dates such as promotions, themes, holidays, etc. and then continue to fill it out week-by-week.
[21:08] When it comes to social posts, decide where you're going to share. Try to post daily or three to five times a week with specific content pillars.
[25:44] Action step: Grab the free 3-month content calendar and start filling it out!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, follow the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#408: Burnout, Slowing Down, & How To Get Your Motivation Back

16 november 2021 | 14 min

What To Do When You Just Don’t Want To Work

It’s the calling card of entrepreneurship.

Total flexibility. Time freedom. The ability to make your schedule and change your schedule.

But in this episode, I want to talk about something a little less… organized.

A little less concrete and more, well, reactive.

If I’m being perfectly honest, there are times in my business that I just don’t want to work.

There, I said it! And this is coming from a girl who completely adores my business, the work I get to do, and the people I work with.

But the best way I can explain this feeling is simply, “I just don’t want to do anything.”

I want to unplug from everything except The Real Housewives. I want to wipe my calendar clean. And I want to curl up with Scout and watch a few TikToks.

10 years ago, this thought would trigger instant guilt or shame. “There’s so much work to be done!”

“You’re the boss, Amy! Set an example, keep your word, don’t inconvenience others.”

And so in the past, I’d ignore this feeling… pushing through and showing up to my day with a quarter of a tank.

Dear friends, as entrepreneurs, when we’re living for the weekends (or dreading Mondays) we’re doing it wrong.

(And my 9-5ers, I know your situation is different. I have a word of advice in this episode for you, too!)

It’s important for you to be able to stop and not do anything.

Because these feelings of not wanting to do anything are often screaming signs of burnout.

Sometimes, you need to make time to not do anything. Even if it’s the middle of the week. You hear me?

Flexibility is the beauty of being an entrepreneur and running your own business -- lean in. And if you’re wondering how, this one’s for you.

In this episode, I’m sharing what I do now with feelings of resistance instead of freaking out and falling into a shame spiral.

Including:

What I do to my schedule
How I know what to push and what not to
How I find time to really slow down
How to not judge yourself when you finally do take that time off
And the pep talk you probably need to hear right now

When you’re the boss, you get to decide what it means to be the boss. And that means trusting yourself and your capability to prioritize and make space so that you can show back up as a better partner, leader, friend, and entrepreneur.

More patient. More present. More impact.

So go ahead, my dear entrepreneur. Click to listen and then do it… take the days off.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[08:04] When you are your own boss, and you are calling the shots. Take some time for yourself when you get to that point of burnout. You don't always have to be on.
[09:38] The beauty of being an entrepreneur is that you can take time to wind down or do nothing. Being your own boss is a lot of responsibility and a lot of work. There are times when you just need to slow down and recharge.
[10:05] Another thing that has helped me not reach burnout is my 4 day work week. We all love the extra time and feel more relaxed and focused during our work week.
[11:53] You have permission to take more than a weekend off. You deserve it! After all, you are the boss!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#407: Now & Then In Marriage And Business With Hobie Porterfield

11 november 2021 | 44 min

Where Life, Love, and List Building Meet

Choosing to start your own business can be one of the wildest, most beautiful, and sometimes scariest decisions you’ll ever make.

But what about the people who share the kitchen that you now call an office?

Those peeking in on you at 4am before you head into the office with a hot cup of tea and a kiss on the head?

Those who listen intently, attempt to encourage and celebrate each tiny win wildly (even if they don’t totally understand what you’re talking about)

Entrepreneurship doesn’t just affect the entrepreneur -- for better or for worse. It also influences the lives of those closest to you.

In my own marriage, I can attest to how becoming an entrepreneur has both challenged and strengthened my relationship with Hobie.

We often talk about the now and then and how our relationship has changed, how I’ve grown, and how entrepreneurship has really affected our lives.

And in this episode, I’d love to invite you into the conversation.

I’m sitting down with my favorite guest ever, Hobie, to discuss what’s changed in our marriage thanks to my business, and how you can protect, support, and grow your relationships as you build the business that frees you up to enjoy them.

We talk about...

Where I struggled and the number one roadblock Hobie saw me come up against in the early days
What was the hardest part for Hobie as the spouse of someone starting an online business
Finances in our early days versus now, how we began to lean on one salary more than the other, and the challenges that came with that
Plus, a pep talk from Hobie to you

I hope this episode gives you the tools and encouragement to tackle the tricky parts head-on with the people you love the very most.

(Because none of it matters without them, right?)

Here’s a glance at this episode...

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#406: The Great Facebook Outage Of 2021: What If Social Media Disappeared Tomorrow

9 november 2021 | 15 min

What Should Come First: Your Email List Or Digital Course?

Remember “The Great Social Media Crash of October 2021”?

You know...people totally freaked out and Twitter had its best day in years?

Well, it didn’t disrupt my business one bit.

In fact, that day I sent an email to a segmented group on my email list about a product that I thought would be really valuable to them.

And within a day, I made $17,000 from that one email.

I tell you all this because when you have an email list, you’re in control of your business and how you reach your audience.

I sent one email, made 17k on a day when many, many people lost money.

I don't know about you, but I don't want to give anyone else power over my revenue like that.

Not only does email marketing produce 174% more conversions than social media, according to Campaign Monitor...

...but an email list is the only business asset proven to yield an average of $44 for every $1 spent.

A 440% ROI? I rest my case.

And with all this hard data, I still see entrepreneurs struggling to prioritize and grow their email list.

And in this episode, I’m revealing why I find that is (and exactly how you can avoid finding yourself in a similar rut.)

So listen and prepare to plant yourself squarely back in the driver's seat of your biz and email list.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[1:28] My number one obstacle when selling Digital Course Academy is people not having an email list, or people saying they don't have an audience.
[2:17] If you're not focusing on your list, all the strategies in the world won't help. You can't build your business on rented land or social media.
[4:06] Your email list is the number one most important asset in your business. It will convert 4 times higher than any social media post.
[5:03] Here’s what’s missing: Are you connecting and aligning your email list with your dreams and goals for your business?
[7:14] Everything you want in your business and everything you dream of would be easier and faster if you had an engaged email list.
[10:21] Let your business be easy! It doesn't happen to be hard. Focus on a list that will make your business easy and align with your dreams and goals.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#405: Overcome Overwhelm & Secrets To Being Your Own PR Rep with Susie Moore

4 november 2021 | 56 min

Stop Stressing And Start Living

Have you ever seen a bright and up-and-coming entrepreneur featured in your dream publication...and felt that tight knot of envy form in your stomach?

Well, bid that feeling farewell, my friend.

Because in this episode, the brilliant Susie Moore is showing you how to pack the “Featured In” portion of your website with major names and publications (without paying expensive PR fees.)

Susie has landed herself in over 300 media publications including Oprah, Marie Claire, Forbes, and The Today Show.

So, to say she knows a thing or two about getting exposure would be a massive understatement.

Susie has secured herself these features on her own behalf and in this episode, she’s revealing the strategies and techniques that landed her on Oprah (OPRAH!) for you to replicate.

And while Susie is known for landing big PR opportunities, more than anything, she’s passionate about helping entrepreneurs find ease in the big and small things and move past discomfort when faced with big decisions, opportunities, or hold ups.

Taking risks and playing big requires discomfort and in this episode, Susie is sharing the strategies necessary to engage your mind through it all and take the stress out of the imaginary.

So if gaining more exposure for your online business is one of your big, audacious goals for 2022 -- or you’re simply looking for a liiiitle more courage to make and tackle a few big audacious goals -- this episode is a MAJOR can’t-miss.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:41] Susie is obsessed with helping people become more confident in an authentic, easy way.
[08:24] Overwhelm can often be a stress response to things going right. Give yourself permission to pause and understand what's happening. A slight shift in how we see things always helps.
[13:52] We need to employ our mind consciously -- so much of our stress is imaginary. Quit asking what ifs and let it be easy.
[22:49] A Get To Do list changes everything. Be thankful for what you have instead of being burdened by responsibilities that come with it.
[31:37] Confidence is a willingness to feel uncomfortable. There has to be some type of trust there -- be willing to say yes and be willing to be rejected.
[41:41] When presenting yourself to the media ask: Who's interested? What can I tell these people? Share why you can tell the information? Share why now?
[44:28] Susie loved cracking the code for her new book, Let It Be Easy. The book contains real practical ways that you can apply to areas where your life may feel hard.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#404: Why We Avoid Things In Our Business (& What To Do About It)

2 november 2021 | 15 min

Kick Procrastination To The Curb And Make Peace With Your To-Do List

You know those tasks in your business that feel like a reward?

For me, it’s meeting with my leadership team or creatively strategizing for opportunities and projects we have coming down the line.

Mmm-mmm. Pack my calendar with those tasks any day!

But then there are some tasks that I see in Asana...and I would rather file taxes than tackle those during my day.

So what ends up happening?

I push those tasks off and off...and they linger and linger.

You too?

Well in this episode, we’re examining the things we don’t want to do in our business and why we don’t want to do them.

While the beauty of being an entrepreneur is that you don’t have to do stuff you don’t want to do, it benefits you (and your business!) to examine WHY you avoid things or feel resistance around them.

So in this episode, I’ll be covering:

How to examine whether your procrastination has to do with your insecurities. *gulp*
Things you can do to help get clear on whether that feeling of dread is something that’s truly serving you (which can be the case!) or if it’s getting in the way.
A simple challenge you can try out this week to assess resistance you’re feeling in your business and begin to grow the entrepreneurial muscles necessary to overcome them.

Plus, I’ll give you examples of dread that I experience in my own business and how I overcome them without white-knuckling and wearing myself out.

So grab your headphones, set your task list aside for the moment, and let’s tackle this together.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:08] Is the outcome of this task going to outweigh the feeling of uncertainty of doing it?
[05:20] Are you dreading something because you feel insecure or is it genuinely not your thing?
[07:33] Check in with yourself after you've done the thing. Pay attention to how you feel afterwards. Pay attention to your audience. Did they love it?
[11:14] Change the sentence from “I have to record a podcast” to “I get to record a podcast.” Pay attention to what's coming up for you and learn where the resistance is coming from.
[12:37] Take the next step to notice where your dread or resistance is coming from and then ask why it's coming up for you.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#403: 5 Tips To Kiss Tech Overwhelm Goodbye

28 oktober 2021 | 44 min

It’s important for you to know how the technology in your business works.

And if you told me that 13 years ago, I might have just abandoned ship on the whole thing.

Lifestyle, financial, and time freedom...on the other side of learning and dealing with software?

Not sure it’s worth it.

But after 13 years of tech trial, errors, and tragedy...I have some good news.

You don’t have to be an expert at the tech in your business. And you don’t need to know everything.

But choosing a few systems to use in your business and understanding how they work holistically will allow you to show up 10x more confident in your business.

And in this episode, I’m helping you do exactly that.

I’m spelling out five tips for overcoming tech overwhelm that I’ve learned over the last 13 years that save the day every time.

If you are technologically faint of heart…

...or could just use a little confidence boost when it comes to choosing and using the software necessary to run an online business), I recorded this episode with you in mind.

I’m sharing some pretty entertaining tech flops, as well as a very tiny guest appearance from my CMO, Cho Cho! You’re in for a treat.

Also, be sure to head to my show notes to grab the freebie that goes along with this episode... and never worry about going live ever again!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:22] Tech Tip #1: Spend a little time researching what platforms you want to use. Ask for recommendations, research and then make a decision.
[09:40] Tech Tip #2: Find the tech you are going to use and stick with it. No platform is perfect -- if you keep flip-flopping, you'll never master it.
[19:33] Tech Tip #3: Don't be super fancy. Go for the basic option when you're first starting out.
[23:01]Tech Tip #4: If you have a little extra money to spare, contract it out. If you hire someone to set up your tech, take some time to have them teach you how to use it.
[31:25] Tech Tip #5: Shift your mindset. Watch what you're saying to yourself. Negative self-talk does not serve you -- even if it's challenging, say to yourself that you will figure it out.
[34:09] Have a plan B. Make sure you know what to do if something goes wrong. Having a back-up plan takes a little bit of time and work, but if you have one you can avoid a lot of problems.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, Follow to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Follow now!

#402: The Innovative Strategy For Avoiding Burnout With Jonathan Fields

25 oktober 2021 | 64 min

How Entrepreneurs Do The Work That Drives Them

How’s your breathing today?

Deep and restorative? (Or did that question just prompt your first deep inhale of the day?)

And your shoulders?

High and tight OR relaxed, breezy, and unburdened by the weight of the world?

(I bet I can guess.)

The unfortunate reality is that “business as usual” can leave entrepreneurs anatomically all shook up.

And I hate it.

The very reasons we leave the 9-5 grind…

...more flexibility, more control over our time, more room to be creative and do the work we love…

...becomes buried by the demands of being a 1-man or 1-woman show.

This means the entrepreneur’s archnemesis BURNOUT lurks right around the corner.

But, not for you. Not today.

Because in this episode, we’re adding tools to your tool belt to help you nip that entrepreneurial threat in the bud.

I’m so excited to share my fascinating conversation with the brilliant Jonathan Fields with you!

Jonathan hosts the popular podcast called The Good Life Project and serves as the founder & CEO of Spark Endeavors -- a company that helps people and organizations discover the work that truly drives them.

But today, specifically, I’m excited to chat about a concept that Jonathan created called Sparketype.

This innovative strategy will help you discover your unique imprint for doing work that lights you up, understand how to use your energy in different areas of your life, and better avoid burnout.

And the coolest part? This unique approach draws upon years of research and more than 25 million data points.

By the end of today’s episode, you’ll have a clearer picture of what a Sparketype is, how you can use this information in your life to avoid uninspired work and burnout, and start experiencing more meaningful work, excitement, and joy in your life.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[06:09] Burnout is caused by our work not being a true expression of how we feel.
[12:55] Burnout is different from anxiety, it's a feeling of profound depletion.
[15:40] A sense of discontent and not feeling like you have meaning in life can be a sign of misalignment. Our work can be a huge part or a missed opportunity of getting meaning.
[26:24] Through a lot of research, Jonathan was able to distill these impulses down to 10 archetypes or what he calls Sparketypes.
[27:56] The Primary Sparketypes are the ones that really make you feel alive. Shadow Sparketypes are your next strongest impulses. The Anti-Sparketype is work that you have to do.
[51:48] Understanding your Sparketypes gives you really good insight into your decision-making process. You also start to feel seen -- it reflects back to you a deeper truth about who you are.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#401: Live Video: Acting Natural & Going Off The Cuff With E! News Celebrities Jason Kennedy & Giuliana Rancic

21 oktober 2021 | 67 min

Go Live On Video With The Confidence Of A Pro

Nothing like the words “live video” to make you break out in a sweat.

I’m talking about the kind of nerves you haven’t experienced since your 8th grade “Under the Sea” dance.

Let’s keep it real, live video is intimidating...especially when you’re just getting started.

Over the years, I’ve stumbled over words, lost my train of thought, and said the wrong thing at the wrong time more often than I can count.

When it comes to live video? You’ve gotta roll with the punches and get on with the show, my friend.

But what if a mess up happens in front of, oh I don’t know...Rihanna?

Or Elton John...Kim Kardashian...or Adam Lavigne?

My guests on this episode know a thing or two about high stakes on live video.

They’ve become experts in their field at acting natural, going off the cuff, and navigating live video faux pas.

These EXTRA! special guests are hands down the best in the biz.

Did you guess it?!

I’m sitting down with Jason Kennedy and Giuliana Rancic who you may know from their years and years on E! News.

Pinch me!

But what you may not know about Jason and Giuliana is that, aside from being experts in front of the camera, they’re also entrepreneurs who have a digital course!

In this interview, the three of us discuss:

The best piece of advice they’ve ever received in their career
How to keep things under control when you veer away from the plan
How to go off the cuff without getting worked up
How to be engaging and ways to show up more naturally on video
And my personal favorite, stories about a time when they were most nervous in front of the camera.

If going live on video is something you currently do inside of your biz -- or you know you need to do more of -- this episode is a can’t miss!

Click to listen and learn from the pros (I know I did!)

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[01:14] Being on video is a big part of being a digital course creator and a big part of being an online entrepreneur. That doesn't mean it's easy or comfortable. It takes skill and practice, and I have experts Giuliana Rancic and Jason Kennedy here to talk about that.
[14:08] When it comes to live video, the more prepared you are the more comfortable you will be. Rehearse and practice!
[19:35] Secret tip: Tilt your face, don't just move your eyes when reading a teleprompter! Make subtle movements to the left and right while keeping your eyes forward.
[28:56] One of the most common video mistakes is not acting natural and being yourself. Find what makes you feel comfortable and go with that.
[36:54] We learn why you need to be authentic, don't rehearse jokes, and be careful with the level of spray tan you get.
[46:51] Jason's best advice ever received is to not be so hard on himself. Embrace your flaws, traits, gifts, and talents.
[49:13] Giuliana says there are no shortcuts. She realized her dreams because she was a hard worker and was willing to do the work.
[59:55] Action steps: Put one of the things you learned today into practice.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#400: My Favorite Books & A 400th Episode Giveaway

14 oktober 2021 | 33 min

The books that built my business -- library card not required.

This episode is a celebration for bookworms and those who consider themselves “podcast people” alike.

I wouldn’t say I’m a bookworm by any stretch of the imagination. (More of an audiobook and podcast girl, myself.)

But I DO know that books have played a major role in the growth of my business...not to mention my growth as an entrepreneur and, well, person.

And to celebrate this special 400th episode of Online Marketing Made Easy, I’m sharing the top 12 books that have fundamentally shaped how I’ve grown my business, taken care of my mental well-being, and given myself a break from the everyday hustle.

If you’ve ever wondered, “What books should I be reading as an entrepreneur?” I'm sharing why these books are at the top of my list.

Including topics, like:

Business systems that free up your time to work in your genius zone (or log off early, lace up your sneakers, and hit the trails...whatever the day calls for)
Why fear feels so lonely
How one of America’s richest self-made women deals with setbacks (and A LOT of them)
My most recent exploration: how to achieve more by doing less *praise hands*
Saying no to opportunities because of the fear of being in front of people
A little something special for my fellow Enneagram 2’s ;)
How to know if you should keep pushing for something you believe in or keep working towards becoming your own boss or starting your own business
The single book that got me to a place where I was finally hitting my goals...and struggling less along the way to achieving those goals

If any of the above made you said, “Gimme that book rec, Amy!”, dive on in, my friend.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#399: A Science-Backed Habit For Anxious Entrepreneurs with Mel Robbins

7 oktober 2021 | 57 min

Is It Time To Trade In Our Daily Affirmations?

While this episode might not exactly feel like snuggling into a Barefoot Dreams blanket with a hot cup of chai…

...you, my friend, are still in for a feel-good episode….technically speaking. ;)

Today, I’m sitting down with the leading voice in the personal development and transformational space, Mel Robbins, to talk about anxiety and entrepreneurship.

And we’re getting real. Like, super real.

If you’ve been around for a while, you know I’m very open about my longtime battle with anxiety and depression -- and I found a kindred spirit in Mel.

YES, Mel’s considered a thought-leader in the personal development industry.

YES, she’s an international bestselling author, TedX talk celebrity, and creator of the wildly popular “five second rule.”

But what you might not know about this larger-than-life figure is that Mel lived with anxiety, panic attacks, and untreated childhood trauma for 35 years.

Mel’s unique vantage point of battling some major mental hurdles while working hard to build a successful business is something any entrepreneur who struggles with anxiety or depression can relate to.

(Myself included.)

And it’s from that place that she’s sitting down with me today to share some of the most powerful, science backed techniques that you and I, dear listener, can use in our personal and professional life to find our grounding and nip self-doubt in the bud, including:

One habit more powerful than all your other habits
Why positive self talk is a bunch of bologna (and the science that agrees)
Why mantras don’t work alone

PLUS one piece of homework for you that will turn an anxious day around (and won’t take you more than 30 seconds.)

To the entrepreneur struggling with anxious thoughts, I hope this episode encourages you, equips you, and makes you feel WAY less alone.

Be kind to yourself...you’re doing hard and brave things.

And know that I’m cheering you on every step of the way!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:14] Mel’s on a mission to save everyone else the heartache and headaches that she caused herself for 40 plus years.
[07:43] Through our own actions and attitudes we can have a positive impact on any problem or obstacle we face. We have the ability to figure it out.
[11:37] When you feel overwhelmed and hit a wall, there's a moment when you feel like giving up. Raise your hand and high-five yourself. It's neurologically impossible to criticize yourself when you are high-fiving yourself -- it actually creates positive programming in your brain.
[22:47] Empower, support, and embrace yourself throughout the day. Having habits that celebrate you will increase your success. Set an intention and seal it with a high-five as you begin each day.
[39:06] Mel shares how her first three courses were a flop. If you want to be an entrepreneur, you have to put stuff out there. You won't know what is going to work until you get feedback.
[47:30] The High 5 Challenge is an attempt for Mel to get 5 million people to wake up 5 days in a row and start their day with a high five in the mirror.
[51:37] Action steps: Go to the mirror and give yourself a high-five and share it on Instagram and tag Amy and Mel. Sign up for the challenge and buy the book.

You can do that by clicking here!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#398: The Uphill Battle Of Being Your Own Boss & How To Keep Moving Forward

30 september 2021 | 45 min

How To Be The Boss During Big Life Changes

On January 1, 2021, I woke up in a new state.

Literally...and mentally, to be honest.

The first six months of 2021 were some of the most challenging months I’ve ever had...and hardly anyone knew.

I experienced three major life changes back to back, and even though some of those changes were really good...change is still change.

It knocked the wind out of me and struggled to find my footing.

When it rained, it poured and I was caught with no umbrella...totally exposed.

Gene-Kelly wasn’t coming to save me.

NOBODY was singing in this rain.

And in this episode, I’m peeling back the curtain and letting you in on these three biiiig changes because I know I’m not unique in this feeling.

Sharing these raw stories with you isn’t always easy for me, but I think it’s important.

Entrepreneurs, we’re human too.

So here it is.

Your permission to be totally...messily...freely human.

To take up as much space with your process as you need to.

To work through hard things as quickly as you’re able, but as slowly as you need.

And now that I’m 6 months into the year and juuuust about on the other side of my storm, I want to share with you the habits and thought patterns that have made a world of a difference to me as I, an entrepreneur, took on...well, life.

My friend, if you’ve ever felt like a fraud as a leader or doubted your ability to make an impact because you’re struggling with life circumstances...I recorded every minute of this episode with you in mind.

Click to listen and know that I’m cheering you on every step of the way.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[10:22] Because of my depression, I reverted back to old behaviors and started to eat to calm myself. It affected my work and personal life. I love change, but this one was bigger than I had planned.
[13:22] Having anxiety and depression has helped me to better understand my students who struggle with mental illness. It has allowed me to have more compassion and understand how hard it can be to run a business and get through these things. It's not easy, but I believe it can be done.
[21:21] Thoughts create feelings, feelings create actions, and actions create results. I know when I have a certain feeling, it comes from a thought. I'm now focused on moving forward and dealing with my thoughts and feelings in a more positive way.
[23:03] If you're dealing with reverting to old habits or struggling with feeling confident in any which way, I know what that feels like. You need to be seen and heard and set an example for those in your audience who also may be struggling with the same insecurities.
[26:37] I got a book deal. When I got the deal, things became weird. My head was full of doubt. Before this, I spent four months writing my proposal, and I felt like I was in the flow. After the deal, my progress stalled. I was on the hook and suddenly felt like nothing was good enough.
[33:29] When we're more aware of self-sabotage or impostor syndrome, we have a better ability to stop it. Enjoy the good things that come into your life. You deserve them.
[34:58] Think of what you've struggled with and then say, "this is normal." We all have our struggles. We can all be empowered and take away the judgment and accept that challenges happen. Keep moving forward and do the next right thing.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#397: {Live Workshop} Stop Living Scared, & Start Living Fully With Bevin Farrand

23 september 2021 | 65 min

How One Woman Turned Her Personal Tragedy Into A Digital Course With A Mission For Good

My student, Bevin Farrand, is setting us ALL straight when it comes to the trips we’re not taking…

...the risks we’ve been avoiding...

...and the life we’re not living.

You see, after unexpectedly losing her husband and the love of her life, Bevin decided it was time to stop living on the sidelines of her life.

And she used her own life experience to create a framework that helps hundreds of others exit the sidelines, get in life’s game, and do the damn thing -- whatever that “damn thing” is to them.

Which is how Bevin’s course, Take The Damn Trip, was born.

(How AMAZING is that course name, by the way?)

In this episode, Bevin is hosting a LIVE workshop for you -- my OMME listener -- that will help you discover your “why”, your “yes”, and how to start living boldly.

She’ll also be sharing how she came up with her course idea and what she tweaked to make her same course convert at an even higher rate.

This is one of those episodes where you’ll not only walk away with a notebook full of practical steps for taking your digital course to the next level…

...but with a fire in your belly for all that life has to offer you.

Don’t wait one more minute to start living fully!

The doors to Digital Course Academy are officially open. If you're ready to take the leap and join me on this course creation journey, click the here!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:53] Bevin's husband surprised her with a whirlwind trip to France. He passed away five days later. Bevin's life was flipped upside down.
[09:41] She reflected on what she has done differently, and she came up with the DAMN framework. She is all about saying the thing and doing the thing.
[14:11] Bevin explains how she transitioned to focusing on her DAMN framework but was resistant to niching down. Fast forward, niching down has made her over $47,000.
[21:21] The DAMN framework consists of Decide & Declare. A is Attend Your Own Party. M is Moments Not Missed. N is Now is the Time.
[31:20] With the D, we need to get clear on our why and our yes! Knowing your why makes hard times easier. For your yes, ask what you can talk about all day. Why do you want it?
[52:04] We never know what's going to happen, so do the thing you want to do. This isn’t a reason to live scared, but instead to live fully!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#396: Behind-The-Scenes Launch Bloopers From My 13 Years As An Entrepreneur

16 september 2021 | 24 min

Digital Course Fails From a So-Called Professional (*facepalm*)

Aaaah, bloopers.

I love a good blooper in any form -- from America’s Funniest Home Videos to a Kristin Wigg outtake to a “fails” reel on Instagram.

But today the tables turn and it’s yours truly who’s in the hot seat.

*GULP*

I’ve experienced more blunders than I can count in my 13 years of online business and I’m sharing the best (or maybe worst) of them in this episode.

From blacking out…

to being blacklisted from Zoom…

to getting a liiiiittle tipsy on Live video…

to welcoming students who hadn’t signed up for my course…

to drenching my team with tequila while live on camera…

I’ve had enough bloopers to last me a lifetime.

So I want to dedicate this episode to all of you who think that, if you’re going to create and launch a digital course, it all has to go as planned.

Because these bloopers span from my early digital course days all the way to this year -- yep, 2021 where I, the expert, should have my you-know-what sorted out.

No matter how prepared, professional, or experienced you are -- life’s just a little messy.

I’ve learned instead that it’s our job as entrepreneurs to try new things and get out of our comfort zones. And yes, every now and then, that means things backfire.

But in the grand scheme of things, we’re the luckiest.

We get to try -- and in the meantime, we gather stories, memories, and a lot of lessons learned.

And at the end of the day, we’re still standing and our businesses are still okay…even if it isn’t always perfect.

Despite these bloopers (and some of them are seriously cringe-worthy), I’ve still been able to build a massively successful business.

And you can do the same, my friend.

Also, I want to invite you to my brand new, FREE Masterclass 5 Little-Known Mistakes *Most * Course Creators Make and What to Do Instead. Let this be your first step (that isn’t as scary as doing a launch) towards creating a successful digital course.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:49] Everything doesn't have to be perfect to have a successful launch. Learn how I sprayed everybody with sparkling water and tequila and how laughing can still bring your team together. Even when things go wrong, you're going to be okay!
[08:09] Here's a launch where Zoom went down right before the webinar. They had a tech glitch, and our 15 minute before the webinar email had gone out. Emails were flooding in from 1000 of subscribers, and I blacked out. But guess what, we were only five minutes late. Always have a backup plan!
[13:56] The reminder email goes out, and it's 15 minutes before we go live. Attendees started receiving a buyer email that said here are your login details. Even with a tech savvy team, we still had a glitch. Life goes on! Tech glitches will not break you.
[18:25] Try new things and get out of your comfort zone. You and your business will still be standing at the end of the day even when things don't go perfectly.
[00:19:53] Action step: Sign up for the {BEST MASTERCLASS EVER CREATED} 5 Little-Known Mistakes *Most* Course Creators Make (+What to Do Instead).

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#395: REVEALED: Digital Course Academy Like You’ve Never Seen Before

9 september 2021 | 29 min

An Exclusive Module-by-Module Sneak Peek Into My Signature Program

In all my years of podcasting, I have never done this. I’ve NEVER revealed, detail by detail, what’s inside one of my paid products for my podcast listeners...until now.

In this extra special, first-of-it’s-kind episode, I’m breaking my own rules and taking you inside my signature program, Digital Course Academy.

I walk you through my 8-figure-producing digital course -- module by module -- and explain exactly how Digital Course Academy helps my students create and launch their profitable digital course. I’ll be sharing the lessons, topics, modules, tech, and the mindset taught inside the program. Plus, I’m answering ALL your questions about DCA along the way. Including:

What is DCA?
Who’s right for DCA?
What exactly does DCA teach?
How long does it take to go through DCA (and when can I expect to have my course up and running?)
Does DCA teach me the tech required to make it all happen?
What kind of results do DCA students actually see after the program?

To be totally honest, I poured out my heart and soul in this episode.

DCA is transformative. I’ve seen it time and time again with my students...I know the power of this program.

So I hope you enjoy this extra special insider’s view into Digital Course Academy because it’s an absolute joy to share my heart’s work with you! If you’d like a little insider’s look into what DCA is all about, for a limited time, you can get access to a sneak peek of Module 1 for FREE! Get access here!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:49] Digital Course Academy or DCA is the most comprehensive program for validating, creating, launching, and selling your digital course. It's a complete package put into seven modules that spans over a course of 10 weeks.
[04:52] DCA is best for someone who knows the ideal community they want to serve and has an online presence around it. They also have a skill or expertise or know how to solve a problem.
[09:03] You learn how to get clear on your topic, the type of course you should offer, your course name and how much to charge. As well as, how to create content and how to schedule important launch dates! You'll be set up for serious launch success!
[11:37] Email lists are a huge part of the course. We teach you how to set everything up and how to engage with your subscribers. Bonus -- you also get lifetime access and all future updates.
[13:25] Modules include: the seven key decisions, pre-selling and validating, outlining your course, sales page blueprint, creating a profitable webinar, crafting email sequences, and recording your course.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#394: How To Overcome Feelings Of Unworthiness & Create Entrepreneurial Freedom

2 september 2021 | 26 min

3 Entrepreneurs Kicked Imposter Syndrome To The Curb (And You Can Too)

I LOVE working with aspiring entrepreneurs...the ones still kicking it in the cubicle.

The ones with notepads full of to-do lists and moments of inspiration scribbled down between meetings then stuffed into desk drawers.

The ones just starting out and who have a million and one questions.

And because I’ve worked with so many for so long...I recognize the questions that throw the brakes on for many, many aspiring entrepreneurs.

That’s right…

…there are questions that each and every aspiring entrepreneur asks that has the potential to put those big dreams on ice and keep your passionate, creative, capable, world-changing toosh in an office chair, working for someone else for waaaay too long.

Questions like…

“Who am I to teach something to others?"
"Who would pay for what I have to offer?"
"Who would want to hear what I have to say?”

(Questions like this are why I do everything that I do.)

Because these questions creep up on every single person who has ever tried something new.

Which means that if every inventor, teacher, business owner, creator, or artist in history believed the voices that told them...

“You knew it -- that seat’s taken. Don’t embarrass yourself, there’s no room for you.”

...then this world would be totally robbed of the bright, vibrant, diverse, and awe-inspiring gifts shared throughout history.

Which means there’s a place for you and your gifts at the table.

The world needs what you have to offer, my friend.

And so in this episode, I want to help you push through that self doubt to make big decisions, take big risks, and go to bat for the dreams that you know are possible.

In fact, I invited 3 successful online entrepreneurs to share exactly how they worked through self doubt and imposter syndrome as they created a business and life that they really, truly love.

And, of course, I share a few behind-the-scenes stories from my own business...because there’s not a single entrepreneur in history who doesn’t battle with imposter syndrome and self doubt on the reg.

Oh yeah...12 years later? It’s still a struggle. But it does get better.

Self doubt doesn’t have to hold you back from living the big dreams that you have for yourself.

In fact, sometimes it’s the voice in your head saying, “You can’t” that allows you to say, sometimes for the first time, “Actually, I think I can.”

There’s unspeakable power in that small but mighty statement, my friends. With just those few words, you become unstoppable.

So settle in, get quiet, and let’s talk about how to flip the script on that -- very normal, very scary, but very much in your control -- voice in your head.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#393: Course Topic Inspiration: 6 Students Share How They Found Theirs

26 augusti 2021 | 35 min

Worried they won't buy? How to choose your best-selling, gotta-have-it digital course topic.

The first digital course I ever created was on how to launch a book using social media.

And when I finally launched my first-ever course into the world...it was a huuuuge flop.

I made a whopping $267 -- and I cried about it.

In retrospect, I can tell you my fatal flaw. I chose the entirely wrong digital course topic.

Today, I’ve created and launched 8 successful digital courses that have generated over 35 million dollars in 12 years -- all because I finally chose the right digital course topic...one that my audience wanted and got them results.

And I’m here to save you from the heartache I experienced during that first launch.

Because choosing the right digital course topic is foundational to making sure that your audience will buy.

More specifically, the promise that you make in your digital course must get them the results that will make the most impact. But more on that in a sec...

If you have zero digital course topic ideas...

...or maybe you have a million topic ideas and couldn’t possibly choose one

...or maybe you’re totally stuck by thoughts like, “Honestly, what would I teach? I’m no expert.”

...this episode is for you. (Click for the episode and some serious course topic inspo!)

In it, you’ll hear from six of my students, and they’ll break down digital course topics that are working in the online space in real life, how they came up with their course topic, any hiccups they encountered along the way… and so much more.

Digital course topics like my student Braden’s.

Braden’s an attorney and tax pro who chose to teach online entrepreneurs how to legally set up their business so they could get back to the things they’re really, really good at.

The result? A flexible income that allows him to spend the kind of time with his loved ones.

Or Hilary Kreuger who, after years as a stay-at-home mom, created her digital course teaching communication and personal development online.

5 figures in revenue later, she’s still a busy mom of 4...but now, she’s bringing home the bacon.

You’ll hear about topics ranging from spirituality to marketing to travel and more.

So no matter what industry you’re in, audience you serve, experience you bring to the table, or how “ready” you feel to teach a digital course, this episode is brimming with course topic inspo to get you well on your way to choosing yours.

You’ve got this!

I'm in, Amy! Save my spot!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#392: One-On-One Coaching Vs. Digital Courses: What’s Best For You?

19 augusti 2021 | 37 min

The difference between a “one-to-one” and “one-to-many” business model

I live for a good debate.

Journey or Queen?

Blog or podcast?

Seinfeld or Friends?

And while we’re at it...were they really on a break?

But if we’re talking about building an online business or adding a digital asset to your existing business, there’s one debate that comes up over and over again...

Digital course or one-on-one coaching? (Orrrr… can both work in one business?)

AKA which offer is best for you, your clients, or your business?

And how the heck can you know for sure? (After all, you sure don’t have the time or money to go all-in on the wrong thing.)

Well, with over 12 years of experience in the online world, I want to help you decide once and for all if a digital course or one-on-one coaching is best for you.

I’ll be guiding you through a self-assessment that’s sure to help you identify which offer is best suited to you, your clients, and your business (and life!) goals.

Here are the questions to consider:

Do you have information, know-how, or a skill set that could be turned into a digital course?
Does what you teach have steps or a roadmap of some sort or could it be turned into that?
Could what you teach be taught to more than one person at a time?
Could your area of expertise be taught via video or audio?
Do you like doing one-on-one coaching?

And while, based on my own business, you may think I’m “Team Digital Course” all the way...my answer might just surprise you.

PLUS in this episode, we’ll discuss:

The unique way that a digital course serves you and your customers (that you probably haven’t considered yet)
The main differences between the two offerings
Specific examples of how digital courses and one-on-one coaching work within my students’ real-life business

And if all of that still leaves you scratching your head, I’ve gone one step farther to make your dream business game plan extra simple.

I created a simple assessment that will take your unique goals, personal experience, and audience, and create an in-depth personalized assessment to give you the answers to this BIG question. CLICK HERE to take the quiz!

That means you can walk away with a decision today and wake up tomorrow with clarity and confidence that your business is moving in the right direction.

No more debating.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:40] You can be more selective with one-on-one coaching. A digital course opens up opportunities for people who don't have the time or resources for one-on-one coaching.
[06:06] A digital course gives you a much larger reach and ability to make an impact.
[15:46] You could also offer a digital course alongside one-on-one coaching. This is something I used to do!
[22:41] Question #1: Do you have information, know-how, or a skill set that can be turned into a digital course?
[23:36] Question #2: Does what you teach have steps or a roadmap of some sort? Could it be turned into that?
[24:14] Question #3: Could what you teach be taught to more than one person at a time?
[27:20] Question #4: Could your area of expertise be taught via video or audio?
[28:45] Question #5: Do you enjoy one-on-one coaching?.
[31:05] Action steps: Take my free two-minute quiz to create a personalized path for creating your block-buster selling digital course.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#391: What Is A Digital Course? The How, What, & Why They're Magic

16 augusti 2021 | 26 min

The Digital Course Industry Is BOOMING -- Here’s Why

Not many of my friends understand what I do for work.

Do you ever feel this way?

Even sweet Hobie -- who’s been around my business since the day it started -- can barely wrap his head around how I bring home a paycheck every month.

(He’d probably say “It has something to do with online courses, entrepreneurs...and confetti, somehow.”)

If you’re a digital course creator or you work in the online space, you know exactly what I’m talking about.

Which is why, in this episode, I’m spelling it out for the rest of the world -- what the heck is a digital course, exactly?

I’m tackling the basics of digital courses, including:

What constitutes a digital course?
Are digital courses ever called something else?
How can a digital course work within a business?
And my favorite -- what does a digital course make possible? (Hint: FREEDOM! Whatever way you take it...time, financial or lifestyle.)

This episode is for those of you who are new to the idea of creating a business online and how a digital course business can allow your business to scale beyond the limitations of one-on-one coaching or consulting.

This episode is also for us -- digital course creators and business owners -- to share with the people that we love the most. (I’m looking at you, Hobie!)

Because our industry is here to stay -- you literally won’t believe just how much the virtual learning (a.k.a. digital course) industry is worth according to Forbes.

(I share these figures in the episode… and the future projections will leave you jaw dropped!)

Digital courses aren’t going anywhere anytime soon, so let’s help get the world acquainted -- starting right here with this episode!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[05:41] Digital courses are online educational programs that you work through on an online platform.
[07:09] Danira created a digital course on how to make caramel apples and made over $62,000 on her very first launch.
[09:53] Amanda Ferguson launched an etiquette course and converted 91 students for a grand total of over $101,000.
[11:05] Mark Tew launched his digital course and made $108,000 during his 10-day launch.
[13:20] You can use a digital course as a standalone revenue generator for your business. Or, you can offer a digital course as an upsell or down-sell to your one-on-one coaching.
[17:30] Digital course platforms include Udemy, Skillshare, MasterClass, and Coursera. These sites take a cut of the profit and offer limited promotion.
[19:08] Use a platform that you have more control over, like Kajabi. You can put your course on Kajabi and offer bonuses and incentives.
[22:20] Action: Take the quiz to know where to start.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#390: Can One Digital Course Really Generate Financial Freedom? With Joy Foster

12 augusti 2021 | 59 min

How Online Business Owner Joy Foster Made $1 MILLION From ONE Digital Course (And Why One Course > Than Multiple )

What if you offered just ONE product in your business?

As an online entrepreneur, you most likely have one of two responses...

You either sighed a big sigh of relief. (I don’t have to do 40 things at once!)

Or, I just made you really nervous. (But I HAVE to do 40 things at once!)

Whatever camp you find yourself in, hear me out.

I believe with all my heart that launching one digital course multiple times is the most effective and efficient way to generate significant revenue in your business.

And that might make you think, “But Amy, if you earn that kind of revenue from one digital course, you must be able to make EVEN MORE from MANY digital courses!”

Nooooot exactly.

In fact, I’ll prove it to you!

In this episode, I sit down with one of my DCA students and online business owner, Joy Foster.

Joy made one million dollars by selling ONE digital course.

Bananas, right?.

And here’s the best part... Joy’s story isn’t that unique.

Joy runs a social enterprise that helps women learn tech so they can start a business or make a career change. Her business model was like many of my listeners’ -- workshops that were strictly local and in-person.

But after a while, that business model wasn’t financially viable anymore and she knew she needed to find a way to scale.

So how did Joy go from struggling to make ends meet to million dollar status -- with ONE product offer?

Joy’s breaking it ALL down in this episode, including:

Her first failed course launch and what exactly didn’t work
Why she downsized from multiple course offers to just one (and what that meant for her bottom line)
The simple strategy Joy used to take her conversion rate from 1.48% to 15%
How she resists “shiny object syndrome” and remains faithful to her one-course model
What Joy believes she could have done to reach success sooner
And so much more!

My dear entrepreneur, YES -- You can focus on less in your business and still achieve more.

So go for it...breathe that big ol’ sigh of relief!

Listen now to kickstart your simplified business model...one that allows the time and freedom for you to be creative in your business.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#389: Impact, Legacy, & Living A Passion-Led Life with Amy McLaren

9 augusti 2021 | 37 min

How to Shed Self-Doubt, Find Inspiration, and Change Your Life (and the World) for the Better

What kind of legacy do you dream of leaving?

What kind of impact will you make in this world?

If you don’t think it’s possible to feel crystal clear on how to take your passions and leverage them into massive purpose, adventure and impact after just one podcast episode ...you’ve never met Amy McLaren.

Amy is a busy mom of two who passionately splits her time between leading LadyStrength (an online community of driven, entrepreneurial women), growing an Airbnb business, and being the hands-on CEO of Village Impact, the charity she and her husband, Stu McLaren, founded more than a decade ago.

Amy is on a mission to help purpose driven entrepreneurs shed self-doubt, find inspiration, and change their life, their business ...and the world, while they’re at it.

Just like she has.

(And friends, I am here for it.)

But let me warn you --.Amy is a force to be reckoned with.

Jumping out of planes, riding a motorcycle across Morocco and a rickshaw down the coast of India, driving 7 strangers down the California coast in an RV for 10-days ...that’s business as usual for Amy.

She doesn’t just talk the talk -- this girl walks the walk.

And in this episode, Amy is breaking down how passion informs both the wildness and the intentional purpose in her life.

Together, we talk about:

The myths of living a passion-filled life (which aren’t what you would expect)
How to create more impact and leave a legacy you’re truly proud of
Her charity, Village Impact, and how this corner of the world became her life’s work
Knowing when you’re called to do something bigger (because timing is everything)
and so much more!

This girl and her friendship make my heart burst -- and I have a sense that you’ll walk away from this episode feeling the very same.

So grab your headphones and click to listen -- just wait 'til you see what’s possible!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[10:31] Amy was a teacher, but she knew she wanted to do more. She was constantly thinking about travel adventures or living overseas. She was held back from changing by fear, but eventually took a leave and never went back.
[13:34] There's a myth that it costs too much money to live a passion-filled life. This isn’t the case and Amy is proof!
[14:12] The other myth is that it's too time-consuming to live your passion-filled life. Here’s the truth, you can do something you're passionate about in five minutes a day.
[14:42] Your passion doesn't have to be a side hustle. It really can become your full-time income!
[21:08] When following your passion, always come back to yourself and what you feel and believe in your heart. Don't let other people influence your passion or hold you back.
[22:27] If you really want to create more impact, be consistent and find ways to collaborate. Have a clear message and clear action steps.
[29:10] Passion to Purpose: A Seven-Step Journey to Shed Self-Doubt, Find Inspiration, and Change Your Life (and the World) for the Better was written to let everyone know that they can use their passion to do small things for good in the world.
[31:09] Action Challenge. Grab a pen and paper and answer these questions:
#1 What are you passionate about?
#2 What impact do you want to make?
#3 What Legacy do you want to leave?

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#388: A Behind-The-Scenes Look Into The Habits Successful Entrepreneurs Live By

5 augusti 2021 | 28 min

#387: 7 Email Copywriting Tips To Convert Subscribers

29 juli 2021 | 42 min

What to do when your email list isn’t buying...

I’m not a chef.

If you’ve followed me for a while, you know that PostMates is higher on my speed dial than my sister (and I love my sister!)

But every now and then, on a special occasion, I’ll break out my old 1990’s apron from my single apartment days and cook something for Hobie.

(Okay, maybe by “cooking” I mean preheating the oven and peeling off plastic wrap but it’s totally the thought that counts, right?)

Well, let me tell you about a dark day in our marriage.

I decided that I’d push myself out of my comfort zone, don my apron, pour a glass of white wine, and see if there was any pasta in the pantry that wasn’t past expiration.

By the time my hunky man was due to arrive home, dinner was ready and I was prepared to accept my well-deserved award.

But time went on… and no Hobie.

Wife confession: I was mad.

I’d done all this work, tried something new, put myself out of my comfort zone… for nothing.

Now, Hobie eventually came home and we worked it all out. (I can’t stay mad at that sweet man!)

But today I want to talk to you about the entrepreneurial equivalent...

...I’m talking about shooting your shot, giving it your best...and it kind of just sitting there...getting cold and stale.

Today we’re talking about making a sales pitch to your email list...and getting ZERO sales.

OOF.

Especially if your engagement is healthy, this sales offer ghost town can be massively frustrating.

In today’s episode, I’m going to be sharing exactly how to prepare your next sales offer so your email subscribers are racing to the “Buy” button.

I’m going to take you step by step through your sales promo, including when to email, how many to send, and exactly how to write emails that make a connection first -- then an effortless sale.

That includes:

the type of email campaign you’ll want to do when you’re selling
seven copywriting tips you’ll want to include in every sales email you send
how to send sales emails with confidence (and why you should never, ever worry about annoying your list)

In fact, I want to make sales emails so effortless for you that I’ve created a FREE checklist for you to download, so you can be sure that your sales emails are hitting the mark every time.

PS. Looking for my List Building Masterclass? Well, I sure hope you like sharp upticks in your subscriber count. Click below to save your seat for my FREE List Building Masterclass!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[08:16] Listen to discover and understand what your audience needs, wants, pain points, and desires are.
[12:14] Use this sentence in your emails, "I know you're thinking…” and then fill in the blank. Take what you've learned and insert your ideal communities pain points into the sentence.
[19:45] Highlight the exact words that you want to use in your email text. These words will come from your ideal audience members.
[28:00] Make the email all about your subscriber and their wants and needs.
[30:16] Be specific and clear with your CTA - call to action. Leave no room for misunderstanding.
[35:21] Action items: Map out your promo. To help you, download the free resource and start working through it and do the journal prompts!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#386: Branding Vs. Marketing (& Why It's Important To You) with Ryan Holtz

22 juli 2021 | 46 min

Getting Lost Online? Start With Your Branding

Branding can seem like the online marketing equivalent of a Birkin bag...

...you’ve heard of it, you’re not totally sure what it is, but it seems like all of the big names are into it.

And I’m with you. Branding felt like a “nice to have” and I put it off for many years in my business.

But Ryan Holtz, my guest for this episode, and I are determined to convince you that branding is one of the greatest gifts you can give your business and your prospective buyers.

I know, I know...bold statement. But we mean it.

And here’s why...

Your business’ brand answers the question, “What makes you different?” when you’re up against a sea of online competitors.

It establishes what you stand for as a business.

It helps your perfect customer find you and instantly know -- without a doubt -- that they belong in your world.

And when they feel like they belong in your world, they stay in your world.

Which is suuuuuper important because, according to stats from Outboard Engine, it’s 5 times more expensive to find a new customer than it is to keep an existing one.

But if you’re anything like me in the early years of my business, you might be thinking…

Is my business too new to be thinking about branding?

Branding sounds nice someday… when I have spare time and a little extra cash.

Well in this episode, Ryan Holtz, renowned speaker, expert marketer, host of a Top 100 Apple Podcast, and a wealth of entrepreneurial knowledge, joins me to debunk those mental-myths and get you started in the right direction.

Ryan shows you step-by-step how to identify what your brand is, what your business stands for, and how these things can help attract like-minded customers that are totally onboard with you, your service, and your mission.

When you know your brand, you’ll never be unsure of how to show up online again.

When you’re confident in what your brand stands for, alignment comes naturally.

And I want that for you with my whole heart.

So press play and let’s chat -- an online presence that you feel proud of (and in total alignment with) awaits!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#385: Is A Blog Valuable To Your Business? With Glo Atanmo

15 juli 2021 | 41 min

Glo Atanmo tells all about creating a passion led business and a blog that adds value to her business.

Sometimes there’s a podcast guest that joins me on Online Marketing Made Easy and they leave me, well… speechless.

Speechless because they live life on their own terms and their adventurous spirit can teach us a thing or two about this entrepreneurial life we might not have considered before.

Glo Atanmo is one of those people.

Featured in Oprah Magazine, Conde Nast, Essence and more, Glo got her start at 16 when she purchased her first “big girl” domain and taught herself coding basics -- fast forward to today, a decade later, and she’s running a 7-figure business, traveling the world and blogging about it as she goes.

In this episode we talk about Glo’s tips for using a blog to build a business -- and yes, you definitely need to dust off your blog and get it back up and running -- she also tells the story of how she got her start with just $500 in her pocket, and what you need to know today about succeeding as a multi-passionate entrepreneur.

And if you thought Glo was finished there, you haven’t met this inspirational icon.

Because Glo shares her 5-point framework for building a sustainable business -- and what passion has to do with it.

Hear that, my fiery entrepreneurs?

Glo is spelling out exactly how much to bank on your passion when starting a sustainable business...and the 4 factors that support your passion to make sure that you’re playing the long game.

If we’ve piqued your inner travel bug’s interest -- it’s time to hit play and join us!

This interview was so much fun and I can’t wait for you to hear how it inspires you in your next business adventure.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:28] When Glo was 22, she took $500 and booked a one-way ticket to Europe. She shares the scariest thing about this experience and how she had to get scrappy.
[07:59] The biggest lesson she learned was that opportunity will find you if you are available and always find gratitude in each situation. Everything is an opportunity to thrive and grow.
[13:43] Glo has expanded her business into a digital course teaching other bloggers how to land brand deals, which allows her to connect with female bloggers who have a deeper mission.
[23:22] Is blogging still effective? As a writer, Glo shares how she feels blogs fit within a business model.
[27:18] Passion is needed for a sustainable business, but you also need purpose, a promise, to be proficient, and be able to speak to a pain point.
[35:12] Action step: Work through Glo’s 5 P’s: passion, purpose, promise, be proficient, and pain point.

Grab your free resource from today’s episode!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#384: Should You Write A Book? With Gabby Bernstein

8 juli 2021 | 47 min

#383: Am I Giving Away Too Much Free Content?

1 juli 2021 | 29 min

And the Not-So-Mysterious Breakdown of Free vs. Paid Content

Imagine how it would feel to show up to your next content creation sesh with clarity and confidence, knowing exactly what YOUR boundaries are between free and paid content.

Sounds amazing, right?

Well, I’m going to show you how to finally let go of the white-knuckle fear of sharing your stuff for free.

Because look, I get it.

As an entrepreneur, it’s the ultimate rock and hard place.

Why would my audience ever be willing to buy from me if I’m teaching them concepts for free?
How would they ever trust that I know my stuff if I don’t share anything with them until they fork over the cash?

That’s why I’m taking a page out of the book of my beloved Crime Junkie podcast and getting to the bottom of this great entrepreneurial mystery in this episode -- once and for all.

In this episode, I’m giving you the down-to-the-decimal details on:

How much free content you should be sharing with your audience (and I’m talking specifics!)
3 questions to ask yourself to make sure that your free stuff isn’t overstepping and undervaluing your paid offers
The one thing your free content needs so your audience can say an ENTHUSIASTIC YES to becoming a paying customer
The actual free content that I released ahead of my Digital Course Academy launch that prepared my audience for DCA...rather than turn them off of it.

So grab a notepad and press play! We’ve got a mystery to solve.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:31] Free content is the what and of what you're teaching while paid content is the how and step-by-step.
[05:40] A good rule of thumb is that 20% of your paid content can be revealed in your free content.
[13:49] Be generous with your content. Have an abundance mindset and know that there is more than enough to go around.
[15:47] Ask yourself these questions when determining what to include in your free content: Do I teach the exact same thing in my course? Where's my audience right now in relation to this exact topic?
[24:52] Action steps: Do a mini content audit, and develop an abundance mindset when it comes to free content.

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#382: Step-by-Step Systems To Eliminate Overwhelm & Work Less

24 juni 2021 | 48 min

People often ask me, “Amy, what’s the secret to your success?” and I always say that I live and die by systems.

In fact, without systems... I could not have a multimillion-dollar business and still have a life. I could not have a four-day workweek and actually make money if I didn’t have systems.

Forbes recently stated that when you create systems in your business you can save up to two work hours per day... that’s 240 hours a year!

And that’s why today’s episode is so important. Because I want you to imagine what it would feel like to no longer be chasing a never-ending to-do list... and instead feel focused and confident as you create the business of your dreams.

We'll talk about...

The virtual filing system I swear by that actually saves me time
How I make my project management program work for me, and not the other way around
The number one communication tool I adore and the magic of SOPs
Three ways to scale your business brilliantly

If you want to know my secrets for going from a constant state of busy business overwhelm to tons of organization, more free time, more money in the bank, and a four-day workweek… you’re in the right place.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[08:35] Want to stay organized? Use a virtual filing system to organize assets in Dropbox and documents in Google Docs.
[17:46] Asana allows you to systemize and get really clear on who's doing what and when it's due.
[23:29] Find out how we use Slack to segment communication by channel and our guidelines, including keeping tasks in project management software.
[28:17] Learn how we have built a blueprint for success using standard operating procedures or SOPs. We have systemized tutorials for any procedure that we do over and over again.
[35:18] Three ways to help you scale your business include becoming an affiliate marketer, adding a group coaching program to your product suite, and adding a digital course!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#381: Perfect Your Price Point & Create Consistent Revenue With Jereshia Hawk

17 juni 2021 | 47 min

Fear of charging too much? Yeah… we’re gonna talk about.

If you're ready to convert more clients and boost your sales processes, this podcast episode is your blueprint.

Join me as I connect with Jereshia Hawk, business coach, sales expert, and framework phenom when it comes to knowing when to sell, perfecting what to charge, and creating consistent revenue streams.

Jereshia has helped over 350 entrepreneurs double their package prices, convert more sales calls, and increase their revenue growth within 12 months.

Plus, she’s a huge advocate for women of color in leadership positions which is part of her entrepreneurial WHY.

During our chat, Jereshia talks about the 10 questions to know exactly how much more you should be charging. Questions we should all answer that are simple, straightforward, and get results.

I had sooooo many questions for Jereshia and I think you’re going to love the takeaways she gives as we go through them all.

Get ready for note taking goodness and tips for *finally* knowing just what to charge for your offer.

Plus, as promised, here’s the script that Jereshia and I mention in the conversation. Make sure you listen so you can take action on this tried and tested process right away.

Go on your Instagram stories, show your face, and say: 'Hey all! I've helped [# OF PEOPLE] get [X RESULTS] in their [TYPE OF BUSINESS]. I'm currently looking to take on a few more clients and have [X SPOTS OPEN]. I would love to go on this journey with you. Are you a [INSERT WHO YOU HELP]? If so, I want to hear from you! Send me a DM and I'll send you more details about this opportunity.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[06:42] Jereshia shares about overcoming the fear of charging too much, and how “charging what you’re worth” isn’t the right way to think.
[15:05] Here’s how to create consistent revenue. For starters, don't bring your employee mindset into your entrepreneurial playground.
[20:01] Guess what, if you’re listening to this, you are ready to sell. Jereshia is a big believer in selling before you build.
[32:19] She even shares tips for direct message selling. She says, “Conversion happens in conversation.”
[36:01] Action tip: Jereshia gives you an actual way to welcome new clients through Instagram stories -- she even gives you a script!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#380: 4 Strategies To Create A High Converting Sales Page

10 juni 2021 | 26 min

Are you ready to boost your sales and crack the code on customer conversions?

Ask any copywriter about sales pages and they’ll tell you: it takes a lot of tinkering to crack the sales conversion code.

That said, after our last Digital Course Academy launch -- I think we might have actually done it and I’m spilling all the beans about it.

In this podcast episode, you’ll learn exactly what widgets we used and strategies we implemented to keep eyes on the DCA sales page for over 5 minutes.

That’s a lifetime when it comes to viewer stats.

It also means that the sales page is working wonders when it comes to keeping leads engaged.

As an online business owner, I want you to have knowledge about the little things that made a big difference in our latest launch conversions (so you can use them too!) -- things like:

A customizable widget that helps potential students, customers, and clients get all of their burning questions answered face to face
The one section every sales page needs to help customers feel confident about their purchase (one of my favs!)
How video can keep your customers engaged right from the very top of the page and what to include so they can’t help but keep watching, reading, and clicking those buy buttons

I also tell you the #1 simple to implement and most engaging part of the page that you don’t want to miss. Stick around until the end of the episode for that one!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:09] We used VideoAsk which is a widget which allows you to have face-to-face video conversations with your customers and ended up with a 33% conversion rate.
[08:34] Testimonials was another enticing section. We had three or four on the page and then offered the option of looking through an entire database of customer testimonials broken up by category.
[11:39] There was also a sizzle reel at the top of the sales page. This is a short video mashup of audio, video and images that promote your offer, and something you can make on your own!
[14:08] Our chat feature was hot on our sales page. This is the little chat bubble that pops up and offers a live chat, which will guarantee higher engagement.
20:28] Track your metrics. It's the only way to know if all of your sales page efforts are working. Google analytics allows me to see trends. We know if we are growing, improving, and how to pivot.
[22:13] Action steps: Decide which of the above mentioned methods you are going to use and start planning things out. Decide during this week and start scheduling each one. Create a plan for one or two of these strategies and start chipping away at it.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#379: Cure Writer’s Block: The Content Structure My Team Swears By

3 juni 2021 | 17 min

Get ready to tackle the creativity time crunch and discover the little known framework that I use in my business to produce content.

Let’s be honest: social media, podcasts, newsletters, sales pages and everything else you need to run your business can take a ton of time out of an already busy day.

Just when you think you’re caught up, your content calendar sends a reminder and you’re back at it again.

Sometimes it may feel like you’re always “behind” in your business. You’re in good company -- many entrepreneurs just like you are in the same boat.

That’s why in this podcast episode, I tackle the content time crunch so you can start speeding up the production process and start standing out online.

Not only will you get some behind-the-scenes sneak peeks on how we write podcast episodes, social media and more but you’ll also get the inside scoop on:

How this framework can be used for anything you’re creating so it’s compelling and creates flow and clarity
Ways you might be missing out on consistency and a simple fix to help across all channels
Getting past the dreaded writer’s block so you produce assets more quickly (and so it doesn’t take all day)

Get ready to move past that day long content creation process and get into a flow state instead -- this episode is waiting for you.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[04:07] Start with the what. This is an overview of the main point or outcome you want your students to achieve.
[06:17] Next, is the why. Explain why this content is important and why it matters to your audience. Build your case for the importance of what you're sharing.
[07:44] Move on to the how. This is a step-by-step on how your audience can apply what you're teaching to their own lives. You're providing them with a road map that leads with a clear intentional flow from start to finish.
[10:46] After that, focus on the proof. Show how you apply the how in your own business. These are real time examples or success stories from your customers.
[15:32] Action steps: Write out this framework and look at your content and see where you're using the steps. Then start with one piece of content and apply this framework!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#378: Could A 4-Day Work Week Fit Your Business?

27 maj 2021 | 47 min

If you’ve ever thought about how it might look to work less days in your business, check out the experiment my team and I are in the middle of testing.

When I first pitched the shorter work week idea to my leadership team, well… I was met with crickets. The idea of the work week happening only Monday through Thursday felt a bit unattainable.

And while I was really excited about the idea myself, I know the team’s concerns were valid and so we agreed to try it for 90 days as an experiment.

Right now we’re 60 days in, and have uncovered some really interesting stuff that I wanted to share with you.

Since I’m a big believer in going first and showing what’s possible for you, it’s my hope that this episode helps show you what you need to know about the 4-day work week process -- especially if you’ve been thinking about ways to add more time back into your week.

You’ll also learn more about:

WHY a shorter week was something I wanted to implement and how our team why might spark some ideas for you
Processes to set into place when it comes to your team, communication, and what the new work week looks like
The different categories to create plans for as you look at your day-to-day systems and expectations
The 3 MUST ASK questions you need to answer before making the leap and how they’ll help you determine if this is for you

If reading those highlights pulls at your imagination strings and gets you thinking about your own work schedule -- grab your notebook and pen -- because this is definitely a note taking episode.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[02:21] Learn some of the reasons why my team and I have decided to test out doing a 4-day work week.
[06:36] Read the book Shorter: Work Better, Smarter, and Less Here's How.
[11:38] Get clear with your team, if you have one, how you want to organize and go about preparing for the 4day work week. What are concerns that come up and how can you troubleshoot them?
[15:05] Sit down and discuss any issues that may come up, and create a guideline document to help guide your team.
[19:44] Find out the tools we use to make our 4-day work week efficient and possible.
[22:33] Set a date and time to meet with your team to see how the experiment is working and how you can improve or pivot.
[36:59] Action Steps: How will this professionally benefit you? How will this personally benefit you? What will it mean if you don't move to a four-day work week? Get clear on these answers, start with step one, and read the book Shorter.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#377: How To Re-engage Your Email List

20 maj 2021 | 26 min

It’s never too late to hit send and connect with your subscribers again.

If your email list has been on your mind (maybe a little more time has passed than you’d like to admit since you’ve last landed in their inbox) and you know it’s time to hit ‘send’ but you’re afraid that you’ll be met with crickets and unsubscribes -- today’s episode is just what you need to gain back your confidence.

Here’s the thing, when it comes to engaging with your email list after a long absence, there are a few simple things you can put into place to make a seamless re-entry.

But first, I have to tell you: you’re not alone.

Life happens and sometimes we have to hit pause on our regular systems and processes. I get soooo many questions about this topic -- so, it’s time we talk about it.

In today’s episode, I’m going to walk you through how to organize and put together a re-engagement campaign, including how many emails to send, how far apart, and what to include in each email.

You’ll also learn everything you need to know to successfully hit send with confidence and:

Know exactly what to say so your audience feels supported and seen
Have a plan on how many emails you need to send and help them remember why they signed up in the first place
Create a free gift that they need so badly they’ll be thanking you a million times over in their replies
Craft a plan to write emails they look forward to opening week in and week out

It’s time to make a plan because your subscribers are waiting for you.

If you’re ready to get back on track and into the hearts and inboxes of your audience, click below to get started.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[03:31] It's easier to reignite an old list than it is to start from scratch. In fact, getting a new customer can cost five times more than re-engaging with an old customer.
[06:10] If you’ve taken some time away from your email list, it’s time to create a re-engagement campaign.
[07:40] Email #1: Reintroduce yourself, but then make it all about how you are serving your audience.
[12:07] Email #2: Continue to nurture your list and show them how you're going to help them achieve their goal and desire, and why you're the person to do so.
[14:37] Email #3: Ask what they need and ask them to reply directly to your email. This shows you care and are committed to serving them.
[16:01] Rules: Make sure your subject lines stand out. Commit to showing up consistently. Set time aside and batch your email content.
[21:02] Give it at least 60 days before you begin to sell. This is all part of the know, like, and trust equation.
[21:53] Action steps: Within the next week sit down and write out your re-engagement campaign. Then give yourself at least a week to write out the emails, and finally send them. Enjoy the process!

Rate, Review, & Follow on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#376: Your Beginner Guide To Going Evergreen: Here’s Where To Start

13 maj 2021 | 28 min

The dream of setting your digital course on autopilot and letting it roll (with minimal effort) is a popular one for most entrepreneurs.

This is why I’m sharing the success roadmap for scaling I use so you can plan your strategy successfully.

And while I do believe going evergreen at the right time can be a beneficial way to grow your business, I'm also a firm believer that becoming an expert at live launching first is a must.

On this week’s podcast episode, I’m not only talking about the benefits of evergreen, I’m walking you through ways that live launches can prepare you for creating an evergreen product. You’ll also see how I (and some of my students) have done it in the past.

Having a clear direction in the process of going evergreen is the fastest way to help you on your journey and when you listen to this episode, you’ll learn:

The core values you must know before even thinking about getting started
Platforms you’ll want as your best friends so the funnel runs without a hitch
What must-have content should be created as you think about launching
How timing and LIVE launching plays into creating your evergreen experience

Plus, when you listen, you’ll have access to a FREE resource you can use as you get started and take action on the path to evergreen products.

Join me as I walk you through the step-by-step plan to help get you ready to generate income that feels effortless.

Here’s a preview of the episode:

[04:44] Do at least two or three live launches before you go evergreen. Live launching makes you more nimble and a better marketer.
[09:34] Platforms you'll need to go evergreen. ConvertKit - for emails and creating landing pages. Demio - for webinars. Deadline Funnel allows you to create smart links with individual automated campaigns.
[13:01] Marketing content you need includes: a webinar-registration page, sales page, email campaign to guide and nurture, and a re-play email.
[18:01] Create urgency by using Deadline Funnels and irresistible bonuses.
[20:01] Nicole Calloway Rankins went evergreen after two live launches and heard crickets. She went back and did a few more live launches and then launched an evergreen course that generates revenue every single month.
[21:41] Christina Galbato has two evergreen courses that have made over one million dollars in the past year. She says to make sure your live launch, webinar opt-in rate, show-up rate, sales conversions, and post-webinar email-open rate are all solid before moving on to evergreen.
[23:33] Action steps: Live launch until you see consistent results. Update your live launching marketing material. Start setting up your platforms. Pay close attention to your show up and conversion rates.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#375: How To Get Noticed Online (& What Jumping Out Of A Plane Has To Do With Entrepreneurship)

6 maj 2021 | 36 min

#374: Take Your Hands Off The Wheel: Automation For The Smart Business Owner

29 april 2021 | 20 min

Creating automation in your business can help you streamline your tasks and save time every single day.

Whether you’re a business owner just starting out or a seasoned entrepreneur, building automation systems in your business is key to helping you delegate and create processes that will help you succeed.

The bonus? When you create automation in your business you’ll also have the flexibility in your schedule you’ve always dreamed of.

I know, I know, you might be thinking, “But Amy -- this sounds too good to be true!”

And while it may seem like a miracle for your business, I can assure you that with just a little patience and follow through with the step-by-step process I give you, automation will be yours!

In this episode you’re about to learn my favorite tips and tools to create:

Auto-responders in your emails for all the FAQs that land in your inbox
Seamless scheduling systems (no more headaches!)
Social media content creation so you can batch and post with ease
Standard operating procedures -- every job now has a “how to do this” list
A process for hiring a Virtual Assistant to provide ongoing help

Plus, just to make things interesting, I have a fun accountability challenge at the end and I want to make sure I’m cheering you on as you implement your automation so you can spend more time on all the things you love!

Here’s a preview of the episode:

[04:18] Automation saves you time, money, and precious energy. It eliminates human error and allows you, and your team to focus on the big picture.
[05:41] Email automation. Only check your email once a day and set up an autoresponder for the other times.
[07:31] Create guided responses for common email questions that you get. You can still add a personal touch. You can use Boomerang to mark your email to go away and come back on another day.
[09:33] Scheduling automation. Schedulicity is an online calendar that you can integrate with your calendar and create a personalized link with your availability.
[10:59] Automating social media and weekly content. A social media automating tool will allow you to plan out your social media all at once.
[13:20] Managing emails from your community. ConvertKit is a good solution if you're just getting started.
[15:24] Standard operating procedures or SOPs. These documents will save you a lot of headaches down the road when you hire and scale your team.
[17:27] Compile tasks that can be passed off to a professional VA, even if it's just for a few hours a week. This will allow you to stay in your zone of genius.
[18:35] Action steps: Decide on one automation step that you can set up within the next 7 days. Send me a DM and tell me about it!

#373: Quiz Creation 101: Everything You Need to Know About Using the Most Effective Lead Magnet

22 april 2021 | 46 min

#372: How Much Does It Actually Cost To Start & Successfully Grow A Biz with Jamie Trull

15 april 2021 | 41 min

#371: The 30,000 Foot View: Crafting Your 4-Part Customer Journey

8 april 2021 | 24 min

#370: Behind-The-Scenes: How I Collect Money-Making Testimonials

1 april 2021 | 37 min

Customer testimonials can help you grow your business online and expand your reach.

Your digital course and online business success will skyrocket when you have glowing testimonials to share with the world.

Are you interested in significantly increasing your sales, boosting your lead magnet sign-ups and email subscribers, or growing your audience exponentially?

I have a feeling you’re saying, “Come on, Amy! Of course, I am!”

Well my friend, listen up because I’m going to tell you one simple strategy that will help you do all of those things I mentioned.

Two words… glowing testimonials.

They are simply the bread and butter of your business, and today, I’m giving you my behind-the-scenes, step-by-step process for finding and gathering testimonials that will be so top-notch that they do the selling for you.

And yes, there is a process -- trust me! In this episode, you’ll learn…

why testimonials are worth spending time collecting
how to find them
how to request them
how to conduct an interview
the proper way to format them to make sure they convert
where to use them

And because I love when I can gift you a step-by-step action-taking tool -- I’ve put together a free plug-&-play resource of the emails that we use to gather testimonials, along with the questions we ask in our testimonial interviews. Get it here.

Here’s a preview of the episode:

[05:05] A well-written testimonial is the ultimate social proof for you and your business. It's important to build that know, like, and trust factor.
[10:33] Look for testimonials everywhere! In your posts, comments, and actively seek them in your Facebook group.
[15:33] You can collect testimonials from your one-on-one work about your strategies or your teaching style. And of course, from your digital course or project.
[22:20] Create one place in Dropbox for all of your testimonials. Have a testimonial shell, so that you can find them easily.
[23:30] Use a specific formula for crafting your testimonial. Use what they gave you and do your best to finesse it. A three part testimonial should include the problem, the solution, and the results!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#369: Common Strategies For Uncommon Success With John Lee Dumas

29 mars 2021 | 42 min

John Lee Dumas teaches his most successful online business strategies

Get ready to take action and accomplish your entrepreneurial goals

Success secrets?

Out-of-the-box thinking?

Business plans that work wonders?

Ok, friend, you know what that means. Today’s podcast guest is FIRE.

I’m so excited to welcome John Lee Dumas back for his 4th appearance on the podcast. This episode is a must-listen, especially if your entrepreneurial and digital course goals include time and location freedom, financial independence, personal fulfillment… and more.

As an entrepreneur that has helped set the foundation for business success in the online marketplace and who has interviewed thousands of the world’s most successful entrepreneurs on his podcast, Entrepreneurs on Fire, John Lee Dumas is giving us his best secrets when it comes to:

Building a content plan
Diversifying your revenue streams
Increasing traffic (um, YES PLEASE!)

Plus… John reveals his business success tips and his out-of-the-box thinking when it comes to creating a business plan that stands out from the crowd.

Are you ready? It’s time to take notes and take action.

Here is the episode highlight reel:

[07:06] JLD shares his content production plan, which includes what he calls the “Zone of Fire.”
[11:36] You don't have to do everything yourself. JLD shares how his team works to produce consistent and accurate content.
[15:28] JLD shares how he diversifies his revenue streams and how this has helped him scale his business.
[20:07] “Boring will put you out of business.” People want to be entertained, and JLD shares how to stand out and keep things exciting.
[28:59] Be willing to do things that other people aren't willing to do. When you set your barrier super high your competition will end up being low.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#368: Kick These Excuses To The Curb: 5 Digital Course Myths Debunked

25 mars 2021 | 20 min

#367: How This Mompreneur Stopped Trading Time For Dollars (& You Can Too) with Maria Dior Duegaard Amdahl

18 mars 2021 | 39 min

Organic business growth can happen even when you’re juggling home-life responsibilities.

Holy Cow, friend! Wait until you listen to this conversation with my student and 7-figure business owner, Maria Dior Duegaard Amdahl.

I wanted to invite Maria to the show because I knew her entrepreneurial journey is one that will light a fire under your you-know-what and give you the exact steps you need to take action.

When Maria started her business she was juggling a lot -- her business plan, her family (she’s got three kiddos, a hubby, and a dog at home!), and building her online community.

As a successful health coach working 1:1 with entrepreneurs, it didn’t take Maria long to realize that she was trading time for dollars and needed to pivot to a different path. (And quickly!)

In this episode, Maria takes us along on her journey from trading time for dollars to running a $3 million dollar business. And as you listen to our conversation, I know you’ll see that she’s no different from you. Her success can be your success, sweet friend.

Plus you’ll get the insiders scoop into:

Maria’s best strategies for accomplishing ALL of your business goals… (even when you have minimal time)
The tangible action items Maria uses for growing an online community organically
How to pick yourself back up after failing and keep moving forward

Here’s what I love about this interview the most... Maria gives you action items you can start implementing today and she doesn’t hold back!

If you’re ready to build, grow, and scale your online business and still have enough time to make dinner at the end of the day, this episode is for you.

Here is your highlight guide to this episode:

[03:21] Maria shares her story of running a fitness studio for pregnant women and how transitioning to an online business allowed her to scale and reach $3 million in revenue.
[10:38] Maria created a system to be very mindful of how she spends her time -- she shares more about this in the freebie for this episode!
[15:53] She shares about her webinar show up rate of 58 percent with a 48 percent conversion rate and how she made this happen.
[22:11] Maria's secret is being herself and allowing herself the time to take the steps she needs to take while still being human flaws and all.
[27:12] Don't fall into the habit of thinking you have to learn everything before you take action, Maria shares how to do this.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

SPECIAL: Facebook iOS Update For Ad Campaigns: All You Need To Know

15 mars 2021 | 39 min

#366: How To Turn Your Expertise Into A Successful Course with Azhelle Wade

11 mars 2021 | 48 min

Are you ready for your brand to be widely known?

Learn how to turn your expertise into a digital course with Azhelle Wade.

I love bragging about my students. Honestly! The stuff they do always amazes me.

And what’s even more fun is that I know you like to hear their stories and strategies too. So it’s a win-win when they’re a podcast guest!

I’m so excited to introduce you to my Digital Course Academy student, Azhelle Wade.

Azhelle is an amazing student of mine. She's an entrepreneur, President of The Toy Coach, and host of the podcast, Making It in The Toy Industry and knows a thing or two about the power of taking your expertise and turning it into a successful course.

And if you’re wondering if you too can take your know-how and turn it into a passionate online business, you’re in luck! In this interview, Azhelle didn’t hold back from sharing her process and strategy that she used to get her expertise out into the world and kickstart her journey as an entrepreneur.

In this episode we talked about:

Making your expertise a successful business
Creating a “known for” brand
Azhelle’s story about breaking through the glass ceiling of diversity in her industry
The best advice she has on how to make the leap from corporate into entrepreneurship
Her unique approach to a successful launch

If you’re ready to learn how to make your expertise into a successful course - this episode is ready to help!

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[07:34] Fun fact: Savings will set you free. You may not need as much as you think you do. Look at places where you may be able to cut.
[09:27] As a cancer survivor, health was one of Azhelle's fears. She ended up getting a new lease on life and a mindset shift.
[13:52] Azhelle had a clear vision of who her ideal customer community was. She started asking what they needed to thrive.
[18:57] Learn Azhelle’s launch tips and how she ended up making $11,000 over the next 48 hours.
[34:52] Know what your mission is for your brand and who you're going to help and why and how you're going to help them.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#365: Leave Your 9-5 & Kickstart Being Your Own Boss: Here’s How!

4 mars 2021 | 28 min

Are you ready to be your own boss and create a new online business?

Make the leap from your 9 to 5 and kick start your entrepreneurial journey!

Before I started my business, I would sit in my corporate cubicle and dream about creating a digital course and online business.

The problem was, I had no idea how to create a digital course.

I also didn't have an email list, a social media following, or a roadmap to show me how to leave my cubicle behind and build an online business. Raise your hand if you can relate!

If this sounds anything like you and you’re ready to make the leap from 9 to 5 cubicle to digital course entrepreneurship, I’m excited for you to hear all about it in this podcast episode.

In it, I tell you all about what I’ve learned over the last 11 plus years of building a thriving digital course business -- stories and practices you can put into place today to save you the time and headaches that I experienced along the way. (Boy how I wish someone would have done the same for me early on.)

If you love a few behind-the-scenes stories of my early day hiccups, well then my friend, you’re in for a treat because I’m spilling the beans…. Just wait until you hear how getting yelled at on the tarmac at the airport changed my entrepreneurial journey.

Here’s a glance at this episode...

[07:32] I left my corporate job and my first stop was working one-on-one doing social media for small businesses. I fell into the common trap of taking on too many clients.
[08:35] For two years, I had a business I hated!
[11:55] If you're in a similar situation, let go of a few clients but keep a few as well. Free up the time to create the business of your dreams.
[13:11] Prioritize tiger time. Commit to at least one full hour a week to work on the business you want to work on and nothing else.
[15:15] Start creating consistent content and share it with the world.
[17:53] Devote time to get comfortable on video. Video brings a whole new level of connection with your audience.
[19:55] Fuel that big beautiful brain of yours. Becoming the go-to expert in your industry means that you never stop learning.
[22:00] Find a mentor or two. Having a coach or mentor that you can meet with on a regular basis is a great way to remain accountable.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#364: How I Do It: Boost Your Sales with These 5 Course Enhancements

25 februari 2021 | 31 min

#363: How To Silence Your Inner Critic & Commit To Success With Jamie Kern Lima

22 februari 2021 | 61 min

#362: How To Write Emails That Actually Get Opened with Zafira Rajan

18 februari 2021 | 46 min

Want to write weekly emails that *actually* get opened? Read on…

That’s right, my friend! Writing your weekly emails doesn’t have to be a chore. In fact, it can be a joy, and my guest in this episode will give you the tools you need to make that a reality.

Her name is Zafira Rajan, and she’s a strategic launch copywriter and soulful strategist committed to helping conscious entrepreneurs build, grow, and scale their businesses using storytelling.

In this episode, she’s sharing a step-by-step for identifying what she calls “Personality Pillars,” which will give you a bank of ideas to have on hand when you’re ready to sit down and write.

As well as her top three strategies for creating a weekly non-negotiable ritual for writing consistent email copy.

How To Become A Pro Copywriter

[09:26] Personality pillars are at the core of how Zafira shows up for brands. It's about showing the dimensions of you.
[14:36] Your first pillar is your core values. We all have values and things we stand for whether they are business or personal.
[15:56] Your second pillar is your stamp of weirdness. What do people find weird, funny, natural, or even interesting about you?
[18:15] The third pillar is your intentional impact. Whether you're launching or not, it's important to remind people consistently that you have something that they can buy.
[20:54] The fourth pillar is your unapologetic opinion. What point of view do I have that I'm afraid to share? The people who you want to bring into your life and attract will appreciate your point of view.
[24:45] Your fifth element is your “Z” or zest factor. This is what you sprinkle on top of everything to make it uniquely yours. This is the sweet spot between what you do and why people care about it.
[32:33] Create an environment that sets a tone for writing or creating content. Design a custom writing ritual. Light a candle and get in the zone.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

Bonus: How To Get A Quick Cash Boost For Your Business

15 februari 2021 | 28 min

#361: Your Clubhouse Invite: Is This Social Platform Right For You With Coach Glitter

11 februari 2021 | 73 min

#360: How To Use Content & Storytelling To Grow Your Business With Aprille Franks

4 februari 2021 | 37 min

#359: Customer Support 101: Proven Strategies To Create Life-Long Customers

28 januari 2021 | 26 min

#358: Your Backstage Pass To The Entrepreneur Experience: The Best Advice You’ll Receive This Year

21 januari 2021 | 32 min

#357: 5 Common Facebook Ad Mistakes: How To Avoid Them & Save Money with Emily Hirsh

18 januari 2021 | 40 min

#356: Sales Page Struggles? Boost Your Conversions With These 3 Tips

14 januari 2021 | 23 min

Sales page struggling to convert? Here’s what to do!

Just like you, your sales page is a big deal.

And when it isn’t converting, it’s easy to feel defeated. (Trust me, I’ve been there, my friend!)

Luckily, there are a few minor tweaks that you can make to your sales page that will have it converting like crazy and leave your potential students saying, “I need this, NOW,” and then hitting that buy button.

In this episode, you’ll gain the guidance you need to simplify your sales page with a powerful layout that has worked extremely well in my own business.

When it comes to a compelling sales page, there are a few features you want to pay attention to: your call-to-action, your “Magic Mirror,” and your “Highlight Reel.” And don’t you worry, I’ll explain what all of those mean.

Once you get these dialed in, it’s smooth sailing to attract your ideal community to your offer.

Ready to get your sales page converting like crazy?

Here’s a snapshot of a few things we talked about…

[02:10] If done right, your sales page can be gold. It can be one of the most essential parts of your sales funnel, customer journey, and conversion success.
[04:27] Your sales page is a tool to deliver the four W's of your offer. These are what your offer is, who it's for, why you created it, and what transformation your course offers.
[06:30] Sprinkle your CTA confetti throughout your sales page. Have four different CTAs with one near the top for action takers, one after your offer and bonus content, one after your money back promise, and one at the bottom of your sales page.
[09:30] Clearly state who your product and offer is for and place this near the top of your sales page. This is the magic mirror where they see themselves in the copy and keep reading.
[14:03] Future pacing is like a highlight reel that paints a picture of what is possible for your student and how your offer will get them there.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#355: Money Made Simple: An Entrepreneurs Guide to Taking Control of Your Finances with Rachel Cruze

7 januari 2021 | 41 min

Your Newest Podcast Obsession: Talking Body (Exclusive Announcement)

5 januari 2021 | 16 min

#354: Counting Down The Hottest Strategies From OMME In 2020

30 december 2020 | 49 min

#353: Your Confidence Success Path for Showing Up Online with Ivirlei Brookes

23 december 2020 | 40 min

#352: 3 Free Organic Traffic Strategies To Grow Your Audience Quickly

17 december 2020 | 29 min

#351: Pivot Your Messaging: The Ultimate Checklist for Troubleshooting When Conversions Are Down

10 december 2020 | 29 min

#350: Perfecting Your Pitch: 5-Steps To Sell With Ease with David Meltzer

7 december 2020 | 42 min

#349: The VA Solution: Your Step-By-Step Guide To Hiring & Successfully Working With A VA with Shannon Miles

3 december 2020 | 47 min

#348: How To Create True Wealth In Your Business (& Life) with Patrice Washington

25 november 2020 | 52 min

Ready to create more abundance in your business?

Have you ever been to an event where the speaker left you crying, laughing, and so inspired that you felt you could climb Mount Kilimanjaro all at the same time?

Well, today’s guest is that kind of speaker and coach! Her name is Patrice Washington, and I am one lucky girl to call her a friend and have her on to share her expertise with you.

Patrice is an award-winning author, transformational speaker, coach, and media personality.

She was named one of “12 Inspiring Black Voices in Personal Development” by Success Magazine, featured on Forbes.com as one of “15 Inspiring Podcasts for Professionals of Every Stripe,” and highlighted by Entrepreneur.com -- to name a few impressive successes.

She’s committed to empowering women to look at life through the lens of abundance and opportunity versus lack and scarcity, and redefine the term “wealth.”

In this episode, we chat about her 6 Pillars of Wealth and how these pillars will help you uplevel your life and business. You might be surprised to find out that only one of these pillars is directly tied to money.

Learn more about Patrice Washington's 6 Pillars of Wealth

[12:57] Patrice created the six pillars to help people shift their beliefs and mindset about wealth, which will shift your actions and the results will come.
[17:26] Pillar #1: FIT is about becoming your best self and being physically and mentally fit.
[21:35] Pillar #2: PEOPLE is about creating relationships that matter.
[27:22] Pillar #3: FAITH (whatever that means to you personally) will prevent you from giving up right before you're about to succeed.
[30:49] Pillar #4: SPACE is important because your environment is everything.
[36:38] Pillar #5: WORK is about living your life's purpose.
[40:57] Pillar #6: MONEY is the last pillar. When your mind is cluttered, it's hard to accept the foundational truths about managing money.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#347: The ONE Thing All Successful Entrepreneurs Do For Time, Location, & Financial Freedom (And Why You Should Too!)

19 november 2020 | 29 min

#346: How This 7-Figure Business Owner Uses Her Podcast To Drive Traffic with Jenna Kutcher

12 november 2020 | 44 min

#345: The One Where We Make Business Legal Jargon Sexy with Ashley Kirkwood

5 november 2020 | 38 min

#344: 5-Steps For Creating & Repurposing Your Content Calendar Like A Boss

29 oktober 2020 | 37 min

#343: From Bankruptcy To The Today Show: Become The Creative Visionary Of Your Business & Life With Tracy Matthews

26 oktober 2020 | 56 min

#342: Behind-The-Scenes With My Mentor, Michael Hyatt: Why Entrepreneurs Will Save The World

22 oktober 2020 | 39 min

#341: The Power Of Your Voice: How To Cut Through The Online Noise, Attract Your Ideal Customers, & Make $$$

15 oktober 2020 | 58 min

#340: Landing Page Not Converting? Here’s What To Do!

8 oktober 2020 | 28 min

#339: Facebook Ad Strategies To Grow Your Audience Now (No Matter Where You Are In Your Business) with Salome Schillack

5 oktober 2020 | 43 min

#338: Content Made Easy: How To Organize Your Launch Content, Make $$$, and Never Run Out

1 oktober 2020 | 25 min

Pre-launch content, webinar content, and course content.

“How the heck do you differentiate these three areas of launch content? How do I come up with enough content for each part of my launch without giving it all away, Amy?!”

This is a question I get a lot! In this episode, I’m breaking it all down for you.

We’ll talk about:

Determining the bulk of your pre-launch content (and how listening can help direct you)
How to leave your audience saying, “I’m excited! Now, how do I do it?” on your webinar
The secrets to creating valuable course content

And so much more!

You’ll walk away with a clear understanding of how the content in each area will differ, build on one another, and what content goes in each phase.

Let's break down the episode!

[00:02:55] Your pre-launch content is all of the content you create and share with your audience before you open registration for your webinar. If you’re still running your first few launches, I’d suggest running your pre-launch for 30 days.
[00:05:37] Your pre-launch content should help support your audience in overcoming any objections they might have when it comes to signing up for your course. You should take them on a journey over the invisible bridge.
[00:08:01] Hot tip: During your webinar Q&A ask, "if you're still on the fence, what's keeping you from signing up?"
[00:10:51] Your webinar should show your attendees what's possible and lead them to a new mindset. When creating the content, ask yourself the golden question, "What's the one thing my audience needs to know before buying my course?"
[00:13:35] The three sections of a webinar are possibility, path, and promotion.
[00:18:01] Your course content is the step-by-step road map that transforms your students from where they are to where they want to be.
[00:21:49] Think about what you're promising and lay out the transformation from there. How will you get them from point A to where they need to be?

This episode is brought to you by Boosted, an app for iOS or Android that allows you to make beautiful, professional-looking videos for your brand's social media in three easy steps! You can use stock videos, your own videos, or even create stunning videos with your photos. With top-notch templates, easy resizing, and user-friendly video editing options, Boosted can take your social to the next level. Head here to get the discounted rate of $15 for 3 months of Boosted Premium, which offers bonus features to make your videos stand out!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#337: Instagram Reels: The What, How, & Why For Entrepreneurs with Jasmine Star

24 september 2020 | 61 min

ICYMI: Instagram dropped another new feature in early August. You may have seen it? It’s the Instagram Reels that keep popping up around every IG corner.

And, as the curious entrepreneur that I know you are, you’re probably wondering if this is a feature you should be paying attention to and using to grow your audience.

To help you answer that, I went to my dear friend, Jasmine Star, aka Queen of Instagram!

THE WHAT, HOW, & WHY OF INSTAGRAM REELS

Jasmine will answer some of the questions I’ve seen my audience ask in Facebook groups, a sneak peek into what her content calendar looks like for Instagram, how to come up with five content topic ideas so you can get started with Instagram Reels, and so much more.

You’re going to walk away with your next action steps for using Instagram Reels to start growing your audience using this new feature!

This episode is brought to you by The Draw Shop, a service to perfect your elevator pitch. Do you ever tell people what you do and they look at you a little…funny? Like they don’t totally get it? It happens to me, too. With The Draw Shop, you meet with an expert copywriter to create an exceptional elevator pitch and one-page visual story to compel prospects to respond right now. For a limited time, The Draw Shop is offering Online Marketing Made Easy listeners their service for nearly ONE-THIRD the regular price. Get your word-perfect pitch today at The Draw Shop. Where there’s clarity, there’s revenue.

This episode is also brought to you by LinkedIn Marketing. If your goal is to target your customers where they’re engaging every day and when they’re ready to make a buying decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn. When you advertise on LinkedIn, you’re attracting potential customers and fostering relationships that often translate into high-quality leads, website traffic, and higher brand awareness. Go to LinkedIn Marketing to redeem a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#336: How To Create A Million-Dollar Business (What's Worked For Me)

17 september 2020 | 26 min

#335: Life Coaching, Wine Tasting, & Sex Ed: How These Courses Provided Time, Financial, & Location Freedom

10 september 2020 | 28 min

BONUS: 5-figures in 6 months & 6-figures in 1 year: This Could Be You With Jamie Trull

7 september 2020 | 48 min

#334: 4 Incredible ‘First Launch’ Success Stories

3 september 2020 | 35 min

Official Trailer: Online Marketing Made Easy with Amy Porterfield

28 augusti 2020 | 4 min

#333: $70k In 7 Days: How She Did It With Gayneté Jones

27 augusti 2020 | 59 min

#332: What Kind Of Course Is Best For Your Business

20 augusti 2020 | 25 min

#331: 6 Figures & 5 Babies: How She Did it with Only 3 Hours a Day

13 augusti 2020 | 56 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

Meet Andrea Olson, one of my amazing students and a fierce “Mom-preneur” with a mission and a successful online business.

She made over $600,000 in her business last year by committing to no more than four-hour workdays -- with the exception of her launch days.

She teaches moms how to utilize a system called the “Elimination Communication” approach for potty training with her Go Diaper Free Program.

In this episode, we chat about how she sets up her business in a way that only requires part-time hours to run smoothly, her secret sauce, and the one thing she feels has made her so successful.

We talk about her first hire, some of the strategies she uses for growing her email list by 100 to 150 subscribers per day, and so much more.

This episode is brought to you by Acuity Scheduling, a scheduling platform that will help you to book more clients, get paid on time, and automate and organize your business’ day-to-day tasks. For a limited time only, you can get 45 days of Acuity Scheduling absolutely free -- no credit card required. Click here to automate your schedule!

This episode is also brought to you by LinkedIn Marketing. If your goal is to target your customers where they’re engaging every day and when they’re ready to make a buying decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn. When you advertise on LinkedIn, you’re attracting potential customers and fostering relationships that often translate into high-quality leads, website traffic, and higher brand awareness. Go to LinkedIn Marketing to redeem a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#330: How To Stop Playing Small with Brit Barron

10 augusti 2020 | 40 min

#329: How 3 Entrepreneurs Found Success Serving A Small Niche Audience

6 augusti 2020 | 79 min

#328: 10 Unexpected Digital Course Topics That Will Inspire You Into Action

30 juli 2020 | 29 min

#327: Stop Leaving $$ On The Table -- Add A Digital Course To Your Biz (Here’s How!)

23 juli 2020 | 43 min

#326: My Top 10 Digital Course Mistakes (And How To Avoid Them)

16 juli 2020 | 55 min

#325: How To Avoid These Two Common Launching Pitfalls with Tasha Booth

9 juli 2020 | 43 min

#324: Email List Growth Strategies That Will Transform Your Business

2 juli 2020 | 36 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

Email list growth is just something you’ll never stop doing! Attracting new ideal audience members to your email list to nurture them and eventually turn them into devoted customers should be a priority as a new or veteran entrepreneur.

To help you out, I’m sharing three foolproof list growth strategies. Whether you’re still working on hitting your first 250 subscribers or you have a few thousand on your list, you’ll find these strategies extremely doable and effective.

The first one ties into Search Engine Optimization and how to use it on your website, the second is a social media strategy, and the third is an approach you can use to get your website visitors onto your email list.

I’ve even included a little bonus strategy at the end of the episode.

Check out how this episode plays out...

[04:42] Strategy #1: I share a super simple Search Engine Optimization (SEO) strategy to boost your website traffic and gain new leads. No SEO experience required to make this subscriber growth strategy work!
[11:56] Strategy #2: Find your ICA on Facebook and make an effort to get to know them. Facebook groups are a great way to find and attract new customers -- so long as you approach it in a genuine way. I walk you through step-by-step how to use this strategy!
[19:57] Strategy #3: Use website pop-ups to get new subscribers on your list. Done right, this works like a charm! Use them in a way that resonates with your ideal customer.
[26:22] Bonus Strategy: Add an opt-in link for your lead magnet to your email signature. Think about all of the emails that you and your team send. This is a great way to turn warm leads into email subscribers.

Get your free resource here!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#323: How Healthy Is Your Email List? 4 Metrics To Track

29 juni 2020 | 32 min

Entrepreneur PSA: Tracking your email metrics is an important task that you need to be making time for!

Okay, I know that may not seem like the most exciting public service announcement you’ve ever heard but hear me out. If you’ve been looking to grow and improve the health of your email list, the answers and guidance you’re looking for could be hiding in the metrics housed on your email service provider.

Now, I know that you might be unsure as to what your metrics mean and which ones to pay attention to, which is why, in this episode, I break down exactly how to track your email metrics and set goals according to your industry averages.

I know you’re going to find this episode invaluable. It’s going to give you the confidence and knowledge to keep growing that priceless email list of yours.

Here’s a sneak peek of this episode...

[03:30] First things first, let’s chat about your email open rate. This is the percentage of people who open your email. Different Industries have different open rates, so when you’re identifying where your open rate should be, make sure you compare to your industry average. Check out this article to pinpoint what that is.
[05:33] If you want to improve your email open rate -- get creative with your subject headlines. Here are a few ways to do that!
[07:36] The next metric of importance is your click-through rate -- the percentage of people who opened your email and took action by clicking a link. I share some tips to improve this metric.
[12:02] Next, let’s discuss the conversion rate. This is the percentage of people who click through and take action on your offer or request. This is yet again, another important metric.
[21:33] In order to get people to go from email subscribers to customers, you have to nurture them with every email you send. Here are some tangible ways to improve your email conversion rate.
[23:33] Last, but certainly not least, you’ll want to pay attention to your unsubscribe rate. This is the percentage of people who unsubscribe after receiving an email from you. Listen, you’ll always have unsubscribers, and to be honest, they probably weren’t a good fit for your business. However, once you get hyper clear on who you’re serving and stay in your lane -- you’ll start to see this number drop.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#322: How To Build Your Email List from the Ground Up

25 juni 2020 | 59 min

#321: Untapped Strategies To Grow Your Email List & Your Business with Neil Patel

22 juni 2020 | 35 min

Are you ready to make list building mistakes a thing of the past so you can become an email list master?

Well, my friend, I have just the guy to help you do so. Neil Patel, top online marketer, entrepreneur, and best selling author is going to share three of the most email marketing mistakes made by entrepreneurs.

And, of course, he doesn’t stop there. He also goes on to share how to avoid these mistakes and, instead, how to improve your email marketing game and successfully grow your list.

Here’s a snapshot of a few things we talked about…

The biggest mistake that people are making right now with their email list is focusing on the size of their list. The truth is if your list isn't engaging, the size of it doesn't matter. Scrub your list and remove people who don't open or engage.
Growing your list is always a challenge. Respond to comments on blogs, groups, and social sites by helping people. When you point people to your helpful resources, you can grow your list while engaging and helping new subscribers.
Learn to sell every once in a while. You need to put offers out there, so your audience doesn't think it's always free all of the time. You can sell even if your list is small. It will add up.
Free tools convert really well for list signups. If you don't have your own tool, you can find something to use at CodeCanyon. Tools convert best. Then journeys, ebooks, and general newsletter optins. Blocking off a portion of your content for subscribers only is also a tactic that converts.
You can share a journey by allowing your subscribers to follow you as you create something like a new course and then share your results. Share your goal, get subscribers, and let them follow your journey through your posts and content.
An email capture system refers to your process to capture emails. You can do so through multiple ways like a tool, newsletter, quiz, and more. You want to create a system with different paths for different personality types to subscribe.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#320: 5-Steps To Make Your Marketing More Inclusive With Sonia Thompson

18 juni 2020 | 60 min

#319: Facebook Group Engagement: Strategies You Need To Know

15 juni 2020 | 29 min

Facebook groups, you gotta love them. And as an entrepreneur, you gotta have one!

Especially during the COVID-19 crisis, people are spending more time online looking for the answers and guidance they need, and one place they are looking is on Facebook.

This means, if you don’t have a Facebook group, you could be missing out on potential customers and loyal audience members.

Or, maybe you’ve started a group, but you’re struggling to engage your members. Either way, you’re going to love this episode and walk away with tons of ideas to get your group rockin’ and rollin’.

I have over 38 thousand members between my free and paid Facebook groups, so I know a thing or two about what works and what doesn’t. In this episode, I spill it all!

We’re going to talk about my favorite tips and tricks for setting a Facebook group up, engaging your members, and ensuring you don’t hear crickets when you post.

Here’s what I talk about…

[06:17] It’s important to define your group focus and who your group is for. You gotta do this because it helps you to find clarity in the direction of your group and content.
[09:24] Always, always, always make your group private! Why? Because it makes your group more intimate and allows you to have more control.
[11:11] Have fun and use the “ask questions” feature to make sure applicants know your rules and to find out more about your members. I personally like to ask the “magic wand” question, which helps me to learn what topic my audience wants to hear. You can also use this section to gather emails!
[13:08] Mention your Facebook group everywhere to get new members.
[15:55] Get used to showing up consistently in your group -- this is the difference between winning or losing. Map out a content calendar for your Facebook group. Decide how often you are going to post and how often you are going to go in and comment and make sure you schedule these tasks into your weekly planner.
[21:59] Do a weekly or monthly Facebook Live. Not sure what to talk about? You can do Q & As, storytime, hot seats, or a cocktail hour! Pay attention to how your group resonates and keep doing what's working.

Also, I wanted to make sure that you have everything you need to get started with a Facebook group. Click here to grab my free step-by-step guide to setting up your group.

This free resource is also for those who already have a group as it has some tips that will improve your group’s searchability, boundaries, and organization.

This episode is brought to you by The Draw Shop, a service to perfect your elevator pitch. Do you ever tell people what you do and they look at you a little...funny? Like they don’t totally get it? It happens to me, too. With The Draw Shop, you meet with an expert copywriter to create an exceptional elevator pitch and one-page visual story to compel prospects to respond right now. For a limited time, The Draw Shop is offering Online Marketing Made Easy listeners their service for nearly ONE-THIRD the regular price. Get your word-perfect pitch today at The Draw Shop. Where there’s clarity, there’s revenue.

This episode is also brought to you by Leadpages. Whether you’re growing your email list or your business, Leadpages will make your life easier. Leadpages lets you can create hassle-free opt-in pages, thank you pages, webinar replay pages, websites and more. Plus, their built-in marketing advice and conversion tools minimize tech confusion so you can focus on the important stuff in your business -- like engaging your audience. Turn your content into clicks and customers with Leadpages. Start a free 14-day trial and save 20% on your first purchase at Leadpages.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#318: Becoming an Imperfect Ally with Erica Courdae

11 juni 2020 | 73 min

#317b: How To Do A Step-by-Step Mid-Year Goal Audit

1 juni 2020 | 36 min

#317: 6-Steps To Craft A Money Magnet Offer

28 maj 2020 | 39 min

#316: How To Grow Your Email List Using Social Media

21 maj 2020 | 44 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

After 11 years of building a successful online business, there is one area I see entrepreneurs go wrong time and time again.

Want to know what it is?

They put all their effort into growing their social media following without properly using it to grow their email list. In my experience, that’s a big no, no.

So, why would that be a big mistake?

Well, here are a couple of stats I want to share with you.

Your return on investment with an email list is 4x higher than any other marketing platform. In fact, the average ROI is 122%.
For every one dollar spent on email marketing, you could make between forty-five to fifty-one dollars.

You do not, and I repeat, do not own your social media followers. You do, however, own your email list. This means that a social media platform can take your followers away at any point, or dictate who does and does not see your content.

Do I have your attention yet?

I’m not saying you should ditch social media. Instead, I’m giving you simple, effective strategies for utilizing your social media accounts to grow your email list, share your knowledge with the world, and support your audience in the best way possible.

To help me do this, I reached out to a couple of experts you may know, Jasmine Star (Instagram expert) and Brittany Krystle (LinkedIn expert), for a little guidance.

In this episode, Jasmine shares her favorite ways to invite Instagram followers over to your email list. Brittany gives little known tips and tricks for converting your LinkedIn followers to email subscribers.

And yours truly -- that’s me -- is going to share some of the most effective ways to use Facebook to grow your email list.

You’re going to love these tangible, step-by-step strategies for growing your email list quickly.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#315: 5 Ways To Use TikTok To Reach More Customers (No Dancing Required) with Elise Darma

14 maj 2020 | 54 min

#314b: From Rejection to a 1.2 Billion Dollar Entrepreneur with Jamie Kern Lima

11 maj 2020 | 62 min

A lot of people look at a billion-dollar company with starstruck eyes and forget that, in most cases, it took someone a lot of persistence, resilience, and tenacity to get there.

And, yes, I have a specific company in mind.

I’m referring to IT Cosmetics, a billion-dollar makeup company. In this episode, I sit down and talk to the founder, Jamie Kern Lima.

I am so honored to have my friend join me and bring inspiration and tangible guidance on how to build a successful company from the ground up.

Jamie has a motivating story and she is an example of hard work, determination, and persistence. On top of that, she has a heart of gold.

Jamie shares her journey of being a successful entrepreneur and how she handled hearing “no” over and over again.

She talked about following your intuition, showing up authentically, and some of her top needle movers when she was building a billion-dollar business.

Here's a peek at the episode...

[05:15] Jamie shares about her struggles with her skin, which a television anchor, made her feel self-conscious. After struggling to find a makeup that actually stuck, she was inspired to create her own.
[07:53] And that’s exactly what she did! On the flight back from her honeymoon, she and husband wrote up a business plan for a skincare line that catered to women who didn’t have perfect skin.
[11:41] “When you're doing something really new and really novel, all of the experts may not get it.” When no one would pick up her product, she went back to the drawing board and decided to sell it online.
[13:42] Although they were struggling to get traction, Jamie persisted because she knew in her gut that she was supposed to do this.
[17:07] In true Jamie fashion, she kept hustling -- even after a heartwrenching “no” from Sephora.
[20:59] Jamie shares how she was turned down by QVC seven years ago, and today they are the largest selling brand on QVC.
[27:01] “Don't dilute your own authenticity. Nobody can be you, and it doesn't serve you to be anybody else.”
[39:11] When she finally landed a spot on QVC, she sold out! Tune in to hear her story.
[42:55] Jamie shares one of her biggest mistakes of growing a billion-dollar company.
[50:08] She also shares some of her best needle movers while building such a successful brand.

I know you’re going to fall in love with Jamie and find so much value in her expert advice and guidance.

Side note: If you reach out to Jamie on Instagram, be sure to tag her handle in the first few words of your post’s comments.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#314: Become The Most Decisive Person You Know

7 maj 2020 | 31 min

Can I let you in on a little secret? If you become a decisive entrepreneur early on in your journey, it’s going to serve you in the long run.

How do I know? Because I’ve been in the game for twelve years now, and I’d say that’s long enough to feel like I’ve made enough decisions to last me a lifetime.

I have a question for you, do you consider yourself to be a decisive person? If you answered “no,” that’s totally fine.

To be honest, I’ve always been a pretty decisive person (just like my mom!). But being an entrepreneur has helped me to take a step back and to examine my process for making educated decisions with confidence.

My hope for you is that whether you’re decisive or not, you take my simple and effective 4-step decision-making process, and you use it to make big, bold decisions that will best serve you, your business, and your audience.

Step one in my 4-step process is to commit already! Give yourself to commit to making a decision… even if it’s the wrong one, which sometimes, it will be.

My second step is to find out what it is that you need to learn and what information you need to make an educated decision. But I say this with caution because I know first-hand that it’s too easy to fall down the research rabbit hole. To avoid that, set a timer (I know it sounds silly, but I’m serious!). Don’t let research draw out making a decision!

My third step is to talk it out with someone, but be mindful of who you ask. After all, I firmly believe that you are the best person to make the final decision in your business.

And last, but certainly not least, the last step is to go inward. Now, of course, I couldn’t say this without giving you a step-by-step of how to do just that. So, I’ve laid out how I personally like to go inward so that I can gain clarity around my decision.

Here's what I talk about in this episode...

[04:21] What if you didn’t think about decisions as either good or bad? Here’s what to do instead. When a decision leads you to your desired results, keep going. When it doesn't, change your path and make a new decision!
[08:40] Commit to making as many decisions as needed to get the results you're after. Tune in to find out how I enter into an experimental phase and welcome input and feedback from those I trust and respect. After all, I firmly believe it's better to decide then to keep waiting for the right decision.
[16:16] Only do the necessary research to make your decision and nothing more. Ask what information you need to gather to make a competent decision and then find the right resources. Oh, and be sure to set a deadline or timeframe!
[17:25] Selectively and cautiously seek input from people who you trust and understand what's going on in your business. Ask yourself: Who will give you candid input? Who will be skewed because they love you?
[20:24] Get quiet and turn inward for the ultimate decision. You are the best person to make the final call in your business.
[24:39] I find it’s helpful to journal on these questions: What's best for the company? What's best for me? What feels right? What aligns with my intent, mission, and vision? What would I do if I were brave?

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#313b: Shift Your Selling Mindset with Lisa Sasevich

4 maj 2020 | 43 min

Wouldn’t it be fun to share your gifts with the world and make a ton of money while doing it?

You’re probably thinking, “Well, Amy, uh yeah…obviously!”

So why do I hear -- all the time -- that to be an entrepreneur, it's so much harder than just getting paid to share your gifts?

My guest today, Lisa Sasevich, is going to set the record straight. She's going to share just how to use your gifts to boost your sales so that you can make the revenue you desire.

Lisa -- a.k.a. “Queen of Conversions” -- is an award-winning entrepreneur and business coach, and she just released her new book, “Meant For More.”

Why is this book important to read as an entrepreneur?

Because Lisa has put all of her top tips and tools into one place so that you can hone in on your unique gifts and use them to build a thriving business.

In this episode, Lisa and I chat about her easy-to-use, proven formula for understanding how to use your gifts to make more money, have more impact, and get more out of life.

What I love most about her step-by-step formula (besides that it’s step-by-step), is that it teaches you how to do all of this without being pushy or salesy. Instead, it shows you how to speak from the heart with intention, honesty, and truth.

Here's a look at what we chatted about...

[04:46] As a pioneer in the online marketing world, Lisa wanted to integrate her passion and her work. She's now known as the “Queen of Conversion” and has taught over 15,000 clients to create an irresistible offer without being pushy or salesy.
[09:41] Lisa shares a powerful story about losing her mom and how that inspired her to avoid living a “woulda, coulda, shoulda” life, and instead figure out what she was put here to do.
[12:07] We talk about finding your “unique value,” what it is, and how to use it as an entrepreneur.
[16:37] In her Meant For More book, there is a proven formula to turn your knowledge into profits. And because you know I love a good formula, Lisa and I chat about how to utilize it as an entrepreneur to make more money doing what you love.
[23:18] Lisa shares an unexpected way to identify something you’re good at. Hint… it has to do with meddling!
[24:34] She also talks about identifying a topic that people want to pick your brain about, and how this is a clue towards your million dollar value.
[25:52] Her five-step Meant For More Sales process is to make peace with sales, claim your million-dollar value, get specific about taking action, turn it into an irresistible offer, and lay out the plan to live a life you love.

You’re going to love this episode. Plus, Lisa has a free mini-course on how to discover your unique value. Head here to grab her freebie and discover your unique value today!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#313: How To Find The Right Business Mentor

30 april 2020 | 30 min

“A mentor is someone who sees more talent and ability within you than you see in yourself, and helps bring it out of you.” - Bob Proctor

Amen, Mr. Proctor!

I am a firm believer in studying and learning from mentors who have gone before you and have succeeded and created a life and business similar to the one you dream of creating.

When I was first starting out, I relied on and invested in mentors to support me with the step-by-step guidance they’ve used to achieve results.

And the truth is, I still do to this day!

It’s important to find a mentor who aligns with your vision and the goals that you have set for your business.

In this episode, I talk about…

why mentors are important during every season of your business
the golden number of mentors you should study and learn from
the difference between working with a mentor one-on-one, in a mastermind, or online through a course they offer
how to know which one is best for you and your business

Here’s what this episode is all about...

[04:11] I get it! When starting out, it's so easy to follow 100 or more people you admire and consider each and every one a mentor. But here’s my tip to you (coming from years of experience), you want to keep it simple and keep your mentors to a minimum to build a successful business.
[06:52] Having only two or three mentors allows you to build trust and cultivate relationships with these people. Taking advice from too many mentors will stunt your business growth.
[08:59] Having trouble narrowing it down? Don’t worry, I have a little guidance for you. Write a list of all the people who you believe are your mentors and all the people you admire. Decide who on the list has succeeded at creating a life and a business that you would like to create. Start eliminating names, so you are left with only a few people who truly align with your business desires and goals.
[10:52] Once you have your list of potential mentors, study from them and learn from them. Let their guidance, their content, their tools, and courses guide you.
[15:40] You’re probably wondering about working with a mentor. And, to be honest, that’s one of the best things I could possibly do as an entrepreneur. I’ve found that there are benefits to group masterminds and working one-on-one with a coach. When working one-on-one, you'll have an opportunity to identify tasks specific to your vision. However, it can be expensive. I suggest you do a digital course first and then decide if you want to take it one step further with one-on-one coaching.
[19:50] I’ve found that masterminds are especially beneficial later on in your business. Paying for it when you have skin in the game is a whole new experience -- trust me. What I love most about masterminds is that you get feedback and ideas from other like-minded individuals. A mastermind can truly offer you so much clarity as an entrepreneur.

Finding the right mentor in such a busy world is essential and empowering, but it can also be frustrating if you aren’t sure what to look for!

To take the overwhelm out of finding a mentor who is going to guide you and show you a seamless step-by-step approach to succeeding in your industry, I’ve put together a freebie with five questions to help you get hyper clear on who is a good fit.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

“I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.”

#312b: The Things You SHOULD Be Saying Yes To

27 april 2020 | 29 min

I almost said “no” to one of the biggest opportunities I’ve ever had, and it would have cost me playing a bigger game as I had committed to.

If you’ve been with me for a while, you know that in 2019 I committed to playing a bigger game, and yet here I was, in 2019, contemplating shooting down an opportunity that allowed me to do just that.

Woah! What the heck was I thinking? Tune in to find out if I actually played a bigger game. Spoiler alert… I did!

In this episode, I’m talking about the opportunities, the kind that we all get, that are scary, exciting, and provide us with the breakthroughs we need to accomplish our goals and jumpstart a life and business that we dream of.

I want you to look out for those opportunities, and even though they may seem terrifying… I want you to have the courage to say “yes” to them.

And while it isn’t as easy as one, two, three, I do have three steps for you to take when you encounter those opportunities to help you find the courage, confidence, and grit to say “yes,” play a bigger game, and step into the big deal that you are.

Step 1: Ask yourself, “What’s the worst thing that could happen if I take this opportunity?”
Step 2: Share it with someone who truly knows your goals and aspirations.
Step 3: Test your reason against fear!

Here’s a glimpse of the episode...

[05:39] My friend and boss babe, Rachel Hollis, challenged me to speak at her RISE event. And get this, she wanted me to talk about my weight loss journey instead of online marketing! Here’s where it gets interesting, my friend, I wanted to pretend this opportunity was never presented to me. My team, however, had a very different idea
[12:50] Well, I ended up saying “yes.” And once I did, I felt all of the emotions, including a teeny bit of courage. Here’s what I did next, I felt into my courage so much so that it snuffed out all of my other emotions. The experience ended up being incredible and exactly what I needed to play a bigger game.
[15:39] Believe it or not, this was an opportunity that gave me direction and courage to step into my full potential. It was truly the evidence that I needed to confirm that I was capable of going big.
[16:27] Has there been an opportunity that you've been shying away from because it seems intimidating? Or because you don't feel you're ready? Here’s what I want you to do, I want you to open that door and explore that opportunity.
[19:46] Can you think of an opportunity right now that is just waiting for you to say “yes?” If you can't think of anything, be open-minded and watch for one. I have a sneaky feeling it will find you sooner than you think.
[20:29] When you land on the opportunity, try sitting with it. Ask yourself, “What's the worst that could happen. What's the best thing that could happen?” Allow yourself to dream big so that you can start playing a bigger game.

I hope you take the lessons from this episode and apply them to your life and business right away, so this can be the year that you step into your greatest potential!

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#312: Launch With A Tiny Audience with Stu McLaren

23 april 2020 | 49 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

What if I told you that there is a fast-track strategy that you can use to launch a digital course or a membership site. Would you be interested?

And here’s the cherry on top… you don’t have to have a big audience or list to make this approach successful.

I know. Crazy town, right? While it seems too good to be true, my guest today is going to prove that it can be done, and he has the exact steps to do it.

My guest is Stu McLaren, and it’s not his first time on the show. You might remember him from episode #260, where we spoke all about membership sites.

In this episode, Stu shares a mind-blowing strategy called the “Founding Members Strategy,” which allows you to successfully launch your product or service with a tiny audience.

He is going to tell you…

Exactly how to use this strategy.
How it will benefit you and your audience.
Five elements to make this strategy successful.
Real-life stories of how this has successfully played out in the lives of some of his students -- students whose audiences range from tiny to large.

Whether you’re just starting out or you’ve got your business down pat, you’re going to love his step-by-step strategy that you can start using right away.

We also chat about Stu’s phenomenal 3-part video workshop all about turning what you know, love, and do into a profitable membership.

You’re in luck because today Stu releases the first video where he talks about the “old” way of doing business versus the “new” way of doing business, which means recurring revenue and customers.

Click here to grab this eye-opening video and to get signed up for the 3-part video workshop!

This episode is brought to you by LinkedIn Marketing. If your goal is to target your customers where they’re engaging every day and when they’re ready to make a buying decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn. When you advertise on LinkedIn, you’re attracting potential customers and fostering relationships that often translate into high-quality leads, website traffic, and higher brand awareness. Go to LinkedIn Marketing to redeem a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

“I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.”

#311: 4 Steps To Identify Your Million Dollar Niche

16 april 2020 | 26 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

Raise your hand if you get tripped up defining your niche with full confidence. Well, my friend, you’re not alone.

I hear it all the time from entrepreneurs … “I feel stuck because I’m just not certain what my niche is!”

I’m here to tell you that this is about to become a thing of the past, and after you’re done with this episode, you’ll be feeling hyper clear about the niche you are serving.

In this episode, I walk you through a highly-effective four-step process for identifying your niche. (I even made you a freebie to make it easy to follow!)

Before I take you through this actionable, tangible step-by-step process, I have to address the elephant in the room.

Fear of actually picking a niche!

Whoa, talk about diving right in… am I right?!

I know that this fear is alive and well because I hear about it and see it all the time in my Online Marketing Made Easy Facebook community. The bummer is that for many entrepreneurs -- especially those just starting out -- that fear of picking one niche is enough to stay stuck in decision paralysis.

“Choosing the wrong niche is better than choosing no niche at all.” - James Wedmore

What’s most important for you to know is that you might pick the wrong niche right away, and that’s okay because it will at least get you moving forward -- and forward action means progress and clarity.

This four-step process is going to take a little elbow grease, so get ready to put pen to paper. But I promise you the work is going to be worth it, and the clarity you’ll gain will catapult you to the next level in your business.

In step 1, you’ll identify your main market.
In step 2, you’ll niche down and get really specific. (And trust me, the more specific, the better!)
In step 3, you’ll do some market research.
In step 4, you’ll create your Value Articulator Statement.

Say goodbye to niche confusion or feeling stuck. I want you to declare right here, right now, that you are going to pick a niche, even if it feels scary.

And because I know there is a lot of action steps in this episode, I’ve put together a little freebie that will take you through each step in detail. Grab your freebie here!

This episode is brought to you by Paleovalley, my family's go-to source for healthy, high-protein snacks. Paleovalley’s grass-fed and finished beef sticks are my family's favorite snacks to keep us healthy and full on the go. Head here to check out all of their high-quality, organic products and be sure to use the code Amy15 to get 15% off of your first order.

This episode is also brought to you by the Lead to Win podcast, a podcast by two of my favorite leadership experts, Michael Hyatt and Megan Hyatt Miller. Lead to Win helps you to minimize overwhelm and navigate the complexities of being a leader so you can win at work and succeed in your life. If you’re ready to cut through distractions and focus on your greatest priorities, check out Lead to Win today! Head here to subscribe and listen.

Rate & Review Online Marketing Made Easy:

If you're on Apple Podcasts, help me help more people by rating and reviewing my show. Reviews let others - just like you - find the actionable, step-by-step strategies to start the "online" journey...of making a business and life they love. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review.” My team and I - we read them all. Thank you!

BONUS: From Working At Home To Launching During A Crisis: Your Questions Answered (COVID-19 Series)

13 april 2020 | 48 min

Holy cow, there is A LOT of uncertainty right now. And we all have a lot of questions. First, you are not alone. Second, to continue to support you and your business during the coronavirus crisis, I’ve connected with the members of my free Online Marketing Made Easy Facebook group and I’ve asked them: “what questions do you have about navigating your business?”

My students gave me dozens of wonderful questions that I know will also help you. As you pivot to find the right way to move your online and small business forward during COVID-19, consider the questions I answer in this episode. They are:

I have yet to launch a course. Do you feel this is a good time to do so, or should I stay focused on list building and relationship building with weekly content?
I’ve been crafting and getting ready to share my business with the world, and then COVID-19 hit. Should I postpone launching my business and sharing it with others until we start to see some normalcy again?
I was going to live launch last week, with a second round starting this week. It’s highly possible that I have contracted COVID-19, so I’m not physically feeling up to going live on video, but I still want to launch. In this situation, is moving to evergreen okay?
I have a photography business and can not currently operate my business. I have postponed all sessions for the coming weeks and was nowhere near my goal of filling my easter sessions before COVID 19. What should I do now?
These days, it feels weird seeing an email or social media post that’s NOT mentioning the pandemic. How have you adapted your marketing and communication?
What are the best small business resources to lean on during this crisis?
Since I had to stop my one-on-one work, I’ve been doing free daily videos on Facebook to keep my audience engaged. It’s the first time I’ve offered online services, and I’ve been getting great feedback. How do I transition from offering free content to charging for my online services?
How in the world am I supposed to be able to focus on my business with my kids home, trying to support them in their school work, not to mention being the lunch lady, and having my husband home too? HELP!
I’m not sure how to help my target audience during this time. I teach interior design to brick and mortar shop owners, and many of my clients’ businesses are shut down right now. How do I adjust my message and my content to serve them when many of them are closed and worry about paying rent?

If you’re working from home and need a little extra guidance, I’ve got you covered. For more in-depth tips on work-from-home success, grab the free PDF resource that I’ve put together for you.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe in Apple Podcast

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#310: Take Your Brick & Mortar Business Online with Stacy Tuschl (COVID-19 Series)

9 april 2020 | 48 min

Are you a brick and mortar business owner finding yourself having to make quick decisions and shift your business online? Or, maybe you’re an online business already but wondering how you could create an online presence.

One thing is clear: you need to make a pivot.

I want you to know that I’m here to support you every step of the way. In doing so, I’ve brought on someone who is an expert at growing small businesses. Meet Stacy Tuschl -- not only is she a small business pro, she knows how to grow both brick and mortar and online businesses successfully.

Stacy has built a multi-million dollar company called, The Academy of Performing Arts, which offers dance and music classes. She also has an online business and program called, The Foot Traffic Formula, which helps small businesses around the world get more customers in the door, more profit in their pocket, and more happiness in their homes.

Stacy has so much valuable insight around navigating your business in turbulent times, and even more so, she has a unique angle from being a brick and mortar business owner, as well.

In this episode, we talk about:

What’s going on in the world of entrepreneurship.
How to focus on and prioritize what decisions need to be made in realtime.
A step-by-step approach for transitioning your business online quickly.
How to get creative and pivot your offers to serve your clients.
The future of brick and mortar businesses, the silver lining in this crisis, and a mindset shift towards abundance.

You’re going to find this episode eye-opening and inspiring.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

"I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy." <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

BONUS: Should I Sell Right Now? (COVID-19 Series)

8 april 2020 | 44 min

I’ve been hearing a lot of questions from online entrepreneurs lately due to our current crisis. Questions like...

Should I sell?
Should I deeply discount my products and offers?
Or, should I give my stuff away for free?

And I get it! We’re in a time of uncertainty… especially for entrepreneurs.

However, I full-heartedly believe it when I say, “yes,” you should absolutely be selling. And “no,” you should not discount or give your products away for free.

The world and the economy need you and your business more than ever. That’s why in this episode, I’m not only going to tell you why you should be selling right now but also 5 powerful ways to find the courage to do so.

I’ll even go as far as to say that you have a civic duty to sell and to show up online during this pandemic, as long as you show up with something of value that can serve others (which my guess is that you do!).

Here’s a peek at the 5 ways you can find the courage to sell right now:

Create something of value for free! Yes, I know I just said don’t give you stuff away for free, but there are some ways you can offer value for free and still sell with integrity.
Embrace the pivot, and holy heck has there been a lot of pivoting lately.
Be willing to make mistakes -- both professionally and personally.
Hold your launch revenue goals loosely, but your 2020 overall revenue goals tightly. 
Fiercely commit to coming out of this crisis stronger.

There are two things I want to leave you with…

I’ve rallied up a ton of free resources to support you as an online and small business owner during this time, be sure to utilize them. (Links at the bottom of this page!)
I want you to answer this question: What would you do in your online business if you were brave? The answer, my friend, is moving forward… and that’s my wish for you.

Also, if you’re working from home and need a little extra guidance, I’ve got you covered. For more in-depth tips on work-from-home success, grab the free PDF resource that I’ve put together for you.

I know you’re going to find so much value and inspiration in this episode.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe in Apple Podcast

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people (just like you) move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#309a: 5 Ways To Pivot Your Online Business In A Crisis (Covid-19 Series)

3 april 2020 | 38 min

I’m not going to beat around the bush, we are living in a crazy time, and things are moving fast.

As an entrepreneur, especially an online entrepreneur, you need to be moving quickly as well.

I’ve been in awe of my students as I watch them step up, shift, and serve their audience in valuable ways during this time of crisis. In this episode, I share five ways that my students have pivoted their business in light of the economy and uncertainty.

I feel that now, more than ever, showing up with something of high-value that will serve your audience is the very best thing that you can do.

In this episode, I’ll use these stories to debunk three beliefs that have been floating around…

Nobody is buying anything right now.
It’s inconsiderate to launch or sell something right now -- people will think I’m capitalizing on the crisis.
If you don’t have an online business or if you haven’t quite launched your business yet -- now is not the time.

These couldn’t be farther from the truth, and you’ll see that in the stories I share.

In this episode, you’ll hear about Hilary Krueger, who created an online offer, launched it in less than 48 hours, and had 200 people sign up in under five days.
You’ll learn how Jamie Sears generated around $3,000 in just a couple of days with her on-the-fly training.
After that, I’ll share a story with you about how Catherine Ryan Gregory adjusted her launch to accommodate the shifts in our economy.
You’ll learn how Carrie Lupoli created a website and a free training in just four hours, which has already served thousands of people and counting.
Lastly, I’ll share what Jamie Trull did to support her ideal customer avatar during this time of crisis and the fantastic response she received.
I’ll even talk about how to show up and pivot your message if you’re just starting out as an entrepreneur.

If you’re working from home and need a little extra guidance, I’ve got you covered. For more in-depth tips on work-from-home success, grab the free PDF resource that I’ve put together for you.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#309: Becoming A Vision-Driven Leader with Michael Hyatt

2 april 2020 | 49 min

Are you leading with a vision? Or are you wandering around with a half-baked idea of what you want your life and business to look like?

Whether you’re the former or the latter, today’s episode is going to give you even more clarity around your vision.

My guest, mentor, and friend, Michael Hyatt, is not only a best-selling author but also one of the most successful entrepreneurs I know.

His business was featured in Inc. 5000 as one of the fastest-growing private companies after experiencing 300 percent growth in just three years! Mind-blowing, right?

Michael has just released yet another phenomenal book called, “The Vision-Driven Leader,” and that’s what we’re talking about today.

In this episode, Michael offers practices and guidance for identifying your vision, why your vision is the essential ingredient for leadership and impact, how your vision varies from your mission statement, and so much more.

Here’s a look at what we talk about...

[05:27] Want to know the difference between businesses that survive and businesses that fail? Those that survive have a crystal clear vision.
[07:43] You might be wondering what exactly a vision is. Well, a vision is going to be a clear, inspiring, practical, attractive picture of your organization’s future, three to five years in the future.
[12:42] If you’re feeling like you’re struggling with clarity, the good news is that clarity grows over time. A great way to gain more business clarity is to write down what your vision is and where you want to go. Just start with something, and it will get more clear over time.
[15:28] Here are some wonderful journal prompts: What is your vision for the future of your team, and what kind of product you want to create? What kind of marketing are you going to have? What’s the future of your impact?
[17:07] When you read through what you write down for the future, do you get excited? It has to be inspirational. Michael has four different ideas for inspiration that might help identify where you are.
[20:39] A vision is a necessary but not sufficient condition of success — you also need to execute. Having an inspiring vision will help you create and adapt your strategy and say “yes” to the right things.
[25:15] Once you start to understand your vision, you want to create a link between your vision and your day to day tasks. Start with your vision script (which you can learn more about in the episode), which should inform your annual goals, quarterly goals, weekly objectives, and daily tasks.
[30:18] Don’t think you’ll set your vision once and call it good. Oh no! You’ll want to reconsider and tweak your vision at least once a year.
[38:54] Lastly, when it comes to your vision for your business, you will encounter resistance — it’s just part of being an entrepreneur. You must have tenacity, integrity, and courage to stay the course.

By the end of this episode, you’re going to be fired up about clarifying your vision -- a vision that inspires and grows your business.

You’re going to understand how to overcome obstacles when you encounter them. And, most importantly, you’re going to feel empowered and ready to share your vision with the world.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’

#308c: The Stimulus Package: How to Take Advantage of $350B Earmarked for Small Businesses (COVID-19 Series) with Casey Graham

31 mars 2020 | 49 min

Small businesses around the world are facing uncertainty, unemployment, and decisions they never thought possible. On top of that, they are having to learn and learn quickly about government relief solutions.

From one small business owner to another, I understand what it’s like to feel lost in the confusion.

Today’s show will break down, in layman's terms, the Stimulus Package for small businesses and how you can take advantage of it.

My guest, Casey Graham, CEO of Gravy, is going to help me do that. You’ve probably heard me talk about Gravy before -- they do our customer retention and failed payment recovery, which is so important, especially during times like these.

Casey has been in the online business world through two crises now and has a unique perspective and understanding of how to survive a crisis as a small business owner.

Here’s a little sneak peek of what we talked about in this episode:

Why online business and online learning is emerging as a giant leader right now, and why understanding the Stimulus Package is extremely important.
What The CARES Act is and what it means for small and online businesses.
Why the government is leaning on small business owners to help save America during this time.
Understanding if this bill is right for you, if you’re eligible, and how you can take advantage of it.
Everything you need to know about this bill top to bottom -- from loan amount to loan forgiveness to accessing this bill and everything in between.

Casey even has a value-packed website full of resources to support you and all small and online businesses right now. Head here to check it out!

I know you’re going to find this episode insightful and extremely helpful.

For further support, be sure to grab my freebie “How To Be Productive Working From Home During Uncertainty.”

A note: this episode is about the United States $2 trillion Stimulus bill passed in response to the coronavirus pandemic. This stimulus package is specific to our U.S. audience.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#308B: Grow Your Email List With Quizzes with Ryan Levesque

30 mars 2020 | 63 min

Rate & Review Online Marketing Made Easy:

If you're on Apple Podcasts, help me help more people by rating and reviewing my show. Reviews let others - just like you - find the actionable, step-by-step strategies to start the "online" journey...of making a business and life they love. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review.” My team and I - we read them all. Thank you!

Raise your hand if you love a good online quiz.

I sure do!

From finding out what celebrity you’re most like, to which jean fit is the most flattering for your body type, to identifying if you’re right for an online course or not, quizzes help you, as the consumer, make easier decisions without the overwhelm.

But… what do quizzes do for you as an entrepreneur? A whole lot!

Quizzes are a great way to grow and segment your email list, better understand your audience, and boost your sales by offering direct guidance for your customers.

My guest, Ryan Levesque, is a pro when it comes to using quizzes, and we got to sit down and chat all about how you can use them, no matter where you are in your business.

Ryan is the Inc. 500 CEO of The ASK Method® Company, an entrepreneur, and the #1 national best-selling author of the books Choose and Ask... which was named by Inc. as the #1 Marketing Book of the Year.

His work has been featured in the Wall Street Journal, USA Today, Forbes, Entrepreneur, on NBC News, and Fox and over 250,000 entrepreneurs subscribe to his email newsletter offering business advice.

He is also a co-founder and investor in bucket.io®, a leading quiz funnel software for entrepreneurs used by over 20M people each year.

Now, you might be thinking that quizzes are a little too advanced for you, but before you disregard this episode, I want to challenge you to stick with me. Why?

Because Ryan and I break down how quizzes can benefit you, even if you’re just starting out.

In fact, we talk about how quizzes can be especially beneficial to grow your email list and better understand your audience in the early stages of your business.

No matter where you are as an entrepreneur, you’re going to walk away from today’s episode with a clear understanding of what it looks like to create a quiz and how quizzes can help you to grow your business.

#308a: Everything You Need to Know About Working From Home (But Were Too Afraid To Ask!) with Rachel Hollis (COVID-19 Series)

28 mars 2020 | 58 min

Like many these days, you might be finding yourself working virtually -- and whether this is new to you or not, there are some simple strategies you can implement to stay focused, on track, and moving forward as an entrepreneur.

My dear friend, Rachel Hollis, originally interviewed me for her podcast RISE, and because we both want this episode to reach as many entrepreneurs and individuals affected by the recent crisis as possible, we are releasing it on the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast as well.

I hope with all my heart that you find this episode helpful, insightful, and inspiring.

Now, why did Rachel come to me looking for guidance on how to run a virtual team and work from home without losing focus?

Probably because I’ve been building a virtual team for almost 11 years, which means I’ve got a couple tricks up my sleeve for being successful in the online workspace.

Here’s a preview of what we talked about...

How to set expectations and what tools are best for staying on track.
The importance of sticking to a task and how to make sure your team does the same.
How to show up for your team and lead in turbulent times.
How to minimize context switching -- trust me when I say that this one is a lifesaver!
Tips for staying focused.
Strategies for maintaining healthy work habits and setting up your workspace.
The importance of over-communication to your team and collaborators.

This episode is courtesy of our guest, Rachel Hollis, and the RISE podcast (where it first appeared). To receive more tangible and tactical tools from New York Times Best-Selling author, Rachel Hollis, check out RISE.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#308: Courage: Your Gateway Drug To Confidence with Jennifer Allwood

26 mars 2020 | 47 min

#307B: The Lies Holding You Back

24 mars 2020 | 62 min

You’re talented.
You deserve the best.
You can build a wildly successful business.
You’re organized, intelligent, and capable of creating the life of your dreams -- the life you deserve.

How do you feel when I say those things? Do you feel inspired and fired up?

Or, are you shaking your head thinking, “Amy, you’re so full of it!”

My dear friend, I certainly hope you’re shaking your head, “YES!” and you feel inspired. However, I know what it can be like to believe deflating lies… especially as an entrepreneur.

My guest today, Dave Hollis, knows what it’s like to believe those lies, as well.

Dave is the COO of the media company and inspirational powerhouse, Hollis Company, which he runs with his wife and my close friend, Rachel Hollis.

He’s also just released his first book, “Get Out Of Your Own Way,” which is simply phenomenal.

Today, Dave and I talk about the thoughts that tend to hold you back from your true potential and how to overcome old thought patterns that aren’t in your best interest.

We also talk about the “shoulds” that are hindering your growth, your solution for getting unstuck, and so much more.

Here’s a preview of our interview...

[02:58] My good friend, Dave Hollis -- the COO of Hollis Company and husband to Rachel Hollis -- has just released his new book, Get Out of Your Own Way: A Skeptic’s Guide to Growth and Fulfillment. Help celebrate him with me!
[06:52] If you're struggling, you must find a community to connect with about what’s going on. That’s exactly what this book did for Dave. It allowed him to be fully transparent -- about the good and the bad.
[10:17] Dave was inspired by his wife's growth, and while he was a skeptic at first, he eventually decided that personal development was for him. In his book, he talks about how he got out of his own way so that others can use his strategies to do the same. And let me tell you, he knocked it out of the ballpark!
[18:04] If you are on a path of personal development and doing big things, and your significant other isn't on board with it, don't push them. Instead, let them see the light of your journey and the results that it produces. Let their curiosity allow them to transform their lives.
[20:07] Dave talks about the identity frame that we pick up from those around us as we are growing up. For example, "women entrepreneurs can’t have ambitions and be a good mom" is a common one. This couldn’t be further from the truth. You must make the decision about whose opinion you will believe and carry with you.
[26:27] For 14 years, Dave was the primary breadwinner but when Rachel’s book sold 3 million copies and the financial contribution started to shift in their relationship, Dave was worried. He opens up about an unconscious fear around if Rachel would still want him if he was no longer the main source of financial support.
[35:57] Here’s the good news, it's never too late to make a pivot, transform yourself, or change direction. You must focus on what’s best for you and not what others are thinking of you -- because the truth is that they just aren't! #sorrytobreakittoyou
[41:13] Being stuck is being in a place where you aren't growing or don't have the opportunity to fail. Here’s what Dave proposes: expose yourself to opportunities to fail and push outside of your comfort zone on a regular basis.
[45:56] Have unbelievable clarity about who you want to be. Once you know what you stand for, then you know the role you have to play in your life. Connect to a why that is bigger than the unpredictability of life. What do you believe in? Who are you? What's your leverage?

#307A: 5 Ways to Navigate Your Business Through Crisis (COVID-19 Series)

21 mars 2020 | 65 min

With COVID-19, things are changing by the second. That's why I want to support you -- my community -- and show you what it looks like to move forward even when you’re feeling uncertain.

This episode is real and raw...it's messy, clunky at times, and I share what I’ve experienced so that you may learn some of the things about navigating a business with the world changing so rapidly.

So, I've put together five things that you can do to navigate your business through the Coronavirus crisis. You’ll find two mindset tools and three strategies to implement right away.

And listen, I know you’re probably feeling some confusion right now. Whether you have an online business, a digital course, plans to launch, or you’re just starting out...Don't. Worry. I’m going to give you the guidance you need to keep moving forward.

Here’s the deal, you can’t ignore what’s going on in the world. In fact, I firmly believe that you have to talk about this no matter where you are on your entrepreneurial journey.

To further help you, I’ve put together a freebie called “How To Be Productive Working From Home During Uncertainty.” Be sure you grab that, too.

Here’s a snapshot of the five ways to navigate your business through a crisis that I talk about in this episode:

#1: Get into action. Feel the feelings but also get into action to keep your mindset abundant and focused. You’re an entrepreneur, which means you’re resilient.
#2: Commit to a morning routine and end of the day shut down. It’s easy to get distracted with the news, your family at home, and just plain old emotions, but creating rituals will keep you focused on the needle movers in your business. (More guidance on this in the freebie!)
#3: Clarify your crisis messaging. Get clear on what you’re going to say to your audience during this time and how you’re going to position yourself and your business -- even if you have a small audience.
#4: Show up and offer something valuable and free that will resonate, support, and inspire. Tune in to hear how we did this.
#5: You’re probably wondering, “Amy, I don’t feel I should be selling right now!” My answer to you is… if you stop selling, our economy will be crushed. You are not opportunistic if you’re selling in our current climate -- as long as you offer a solution to help serve your audience. Take the time to reevaluate your offers to make sure they align with what people need in this time of uncertainty and be willing to pivot if needed.

People have more needs today than they did a week ago. Remember that you are a master problem solver. Now is the time to experiment. Try new things and never give up.

Your audience is not wanting or looking for perfection. Your audience is looking for support, direction, and leadership.

Show up for them. Show up for your community, your audience, and your paying customers.

I hope you find this episode is just what you need to hear as we are navigating through this time of chaos, uncertainty, and change. I hope you find the light and gratitude in any way possible. And above all, I hope you and your family are safe and healthy.

Rate, Review, & Subscribe on Apple Podcasts

‘I love Amy and Online Marketing Made Easy.’ <-- If that sounds like you, please consider rating and reviewing my show! This helps me support more people -- just like you -- move toward the online life and business that they desire. Click here, scroll to the bottom, tap to rate with five stars, and select “Write a Review.” Then be sure to let me know what you loved most about the episode!

Also, if you haven’t done so already, subscribe to the podcast. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the feed and, if you’re not subscribed, there’s a good chance you’ll miss out. Subscribe now!

#307: 4 Best Entrepreneurial Tools For Starting A Business (Part 2)

19 mars 2020 | 38 min

Welcome back to Part 2 of this episode, where you’re going to learn about my favorite tools for communication, customer service, and a couple of bonus tools that I adore.

If you missed Part 1, where I went over my top tools for email marketing, list building, social media, and project management, be sure to head back and check out that episode right after this one.

The tools I mention in today’s episode have helped me not only scale my business but also give me back the time and energy to build the business of my dreams… a business that was considered a small business not that long ago.

Since I mentioned a lot of tools between Part 1 and Part 2 of this episode, I’m going to recommend that you focus on the parts of your business that you’re looking to invest in right now.

Only focus on one or two tools and add on little by little as you grow.

To make this really easy for you, I’ve put together a free PDF with all the tools that I’ve mentioned in Part 1 and Part 2 of this episode. Be sure to snag that freebie right here!

Here’s a preview of today’s episode...

[04:01] Do you have a team or work with contractors? If so, you have to check out Slack! It’s my favorite real-time communication tool -- way better than email.
[09:52] When it comes to customer support, Help Scout has transformed our approach and organization! It has simplified taking care of our customers and making sure they have what they need.
[12:42] Kajabi is the Mac Daddy of all tools. Seriously! Say goodbye to having to be tech-savvy because Kajabi has everything in one place. From your digital course platform to your sales page, opt-in page, and email service provider… Kajabi has you covered!
[19:39] I kind of wish I would have thought of this bonus tool! Searchie allows you to search for content inside of videos or audio. I know, so good, right? You can search for keywords in any video or audio content you have. It’s just that simple! Searchie is definitely for those more advanced entrepreneurs.
[24:02] And although it isn’t an online tool, my absolute favorite tool is the Full Focus Planner. This is a physical planner, which I talk about all the time, helps to keep me organized, motivated, and clear on the most important daily and quarterly goals I have for myself and my business.

Get excited for next week's episode where I'm talking about a few more tools I couldn't live without. See you there!

#306: 4 Best Entrepreneurial Tools For Starting A Business (Part 1)

12 mars 2020 | 30 min

“Technology is nothing. What's important is that you have a faith in people, that they're basically good and smart, and if you give them tools, they'll do wonderful things with them.”

I love this quote from Steve Jobs. Why? Because I know that tools allow me to scale my business and create growth and impact.

But here’s the thing… not all tools are made the same.

When I was starting out, I had no idea which tools would be worth my financial and time investment and which ones would not. Let’s just say, I’ve learned a lot about what tools will be valuable in creating a successful business throughout the years.

And now, I’m offering you my insight into what tools you should consider using to help your business grow, scale, and succeed!

I decided to break this episode into two parts because there was so much value in it.

So, in this episode -- Part 1 -- you’ll learn about my favorite tools for…

email marketing and list building
social media
project management

In Part 2 of this episode, you’ll learn about the tools we use in my business for communication and customer service. Along with some bonus tools that I love and can’t help but share.

Here’s a sneak peek of how today’s episode goes...

[07:11] ConvertKit is my go-to when it comes to a basic, simple email service provider -- especially for new entrepreneurs. What I love about it is that it allows you to collect emails and names in a legitimate way, and they have top-notch customer service!
[09:14] You’ve heard me talk about freebies and lead magnets a million times before, LeadPages allows you to create simple opt-in pages so you can start getting email addresses and traction from those assets. Plus, it integrates with ConvertKit and gives you beautifully designed opt-in pages, so you can email your list on a regular basis. Can you say win-win?
[14:28] Want to know my favorite tool for social media? Look no further! Social Curator is my answer. They provide you with stunning images and caption prompts so you can focus less on social media and more on the important things in your business.
[19:19] When it comes to project management and organization, Asana is the absolute best! In fact, I wish I would have used a project management tool like Asana from the very beginning. Whether it’s just you, you and a contractor or two, or an entire team, setting your business up in Asana will keep you organized and moving forward!

Get excited for next week's episode where I'm talking about a few more tools I couldn't live without. See you there!

#305b: One of the Best Ways To Boost Sales

9 mars 2020 | 49 min

You guys know I’m a big fan of creating urgency for your courses using deadlines. In fact, I’m kind of a stickler about.

Well, guess what? I’ve found someone equally as excited about creating urgency and setting deadlines. So, naturally, I had to invite him onto the podcast.

His name is Jack Born and he’s a pro when it comes to this topic. He’s going to tell you why you should be using deadlines for your customers… and how you can go about it the right way.

Jack is the founder of Deadline Funnel, not to mention several other software platforms, which help entrepreneurs, just like you, boost sales and automate their businesses.

There are a lot of misconceptions around deadlines within a business…

Will they help you sell more? Will they hinder your audience from buying?

These are things you have to know as an entrepreneur with an online product, especially if you do a live launch like I do with my Digital Course Academy program.

Listen to this episode with an open mind because you’re going to be blown away by some of the tidbits and strategies Jack gives you that you can use within your business to boost those sales.

And honestly, if you’re just starting out or trying to gain some insight into how to launch your business, this episode is going to help you build the confidence around creating that urgency without feeling pushy.

Here’s a look at what we talked about...

[06:08] My guest today, Jack has been a student of the power of persuasion and knows urgency is a strong motivator.
[13:07] It’s essential that what you say in your marketing is genuine and true to promote credibility.
[16:51] Deadlines boost sales. Period! They also help those people who are on the fence make a decision and take action because, let's be honest, we all need a little push when it comes to big decisions.
[19:52] Find out Jack’s tools for creating a next-level offer that isn’t pushy.
[32:22] Want to know the hard truth? By not using deadlines, you are leaving money on the table and helping less potential customers. Crazy when you look at it that way, right?
[37:14] Oh, and my favorite part of this interview was at the very end when Jack gives tangible action items for setting up an automated launch with urgency the right way.

#305: Why Overnight Success Is A Myth

5 mars 2020 | 47 min

Behind every successful story… there is commitment, determination, and resilience.

So, I’m just going to be bold and say that I think overnight success is a myth.

And… if I may take it one step further… I’d even go as far as to say that there is so much benefit to not experiencing overnight success.

In this episode, we talk about some of my favorite examples of people who might look like overnight successes from the outside, but in all actuality are not.

Plus, I’ll share the benefits of slow, consistent growth, because I’ve experienced first hand how beneficial this can be.

And, in true Online Marketing Made Easy fashion, I’ve got a little three-step process for eliminating that unconscious desire for overnight success.

Oh, and I’d be lying if I said I didn’t get a little worked up and passionate about this topic. You’ll know what I mean when you listen!

Here’s a glimpse of what you’ll hear…

[08:16] Ever heard of a Dyson vacuum? Yeah, the owner, James Dyson had 5,127 failed vacuum prototypes over a 15-year span before he became a success. Many times, we don’t know the whole story of failure, struggle, and success.
[12:09] Here’s a fun fact, Steven Spielberg was rejected from the University of Southern California three times before he attended another school that he dropped out of to direct some of our favorite movies?
[12:45] Can you guess how many times JK Rowling’s book, Harry Potter was rejected before being picked up? Twelve times — and she didn’t give up!
[13:55] Did you know that Lady Gaga started honing her voice at the age of 4? Tune in to hear her inspirational story!
[14:50] Queen O, Oprah, was fired from a job as a TV reporter because she was told she wasn't fit for television. Crazy, right? She didn’t let that stop her. Instead, she picked herself up and kept moving forward.
[17:43] My mentor and friend, Marie Forleo held multiple jobs and was a bartender while building her business. Just like Marie, those early parts of building your business are important for building character.
[20:33] Being in it for the long haul helps you identify who you are and what you stand for. Find out what millionaire entrepreneur, Laura Belgray has to say about taking years to hit the success she experiences today.
[23:54] Growing your business steadily and slowly allows you to be more intentional, and intentionality gives you the time and space to clarify your business along the way.
[26:05] Let’s take a play from Jaime Kern Lima from IT Cosmetics playbook and make it a priority to keep our faith bigger than our fear. Are you onboard?
[30:16] Tune in to find out my 3-step process for eliminating that unconscious desire for overnight success.
[34:10] Once you've reached the success that you're after, I challenge you to reassess and then create a new definition of success. I guarantee that your definition of success will evolve over time.

Do you ever have those days where you just need an extra boost of courage? Maybe a hug, maybe a little self-love, grace, and patience?

Be sure to grab the freebie I created to remind you that you're on the right path and if you keep at it and you commit to your dream, you too can have the same success. It's a fill-in-the-blank letter to yourself to read on those days when you need it most. You can get it right here.

#304: Marie Forleo's Best Business Tips For Success

27 februari 2020 | 42 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

Let me take you back in time when I was just starting out.

This was before YouTube and definitely before podcasts were a thing. It was a time where if you wanted to become an entrepreneur… you pretty much had to figure it out on your own.

(Thank goodness we’re out of those dark ages!)

I remember wishing I could have a mentor or some insight into starting a business. You know, what works and what doesn’t.

I eventually connected with a woman who would become my mentor. A woman who we all know and love today as Marie Forleo.

Marie was named by Oprah as a thought leader for the next generation. She’s the star of the award-winning show MarieTV, with over 52 million views, and host of The Marie Forleo Podcast, with more than eleven million downloads.

She gave me so many tips and tools for starting, building, and growing my business. I’m forever grateful!

If you’ve been an Online Marketing Made Easy podcast fan for some time now, you know that Marie has been a guest on my show many times.

Every time I interview her, she brings so much insight and value. I thought it was high time I pulled some of her best tips and tools for starting a business and rolled them into one episode.

Here’s why…

I want you to have all the knowledge, support, and tools you need to take your dream of creating a business and make it a reality.

I know how intimidating it can be… trust me! I’ve been there. And so my goal is to give you what you need to make starting a business simple and seamless.

So, here are some of my favorite tips from my mentor, and multi-million dollar entrepreneur, Marie Forleo

She’s taught entrepreneurs, artists, and multi-passionate go-getters from all walks of life how to dream big and back it up with daily action to create results, and now, she’s sharing her secrets with you!

Today is your last chance to change your future and the success of your business in 2020 with B-School! This is the program that not only changed my business but changed my life! If you're serious about creating a business and life you love, B-School is your answer. Today is also the last day you can receive all of my B-School freebies!

Plus, I just added a special bonus! When you enroll in B-School using my affiliate link, not only will you get my B-School Bonus Experience, but you will ALSO get access to my B-School CliffsNotes Audio Collection!

This B-School CliffsNotes Audio Collection is truly a personal experience where I take you through each module, week by week and help you identify where to focus your attention and time.

In a nutshell, it's practical advice, delivered via short audio segments, from someone who went through B-School herself (yours truly!), and knows how to help you get the most from it.

You’ll get the inside scoop on what topics you need to pay *special attention* to, and I’ll also raise the red flag on potential landmines and rabbit holes that might throw other students off.

This is always my most talked about bonus, so you are in for a treat! Click here to change your life with B-School!

#303: The One Episode I Didn't Want to Record

20 februari 2020 | 25 min

The title says it all.

This is an episode, I definitely didn’t want to record… at first! But then I got to thinking, and I knew that sharing this experience with you, and being vulnerable was only going to help and benefit you and your business in the long run.

Here’s what happened. I got an email from a student who was disappointed in my newest product and made sure I knew that she was not impressed.

And you know what, it hurt. It really hurt.

But after I took a step back, I realized that there are five things that I need to commit to in order to move my business forward, stand up for what I believe in, and block out those who don’t agree with me.

Here’s a snapshot of those five things…

Those who have achieved more than me will never judge me for wanting more. Sometimes things are going to get tough -- that’s just the nature of being an entrepreneur. So, I must commit to having thicker skin. I create my own thoughts and no one can hurt me. I’m in charge of what I think and feel… period. I’ll never let an individual’s opinion dictate how I feel or how I do business. I am here to stay.

This episode was tough for me, so I want to thank you for allowing me to share my heart.

Here’s a breakdown of the episode…

[02:50] As entrepreneurs, we’ll always have people on the internet who disagree with our life or business goals — we have to ignore them. However, it’s a little different when you hear negative feedback from a student, and that’s exactly what happened to me.
[03:37] During my recent membership site launch, a past student wrote in to share her opinion of what I was doing and, let’s just say, it wasn’t very positive.
[05:39] Receiving something like this from a student of mine stung. In the moment, I recorded a response to her to let her know why I created my newest product and why I believe in it so deeply.
[11:59] It’s important to remember that someone who has achieved more than you will never judge you for wanting more.
[14:20] Sometimes things are going to get rocky and feel really uncomfortable. You've got to have thicker skin!
[15:19] Because you create your own thoughts and feelings, no one can hurt you. Always keep in mind that you are in charge of what I think and what you feel.
[17:25] At the end of the day, no matter who disagrees with what I’m doing, I am here to stay! Tell yourself that during hard times when building your online business.

#302B: Your VIP Backstage Pass To The Best Entrepreneurial Advice

17 februari 2020 | 21 min

What if I gave you a backstage pass to my annual event, The Entrepreneur Experience?

Well, in this episode, that’s exactly what we’re going to do!

In October 2019, Rachel Hollis, Stu McLaren, Jasmine Star, and Gina Gomez joined me in San Diego, along with over 600 entrepreneurs from every walk of life, for this amazing event.

These all-star speakers brought their a-game and shared some pretty amazing entrepreneurial advice. Advice that was so good, I couldn’t just keep it to myself!

In this episode, I’m giving you a little sneak peek of what The Entrepreneur Experience 2019 was all about and the phenomenal business advice that the attendees gained while they were there.

First, you’ll hear from Rachel Hollis. She gets real (imagine that) and gives you some tough love. She talks about competition and an excuse that might be holding you back.

After that, you’ll hear from Stu McLaren. He talks all about building trust to attract your ideal customer and taking a stand for what you believe in.

My girl, Jasmine Star, is up next and she gives some practical social media advice. After all, she is the queen of social media.

She also gives her take on third party posting apps -- I know this is a question every entrepreneur has!

And then I have Gina Gomez coming in with a secret to creating happy customers and interactions.

[03:53] Rachel Hollis says, "Don't compare your life to someone's curated social media life. We don't have time to waste. Every second we are looking outside ourselves to find the answer, we are wasting time."
[08:04] Stu admits that he struggled with the guilt of making too much money but the truth is that money allows you to stand for what you believe in and make an impact! [12:52] Jasmine Star gives her tried and tested experience with third-party posting apps and why you should reconsider using them to organically reach your audience. [14:30] Gina says, "Treat everyone you work with as if they are your dream clients. Imagine how implementing this in your business would impact your experience, business, and industry."

#302: From Lacking Confidence To Multi-Millions with Lisa Bilyeu

13 februari 2020 | 66 min

One of the biggest excuses I hear from people wanting to start a business is that they feel they have the confidence they need to take their dreams and ideas and make them successful.

My guest in this episode, Lisa Bilyeu, is living proof that it doesn’t matter what skill set or level of experience you have. What does matter is that you’re persistent and committed to creating a life that fulfills you and making your dreams your reality.

Lisa is the co-founder of Quest Nutrition, and without any prior entrepreneurial experience, she helped grow the company by 57 thousand percent -- that’s 82.6 million dollars in revenue -- in just three years.

Lisa and her husband, Tom Bilyeu, have gone on to sell Quest Nutrition, a protein bar company, and have built a successful media company called, Impact Theory and Women of Impact.

What I love about this interview is that Lisa and I dive into it all. We talk about figuring things out as you go (which I think we can all relate to), mindset shifts, challenges, actionable items to grow your business (yes, please!), shifting your perspective as a female entrepreneur, and even relationships.

If you’re feeling like you don’t have enough experience to create a successful business or to become an entrepreneur, this episode is a must-listen!

Here’s a sneak peek of our conversation…

[01:43] Could you imagine growing your company by 57,000% in just three years or $82.6 million in revenue? Lisa Bilyeu the co-founder of Quest Nutrition and Impact Theory did just that.
[11:26] Lisa gives a fabulous entrepreneurial tip... model your life as successful people model theirs. Find out how her and her husband did this until they started Quest Nutrition.
[24:18] Lisa has the best mindset. She reminds herself that even if she starts a project from zero, as long as she could figure it out she would be okay.
[28:21] "Saying I don't know is an excuse." She gives the hard truth that there is someone out there doing what you want to do.
[36:18] Lisa and her husband shifted into a new business to make an impact on the lives of others.

This episode is brought to you by Gravy, the company I trust to contact my customers within hours of a failed payment, capturing the updated billing information, and saving the customer my team and I worked so hard to acquire. If your revenue is currently at $250,000 or more a year and you know you’re losing money due to failed payments each month, I encourage you to check out Gravy. Click here to see how they can be an extension of your customer service and save you money.

#301: Start Before You're Ready With Marie Forleo

6 februari 2020 | 57 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

Did you know that the number one regret people have during their last days is that they didn’t have the courage to follow their dreams and live a life that aligned with their deepest desires?

In her book, The Top Five Regrets Of The Dying, Bronnie Ware says…

“This was the most common regret of all. When people realize that their life is almost over and look back clearly on it, it is easy to see how many dreams have gone unfulfilled. Most people had not honored even a half of their dreams and had to die knowing that it was due to choices they had made, or not made.”

Did you just get chills? I did.

So my question for you is this… how are you going to make sure that you don’t experience the same regret?

How are you going to conjure up the courage to follow your dreams and live a life that you love?

A life on purpose. A life that fulfills you.

My guest and dear friend, Marie Forleo has a simple practice to help you minimize regret and step into the confidence of taking action towards your dreams -- towards your heart’s truest desires.

Marie’s been a guest on the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast many times before. And if you don’t know who she is, she’s been named the thought-leader of the next generation by Oprah herself. She’s a New York Times bestselling author, creator of one of the most popular training programs on the planet, B-School, and the creative force behind her award-winning show, MarieTV.

In this episode, we’re talking about a powerful practice that she calls the “Ten-Year Test,” why you should always start before you’re ready, and how to create momentum towards your dreams.

We’ll also talk about Marie’s free online business building workshop that she just released in which she’ll teach you The 6 Pillars of Building an Online Business. Marie has a tremendous gift for breaking things down to simple and understandable steps, so you do not want to miss this!

I look forward to it all year. You’re going to love it!

DON’T MISS THIS… The first video in Marie’s workshop series goes live today. Marie will share a simple 6 step roadmap to help you launch and grow your business online. You can find it at AmyPorterfield.com/Marie or click on the image below. Don’t wait, because the series will only be available for a limited time.

This episode is brought to you by LinkedIn, one of my favorite platforms to market on to reach my ideal customers. LinkedIn is excellent for businesses of all sizes and especially helpful for small businesses who are just getting started and are looking to drive traffic and engagement. At the end of the day, LinkedIn ads are helping smaller businesses get bigger results… and that’s why I love it. Right now, LinkedIn is offering my listeners a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit to launch your very first campaign. Click here to grab your ad credit!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#300: Our Top 8 Business and Online Marketing Strategies to Celebrate Our 300th Episode

30 januari 2020 | 40 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

Cue the confetti! We are celebrating our 300th episode, and I can hardly believe it. What a wild, fun, and amazing ride! Thank you for being part of this journey with me.

It’s because of you that we are here at episode 300.

We wanted to do something extra special for this episode -- something a little different. So, we picked some of our favorite segments from our top episodes and wrapped them up all into one like a little gift. (A gift from me to you!)

Speaking of gifts… we have a giveaway

That means that this episode is plump full of some of our very best business and online marketing tidbits handpicked from our impressive (if I may say so myself) 300 episode line-up.

Some of these clips are interviews, some are from solo episodes from yours truly, and all of them are extremely insightful. I cannot wait for you to hear them!

From Marie Forleo to Jennifer Allwood to guidance from my personal experience, you’re in for a treat (and going to want to take notes!) Here’s a glimpse of what’s in this power-packed episode…

Tip #1: Showing Your Scars. I talk about how being vulnerable and real can help you get noticed whether you’re starting out or a veteran in your industry.

Tip #2: Use a Facebook group to build relationships. Caitlin Bacher shares her knowledge and experience warming up cold leads with a value-packed Facebook group.

Tip #3: Utilize a live series instead of a webinar. What?! I know, right? Not what you’d expect from me. Listen to find out when and why a live series might be a perfect fit for you and your business.

Tip #4: Get crystal clear on your Ideal Customer Avatar. I’m at it with my girl, Gina Onativia. She breaks down the importance of having a clear understanding of your ICA and gives you specific examples of how your ICA will help you with two very important areas when creating your digital course.

Tip #5: Get creative with your free, valuable content. Have you been stuck on what to create for your freebie? Look no further! This clip gives you some of my favorite examples of what to do for your freebie or lead magnet, and a few questions to ask yourself to get hyper clear on what you’re going to create.

Tip #6: Utilize various streams of income. I loved this episode! Jennifer Allwood drops a few knowledge bombs about when and how to create multiple streams of income to boost your revenue and create passive income.

Tip #7: Attract leads with a free video or audio training. In this solo clip, I dive into why having a video or audio training for your lead magnet is one of the best ways to connect with your audience on a personal level.

Tip #8: Build your email list like your life depends on it! I’m back at it with Queen Marie Forleo. We get into why you should tread cautiously when building your business via social media and what you should do instead to ensure you keep your audience close to you and to strengthen your communication skills.

Okay, I know that was a lot.

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#299: Say Goodbye to Imposter Syndrome and Skyrocket Your Business Success

23 januari 2020 | 46 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

What if I told you that I’m actually not a fan of this topic. Or, at least I thought I wasn’t… until I recorded this episode. (Yes, it’s that good!)

In fact, I might even stretch it to say that this is one of the best episodes I’ve ever done. (You’re going to love it!)

I know that you’re either struggling with imposter syndrome or you have in the past. How do I know this? Because I’ve dealt with it, and I feel it starting to creep in from time to time. Oh, and most of my successful entrepreneurial friends have experienced it too.

The good news is that I have powerful tools (that I’ve personally used many times) to help you overcome imposter syndrome so this can be your most successful year yet -- personally and professionally.

Want to know what they are? Well, first of all, let’s talk about what imposter syndrome is.

Dr. Amy Cuddy, who is a social psychologist, New York Times bestselling author, and a Harvard lecturer who focuses on the psychology of leadership and influence, says that imposter syndrome can be defined as “a collection of feelings of inadequacy that persist despite evident success.”

Now, let’s take a peek at five proven actions for giving imposter syndrome the boot…

Get out of your head and into your heart. Find out how one of my students, Natalie MacLean, let her heart lead her to a $30,000 launch.
Take action! I give you three specific ways to transform the energy of imposter syndrome into action so you can attract new clients and, in turn, boost your revenue.
Stay in your lane! You can do this two ways: stop chasing shiny objects and stop comparing yourself to others.
Embrace competition and acknowledge that there is enough room for everyone. (Because there is, and amazing things can happen when you do this!)
Acknowledge your credibility and success. Find out how to do this in the episode.

Because this is a topic almost every entrepreneur can relate to, I want you to head to our private Facebook community and share what actions you’re taking to overcome imposter syndrome.

And, while you’re at it, let me know what you thought of this episode.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Q & A: Business Tips & Tools With Amy

20 januari 2020 | 39 min

Did you hear the news?

I’ve started taking business questions directly from my audience! People just like you. I’ve taken some of the best questions from my Online Marketing Made Easy Facebook community and answered them right here on this bonus episode.

Now, you’re probably wondering how the heck you can be part of this amazing opportunity.

Head over to our private Facebook community to join, drop a question in the discussion and tag #askamy, and we’ll add it to our list of questions.

I’m going to be recording these Q & A bonus episodes from time to time, and while I hope to get to as many questions as possible, I can’t promise I will get to every one. I’ll certainly do my best!

Head over to our Facebook community to get your questions on the list.

Let’s dive into the Q & A. I have a feeling you might have some of the same questions!

April MacLean asks about knowing what to say and when to her audience.
Maggie Gelin is wondering why her students would want to work with her when they can get the same information for free on the world wide web.
Kylie Chapman wants to know how to create a visually cohesive brand on a budget.
Jill Davidian is looking for guidance around a first hire, and if she should consider a VA, a team, or an Online Business Manager.
Carole Stroud wants a behind-the-scenes peek at my podcast and wants to know if I use bullet points or a prompter.
Gee Sus Emanuel Reyes is looking for a bit of advice around the best email platform to invest in (if any) as his email list grows.

Here are some of the goodies from this episode...

[02:19] Believe it or not, when it comes to content, you must shift your mindset! Make sure you're leaving room for experimenting and trying new things. Enjoy the journey, chunk everything down, and take one thing at a time.
[08:33] You're going to have different types of Ideal Customer Avatars... and that's okay! Make sure you're creating different messaging for each ICA.
[13:43] Don't overthink this. It's important to have a cohesive brand, but the content is definitely the most important part. Having a brand that you feel good about does help boost your confidence. Here are my three favorite resources to use for clarifying your brand.
[20:18] What I've found is that clarity comes from getting into motion. Commit to creating a weekly podcast, video show, or Facebook Live. This will help you find your audience and understand how your business and your ICA will come together.
[24:46] The answer is both! I use a teleprompter for certain things and go off-the-cuff for other things. Listen to find out!
[27:52] Ready for your life to change? Okay, flip the script! Change "I'm overwhelmed" to "I'm learning." Convert Kit is the platform I suggest in order to avoid frustration and to ease the learning process.

Now, be sure to head to our Online Marketing Made Easy Facebook community to ask your #askamy questions! I can’t wait to hear them.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#298: Releasing Control, Celebrating Your Successes, & Tossing Your To-Do List With Megan Hyatt Miller

16 januari 2020 | 49 min

What if I told you that the best way to accomplish your goals or dreams is to let go and be flexible with your strategy.

I know that at first glance this seems crazy, but stick with me. My brilliant guest, Megan Hyatt Miller, the Chief Operating Officer at Michael Hyatt & Company and the creator of the Bold line of the Full Focus Planner, has a sound approach to achieving your dreams without the pressure of controlling every single step.

Now, you know me, and you know that this approach makes me squirm a bit (Hi, my name is Amy, and I’m type A!) but once Megan gave me a little more context around this idea, I started to understand how this approach can actually be extremely effective -- especially for entrepreneurs.

Here’s a sneak peek of what Megan and I talked about…

A strategy for getting crystal clear on your goals (clearer than you’ve ever been -- trust me!).
How to find a balance between trusting the process and being flexible with your strategy, versus being too lax and never accomplishing anything. (Nobody wants that!)
How to get rid of your mile-long to-do list and identify your daily “Big 3” which will set you up to move you closer to your goal every single day. (Say goodbye to feeling defeated by your laundry list of tasks at the end of the day.)
Why it’s necessary to slow down and celebrate your accomplishments… big or small.

I know you’re going to absolutely love this interview as much as I did.

Here’s what to do next, check out the episode, subscribe to the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast, and then head to our private Facebook community to your Daily Big 3 for today!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. And, your review might even make it onto an episode (how fun!) so be sure to leave a review and listen for it in my upcoming listener spotlights. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#297: Grow Your Business & Revenue: 6 MUST DO Action Items to Make Magic Between Launches

9 januari 2020 | 62 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

Raise your hand if you’re not totally sure what to do between your launches. I totally get it. I was the same way for the first few years of my business.

The good news is that you can let out a big sigh of relief because I’ve put together the six most important things you should be doing between your launches.

Here’s a recap of what I talk about in this episode, with specific examples.

Number 1, recharge, recharge, and recharge some more! Please don’t skip this one! It is so important for not only your health... but the health of your business (and your relationships) that you take time to recharge and reconnect with yourself and your loved ones.

Number 2, build that list and batch that content! You know this is important… and the best part is that all of your list building efforts will pay off when you launch your course.

Try it out and I promise you’ll be thanking me!

Number 3, spend some time and money learning. Don’t be afraid to invest in yourself and your education because it is a vital part of growing your business and your income. Remember that you should not only create digital courses but consume them as well.

Number 4, get to know your audience and get to know them well! Take your downtime to really understand who your ICA is and what she or he needs.

Number 5, make some extra income. Yes, please! This one is a fun action item.

Whether you promote a workshop course or become an affiliate -- this is a great way to make a little extra income while you’re gearing up for your pre-launch runway.

Lastly, number 6… chip away where you can at your upcoming launch.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

BONUS: The Detox You Need To EXPAND Your Dreams & Create A Life You Love with Teneshia Jackson Warner

6 januari 2020 | 46 min

When I say detox, I’m guessing your mind goes to green juice, kale, and hot yoga.

But the kind of detoxing my guest and I talk about in this episode is very different. In fact, it’s one of the most important types of detoxing -- dream detoxing!

So what does that mean? My guest and author of The Big Stretch: 90 Days to Expand Your Dreams, Crush Your Goals, and Create Your Own Success, is going to help you understand exactly what a dream detox is and how to use it in your own life.

Teneshia left her cushy, well-paying job to pursue her dream, and learned some mighty lessons along the way. She’s interviewed some of the top business moguls, such as Shark Tank’s Daymond John, Magic Johnson, Rent the Runway founder Jennifer Fliess and Me Too movement founder, Tarana Burke, all about what it takes to push the limits and stretch to follow your dream, fail, and create a life you love.

Now she’s sharing what she’s discovered.

Here’s a preview of what Teneshia and I talk about…

The five types of dreamers (so you can identify which one you are).
What dream detoxing is and why it’s essential.
How “feeding your spirit,” “fortifying your mind,” and “building your body” fits into success.
Dream bullies… who they are and how they might be holding you back. (Hint: you have some closer to you than you think! Find out who Teneshia’s biggest dream bully was.)
An exercise to help you identify where you are wasting your time and how you can create more time to commit to your dream.

Here’s a breakdown of our conversation...

[05:13] Teneshia left her cushy, full-time job at IBM Mobile Services to follow her dream, passion, and purpose. She knew she was meant for more! Sound familiar?
[07:05] She defines "the stretch" as the expansion necessary to meet the best version of YOU. It's the distance between your comfort zone and your dreams. What would you consider your "stretch"?
[08:00] She has interviewed hundreds of iconic dreamers who said "yes" to stepping out of their comfort zones in order to follow their passion. It's these interviews that inspired her to create her business.
[13:04] Curious to find out the types of dreams? There are five and they include careerpreneurs, make-it-happen dreamers, hobby dreamers, CEO dreamers, and activist dreamers. Which one are you?
[20:50] A dream detox preps your mind, body, and spirit for cultivating your dreams. Teneshia challenges you to examine your beliefs, feed yourself only information that pushes you forward, and set your life up to support your passion and purpose!
[30:16] We even go over an exercise from Teneshia's book called, the "Time Audit" exercise. Essentially, you take a look at your week and find areas where you can be more efficient in order to achieve your goals and dreams! Listen to find out how to do this exercise in your life.

I’d love to hear what you learned from this interview. Head to my Online Marketing Made Easy Facebook community to share what dreamer you are.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#296: How To Set Boundaries And Create Massive Personal And Professional Success This Year

2 januari 2020 | 53 min

“Machines are built to work 24/7, but not human beings. It's crucial that we put boundaries in place for ourselves, to have offline time, exercise and sleep, time with loved ones and friends and family that's not tethered to a screen.

That's how we can start to get into the dance between being effective and productive with our time, and also being healthy, sane human beings.”

This brilliant quote is from my dear friend, Marie Forleo.

She’s absolutely right! We not only need to be aware of how we set boundaries around our screen time, but we also need to set intentional boundaries around our business and personal life.

In this episode, we dive deep into what boundaries are, how to set them, commit to them, and how to respect the boundaries of others in your life.

Can I be honest with you? I haven’t always been great at setting and sticking to my boundaries. In fact, I had to learn about the importance of setting boundaries the hard way.

However, over the years I’ve come to understand what areas of my life require boundaries, and, most importantly, how to stick to them.

And before we dive into boundaries, one thing must be certain… your why for setting them. Take a moment to answer these questions.

Why are you committing to these boundaries?
Why are you sticking to them day in and day out?
Why are they important to you?

Being crystal clear on your why is essential if you’re going to make your boundaries a priority and actually work for you.

So here’s a glimpse of what you’re going to learn in this episode…

What areas you may want to consider setting boundaries in and what non-negotiables are. (And where I set boundaries in my life.)
Why you need to have strong boundaries as an entrepreneur and some specific examples of the ones I set. (Feel free to copy any of mine.)
An exercise for getting clear on what your boundaries look like.
How to commit to your boundaries without feeling guilty or worrying about hurting the feelings of others.
How to lead by example and respect the boundaries of those around you.

Let me leave you with some wisdom from Miss Oprah...

“You have to be able to set boundaries, otherwise the rest of the world is telling you who you are and what you should be doing. You can still be a nice person and set boundaries.”

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#295: How To Create Atomic Habits with James Clear

26 december 2019 | 55 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

You guys know me, and you know how much I LOVE systems and really simple step-by-step strategies, and that is exactly how James Clear, my guest, and Author of Atomic Habits approaches creating good habits that yield remarkable results.

“You do not rise to the level of your goals. You fall to the level of your systems.” Let me repeat that last one again, “You do not rise to the level of your goals. You fall to the level of your systems.”

Oh yes, you know how much the systems girl in me just loves that!

In this episode, James shares his 1% approach to changing your habits, how your identity will either help you to succeed at achieving your goals or not, we talked about how to stay the course, even when you’re not seeing immediate results.

And this one is near and dear to my heart as I’m still walking through my weight loss journey.

Here’s the best part of today’s episode, we talk about how you can start to create your own Atomic Habits so you can play a bigger game with your business and life in the New Year!

Here’s a snapshot of a few things we talked about

[05:13] James suffered a very serious injury when he was hit in the face with a baseball bat, which put him in a medically-induced coma. His recovery pushed him to focus on small habits to achieve big results. He found that following small habits gave him a sense of control in his life.
[07:38] After graduate school, James became an entrepreneur and found that he was drawn to studying consumer psychology so that he could better understand why people buy things. He discovered that he was fascinated with behavioral psychology and habit formation.
[08:44] James aims to be the bridge between scientific research and what it says about how habits work and practical application in daily use. The habits and practices he shares in his book are all about how to create small, powerful, and scientifically-proven habits into your own life.
[09:57] Habits are the compound interest of self-improvement! Believe it or not, getting 1% better each day offers significant results. James believes that it might be the only way change happens in the real world. He says that accumulating 1% improvements over time will actually get you the results you're looking for.
[15:37] An implementation intention means that stating your intention makes it more likely to happen.
[17:04] The plateau of latent potential shows that the hallmark of any habit or thing you're trying to change is that the greatest returns are delayed. In fact, the hard work you're putting isn't being wasted, it's just being stored.
[21:46] Focusing on your trajectory instead of the position will help you to stay on course. Remember that every action you take is a vote for or against the person you want to become. True behavior change is identity change.
[27:49] The four laws of behavioral change include: make it obvious, make it attractive, make it easy, and make it satisfying. The cues get your attention when you need a little reminder.

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#294: 5 Ways A Digital Course Will Boost Your One On One Business Revenue

19 december 2019 | 48 min

Have you been wondering how a digital course can fit into your one on one business? If so, this episode is for you!

Now, if you’re thinking, “I don’t have one on one clients, so this doesn’t apply to my business,” stick with me, because I have some nuggets in here that might actually help your online business grow and generate even more revenue!

In today’s episode, we talk all about how a digital course can fit into your one on one business. And we even chat about how you can add one on one offerings to your online business to boost your revenue.

I know that you guys have been wanting this topic because I get asked about it all the time! Today I’ll give you 5 valuable ways a digital course can transform your one on one business!

That’s right, I talk about how a digital course can transform your business revenue, give you more freedom (yes, please!), and how it will allow you to reach more people and transform more lives. After all, isn’t that why we’re all doing what we’re doing? To make an impact?

You’re going to walk away from this call with some great ideas for integrating your one on one business with a digital course.

Here’s a breakdown of some important points from today’s episode…

[05:01] A digital course will expand your reach! From a time and energy standpoint, you can only take so many clients. A course will give new clients the opportunity to work with you.
[05:53] One approach is to use your digital course as an extension of your one-on-one business. You can use your course to prepare your students and put them in a place to work with you one-on-one directly.
[07:19] You could offer a digital course that complements the work you do with your clients but doesn't exactly mirror the work you do in your one-on-ones.
[11:37] Your one-on-one coaching could be used as an upsell to your digital course.
[16:00] A digital course will increase your overall revenue. Setting your business up for passive income is really important, and it's something you can't do with a one-on-one service business. At DCA, we teach students how to move their course to evergreen.
[21:14] Another way a digital course can seriously benefit your business is that it will allow you to set bigger income goals -- it opens the door for you to make more money. However, I highly recommend doing a few live launches before transitioning into an evergreen webinar.
[28:17] A digital course will allow you to be more selective about who you take on as a client. You can take fewer clients and serve them at a higher level because you're not stretched too thin and trying to balance a ton of clients.
[34:55] Offering both one-on-one coaching and a digital course gives you the option to offer tiered pricing. This can create opportunities for people with different financial means to work with you and makes high price point offerings a hot commodity.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#293: 5 Unexpected Ways To Rethink Your Content To Build A Loyal Audience

12 december 2019 | 48 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

I am so happy that you’re tuning into this episode because we are shaking things up and doing something different!

A few months back, I spoke at Stu McLaren’s TRIBE! event which aims to educate, teach, and bring together entrepreneurs around membership sites. And by the way, if you know me at all, you know that I adore Stu and his event was absolutely amazing.

At his event, TRIBE!, I spoke about my top content creation secrets that I like to use to keep my audience engaged, feeling that they are always receiving value, and coming back for more.

I thought this information was so valuable that I wanted to share it with you.

So today, because I just love you so much, you get VIP access to the recording of the presentation I gave! Now, these 5 tools for content creation will help you to rethink how you do content and make creating valuable, high-quality content easy.

My goal is for you to walk away feeling inspired and excited to put these tools to work within your business! I know you’re going to love this presentation and get so much value out of it.

Now, I just have to remind you that I ONLY teach what is working in my business, and today’s strategy is definitely working in my business! But, you’re also going to hear how I didn’t use one of these strategies and the lesson I learned from that experience.

Here is a preview of the 5 lessons I teach in this episode:

Lesson #1: Let your paid content drive your free content!

Lesson #2: The importance of repetition! You’ve heard me say this before (see how I practice what I preach?!) so it should come to no surprise to you that repetition is a powerful marketing strategy.

Lesson #3: Share more scars than scabs! I know, I know, this analogy is kind of gross, but it gets the point across, right?

Here’s the thing, when you show your scars -- and stay tuned to find out what I mean by scars versus scabs -- you will truly elevate your audience's experience!

Lesson #4: Share your life but remember your why! Again, this all ties back to elevating your audience's experience and inspiring them to grow!

Lesson #5: Superthinking is the secret to content that truly sticks!

Alright, time to get sticky! Multitaskers, come back to me now because if you take anything away from this episode, I want it to be SuperThinking!

If you’ve never heard of SuperThinking, get ready to be mind-blown! This is my superweapon for becoming a creative genius in my business and content!

Now, the reason I’ve really been rethinking my content creation strategy is that, as I mentioned, we are launching Momentum, our membership site for students who have gone through my DCA program!

And as you can imagine, creating enough content to make a membership site valuable can be daunting -- trust me, this is why I’ve pushed it off for as long as I have. And now that we’re launching it, I’m using this approach to make creating content for Momentum so easy!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#292: Student Spotlight: How This “Post Webinar Nurture Sequence” Led To Over $11,000 EXTRA In Revenue with Karida Griffith Walker

5 december 2019 | 65 min

Let’s be honest, your launch runway and your webinars are the most exciting part of your launch!

And if we’re being really honest, the time between your last webinar and your cart closing day, you’re most likely exhausted, and all you want to do is curl up to a good Netflix binge session -- at least I do!

And while it’s tempting to do just that, I find that this time (between your last webinar and your cart close date) is where getting scrappy and making a little post-webinar push can transform the outcome and revenue of your launch.

One of my Digital Course Academy students, Karida Griffith Walker, decided to roll up her sleeves and get scrappy with her post-webinar nurture sequence -- despite having a cold and a household of stuffy noses!

Her commitment to showing up for her audience members who were on the fence resulted in over $11,000 extra in revenue and 20 new students in her digital course. That’s 58% of her revenue for this specific launch!

She even talks about having a coughing attack during one of her live Facebook videos, but that didn’t stop her from showing up.

In this episode, Karida shares her post-webinar strategies and some seriously impressive numbers. Take a listen, get inspired, and start planning to use some of these post-webinar strategies for your next launch.

Here’s a breakdown of what Karida and I chatted about…

[06:15]Karida was a professional dancer and Radio City Rockette for almost 5 years. She then left to pursue her passion for tap dancing, which led her to teaching tap to others.
[09:21] Karida got married and moved to Portland where she is raising her three kids. She wanted to combine her love of dancing and teaching and stumbled across Webinars That Convert. She knew that there was a need for tap dance teacher training, so she created her signature course The Tap Teacher Lounge.
[14:04] In her course, Karida uses slides, audio, and direct to camera videos of her actually showing dance moves to teach her students. She then allows them to send in videos for her feedback!
[18:21] In Karida's most recent launch, she had 204 people registered for her four webinars. She also did something really cool, she offered an "interested but can't attend" option for those who wanted to register. She had 105 people select this option. She had 15 people sign up during her webinars and 20 people sign up during her post-webinar efforts. Her 35 signups brought her $21,000 in revenue.
[23:56] If you pay attention to how your audience behaves—how they respond, what they need, what they want—you can get so many profitable ideas on how to cater to them and truly show up in a way that makes them want to buy.
[24:35] After the webinar, Karida kept running Facebook lives where she tackled her customer's biggest objections and explained her tap curriculum and what her students would learn. She retargeted 240 people and spent $170 in ads -- that's it! This resulted in eight new purchases.
[40:28] Karida had a totally different mindset with this launch. She got scrappy, because she wants to have a six-figure business. She was committed to her process and kept pushing all the way through the launch with her six-figure mindset!
[45:43] Karida touched on the importance of sending a sequence of post-webinar emails and why some people appreciate receiving them.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#291: Master Live Video: How to Shift Your Mindset And Build Your Confidence

27 november 2019 | 50 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

Your mindset is key. Whether you’re looking to build a business or create a life you love -- it all comes back to your mindset.

When it comes to building a successful online business, there’s no doubt that you’re going to have to get in front of the camera from time to time. But that doesn’t necessarily mean you’re going to love it!

In fact, most people feel extremely uncomfortable in front of the camera, whether it’s for a Facebook Live or a webinar, which is why I’m sharing some of my favorite strategies for boosting your confidence in front of the camera.

And you guys know that I haven’t always loved doing live videos. In fact, I can’t say I am jumping at the bit to do them now.

However, I’ve definitely used these exact strategies to boost my confidence and feel much more comfortable jumping on to do a live video.

I want to challenge you to take these strategies and make them your own. Use them over and over to shift your mindset and boost your confidence so that whether you’re doing a Facebook Live, an Instagram Live, or a webinar, you feel like a pro and show up for your audience and boost your know, like, and trust factor.

Go ahead and take these strategies to start creating real impact for your audience and for your business!

You’ll learn…

The importance of creating a pre-live ritual.
How to shift your focus to what you’re offering your clients.
How you can use your audience's engagement to build your confidence and your content.
Tips for prompting your audience with a cue. (Including the cues I use!)
What steps to walk through to make sure you’re ready to do a live video or webinar.

[10:38] Create your own pre-live ritual. Create a ritual that you commit to performing each time before you go live -- this will allow you to automate your live video process and help you to become more relaxed and confident going live!
[14:29] You're going to have some messiness when you're first starting out and building confidence on live video. Committing to a ritual will help you feel more natural in front of the camera and rock your lives.
[15:54] Set an alarm 10 minutes prior to going live and get in the zone. Make sure everything is ready and then just allow yourself to settle in. Quiet your mind, look over your notes and allow yourself to find a sense of calmness.
[18:19] Your mindset will affect your energy for live videos. If you're distracted and don't take the time to get excited about your live video, your audience will know. Here's a tip for you: smile when you talk!
[20:32] Focus on what you're bringing to your audience. When you're worried about how you look on camera you're making the video about you and not your audience. Remember that you are doing live videos to support and serve your audience.
[29:26] Allow your audience’s engagement to build your confidence and your content. Treat every person like they are special, show up like a boss, and engage with them. However, don't worry about having a huge audience when you're live. Keep in mind that your video will live on and get views and shares.
[30:50] Ask your audience questions that relate to their pain point. Also, prompt them to share one takeaway or action item they are going to implement.

BONUS: Quadruple Your Marketing Budget Using Facebook & Instagram Ads with Rick Mulready

22 november 2019 | 55 min

We all know that Facebook and Instagram ads can help get the word out about our products, help build our lists, and even sell products. Yet, many of you have unanswered questions. That's why today we are answering your 10 burning questions about Facebook and Instagram ads. Those who know me, know that I'm not an expert on this, but my Regis to my Kathy Lee, Rick Mulready is here today to answer all of those questions and more.

This podcast is specifically for online experts or people who sell a course, product, or coaching. It’s for people who want to build their list and increase their sales, but haven't quite started using ads yet. It’s also for those who have started using ads, but maybe they aren’t working out as well as you thought they would.

[05:09] What objective do I choose to get people to register for my webinar? You have to choose between lead generation and conversion. Conversion is having people click on your ad and go to your webinar registration page. The thank you page is used as custom conversion tracking. In Facebook ads use the conversion objective not the lead generation objective.
[07:14] What's the most effective ad type? You have to test things out. Any ad can be effective. It's about testing to see what works for you. Using a Facebook Live as an ad is a great video option. Try an image, video, and carousel ad and see what works best.
[09:50] Should I target other Facebook pages or cold audiences? Warm audiences are people on our list or website visitors. Prioritize warm audiences first, and then create lookalike audiences to cold target.
[13:27] People often don't understand their target customer. You need a holistic understanding of your target customer to do well with ads. Once you know your target customer create sub segments. Don’t have one conversation for everyone.
[19:54] Why are ad costs rising? They are more advertisers than ever. More competition equals higher ad cost. It's also the holiday season. There's an election coming up.
[23:08] What's CBO or campaign budget optimization? This will be the default way to set budgets. Set the budget at the campaign level. The algorithm divides the budget by ad performance. You can still set minimums at ad set level.
[28:33] How do I know my ads are working? What's the cost per lead? You want at least 20% converting. Tools like Leadpages will tell you the conversion rate. Leads divided by landing page conversion. Focus on increasing rates and the consistency between the page and ad.
[35:25] What's the deal with video? Create ads with mobile in mind first. Create video for areas where people consume video. People who watch a certain percentage are engagement audiences.
[37:44] Why are my ads getting disapproved? This happens to everyone. Review ad policies and keep up with changes. Don't make promises or insinuate people are struggling with certain things. Speak to positivity and transformation.
[40:39] Do I need to run ads when I'm not launching? It's a better strategy to consistently run ads and build engagement and your list. Facebook rewards consistently running ads and that reduces the cost of your launch.
[43:23] Bonus tip: Mindset around testing. Keep testing until you figure it out and you will win.

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#290: 5 Powerful Ways To Set Your Affiliates Up For Success

21 november 2019 | 49 min

In this week’s episode, I talk all about how to boost your affiliate marketing game (and revenue) by loving up on your affiliates!

So when I'm talking about "loving up" on your affiliates, this means how you can help them to best deliver and succeed as your affiliate -- promoting your program or service.

Affiliates broaden your audience reach and because they’ve already established the know, like, and trust factor with their audience, your conversion rate will be higher than if you were to just target these audiences in cold ads.

This is why, in my most recent Digital Course Academy launch, I went above and beyond to give my affiliates a whole lot of love and attention, and let me tell you, it definitely paid off.

Today I want to share the specific ways I made my affiliates, like Jenna Kutcher, Stu McLaren, Kajabi, and Jill and Josh Stanton, feel extra special and important so that you can do the same for your upcoming launch.

In this episode, I’m going to share 5 simple and powerful strategies to love up on your affiliates so they, in turn, go above and beyond to sell your course or service.

You’re going to walk away from this episode with so many exciting ideas for your next launch!

Tune in to learn these 5 strategies (plus a bonus strategy!)...

The top documents to create to keep your affiliates organized and in the know.
The power of using a Facebook group to inspire and connect with your affiliates.
Assigning one person on your team (or a VA) to give your affiliates extra care and attention.
Surveying your affiliates to improve your affiliate marketing strategy for your next launch.
The importance of starting out small.

[08:38] We love to organize all of the information and details that our affiliates need to know into an easy to access Google Doc. This helps us make sure everything is in order before we even welcome affiliates. Having a doc like this also minimizes confusion and eliminates redundant questions.
[10:12] A sneak peek of all the things that we include in our Affiliate FAQ document -- from commissions to payment options and everything in between.
[17:17] Create a private Facebook group just for your affiliates to communicate with them before you actually open the cart, and continue communication and relationship building while the cart is open. This helps build hype and keeps affiliates in the loop.
[21:55] Consider assigning one person on your team to be your affiliate concierge. Assigning someone specific to the needs of your affiliates ensures that they are prioritized, heard, and treated with extra special care.
[25:10] Survey your affiliate partners post-launch to help you improve for your next launch, but also to make sure that you are creating solid relationships with your affiliates to ensure that they actually want to come back the next time. Getting post-launch affiliate feedback is crucial, so don't skip this step!
[27:57] Start out small. Take baby steps and be realistic about the number of affiliates you can manage. Having a couple of affiliates that are well taken care of is more important than having a bunch who don't sell because they don't feel special.
[36:53] Show gratitude and appreciation to your affiliates for their hard work -- this is essential! Don't be afraid to send them a gift or give them a call to show that you're truly grateful.

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#289: The Entrepreneurs Morning Routine (Including Tips to Create Your Own)

14 november 2019 | 44 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

There are three kinds of people in this world. Those who have morning routines, those who don’t, and those who want to tell everyone else what their morning routine should be.

I definitely have one, and I love it. It’s a good mix of Scout, Peloton, and of course Hobie (when he’s home!).

Here’s the thing… I am not here to tell you how you should do your morning.

In fact, on today’s podcast I am giving you the inside scoop on the morning routines of some of my favorite people. When you listen, you’ll notice that no two are the same. Did I mention all of these people are very successful entrepreneurs with a lot on their plates?

As entrepreneurs, we get to design our own lives. We get to call the shots with how we spend our days and what we work on. Having a morning routine is a great way to gain focus and clarity and make sure the work for the day is the right work.

I hope this episode inspires you to create a morning routine that works for you and your life and most importantly supports the big goals you want to achieve.

You’ll hear from…

[08:00] Jasmine Star needs slow mornings to facilitate creativity and productivity. She quietly does the things that her soul needs to optimize her creativity levels. She gives herself 45 minutes of utter decadence. She also gets two hours of unobstructed work time.
[13:18] Jennifer Allwood has four kids. Need I say more? Her mornings consist of getting kids out the door for the first two hours. And she still manages to get quiet time for the first 35 to 45 minutes of the day. She goes out to her deck with coffee. She thinks about her intentions for the day and what will actually move the needle.
[17:50] James Wedmore makes sure his routine gets him excited to get up. He meditates for mental well being. For physical well being he uses an infrared sauna, the Peloton Tread, a Bellicon rebounder, and a BioCharger. Some days he just goes for a walk or swims in the ocean.
[22:20] Julie Solomon began morning routines a few years ago, but made them too rigid. Now she sees her routine in a new way and it serves her far greater than before. Her routine is intentionally set up for self-care in whatever way it looks like for each day.
[29:48] Stu McLaren starts with his five year old in his face asking if it’s time to get up yet. He doesn’t have a regimented routine in this season of life. His priorities are family time. His day starts and ends with his family. He takes his kids to school and gets his wife a cup of tea. He also takes his dog for a walk in the woods.
[32:56] Kate Northrup has a different routine everyday, because of her two young children. She feels like her morning is not entirely within her control. She wakes up with the baby or when she is done sleeping. She takes a moment of gratitude. She has a cup of warm lemon water. Then coffee. She fits in a quick workout with her husband in the garage.

#288: How to Create a Pre-Launch Facebook Live Content Strategy

7 november 2019 | 42 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

There’s one important factor that can either make or break your launch and it has nothing to do with how much money you spend on ads, how huge your list is, or whether or not your sales page copy is on point.

One of the biggest predictors of launch success is how you show up for your audience in the 30 – 60 days before your launch. I don’t just mean writing a blog post or sending out an email every now and then. I mean putting on your planning hat and mapping out a series of Facebook Lives that both teach your audience something while also overcoming the common objections that come up when you go into launch mode.

This pre-launch Facebook Live strategy has been a game-changer for me and I know it’ll be just as effective for you whether you’re just getting started or you’re a more advanced marketer.

In this week’s podcast episode, I’m sharing all the behind-the-scenes details for my pre-launch Facebook Live strategy, including how to choose the topics you’ll go Live with, how often to go Live, and how to make sure that your Facebook Live viewers are primed and ready to register for your webinar and ultimately purchase your course. And by the way, I give you full permission to steal the strategy and make it your own.

Here’s the breakdown:

[10:01] Once you know the topic of your course that you’ll be selling, you want to think about what you can present in your webinar that would be in alignment with and a perfect lead-in to that course. I break this down and share examples so the strategy will be super clear.
[11:24] One of the best ways I’ve found to nail down a topic that would pique my ICA’s interest is to create a list of their objections, challenges, limiting beliefs and mindset blocks and then I create my Facebook Live content to counter those by presenting a solution that will help them achieve their desires and goals.
[13:42] To make it super actionable, I show you exactly how I take that list and turn each one into a Facebook Live topic. When you do this, you meet your customer right where they are and give them both momentum and traction — always a good thing!
[25:13] These pre-launch Facebook lives are great for list building when you’re strategic with your CTAs (call-to-action). I talk about the lead magnets that did really well in my most recent pre-launch period.
[27:43] The key to any good strategy is to be open to tweaking and changing things up as you learn. I talk about the major tweak I’ll make with my next pre-launch content. Hint: I’ll be focusing much more on mindset.
[30:35] Students often tell me they’re afraid they sound like a broken record when they repeat certain things when presenting their content. I talk about how repetition is actually a good thing because there are certain things your potential customer may need to hear more than once to make a buying decision.

#287: How This Rocker Chick Combined a Membership and a Physical Product to Create the Perfect Experience

31 oktober 2019 | 49 min

If you’ve been tuning in over the last few months I’ve been talking plenty about the power of membership sites, but today I’m sharing a whole new opportunity available to those of us who run a membership site to serve our audiences — adding a physical product to the mix!

Erin Mullins Sanderson, better known online as Fit Rocker Chick, had no idea what she was building when she first started her membership site. All she knew was that she had a message to share and an audience that wanted more of that confident rocker vibe she embodies.

Erin’s story is super unique and something I think we can all learn from. She successfully launched a membership without even knowing what she’d offer, has grown that community to over 500 members, and has created a skincare line that her community went wild for.

She’s clearly a woman of many talents, but what I adore most about her isn’t that perfect skin or her rockstar vibes — it’s her ability to take imperfect action and to really LISTEN to what her audience wants.

Today I want you to see how listening to your audience, thinking outside of the box, and doing something you’ve *always* wanted can amplify your audience experience AND help you boost your bottom line.

Here’s a sneak peek at what you’ll learn from my interview with Erin:

[06:47] How Erin felt a void with her group and wanted to bring them together. She ran the idea of a membership site by her list and found 100 beta testers to help flesh out her plan or lack of plan.
[12:59] How Erin decided on what topics to cover each week in her membership.
[14:30] Erin shares how often she goes live in the community, the type of heavyweight guest expert she features and the other fun aspects of being a member of her group (You’ll love her playlist and setlist ideas!)
[17:03] How Erin’s members have become more courageous, started dreaming bigger, started new dream projects, became philanthropic, and left toxic relationships. These stories will inspire you!
[24:18] How often Erin opens up her membership experience and the tools she uses to run her membership site.
[26:04] How the dream to create a skincare line came about.
[34:32] How Erin made her community a part of the skincare product line decision-making process from the beginning. She talks about how she then launched her new product directly to her community, and it sold out right away. Her second batch also sold out in 48 hours.

#286: How to Create a 7-Day Pop-Up Group to Boost Course Sales

24 oktober 2019 | 56 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

I was recently in Toronto at Stu McLaren’s Tribe event and had an opportunity to record an interview with Jill Stanton of Screw the Nine to Five. Jill and Josh Stanton are two of my favorite people. Josh is hilarious, and I love talking with Jill. You know, I have so many good things to say about Facebook groups, but today is about using short pop-up groups to promote your offers.

Jill and Josh used this method to promote one of their products and to promote my Digital Course Academy. They also threw in a fun twist by making five day challenges where they give a short challenge each day along with challenge marching orders. They also offer a prize to people who make it all the way through.

These groups are a great way to warm up your audience or introduce them to a person or product that you would like to promote. Jill shares all of the tactics that she used along with some smart ideas to give the audience what they want and need without being pushy or overselling. This method can be used to create custom content and engagement for the right audience at the right time.

[07:31] You can create a timeline of four weeks, but for Jill and Josh, engagement started to drop off after a couple of weeks. They tested a two week group and the results were great. This is keeping people's attention for a shorter time and making a quick win.
[10:14] Look at your offer and choose a congruent topic. Don't overwhelm people with the how-tos. Your offer is the how. You need to help them see the what and the why. Empower them to take action.
[15:21] The what and why for Jill and Josh's Digital Course Academy pop-up promotion was Think Like an Expert - From Impostor Syndrome to Expert Status. They identified five core beliefs that were holding their audience back.
[19:09] They ran a challenge on their last pop-up. They ran ads and spent about $42,000 and generated $293,000. They spent $10,000 to get 1200 super targeted people in the group. The one prior to that, they spent $4500 and made $43,000.
[22:48] The challenges are short five minute videos that give a challenge and marching orders. The entire challenge has a prize incentive. Every day at 1:00 they would do a Facebook Live about the challenge of the day. No CTA but they are seeding the topic.
[29:54] Pay attention to the objections you get when you make offers. You want to help the audience overcome their limiting beliefs.
[31:04] Create content around the topic of your pop-up group and have your readers or listeners opt in. You're building your list and creating anticipation around an offer. People can opt in through messenger or email.
[35:29] Moving people from the challenge to the offer includes seeding throughout the content. You can move into a webinar, a free video series, a Facebook Live, and the cart opens on day five. When the offer closes, the group is archived. People who did join the program still get your support.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#285: 5 Crucial Lessons Learned From Creating My First Membership Experience

17 oktober 2019 | 37 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

Some of you may remember me talking about my upcoming membership site, and how I was going to put it on hold for awhile. Well, I’ve found clarity, and Momentum will be launching in November. Tribe members and people who have listened to my episode with Stu McLaren know how valuable it is to be part of a membership site.

Today’s episode is special, because I’m going to be talking about my own membership site, and I want to share with you some of the lessons that I’ve learned. Up until a few months ago, I had reached a point where I was really stuck in the process of creating Momentum. Since then, I have learned so much. I have had so much insight and clarity, that I wanted to share what I’ve learned and the big lessons with you.

I think you'll get a lot of value from hearing about how we processed the information, how we went about putting things together, and if you do decide to create a membership site, you can walk away with these lessons already locked in. So, you my friend do not need to make the same mistakes that I made. Here are the five crucial lessons that I’ve learned so far.

This episode is sponsored by gravy. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans like I do for my online courses, you've got to listen up. One of my biggest frustrations was lost money due to failed payment plans. In fact, it used to keep me up at night. I would worry about all the people that were on a payment plan, because if they didn't finish that payment plan I was screwed.

That's when I decided I needed to do something about it, because I hated the worry. I started to work with gravy, and I promise you I never worry about payment plans anymore. Gravy sets up a system inside of your business where they contact your customers within hours of their failed payments, and they capture updated billing information and save the customer.

Our failed payment recovery rate increased from 33% to over 80%.That's a whole lot of saved payments. If your revenue is currently at $250,000 or more, and you know you're losing money due to failed payment plans each month, I want to encourage you to check out Gravy.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#284: The Better Buzz Strategy to Boost Engagement in Your Facebook Group with Dana Malstaff

10 oktober 2019 | 63 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

If YOU have a community (free or paid) then you know ENGAGEMENT is the #1 metric for your success. Nobody wants to show up in a room full of crickets.

My friend Dana Malstaff, founder of Boss Mom and community creator extraordinaire is the queen of creating next level group engagement. That’s why I just had to have her on the podcast this week.

Dana’s Better Buzz Strategy has helped her create one of the most engaged communities I’ve ever heard of (70% monthly engagement with 40k members, say what?!).

Here are the six types of posts you want to be sure to utilize:

[29:49] The first type of buzz worthy post is a decision post. That answers a simple question to help you make a decision. Give three options, but don’t use a poll. It’s easy for people to engage, and the post stays alive. Then hop on a chat with your super engagers. You should be doing one of these a week.
[34:47] Opinion posts where you ask people what their opinion is. What are your top podcasts or number one blog? The best ones give you information on who to collaborate with and help you gain knowledge and insight.
[37:37] Permission posts are where people tell a story or the hero’s journey. It creates a sense of belonging. Tell people they aren’t alone and create an appreciation loop.
[41:24] Can’t help themselves post. Telling people you just landed a client and asking them to celebrate or drop a GIF. Post something interesting where people can’t help but celebrate with you.
[46:43] Ask is consistently telling people what you do. Let people know what you sell and what you want to be known for.
[49:04] Authority posts. The easiest way to get authority is to get featured on podcasts. Also link to the post and mention it on Facebook live.

Dana covers so much more in the episode. The first 20 minutes alone are pure gold, so tune in now and hop to it with applying these strategies in your communities!

#283: A Week in the Life (7 Days Behind-the-Scenes with Amy)

3 oktober 2019 | 105 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

I know it might sound cliché, but I made a promise this year to be more vulnerable. To show you more of the “real” me.

So for this week’s podcast episode, I’m doing something a little different and sharing a twice daily check-in for a full 7 days.

I hope that this lets you in on a few things. For one, I want you to know what a 7-figure course creator does in a week. You’ll hear it all; what I focus on, what I struggle with, and how I handle all of it.

I can’t promise it’ll be quite as engrossing as The Bachelor but if you’re anything like me, seeing into other people’s worlds is always a treat.

If you’ve ever wondered how I set up my week and spend my days, you’ll love this #nofilter episode where I share it all, including:

Honest conversations Hobie and I have had recently that have been a little tough

The new piece of exercise equipment I’m obsessed with

The challenge the whole team is doing to be more intentional about what we do in a day, how we use our time, create morning rituals, and make extra time for what matters most

Why I started having a weekly date with my mom <3

What it’s like going from a team of 3 to 10 full-time employees (and the essential books every single new hire gets)

How the team operates for maximum efficiency (and how I really feel about meetings)

The inside scoop on my weight loss journey

Here’s where you’ll find some of the highlights:

[02:07] Sunday evening… weekly preview using the Full Focus Planner. This is about what the upcoming week will look like and what did and didn’t work from the previous week. Be intentional about how you structure your day.
[07:32] Monday morning check-in. Morning walk with Scout and fiction audiobook. I also prepared for my FB Live session tomorrow. Phone call with team member. Recorded podcast ads. Hobie’s love language is quality time, so I have coffee with him from 8:30 to 9:00.
[13:33] Now I’m going to work on the quiz and then a team kick-off call. This is a one hour call with the entire team about what it looks like to launch digital course academy. Theme: We are master troubleshooters.
[30:36] I do video on Tuesdays. Instagram story about launch. Facebook Live as part of DCA prelaunch. I also have a DCA affiliate Facebook Live. I don’t workout on video day. I do get a blow out.
[41:38] Wednesday is podcast batching day. I’m doing 3 podcasts today, and some interviews as I grow my team. I also share my hiring process and the book bundle that I send to new hires.
[01:10:41] Thursday evening. I’m back from acupuncture. When I make mistakes that create stress, I know it’s time to fix the system.
[01:15:44] Friday… Call at 7:00 am with weight-loss coach. Today, I’m recording the outcome videos for the DCA quiz. Then I fly to Portland, Oregon.
[01:25:50] On Saturday I met with my friend Mike Pacchione to work on presentation content.

I hope you enjoyed the week with me.

#282: 10 Ways to Repurpose ONE Single Piece of Content

26 september 2019 | 39 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

You are going to love this episode. I give a step-by-step strategy on how to take one single piece of content and repurpose it 10 different ways. We all know how time-consuming content creation can be.

After all that work, we hit publish and put it out in the world, but then it just sits there in that one location. Why not leverage all of that hard work by packaging the content up in different shapes and sizes and publishing it on different platforms?

This makes your efforts more efficient and allows your ideal audience to consume your content in a variety of different ways.

This is so smart. Repurposing your content should be part of your content creation process. Promise me that you won't let another week go by where you create content and only put it out one time and in one location.

[07:49] Sit down and record your podcast audio. Make a video recording for extra mileage. Works best for interviews. Publish your audio wherever you normally publish your podcast.
[11:10] Transcribe the podcast audio. Link to the transcript from your website show notes on it's own page that opens in a new window. This is great for SEO!
[12:45] Show notes are the second way to repurpose your content.
[14:26] Take snippets from the outline, transcripts, or show notes and craft an email that will notify subscribers about your new podcast episode. This is a great way to share weekly content and send weekly emails.
[16:57] Pull out really good quotes or stats that can be turned into graphics.
[17:41] Now that you have the show notes, email copy, and great quotes and stats, pull from those to create great social media posts. If you share the post on multiple platforms, tweak it so the language matches the platform.
[18:48] Select a really juicy audio clip and use Wavve to turn it into a video highlight to promote your episode on social media.
[19:46] Take the content you created and format it into an article on Medium.com. Anyone can post, and if you elect to have it reviewed by Medium curators, they will share it if they think it will benefit their audience. Or guest post on other blogs or online publication.
[20:51] Create a freebie. Take the content and make a checklist, worksheet, or guide. You can use it to build your list or to promote your content or both.
[24:34] It's all about video. This can be really valuable when you make the effort. Take your transcript and highlight sections that you could do a quick video about.
[27:58] Bonus twist. Pay attention to what resonates with your audience. That can become a new piece of content.

This episode is sponsored by my Free Masterclass all about list building. If you've struggled with list building or you are not actively growing your email list, this class is for you. You know, everything in your business is easier when you have an email list. If you want to know what it takes to create a list building foundation from scratch, this step-by-step masterclass is for you.

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#281: How to Plan Your First (or Next) Photoshoot

19 september 2019 | 52 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

I've never loved having my picture taken.

But eventually, I learned to at least get comfortable with it.

It's so important that people see the real you. That your audience can connect with you and see you. Plus, you can use professional photos in soooo many places beyond just social media.

Today, I'm taking the guesswork out of planning your next photo shoot and sharing my top tips on how to show up feeling good, even if you feel nervous about having your photo taken.

I also created an extensive photoshoot guide that you can use to plan your first or next photoshoot like a total pro. Click here to download it now!

You’ll need these images for social media, guest posts, ads, sales pages, webinars, and more. When you know how to plan and organize a photoshoot, you'll not only end up with a bunch of amazing images to use, but you'll also save time and money by not having to hunt all over the place for your next image.

[10:06] I want you to show up for yourself, even when it's way out of your comfort zone -- and I'll explain how to do that.
[12:27] I talk about why it's important to start an inspiration collection of photos you love that would be a good fit for your personality and brand. Put together a fun playlist to make the photoshoot process more relaxing and fun.
[14:33] How to find a photographer whose work you like, and you feel good about working with. Ask for recommendations.
[18:13] I tell you how to put together a photoshoot inquiry communication that you can email to potential photographers and get a price quote. Everything to include is also in the Photoshoot Planning Guide.
[27:14] I'll help you to decide where to do your photoshoot. Hint: Your house with natural light is the best option.
[31:42] I talk about how to find and nail a good pose that fits your personality. This can be very awkward but I've got tips for you to help the process be as painless as possible.
[34:12] I get into all the day-of photoshoot details. We'll talk hair and makeup and how to let those first 15 minutes of awkwardness be what they are and pass by so you can create some beautiful photos.
[40:01] I'll talk about what to do when you get your photos back from your photographer. If they're good and you like who took your photos, I want you to book them to come back and do another photoshoot in the months to come.

#280: How to Do a "Course Call" to Validate Your Digital Course Idea with Jamie Trull

12 september 2019 | 60 min

Enjoy a free gift from me! I’ve created a free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template so that mapping out your upcoming content can be breezy - and dare I say - fun?!

You’ll love this template because it allows you to seamlessly plan out your weekly AND social media content. Click here to snag your free 3-month plug-and-play content calendar template.

One of the best ways to know if anyone wants to spend time and money on your digital course is to ask them. One of the best ways to ask them is to have a course validation call with your potential customer avatar. These calls are so valuable, because they not only tell you if your course will be in demand, but they tell you exactly what needs to be in the course, the best ways to set it up, and how to market it.

These calls can be intimidating and people are often reluctant to have them, but the information gleaned is so valuable. Course validation calls are a game changer. In my The Digital Course Academy, I teach you the exact questions to ask in these calls and how to find your ideal customer avatar ICA to have the calls with. This is important, because you want to make sure you have the call with someone who really is your ICA.

Today’s show has a fun twist, instead of me telling you how to make a course call, I actually make one and let you listen in. It’s true that I already have a course, so this is somewhat of a mock call. But the rest is real. I have a real conversation with Jaime Trull about whether she would be a good candidate for the Digital Course Academy.

It’s also true that I have never met Jaime before. I do know that she has an online business where she serves female CEOs and entrepreneurs in accounting, bookkeeping, and financials. She is a certified CPA, and she is thinking about creating a digital course.

You have two goals during the call. Goal #1 is to uncover insights, fears, concerns, challenges, wants, and needs of your ICA. Goal #2 is to determine if your idea is on the right track. During the call, I actually learned some things that I wasn’t expecting. I also ended up giving Jaime a challenge, so this won’t be the last time you hear from her.

This episode is brought to you by:

The Digital Course Academy sign up now or get on the waiting list. To find out if a digital course is right for you be sure and get The Three Behind the Scenes Secrets to Digital Course Success.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

How Making Wreaths As a Hobby Turned into a Profitable Digital Course with Lauren Kilgore

9 september 2019 | 38 min

#279: Should I Create a Digital Course?

5 september 2019 | 39 min

#278: Case Study: How an Accidental Course Creator Generated Over $200K with Just One Launch

29 augusti 2019 | 61 min

Everything is Figureoutable with Marie Forleo

27 augusti 2019 | 63 min

Marie Forleo has been an inspiration, a friend, and a mentor to me ever since I left corporate and started into the world of online business.

When it comes to business she's seen it all, from humble beginnings offering life coaching for free to being on stage with Oprah (yes, that Oprah). Needless to say, she has accomplished a lot.

Marie feels strongly (and I agree!) that we need more brilliant, creative humans to believe in themselves so that they can go out and make a difference in the world. That was the inspiration that pushed her to write her brand new book, Everything Is Figureoutable.

I recently sat down with Marie to talk about the book and I picked out topics that I thought would be especially helpful for you to hear. Marie held nothing back and shared some gems that I know you're going to love. This episode will have you feeling like everything really is figureoutable.

Here’s a sneak peek of what we covered:

How Marie finally decided to write her book (and why she waited, even after being courted by publishers)
Listening to that little voice in your head (Marie tells how her mom was the first to teach her about this inner guidance system!)
Marie's quick test to determine whether you're acting out of fear or intuition
How your beliefs are shaping you (a great model that I've been following for the last year, but Marie takes it even deeper)
Calling out your excuses (she explains how a slight change in semantics can be a game-changer in your life and business)
What to do when fear creeps in (and you know it will!)
Getting clarity on what you actually want (believe it or not, most people are not crystal clear on what they want to create, but there IS a way to get clear)
Avoiding the pitfalls of perfectionism (learn about the severity of the destructiveness of perfectionism)

You’ve gotta get your hands on Marie’s book, Everything is Figureoutable. Pre-order it now and get the 5-day coaching experience that Marie's offering to all pre-orderers.

#277: 3 BIG Decisions I Wish I Had Made Sooner (and Why You Should Make Them Now)

22 augusti 2019 | 28 min

Mistakes are a part of life, but in my book the fewer things you have to learn the hard way, the better.

When it comes to sharing my blunders while building an online business, I’m an open book. This is the stuff that I WISH someone would’ve shared with me when I was just getting started.

There are a lot of mistakes that I’ve made that I’m grateful for. Mistakes that helped me learn pivotal lessons that I wouldn’t trade for the world. But lately, I’ve been reflecting on some of the big decisions that I’m making now that I wish I would have made sooner.

Wanna know the 3 decisions I wish I’d made sooner in my business?

I’m digging into the details on this week’s podcast episode… here are the highlights:

[02:15] The first decision that I waited to make until I was making good money was to hire someone to help me manage it. Plus, I’ll tell you how Hobie and I picked an advisor to help us.
[07:00] I waited way too long to grow my team to match the big vision I have.
[13:45] Think about accountability and organizing how your team moves towards your goals.
[15:32] I share how I had a false belief that I needed to make tons of money before I set clear boundaries or rituals in my life that would allow me to take off. Boundaries protect yourself, your sanity, and your mindset.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#276: How to Overcome the Most Common Objections When Selling Online

15 augusti 2019 | 46 min

I’ll never forget my first webinar.

But not for the reasons you might be thinking.

There I was, confident and ready to rock it, when suddenly the objections started pouring in. I felt defeated and disappointed.

I want to save you the pain I experienced on that webinar with today’s episode. Believe it or not, it’s absolutely not necessary to let objections get the better of you. They’re not scary when you know how to handle them.When you know what’s holding people back from saying heck yes to your offer, you can address their hesitation head on. You don’t have to tiptoe around it — instead, you can have a conversation.

Here’s a sneak peek at what you’ll learn from this episode:

[05:11] The best place to address objections (hint: it’s not necessarily on your webinar or sales page)
[07:32] What to do on the front end of your offer so that common objections never even make an appearance.
[11:20] The truth about money objections
[17:11] The key differences between features and benefits
[19:09] How to find “tiger” time.
[26:35] Marie Forleo’s “I have to talk to my spouse or business partner” script.
[29:35] How to get to the root mindset of "I'm not good at xyz."

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#275: 10 Ways to Get Your Students to the Finish Line

8 augusti 2019 | 49 min

Research shows that only 1 in 5 people who purchase online courses complete them.

As a course creator, that stat keeps me up at night and more importantly, compels me to take action.

Over the years, I’ve become obsessed with finding ways to beat those odds. And I’m sure if you’re reading this, you want every single person who buys your course to cross that finish line as well.

If you want amazing case studies and testimonials (the best marketing fuel there is), you’ve gotta do everything in your power to not just create the best course you can — but to ensure you’re helping your students get the results they signed up for.

Now if you’re freaking out reading that, don’t panic. I’ve done a lot of the legwork for you and I’m sharing everything I’ve got today to help you get your students from point A to point B.

Haven’t created your course yet? Even better! Thinking about these strategies before you develop your course puts you ahead of the curve.

So grab your notebook and sharpen your pencil. Even if you implement just 2 or 3 of these ideas it will make such a difference for your students’ success.

Here are the basics of our accountability cheat sheet:

Meet once a week, same time, same place, online using something like Zoom.
Outline three action items you can commit to doing over the next week.
Check in on whether or not you did what you said you would do the previous week.
If not, what were the challenges?
What’s your game plan to overcome these challenges next week?
What do you commit to accomplishing for the next week?

This episode is brought to you by Gravy. If you have a subscription-model business or offer payment plans, like I do for my online courses, Gravy can really cut down on frustration and lost income. After I started working with Gravy I stopped worrying about payment plans. They contact your customers within hours of their failed payments, and they capture updated billing information and save the customer.

Our failed-payment recovery rate increased from 33 percent, when we were trying to do it internally, to over 80 percent, collecting on failed payments. That's a whole lot of saved payments. So if your revenue is currently at $250,000 or more, and you know you're losing money due to failed payment plans each month, I want to encourage you to check out Gravy. The cool thing is Gravy is waiving the setup fee for all of my listeners.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#274: 3 The Pre-Launch Facebook Ad Strategy, with Rick Mulready

1 augusti 2019 | 53 min

On this week’s podcast episode we’re digging into 3 powerful (and surprisingly simple) FB ad strategies designed to fuel your pre-launch fire.

The pre-launch phase is that crucial 60-90 day period leading UP to your launch that can make a world of difference when it comes to increasing your reach and revenue. If you play your cards right, you’ll find out that launching doesn’t have to be hard, stressful, or time-consuming.

I’m joined by the Regis to my Kathy Lee — my dear friend and our resident FB and IG ads expert, the one and only Rick Mulready.

Rick’s been on the podcast before, but today he’s sharing his favorite paid traffic pre-launch tips, including:

How to use FB ads even when you’re on a tight budget and why you SHOULDN’T hire out your ads right away.
The power of crafting content around objections and how to do it.
The strategy that ensures by the time you open the doors to your webinar, your people are READY to learn from you and hear your offer.

And so much more. Make sure you have your notebook ready!

[08:32] What exactly IS the pre-launch period and why it’s so important
[12:22] Using video to create value and overcome objections and how best to optimize your ads
[21:30] You can also use video to test target audiences. Right now the more fun and sometimes the sillier or less polished the videos are the better they do. Just make sure to have good sound and lighting.
[25:16] Create a lead magnet that aligns with the launch, provides a quick win, and adds value. This builds trust and rapport.
[28:13] Try for a 90-day or at least 60-day pre-launch where you are building a list of your target audience. Run ads and get people to sign up for your lead magnet before your webinar registration. You can also create a look-alike list of your target audience to run your ad to.
[30:33] Why and when to use pop-up Facebook groups to create engagement and attract an audience for your launch.
[38:02] How running ads consistently throughout the year will save on your launch costs
[40:11] Bonus strategy: Running a quiz with ads. This gives people a quick win and it's great for segmenting people to attract your ideal audience. Have a well written quiz with a really good ad strategy to go with it.

This episode is officially sponsored by Rick's program Foundations, which is about getting started with Facebook ads and Instagram ads. It's a really great program. He teaches how to create ad campaigns in both Facebook and Instagram that will build traction and get your launch or list or group off the ground.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#273: How to Build a Self-Managed Team with Theresa Loe

25 juli 2019 | 46 min

I never imagined myself having the team I do now. I also can’t imagine subscribing to the old idea of what it means to be a “boss”.

I've learned a lot about what works and what doesn't when it comes to working with a team, especially with all of the hiring we've been doing over the past few months.

That's why I was so excited to sit down with Team Building and Leadership Coach, Theresa Loe to talk about building a self-managed team.

I truly believe that building a team that’s aligned with your values is one of the secrets to not just building more revenue or success, but to enjoying the process.

If you’re thinking “Amy, I’m so not even close to ready to build a team” — hey, that’s okay!

But when you are ready (and trust me, one day you will be and it might come sooner than you think) this is the kind of insight I want you to have so you can save yourself from making painful hiring mistakes (trust me, I’ve been there).

Theresa has cracked the code on how to find, grow, and lead a self-managed team, and she is sharing her best insights today:

[11:17] Having a self-managed team means putting yourself in the CEO position and having people under you who are all responsible for their own projects. When you have a great idea the team can execute and make it happen.
[13:58] Mindset is the number one strategy for building a self-managed team. Think about what you want your day to look like, and then slowly reverse engineer how to take everything else off of your plate.
[18:01] Hire based on attributes. Make sure they are aligned with you, your vision, and your core values. People can be trained on tools but not on character. Write down the attributes that you want then put up a gauntlet to see if applicants have these attributes.
[26:43] Hand off responsibilities, not tasks. Make everything a project. Instead of a one-off blog post, make them responsible for content management including scheduling, analytics, and reporting.
[29:39] Communication is key. Have a clear description of what "done" means. Be very clear about expectations but nurture your team to make decisions for themselves.
[33:18] You can create a feedback loop by recording any changes that you had to make to a project. Empower your team with resources.
[35:20] You can start small and hire someone for a few hours a week. You need to look at those freed up hours as gold and use them for money-making activities to free up cash to add more free hours.

This episode is sponsored by my Free Masterclass all about kick-starting your list building efforts. You need to grow your email list every day to have a healthy business. All of the social media posts in the world can't do for you what a viable email list can.

#272: My Biggest Regret After 10 Years of Building My Business

18 juli 2019 | 55 min

This is one of those super uncomfortable moments when I have to admit…I don’t have it ALL figured out.

Recently, I was at the EntreLeadership live event and Dave Ramsey’s words cut right to my soul. He said, “Organizations are never limited by their opportunity or their team, they are limited by their leader.”

And the honest truth is, I regret not putting more focus on being a better leader for my team much sooner than I did.

No one is born with amazing leadership skills. They take years to develop and the earlier you start, the better off you’ll be.

Because here’s the truth: you can’t build an empire by yourself.

Eventually, you’ll need to bring people on who stand behind your vision and are just as motivated as you are to achieve it.

As my business grows and scales, my job is to be a visionary and show up for my team as a leader in a stronger way. I’ve always thought of my students and my business, but now it’s time to focus on creating a bigger stronger team of people who are empowered to make decisions, come up with ideas, and grow with my business.

EntreLeadership was one of the best events I’ve attended. It blew my mind. After it lit a fire under my chair to become a better leader, I knew I had to share my biggest takeaways with you.

I hope you learn from these and implement them into your business right away. Do not pass go, just do it. I promise you won’t regret it.

Here are the main takeaways:

[15:00] There’s always room for improvement, no matter how ‘big’ your organization is.
[16:12] Takeaway #1: Dave Ramsey shared how organizations are never limited by their team. They are limited by their leader. (This one really hit me in the gut!)
[19:38] Takeaway #2: Henry Cloud asked, “Does your team know how you are going to win?” It’s important to define what winning looks like for yourself and then share it with your team.
[23:39] Takeaway #3: Patrick Lencioni dropped a major value bomb when he said that fear of conflict will stifle productivity and keep you playing small. He explained that you’re cutting yourself short if you’re not encouraging your team to show their opinions even when they are challenging.
[32:43] Takeaway #4: Patrick Lencioni also talked about hiring people that are humble, hungry, and smart. He explained that these type of people lack excessive ego, are self-motivated, and use good judgment with people.
[39:32] Takeaway #5: Jesse Itzler shared his motto of “remember tomorrow.” He encourages you to ask yourself how you will feel tomorrow about any decisions that you make today. Listen to learn how I’ve implemented the Full Focus Planner with my team.
[43:41] Takeaway #6: Sara Blakely, the creator of Spanx, told the story of her early days in the business where she went above and beyond to educate customers on her product — she would go to the department store and talk to customers. She’s such a good example of never being too proud to get in there and do the work and get your hands dirty.
[48:13] Extra Credit: Write down three things that you would love your team, or your team of the future, to say about your leadership style. I’m doing this exercise too and I wish I would have asked myself this question years ago. Don’t wait.

Links mentioned in this episode:

#271: How to Create a Profit-Driven Lead Magnet to Boost Sales

11 juli 2019 | 45 min

If you’ve been around for a bit, then you know my motto is always be list building. Now, while there are all kinds of list-building strategies, there’s one that's by far the easiest way to grow your email list, and that's by offering a lead magnet.

Through all of my endless list building experiments, I’ve learned how to create incredibly valuable pieces of content, like cheat sheets, guides, and mini-trainings.

But do you know what kind of lead magnet is the best, hands down?

A profit-driven lead magnet.

Now, I know what you're thinking... "Amy, a lead magnet is something I give away for free. What the heck are you talking about when you say 'profit-driven'?"

Here's the deal. Most of the time, when somebody signs up for your email list, they are just not quite ready to buy from you yet. When you create a profit-driven lead magnet, you are creating a tool that leads your new subscriber to a buying decision while also providing incredible value.

With this very intentional strategy, you will be generating revenue faster than you ever thought possible!

In today's episode, I talked about the three main questions you must ask yourself before you create your profit-driven lead magnet, and they are:

What do you currently sell or plan to sell in the future?
What does your ideal customer avatar need to understand, be aware of, or believe in order to want or need your product, program, or service?
What type of lead magnet could I create that will compliment or align with the product, program, or service I currently sell or plan to sell?

I love a good example that illustrates what I'm talking about and I've included the two examples of profit-driven lead magnets that I talked about on the show below. I hope those will get your creative juices flowing!

Example #1: My Own Lead Magnet, "20 Smart Strategies to Rapidly Grow Your Email List"

Why Example #1 Works:

It inspires.
It's actionable.
The cheat-sheet gives the what, and my course gives the how.

My ideal customer avatar and I are now in a conversation about how I can help them. Now, each week, I can continue the conversation with my ongoing weekly content.

Example #2: Corinne Crabtree's Free Course, "THREE Things You Must Know to Lose Weight"

Why Example #2 Works:

She makes it doable.
It gets people results (for free).
It attracts the right audience.

Corinne meets people right where they're at in their journey. Her course name is simple, clear, and to the point. Right away on the thank you page, she shares her journey in a video (and still directs her audience to check their email for more).

Episode highlights:

[06:49] 99% of the people who give you their email address aren't ready to buy. It’s up to you to walk them down that path. Create your lead magnet with your end goal in mind, and your end goal is to attract paying customers.
[14:04] Example #1 my lead magnet for List Builder's Society (see image example below).
[21:13] Make sure your lead magnet meets the customer/buyer where they are at. Profit-driven lead magnets are very intentional, specific, and sometimes only used for launches. There is a difference between a really good lead magnet and a profit-driven lead magnet.
[26:44] Example #2 from Corinne Crabtree (see image example below).

#270: Behind the Scenes with My Better Half, Hobie Porterfield

4 juli 2019 | 51 min

Ring the fire alarm because my better half, Mr. Hobie Porterfield, is lighting this place up! I’m super excited to have him back on the show, because I love sharing this side of my life. It may not always be unicorns and rainbows, but it’s pretty special.

Hobie puts fires out for a living, but he also helps me put fires out in my business. If it weren’t for his emotional support, I can’t say I’d be where I am today. He’s my biggest cheerleader, my biggest supporter, and he picks me up when I’m down.

We have learned and grown so much together. I just love having him on the show to share how we juggle laundry, launches, and everything in between as a team. This is an inside look at how we communicate about our needs, managing time and money, and our big goals.

You sent in some amazing questions. We’ll try to answer them, and hopefully, some of the things that we’ve learned and shared will help you not only in your business, but in your relationships as well.

[03:15] Hobie does more of the housework, and he likes to rub it in 😉remind me of that.
[06:26] Hobie doesn’t mind listening to me talk about my work, because it gives him a connection into my world.
[09:25] We sit down multiple times throughout the year and schedule everything.
[13:39] When it comes to money and investing – getting a financial planner is one of the smartest things you can do.
[18:53] Why Hobie doesn’t go to conferences with me
[23:52] What would happen if we swapped roles for a day.
[25:49] Hobie talks about how he feels about me making more money than him
[29:28] How my weight loss has changed how we spend our time
[37:47] Hobie shares his amazing proposal plan that didn’t quite work out as planned. We also get a little personal with what annoys each other and how much fun we have.

Links mentioned in this episode:

#269: Small List Superhero: How To Have A Profitable Launch Without A Big List with Tarzan Kay

27 juni 2019 | 50 min

“Amy, can I still launch my course if I only have 500 people on my email list?”
Ambitious course creators ask me variations of that question at least once a week.
It’s easy for the size of your list to become one more excuse not to launch.
My guest today is someone who had a successful launch with a list of 750 subscribers. Tarzan Kay has had not just one but three successful launches with a small list. In this episode, she shares her tips and strategies and walks us through her inspiring launch success.
Tarzan is a launch strategist and email copywriting expert for online entrepreneurs and digital-course creators. Her specialty is fun-to-read, more-addictive-than-Game-of-Thrones copy for digital-course launches.
In her own business, she uses my special webinar framework —shout out to my Digital Course Academy members! In fact, she's used it over and over to sell her own courses, fill her private mastermind, and even had the occasional $100,000 month while working 30 hours per week and being the sole provider for her family of four.
I know you’re going to love this episode. Tarzan’s tips are useful for anyone who wants to deepen their relationship with their list, big or small.
[14:33] Start thinking about how you can build relationships with individuals on your list, so they know that you're real and that you are going to deliver for them.
[15:45] Launching takes courage. Those who are successful launch through the fear and keep doing it again and again.
[16:23] More than revenue comes out of a launch. You get opportunities to speak, be on podcasts, build relationships, partner, and more.
[20:12] Tarzan uses a tool called BombBomb to send personalized videos to people who were active on her webinars. She also puts their names on her whiteboard. Email your list weekly and start a conversation. You can even hop on calls with people from your list.
[26:50] Tarzan knows how to speak to the different personality types on her email list… and she breaks it down for us in Game of Thrones characters to make it easy to understand.
[32:17] All of your emails won't appeal to everybody, but there is definitely a way to make them appeal to more than one group at once.
[35:44] The number of people replying to your email is a great metric to judge whether they liked it or not.
[37:01] A nurture sequence comes after a new subscriber has opted in to get your freebie. Put a lot of energy into showing them your personality.
Click here to listen now!

#268: LinkedIn Tips and Tricks to Attract a Bigger Audience with Viveka von Rosen

20 juni 2019 | 45 min

I get so many questions about LinkedIn. You’ve been asking how to use it for your audience, for list building, and what’s working right now.

I decided to bring in the big guns and invite world-renowned LinkedIn expert Viveka von Rosen on the show. Viveka is the author of LinkedIn Marketing: An Hour a Day and LinkedIn: 101 Ways To Rock Your Personal Brand: Grow your network and build your business!.

She is also a personal branding expert, LinkedIn Learning author, international keynote speaker, and has been recognized as a top LinkedIn and social media expert. She contributes to many major publications and has even been featured on two movies about social media. She is co-founder of Vengreso which provides digital sales solutions.

I’m so glad to have her here today to talk about what is currently working on LinkedIn, strategies for B2C clients, what is coming up with video and LinkedIn Live, and so much more. She even gives us actionable steps to transform our profile to sell in a non-salesy way and use content to nurture and grow relationships.

[06:08] Diving deeper is the strategy that worked for Viveka. She was also able to learn the platform inside and out, build relationships, and stay top of mind with her audience.
[14:25] You can repurpose blog posts on LinkedIn by clicking on "write an article" and pasting that article in LinkedIn Publisher. Other great ways to repurpose content is to add images to your article, create a PowerPoint presentation, and publish it as a document. Videos can be uploaded as native video or in the soon to be released LinkedIn Live.
[16:07] Position yourself as a thought leader. Make your background image about your product and have your summary read like a sales page (but not salesy). Who are you helping? What are their pain points? What is your solution?
[21:47] Selling is about being human and relationships. Know your audience and speak to your audience and don't worry about people self-selecting away from you.
[27:51] The secret recipe is to share something every day and create a long-form post once a week. For the long-form post use 1200 to 1400 characters and emojis to share something of value. Shoot and upload a relevant video or PDF, PowerPoint, or infographic for 10X the number of views. Use LinkedIn messaging to create a sharing fan club.
[33:22] A great way to get access to a B2B prospect is to interview the influencer in that company. This is how Viveca and Vengreso have been able to start the conversation for six- and seven-figure deals.

This episode is brought to you LinkedIn Marketing. If your goal is to target your customers where they're engaging every day and when they're ready to make a buying decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn.

When you advertise on LinkedIn, you're attracting potential customers and fostering relationships that often translate into high-quality leads, website traffic, and higher brand awareness. Go to LinkedIn Marketing to redeem a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#267: Are You Known for Something Specific in Your Biz? If Not, Here’s What to Do

13 juni 2019 | 32 min

If you asked your customers or fans what you were known for what would they say?

We’ve all got that special something that we want to be known for. That thing that attracts your customers to you effortlessly and grows your audience with ease.

That “it” factor, what your known for, is the foundation for your positioning.

It’s also the path to increase your profit and purpose.

Over the years I have seen so many people stop themselves from confidently staking their claim on what they want to be known for out of fear of getting put in a box.

The truth is, you can’t create a recognizable brand if you’re not known for something specific. And you can always pivot (just ask me or my girl Marie Forleo).

This episode is dedicated to helping you figure out a game plan for what you want to be known for and how you’ll share that secret sauce with the world.

Listen in to get these five specific ways to get clear on what you’re known for (and more!).

[16:09] Clear messaging. Where do people start with you? Where are they at the beginning of the journey? This is a great place to start the conversation and create a lead magnet. Starting in the right place can lead subscribers down a path.
[18:44] Talk about what you are known for a lot. Weave in these topics into everything that you do and always come back to it. Only talk about your area of expertise and to an audience that is a good fit.
[22:05] Stick with it. You will never be known for something specific if you are constantly dabbling in a bunch of things. You can be passionate about a lot of things but narrow your business down.
[23:42] Don’t be afraid to ask people to share with you what they think you are all about. Ask a couple customers or fans what you are best known for.
[24:32] Consider putting together a framework, method, or blueprint that you can go back to as a foundation. This is probably something that will evolve over time. When you see people gravitating towards it, you know it’s your thing.

Alright, my friend, I hope you’ll take this info and run with it to position yourself for lasting success.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#266: The Little Known (Easier Than You Think) Copywriting Method That Boosts Conversions

6 juni 2019 | 35 min

Let’s be honest here. Writing copy can be hard, but it’s an important almost mandatory skill for new business people just starting out. In fact, I wrote all of my own copy my first few years of business, and I suggest that you do the same. Become a student of copywriting. The more you do it, the easier it will become. Today, I’m talking about a technique that will help you build up that oh-so-important relationship with your ideal avatar.

This technique is by Ry Schwartz an expert copywriter who writes a lot of my copy. He also teaches copywriting and my audience loves him. This method is called Coaching the Conversion. It's all about writing copy in a way that will resonate with your ideal customer avatar at a really high level and will meet them right where they're at. It will help them feel as though they know that you see them and you hear them.

I actually think it's important that you write your own copy for the first two years of your business. You need to truly understand your ideal customer. Writing copy for your ideal customer is an intimate experience. It really should begin with you. It will make you a better entrepreneur and a better communicator overall if you take the time to perfect your expertise.

After this episode, you will walk away with golden nuggets that will help you transform your next promotion. I even share one of my best converting ads and break it all down for you step-by-step.

Coaching the Conversion Method in 4 Steps

[10:34] Shift your mindset about how you feel about being a copywriter. Look at copywriting as a means to coach your ideal customer through a transformation by using words that make them feel seen and heard.
[13:47] Know your ideal customer avatar like you know your best friend. Sometimes you have to read between the lines and know-your-customer intimately. Clearly understand their pain points, desires, and what makes them tick.
[17:42] Use their words. It's important that you reflect back to them what they are feeling and what they are saying. Keep a running list of words and phrases that they use. These are pure gold for copywriters.
[19:24] Remember that coaching the conversion walks your potential customer along the path from where they are now to where they could be or where they want to be. The first part of the path is your weekly content then you move on to coaching opportunities inside a webinar. Then send post follow-up emails.

A Concrete Example from One of My Highest Converting Facebook Ads:

How long have you been waiting to finally have the confidence to go all in on building and selling your digital course? Six months a year more. It took me a while to get started to.

I was scared I'd fail, and guess what? I pretty much did. My first course only made me $267, but I stuck with it and 7 courses, 42,000 students, and 8.7 million dollars in revenue later. I've learned a thing or two, and I want to share all that with you. Register for free here (and then I give the link).

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#265: What to Do When Your Life (and Biz) Are Out of Balance with Sheri Salata

30 maj 2019 | 44 min

Any Oprah fans out there? If you are a diehard Oprah fan like me, then you probably watched Season 25 of Oprah Behind the Scenes, and you probably remember Executive Producer Sheri Salata. She was also co-president of Harpo studios and OWN. I remember watching a scene from that special that showed Sheri waking up in the morning with her bulldogs getting ready to go to the Oprah show, and I thought how does she do it all?

It turns out Sheri has a fascinating story. She had reached the heights of her business career when she decided to reinvent herself and find more balance in her life. She woke up and realized that a career of her dreams wasn’t enough. She set out to reinvent herself with a job and life that are one and live her life to the fullest.

If you have ever felt stuck or in a rut, you will love Sheri’s story of reinvention and using happy as a compass. Sheri is the author of The Beautiful No, the owner of The Pillar Life, and co-host of The Sheri + Nancy Show. This is a powerful episode as Sheri shares her wit and wisdom in a way that only a true storyteller like Sheri can.

[08:16] Sheri shares what her life was like as executive producer for Oprah before day one of life after Oprah.
[11:13] Sheri had a great story for her book. She started in an entry level position for Oprah at the age of 35. This was the 3rd or 4th time she started over, and she reinvented herself again at age 56.
[13:58] You don't know your in a rut until you're out of it. Forcing yourself to jump the track and breathe new air makes life more interesting.
[16:28] Sheri had a dream come true career but not a dream come true life. She had to do a serious reckoning with the tenderness of hearts to get to the core of the kind of life she dreamed of.
[19:44] At a Shamanic ceremony in the desert, Sheri learned that to start with a fresh page you have to let go and clear the slate.
[24:05] Sheri and Nancy built a business around living and doing things for a better life and then reporting back about it.
[28:01] Sheri switched her story about working out. She is a storyteller, so she told herself a new story that inspired her using words like power, flexibility, renewal, and recovery.
[30:55] Awareness is everything. How not to make misery your compass. When happiness is your compass, you are keenly aware of what feels good. These are clues that your destination is lovely and wonderful.
[36:58] The amazing story of how Sheri landed her job at Oprah. You don't want to miss this story! It's also the basis for the title of her book The Beautiful No.

This episode is brought to you by LinkedIn:

LinkedIn is the perfect platform to market your business. Marketing your business is all about reaching the right audience at the right time and connecting with them when your message resonates the most. So, if you want to target your customers where they're engaging everyday and when they're ready to make a decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn.

In fact, four out of five customers who are on LinkedIn are decision makers at their companies. You can see some incredible traction with your LinkedIn ads. If you want to redeem a free $100 dollar LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign on LinkedIn go to LinkedIn.com/Amy.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#264: Is this ONE EXCUSE Sneaking into Your Business and Slowing You Down? (It Might Even Be Hiding!)

23 maj 2019 | 28 min

#263: How to Tease Your Digital Course Before You’re Ready to Launch

16 maj 2019 | 37 min

You want people ready to buy when you launch your course, but how do you do that? This episode will explain exactly how to be intentional before your launch, so that your customers will be ready to buy when you are ready to sell. You need to start the relationship building early, because people buy from those that they know, like, and trust. I am going to share a powerful marketing strategy that you can use to seed the idea of your course before it is ever launched.

You will be priming the pump in a transparent and authentic way that makes people hungry for what you have to offer. I’m going to give you three powerful tips that you can intentionally use to get your buyers ready and excited to buy from you when you launch. This mini lesson will give you actionable ways to talk about your course in a natural way that doesn’t sound salesy and gets people excited about what you are offering.

[06:49] The best way to hit your goals during your launch is to be incredibly intentional before your launch. You want to position yourself as your audience's guide, so they recognize you as their go-to source. This priming period is all about how you show up for your audience.
[10:33] Use stories about your journey or your students journey to seed your course. This will make the struggles more real and tangible. Think about your students and where were they, what did they struggle with, what held them back, and what helped them move forward. Understand the difference between a story and a testimonial and use both of them.
[15:59] Talk about specific lessons, formulas, frameworks, or strategies that are in your course. I created a framework and then showed how it came to life with a step-by-step of a webinar that made me over three million dollars in one launch. Give names to your lessons and formulas.
[20:03] Create exclusivity. You want your non-students to want to be part of your special insider community. Shout outs are a great way to share that you have something special. When people see you talking about it, they want to be part of it. Do it in a loving mindful way.
[22:47] Don't be afraid to talk about your course multiple times in multiple ways. Weaving your product into the conversation naturally never sounds salesy. In order to make the seeding strategy work, you have to launch when you say you are going to launch.

This episode is brought to you by my Free Masterclass all about list building. One of the ways that you can be incredibly intentional when you aren’t launching is to build your email list every single day.

The energy of your business is directly tied to the strength of your email list, and so that’s why you hear me talk about list building so much on my podcast, in my Facebook lives, and in my private Facebook groups and in all my courses. List building is essential to the growth of your online business. Get my Free List Building Masterclass.

Links mentioned in this episode:

Free List Building Masterclass

#262: Feeling Frazzled and Overworked? How to Prioritize What Matters Most with Kate Northrup

9 maj 2019 | 55 min

I've been noticing a theme lately and it's the idea of less is more. I have been really busy this first quarter and am looking forward to a season where I can slow down. But to be honest, this scares my entrepreneurial brain. I associate slowing down with achieving less and making less money. In spite of this, I firmly believe in my core that I can do less and still make a huge impact and hit my big goals.

My friend Kate Northrup is someone who did just that. She slowed down and discovered that her earning didn’t decrease. She even discovered that by listening to her body and noticing her seasons, she could get more done by doing less. She even wrote the book Doing Less. The book goes into detail on how to do less, create a bigger impact, make more money, and create space to do those things that matter. This episode is incredibly actionable, incredibly valuable, and you will learn a lot about yourself that you didn't know.

[13:27] The 40 hour work week isn't evidence-based and it's not results-based. A 55 hour work week leads to a 33% increased risk in stroke and a 13% increase in risk of coronary disease. A 49 hour week is associated with poor mental health. There is a diminishing rate of return on hours put in.
[15:59] Men have a cyclical experience of energy based on their hormones every 24 hours. Women have a cyclical experience of energy based on their hormones every 28 days. Productivity and time management systems assume our lives are based on a 24-hour cycle. We both have the ability to get just as much done, but in slightly different ways. The four phases line up with the energy of the seasons.
[21:33] Very few people can be in a state of high concentration for more than 4 or 5 hours a day. Multiple things at the same time makes us miss things and make mistakes. Get clear on your goals. Set a timer for every hour and write down what you were doing. Then ask if they are connected to your result.
[34:03] How to map out which tasks should be done and when. Ask yourself how much energy you have as you plan your week and then have 5% to 10% of your activities based on your energy and then get done what you need to get done. Listen to your body and things will work in alignment. Our bodies are our source of energy and creativity.
[39:43] Simplify. Ask if things are in flow or in friction. Simplify wherever there is friction. Learn how to get results with the least amount of steps. Find what works for you.
[45:37] To do lists can be overwhelming. Make a weekly list instead of a daily list. This gives you grace and space to make things happen. Ask if it NEEDS to be done. Does it need to be done by ME? Does it need to be done NOW?

This episode is brought to you by LinkedIn:

LinkedIn is the perfect platform to market your business. Marketing your business is all about reaching the right audience at the right time and connecting with them when your message resonates the most. So, if you want to target your customers where they're engaging everyday and when they're ready to make a decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn. In fact, four out of five customers who are on LinkedIn are decision makers at their companies. You can see some incredible traction with your LinkedIn ads. If you want to redeem a free $100 dollar LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign on LinkedIn go to LinkedIn.com/Amy.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#261: Membership Site Inspiration: How They Did It

2 maj 2019 | 58 min

Have you ever thought about adding a membership site to your business model? How does the idea of recurring revenue in your business sound? Revenue coming in every single month, rain or shine, launch or no launch… Sounds good to me!

Many of my students are course creators and the idea of adding a membership site on the backend of their course as a way for their customers to continue working with them really does seem to be the next right step in their business.

My students aren’t the only ones getting on the membership site train...In fact, I’m in the process of adding a membership site to my own business and what I’ve learned over the past year about the power of combining memberships and courses is nothing short of revolutionary.

If you tuned in last week, I spoke with the membership site guru himself, Stu McLaren, and we went through the 10 most burning questions about membership sites and boy have we heard from a lot of you of how helpful that episode was and how it has inspired many of you to take that next step.

You’re going to love hearing from these three rockstar entrepreneurs

So let me tell you a little bit about each of my guests. They’re in completely different industries but they all have one thing in common…they have successfully combined their courses with memberships.

Listen to your students when they tell you they want more of you...

Jamie Swanson is a busy mama of six who teaches other photographers how to work with entrepreneurs and influencers who need a steady stream of images to grow their personal brand. Her course teaches photographers how to pivot their business from whatever type of photography they’ve been doing before, maybe family portraits, weddings, etc.) to this new hot market for personal brand photography. After finishing Jamie’s course, her students were constantly asking how they could continue working with her. She knew a membership site would serve them best. Listen in as Jamie shares her biggest fears about opening up a membership site (hello, content treadmill!), how she’s embraced a simple model that her students love and her whopping conversion rate when she opened up her membership site to her existing students.

Think your course is too niched for a membership site?

Think again! Jesse Mencia teaches hand-lettering to Spanish speaking women, as well as how they can turn their hobby of hand-lettering into a business by selling their beautiful products. Jesse started with a six-week course, but quickly saw the need for continued support after her students finished up her course. Once again, her students wanted more and they were willing to pay. Listen in as Jesse shares her inspiring story.

From rock solid copywriting foundation to confident business building...

Belinda is a copywriter who teaches aspiring copywriters how to gain confidence in working with clients, hone their craft and build thriving copywriting businesses. Now, listen carefully because we’ve got a theme going on here...Belinda’s students, like both Jamie and Jesse, told her they wanted more from her. When they gained confidence in their copywriting from her course, the next right step was to learn how to build and scale their businesses, and that’s where her membership site came in. Listen in as Belinda shares how she runs her membership site and how she’s adding some new promotional strategies to the mix.

Each of these ladies has had great success and they all golden insights to share, such as…

How to batch 10 weeks of content in one four hour block
How to share your membership with your course students
How a membership site helps your best students to get greater results

If you’re curious about how you can combine a membership with your course, you won’t want to miss this episode!And if you want more of the secrets that have helped these ladies succeed, you’ll want to sign up for my dear friend Stu McLaren’s FREE workshop, Recurring Revolution.

Sign up here!

#260: All About Membership Sites: Your Top 10 Burning Questions with Stu McLaren Email

25 april 2019 | 80 min

So many of you have asked me questions about setting up a membership site so you could serve your audience in a bigger and deeper way. Well, I thought I better bring in someone who knows membership sites in and out, and directly ask him your burning questions, all about membership sites. I like to call Stu McLaren the Membership Man. He is, hands down, the go-to source for all things membership.

In 2008, Stu knew something had to give. He was burning the candle at both ends providing one-on-one services to clients. While his business would be seen as successful by most because the money was there, he was trading time for dollars and this was not the answer to where he saw his future. Especially one with kids in it, like he and his wife were hoping for.

Long story short, Stu decided he needed a new business model to take what he was already doing and share it in a more leveraged way -- a model that included recurring revenue. Upon the suggestion from a friend and business mentor, he started a membership site. Not only did he create a membership site for himself, but he saw a need for a tool for implementing a membership site, so he set out and created one.

Throughout his time working with the 70,000 clients who flocked to use WishList Member, the membership software platform Stu created, he learned a lot about what worked and what didn’t when it came to creating a membership site and he joined me on my podcast today to share all of that wisdom.

Here’s a snapshot of what we covered in our chat where I asked him the 10 most burning questions that you, my listener, asked:

We covered…

The difference between a membership site and a course
What kind of content you need to have inside your course
How to manage the content creation process
Pricing your membership site
Launch strategies and options for membership sites
Having your course as a prerequisite for you membership site
Launching with webinars
Incentivizing members to join

Bottom line, almost any business can benefit from having some type of membership site. And it doesn’t have to be a lot of work to invite members in, or to create content every month. The beauty of a membership site is that you get to leverage your knowledge with the content you provide and the recurring revenue that a membership will bring to your business.

Stu brought so many great insights ton how to make a membership site work for you. This was truly one of my favorite episodes of the podcast.

And there’s so much more where that came from! If you’re wondering whether a membership site can work for you, or wanting to know how to grow your existing site, I highly encourage you to join Stu’s free workshop by visiting amyporterfield.com/stu.

Join us both and listen to the episode now!

This episode is brought to you by Tribe. Join the free TRIBE Workshop today and learn how to Turn What You Already Know, Love, And Do Into A Successful Membership Business.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#259: 7 Secrets to Talking About Your Product Like a Pro

18 april 2019 | 42 min

One of the best ways to sell your product is to get out there and tell people about it. This isn’t always easy! After this episode, you’re going to be armed with strategies to confidently talk about your product like a pro.

After an exhausting launch, I found myself mindlessly flipping through channels and stumbled upon an infomercial for Bye Bye Foundation with IT Cosmetics founder Jamie Lima. This is a woman who knows how to SELL her product to the tune of millions and millions of dollars.

I noticed that Jamie talks about her product in a very specific way. The words she was using… the way she repeats herself… it was like magic! She was seamlessly talking about her product the way I’d like to talk about my own programs while on webinars and Facebook Lives.

I began studying her work and really paying attention. I discovered that she has very specific strategies for talking about her product, so I broke those down for you in this episode. I also give you some tips and tricks to apply Jamie’s expert strategies when talkinb about your own products.

Grab your free cheat sheet here!

The Seven Secrets for Talking About Your Product Like a Pro:

[06:51] Solidify your verbal tagline. A verbal tagline is something that you say over and over again. Create an inspirational or motivational tagline that talks about your product.
[10:34] Tell what it is. You’ve got to be clear on exactly what it is you’re selling. It may seem obvious to you, but it may not be to your potential customer. You want to highlight what is most important about your product, program or service through the use of very concise phrases or words.
[13:58] Tell what it's not. You just need one or two sentences of what your product is not. Find one or two things that you know your audience doesn't want because that allows you to then move into what it IS in an inspirational way. This contrast can be very powerful.
[16:08] Tell why it's unique. There are likely multiple ways your product, program or service is unique, but it’s important to highlight ONE specific way it’s very unique to set you apart from your competition.
[20:37] Identify a few core themes. Come up with verbal themes. Jamie uses the words “different” and “deserve” a lot as her theme words. A theme word I use when I talk about my programs is “doable”. It’s important to have some themes that are constant when talking about your product, program or service.
[26:09] Future pace with an intentional one-liner. Future pacing by beginning a sentence with “Imagine…” will help your potential customer look at what’s possible, or what’s ahead for them. You want them to get excited and future pacing will help them to envision a better future for themselves if they purchase your product, program or service.
[28:23] Choose testimonials that speak to all of the above. When getting testimonials from your customers, make sure to ask the right questions to get authentic answers that talk about your product in a way that mirrors how you talk about your product.

I've created a cheat sheet that will walk you through these seven secrets in detail but will also prompt you to create each of these snippets on your own so that you have them when you go into your next promotion. Grab the cheat sheet here!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

#258: Achieve More While Doing Less with Michael Hyatt

11 april 2019 | 59 min

As entrepreneurs, we’re driven by our passion and ideas. There is never a lack of projects and things that need to get done. Even worse, we often jump from one task to the next as we try to get caught up with our endless list.

Does it seem like you never have enough time in the day to get the important stuff done? Are you frantically trying to whittle down that endless list? We all get caught up in this cycle. That’s why I’m so excited to have Michael Hyatt back on the show.

Michael says:

“It's almost impossible to accomplish anything significant when you're racing through an endless litany of tasks and emergencies. And yet, this is how many of us spend our days, our weeks, months, years, sometimes our entire lives.”

Michael operated like this for years when he was an overworked and stressed executive at Thomas Nelson Publishers. Michael, now on the other side of this unsustainable and unhealthy work pattern, has cracked the code on a system of productivity and focus that is designed to help you avoid burnout in your business.

Michael was tired of working harder and accomplishing less. It’s FOCUS that drives our businesses and our personal lives. In this episode, Michael shares the principles from his new book Free to Focus: A Total Productivity System to Achieve More by Doing Less, so we can accomplish what matters.

The Free to Focus System:

[07:34] Productivity is really about freedom. Freedom is a BIG reason people get into business. The book covers four freedoms: The freedom to focus. We need sustained focus and concentration. The freedom to be present. This is the freedom to be 100% present with whoever you are with. The freedom to be spontaneous, and the freedom to do nothing.
[12:12] There are also three phases to Freedom to Focus. They are Stop, Cut, and Act. The first three chapters focus on Stop. First, you need to formulate a vision of a more productive future. Then evaluate the work you are doing using the freedom compass. And always rejuvenate and take time for self-care. Formulate, evaluate, and rejuvenate.
[14:22] Using the Freedom Compass:
True North is where passion and proficiency come together.
South is the drudgery zone. Things your not passionate about or proficient in.
East is the disinterest zone. Things you are good at but not passionate about.
West is the distraction zone. Things you enjoy doing but aren’t good at.
[18:11] Things on your freedom compass that you love and are good at are in your desire zone. This is where you should focus the bulk of your energy. Eliminate, automate, or delegate everything that's not in the desire zone.
[30:41] Michael plays mythbuster to the objections that entrepreneurs have about delegation. Hiring a VA enables you to repurpose time for more valuable activities.
[35:46] Act also has three steps. They are consolidate, designate, and activate. To consolidate avoid context switching and batch activities.
[38:53] Designate is designing your year by identifying three goals for your quarter, week, and each day. Imagine how powerful your days would be if you accomplish three important things on a daily basis.
[43:00] Activate is about managing the interruptions. Check in before going into a deep work session, so you won't be interrupted. Turn off notifications. Let technology serve you.
Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#257: How to Sell More by Offering Less

4 april 2019 | 45 min

Are you making it as easy as possible for your followers to buy from you? Is it possible to put out too much content? Many of us, myself included, struggle with thinking more is more when it comes to the products, services, and programs that we offer our potential customers.

It may seem counterintuitive, but offering MORE can actually make people click away!

Giving people too many options can cause decision fatigue and your potential customer will click away from your blog or video without signing up or purchasing from you.

We’re living in an age with options everywhere. If it takes too much brain power for someone to decide on something, they're out. It's your job to make it as easy as possible for your followers to make a decision. Your audience will be much more apt to buy if you present them with less offers that are better quality,

In this episode, I help you determine the fine line of less is more when it comes to content. Did you know that a person is less likely to buy if given too many choices? I’ve got a study to prove it to you.

I’ll also help you understand why it’s important to have flow, and a clear beginning, middle, and end. Want to become a go-to guide in your field? I’ve got that covered, too.

These three foolproof steps will help you narrow down the options that you present to your audience:

Listen to your customers. Be intentional about hearing what your customers are asking for. If you listen closely, your audience will tell you exactly what they want.
Carefully watch your audience's behavior. Where do conversions take place? Where can you narrow down your options?
You cannot fear pivoting when necessary. Notice patterns and trends with your audience and do more of what’s working and cut out what’s not working.

Your next clear step: Have a 15-minute brainstorming session and write down what you offer. Ask these questions. Does it feel like too much? Is it clear?

Click here to listen now!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#256: The Forgotten Funnel: Increase Customer Value Without Selling More

28 mars 2019 | 52 min

“New customers are good, but existing customers are better.” - Casey Graham

Did you know it takes five times as much to attract a new customer as it does to keep an existing one? Five times!

Most businesses put a huge focus on getting NEW customers (which is important), but where they’re missing the mark is by not equally nurturing the EXISTING customers that they do have.

On today’s podcast episode I talk to Casey Graham, founder of Gravy, the company that helps entrepreneurs and business owners (including myself) solve the problem of failed payments and credit card declines in their business. Why did I bring him on? Because he’s an incredibly smart and strategic business owner who knows how to create profitable businesses - he’s built several from the ground up and is a master at growing thriving teams that wow their customers on a daily basis.

Casey says that f you were to increase keeping your existing customers who are paying you by 5%, you could increase your profits by 25-95%, depending on your type of business. That’s a game-changer, my friend!

As a business owner, you’ve got to develop a customer-centric business and this episode is going to give you a roadmap to do just that as Casey drills down on the 5 non-negotiables of setting up a stellar system of customer care (aka the forgotten funnel) in your business.

Person - define who you are (the owner/leader of your organization) and who you are serving (your customers)
People - how is your team (or you) set up to serve your customers?
Process - how are you intentionally valuing your customers before you ask for more value?
Product - what’s your product value ladder to continue to serve customers?
Profit - what are you doing to reduce churn and close the back door?

You’re going to be able to walk away today with some simple strategies that you can incorporate into your business immediately that will literally change how your customers see you and most importantly how they feel about you on a daily basis.

This episode is brought to you by Gravy, the company I trust to contact my customers within hours of a failed payment, capturing the updated billing information, and saving the customer my team and I worked so hard to acquire. If your revenue is currently at $250K or more a year and you know you’re losing money due to failed payments each month, I encourage you to check out Gravy. Click here to see how they can be an extension of your customer service and save you money.

SUBSCRIBE & REVIEW IN ITUNES

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#255: What's Keeping You Safe Is What's Keeping You Stuck

21 mars 2019 | 39 min

What’s keeping you stuck? Are you in an unfulfilling 9-5 job that you’re dying to get out of? Maybe your side hustle is not progressing along fast enough. Is the business model you created just not feeling right? Or maybe you’ve been at it for a while and your revenue numbers just aren’t where you want them to be. No matter what it is, if you’re feeling stuck in any area of your business, that needs to stop and today’s episode is going to help.

We will explore the four areas that are likely keeping you stuck and my goal is for you to recognize what these areas are so you can formulate a plan to start moving forward in the direction you want to go.

Following are the four areas I’ll discuss in this episode to keep you moving forward:

Understanding what your safety blanket is and how it’s likely holding you back. Safe can be a good thing, but that’s not always the case in your business and I’ll explain why.
Which of your own expectations are holding you back? Setting expectations for yourself are good, but you’ve got to ground those expectations in goals and processes to get you to that goal.
How to get clear on the systems that are necessary to get the results you want. I’ll share an excerpt from a book I’m reading now that has totally rocked my world when it comes to goal setting. I’ll walk you through the new mindset shift I’ve created that is going to help me to reach my impossible goal.
Why it’s important to fuel your brain by doing something different. Inspiration can come in many different packages, and expanding your horizons in what you read, listen to, and watch can get you right out of the creative rut you may be in.

Are you ready to move past the feelings of being stuck or unfulfilled? Let’s do this! Press play to listen in.

This episode is brought to you by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan. My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm). If you are struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you.

#254: From Crippling Excuses to Empowered Action with Rachel Holllis

14 mars 2019 | 62 min

Rachel Hollis is in the house!! Literally, she came to my house and we sat in my studio for this interview! I normally do my interviews via Skype or Zoom, so the in-person interview was both nerve-wracking and super fun! I think you’ll love listening to this episode.

Rachel, who in case you aren’t familiar with, is a #1 New York Times best-selling author of Girl, Wash Your Face, she’s got a new book that’s now out, Girl, Stop Apologizing. She’s a motivational speaker, a top-rated podcast host -- and, oh yeah, she’s got four kids! This woman is a powerhouse and she brought her A-game today.

During the interview, we talk about Rachel’s new book, Girl, Stop Apologizing. The book’s subtitle is A Shame-Free Plan for Embracing and Achieving Your Goals -- let me tell you, this book is super tactical when it comes to setting and achieving your goals, but the way Rachel delivers her message through her gift of story-telling, her wonderful sense of humor, and her no-nonsense belief that if you have a dream, you CAN make it happen. I just know this is going to be one of your favorite reads!

Alright, I want you to pop those earbuds in and listen right away, but if you want a sneak peek of what we talk about during the interview, here you go:

I asked Rachel what she thinks about the minute she opens her eyes in the morning. I just loved her honesty: tired and anxious. She talks about the season she’s in right now and talks about how she gets herself moving and in a better state.
We talk about being people pleasers and worrying about what people think about us. Rachel is very much in the public eye, so she’s got really great insight on this struggle that so many of us deal with.
Rachel addresses two common excuses so many of us use (I hand-picked these two from the several she talks about in her book specifically for you, because I hear these same excuses from my audience all the time): “I don’t have enough time.” and “I’m not enough to succeed.”
We talk about the simple 5 to Thrive model that Rachel says has literally changed her personal and professional life. It’s so simple, yet so powerful!
Some people wonder how Rachel did it. They call her an “overnight success”. She debunks that myth right off the bat and drops some truth bombs in the process.
Rachel talks about how she built her following (she has over 1 million on Instagram alone!) by getting to know her Ideal Customer Avatar (ICA). She tells how this quote she heard over 10 years ago, “Follow the signs of life,” helped guide her in really getting to know her ICA and use that to monetize her business.

You guys, there is so much value, inspiration and tactical advise to living the life that you dream of AND you deserve. Don’t wait another minute, click here to listen in to my interview with the one and only, Rachel Hollis!

This episode is sponsored by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan”. My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm). If you are struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you.

LINKS:

Girl, Wash Your Face, by Rachel Hollis (Physical Book)
Girl, Wash Your Face, by Rachel Hollis (Audible version)
Girl, Stop Apologizing, by Rachel Hollis (Physical Book)
Girl, Stop Apologizing, By Rachel Hollis (Audible version)
Blackberry Farm in Tennessee (where we took our girl’s trip)
Follow Rachel on Instagram

SUBSCRIBE & REVIEW IN ITUNES

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

#253: How to Grow Your Local Business with Online Marketing Strategies

7 mars 2019 | 55 min

I’m often asked if the strategies used for online marketing can be translated to the local business. Maybe you have a hair salon, a dance studio, a wine shop, a real estate agency, a pet grooming business… The question is, how can we take the information I talk about list building, lead magnets, funnels, social media strategy and all the other topics that come up and use them effectively to get more customers through your physical storefront?

Since I’m not an expert in this area, I brought in someone who is. My guest on the podcast today is Stacy Tuschl, the creator of She’s Building Her Empire Podcast & Community where she helps female entrepreneurs automate their businesses so they can do more with less. She’s also a best-selling author AND has two dance studios in Milwaukee, WI grossing over one million dollars per year!

You’ll love Stacy’s teaching style: she’s very specific and gives lots of examples and actionable steps for you to take right away. This interview is great for those of you with a brick and mortar business, but even if you are in the online space only, you will learn a ton.

Here’s a breakdown of what we discussed:

The most common struggle that brick and mortar businesses face and how to overcome that struggle and bring more customers in the door
The three funnels that convert very well (we’ve got a great freebie to walk you through these funnels, too. Just click here to grab it!)

Get them in your building Funnel

Education Funnel

Upsell Funnel

What you need to consider as far as what to include on your opt-in and thank you pages, funnel content and number of emails included in each. This can be very different from the typical online marketing funnels.
Tips and strategies for getting lots of honest online reviews from your customers. Stacy got 60 reviews in one week!
The 3 Ts of Success (These are simple strategies, but so very valuable. And these will hold true whether you’re an online marketer or brick-and-mortar.)
What you need to know (and not know) about your competition. Wondering if you should use Google ad words, Yelp, Facebook ads? Stacy’s got some great insight for you on this.
The importance of claiming your Google listing.
How to leverage social media as a brick and mortar business (P.S. A small social media following is ok!)
And as a bonus, Stacy shares some great online tips for hiring new employees for your local business.

You guys, my chat with Stacy was 100% filled with useful strategies and tips! I can’t wait for you to listen. You’re going to walk away with specific things you can implement immediately to help grow your business. Click here to listen in now!

This episode is brought to you by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan. My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm). If you’re struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you. Click here to sign up!

SUBSCRIBE & REVIEW IN ITUNES

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#252: The 3 Little Known "Personal Touchpoints" I Added to My Recent Launch

28 februari 2019 | 38 min

My team and I just finished up with the launch of my new course, Digital Course Academy, and I want to share some new strategies I used that really resonated with my audience and resulted in a big boost in sales conversions.

The three strategies all focus on personalization and are something that you will easily be able to replicate in your own launch.

Live launch personalization is more important than ever, especially when people are used to canned responses and bots. Having direct communication from a human is next-level when it comes to customer service these days. When you incorporate personal touches to your launch, you are helping your prospective customers to be able to decide whether they want to purchase your program, product or service.

Here are the three personal touches that I go over in today’s episode will be game-changers for your next live launch:

Personalization #1: Recording Audio Messages Via Snagit Learn how I used Snagit, the quick and easy screen capture and/or recorder application, to provide personalized customer service messages that really wowed my audience. I also mention how I’ve recently been introduced and have begun using Loom to handle the same task.

Personalization #2: Live Sales Page Chat With OlarkLearn how I used Olark, to provide stellar live sales page chat during my launch. This tool will allow you to answer real-time questions, in-the-moment from your potential customers when they’re making the buying decision. When handled right, these conversations will significantly increase your conversions. These prompt, “real-time” conversations are priceless. Whether it’s you in there or someone on your team that’s very familiar with your content, make sure to set up a system for live chat support during your next live launch.

Personalization #3: Recording an Off the Cuff, From the Heart, Final VideoThis is a video to record in real-time and send out on the final day when you’re closing the doors for people to be able to purchase your program, product, or service. I’ll tell you what to include in the email to deliver the video (the subject line and body copy) and what you should say in the video. The timing of recording this video is critical because you want to be feeling all the emotions that you will have on that last day. You will be coming in raw, honest, and extremely helpful with this last bit of communication to your prospective customer.

There you have it! I’ve shared my secrets and I hope you take what worked well for me and incorporate these strategies in your next live launch. Believe me, you will never be sorry for adding these personal touches.

Click here to listen now!

This episode is brought to you by:

SUBSCRIBE & REVIEW IN ITUNES

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#251: How I'd Grow My Business If I Were Starting From Scratch

21 februari 2019 | 51 min

I was thinking about you, my listener, the other day and thought, “What can I give to them that would help them most in their businesses right where they are today.” This is my tenth year of business in the online marketing space, and I have learned a lot. Ups and downs, successes and failures...and through it all, I learned invaluable lessons along the way. I’m going to take that ten years of learning and share it with you in today’s podcast episode.

Specifically, I’m going to share what I would have done differently were I starting from scratch today. Now, this is not only for those newbies out there. There are many foundational principles that even the most seasoned entrepreneur can learn from to ensure you are a building a business that is sustainable. I know I’m still learning as I go along, so I hope today’s episode will help you wherever you are in your business journey.

Here are the areas

Where I Would Spend My Money

I’ll be talking about the must-have tools I use in my business, as well as how to choose the right personal development investment that will serve you best.

What I Would Focus On The Most (especially in the first two years)

Don’t do what I did in my first two years of business. You MUST create original content consistently AND know who you’re talking to. Too many overcomplicate this process and I’ll share how to keep it simple to move your business forward in a powerful way. I’ll also discuss the importance of knowing and declaring exactly HOW you want to make money in your business.

What I Would Say Yes To More Often

What I talk about here would have looked very different five and ten years ago. This will be the same for you because the business you have today will look dramatically look different just a few years from now. You will make choices today that you won’t make years from now because your business will be different.

What I Would Say No To More Often

You may be surprised by some of what I discuss here, but please, please heed my advice here. Your time is valuable and there are some things that may look good but are not good for growing your business.

The Mindset Shift I Would Make Early On

With so much noise in the online world, there is one key mindset shift that will be invaluable for you personally and in your business. It’s all about asking yourself higher value questions. I’ve got a worksheet for you with some great examples to get you going.

The Habits I Would Adopt Early On - Habits That Would Shape My Identity

Establishing good habits in your life will be a game-changer! Your level of success is directly tied to how you show up on a daily basis, and creating habits is the key.

I think this episode is going to be really helpful to you in your journey, so take a listen and use the lessons I’ve learned over the past 10 years as a shortcut to your success.

#250: How to Create a 3-Month Content Calendar (The Step-by-Step Process)

14 februari 2019 | 39 min

You’ve heard it before, right? Content is KING.

That is certainly true and I’ll be the first to tell you that the quality and consistency of your content directly correlate to the growth of your email list AND your bank account.

The operative word in that last sentence was consistency. Without consistency when it comes to your content creation, content is not king.

You probably know that I just recently launched my new course, Digital Course Academy, and I can guarantee that if you ask any of my students what the ONE thing that I’m a stickler about...they will tell you that I want them creating consistent content on a weekly basis.

The reason why I’m such a stickler about this is that In order for you to have a thriving online business, you’ve got to create consistent content in order to attract your tribe. Once you’ve attracted your tribe and they’re paying attention, that’s when you build the “know, like, and trust” factor. And once they know, like, and trust you, they will likely buy from you.

Creating consistent content on a weekly basis is NOT always easy and it takes time, however, it’s a clear step that, should you commit to, will pay dividends in the success of your business.

The question is: how do you make sure this weekly content gets done?

You create a content plan. And I can help you with that!

In fact, in this episode, I go over these three things:

A foolproof plan to create consistent content, that will leave you feeling confident, excited and inspired
My top 5 favorite ways to choose topics that your Ideal Customer Avatar will want to eat up immediately (You’re going to find these VERY useful!)
I’ll tell you all about the 3-Month Content Calendar Template I created for you to keep all your content organized. I’ve got it all laid out in a spreadsheet that you can take and make your own. All you have to do is follow the prompts and fill in the blanks and you’ll be good to go! You can download the calendar here.

Click here to listen to the episode now.

#249: The Seven Biggest Fears That Stop People From Building An Online Business with Marie Forleo

7 februari 2019 | 56 min

Having fear is a natural part of running a business. The key is to not let those fears stop you from doing the work that you were created to do. But what do you do when those fears threaten to throw you off your game or derail you completely? You take action and keep moving forward, but sometimes you need a little inspiration to keep you going.

In this episode, my friend Marie Forleo (entrepreneur extraordinaire) and I are going to share the seven biggest fears that we have personally struggled with and overcome. Our intention is to pull back the curtain to show that some of the very things you may be experiencing now may be obstacles, but they are not insurmountable.

This is my 10th year of running an online business and Marie is in her 20th year! We’ve seen it all and experienced ALL the fears (and still do!), so come along and let’s see if we can provide some helpful insight for you and your business!

To give you an extra dose of inspiration, I asked Marie to also share stories of her B-School students and how they, too, faced similar fears and what they did to work through them to build thriving, profitable and successful online businesses. You’re going to learn so many valuable tips and tricks that will help you navigate through similar fears when they come up in your own business.

Here’s a rundown of the 7 fears we discuss in the episode:

I don’t have an email list. How in the world can I start a business without one?
I don’t have enough skills to make an online business work.
It’s all been done before. My market is saturated with people doing what I want to do.
I’m too old to be starting a business online.
I want to do something different than I’ve been doing for the last 5, 10 or 20 years, but I’m not sure how to start over.
I can’t figure out all the tech that’s needed to get my business up and running.
I am overwhelmed...it’s just too much.

We’ll also talk about Marie’s free online business building workshop that she just released in which she’ll teach you The 6 Pillars of Building an Online Business. Marie has a tremendous gift for breaking things down to simple and understandable next steps, so you do not want to miss being in this free workshop.

The first video in the workshop series goes live today and you are going to get so much value. You can find it at AmyPorterfield.com/Marie. Don’t wait, because the series will only be available for a limited time.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#248: How I Built My Business

31 januari 2019 | 51 min

You asked some tough questions, and today I’ve got answers!

I recently put out a post on Instagram to all of you, asking: What would you like to know about how I built my business?

The response was amazing! You all sent in SO many questions and today, I’m going to answer 10 of them.

I tried picking topics that I haven’t covered all that much on previous episodes, and that would resonate with as many as you as possible.

Here are those 10 questions:

#1: If you burned it all down & started over, what are the first 3 things you’d focus on & do now? (This one was a super timely one!)

#2: What did you do when your email list was TINY? I mean less than 100, like mine 😅. How did you interact with your small community? (It all started with me underpromising, and overdelivering…)

#3: When you have multiple awesome projects you’re working on, how do you prioritize? (Shout out to my project management tool, Asana!)

#4: In hindsight, what is one thing you wish you would have done sooner? (If you’re a loyal listener, you know the painful answer to this one!)

#5: How do you set boundaries for quality family time and one on one time? (I need to be open and honest: I work on this every single day.)

#6: Have you veered off course and how did you know when to get back on course or go ahead in that different direction? (So I’ve never been big on chasing shiny objects, but I also get too comfortable sometimes…)

#7: How did you originally grow your podcast audience? What specifically did you leverage? Or was it purely organic? (I would say it was about two years before the podcast was doing amazing things.)

#8: Apart from weekly consistent content what moved the success needle for you? (This one was REALLY hard for me at first…)

#9: What do you do in the moments when you doubt yourself? (For me, I just keep doing…)

#10: Which mentor do you credit for making the biggest impact in creating the biz you ❤️ today? (A little tribute to my mom and dad, and how I got the best of both worlds.)

I really hope this episode proves valuable to you. I’m sharing a little bit of what’s in my secret sauce, and I and my wish is that it inspires you to kick butt in your business.

Don’t forget to check out the links at the bottom of this page. I couldn’t get to all of the questions, so I’ve listed some resource podcasts down below as an additional tool for you!

Now, let’s dive in! Let’s get your burning questions answered!

This episode is sponsored by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan: My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm). If you are struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#247: Why I've Agreed to Fail 100 Times in 12 Months

24 januari 2019 | 40 min

I’m setting very specific goals this year, and one of them, is to epically fail. Again and again.

I know that sounds crazy—but hear me out.

You all have shared with me how you’ve struggled with the fears and confusion of building an online business. I started this podcast by sharing marketing strategies and step-by-step details to get things done—build a list, create a digital course, launch webinars, you get it.

BUT because you guys have asked me for more and have asked me about the mentality I use to run my business, I’m going to share with you how I’m setting goals for the New Year.

These are some behind-the-scenes details of where I’m going with my business. I’m also going to invite you into my personal world a bit.

I’ve set about 10 goals for the year, and in today’s episode, I’m going to share four of them with you. My:

Impossible Goal
Business Goal
Health-Related Goal, and
Personal Growth Goal

I’m also sharing the three things I’m going to do to ensure my goals stick.

I’m sure you’re wondering where the epic fails fit in, right?

As I start working toward my Impossible Goal, I’m going to write out 25 Epic Fails for each quarter—that’s 100 for the year. These are the crazy things, that will probably lead to a fail, that will get me closer to my goal. You’ve got to be willing to do whatever it takes, even if that means fail, in order to get what you really want, right?

My hope for you is that by the end of this episode, you’re ready to lock in your goals for the year and be inspired to fail with me.

Are you ready to be a goal-getter in 2019? Hit play now.

This episode is brought to you by Gravy—my very own 24/7 engagement team who contacts my customers within hours of their failed payment, captures updated billing information and saves the customers I worked so hard to acquire. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans, you’ve got to check out Gravy!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#246: Choosing Your ONE Thing with Jay Papasan

17 januari 2019 | 65 min

It’s so easy to get caught up on all the little details of launching a course, running a business—or, hey, living life. All these little things compete for your attention and energy.

The thing is: Living like this isn’t going to help you realize your full potential and true success.

The key to extraordinary results? Finding your ONE THING—your number one priority at any given point in time.

And I’ve got THE expert on this topic on the show today, my new friend Jay Papasan, author of the amazing book The ONE Thing: The Surprisingly Simple Truth Behind Extraordinary Results.

His book—one of my favorites—has sold more than 1.3 million copies worldwide, and has appeared on national bestseller lists more than 400 times. And I truly believe that the principles in this book are the difference between realizing your potential and true success and honestly, just settling.

In addition to dishing about your one thing, or “true priority,” Jay and I talk about the real secret to sticking to your goals, and it’s about one word: Habits.

After this episode, you’re going to walk away with a new sense of purpose. You’re going to move past the distractions and overwhelm and get to a place where you’re hitting your goals and living stress free.

Are you ready to for this type of clarity and focus? Head on over now!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#245: How to Use a Virtual Assistant to Make Your Webinars More Profitable (+ Easier!)

10 januari 2019 | 26 min

It’s very I’m going to introduce you to a secret weapon that’s going to help you kick butt in webinars.

When I ran my first webinar waaaay back in the day, I enlisted my best friend to come over to my condo help me out. She sat next to me—really, I was almost sitting on her lap, I was so nervous—and made sure everyone could hear me and see my slides. She made sure everything went right, that way all I had to do was focus on giving my best to all my attendees.

I didn’t know it then, but I had essentially hired my best friend to be my virtual assistant during that first webinar. We made it through and that webinar was a success, but let me tell you, if I could do it over again, I would do it exactly how I’m going to outline for you in today’s podcast.

Virtual assistants are your secret weapon to rocking a webinar! They’re the key to making your webinars not only more profitable, but EASIER for you. And you know how I feel: webinars are the absolute best way to promote and market your digital course online.

But I want pause here for a second, because I’m sure some of you will tune out during this episode—or may even be tempted to skip it—because you don’t think you’re ready for a digital course. And if you’re not ready for a digital course, obviously you won’t be ready for a webinar. I’ve solved this conundrum for you.

I created a brand-new quiz called Should I Create a Digital Course for My Business.

I spent months and months on this, and I promise you, it’ll point you in the right direction. So take the quiz, figure out where you’re at, or if a digital course is even right for you, then come back to this episode.

Because even if you’re not ready for a webinar right now, it’s good to have an idea of what it’ll look like once you do have your digital course created. You’ll know exactly how to make your webinar easier on yourself, and you won’t have all the fears of something going wrong.

Remember my last episode? One of the biggest fears of launching has to do with a running a live webinar. But we’re not going to let those fears hold us back in our business! I’m sharing how to enlist virtual assistants so you can fear less, do your best, and make money, money, money!

So press play and listen to me gush about why virtual assistants are your secret weapon for webinars.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#244: How to Get Past the Fear of Launching

3 januari 2019 | 46 min

I’m here to get honest about the fears that come up around launching.

Because they are too real. And I have faced MANY of them.

If you’ve been listening for a while, then you know I had a HUGE fear of launching courses using webinars. I royally screwed up the first webinar I ever touched, back in my Tony Robbins days. Another time I had THE Marie Forleo live on my webinar, and it went completely silent right as I introduced her.

#epicfail

But as bad as those experiences were, I didn’t let them define me as a business owner. Because if I let that fear take over, I wouldn’t be where I am today.

Maybe you’ve had similar horrifying experiences. Maybe you had a webinar and no one showed up. Or you put a lot of effort into a launch for crickets. Well I’m here to tell you: That’s part of being in business. And you have to bust through that fear and march forward if you want to be successful.

And here’s the great news: I’ve generated well over $9 million through webinar launches by NOT letting the fear hold me back—and you can have that kind of success too…but you HAVE to get over your fear of launching!

For today’s episode, I’m going to drill down into the most common fears when it comes to launching, and how to squash them.

I’m going to break down some important insights you need to know and shake up some of your mindset blocks that are holding you back from giving it 100% when you launch something new.

It’s time to launch face first, hands out wide, ready to accept anything that comes your way. Are you ready for that? Press play and let’s dive in.

By the way, if your head is spinning just at the idea of a launch, I get it.

The truth is you likely have not been taught many of the crazy nuances around launching strategies.

Which is exactly what I wanted to break down the big picture of what it takes to launch a digital course, in my new masterclass. I’ll give you three behind-the-scenes secrets to digital course success in 2019 and beyond. I’ll share how to build, launch a grow a digital course business without the overwhelm and confusion.

Go to amyporterfield.com/dcamasterclass to sign up—make sure you reserve your spot, because I will be doing this class LIVE only!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#243: The #1 Secret to Playing a Bigger Game In Your Business

27 december 2018 | 20 min

Have you ever felt like your dreams were bigger than you are? So big that they felt out of reach?

Maybe you want to write a best-selling book or start a talk show, buy your dream house, or travel to islands you can’t even pronounce! Or, maybe you’re being interviewed on The Today Show by Savannah and Hoda (that’s my dream, just in case you’re wondering).

Those are good solid dreams that feel light years away. You think about them and then you put them on the shelf. Instead of going after them you fiddle around and worry about things that you know won’t matter in the long run—like staring at your Insta feed or worrying that your website opt-in isn’t quite right.

The reality is that you have likely been afraid to do big things and I get it. You’ve been playing small. It’s sad but it’s true—and I’ve been in the same boat.

It’s time for a change, my friend.

You’re here right now. You’re listening to a podcast that promises to help you make a bigger impact in the world. That proves to me you’re in this and you’re not taking your business or your life lightly.

In this episode, I’m going to walk you through an exercise that will help you make some crucial decisions about moving forward in a bigger way. Listen through to the end of the episode, download this special PDF, and make sure you finish the exercise.

But promise me that in the next 24 hours you will commit to doing this worksheet…

Here’s why this exercise is so important: right now, today, you can reclaim the fact that you are a big deal.

Because you are meant to be a big deal in this world. You are ready. Your time is now. It’s never too late, so hit play now, let’s start making those big dreams come true.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#242: Choosing the Perfect Topic for Your First Digital Course (Perfect...AND Profitable!)

20 december 2018 | 41 min

Looking for a little inspiration when it comes to the topic of your course?

If you’re like most course creators just starting out (who I hear from all of the time!), you’ve had an idea for your course for some time, but you aren’t sure how to move forward, or if your core market will even pay for it.

So in this ep, I will walk through three approaches to help you choose your next course topic.

To up the fun factor, I am going to teach this episode with real-life examples from some of my students. You’ll hear how they built their courses based on their successes, including one superstar who made $255,000 with one webinar and a couple of emails as a follow-up.

I will also show you how to take what you teach with your customers or clients one-on-one and turn that framework into a digital course so that you can move away from that client work you enjoy in the beginning, but then get burnt out with over time.

This episode will definitely spark some creative juices for you—and better yet, show you what’s possible in the digital course world!

And if you want to keep the momentum going, make sure to download my brand new freebie called The Ultimate Course Creation Starter Kit. In this Starter Kit I’ll show you how to choose the right “course type” for your business, the perfect course name to attract your perfect audience, and how to kickstart your course idea validation on social media to ensure your audience will be willing to invest.

Grab a copy of that special free guide here.

I truly believe you have something you can teach others that can become a digital course. Allow yourself to dream a little bit. And don’t let the fear of “what will others think” stop you. Creating a digital course has transformed my life, and the lives of so many of my students. I want you to experience what’s possible. Listen up now.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#241: How a Mom of 4 Turned Her Chiseled Abs Into $330K Using Webinars In Just 9 Months with Kim Constable

13 december 2018 | 55 min

#240: 3 Types of Profitable Digital Courses You Can Create (And How to Choose the Best One For Your Business)

6 december 2018 | 47 min

7 Things You Must Do When Planning for 2019 (My Best Revenue Boosting Ideas)

4 december 2018 | 54 min

It’s planning time. My favorite time of year. Time to pull out the giant calendar, the sharpies, and any other office supply I can get my hands on. And start to plan for BIG things in 2019.

In this special bonus episode, I walk through my 7-step process for getting what you really want in your business in 2019. Download my 2019 Planning Roadmap and follow along, because I know great things are waiting for you next year...

Are you ready?

Oh, and three things before you get started…

#1: Just focus on the first 6 months. Don’t think beyond that so you can stay focused.

#2: Take ONE entire day to plan. Break out that white board, the post-its, anything that gets your juices flowing, and eliminate any distractions. Think about getting out of your environment, even booking a hotel room for a day so you can really dive in.

#3: Plan with someone who knows your business. Whether it’s your virtual assistant or a trusted colleague, the more someone knows you and where you want to go, the better.

Again, make sure to download the step-by-step worksheet that goes along with this episode—your 2019 Planning Roadmap—to follow along and do this exercise.

Let’s get started…

First you’re going to start with your opportunities and big dreams for the next 6 months. Will you create your own digital course? Hire a VA for extra support? FINALLY write that book that’s been swirling around in your brain?

Then you are going to decide on your non-negotiables—what did you hate doing this year? What are you not willing to do or experience to get to your wildly successful year? There is always stuff that you just get tired of doing. For me, I’m no longer to make excuses for not posting on Social Media. You might say: I’m no longer going to take clients out of fear that you will lose out on the money.

Then you get to the fun part—to declare your number. Is it $555K or $55K? How much do you want want to earn next year?

Next you’ll take a step back to move forward. I’m not about living in the past, however one thing I always do on my planning day is to look at the metrics of 2018. Because so much of what you’ve done (the good, the bad and the ugly) influences how you are going to move forward.

Then you’ll do your calendar planning in two phases. This is the big step. In phase one you’ll figure out how you’ll make the number you declared. Then in phase two you will calendar it out.

Then you’ll identify how you need to show up to make 2019 the biggest year yet.

In the final step, you’re taking action. There is where you pull it all together and identify your steps to get it done.

Now promise me one thing: At the end of this process, you need to celebrate and do something special to commemorate the moment! (My integrator, Chloe, and I did something fun and silly!)

So get going and build your vision for 2019.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#239: My Weightloss Journey (Part 2)

29 november 2018 | 49 min

I’m getting a little personal in this episode, because it’s time to revisit something I brought up back in October 2017 on this podcast: My weight.

Now, that October ep was the first time I had ever brought up my struggles with weight. I shared how I hated video because I was incredibly embarrassed about my weight. That was just over a year ago, and today, I can confidently say everything is completely different.

Coming clean to you guys put a fire under my butt and helped me make a shift in my life. I was no longer hiding this big, dirty secret from the world and that opened up space in my mind for what was possible.

It took a couple of months, but on March 25, 2018, I officially started my weight-loss journey and so much has changed about my life. I hired a weight-loss coach, Corinne Crabtree (who just so happens to be one of my students, but more on that later…), and have learned to put myself and my health first—even before work.

Since then, I’ve lost roughly 60 pounds and I’m a little more than halfway to my goal. I know that before I started this journey, any time I saw someone make such a transformation, I always wanted to know, how did you do it!? So today I’m sharing with you guys how I’ve gotten here—not just in my weight loss, but also in the mindset change that has happened.

Look, if we’re going to be real, it’s not just about the weight. I had to change the way I handled my feelings and thoughts; most importantly, my thoughts about myself. I have a feeling that many of you might need to make that kind of mental change too. My wish is that when you hear my progress, you also decide that enough is enough and you join me on this journey of letting anything hold you back from living the life you want to live and building the business you want to build.

I want this episode to be more like a conversation—so grab a cup of coffee, find a cozy spot, and press play.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#238: Success Secrets to Serving the Smallest Viable Market with Seth Godin

22 november 2018 | 39 min

Find people who want to be found.

Talk to them in ways they want to be talked to.

Take them on a journey to where they want to go.

—Seth Godin

Those are just a few of the nuggets of marketing mastery from THE Seth Godin, my longtime DREAM guest for the podcast.

I’m SO excited to have Seth on today to chat about his new book, This Is Marketing: You Can't Be Seen Until You Learn to See, and diving deep into what sets the best marketers apart from the rest.

According to Seth, as an online marketer, you know you’re not going to be able to successfully serve every single person in the world, but for some reason, you still (probably) freak out in narrowing down the people you can help or reach.

Change—and thereby, growth—can only happen when you find your smallest viable market and serve the heck out of them. You have to find and build your community in order to be an effective online marketer.

In his book, Seth writes:

“Find a corner of the market that can’t wait for your attention. Go to their extremes. Find a position on the map where you and you alone are the perfect answer. Overwhelm this group’s wants and dreams and desires with your care, your attention, and your focus. Make change happen. Change that’s so profound people can’t help but talk about it.”

That’s your goal as a marketer—to find people who want to go where you are going and who want to experience what you are offering. Then you can teach them what they need to know to get there.

If it’s your content that’s going to help them, awesome. But, as you’ll hear Seth share, that’s not the only thing they need; you should be providing them safe places that build tension, invoke change and push them forward in their journey.

His book—and this interview—have already dramatically changed the way I view content and community. And I can already tell you, it’s literally going to impact how I teach my brand-new course, Digital Course Academy.

So, are you ready to have your mind blown like I did? Press play to hear Seth’s nuggets of wisdom!

This episode is brought to you by the women of Cultivate What Matters and their Power Sheets. How would it feel to get anything you wanted? What if you could create goals with clarity and purpose? If you want to create goals that matter (“goals with soul”) then you’ve got to check out Power Sheets.

LLC or S-Corp? Choosing the Right Business Structure with Bobby Klinck

20 november 2018 | 46 min

If you’re reading this, I know that you are an entrepreneur that puts a lot of time, energy and resources to building your business. The last thing you need in your entrepreneurial journey is to run into any sort of legal trouble, but if you do, you’ll want to be protected. Better to be safe than sorry, right?

The sort of legal protection I’m talking about is setting up a corporate entity to protect you and your business. The good news is that it’s a relatively cheap investment. The double dose of good news is that I’ve got attorney extraordinaire, Bobby Klinck, on the show today to walk us through all the ins and outs of setting up an LLC or S Corp without all the confusing legal jargon.

You may remember Bobby from our GDPR episode, but what you may not know is that Bobby has become our resident attorney here at Team Porterfield. We love him because he breaks down all the legal stuff for us an understandable, doable fashion, and actually kind of makes it all fun!

What we cover in today’s episode:

The most common company forms (listed below), what they entail, how they’re different, and which is the right kind (and wrong kind) of entity for an entrepreneur to set up:

Sole Proprietorship
Partnership
LLC (including the S Corp election)
C-Corp

The process for setting up your LLC or S Corp election (most common options with entrepreneurs) and what you need to do after you’re all set up.

Let me tell you, this episode is packed with good information. Even after being in business for 10 years and all set up legally, I learned a ton and am glad to be more clear on the whole process. Bobby gave so many good examples throughout this episode and we both hope that you walk away with some real clarity on understanding what you need to do in order to protect yourself and your business.

Let’s get to it...press play and let’s dive in!

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for a while but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you. Click here for more details.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#237: 5 Ways to Create Binge-Worthy Content with Melissa Cassera

15 november 2018 | 57 min

Ok, I have a confession to make...I totally LOVE to binge-watch certain shows like Housewives, Game of Thrones, and my latest binge has been The Handmaid’s Tale. So good! Anyway, I’ve heard from enough of you to know that you, too, love a good binge session.

So what do you think it is about these types of shows that keep us coming back? I’m pretty sure the writers have a secret writing potion they use when they’re creating the storylines and scripts. ; )

But seriously, wouldn’t you love to know their secret so you could create content that your ideal customer avatar (I’m looking at you episode #236) wants to binge consume and can’t stop raving about?

Well, you’re in luck, because on today’s show I’ve brought in a Hollywood insider to tell us exactly how it’s all done. My guest Melissa Cassera, is a publicity strategist and a professional screenwriter who loves nothing more than creating binge-worthy content, so she’s our girl!

Melissa became obsessed with how movies and TV shows could create obsessed fan bases, so she decided to figure it out and share the secrets with business owners, like yourself, so that you, too, can create an obsessed fan base through the power of storytelling.

In this episode Melissa breaks down these five storytelling techniques that you can use when you’re creating content:

The inciting incident (your hook)
Introducing conflict into your story
The rule of three
The conclusion
The power of “what’s next”

(Don’t forget to download the worksheet that Melissa created to help you walk through these techniques the next time you create content.)

You will love Melissa’s approach to storytelling and you’re not going to believe how fun it is to create content using these strategies. And best of all, you’re going to have your ideal customer avatar LOVING what you’re giving them and coming back for more!

Press play and let’s dive in!

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for a while but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you. Click here for more info.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#236: How to Clarify Your Message with Donald Miller of StoryBrand

8 november 2018 | 48 min

Have you ever struggled to communicate a clear message to your followers? One that grabs AND keeps their attention?

Is this scene familiar? You sit down at your computer, fingers on the keyboard, ready to create the perfect content to captivate your audience. You know this email you're about to send or the social media post you’re creating is going to resonate with your audience!

You hit SEND or POST….

And….

No comments on your post (except your aunt and a high school friend who is definitely NOT your ICA). The open rate on your email isn’t at all what you expected and the click-through rate is even worse.

I think we can all remember scenes like these from our entrepreneurial journeys. But there’s hope, my friends! And that hope comes in the form of a 7-part communication framework. One that’s easy to understand and fun to implement.

With just a couple tweaks to the way you position yourself and your customer, and how you talk to them, they’ll be eager to read that next email or social post. Excited to jump on your weekly FB lives or show up for your next webinar. And better yet, they’ll want to buy what you’re selling because you’ll know how to present what you’ve created for them in a clear way that speaks directly to their pain points and desires and offers a solution that they won’t be able to refuse.

“When you stop talking about your customer’s problem, they stop doing business with you.” Don Miller

And that’s where Don Miller comes in. Don, the author of Building a StoryBrand, is the creator of this 7-part framework that shows you how to clarify your message through the principles and framework of storytelling.

This interview was one of my all-time favorites and I think it might be one of yours too. I had a couple of huge aha moments for sure!

Are you ready to listen? Click here to get started.

P.S. Remember how we became intimately aware of our avatar last week in episode 235, How To Identify Your Ideal Customer Avatar and uncovered their specific pain points and desires? It’s this type of knowledge that we MUST have to create the messaging Don talks about that captivates and converts. If you haven’t listened to that episode yet, make sure you add to your playlist.

This episode is sponsored by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan: My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm). If you are struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you. amyporterfield.com/listbuilding

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#235: How To Identify Your Ideal Customer Avatar

1 november 2018 | 30 min

Have you ever sat down to write a blog post, create an outline for your podcast or video show, and you just froze? Not because of fear or imposter syndrome, because those are 100% real, too. Instead you froze because you just didn’t know what it was that your ideal customer wanted or needed from you. It can feel like you’re just pulling any old idea out of a dark hole.

Now of course we will all suffer from writer’s block at some point, but what is worse is not understanding who it is you’re serving and why.

In today’s show I’m talking about how to identify your Ideal Customer Avatar (ICA). Why is this so important? Because your ICA is someone who is absolutely crucial to the success of your business and if you don’t know who they are, your business won’t have legs to stand on.

Your ICA is your PERFECT customer. This ONE single person is the potential customer who wants and needs YOUR content, YOUR product, or YOUR services. This is also a person that you LOVE to work with. Win-win!

There are specific ways to really hone in on who this person is: what they like, what they don’t like, what their aspirations are, and most importantly, what their fears are. And surprise, surprise...when you know all this, you won’t be sitting there frozen at your computer not knowing what to create or to say in your next social media post.

You’ll be happily creating solutions to their wants or needs and something they will actually pay for.

You’re not just building your business as a hobby, right? I know you’re not, and that’s way I want you to get laser focused and know how to serve your customers best!

In today’s show, I’m going to share the exact steps in how I figured out how to understand my perfect customer. I’ve even created a super helpful worksheet for you to print out and use as you define your very own ICA.

Press play and let’s dive in!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#234: Do You Know What Makes You Unique? A Brand-Building Chat with Laura Belgray

25 oktober 2018 | 61 min

As an online entrepreneur you are constantly putting yourself out there. You’re writing social media posts, copy for emails, creating webinar slides, creating content for your podcast or video show, and writing blog posts. And when you do, you’re showing up in one of two ways: with your true personality shining, or trying to impersonate someone else.

The problem is, especially if you’re just starting out, the impersonation route seems to be the popular choice.

I want you to hear these words from my guest today, Laura Belgray: “There is no person, brand or artist that is for everyone.”

Read that again, my friends: There is no person, brand or artist that is for everyone.

You cannot and should not even try to be all things to everyone. When you do, you water down all that is wonderful and unique about YOU.

Here’s the good news! Laura is in the business of helping people infuse their personality in all they do and she’s sharing some great tips and strategies with us on the show today.

Laura is a copywriter and television promo writer. She even works with BRAVO and tells us about a Real Housewives promo line she wrote not too long ago...sooo clever!

In this episode, we talk mindset blocks and how to overcome them so your copy shows the real you, specific exercises and assessments that will help you to discover what your unique personality is, and Laura shares the five very actionable Ps of showing your personality in your copy. Really good stuff today, my friends!

Are you ready to step into your own special uniqueness? Press play and let’s dive in!

P.S. Don’t forget to grab the free worksheet that will help you to discover the uniqueness of your personality so you can share it with the world!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#233: Podcasting 101: From Creation to Promotion

18 oktober 2018 | 52 min

This episode is a long time coming. I get asked A LOT about how to podcast. From the equipment and software I use, to knowing what topics to cover and which guests to feature, to the recording, editing and publishing phase, to how in the world I keep it all organized!

I’m pulling back the curtain and sharing all of it with you today!

Whether you’re currently a podcaster and would find it helpful to hear about my podcasting process and organization, or you’re thinking about starting a podcast soon and want to hear all the ins-and-outs of set up and how to decide on topics and guests, this is going to be an episode you don’t want to miss.

Here are the 10 podcasting areas I get into on the show today. Hit play and let’s get started!

Show Format
Set Up
Deciding on Topics and Guests
Podcast Outlines
Recording
Editing
Graphics Creation
Publishing
Promoting
Tracking Your Analytics

I’ve linked you up to all the podcasting equipment and software I use here, but I thought you might like to have a little behind-the-scenes tour of my podcasting studio, too. I did this video a while ago, but I still use the same equipment.

Remember, I chose to invest in better quality equipment from the beginning, but you can still get great audio quality with a less expensive mic and by sitting in a closet to record. Feel free to start simple and get fancy later.

I hope you find this episode packed with value and resources that will help you in your podcasting process.

Wishing you all the best in your podcasting journey.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#232: How to Track Your Financials Using ‘Profit First’ with Amber Dugger

11 oktober 2018 | 45 min

Today we’re going to talk about making money and actually being profitable in your business.

Believe it or not, most entrepreneurs never really show a consistent profit in their business. The reason for this is because any extra money they have coming in ends up going back into the business. Reinvesting back in your business or using extra money on hand to buy the latest and greatest software or tool of the trade sounds like a reasonable and healthy plan, right?

Not so much. Especially when you’re not being intentional about it.

My guest today, Amber Dugger, is a financial expert who tells us that maintaining clarity and control of where your money is going will be a game-changer but you must first have a good cash flow system. Amber is a mastery level Profit First Professional and teaches the cash flow system from the Profit First book, but her teaching is tailored specifically to online entrepreneurs.

In case you were wondering, this has nothing to do with bookkeeping or accounting, but everything to do with with what you do with the money coming in right now and in the future.

I use the Profit First system in my business, and it has been a game-changer, but what Amber shared today is going to help me to make the system even easier. I can’t wait for you to learn this system, too, and become a profitable business the minute you do!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Listener shout out of the week!

Thank you Anna! So glad you enjoyed it and happy to know you’ve hired an Integrator, too! Listen to the epsiode Anna refers to here.

#231: “I’m Terrible At Writing My Own Copy” And Other Copywriting Lies That Are Killing Your Sales With Marie Forleo

4 oktober 2018 | 48 min

Let me ask you a question: Can you relate to any of these issues when it comes to writing your own copy?

It takes forever to write a headline, a blog post, or the script for your podcast or video show because you’re constantly second guessing yourself?
You write something, put it out there and...CRICKETS? (The silence is devastating.)
You’ve got a tight deadline and you sit down to write but you’re completely blocked? You can’t seem to eek out anything on that page and the clock is ticking?

If there’s one thing that most of us as online entrepreneurs have experienced it’s getting tripped up on writing copy.

Well, don’t worry, there’s hope for us yet...

Two things my guest, Marie Forleo (yes, the Marie from the award winning MarieTV!) shared on the podcast today that really resonated with me, and I think will with you too, are:

You CAN learn to be a stellar copywriter in your business. (No more telling yourself otherwise!)
Writing effective copy has been the single most important skill that Marie has developed over the last 18 years in her business. (By the way, this one says A LOT, coming from a person that has achieved the monumental level of success that Marie has.)

Marie, who has been a student of copy since day one, joined me on the show today to share the top copywriting tips and strategies that she’s used along the way to connect and resonate with the millions of people her message has touched.

You know I love when you listen to my podcast and take action, so today I want you to listen in, take what Marie shares, and begin implementing it in your business immediately. You’ll see... you’ll get better and better with writing copy, and you’ll have tangible results to show for it: more conversions and a bigger impact.

If you haven’t jumped over and started listening already, let me give you one more reason why listening in today is going to be a game-changer in your business: You know how much competition is out there, right? Now, you know I’m all about running your own race, but competition is real, and when you can find an advantage over your competition, you’re smart to take it. Copy is an area that most people are not paying attention to, so this IS your competitive advantage. Writing better copy will be how you set yourself apart.

Are you ready? Press play and let’s dive in!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Listener shout out of the week!

Thank you

#230: Dealing With Depression as an Entrepreneur: Amy and Jasmine Star Open Up

27 september 2018 | 53 min

In honor of the upcoming World Mental Health Day (October 10, 2018), I wanted to have a candid, real, and raw conversation about being an entrepreneur while dealing with depression.

I have dealt with depression starting at a young age and it moved its way into the years that I was starting this business as well.

There are three goals I wanted to accomplish in this episode:

Goal #1: If you are struggling with depression or anxiety, or anything around mental health issues, I want you to know you are not alone. We may not talk about it, but we are out there. You are not alone.

Goal #2: To get the conversation started. Mental health issues can be uncomfortable to talk about, but that needs to change. We need to have hard conversations and I’m hoping you will learn some tools in this episode to be more vocal about what you’re going through as well.

Goal #3: You can still be successful in spite of, or in addition to, your depression or other mental health challenge you are going through right now.

I didn’t want to do this episode alone and I also wanted you to be part of a conversation, so I brought on my dear friend Jasmine Star who also has a history of depression that she shares today, too.

I hope that as you listen you will not feel alone, be encouraged, and walk away with some tools and resources to help you move forward as you deal with depression and as you grow your business.

Here is the quote Jasmine shared by Elie Wiesel: “I swore never to be silent whenever and wherever humans endured suffering. We must take sides. Neutrality helps the oppressor, never the victim. Silence encourages the tormentor, never the tormented.”

These were the questions that Amy and Jasmine asked (inspired by Dr. Amen and suggested by Jasmine): When you are having a negative or overwhelming thought:

Write it down. The act of writing it down is like an exorcism. It forces you to see it.
Ask yourself about that one thing you’re struggling with.
And then ask yourself: Is this true?
See what your answer is to that question and ask yourself if you’re 100% certain the your response is true. (Remember, you are not a fortune teller….you can not know with certainty what is destined to be true for you, right??)
Then ask yourself, “How does this make you feel?”
Then look at that response and ask yourself, “Do you think that those feelings will keep you from the purpose you have in this world?”
What would feeling the opposite of this look like?

The choice is yours in how you choose to think and believe in your answers to these questions.

“We are not our thoughts. The things that we think are not us.” -- James Wedmore

Remember:

Don’t be ashamed of your story--it’s needs to be heard.
Find a support system that will give you what you need in those dark moments.
If you don’t have that support system, or even if you do, find a good therapist.
Consider exploring medication that may help you.

If you are in crisis and need help immediately, please call the National Suicide Prevention LifeLine: 1-800-273-TALK or text “Talk” to 741741.

#229: The Power of the P.S. Strategy

20 september 2018 | 27 min

#228: 6 Secrets to Finishing What You Start with Jon Acuff

13 september 2018 | 76 min

#227: Getting Started with Chat Bots with Andrew Warner

6 september 2018 | 41 min

My guest today, Andrew Warner, tells us that chatbots are the FUTURE of online engagement. Sounds like something we should pay attention to, right? If you’re not familiar with chatbots yet, you will be by the time you listen to this episode.

I currently use chatbots to a limited degree in my business, but after this interview I can assure you, I will be using them in a MUCH bigger way. Andrew shared some amazing strategies that are easy to implement and don’t cost much, if anything.

Andrew is the founder of Mixergy, a podcast where he interviews entrepreneurs on how they built their businesses. He also started BotAcademy.com, where he trains people to create bots (not something he recommends for the majority of my audience, by the way).

In this episode, Andrew breaks down exactly:

What a chatbot is (Andrew created this sample chatbot for my audience)
How we should use them in our businesses (he blew my mind with some amazing statistics from using chatbots to increase webinar attendance show up rates)
How we should NOT be using them (you’ll want to know how to avoid these 5 mistakes)
How to begin using them (It’s easy and most are free)
Fun bonus: Andrew gives us a look into the future of bots...some fun ways they will be used. Think: being able to order, pay for, and have a beverage delivered for yourself or someone else while you’re attending a pro baseball game!

Andrew gives immense value in this episode...he shares great examples and even created a couple videos for us to see a chatbot in action (I’ve got those videos linked up below).

Behind-the-scenes funny story: I do most of my podcast interviews in audio-only format and when Andrew asked if we could turn on video because it would be easier for him to engage during our conversation, he was wearing a sports coat! I love that!! Talk about showing up...look how dapper he looks! I on the other hand was in my workout clothes.

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you. Click here to sign up.

#226: What to Focus On When You Are Just Starting Out

30 augusti 2018 | 50 min

When just starting out in business (your first year or two) there are a variety of different paths to take, tasks to complete, and shiny objects lurking around every corner. When you’re not sure where to start or what to do next, this lack of focus leads to overwhelm and frustration. That’s why I recorded today’s episode (and created the awesome New Business Focus Worksheet to go with it!).

I’m breaking down the FIVE key areas to focus on when you’re just getting started, and these are absolutely crucial for a successful online business.

Are you a seasoned entrepreneur? Don’t click away, because this episode is for you, too. I not only focused on these same areas when I first started my business, but I still do today. I use these five areas almost as a check-up checklist for my business every quarter and during my annual planning.

Here’s a snapshot of what I’m covering in today’s episode:

FOCUS AREA #1: The importance of understanding WHY you’re building your business. I talk about Simon Sinek’s Golden Circle and the #1 foundational question you need to ask yourself as you develop and grow your business. .

I also dive into the importance of understanding WHO you are serving - your Ideal Customer Avatar (ICA).

While this exercise will take time and some real work on your part, you don’t want to skip over this if you’re not really clear.

If you’re listening to the episode and are already clear on your ICA, you can just pick back up around the 21 minute mark to move on to Focus Area #2.

FOCUS AREA #2: Why you need a website with a clear message and how to make that happen. These are some of the examples I discuss in the episode:

Example from Michael Hyatt’s ABOUT Page.

FOCUS AREA #3: The importance of choosing ONE platform to focus on in the beginning and creating original, consistent content there on a weekly basis.

FOCUS AREA #4: Authentic engagement - a HUGE factor in whether your business will succeed or not.

FOCUS AREA #5: Creating a way to make money in your business while you are figuring things out and building the business of your dreams.

I also created a great freebie to help you work through these FIVE focus areas. You can grab that right here.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

#225: How to Create an Evergreen Lead Machine on YouTube

23 augusti 2018 | 59 min

On today’s show, we’re diving into strategies around two things I LOVE to talk about: list-building and evergreen lead automation! However, there’s a twist! I’ve brought on someone to walk us through some really great strategies on these topics on a platform I haven’t covered much here: YouTube!

You and I both know video is where it’s at so even if you haven’t thought about the platform much or are not a huge fan of video, this episode is loaded with very doable strategies that I want you to consider using to grow your email list.

My guest today is an absolute YouTube boss and she’s going to guide us through her proven three phase method to creating a YouTube evergreen lead machine without using paid advertising.

Sunny Lenarduzzi has a YouTube following of over 170,000 subscribers and and has helped her clients to go from zero to 100,000 subscribers and build their email lists from zero to 28,000 in less than 10 months (resulting in multiple 6-figure businesses).

HOW BECOMING A YOUTUBE BOSS WAS A HAPPY ACCIDENT

THE POWER OF REVERSE ENGINEERING

WHAT CONTENT IS BEST FOR YOUTUBE?

GETTING STARTED GENERATED LEADS ON YOUTUBE

You’ll want to tune into today’s episode to get all the details on Sunny’s 3-phase system to creating an evergreen lead machine, but here are the phases broken down:

PHASE 1

This phase is all about creating profitable content that increases your reach and revenue without having to rely on paid advertising. The key here is to research before recording and here’s how:

Use frequently asked questions for content ideas
Look for ideas from your competition and community hubs (Sunny’s not suggesting you steal from your competition, but there’s nothing wrong with getting a little inspiration and putting your spin on an idea that’s resonating with your ideal customer.)
Look to provide content on trends within your industry. This is not for the evergreen leads so much, but more more gaining visibility and reach.
Research and find the right keywords and key phrases to use when titling your videos.

PHASE 2

This phase is all about converting your viewers into customers through Sunny’s H.O.T. (Hook, Outcome, Testimonial) formula. She explains how you can use this formula to tweak your video scripts to keep your viewer engaged, which will turn them into a loyal viewer, and ultimately a paying customer.

It’s through Sunny’s H.O.T. formula where list-building comes in too! Sunny explains how to work in the ever-so-important conversion calls to action where you provide an opportunity for your viewer to download a guide, checklist, or worksheet.

PHASE 3

This is the evergreen traffic machine phase! Now that you’ve got your phase 1 and 2 bases covered, it’s time to publish your video. But you’re not just going to publish and wait...Sunny explains why the first 24-48 hours after posting your video is crucial to actively distribute a link to your warm audience in order to get some engagement going which tells YouTube that your video is one that should be ranking on the first page. Once you’re on that first page, your cold audience is introduced to your video and this begins that evergreen lead machine!

You might be thinking, “This is great, but I don’t have any authority on YouTube, so how am I supposed to rank when my competition is so tough?” Sunny explains in detail in today’s episode but the key is to work on getting search rankings in smaller competition pools.

So there you have it! I’d love to hear how you’re going to use YouTube as a list-building technique in your business. Head over to Instagram and DM me and let me know. I’d love to hear from you!

This episode is brought to you by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days”. If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you.

#224: A Behind the Scenes Chat with My Integrator, Chloe

16 augusti 2018 | 45 min

On today’s show I brought on the Integrator on my team, Chloe Euse. The goal of this episode is to help you step into the Visionary role as the founding entrepreneur of your business so that you can do more of the things that you were created to do and that are in your zone of genius.

The deal is, in order to be able to fully step into that role, you will need to hire an Integrator (also known as a Project Manager) to work alongside you.

I’m taking you behind-the-scenes so you can see how a Visionary and Integrator work together. To give you a hint, you as the Visionary are responsible for deciding on the WHAT of the business, while your Integrator figures out the HOW to make your vision come true.

I really want you to take the time to tune in and listen today and hear directly from us, but here are the key areas we cover:

The skills that are vitally important for an Integrator to have
How specific Myers Briggs types may work better (or worse) together
The nitty-gritty of how a Visionary and Integrator work together (you two are going to work VERY closely together so you better like each other!)
Whether you should hire a local or virtual Integrator
How the Integrator executes on the Visionary’s vision (this is where the other members of your team and contractors come in!)
How tension between the Visionary and Integrator is actually a good thing
Why an Integrator is NOT an implementer. There is a very important distinction here!
What a day in the life of an Integrator looks like
Chloe’s TOP 3 tools that she couldn’t live without as an Integrator
Chloe gives you (the Visionary) some final words of wisdom for when you decide to take the leap and hire your Integrator (her insight here as an Integrator is GOLDEN!)

And to wrap this episode up with a big bow, we’ve got a couple fantastic freebies for you. Both are Google Doc templates that you can take and make your own.

The exact Integrator job description I used when I hired Chloe.
The pre-hire test-run assignment I used for my top Integrator candidates.

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you. Click here to sign up.

#223: How To Start Earning Affiliate Money With Pat Flynn

9 augusti 2018 | 63 min

Raise your hand if you could use a little extra cash in your business right now!

In the first few years of building my business I certainly could have used some extra money, and had I known what I know today, I would have done something entirely different that would have brought in a nice flow of revenue during those tight times: affiliate marketing.

If you don’t have affiliate marketing as a revenue generator in your business, I want that to change for you today.

My guest today, Pat Flynn, is going to share his proven system for earning money through affiliate marketing. Why did I choose Pat to be our guide today? Because he has earned three million dollars through affiliate marketing commissions since he started this business! He knows his stuff!

AFFILIATE MARKETING IS A GAME-CHANGER!

If you’re new to the idea of affiliate marketing, Pat simply defines it as the process of earning a commission by promoting another person or another company’s product.

The great thing about affiliate marketing is that if you love a product or service and have a platform that you’re able to share why you love it with your audience, you can earn a commission from that recommendation at no cost to your audience.

Pat shared how he promoted one of his favorite products through a banner ad on his website and was being paid $1,000 per month, but he contacted them and asked about trying out an affiliate relationship instead. They did and he went from earning $1,000/month to $8,000 the next month!

TWO TYPES OF AFFILIATE MARKETING TO CONSIDER: PASSIVE & ACTIVE

An example of a PASSIVE way of affiliate marketing is when you include links to products on your website, like my Tools of the Trade page here. This is considered PASSIVE because once you set it up, it’s there and as people come to your website or are linked to it in an email, they can click on the links to make a purchase. Another example is by including a link just like this link right here in the show notes in which I’m sharing my affiliate link to Pat’s 123 Affiliate Marketing program.

An example of an ACTIVE format of affiliate marketing would be it Pat and I decided to do a special webinar with a launch sequence where we were actively promoting and selling the product to our audiences and we even offer a special deal that’s only available during a specified time period.

A prime example of this is when I promote B-School each year in February. I go all out in promoting Marie’s program because I 1000% stand behind her program, and because of this I promote the program as if it were my own. Being an affiliate for this program has been a game-changer for my business and I definitely use the strategies that Pat teaches in his program.

Either way, always be upfront with your audience that you are an affiliate. This is being transparent with your audience, but also protects you legally.

TOP MISTAKES TO AVOID IN AFFILIATE MARKETING

Promoting the wrong product. Make sure your are promoting relevant products that you have experience with and that WILL help your audience.
Not pushing hard enough. Of course you don’t want to be annoying or too pushy, but when you know you’ve got a product that will solve that person’s problem or help them to achieve a certain goal they have, then you can and should push harder.

Alright, you’ve got ninja tricks, some mistakes to avoid, and hopefully a plan to either begin earning money through affiliate marketing, or a plan to give your existing affiliate strategy a boost

Take a listen to this short one-minute video where Pat tells you a little bit more about how you can earn money through affiliate marketing.

#222: How to Create Your "Total Immersion Weekend Retreat" to Clean Up Your Messy Business

2 augusti 2018 | 38 min

I just got back from a total immersion weekend retreat in Palm Springs with my Integrator Chloe and in today’s episode I share all the details of what went down! Unlike a typical team retreat we weren’t brainstorming ideas, we were actually cleaning up the messy stuff in our business.

Yep, I’ve got messes to clean up just like anyone else. I must say, I do believe my team and I are a gold standard when it comes to setting up systems and processes, but I think no matter how well the backend of your online business looks every single one of us has room to do a little cleaning, don’t you think?

FIVE QUESTIONS YOU SHOULD ASK YOURSELF BEFORE YOUR TOTAL IMMERSION WEEKEND RETREAT

Answering the following five key questions will help you to set a focus and make sure you’re on the same page (if you will be with someone from your team):

What’s your #1 pain point in your business right now?
What feels messy, broken, or painfully slow?
What needs to be fixed before you can grow?
Where are you losing money? Do you have any current leaks in your funnels, or in any system that you’re using to make money right now?
What have you been putting off for way too long? What are the important things you’ve been wanting to get to but you know there are just not enough hours in the day?

MY TOP TOTAL IMMERSION WEEKEND TIPS

Choose a destination you enjoy and that inspires you. It doesn’t have to be fancy or expensive, but if you’re at a place in your business where you can splurge a little, go for it!
Just know that your days are going to be long. We worked hard, but it was so worth it!
Change up your environment so you don’t go stir crazy. We found fun little places around the hotel property to work throughout the weekend: the beautiful lobby, our hotel room, and we even knocked out a couple of hours of work from the bar while sipping on a refreshing margarita!
Take time to eat, drink lots of water, get some fresh air, take walks, and get 7-8 hours of sleep each night.
Let your family know that this time away will be focused on work and that you will not be available much throughout the weekend. It’s very important to limit distractions in order to make the most of your time away, and by stating this up front you will make sure no one at home is feeling neglected!
Keep a Google Doc noting the big decisions that you’ve made over the weekend and any team communication you want to relay when you return.
Get all those action items moved into your project management tool. Chloe always says, “If it’s not in Asana, it’s not happening!”
Don’t forget to have a little fun, too! You’re going to be working really hard, so I suggest you treat yourself to a massage or some sort of simple pleasure at the end of your weekend.
Upon your return, have a meeting with your team or individual team members to fill them in on some of the decisions you made or changes that may be coming down the pipeline.
Repeat your total immersion retreat weekend on a quarterly basis!

This episode is brought to you by Audible where you too can listen to the book I mentioned that I’m loving right now: High Performance Habits by Brendon Burchard, for FREE! Members of my audience get a FREE audiobook download and 30-day free trial at www.audibletrial.com/OMME

Million Dollar Club Student Spotlight with Anna Digilio

31 juli 2018 | 29 min

HOW WEBINARS, CREATING A COURSE, AND A MEMBERSHIP SITE CHANGED THIS TEACHER’S LIFE IN A HUGE WAY!

I'm always in awe when one of my students shares with me how they’ve built their million dollar businesses. Anna’s story is one of my favorites and I wanted her to share it with you as well!

Anna spent 23 years as a second grade teacher but decided she wanted to make an impact on the education community in a bigger way. This decision to shift her focus led her to my programs and she dove right in, taking action after action until things clicked! She made $10k on her very FIRST webinar and she's NEVER TURNED BACK.

You won’t want to miss Anna’s incredible story as she shares her journey to success. She shares the specific steps (and consistent action) she took from making that first $10k selling 2nd grade course curriculum, to creating a membership site for teachers that brings in almost $60k per month, to her latest venture, a course that teaches teachers how to teach guided-math, which at the time of this recording had only been live three weeks and she’d already made $35,000! That’s an entire year’s earnings for some teachers!

TWO MISTAKES TO AVOID WHEN GROWING YOUR ONLINE BUSINESS

And to wrap it up, Anna shares the two things she would do differently had she known back then what she knows now. I 100% agree with both, so do yourself a favor and take what she says and don’t let those mistakes slow you down from the impact you are destined to make!

Alright, if you’ve gotten this far and haven’t listened in to the podcast yet, what are you waiting for? : ) I promise you, you’ll be inspired by Anna’s story and fall in love with her just like I did!

If you’d prefer to watch the interview, enjoy that right here...

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you.

#221: How to Create a 3-Month SEO Plan with Neil Patel

26 juli 2018 | 57 min

Neil Patel, master marketer and SEO genius, joined me on my show today to dive into the the nuts-and-bolts of some simple SEO strategies that will bring you more traffic, conversions, and revenue! He walks us through a 3-month plan that I’ve broken down for you in a free guide that you can grab right here.!

IT’S NOT ROCKET SCIENCE

One thing that Neil dispelled immediately is the fear that so many of us have around the idea of SEO strategy, and that is, that SEO is too complicated and we’ll never understand what exactly to do!

Here’s what he had to say about that:

“SEO is not rocket science...it’s not hard, and as long as you follow this plan, which is broken down into three main steps, you should get results.”

And let me tell you the plan is not complicated...it’s very doable and this guide is going to help!

WHAT IS SEO AND WHY SHOULD I HAVE AN SEO STRATEGY?

SEO stands for Search Engine Optimization and Neil explained that it’s really all about making your site compatible for search engines. Now of course we create our content for our audience to enjoy and find useful, but we need to understand the importance of making our content compatible for BOTH users AND search engines.

HOW SEO WILL INCREASE TRAFFIC, CONVERSIONS AND REVENUE

As an entrepreneur, you likely have a strong “why” behind what you’re doing online, but the bottom-line is that you want more people to see or listen to your content, you want to turn followers into customers, and you want to earn a living doing what you love to do. One way to accomplish this is to develop an SEO plan that has the ability to give you these tangible results.

And that’s exactly what Neil shared in today’s show! He broke down exactly what you need to do in order to get a really good, simple SEO strategy running on your website.

THE 3-MONTH SEO PLAN

I’ve outlined some of the key points Neil made in the interview here, but for the step-by-step plan download your free 3-Month SEO Guide here.

MONTH 1 - Research & Competitor Analysis

MONTH 2 - Optimize Your On Page Code and Building Content

Neil also discussed the importance of building quality content on a consistent basis on your blog. You’ve gotta have a place to use that keyword research from month-one research, right? Here are a few pointers Neil suggests you implement when you write your blog posts/articles:

Write in a conversational tone
Create thorough content (NOT short)
Use sub-headings
Keep paragraphs short
Use images
Wrap up your blog posts with a summary conclusion
End your conclusion with a question

MONTH 3 - Building Links and Getting Social Shares

Part of Neil’s three-month plan also includes a great strategy for gaining social shares to your content. While social sharing will not directly affect your SEO, it sure will indirectly. Social sharing builds social proof, which ultimately builds awareness and your authority.

Make sure to grab your free 3-Month SEO Guide right here, to learn all about Neil’s technique for getting social shares through Buzzsumo.

I hope you listened to the episode because Neil broke all of this down in such an easy to understand and doable fashion. But let’s not leave it at that...I want you to put this plan in action. Here what I’d love for you to do right now:

Print out the 3-Month SEO Guide
Schedule time in your calendar to implement the steps in the plan. Remember to be non-negotiable with the time you block out.
Join my OMME Podcast Facebook group so that we can share our SEO successes in a few months. See you there!

This episode is brought to you by:

Gravy—my very own 24/7 engagement team who contacts my customers within hours of their failed payment, captures updated billing information and saves the customers I worked so hard to acquire. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans, you’ve got to check out Gravy!

#220: Your Summer Listening Playlist (Strategy, Inspiration and Biz Insights!)

19 juli 2018 | 31 min

One thing I love about summer is having a little bit more downtime. This allows me to do some things that I might not always have time for at other times of the year like binge listening to my favorite podcasts.

That usually only happens while on vacation. As a matter of fact, I’m just back from a family vacation in Hawaii and I totally binge listened to a couple of my fave podcasts, The Life Coach School with Brooke Castillo and Oprah’s Super Soul Conversations. They are both soooo good!

What made this episode extra special for me was to have some of my listeners submit their favorite episodes as well. (I’ve included audio messages from them directly in today’s show!) Let’s dive in!

YOUR ONLINE MARKETING MADE EASY SUMMER LISTENING PLAYLIST TOP FIVE LISTENER FAVORITES

Both Michelle from Canada and Sarah from Denmark are fellow megabatching lovers and they recommend episode #182: How To Mega-Batch Your Content. My productivity has skyrocketed since I began mega-batching in my business.
Lyndsey from Asheville, NC (hello Blue Ridge Mountains!) recommends you listen to an episode that helped her to grow her email subscriber list to 50,000 in just one year: Episode #99: How to Build a List-Building Blitz Campaign. Make sure to listen to her audio message in today’s show, she has some great insight on the one thing in episode #99 that made all the difference in her list growth!
Molly from Oregon actually has three favorites to share: Episode #149: Your 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint (she really loved the freebie in this episode and if you like a detailed blueprint, so will you!) Episode #150: [Case Study] How to Turn a Pre-Launch Strategy Into a Wildly Profitable Online Launch (This episode is a follow up to episode 149 and will show you what the pre-launch strategy looks like in the real world.) Episode #209: The Surprising Journey of Launching a Physical Product with Lara Casey - I love hearing that Molly learned about a resource in this episode that saved her TONS of money in the production of her own physical product!
Gregory from Nashville, TN (you’ve got to tune in to hear his awesome southern accent!) is a fan of the DIY approach and recommends you listen to episode #171: DIYing Your Business: 5 Areas to Focus On When You’re Just Starting Out - I was so happy to hear that Gregory said that this episode really gave him clarity to begin to build his brand and his online business. I’m definitely specific in this episode about what you should and should not be delegating in your business when you’re first starting out.
For the 5th spot of my listener favorites list, I had to include a double-whammy because both of the recommendations are so good! Also, I just love how so many parts of the world are represented in the show today!

All the way from Perth in Western Australia, Neda shares her favorite episode #201: 5 Ways to Make Money (Without Using Webinars). - I love how Neda said this helped her combine her previous experience with what she’s doing now to make more money in her business.
And finally, from May in Oslo, Norway! May loves how episode #206: Post-it Note Content Creation Mini-Training contains a content creation process that’s easy to take action on! May, you are not alone...I had so much great feedback (and pictures of people’s Post-it Note creations) from this episode!

I absolutely LOVED hearing from so many of my listeners and how their favorite episodes of Online Marketing Made Easy have helped move their businesses forward!

So there you have it - you’ve got a nice summer playlist to tune into! I’m guessing there may have been one or two recommendations that really resonated with you and I want you to commit to listening to those in the next 24 hours.

#219: How to Use Instagram Stories to Grow Your Email List with Tyler McCall

12 juli 2018 | 61 min

Today you’re going to learn how to use one of the fastest growing social platforms, Instagram Stories, to build your email list, without using the Swipe Up feature.

I don't know about you, but Instagram is by far my favorite social media platform. Mostly because I love Instagram Stories but also because I think the connections on Instagram feel more real than any other social platform.

If you are on Instagram then you've probably either recorded an Instagram story yourself, viewed one--or several (they are completely addictive), or you've heard someone else talk about Instagram Stories and you weren't really sure what the heck they were talking about.

I had the pleasure of interviewing Tyler J. McCall, an Instagram Marketing Strategist, who has found great success in growing his email list through Instagram Stories. He shared tons of valuable insight, tips and strategies that you will be able to implement starting today! And, don’t worry, as I mentioned earlier this strategy has nothing to do with the Swipe Up feature, which requires you have 10,000 followers to use.

So whether you’re familiar with Instagram Stories or not, we’ve got you covered here! Let’s first dive into the basics around Instagram Stories and then we’ll go ALL in on strategies to grow your email list via this platform!

WHAT IS AN INSTAGRAM STORY?

How Stories are different than a post in your regular Instagram feed is that the content goes away after 24 hours unless you add it as an Instagram Story highlight in your profile, which is a whole different episode!

WHY YOU SHOULD BE USING INSTAGRAM STORIES IN YOUR BUSINESS:

Tyler tells us that Instagram Stories are taking over as the content of choice, and Instagram likes this, because it gives them another place to run ads. And as business owners, Instagram ads are a very powerful tool, as well. And let me tell you, Instagram Story ads are converting really well for my business right now!

In order to grow your email list through Instagram Stories (we’ll get to that strategy in a minute), you first need to know how to create high quality Instagram Stories that people want to watch. Here’s a quick rundown, but make sure to tune in to the episode for all the details!

Create your Stories with purpose and intention
Use a good mix of personal and business (Tyler shares information about his business in his Stories, but he also shares his shopping trips to Target! Yes, he loves to walk the aisles and point out some of his favorite products!)
Utilize a beginning, middle, and an end to your Story. Just like your elementary school teacher taught you! Download this great 2-page worksheet “The Story Arc Method” to work through an exercise Tyler put together for you to up your Instagram Story game!
“Never let the dashes turn into dots!” I love how Tyler put this, regarding being careful to not create painfully long Stories.
I asked Tyler how he always has AMAZING light for his Stories and he shared two tips that money can’t buy!!
Use captioning in your Stories for people who want to consume your content but don’t use audio. Tyler said that this technique will help keep retention high, too.
Drive interaction with Instagram features like polls and DM conversations. Engage with your followers!

How to Grow Your Email List Using Instagram Stories Without Using the Swipe Up Feature

I’ve found that it’s helpful for me to actually create a task in Asana (my project management tool), to check my DMs daily, and that’s working well at this point.

So here’s what I want you to do, download and work through this 2-page worksheet that Tyler created for you and don’t spend another minute on Instagram without intention and purpose.

A great big thank you to Tyler for providing such great step-by-step teaching in this interview!

Tyler and I would both love to hear from you in our DMs! I’m @amyporterfield and he’s @tylerjmccall.

All my best,

Amy

This episode is brought to you by: LBL

#218: 7 Steps to Pre-Selling Your Course

5 juli 2018 | 36 min

As an entrepreneur, your business is constantly changing—that’s the beauty of being an entrepreneur.

And here’s the thing: YOU change too. You change your mind about things you used to be adamant about.

I’ve experienced this myself. For example, when it came to creating courses, five years ago I would have said: Concentrate on building your course, don’t worry about the selling.

But since then I have had a change of heart.

I’ve watched my students inside of my training program Courses That Convert, and I’ve seen a need that I did not see years ago. That need is around launching their course before they have 100% completed it.

Now I talk about the benefits of pre-selling your course, or selling it in advance of the course being done, then delivering your content each week via a LIVE workshop to a group of founding members who have already paid.

So this episode is going to walk you through the exact steps that go into pre-selling a course. I am going to walk you through the pieces you’ll need to make your offer, get your first students through the door, and deliver your content.

There are a few reasons I like this strategy:

#1: Pre-selling is a big validator of your course idea.
#2: Pre-selling helps you build confidence about your training. Nothing builds confidence more than getting a few PAYING students through the door.
#3: Pre-selling helps with cash flow! I know that building a course and getting your online course up and running can sometimes be a bit of a pinch on your finances. That’s why pre-selling is great—to bring in a bit of money to help you pay for some of those expenses.
#4: Pre-selling helps you build momentum and accountability. By selling before your content has been created, you have no choice but to deliver! This helps you avoid the “it’s been a year and my course is still languishing” syndrome!
#5: Lastly, you get immediate feedback from actual students when you pre-sell. Since it’s more of a live interaction, you can tweak your content based on the feedback before you launch again.

By the way, this episode was brought to you by Courses that Convert…I teach a much more robust version of this process in that course, with step-by-step plans and templates. Learn more by attending my free masterclass “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.”

So if you’re as excited as I am about pre-selling your course, here are seven steps to get you started.

The 7 Steps to Pre-Selling Your Course

Step 1: Determine Your Course Offer

Step 2: Set Up Your Early Interest Page.

Step 3: Create Your 30-Day Content Blitz

Step 4: Set Up Your Checkout Page

Step 5: Set Up Your Live Workshop Components

Step 6: Promote a 48-Hour Flash Sale Offer

Your 48-hour flash sale offer will include two emails:

The first is sent to your Early Interest list and informs them of your limited time offer, what’s included in the program, the number of spots available, and a link to your checkout page.
Your second email gives them one more chance to sign up.

In this step, you also have the option to include a webinar training as part of your pre-sell strategy.

Step 7: Deliver Your Content

Links mentioned in this episode:

Course Creation Resources:

Episode #49: How to Know if Your Idea is Profitable Episode #107: How Do I Price My Online Course?Episode #133: How to Get Unstuck in Your Course Creation Process Episode #206: The Post-It Content Creation Mini Training

Webinar Resources:

Episode #130: How to Sell on a Webinar (Without Being Overly Salesy)Episode #145: 13 Questions to Nail Down Your Winning Webinar Topic and Title Episode #211: 5 Things I Said Yes to In The Early Years (But Say No to Now)

#217: Why You Aren’t Taking Action with Brooke Castillo

28 juni 2018 | 46 min

Today we’re going to discover something that has the power to majorly change the trajectory of your business! We’re going to uncover the three main roadblocks that sideline many entrepreneurs (and people in general) and cause them to get stuck in inaction. You will learn specific ways to take massive action, get more done, and get those big results you desire.

“Taking action...” seems easy enough, right? “Just do something!” As you and I both know, it’s not as easy as it sounds!

If right now what you’re doing in your business is not leading you to the results you desire, then this episode is for you!

To shed some light on WHY we’re not taking action and to help us understand how to turn that around and become massive action takers, I had the pleasure of interviewing Brooke Castillo. Brooke is a Life Coach—I actually call her a Life Coach Extraordinaire— who has worked with thousands of people (including yours truly) who have been stuck, are not reaching the goals they’ve envisioned for themselves, or ultimately just need a coach to shine some light on a path that can lead them to the promised land of getting a lot done and achieving big results.

Quick note before we move on: I mention that I’ve worked with Brooke personally; I get more into it on the podcast, but in case you were wondering, I’m part of her Self-Coaching Scholars program. You know I’m on a mission to up-level my life, including my health and my weight, but I’m also on a mission to up-level my mind, and Brooke really gets into this in her program. I know that focusing on how I think about things will change both my personal and business life, and I believe it could do the same for you. Because I stand behind what Brooke does, I have become an affiliate for the program, so if you are interested in joining her program, too, click here, and let Brooke know I sent you!

MANAGING YOUR MIND

Brooke began with the idea that so much of starting and building a business is about managing your mind. She said, “There's no way around it, because you can understand how to do everything, you can study all the material, but until you understand that what you think about is going to create the emotion that either drives the action or the inaction, you're never gonna take the action.”

Did you get that? This is important: What you think about creates the emotion that drives the action or inaction. If stress, fear and panic are fueling the action, you’re not going to be able to produce results at the level you want to produce.

Brooke shared three entrepreneurial roadblocks—things that are keeping you from taking massive action.

Reason #1: YOU’RE STUCK IN THE BUSY HUSTLE

Reason #2: YOU’RE GIVING YOURSELF TOO MUCH TIME TO GET SOMETHING DONE

Reason #3: YOU’RE AVOIDING FAILURE AND DISCOMFORT

What would be the activities or non-activities that you’d have in your comfort-time? Schedule it in! And remember: this time is non-negotiable. Agreed? Work hard, play hard! : )

If you’re reading this and have not listened to the episode yet, I highly recommend you do. Brooke gives some great examples, insights, and encouragement that you’ll only hear by tuning in. Plus, Brooke is so fun! I guarantee you’ll not only learn a ton, but will enjoy a few laughs while listening to this episode, too!

Thanks for spending time with me today!

All my best,

Amy

Links to things I think you might be interested in that were mentioned in these show notes and on the podcast episode:

Brooke Castillo Podcast
Learn more about the Self-Coaching Scholars (As I mentioned earlier, I’m a member of Brooke’s program and a huge believer in the work Brooke is doing! Check it out—and if you decide to join, tell her Amy sent you!)

#216: Why Courses Flop, And How To Turn “Failure” Into Opportunity

21 juni 2018 | 30 min

I’m the first person to admit when I’ve made a mistake.

But I can promise you this, when it happens: I learn something new every time.

Inside my private Facebook group for all of my students, my students often ask me to troubleshoot their challenges with launching their courses. Our FB Live chats and their questions inspired me to create this specific podcast episode for all of you. Based on my experiences with thousands of students, I’ve uncovered five core reasons why most online courses fail. My goal is to help make sure you don’t make these mistakes, and if you do, I want you to be able to learn from them and turn them into opportunities.

In this episode I also talk about the importance of a validation blitz, and knowing all about your potential student’s hopes and fears, and what may be holding them back. I go into step-by-step detail about how to conduct a validation blitz in my Courses That Convert Program. You can learn more about that program and how to get started with an online course with my free Masterclass—“How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.” It’s a fun and comprehensive training that will help you get well on your way to creating your first training!

Also: if you've experienced any of these mistakes or if you've made a big mistake that I haven't mentioned here, I want you to come over to Instagram and DM me.

Check out these highlights:

Why your ideal customer avatar needs to be top of mind at all times. [3:48]
I changed my mind on pre-selling, and you need to also. [8:25]
The four things to do to make sure you get to the finish line with your course. [12:43]
What to consider instead of signature courses. [14:42]
How I had to enlist a colleague to keep me in check and keep out the fluff. [17:34]
The best online courses are taught by the best teachers. What you need to do to become an engaging teacher. [20:40]

Links mentioned in this episode:

Episode #206: “The Post-It Content Creation Mini Training”

#215: Creating Multiple Streams of Revenue in Your Business with Jennifer Allwood

14 juni 2018 | 44 min

As entrepreneurs, creating multiple streams of revenue should be our goal. After being laid off from a software development company in the year 2000, today’s guest, Jennifer Allwood, discovered firsthand how using her creativity and passion could create not one, but six different revenue streams in her business.

One of the things I love most about being an entrepreneur is how we are able to use our passions and creativity to build a business that has many layers to it—and Jennifer has done just that!

So whether you are just starting out building your online business or are already doing amazing things but looking to up-level, you’re going to find lots of inspiration and actionable tips in this interview!

Never Say Never

Jennifer’s first foray into an online business revenue stream was through creating and selling a handful of short videos teaching people how to do fun DIY painting techniques on cabinets and furniture. After just a year, she had earned six figures...from simple painting videos!

Jennifer was at first confounded to discover she could sell stuff that could be easily found online for free via YouTube videos; yet she also came to understand that people will pay for shortcuts, and they prefer to pay for something from someone they know, like and trust, rather than go searching for something on their own.

That was the beginning of her online business journey. In the years since, she has launched a couple membership sites, teaches others how to run their online businesses, is writing a book, and is enjoying engaging with her nearly half-million online social media followers.

Jennifer admits that even just five years ago she would never have dreamed she would be where she is today! Let this be a lesson to all of us!

It’s Not About Working Harder: It’s Working Smarter That Makes The Difference

Jennifer works mostly with creatives: painters, artists, makers, DIYers, and repurposers. She says these type of entrepreneurs have a hard time getting past the idea that they don’t always have to trade time for dollars; yet Jennifer teaches them they can share their gifts in a new way by adding revenue streams to their business. The opportunities she identified (which can work for anyone with an online business) are:

Info products – ebooks, ecourses, webinars, etc.
Affiliate income
Sponsored content
Membership site
Ad revenue
Brand ambassadorship
Consulting
Speaking

Where to Start?

If you are just beginning your online journey, Jennifer suggests you begin with something on the simpler side. Test the waters first, to see what you enjoy doing and what works. She highlighted some great examples from the list above that I hope will inspire you with some new ideas!

What I loved about talking to Jennifer was seeing how strategic she was—even from the beginning, when she didn’t even realize she was being strategic!

If you tuned in and listened to today’s episode, I hope you were as inspired by Jennifer’s story as I was. She was following her passion. She was hustling. She was doing what she needed to do to make things work, and look how it came together for her! I hope the same for you!

This episode is brought to you by:

Gravy—my very own 24/7 engagement team who contacts my customers within hours of their failed payment, captures updated billing information and saves the customers I worked so hard to acquire. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans, you’ve got to check out Gravy!

#214: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Right Lead Magnet for Your Audience

7 juni 2018 | 32 min

Most of you already know I’m all about list building.

In fact, one of my favorite mottos is “always be list building.” But not everyone knows that an indispensable element of any successful list-building effort is an effective lead magnet—a freebie—that’ll stand front and center and draw crowds to opt-in.

But then the question becomes:

How do I know which type of lead magnet to create?

That’s why you can’t miss today’s episode! I’m sharing the ultimate guide to choosing the right lead magnet for your audience, covering the seven types of lead magnets I think are working best right now.

And what I’m sharing is not only from my experience. I’ve prepared a bunch of examples of lead magnets from some of my good friends and peers—all of them list building pros—and I’m also covering the pros and cons of each, to help you decide which lead magnets are right for you and your audience.

To make it even easier for you, I’ve prepared a freebie with every one of the examples of lead magnets I’m going to discuss in the episode, so you can hear about them, but also see what I’m talking about as clearly as possible.

This episode is brought to you by:

My free Masterclass, The Ultimate List-Building Catch-Up Plan. If you are struggling to get started with list building or if you're not attracting new subscribers to your email list every single day, this is the free masterclass for you!

Check out these highlights:

Why it’s only worth it to look at your conversion rate numbers and not anyone else’s. [3:48]
The one lead magnet that’s sure to help your audience get to the finish line easily. [6:08]
The type of freebie that’ll get your audience saying, “I can’t believe this is free—I would’ve paid for this.” [10:55]
Is there a place for video or audio freebies? [13:33]
How about challenges? (You know you want to know how to make these lead magnets work—they’re fun!) [16:49]
The quick, easy (for audiences to process) and increasingly popular quiz. [20:17]
What kind of free courses you can do and how to get them to work as lead magnets. [24:41]

#213: 10 Things I'm Embarrassed to Tell You

31 maj 2018 | 36 min

Several years ago a well-known podcaster that I love, Jess Lively, shared an episode with her audience with this type of format (I think she called it Things I’m Afraid To Tell You) and the honest and raw truth from that post really hit a chord with her listeners, and I believe that even back then, it created a bit of an “online honesty” movement. She still does these episodes and they’re priceless.

In my opinion, there are far too many people in the online world that have created these “everything is awesome” online personas and it really casts a false light on what’s actually going on behind-the-scenes.

I, for one, don’t want to be looked at by those that follow me as this person that has it all figured out, doesn’t have bad days, doesn’t struggle in both my personal and business life (that’s so far from the truth, it’s laughable.) So, I titled this, “10 Things I’m Embarrassed To Tell You” - and I know I shouldn’t be embarrassed by this stuff, it’s just life stuff -- the real stuff, but when I look at social media, I feel embarrassed because it’s not my highlight reel. Although, as an entrepreneur, I believe that what’s personal is business, and what’s business is personal, and I see my business as my baby. This means the personal and business are bound to blend together, especially with a personal brand, and I wouldn’t be being honest and transparent if I were to just show the highlight reel.

I bet you’d be surprised at how much we have in common when it comes to the types of things that make us feel embarrassed, ashamed, or stupid, but we wouldn’t know it unless we talk about it, right?

Here we go:

1. Sometimes I wonder if Hobie and I made the right decision to not have kids together.

2. I work well under pressure so sometimes I let myself wait to the very last minute to finish something, because I know I’ll get it done, however, this causes tremendous stress for my team AND I am not so nice to Hobie in those moments and I hate myself for it.

3. I worry about aging because of my online presence.

4. I sometimes don't like to tell you that I use a copywriter.

5. I don't always love being the one in the relationship that makes the most money.

6. I’m a fierce competitor and want to be at the top of the charts with my podcast and the #1 affiliate in launches that I do.

7. Ok, this next one is super personal …. Growing up I was always afraid of my dad.

8. I am embarrassed about my weight and I don’t like to do video because of it.

9. When I have a big success (like a million dollar launch) I have this weird tinge of guilt thinking I don't totally deserve it - or I struggle with thoughts that it will all go away.

10. I struggle with letting go, even though I have an awesome team.

So there you have it...a bit of me baring my soul. The point of this week’s episode was, as I said, for me to be honest about parts of my personal and business life that you might not know about me yet - I really want you to know me. So when you see me out and about in real life, or better yet, come to one of my events in San Diego, you don’t just know the shiny, social media approved side of me. I want you to know all of me - and know that I am just like you in so many ways. That’s when true connections happen… I also really hope that maybe something I said will help you to not feel so alone in what you’re going through, or maybe even encourage you to be more honest and real with your own online community.

And can I just say, Thank you! Thank you for allowing me to feel safe enough to share these types of things here today. I truly love my community -- you all are such a source of encouragement to me!

Have a great day!

#212: How to Hit $1M with a List Under 20K with Rick Mulready

24 maj 2018 | 63 min

Today I’m bringing back one of my favorites, Facebook ads guru, Rick Mulready.

The difference is today I’ve got him nervous—because he’s here to share with you what he’s NEVER shared before…he’s taking you behind the scenes and letting you in on his process of how he got to a million dollars in just one year (!). He’s also talking about how he reached that number with a decent (but not monster-sized) list of 17,000 (which once upon a time was 30,000).

You know I love to talk tips, tricks, and strategies, but I also think it’s important to look at how you are thinking, how you are feeling, what motivates you to make certain decisions and how they actually work for you… which is what Rick is sharing today.

Tips and tricks will only get you so far unless you learn to get your head on straight around everything you’re working on in your business. And Rick is ready to get raw and honest and show you the shifts he made during 2017 and the results these changes had on his life and business. Let’s get all of the scoop.

Check out these highlights:

Random moment of the episode: my new sauna (I didn’t bring this up myself, but it’s a fun tidbit to hear). [4:40]
The offers Rick made in 2017 to get to a million bucks. [8:20]
The issue of quantity vs. quality for your business model. [10:46]
How Rick changed the way he was thinking about his own email list size. [13:38]
Shifting your mindset from a lack to abundance as it relates to your team. [27:55]
Let’s get honest: Are you not growing your team because you’re scared to spend money? [32:29]
At some point, you might not make it without a team… [37:55]
Rick’s awesome email list re-engagement campaign. [42:07]

Random moment of the episode: my new sauna (I didn’t bring this up myself, but it’s a fun tidbit to hear). [4:40] The offers Rick made in 2017 to get to a million bucks. [8:20] The issue of quantity vs. quality for your business model. [10:46] How Rick changed the way he was thinking about his own email list size. [13:38] Shifting your mindset from a lack to abundance as it relates to your team. [27:55] Let’s get honest: Are you not growing your team because you’re scared to spend money? [32:29] At some point, you might not make it without a team… [37:55] Rick’s awesome email list re-engagement campaign. [42:07]

#211: 5 Things I Said "Yes" To In The Early Years (But Say "No" to Now)

16 maj 2018 | 28 min

#210: 5 Lessons I Learned From Shonda Rhimes

9 maj 2018 | 49 min

Shonda Rhimes, the creative powerhouse behind Grey's Anatomy, Scandal, and How to Get Away with Murder, wrote a book a few years ago called Year of Yes that really resonated with me. I’m sharing five takeaway lessons that have impacted my personal and business life in a pretty major way.

First, let me set the scene for you as to why Shonda even wrote this book. Shonda and her sister were in the kitchen getting ready for Thanksgiving dinner way back in 2013, and Shonda was telling her sister about some parties, talk shows, and conferences that she'd been recently invited to, you know, the Hollywood type stuff. She was talking about how she was too busy to do any of it, and without blinking an eye, her sister said something to her that day that became the wake-up call that Shonda needed to transform her “busy life”, and those words were:

Her sister knew that Shonda was hiding behind being too busy to avoid doing things that scared her and would take her out of her comfort zone. Her sister also knew that Shonda had ZERO balance in her life and she was actually miserable. Now, would the outside world have known that she was miserable? No. However, Shonda knew that her sister was telling the truth. She’d been called out and it was the truth.

This brought on an epiphany that something major had to change in her life. She wrote in her book: "This could not possibly be what having it all was supposed to feel like, could it? Because if it was, if this is what I spent all this time and energy working so hard for, if this is what the promised land looked like, what was success ... was what success felt like, was what I sacrificed for ... " And then she trailed off, telling the reader she didn't even wanna go there.

This was her aha moment! And the reason I bring it up here is because I think many of us are working our tails off, hustling to the core, and if we're not careful, we're gonna work ourselves into the ground, and then one day we're gonna pop up and say, "Wait. Was this what I was working so hard for, to feel burned out and overworked and tired?” We’ve got to be really mindful of this. I know we're creating businesses we absolutely love, but just don’t work yourself into the ground, okay?

So, there you have it! I hope these five lessons I learned from my mentor, Shonda Rhimes, have given you a new perspective on how to live a more fulfilling life and to run your business from a place of empowerment and truth.

Don’t forget to download the freebie I created for you. It’s a worksheet that is going to walk you step-by-step through some exercises that go along with the lessons I talked about today. It's a bit of a journaling type of exercise, but believe me, it will make everything you learned more actionable.

This episode is brought to you by: Master Class: How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days www.Amyporterfield.com/courses

#209: The Surprising Journey of Launching a Physical Product with Lara Casey

3 maj 2018 | 53 min

Have you ever thought about creating a physical product to sell online, maybe even adding one to your digital line up?

And if you have, have you found yourself overwhelmed with not really knowing where to start in order to bring that product from merely an idea to something your customers can physically hold in your hands?

As most of you know, my business consists of all digital products and I would say 90% of my audience is the same, but I still get questions, pretty frequently, asking me about creating physical products to include in their existing online business. Maybe you’re at a point where you’d like to add a physical product. Questions like: How do I know if I’m ready to add a physical product to my digital mix? Where would I even go to get started? What kind of physical product could I add to the mix?

Since I get a lot of questions around this topic, but I’m not the expert, I thought, “Let’s bring on someone who is.” My guest today, Lara Casey - founder of CultivateWhatMatters.com, has authored two books, Cultivate, and Make it Happen, and has had huge success in launching and selling physical products online. If you’ve ever heard of the famous PowerSheets, she’s the creator!

Lara is going to talk to us about how she knew it was time to launch a physical product; how she figured out and managed all the details around designing, producing, and fulfilling a physical product. And to keep it real, she shares the ups and downs as she created her product along the way.

When I asked Lara to tell my podcast listeners a little bit about herself, this is what she said: “We’re all about planting seeds and helping women to Cultivate What Matters and giving them the tools they need to plant seeds of growing intentional relationships or cultivating their faith...whatever it may be, specific to them.”

Planting seeds...cultivating...intentional… I love this!

Lara continued, “I’m a mom to three, a grateful wife, and I’m really passionate about helping an instant-results culture embrace the power of little by little progress, instead of perfection.”

Head over to www.CultivateWhatMatters.com/Amy to see Lara’s amazing products (and check out that job listing, if they haven’t filled it by the time you’re reading this). When you use that special link, Lara is giving you a special discount because you’re part of my awesome community. Yay for us! And, thank you, Lara!

Also, don't forget to let me know, in the comments below, if you like this longer, more detailed version of show notes. I appreciate your input!

This episode is sponsored by my free masterclass, How to Create Your Ultimate List-Building Catch-Up Plan. You can get it at http://www.amyporterfield.com/listbuilding. If you are not building your email list every single day there is no better time than right now!

#208: How I've Built My "Small, But Mighty" Team (The Wins, Fails & Fears)

2 maj 2018 | 51 min

It’s time to talk team!

In the last 6 months, it’s been a staffing bonanza: I’ve hired four of the five full-time positions on my team. And boy, has it been a whirlwind, filled with mistakes, wins, fears and A LOT of excitement.

But through the process, I’ve identified 7 big distinctions to help you build your own team. Now, I’m not saying go out and hire right now! At this point, all you might need is an amazing VA, or a part-time contractor to help you out. I’m tackling this subject as well, so stay tuned.

Building your team—the right kind of team—is essential to the growth of your business, to eliminate some of the stress and overwhelm, to make a bigger impact, and yeah, to make more money! So if you’re a business owner growing your business, this will be a must-listen for you. (44:34)

With the right team on your side, the sky’s the limit!

So, join me as I share with you how I built my “Small, But Mighty” team, and how I figured out what I needed and what I didn’t need. I’ve also got an awesome freebie for those of you starting to build your team virtually—you can get my “7 Make or Break Questions When You’re Interviewing for a Virtual Position” here. Let’s get started!

This episode is brought to you by:

Gravy—my very own 24/7 engagement team who contacts my customers within hours of their failed payment, captures updated billing information and saves the customers I worked so hard to acquire. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans, you’ve got to check out Gravy!

Check out these highlights:

Who is on my team—what each team member does—and when I started building my team. [5:29]
Why I wanted local team members (and how I ultimately changed my mind!). [15:26]
About those trial periods (yes, they’re a bit corporate, but they work!) [20:39]
So, what if they’ve got the skill set but not much of the right personality? [23:34]
When it’s OK to hire even if they don’t have all the experience (and what to do). [31:37]
My fave hiring tools. [35:17]
Hiring a referral vs. hiring from an ad. [37:36]
Getting over the fear of hiring [45:07]

#207: 20 Questions (Rapid Fire Style!) with Special Guest Interviewer, Hobie Porterfield

2 maj 2018 | 45 min

My husband Hobie and I had a great time recording this episode!

It was extra special because a couple weeks before recording the episode, I asked my audience to send in questions for me to answer: business, personal, silly, or whatever. The hook was that I couldn't look at any of the questions in advance. Hobie was the only one that got to look at them. He went through all the questions. He said there were a bunch of great questions and that they were pretty hard to narrow down. Perhaps we’ll have a Part 2 at some point!

Thank you to all of my awesome fans for sending in such great questions. You truly are the best!

Well, as you can imagine, I was a bit nervous because I had no clue what was coming at me. I told this to Hobie and he assured me that I was, and I quote, “definitely going to be uncomfortable on a few of them.” Great! Just great!

Alright, I’m going to list out the questions here and give you a bit of a teaser on each one, but I invite you to tune in to my podcast to hear our full conversation (just press the play button at the top of this page). : )

QUESTIONS: YOU ASKED AND I’M TELLING HOW DO YOU FIND A FAMILY AND BUSINESS BALANCE WITHOUT LOSING YOUR SANITY AND FEELING GUILTY? —NATHALIA MELO WILSON

My answer has to do with having an understanding husband who speaks up when he needs to.

WILL YOU GIVE IN AND MOVE OR RETIRE TO TENNESSEE? INQUIRING MINDS WANT TO KNOW. —SHANTELL BRIGHTMAN

Hobie and I dream of a lake house in Tennessee one day!

WHAT WAS THE BEST VACATION YOU EVER HAD? ~ TRACY GREEN CAINES

Let me just tell you, the mini-pool on the balcony overlooked the ocean! Ahhhh….

CAN YOU SHARE WITH US A CHALLENGING PERIOD IN YOUR LIFE AND HOW YOU GOT OUT OF IT? ~ MYKAO THAO

A time when I wanted to wrap Hobie up in bubble wrap every morning. I know the suspense is killing you, isn’t it?!

IF A WORK-LIFE BALANCE IS IMPORTANT TO YOU, HOW CAN YOU TELL YOU’RE GETTING IT RIGHT? ~ MICHELLE ONYANGO

I actually get into this topic in an episode that airs shortly after this one (it will be episode 210...be on the lookout). My answer in this episode has a lot to do with the happiness of my family.

HOW DID YOU PICK YOUR DOG’S NAMES: GUS AND SCOUT? ~ SPURGEON PERKINS

You'll have to tune in to the show to hear how we came up with their names.

WHAT DOES A TYPICAL DAY LOOK LIKE FOR AMY PORTERFIELD? ~ RACHAEL WATSON

Doing videos, writing, meetings, family time, exercise. If you’re interested I did an entire “Week in the Life” type episode that you can listen to here.

WHAT’S THE BIGGEST MISTAKE YOU’VE MADE IN YOUR BUSINESS, OR THE SINGLE BEST THING YOU’VE DONE? ~ AMY WARE

Without a doubt, taking the leap to do what I do now!

HOW DO YOU MANAGE TO NOT RESPOND TO NEGATIVE COMMENTS? ~ NIKOLINA ANDRIC

I’m pretty good here, but Hobie’s another story. ; )

DOES AMY SHARE THE COVERS, HOBIE? OR IS SHE A COVERS HOG? INQUIRING MINDS WANT TO KNOW. ~ NICOLE WALTERS

Hobie shares why he nicknamed me “The Alligator” when it comes to hogging the covers.

IF YOU WERE JUST GETTING STARTED IN SOCIAL MEDIA, WHAT ARE THE THREE TOP PLATFORMS YOU WOULD FOCUS ON BUILDING AN AUDIENCE? ~ TAMMI HARRIS

YouTube, Facebook, and Instagram.

Well, I have to admit, I may have been a little nervous at first, but that was super fun. If there are any Pittsburgh Steeler fans out there, you may want to tune in to the last part of the episode for a good Steelers story.

**********

And that's a wrap! Maybe Hobie does have a future in podcasting after all! 😍

Amy

P.S. If you'd like to hear more from Hobie, listen in to this episode where we talked about how to make love and business work.

GDPR For Entrepreneurs: What You Need to Know with Bobby Klinck

30 april 2018 | 62 min

If you have an online business or an email list that you communicate with, you’ve probably heard the rumblings around the internet about the EU’s new General Data Protection Regulation (let’s just call it GDPR, shall we?). This new regulation goes into effect May 25, 2018 and in an effort to understand what it is, what it means to online marketers, and what we need to take action on, I’ve invited Bobby Klinck, an intellectual property attorney, to help us navigate all things GDPR. Bobby is not only an attorney, but he is an entrepreneur himself, so he really has his finger on the pulse of what online entrepreneurs need to do to protect themselves.

Let’s dive in and figure this all out!6 principles of the GDPR

#1: Data shall be processed “lawfully, fairly, and in a transparent manner.”

#2: Data shall be “collected for specified, explicit and legitimate purposes.”

#3: Data processing shall be “limited to what is necessary” for the purpose.

#4: Data shall be accurate, kept up to date, and corrected.

#5: Data shall be kept so it identifies a person “no longer than is necessary.”

#6: Data shall be “processed in a manner that ensures appropriate security.”

Let’s break down all 4 options:

Opt-in Page:
You can add a voluntary checkbox/dropdown menu on your opt-in page.
This would clearly be consent if you do it right.
It must be voluntary and it cannot be the default. You can’t force them to agree and you can’t have the agreement as the default.
If you are going to do this, try to use a drop-down menu vs a checkbox. That way they have to choose “Yes or No” - so they have to make a choice and you are not forcing the “Yes.” With a checkbox for “Yes”, they can easily miss it and skip it all together (since it can’t be forced!).
Sandwich Page:
Include a one-click upsell page between opt-in and thank you page that asks them to subscribe.
“Hey! One more thing before we finish.” - It’s essentially a sales page for your newsletter.
This gives you the chance to sell the benefits of being on your list.
They are presented with this option all on its own, so it’s compliant.
Delivery Email:
You deliver the email as usual that gives them the lead magnet as promised.
Include language in the email to sell them on joining your list and include a call to action (example below).
Depending on how your system works, either send them to a separate opt-in or use click to segment the list.
In the Lead Magnet:
Add a paragraph at the end of your lead magnets selling them on your list with a clickable link.
This is sufficient consent and it gives them a reminder if they look back at your lead magnet later.

What’s Next?

Check out Bobby’s Free GDPR Training: I’m breaking my rules a bit here because you all know I’ve had a policy for the last year or so of not sending podcast traffic to someone else’s sign up page - I’ve talked about that strategy on my show before. HOWEVER, this information is important and I want you to protect yourself. So I’m making an exception. I want to encourage you to check out Bobby’s FREE mini-training all about the GDPR. The goal of his mini training is not only to make sure that you, as an online entrepreneur, understand the legal requirements but also to give you the tools and practical advice you need to thrive in a GDPR world.

THANK YOU, Bobby, for your time and generosity in helping us understand GDPR. I truly feel I now have what it takes to move forward and implement to get compliant before the deadline! -- Amy

#206: The Post-It Content Creation Mini Training

12 april 2018 | 32 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

When you’re looking into creating a course—and this is especially true when you’re just starting out—you’ve got a TON of information to choose from. Maybe you’ve been working on this material for 5 or 10 years, or you’ve been consulting a while and you have a ton of stories, examples and exercises.
Getting all of that out of your head can be difficult, to say the least. Whenever I sit down to create a new course (like I’m doing right now) it can be both exciting, and excruciating.
Which is why I wanted to bring on Gina Onativia, a content and course expert who is in the trenches every day with her clients, building their courses. Gina has a super practical post-it exercise she’s created to help her clients figure out some pre-details before diving into course creation. I think of her process as kind of like a “prelude” to my own...and I think you’ll find it extremely helpful in your own course creation process.

By the way, if you’re NOT in the midst of creating a course, you can also use this exercise for any type of content creation. AND I want to make sure you download the freebie—which has the exact steps we are going to talk about in this episode. In the freebie, you’ll see a real post-it exercise from one of Gina’s clients that you can use as an example to guide your own process (and I LOVE great examples!). (9:01)

With your freebie at the ready, get ready to dive into your course creation here.

This episode is brought to you by: In my free masterclass: How to Confidently Create Your First Online Course in 60 Days, I will walk you through all of the pieces it takes to create a stellar online course. Save your spot here!

Check out these highlights:

The first area course creators get tripped up when starting out. [8:42]
How to start your post-it exercise. (If you’re an office supply junkie like me, get excited!) [9:31]
Why it’s so important to know what your avatar is feeling. [13:59]
How to brainstorm your overarching steps. [14:50]
What to do if you’re stuck. [16:27]
The final step: Your roadmap. [19:15]
How do I sell just a piece of my course as a standalone? [24:04]

#205: The 3 Do’s and 3 Don’ts for Entrepreneurs In-the-Making

5 april 2018 | 30 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

The fear of not being good enough is a tough feeling to shake. If you struggle with this fear, I know it can show up way too often. Now, I can’t promise that it will ever completely go away—but I am proof that you can silence that voice A LOT.
If this fear comes up for you, then this is the show for you.
Today I’m going to introduce you to a powerhouse named Rachel Hollis—an amazing entrepreneur who manages a lifestyle website with almost two million readers each year and over 800,000 actively engaged followers on social media. Together, we’re talking about the pressures that you face as mothers and fathers and husbands and wives and employees, and of course, entrepreneurs.
We’re talking do’s and don’ts for entrepreneurs-in-the-making, and specifically, how to break through some of those major fears that we are constantly up against as you put yourself out there on social media, and in videos, and everything else you do to build your online business. (2:25)

Now, if you read the title of this episode and said something along the lines of, “Well, I’m not really sure I can call myself an entrepreneur…,” this is what I have to say to you: If you’re showing up, if you’re building your business, if you’re working hard toward your goals—you are legit! You are an entrepreneur, so it’s time to own it! So, if the fear of not being good enough, or that you’re not doing enough, or that you’re not doing it right, if those fears come up for you, then this is the show for you. Listen in.

This episode is brought to you by: My incredible and free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan,” where you’ll learn my proven 3-stack system for leveraging the most powerful, “what’s working now” list-building strategies. You can sign up here.

Check out these highlights:

Why comparison is the death of joy. [5:39]
What to do if you’re feeling guilty about taking time for your business.[7:34]
Here’s the truth: Nobody cares about your dreams (it’s not as sad as it sounds, and it’s actually a good thing!). [10:33]
Rachel’s story of being a fighter and pushing forward no matter what… [12:01]
How to find your tribe (a.k.a. those who’ll build you up!). [13:58]
Installing daily habits to emphasize your goals. [16:45]
The real magic behind writing down goals. [21:35]
About finding yourself in (or out) of balance… [24:30]

Links mentioned in this episode:

Rachel’s book, Girl, Wash Your Face: Stop Believing the Lies About Who You Are So You Can Become Who You Were Meant to Be

#204: How She Quit Her Day Job and Turned Her Side Hustle Into a Full-Time Thing with Melissa Norris

29 mars 2018 | 48 min

#203: How To Get Noticed Online When You’re Just Starting Out

22 mars 2018 | 30 min

#202: How to Engage Your Small Facebook Group When You’re Just Starting Out with Caitlin Bacher

15 mars 2018 | 56 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

In the past few years, as Facebook has evolved, I’ve begun to think about Facebook groups in a whole different way. I believe groups—and not pages—are the key to building the kind of communities that allow you to truly connect with and grow your audience.
And it’s not just me! Many of my peers are having the same experience in discovering the incredible potential of Facebook groups. One superstar, in particular, is my friend Caitlin Bacher—who has grown her private FB group to more than 30,000 members in 3 years!
Caitlin is with me today to answer the question I get asked all of the time with my students: How do I boost engagement in my Facebook groups when I’m starting from zero?
Tune in to learn how to make Facebook groups one of your most effective social platforms! And Caitlin shares ALL, including the #1 mistake she sees entrepreneurs make with groups... [6:06]

Yes, I know it sounds like things just got trickier with the Facebook algorithm and the announcement that Facebook is going to focus more on “meaningful social interactions.” But don’t panic! This is actually great news for those of you who are using (or want to use) Facebook groups for your business. There are so many options. From Facebook groups that are tied to your paid content, to free communities that are tied to your bigger messaging and brand. It all begins here.

This episode is brought to you by: Master Class: How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days www.Amyporterfield.com/free

Check out these highlights:

Why Facebook groups and why someone would decide to do only Facebook groups? [4:14]
The importance of getting really good at selling one thing first. [8:55]
Everything you need to know about closed free groups. [17:57]
Some of the best type of content you can create for your own communities. [28:00]
What about Facebook groups created for paid courses? [34:01]
Using an email series to boost engagement within your Facebook group. [37:08]
How to use the group to help you solve for buyer’s remorse (for your paid content). [39:48]

#201: Five Ways to Make Money (Without Using Webinars)

8 mars 2018 | 58 min

#200: 10 Online Marketers Share Their Zig Stories

1 mars 2018 | 75 min

It’s the 200th episode! Cue the confetti and champagne! If you have been listening to me since I first aired in 2013, THANK YOU! It’s been 5 AMAZING years and I couldn’t have done it without you!

To celebrate, I have asked some of my closest friends and peers to share quick pieces about something I’ve been thinking about a lot lately…

How do you zig when others are zagging?

How do you “go against the grain”?

When do you take a risk and change things up?

And I couldn’t think of anyone better to tackle this topic than my small group of much-cherished and loved peers. I hope you enjoy listening to these as much as I have. Get ready to make some zigs happen for your own business!

If you’re wondering if it’s a right time to “zig” for your business, listen up to my four scenarios to help you decide.

Want a personalized message from me on instagram? And if you want that new “outtake” of me sharing my personal story of zigging, make sure to 1) take a screenshot of this episode 2) post it on Instagram (feed or stories) and use #200withamy and tag me when you post it. Then I’ll slide into your DM with a link to this clip! That’s right, I will personally DM you...

Here’s a sneak peek of each of my amazing group of peers:

Jasmine Star gives us the inside scoop into how she invested a year of heart, soul and money into a launch that got her … an underwhelming amount of students. But then she decided to “knock on some digital doors” ... [12:50]
Ray Edwards shares the personal touch he provided for each person who bought one of his high-end programs. [18:25]
Pat Flynn starts off with a life-changing story from his childhood, then talks about how giving away a study guide for free became the launching-off point for Smart Passive Income. [20:03]
Diane Sanfilippo on why you need to be focused on creating paid content and programs. [26:30]
Julie Solomon offers up her own version of “Pitch Perfect” and how she took the initiative to start monetizing her blog. [32:01]
Tarzan Kay shares how she broke ALL the rules of launches, and executed a simple (no stress!) promotion that netted her five figures. [39:59]
James Wedmore gives us multiple examples of zigging, and asks a series of questions to help you come up with your own different “out of the box” ideas. [45:36]
Russell Brunson talks about how one T-shirt helped to reduce his ClickFunnels churn by 23 percent (!)—and build a powerful community in the process. [51:03]
Rick Mulready walks his own talk and tries his hand at Facebook Messenger for feedback about this podcast. The results may surprise you—because they surprised him! [56:51]
Jenna Kutcher gets real (as always) and tells you why she decided to go completely transparent with her messaging. [1:01:18]

Links to learn more about my special group of friends:

Jasmine Star: www.jasminestar.com/
Ray Edwards: www.rayedwards.com/welcome/
Pat Flynn: https: www.smartpassiveincome.com/
Diane Sanfilippo: www.balancedbites.com/
Julie Solomon: www.juliesolomon.net/
Tarzan Kay: https://tarzankay.com/
James Wedmore: www.jameswedmoretraining.com/
Russell Bruson: www.russellbrunson.com/hi
Rick Mulready: www.rickmulready.com
Jenna Kutcher: www.jennakutcher.com/

#199: From Two Failed Course Launches to Pre-Sell Success with Michelle Evans

22 februari 2018 | 58 min

#198: Five Important Facebook Ad Changes with Rick Mulready

15 februari 2018 | 46 min

#197: How to 10X Your Results in 2018 (and Beyond) with 3 Dead Simple Strategies With Marie Forleo

8 februari 2018 | 65 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Marie Forleo is back to tell it like it is.
Today she’s bringing three so-simple strategies that ANYONE can use to amp up their results this year. So no more “I’m never going to make enough money to quit my day job.” No more “My list is stuck at 900.” No more “I can’t connect with my audience.”
So if you feel overwhelmed or overstretched or maybe, just maybe, like you’re drowning, this conversation is for you.

Marie has this uncanny ability to help you uncover what’s truly holding you back from getting results and on this episode, you’ll be amazed to discover that all of the strategies we’re diving into today require more of you and less of all the tools and gizmos you think you need to succeed online.

And if you let them, these strategies will free you up and open the door to a business you’ve been dreaming of.

WARNING: This one is definitely an “ear-buds episode” (to wear around the kids); Marie’s breaking out the adult language.

Check out these highlights:

Why running faster and faster and faster and working harder and harder and harder (like a hamster) will not get you the results you want. [10:00]
What it means to show the raw, real you. [12:02]
How Marie shook up her longtime video show with a little sumthin’ called Marie Unplugged. [17:23]
Do NOT spend a lot of money on that production! [20:46]
A real unscripted moment Marie had on the streets of New York. [22:23]
Our 24-hour challenge for you. [23:25]
Forget Social and focus on THIS instead. [25:05]
One of the most underrated and overlooked traits for creatives and entrepreneurs. [35:43]
How Marie took her B-School refund rate from 19% to less than 2%. [40:31]

Make sure to check out Marie’s FREE Video Training Series

This is some of the best marketing training out there today (in my opinion!). In Video One Marie covers two burning questions:

Where should I focus in my business?
How do I know if I’m working on the right things for my business?

Grab video one here now.

Links I mentioned in this episode:

Exploring B-School: 30 Days of Diving Into the Details For the third year in a row, I’m bringing back my free, 30-Day B-School Pop-up Facebook Group, where I will get laser-focused on my experience with Marie’s B-School program. I’ll share personal business-building stories of how I got where I am today, exclusive live video trainings, and a lot of insights of how I got the most out of B-School. You can request access here.

#196: 3 Surprising Strategies to Increase Sales on Your Next Webinar

1 februari 2018 | 28 min

#195: The 6 Pillars of My Content Creation Process

24 januari 2018 | 41 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

You KNOW you have to create “quality content” for your different outcomes—but how do you make sure that it is relevant and compelling, and the entire process doesn’t feel completely overwhelming
Today I’m taking the overwhelm out of getting out weekly material plus creating content inside of your programs and promotions plus everything else you’ve got to think about by breaking down every single part of the content-creating process for you.
Introducing: My six pillars of content creation process and how they help me stay focused with every content piece I produce.

When you start categorizing your content and just hone in on one or two things (versus the 30 things on your project plan!), you can do them much more effectively. With these pillars, I want you to know exactly what you’re focusing on for where you are in your business. No more second-guessing on what kind of content you need to engage your tribe, or build up to a promotion. I’ve put it all out there so you can take immediate action.

Oh and by the way, it may surprise you to know that I will often spend more time and energy working on my free content than on my paid content. And there’s a solid why behind that. (19:33)

Check out these highlights:

How I create so much content in my business [00:38]
The type of content that brings in my ideal customer avatars like bees to honey. [6:48]
To freebie or not to freebie? (Or: How to know if my content will work best with a freebie?) [9:07]
Content for the masses vs. content for your Tribe. [13:34]
Who is social media content really for? [16:50]
When to focus most of your content creation time into your free promo content. [19:33]
The key lesson for creating paid course content. [25:10]
The right time for paid bonus content. [27:45]
Why I’m including paid relationship content in my six pillars (and what that even means!). [31:40]

Here's the '6 Pillars SlideShare' I promised in this episode: www.amyporterfield.com/6pillars

#194: How I Handle Criticism as an Online Marketer

18 januari 2018 | 20 min

#193: Should I Join a Mastermind?

11 januari 2018 | 43 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

I don’t know it all. That’s an incredibly humbling thing to say, but it’s the truth. I don’t know everything about business, and in fact, I’ve got my share of blind spots.
That’s exactly why I surround myself with incredible peers, so I can have a go-to resource to solve for business challenges and help make big decisions. And I think a great way to find that sounding board is through a mastermind.
I know there are no real silver bullets in online business, but a good mastermind comes pretty darn close. I think it can make the difference between success and total failure for you as a business owner.

So today I’m digging into masterminds—

Why you should think about joining a mastermind
How you know if you’re ready
How to pick a great one

Plus I’ll talk about a big decision I just made to join a mastermind for 2018, why I’m signing up, and who’s coming with me.

By the way—if you know me, you know I’m always looking for inspiration. And a big thing about working with a mastermind is that the group members inspire you to take action, partly because you’re seeing them take action, and partly because you’re in this together, and want everyone to succeed. I’ll even share a specific example of how I inspired one member to get some serious things done for her business. (13:19)

Check Out These Highlights:

The many reasons to join a mastermind. [7:54]
A really good mastermind has members that do this on a consistent basis. [9:00]
How do you know when you are ready to join a mastermind? The criteria to consider. [14:17]
Three steps to help you find the right mastermind for you. [19:51]
The elements that are crucial for me in joining a peer group. [25:17]
Your must nots are just as (if not more) important than your musts. Here’s why. [28:44]
End cap: Let’s talk about money and masterminds. [34:26]

This episode is brought to you by: Free Masterclass: The Ultimate List Building Catch-up Plan

Mastermind/Group Coaching Resources:

Jeff Walker’s Masterminds Jeff has two—a Launch Club and a Platinum group. Currently all spaces are full; for more information, email [email protected].

Brendon Burchard’s Masterminds (2 levels)

Rick Mulready’s Accelerator Group Coaching Program

The Course for Completion Mastermind (for course creators)

*Note: At this time both of James Wedmore’s masterminds are full and therefore I am not linking to them in the show notes.

#192: Are You Embracing the “Visionary Role” In Your Business?

4 januari 2018 | 29 min

#191: A Week in the Life (A Behind the Scenes Look Into My Business)

28 december 2017 | 73 min

#190: How Getting ‘Niche Specific’ Evolved Into $12K/Month Automated Webinars

21 december 2017 | 53 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Today this dog lover (me!) is talking cat grooming—but it’s not what you think :). I’m highlighting cat grooming as the starting point of what has become a lucrative business empire for my student and new friend, Danelle German.
Danelle started with one simple question (5:07) —and grew that focus to a business that now generates $12,000 a month on evergreen webinars ALONE. That’s not counting her speaking, curriculum deals, physical products and certification program.
Danelle is here to teach us: If you really want to make money in this online marketing world, you need to drill down and serve a specific audience.

You never know who you’re going to meet at live events, right? And I am so pleased that I got the opportunity to meet Danelle at a recent event, because she is the perfect example of starting small and scaling slowly and intelligently. (During today’s episode, you’re going to hear me say “genius” A LOT.) I encourage you to “listen beyond the cat grooming” and absorb how Danelle uncovered new opportunities to consistently build her business.

Check Out These Highlights:

The question that Danelle’s audience REALLY wanted answered. [5:29]
How difficult it was to focus on a small niche like cat grooming (when starting out)... [7:37]
Why you don’t need massive amounts of customers. [12:12]
How Danelle was able to avoid any tough competition. [14:45]
The secret element that made Danelle’s business so effective in the early days. [18:19]
Why it’s crucial to shed light on the problems your audience faces. [19:24]
How Danelle added a non-cat grooming audience to her repertoire. [22:33] And where she found them (so you can add your own sub-audience!).
Danelle’s experience on how she used Webinars That Convert to lock in her success.[29:05]
Why she switched to evergreen webinars. [32:30]
The unbelievable show-up rate Danelle sees on her webinars. [34:43]
How to find and nail your niche. [41:38]

Danelle on the Value of Staying in Your Zone of Expertise: “If I am 100% confident in what I am talking about and what I am teaching and, ultimately, what I am selling to people, I am going to do a much better job. The further I get out of the scope of my area of expertise and skill set, that confidence begins to diminish. I keep it real tight around that skill set and that knowledge base and then grow from there.” —Danelle German, Online Marketing Entrepreneur, National Cat Groomers Institute

#189: 3 Wins (and a Few Misses) From My Live Events

14 december 2017 | 35 min

#188: What I Learned From a Year of Automating My Business

7 december 2017 | 32 min

#187: How to Use Pinterest to Generate Traffic and Profits With Jenna Kutcher

30 november 2017 | 51 min

#186: How to Makeover Your Blog to Get More Traction with Julie Solomon

23 november 2017 | 56 min

#185: All About Instagram Ads with Rick Mulready

16 november 2017 | 44 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Rick Mulready is back to give the scoop on Social Media ads—but with a TWIST! We’re taking a break from Facebook ads (but don’t worry—much more to come as always on those!) and shining the light on his Social Media sister, Instagram.
Now just because these two are related, don’t think one size fits all when it comes to working with these platforms. Rick and I walk through the nuances of the difference between the two (especially when it comes to imagery, videos and placement).
Just in case you don’t think Instagram ads are worth for your business—keep in mind that there are 800 million Instagram users right now that are up for grabs.
AND if that’s not enough, if you have a product or service, Instagram can be an incredibly powerful platform for you. Just take a listen to these stats that Rick throws out. [7:39]

I gotta tell you, I love Instagram and feel that it’s a great time to grab your audience’s attention. So I’m shifting gears with Rick today so we can help you capitalize on the Insta Opportunity. I want you to dive in...and help me figure out the big question: Emoji or emoticons?

A special Easter Egg for today’s episode: It turns out you DO need 10,000 followers in order to have the swipe up feature. (And on that same note, follow Rick on Instagram @rickmulready so he can get the followers he needs!) If you want to know what I’m talking about, check out our sidebar conversation on this.[21:00]

And a few great Instagram examples (including that story ad I ran):

Check out these highlights:

Let’s start this off with WHO exactly is on Instagram (so you know if you should be there!). [3:20]
What are the best days and times to post on Instagram? [5:00]
Where and how to set up your ads (on Facebook and Instagram). [10:39]
Which ad type would be best for your business and customers—and the parameters for each. [12:03]
The big differences between Facebook and Instagram (Here’s a hint: you CAN’T just repurpose one for the other). [13:17]
With Insta, do you have the same targeting possibilities as Facebook? [19:22]
How to take advantage of story ads (and what happened after I ran my first one for my List Builders Lab promo). [22:10]
Why you need to add text and emojis to your InstaStories. [28:16]
How to choose the right objectives when creating your Instagram ad campaigns. [28:59]

#184: How She Did It: From a Webinar False Start to a $30,000 Success Story

9 november 2017 | 46 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

I’ve talked extensively about my epic fails with webinars—and I’ve also shared how I picked myself back up, practiced a ton—experimented—and just went for it. It wasn’t any different for my friend, video rockstar Luria Petrucci, who has an incredible webinar success story that you need to hear.
I want this episode to inspire you to take action on your own webinars. Because if Luria can do it (and spend only $600 on Facebook ads in the process!), you can too.
If you are a student of my Webinars That Convert program, this is the episode for YOU as Luria (a fellow student) highlights exactly which tips and insights worked well for her.
And if you don’t have anything to sell yet, you can use the exact strategy Luria used to put an offer out there.

You may remember Luria from Episode 168 (The Easy Start Guide to Live Video), and I know I don’t usually bring guests back so quickly. But after hearing Luria’s story I knew you had to hear it too! So get ready. I really want you to take everything Luria learned to heart and think about how YOU can stretch yourself with webinars to get to the crazy results she proved weren’t so crazy after all. Also: Make sure you stay until the very end to learn how Luria kept her webinar attendees super engaged!

And one thing I want you to take advantage of...

If you are looking to up your webinar game, I have a must-see training where I take you behind the scenes of my actual webinar creation process: How to Create Your First Wildly Profitable Webinar (Even if You Don’t Have a List). That’s right, I literally open the gates wide open and show you all of my webinar creation secrets, including example after example of my own webinar strategies. I absolutely know this will be incredibly valuable for your own webinar creation process, so make sure to book a time to watch.

Check out these highlights:

Why Luria was skittish about doing webinars at first. [2:30]
How “stealing” made Luria thousands of dollars on her webinar. [9:05]
How to align your content with your offer. [11:14]
Get a detailed walk-through of Luria’s amazing results after her webinar strategy overhaul (and a little mix-up with conversion rate numbers!). [17:30]
Our big-game changer webinar strategy. [24:58]
The best way to get your audience to connect with you on a deeper level and want to take the next step. [29:47]
Struggling with your own webinars? Luria has a few final thoughts. [36:50]

#183: How to Create Your Promotional Calendar

2 november 2017 | 48 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Time to hit the ground running for your 2018 planning. And I mean starting TODAY.
This episode is meant to be your goal-setting workshop in a box—I’ve got everything you need to plan for 2018: How to do it, the questions to ask, and plenty of examples to inspire you to take action.
If you have felt like in the last year you are flying by the seat of your pants, or you have been frustrated with your promotions, or you have no idea how you’re going to make money NEXT YEAR, then it’s time to listen up and take action. [1:15]
By the way, the focus is on the first six months only, because you may want to repeat some of the success you saw in the first half of the year. I’m all about the rinse and repeat! Also: Opportunities will come your way, and I want you to have some flexibility in your planning for those.

Rules of Engagement Upfront:

I want you to take an entire day to do this process. I know, I know. No bellyaching. I don’t want you to feel rushed or pressured to get it done.
Pick a “special spot” to do this. If you want extra credit, book out a hotel room or a co-working space. If you’re going to do this at home, promise me you’ll send everyone away so you have the space to create, focus and think.
Don’t do this alone. Engage your virtual assistant or anyone on your team (either via Skype or fly them out!). I understand that you may be a “one-person show”—I encourage you to then find a friend or a peer that can be your sounding board.
Grab a whiteboard or a big sticky board. You’ll need a space to put your notes.

The freebie for this episode is EXACTLY WHAT YOU NEED TO PLAN:

You’ll hear me map out this entire process on the episode. Then, when you are ready to do your own plan, grab the step-by-step cheat sheet so you can work through this process for your own business. With this worksheet, you’ll know exactly how to plan for your 2018.

Check Out These Highlights:

Why your “non-negotiables” are crucial to your business success. [9:48]
The power of “declaring your number” and why it can drive your entire success for the New Year. [11:54]
How to get clarity on the past so you can plan for the future. [13:32]
The metrics you should come to the table with. [14:15]
What to ask yourself when you calendar your big promotions—a.k.a “the fun stuff.” [18:43]
Ways to make money in the next six months (to help get those creative juices flowing!). [19:52]
Don’t make this one mistake when planning out your promotions! [27:38]
Why you need white space between promotions. [30:45]
How to not let FOMO take you down in your planning process. [34:58]

#182: How to Mega-Batch Your Content

26 oktober 2017 | 26 min

#181: Eliminating Money Blocks with James Wedmore

19 oktober 2017 | 47 min

#180: 7 Ways I’ve Collaborated with Friends & Influencers to Increase Profits

12 oktober 2017 | 52 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

On today’s episode I’m going to walk you through seven collaborations that I’ve done over the years that range from my very first time collaborating, and even feeling a little shy (but learning so much!) all the way to collaborations with some of the biggest names in online marketing.
I’m giving you the inside scoop into how those actually came to be, and some of the lessons I learned from each of these amazing experiences.
And here’s a BIG note to remember: The key to successful collaborations is found within your relationship with the person – not on what that person can do for you or what you can do for him or her. [13:24]

I know this from experience: Building your business for the long term is much easier when you can find peers and collaborators that you can build amazing relationships with. When you’re first starting out and you may not have much of a list or presence, you want to find collaborations that can help you find an audience for your business. So I hope you enjoy as I walk through my own experiences, and how I cultivated some of the best business relationships I have to this day.

The freebie for this episode is SO GOOD:

I’ve got the Top 10 questions you should ask YOURSELF if you’re considering any collaboration. It’s a checklist of sorts, where I talk about the criteria I personally use when I think about partnering with someone. If you get honest with these questions, you will save yourself a lot of stress and potential “business heartache” - it’s a thing, trust me.

Download it here and run through them the next time you’re thinking about a collaboration.

Check out these highlights:

Collaboration #1: My very “first time”: how I went in, what I learned from it and what I wish I’d done differently [4:14]
Collaboration #2: When and how I learned the real special ingredient for collaborations (here’s a hint: it’s all about trust) [9:50]
Collaboration #3: How I landed a key influencer [15:37]
Collaboration #4: The most successful affiliate marketing relationship I’ve ever had. (Spoiler alert: It’s all about B-School with Marie Forleo!) [20:50]
Collaboration #5: How I moved things into the real world (think small live event) with a weekend workshop collaboration [24:42]
Collaboration #6: I get asked all of the time about adding guest experts inside of your paid course…here’s a full explanation of what I typically do, with Jasmine Star as my shining example [32:24]

Collaboration #7: And I just couldn’t leave this one out… If you’ve ever wondered how Rick Mulready and I started working together, maybe you’d like to hear about the coffee date I didn’t really want to go to. [39:10]

#179: The Real Truth Why I Hate Video (Hint: It's My Weight)

5 oktober 2017 | 11 min

#178: List Building + Social Media (What's Working Now)

28 september 2017 | 53 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Right at this moment you should be thinking about your list building efforts. I want you borderline obsessed with list-building! This episode is key to your obsession, as today you’re getting every single one of my tested and tried tips and tricks for list building.
List building starts with a great idea for a lead magnet, and a great idea for a lead magnet always starts with your ideal customer avatar. And there is ONE big question I ask when I'm thinking about my ideal customer avatar. [6:14]
There’s a new player in the list building game that’s getting off-the-charts results. It’s VIDEO and when done right, it will boost your list growth—it’s all how you use it—and that’s part of today’s episode.

I know I’ve talked about list-building many times before, but here’s the thing: list building—when done right—can dramatically change your business (I should know, since it completely changed mine). So I want you to listen, then take immediate action of one or two of the strategies I mention.

Stay tuned for a NEW, FREE and LIVE webinar with yours truly ;-) This is a training I’m doing by myself, and LIVE: “The Ultimate List-Building Catch-Up Plan.” If you’ve ever felt behind in your list building, I’m going to show you how to get caught up quickly in terms of what to do inside your business to create a list-building foundation that can run on autopilot.

Check out these highlights:

How to come up with a great idea for a lead magnet. [5:08]
How to embrace video when it comes to list building. [10:06]
Confirmation emails—there’s so much more you can do with them! [17:25]
The right strategy for your nurture sequence. [21:33]
How calls-to-actions can make all of the difference with your campaigns. [24:45]
The tools I use (and how I use them) for my own list building. [27:05]
How and why I link my original free content to my list-building efforts. [40:11]

The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan: My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm)

#177: How to Design Your Ideal Week with Michael Hyatt

21 september 2017 | 45 min

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Being productive is really not about “getting things done” and MORE about doing what’s inside your desire zone.
You’ve got your big “time savers” like productivity software, your smartphone, your hacks—but how is that all working out for you? These “resources” are actually cutting into your time!
You can transform your entire routine by defining your Ideal Week [26:39] (I know because I did it!).
There are four rituals you need to set yourself up for success. My guess is you are doing maybe one or two of these (at best) right now. So let’s UP your game.

What if you stopped telling yourself you needed to be more productive, and instead, focused on being free—to focus, be present, spontaneous, to do nothing. I know, kind of crazy, right? But that’s EXACTLY what my very special guest, Michael Hyatt, and I tackle today.

A quick bonus for listening: I wanted you to see how the Ideal Week exercise (listen here to understand the concept of an Ideal Week) is working for me, including my morning and workday rituals. Click play below to watch how I am now planning out my week.

You’ll want to check out Michael’s new training:

So many times you are doing things in the name of “productivity” that are actually making you feel more overwhelmed and discouraged. I want you to start making real progress and feel in control. Michael will talk all about that and more in his free training, “The 7 Deadly Sins of Productivity: The Hidden Habits Undermining Your Performance (And How to Change Them).” Sign up here for free before it’s too late!

Check out these podcast highlights:

You want to live your life in ONE out of four zones. [5:42]
How to provide a “positive no.” [12:22]
Tips to automate tasks (beyond just using technology). [15:44]
How to really structure your morning routine. [16:22]
The first step to optimizing delegation that so many miss. [22:22]
Your different “stage times” and how to allocate time for each. [26:51]
The power of “batching your meetings” to create more white space. [27:22]

#176: Steal My Podcast Project Plan!

14 september 2017 | 51 min

Why you’ve got to listen to today’s episode:

A podcast can dramatically change your business by connecting you with your audience in a new and intimate way, each and every week.
Having a comprehensive system (and proven project plan!) can help you streamline your delivery of consistent weekly content.
You can truly scale your content efforts—and save a TON of time—if you use a little system called “batching” when planning.
There’s one list-building tactic that’s on my MUST list: freebies, or content upgrades. There’s definitely an art and science to implementing these the right way. [26:28]

Today I’m bringing together two of my passions—podcasting and systems—in the ultimate behind-the-scenes of my podcast episodes. And I’ve spared no detail. It’s all here—from how I come up with my topics, to how we publish the finished recording, I walk through it all.

And you’ve got to get today’s freebie: It’s too good for words: a complete project plan of our process, ready for you to use at any time. I walk you through each of the six stages of podcast production, and even sprinkle in some insider notes. If you want to streamline your content creation, this one is a must for you.

And another quick bonus for today: I made you a quickie video to walk through my podcasting equipment essentials. I think you’ll be pleasantly surprised by how simple my set-up is! Click play to watch now.

Check out these highlights:

My star podcast team members, and the roles you need for your own production [4:44]
One of the best and most prepared podcast guests I have ever hosted [9:36]
The new strategy I am using to get more content done in concentrated amounts of time [13:37]
Why your titles are so crucial in your production timeline [20:43]
How and why I am changing up my show notes [23:54]
The podcast and social media promotion: How I am experimenting [29:50]
The lowdown on all of the imagery I use for the podcast [33:55]
The advanced strategy I employ for Instagram [42:37]

#175: How I Went from Corporate to Consulting to Courses

7 september 2017 | 58 min

You asked, and I’m bringing it: My story. And I mean ALL the details, of how I went from corporate to consulting to where I am today: courses.

My intention here is not to relive the old days—I’m doing this because you likely can relate to one of the three scenarios:

You currently are working in a corporate job, with thoughts of starting your own thing.
Your dream business is currently your #sidehustle and you’re looking to make it your full-time gig.
You no longer are tied to your J.O.B however your business model is not exactly what you’d like it to be. You want to move into online courses sooner than later.

Anyway you approach it, there are opportunities in front of you right now that you may not see as relevant to where you want to go. But that’s not true. Every step counts.

If I hadn’t taken a job at Harley Davidson, I wouldn’t have seen what building a community, or movement, looks like and thought, “That’s what I want.”

If I hadn’t worked for a matchmaking service, I wouldn’t have figured out that I hate sales.

And if I hadn’t said, ‘yes,’ to working on Tony Robbins’ creative team, I’m not sure any of what followed would have happened.

Speaking of working for Tony, I wanted to share the five core lessons I learned while working for Tony, from creating content, to making big decisions as a business owner, to shaping your mindset. I’ve put the lessons all down in my brand new freebie.

So, I’m breaking down my journey for you in five phases. In each one, I’ll tell you what I learned and the turning point that helped me move to the next phase. This is how each one breaks down:

Phase One: Corporate (or being “on the clock”)

Phase Two: Consulting (or really doing the Corporate thing for multiple bosses instead of just the one)

Phase Three: Courses (without a niche—so this was more of an experimental time)

Phase Four: Courses (with a niche nailed down)

Phase Five: Product Suite (or courses that can scale and ultimately put my business in the fast lane)

The biggest thing I want you to take away from my story is you don’t need to have it all figured out. You just need to move forward in any way you can, and from where you are now.

So let’s get into it … I was born on a rainy night in December … Ha! No, we’re not going that far back.

Let's start from my (career) beginning...

P.S Find out more about my live event, The Entrepreneur Experience at amyporterfield.com/events. The dates are October 21st or December 2nd, so don’t delay!

#174: 3 Hacks to Help You Get More Done in Less Time

31 augusti 2017 | 48 min

When it comes to working smarter and not harder, you know the conventional wisdom: Manage your time, take breaks, get enough sleep, tackle the big projects when you feel the most focused, and the list goes on.

You know all this stuff, but why is it so hard to act on it? And even if you are applying some of those strategies (which are all good), you still find yourself with more work than you can possibly get done in a single day.

Enter Carey Bentley. She’s a productivity and accountability expert. Along with her husband, Demir, they founded Lifehack Bootcamp, a program designed to get you working more efficiently so you can create the lifestyle you want.

Now, Carey and Demir weren’t always experts at this—in fact, they once were raging workaholics, but they had to figure out another way because the way they were working was literally affecting their health.

Their secret is practice—hard, intentional, sweaty practice. You know, the way pro athletes practice. So think of productivity less like a class where you’re studying to pass an exam and more like a craft that you’re working to get better at all the time.

Here’s what you’ll learn:

The four phases of productivity and why you’re ultimately shooting to be like LeBron James. (Check those out at 11:54)
The four layers of accountability—with a coach, with a team, with a buddy, with your community—where you are closing off all escape routes by making yourself feel the pressure from all sides. (Carey starts to break down those levels at 16:19)
How to create a “Champagne Moment” that literally has you popping open a bottle every week (metaphorically, but you can take that literally too!).

Download this week’s freebie for a step-by-step walkthrough of this process. (You can think about your own moment at 15:18).

You’ll also hear Carey and I talk about the five limiting mindsets (OK that’s just really a nice way to say “excuses”) people adopt to NOT get things done. Have you ever complained about not having enough time or having too much on your plate? Yeah, me too. It’s time to shut that down. Carey and I talk about the first two on the show. You can get all five (and the “Champagne Moment” exercise) by downloading this week’s freebie.

No more procrastinating—time to move forward.

And as if this isn’t enough, Carey grabbed her hubby, Demir, and filmed an extra special video for your eyes only on steps to beat decision fatigue.

#173: Getting Started with Facebook Ads: The List Building Series (Part 2)

24 augusti 2017 | 49 min

The deep dive into all things Facebook Ads continues with part two of my mini training with Rick Mulready.

In part one we discussed the importance of mapping out a strategy before you jump into scheduling your ads, as well as knowing how to target your ideal customer and build custom audiences using the Audience Insights tool. (Missed Part 1? It was SO GOOD and you can listen here.)

We’re going a little deeper in today’s second part by telling you how to set up your ads using the Power Editor and how to assess your performance by focusing on a few key metrics.

PART TWO Getting to know the Power Editor. A Facebook ad consists of three elements— campaign, ad set and ad. The campaign is where you set the objective of the ad, such as page post engagement or website clicks. The ad set is where you select the targeting, budget and schedule for the ad. And the ad is where you have the image and text for your ad.

How to Create a Campaign:

Using metrics to evaluate ad performance. First, don’t look at anything related to how your ads are doing for 72 hours. Then, take a look at these numbers by going to the ads manager, clicking the performance dropdown menu and selecting customized columns to choose the stats you want to review.

These are the metrics to pay attention to:

Cost per lead (or conversion): In general, shoot for $9 and under on a lead. Sound high? You’ve got to be real about what’s happening with Facebook. It’s super competitive and that means it’s getting more expensive—yet it’s still the most cost-effective ad platform.

Landing page conversion rate: Your goal is at least 20% conversion. If you’re not there, look at the consistency between your ad and the landing page. Are you using the same text, color scheme and other graphical elements? Is the messaging consistent?

Click-through rate: If it’s less than 1%, that’s a sign that your ad is not resonating with your audience.

Relevance score: The closer you are to 10, the better. If it’s low, that means your ad isn’t relevant. The problem could be with your ad or with the audience you’re targeting.

Frequency score: If you’re at a 4 or higher, that means people are seeing your ad too many times and won’t look at it anymore. Try changing up the type of ad you’re showing.

If you’re happy with the metrics, start to scale. If not, use the data to figure out your next step. For example, if you’ve got a 2% click-through rate and a decent relevance score, but your cost per lead is high, that might mean something about your landing page isn’t consistent with your ad. Use the data to troubleshoot your campaign.

Remember: Become a student of Facebook ads! Research the strategy that works for you, and don’t be afraid to dive in and take some risks for your list-building efforts. Now is the time.

#172: Getting Started with Facebook Ads: The List Building Series (Part 1)

17 augusti 2017 | 47 min

Whether you’re just starting out or you’ve dabbled with running a Facebook ads campaign, I want you locked into this jam-packed two-part episode of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast.

My good friend Rick Mulready, who knows Facebook ads better than anyone I know, helps me cover everything you need to know to get your Facebook ads off the ground.

PART ONE

Have a strategy. One of the biggest reasons entrepreneurs lose faith is because they put a bunch of money into ads without a plan, and then get disappointed when there are no returns.

Rick has a lot of great advice here, including why working backward from your end goal is the ultimate way to set yourself up for success.

We also explore questions like:

How do I convert Facebook fans into email subscribers?
What’s the key to attracting paying customers?
Can I build my list using Facebook ads, even if I don’t have anything to sell?

Target, target, target. You’ve got to get specific on your audience. This is one of the biggest advantages of using Facebook ads, and I want you to spend some time here. For example, if you’re a personal trainer, go beyond simply targeting people who exercise and target audiences that fit specifically within your areas of expertise or certain specific interests.

You can do so much more to refine your audience by looking at where they shop, what brands they like, how they exercise and more.

One of my favorite tools within Facebook Ads is Audience Insights because it allows you to educate yourself on the characteristics of your audience, based on people who already like your page. By doing this, you can better cater to the needs of existing customers and scale your business by targeting new potential customers with similar characteristics. (Check out my video below on how I use it in my business!)

Also, don’t miss Rick’s breakdown on how Facebook wants you to target. One thing we all know for sure is the more you do things Facebook’s way, the more the social media giant will like and reward you.

In part two, we get into the ins and outs of the Power Editor and what metrics you should be paying attention to. Don’t forget to check out the links below to other podcasts Rick and I have done on Facebook ads.

Let’s get back to basics.

#171: DIYing Your Business: 5 Areas to Focus On When You're Just Starting Out

10 augusti 2017 | 45 min

#170: How to Get the Big Stuff Done When Life Gets in the Way

27 juli 2017 | 32 min

#169: How to Pitch Yourself to Land Bigger Opportunities Online

20 juli 2017 | 51 min

#168: The Easy Start Guide to Live Video with Luria Petrucci

13 juli 2017 | 54 min

#167: Your 4x4 Gut Check: Are You Moving Your Biz Forward?

6 juli 2017 | 43 min

#166: How to Rework Your Struggling Online Course

29 juni 2017 | 61 min

#165: How to Troubleshoot Your Biggest Webinar Challenges

22 juni 2017 | 57 min

#164: Free Content vs. Paid Content (What’s the Difference?)

15 juni 2017 | 31 min

#163: Demystifying the Facebook Pixel

8 juni 2017 | 66 min

#162: The New Rules of Facebook Marketing

1 juni 2017 | 56 min

As quickly as Facebook changes, there are some things that are as true today as they were a few years ago:

Facebook cares more about its users vs. the marketers.
Likes, comments, shares, views, and clicks are gold—the more, the better.
The more personal you are and the more you do to generate real and valuable interaction, the more your fans will engage (by liking, sharing, etc.).

Now, HOW you accomplish those three points has changed A LOT. Why? Well, there are few reasons.

You’ve heard me talk about the infamous Facebook algorithm, and while I’m not going to nerd out on all of its particulars (there are hundreds), it does have everything to do with how many of your fans are actually seeing your posts.

If you start to understand just a little bit about how it works, you can get smarter about the kind of content you’re creating. Feel me?

I’m going to tell you how to do that by sharing my:

Three truths about what’s working on Facebook TODAY (including why your post has to perform well from the minute it goes live)
Five new rules of Facebook marketing (and the one thing you should STOP doing right now)
Three words to live by as you experiment with and test these new ways of driving engagement (and they actually apply to all parts of your business!)

Along the way, you’ll hear me talk about how I’m implementing some of these new rules in real time, like video. Creating more video is a HUGE priority for me this year (so much so that I’m even building a studio in my house—pics to come on Facebook and Instagram soon!).

Starting this week I’m doing weekly Facebook Live videos (go to facebook.com/amyporterfield to find out when) where we’ll talk about some of the content on the podcast and more. And I’m going to be incorporating more video into my posts.

You already know that video is huge with Facebook. What kind of video to create is also critical—and an important part of this episode—because the more you make viewers stop, watch and unmute your video, the more Facebook will reward you by pushing your videos out to larger segments of your community.

For examples of what types of videos to model, make sure to download my 2017 Ultimate Guide to What’s Working Now on Facebook. It’s loaded with examples of video you can use to start reimagining your Facebook engagement strategy right NOW.

#161: Love & Business: How to Make it Work

25 maj 2017 | 55 min

#160: Behind the Scenes of My Website Redesign

18 maj 2017 | 58 min

#159: How I Found, Hired and Work With My Project Manager

11 maj 2017 | 59 min

#158: Saving Sales & Rescuing Refunds

4 maj 2017 | 69 min

#157: The Bonus Brainstorm: How to Create a Bonus Package for Your Next Course Offer (Rebroadcast)

27 april 2017 | 53 min

#156: Expert Secrets & Online Strategies with Russell Brunson

20 april 2017 | 52 min

#155: The New 'FB Messenger Ads' with Rick Mulready

13 april 2017 | 43 min

Facebook ad expert, Rick Mulready, is back to talk about a tremendous new Ad tool that he’s already leveraging to drive major results in his business.

If you’re starting to hear more about Facebook Messenger Ads, it’s for good reason. You’re probably one of the billion people who use the Messenger app to chat with family and friends instantaneously every day.

But what if an ad popped up from your favorite clothing store and just by clicking it you could ask about one of their new products? Better yet, what if a rep from that store gets back to you immediately.

BAM. That’s the beauty of Facebook Messenger ads for your customers. (It’s the first ad type that gets your ideal customer avatar talking with you instantly.)

Now for you, this means being able to answer questions or address objections to your programs and courses in real time, like during a launch when you’re trying to close more sales.

Today Rick and I go inside why this new format is climbing the charts and how you can take advantage of it right now.

In the episode, Rick talks about his experience using Messenger Ads for the first time. Make sure to listen to get all the details about how this ad below performed for him!

I’ve also included some screenshots of what the interface looks like when you’re creating the ad inside of The Power Editor. It’s super easy. You can check it out step by step below.

Step 1: Go to ads creation in Ads Manager or Power Editor.

Step 2: Choose the Traffic objective and complete your Campaign name, adset name, and ad name.

Step 3: Under the adset level, select website or messenger. Continue by Choosing your audience, budget and placement.

Step 4: At the ad level, Choose the Page you want to connect

Step 5: At the ad level, select your image/video and copy. Choose a welcome message. When people click on your ad, they will automatically be directed to Messenger and receive a copy of your ad and the welcome message.

*You can select any call-to-action button, in addition to ‘Send Message’. A Messenger icon will appear next to this call-to-action button in the ad.

*NOTE: Your ad to open conversations in Messenger won’t appear to people on mobile who don’t have the Messenger app.

So ready to tackle a new world of Facebook Messenger ads? Get all the starter details here—and don’t forget to sign up for Rick’s brand new webinar, “How to Create an Automated Facebook Ads System That Gets Leads & Sales Every Day.” I think we all need a bit of that magic!

#154: 7 Content Creation Ideas to Use When You’re Feeling Uninspired

6 april 2017 | 42 min

#153: 3 Ways to Get More Mileage Out of Your Course (Especially If You Have a Small List)

30 mars 2017 | 51 min

#152: How to Avoid FOMO in Your Biz & Make Better Decisions

23 mars 2017 | 33 min

#151: 38,000+ Members in 2 Years: Tips to Building a Highly Engaged Facebook Group with Jill & Josh Stanton

16 mars 2017 | 55 min

Let’s rewind for a sec. Back in episode #146, I dished on Facebook groups. This is one of the bold moves I want you to consider making in 2017, because if you take the time to do it thoughtfully, it could be a tremendous game-changer for your business.

No one knows that more than Jill and Josh Stanton. In just two years the Facebook group they built for their ‘Screw the Nine to Five’ business has skyrocketed from less than 7,000 members to nearly 40,000.

You’re going to hear us talking about a lot of wicked smart strategies they are using to maximize the impact of the group on their business—list-building, selling, cross-promoting, sexy funnels and more.

BUT, pay attention to me here because I don’t want you getting overwhelmed. Keep your eyes on the prize as you listen to the podcast (and lose your mind over all the cool things that Jill shares).

The point of a Facebook group is engagement. The more you do that, by asking questions, listening and showing up in general, the more you’re going to know about what your audience wants and needs.

That’s the magic fairy dust your group will sprinkle so you really can see, hear and feel your audience, as well as show them mad love by delivering content that will make a difference in their lives.

Some of the topics explored include:

Cracking the code on how to find out what your group members truly WANT. (Hint: Polls are everything.)
Using the group to build your email list and cross-promote your other programs. (For example, the Stantons market their membership site inside the group, which serves as an entry point for their sales funnels.)
Striking a harmonious balance between free content shared in the group with paid content in a membership site or whatever you’re selling.
Keeping content organized inside of the group.
Managing the group, especially the bigger it gets. The kind of support needed, as well as how often you need to get involved.
The role Facebook Live can play in the group. (You’ll love the unique way Jill and Josh are using it OUTSIDE of their group too!)

This episode is LOADED. Listen up.

Oh, and one more very exciting thing. I did my first ever ‘after show’ with Jill and Josh. There was just so much to cover. Download it here and listen to more of our chat on their Facebook group do’s and don’ts, why the group should be about YOU and the value of connecting your members.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Click Here to Get the After Show with Jill and Josh Stanton

A wildly successful 6-figure launch they can now implement over and over again, and expect amazing results.

#150: [Case Study] How to Turn a Pre-Launch Strategy Into a Wildly Profitable Online Launch with Terri Cole and David Vox

9 mars 2017 | 82 min

You know how I feel about having a pre-launch strategy—it’s crucial for success. Last week’s episode was all about the nuts and bolts of creating a successful pre-launch strategy.

Today’s episode makes that plan truly actionable, as I deliver a case study of what that blueprint looks like in the real world.

I talk to my good friends Terri Cole and David Vox who implemented a pre-launch strategy well in advance of their launch . . . and guess what followed?

Just a little background: Terri is a New York-based psychotherapist and founder of the Real Love Revolution, which has helped thousands of women transform their lives. David, Terri’s business partner, is a marketing and branding expert who’s produced over 150 transformational coaching programs.

Get your notebook (or laptop) ready because not only are we talking about the seven specific steps they followed, we geek out on numbers—email open rates, webinar sign-ups, sales conversions, total revenue, social media and email list growth, Facebook ad spend (which will blow your freakin’ mind), and more.

Take notes. AND stay on until the end because that’s when we talk about some of the things they won’t ever do again and what they’re planning to do next time around.

Also: If you haven’t downloaded my 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint freebie, you might just want to grab that while you listen along to this week’s episode.

These are the key steps they followed:

Step 1: Launch a pilot program.

Step 2: Survey your list.

Step 3: Built a main platform (Terri and David chose YouTube).

Step 4: Create a launch freebie.

Step 5: Create a free, closed community inside of Facebook.

Step 6: Create a 21-day challenge for that private Facebook community.

Step 7: Cart opens—launch with a multi-webinar strategy.

*NOTE: Steps 1 through 6 are all PRE-LAUNCH SPECIFICS.

Let’s dive in!

Once you’ve listened to this episode, go back and listen to last week’s and make sure you download my 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint freebie. These are some next-level goods. Get moving!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy's 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint

So this has become a must-watch for me, and my students.

#149: Your 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint

2 mars 2017 | 61 min

#148: 3 Tips to Fix Your Facebook Ad Targeting

16 februari 2017 | 43 min

#147: How to Ask Better Questions and Get Better Business Results with Marie Forleo

9 februari 2017 | 58 min

Today I’m talking about the ONE THING that could be holding you back in your business.

This is a real obstacle that can STALL your business growth.

I know this because it stunted my own growth.

Today I’m talking about the low-value bullsh*t questions you ask yourself that make you feel stuck. These are the questions that suck the soul out of you and can make you feel that you are not cut out for this entrepreneurial life.

The scary thing is that you likely don’t even know you’re doing it! But if you feel discouraged by your progress and “not enough” in your business, you are for sure doing it.

It’s time to find some new, alternative questions, don’t you think?

To help me tackle this very important topic, I’ve asked my own mentor and former business coach (and one of my favorite guests!), Marie Forleo, to help me make this into something extremely tangible and actionable for you.

I put five “low-value” questions—the kind that make your heart sink—in front of Marie and I asked her to turn them into questions that will lead you down the road to bigger results and successes. And boy, did she deliver. We also have some fun in the process, so take a listen here.

Before we dive into those 5 crucial low-value questions and their empowered high-value counterparts, one last note: Marie has released a free video training series—and it’s exceptional.

It answers the question I hear ALL THE TIME: “How do I know I’m working on the right strategies and focusing on the right things to make my business work?”

Here are the five questions Marie is making over in today’s podcast:

LOW VALUE QUESTION #1:

What if no one buys what I'm selling?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #2:

What if they think I'm a fraud?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #3:

I don’t have enough __________ (experience/time/money/know-how/exposure) so how can I possibly compete against X?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #4:

I’m too far behind! Why didn't I get into this online marketing game earlier?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #5:

This is taking too long. Why am I not finding success more quickly?

Check out the NEW high-value questions here—and then starting USING them to shift your mindset to get bigger results in all you do.

Let’s get rid of the limiting beliefs and negative self-talk that may be holding you back—time to get inspired and raise your business game, for good.

#146: 3 Types of Facebook Groups: How to Use Them to Strengthen Your Impact, Leadership and Profits (Part 1)

2 februari 2017 | 55 min

#145: 13 Questions to Nail Down Your Winning Webinar Topic and Title

26 januari 2017 | 50 min

#144: How to Prepare, Plan & Execute a Profitable 5-Day Challenge

19 januari 2017 | 62 min

#143: How Do I Know If I’m Delivering Enough Value in My Course (for the Price I Want to Charge)?

12 januari 2017 | 46 min

You are a rock star, a risk-taker, and your course content is awesome. You know this because you’ve put your blood, sweat and tears into making it great. Yet . . . .

You’re finding yourself wondering, does my course content justify my price?

You’re not alone.

Course creation is one of my favorite topics, but it can be incredibly tricky to lay it all out there — especially for your first course.

I’ve not only created multiple courses, but I’ve helped so many entrepreneurs who are struggling with their online courses turn them around and enable them to sell confidently.

This week I’m sharing with you how to know if you’re offering enough value for the price point you’ve set.

I’m also sharing 7 WAYS TO SAVE YOUR ONLINE COURSE. If you created your course outline and feel that something’s missing OR maybe you’ve completed your entire course and something just feels off, I’ve got the FIX for you.

In this episode, I give you 7 detailed strategies that you can use to actively save your course and see success with selling it at the price point you’ve set. Get my free detailed checklist that outlines exactly what you can do to save your course and make it even better. Download it now.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 7 Ways to Save Your Online Course

Start planning your 2017 promotional calendar like a boss here!

The question I am answering in this week’s episode, is: Do you have enough value to justify your price point?

Maybe you’ve seen courses similar to yours offered at a lower cost or you’re having second thoughts about your higher price. This is gut check time and this week’s episode will bolster your confidence around your price.

Does the value you’re offering in your course justify the price? Click here to find out.

There are several strategies for knowing if you’re offering enough value for the price point you’re charging.

I’m giving you my sure-fire tip for the best way to outline your course in a way that continuously keeps it fresh — and why this is so important to the overall success of your course.

Then, I give you a list of 12 questions to ask yourself that will help you confidently determine the quality in your course content.

These questions will help you be the risk-taker you are, examine your offer as a whole, and lay it all out there for your students.

You will want to use these strategies not only to identify what pieces of content you may want to change (or add), but to ensure that you feel confident in your product and have added all the value you can (without overwhelming your students!).

Boost your confidence, find out how your course value rates. Click here!

#142: 7 Bold Moves to Shake Up Your Business NOW

5 januari 2017 | 59 min

#141: Where Should I Spend My Money As I Build My Online Business?

29 december 2016 | 54 min

#140: How to Create a 5-Day Social Media Video Series for Rapid List Growth

15 december 2016 | 45 min

#139: The 10 Most Powerful Episodes to Help Move Your Business Forward

8 december 2016 | 8 min

#138: How to Plan Your Promotional Calendar Like a Boss

1 december 2016 | 46 min

If I ever did a list of Amy’s Favorite Things (in honor of the one and only Oprah), today’s topic would be number one.

We are talking about PLANNING. Specifically, planning for the new year.

The best part is that thanks to my guest today, you can be a pro at calendaring no matter who you are. Anne Samoilov is a launch expert and when I say she knows how to plan...I mean it!

Get ready to hear her amazing, no-fail-formula for planning an entire new year of promotions, partnerships, and personal business goals.

I’m giving you a solid plan for completing your 2017 promotional calendar from start to finish, and here’s what’s great: it won’t take much time at all.

Even better, you don’t need to take any notes, because I have everything detailed in this incredible freebie! It is a quick guide to everything I share with you in this episode, including a list of questions you must ask yourself before you add anything to your calendar for the year ahead.

In order to plan you will need to reflect on the prior year and drill down on what worked and didn’t work for you. Then, adjust for the year ahead. Anne and I give you the questions you will want to ask yourself before you calendar anything.

This mini-training session will give you a solid approach that you can use for years to come!

And, another great thing about today’s episode is the way Anne approaches time off. While it isn’t exactly what you think it might be, you absolutely must include it on your calendar.

There are five categories total that you will want to “calendar” first and foremost — time off being the first one.

So stop whatever it is you are working on for your year ahead and listen to these steps first.

Let’s map out your year.

If your calendar for next year is swirling in your head or only partially laid out in a Google doc, this episode is for you. This approach makes planning your 2017 promotional calendar easy — even when you aren’t sure of all of your specifics yet.

Accept this episode and freebie as my gift to you this holiday season ;-)

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Your Promotional Calendar Quick Guide

I’m showing you how you can build trust and make the purchase of your product, course, or service the next logical step for your audience.

#136: How to Use 'Content Gold' to Fuel Your Next Launch

17 november 2016 | 35 min

#135: 5 Common Facebook Ad Mistakes (and How to Fix Them)

10 november 2016 | 37 min

#134: Preparing for Future Traffic Declines: What Content Creators Need to Know

3 november 2016 | 50 min

#133: How to Get Unstuck in Your Course Creation Process

24 oktober 2016 | 43 min

#132: How to Cultivate an “Opportunity Knocks Every Time” Mindset with Patrick Bet-David

20 oktober 2016 | 47 min

#131: How to Get Overwhelm to Eat Your Dust

10 oktober 2016 | 31 min

#130: How to Sell on a Webinar (Without Being Overly Salesy)

29 september 2016 | 43 min

Let’s face it, selling during your webinar can be awkward at first — but it doesn’t have to be.

Today I’m giving you my BEST strategies for eliminating the awkwardness and creating a smooth transition into the sales portion of your webinar.

Before I dive into it though, I want to tell you about my FREE Master Class, “How to Create Your First Wildly Profitable Webinar.”

If you sell info products or programs, digital courses, or coaching and consulting services online, then I bet you’ve considered adding webinars to your marketing strategy.

But as you know, there’s a lot of moving pieces with webinars, including the tech, filling seats, putting together your content, making that transition to selling . . . not to mention getting the courage to actually hit “broadcast.” (It can be scary!)

Webinars can be intimidating, but they don’t have to be. Join me as I walk you through what it takes to create a profitable webinar strategy.

Let’s jump back into today’s topic. You’re the expert, the go-to source on YOUR webinar. And your webinars give you the opportunity to build amazing trust between you and your audience.

Your transition from teaching into selling can become seamless with these strategies. You will never feel like you’re selling again.

Also listen closely for the number one mistake I often see in webinars. And, learn how to avoid this misstep here.

This episode is one of my favorites because I love webinars. AND, because building trust with your audience is so important. If you’re not careful you can break down the trust you’ve built quickly.

Stick with me, and listen in, so that doesn’t happen to you.

I’ll tell you the perfect ratio of content to selling. You’ll also get tips for deciding what to put in your webinar versus what to create and sell inside your course.

I also dive into the mindset and mechanics of creating incredible webinars that will boost your sales.

Learn how to sell on a webinar without being salesy here!

#129: Media, Meditation and a little Motivation with Gabby Bernstein

15 september 2016 | 46 min

#127: How to Organize & Analyze Your Facebook Ads

9 september 2016 | 47 min

#126: Operation Clear Out Your Inbox

25 augusti 2016 | 52 min

#125: How to Create a WOW Experience When Selling Online Programs

18 augusti 2016 | 44 min

#124: 4 Key Roles to Help You Grow Your Business

10 augusti 2016 | 28 min

#123: How Much Money Should I Spend on Facebook Ads to Be Successful on My Webinar?

3 augusti 2016 | 25 min

#122: Get Your Content House In Order

3 augusti 2016 | 26 min

#121: 3 Money Habits for Growing Your Online Business

29 juli 2016 | 30 min

Today we are flipping the script on money habits.

I’m so excited to have with me Rachel Cruze, author of, “Love Your Life, Not Theirs.”

She is sharing her three money habits that, quite honestly, are right on the money! If you adopt these three amazing rules, your rituals around money management will empower you to see what is possible personally and help you grow your online business.

Now, I like to think I’m a smart girl. I run my own business. I’m a planner. I understand my finances.

However—

I was blown away at how much one tip in particular changed my entire outlook and the way I managed money. And, then seeing how that affected positive change in my business—the results were fantastic.

That’s why I want to share this with you so badly.

You may have heard me say it already— but I believe that when growing your own business, it often feels that what’s personal is business and what’s business is personal. This could not be more true than for this very sensitive topic, money.

Money is one of the most important common denominators in the management of your business and your personal life.

These habits, once you adopt them, can truly help your online business grow.

So, do these questions sound like you?

Do you compare your vacations, your home, your car, your clothes to others?
Does social media make it worse for you?

Rachel’s first money habit will tell you some surprising realities about what you’re seeing in your newsfeed and WHY we compare what we see to our own story.

Then, she tells you what you should be thinking and how to flip the script to actually make it incredibly positive—personally and professionally. Rachel shares how to turn this bad habit into a good one.

Go here to listen.

The second habit:

You must have a plan for your money. Yes, I’m talking a budget.

Don’t cringe!

Not knowing where you’re money is going can cause stress and anxiety. These pain points affect your personal life and your business evenly.

What’s personal is business and what’s business is personal.

So, let’s flip the script!

Rachel’s second habit is based on the categories that everyone needs to include in their budget. It’s these SPECIFIC categories that make this habit so achievable. These categories are relevant for not only you personally, but for your business too.

Does your budget give you permission to spend your money exactly how you want?

Rachel’s does. I hear you—that sounds counterintuitive. I promise you it’s not.

And, even better you won’t feel guilty. I LOVE IT!

This MUST-DO habit will address both your work and your home budget and help your business grow!

Rachel’s third habit might be the most important one here.

This is the one that will give you the permission you need as a business owner to take risks. WHY?

Because this is the one thing you can do so that you are never forced to fail. If you have this, you will feel confident to go the extra mile, to go for launching your first course, to take that risk.

You work hard for your money. If you adopt this habit, are wildly patient, and make it a priority, it will pay off.

As a business owner, there will come a day when you will be able to reap those rewards from your hard work. Or, you will have the ability to save your business or your home because you did this one thing—and you did it consistently.

Listen in to get the three habits you need for growing your online business.

#120: The Bonus Brainstorm: How to Create a Bonus Package for Your Next Course Offer

28 juli 2016 | 50 min

Are you looking to create amazing bonuses that will make your offer irresistible?

Today, I’m showing you how to do just that with my new Bonus Blueprint mini-workshop.

I LOVE getting bonuses when I sign up for courses. Just love it! Because bonuses are so vital and important for you to offer with your course, I’ve created this mini-workshop to give you the lowdown on developing bonuses that will get you results.

Why are bonuses so important?

They enhance your offer by increasing the perceived value of your product.
They allow you to teach outside of your content outline.
They encourage audience members to navigate your course more efficiently.
They drive sales.

AND bonuses are one of my favorite pieces to plan out because there’s always something MORE I want to include for my students. It’s a fantastic way to give your students that EXTRA special piece of value.

Now I’m going to tell you right off the bat, that you want 2-3 bonuses per course. I’ll workshop you through creating incredible bonuses for every audience and every course.

I’m taking the guesswork out of it so you have more freedom to work on your course.

Speaking of taking the guesswork out, have I got a freebie for you!

It is an awesome download that gives you five steps for creating extraordinary bonuses for your product EVERY TIME. You will be able to walk yourself through the questions you need to ask to create bonuses that are fully aligned with your product and will increase the overall value of your offer.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy's Must-Have Steps for Creating Extraordinary Bonuses

So get ready to workshop an enticing bonus so you can stand out from the competition and really serve your students!

As you’re creating your next course, this mini-workshop is for you!

I tackle:

How to decide what to focus your bonus on.
How to overdeliver for your students and bring them deeper into your course.
How to best position your bonus for each course.

I also give you the sure-fire strategies that have worked to drive sales for me over and over again.

With this week’s episode, you will find that your next bonus offering opportunity will be smoother, and return the results that you have been hoping for.

It will breathe new life into your campaign and help you to set up expectations for your audience, so they know what’s coming.

You will also gain clarity on how to best handle a bonus associated with an affiliate launch and how to best align it with your products. This is something everyone who might work with affiliates in the future must hear.

#119: The Who, What, When, Where and How of Testimonials

21 juli 2016 | 35 min

Today I’m pulling the curtain back on a piece that can mean the difference between steady sales and your shopping cart catching dust.

I’m giving you the who, what, when, where and how of testimonials. These are especially helpful for those just starting out.

And, I’m also excited to give you a freebie that will make these strategies come alive for your business. It’s called, “The Anatomy of a High-Converting Testimonial.” I’m going to show you how to turn a bad testimonial into a good testimonial, and a good testimonial into an outstanding one. Your testimonials will shine with the help of this awesome tool.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Anatomy of a High-Converting Testimonial

Now, why do you need a good testimonial?

Your credibility is everything when wanting your audience to trust you. Social proof is invaluable when it comes to this.

Testimonials are the best way for you to address objections or hesitations that you may be seeing.

Testimonials allow for your community members to speak up for you and persuade others to buy your product or sign up for your course. If you can have a quote from a community member on an opt-in or sales page, it can be the selling point for on-the-fence potential buyers.

Listen in and get started now!

The most important objectives when building your audience are that you want them to know you, like you and trust you.

Then you have the ability to capture outstanding testimonials that let potential new audience members know how amazing you are.

As I mentioned, in this episode we are getting into the who, what, when, where and how of outstanding testimonials.

Here are the first few spoilers I have in store for you in this week’s episode:

You don’t need to only have testimonials from customers.
You don’t need to use a testimonial verbatim, as it is sent to you.
You don’t need to wait until your students have completed your first course to start collecting testimonials.
You don’t need to just have a dedicated testimonials page.
You don’t need to wait for kudos to come to you.

There are many people—outside of customers—that you might not have thought of who can provide you with testimonials. I tell you who those people might be for you and explain how to successfully solicit a testimonial from them.

When someone sends you a testimonial, you don’t need to use the exact verbiage they send you. Most people aren’t writers and don’t know what components go into an exceptional testimonial. In this episode I tell you how to work with your students to create an outstanding testimonial that will make you shine and convince potential students to buy your course.

Also, the components of a good testimonial are so, so important. I give you the framework for a perfect testimonial to ensure that every reference is a home run for your business.

Next, you can always be looking to capture testimonials. However, beyond that you don’t need to wait for your first course to complete before you start capturing kudos about your work. I have some strategies for you to get started collecting testimonials now.

There are some very strategic locations that your testimonials must live. I go into depth on where those are and what types of testimonials should live on those pages.

And, you may be thinking, this is all great, but how do I bring it all together to get an outstanding testimonial?

Well, I’m pulling back the curtain and telling you exactly how I’ve done this and how you can too.

I’m excited for you to start tackling these components now and start building your testimonial database! (Don’t worry, I share how to create a good database too.)

#118: A Behind the Scenes Look at What’s Working in Social Media with Dr. Axe

14 juli 2016 | 41 min

Social media changes RAPIDLY and today we are exploring what’s working NOW.

My guest today is Dr. Axe, a certified doctor of natural medicine, doctor of chiropractic, and clinical nutritionist. However, he’s not here to discuss health. He’s here because his website attracts more than six million views per month and his Facebook page has more than one million followers.

This doctor knows what’s working in social media today more than some of the best social media experts out there today -and that’s saying a lot!

Dr. Axe has leveraged what’s trending and his incredibly strategic take on building the backend of his business to grow his company using social media. Everything about this is a home run.

Being engaged with your audience is the key to success. Knowing what’s trending in social media, knowing what your audience loves, knowing the latest information in your field are all components to growing your business online.

Dr. Axe, however, is actually a minimalist when it comes to his online presence. He doesn’t overwhelm his audience or sweat being everywhere online every day. I find this so refreshing and you will too!

When you’re just starting out, it’s all about quality over quantity and I’m giving you the keys to how to grow an engaged audience while focusing on quality.

You will learn how Dr. Axe has attracted more than one million Facebook followers, his philosophy on using social media platforms, strategies for niche-interest list-building, how to nurture your current email list, and what to teach in a webinar versus what to sell in your webinar.

During our time together, Dr. Axe answers the following questions:

What’s the right length for a Facebook Live piece that will really speak to your audience and draw viewers in?
Do you know the best tips for how to make partnerships work for you?
Can you spot trends and know where to look to find them?
Also: Do you know the ratio of how much content you should give to how much you should sell? (This is FASCINATING! There’s an important reason why, too.)
There’s also this little thing called the purple cow. Do you have one?

I give you all of this and more in this action-packed quick conversation with the king of online business building.

I promise you this will not stretch you thin. In fact, these strategies will make you more efficient online. Thereby, freeing up more time for you to focus on your content.

AMEN to that!

#117: The Lowdown on Facebook Ad Retargeting

7 juli 2016 | 47 min

#116: Five New Launch Lessons From My Most Successful Launch to Date

30 juni 2016 | 75 min

#115: Affiliate Marketing Done Right with Rachel Luna

18 juni 2016 | 52 min

When you’re starting out in business, I am a big advocate for any and all confidence boosters. I’m talking ways you can get your feet wet so you can say with certainty: I CAN DO THIS.

Because you and I both know: You CAN do this. But sometimes you first need that little pat on the butt and boost of self-confidence.

Well, today I’ve got your keys to testing out your own launch before you really launch. It’s called Affiliate Marketing.

And I’ve got the perfect person to share the tricks and secrets to doing it right. Rachel Luna is an elite business coach who helps her clients gain clarity and confidence.

In this action-packed episode I share:

The 8 Steps to Successful Affiliate Marketing
The 7 Reasons Why Being an Affiliate is a Great Dry Run for Your Own Launch
Common Mistakes People Make with Affiliate Marketing

Whew! This is a TON of value.

I couldn’t wait to record this for you because I know a lot of you feel hesitation around kicking off your own launch. But, I know that affiliate marketing is one of the best ways to get the hands-on experience you need to feel good about your launch. I know this because this is the path I took—affiliate launch first, then my own launches.

Check it all out here.

So we will start off with those steps to mastering affiliate marketing:

Pick Your Products
Set Your GBB Goal (good, better, best)
Make Key Decisions
Set Up Your Backend
Run Your Communication Plan (Paid traffic and emails)
Create Results through Engagement
Communicate and Convert
Deliver on Your Word

Then, you will want to stay tuned for the real meat of this episode. I show you how affiliate marketing connects to your own launch—and how you can best leverage this approach to get results in your launch.

Rachel also shares her new program “Profit without Products.” I love when products are born out of experience and knowing your stuff inside and out. Being an affiliate marketer changed her life.

Rachel gives you the roadmap and tools for knowing what steps to take and when you should take them. She even gives you step-by-step instructions for the tech you need to reach your goals, so it won’t be overwhelming and you won’t be on your own. You can get all the details here.

EPISODE 115 Learn More about Rachel's "Profit Without Products"

It’s all here in your must-have guide to affiliate marketing.

Rachel and I wrap up with the common mistakes some people (not you with the help of this episode!) make with affiliate marketing, including not priming the pump, drive-by posts (a pet peeve of mine!) and the ultimate baddie: poor affiliate etiquette.

I also give you a sure-fire tip to being the best partner that your affiliate has ever seen. This advice will make them want to work with you over and over again.

#114 Part Two: The SCIENCE of a Brilliant Sales Page

7 juni 2016 | 50 min

#113 Part One: The ART of a Brilliant Sales Page

7 juni 2016 | 35 min

#112: 5 Ways to Legally Protect Your Online Business

25 maj 2016 | 38 min

Do you know the most common legal mistake most entrepreneurs make when starting their first online business? Well, I didn’t either, until now!

I recently got to chat with Gena Shingle Jaffe, a ultra-successful lawyer turned entrepreneur who is on a mission to educate and empower entrepreneurs to learn about the incredibly important legal side of online business.

Gena spells out in this eye opening discussion the five essential legal documents that every entrepreneur with an online business needs and where these documents should be on your website.

Familiarize and empower yourself with these essential insights here.

Gena’s inside secrets really create a clear path toward feeling really good about the law and your business. The five essential documents will help you:

Understand what you must have signed by every client
Know the difference between what contract you need for a client versus what you need from your online course members
Protect yourself against someone using your content incorrectly
Learn how to protect the content on your website
Create a clear plan for your privacy policy—and discover who needs to see it

Gena also breaks down the ever-elusive copyright and trademark definitions and what you need to take action on right away to make sure your business is protected.

We also share the website address for where you can check to see if you’re infringing on anyone else’s trademark—or (better yet) if the business name is up for grabs!

You may never have thought you’d feel knowledgeable on the topic of your business and the law, but believe me after learning these concepts from Gena, you will know how to avoid being caught off-guard.

Remember at the end of the day you can’t control everything that happens online. However, if you do nothing else for your business, protect yourself and your business by listening to what’s in this episode.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Free Guide: Understanding Legal Contracts (and More!) for Entrepreneurs

Listen in to see how to put all of this into action.

#111: How to Get Started with Facebook Live

23 maj 2016 | 59 min

Are you ready to absolutely kill it with Facebook Live? Or…do you find it a little scary to get started?

My guest this week is social media expert, Kim Garst. She and I jump right into how you can absolutely increase your profits using Facebook Live. You just have to get over that initial fear that is holding you back from going LIVE on camera.

Ahem…I do realize this is harder than it sounds for many. HOWEVER, getting in front of your audience is your golden ticket to connecting with them personally and deepening your relationship with them. And, let me tell you, this correlates to larger profit margins - much, much larger.

For Kim, leveraging LIVE video streaming increased her profits by hundreds of thousands of dollars. I want this to be you telling me that this happened for you too!

The thing with Facebook Live is that, well, it’s live. And, anything can happen. So remember to relax, be prepared, and bring your personality and everything will be fine.

Once you see the metrics from your first Facebook Live broadcast, that will be all the encouragement you need to do another and another and another…

Kim shares a huge secret about the free reach of Facebook Live and why Facebook is able to successfully increase your newsfeed presence by 10 times that of a regular post. We also discuss strategies and tips for creating incredibly successful Facebook Live broadcasts, leveraging the extensive reach.

We take a deep dive into:

What types of content are most useful for Facebook Live
Which additional social platforms complement your Facebook Live broadcast
Where your focus should be while you’re live
How professional or casual you should be
The ideal cadence and timing for Facebook Live sessions
Where you’ll find the metrics from your broadcast and how to leverage the results
How to edit titles, images and posts for your broadcast
The best strategies for communicating your upcoming Facebook Live to your lists and groups

With these tips, your skill set and confidence will increase. The more Facebook Live broadcasts you do, the better you will become. I have the utmost faith in your ability to kill it!

I love that I took the leap into Facebook Live. The organic reach of these videos blows my mind and it is positively affecting my bottom line.

Right away after the broadcast you can see the metrics.

Get in here and start learning! It truly will have a tremendous effect on your businesses.

#110: Beating Facebook’s Algorithm - and More Facebook Ad Tips with Rick Mulready

19 maj 2016 | 38 min

Are you getting the most out of your Facebook ad efforts?

As promised in episode 104, my good friend Rick Mulready is back and we are continuing the conversation about Facebook ads. This week we tackle how to make your Facebook ads work for you, how you can leverage Facebook algorithms, and a couple of online advertising fundamentals that cannot be overlooked.

Your Questions This Week:

If my ad is getting results, can I use the same ad for different launches?
Are conversions for Facebook ads lower on weekends?
Should I ramp up my ad Facebook ad budget in the days before my webinar?
Are Lookalike Audiences on Facebook be effective?
I’m not converting leads. What am I doing wrong?
Do you have any tips for writing irresistible and compelling ad copy?

The insights provided in this episode will immediately help you focus your Facebook ads and scale your audience. To get started, click here.

These questions are from entrepreneurs just like you who are in the trenches, building your audience, and are navigating the ins and outs of Facebook advertising.

By the way—if you aren’t familiar with Facebook algorithms and how they work—KEEP READING (or better yet: Start listening!). Rick’s knowledge on this topic could dramatically change how you approach your campaigns.

For example, can you use the same ad for different launches? Sure. However, there are some guidelines to follow if you do this. Rick gives such an awesome answer that includes being careful about how much time has passed since you last ran the ad.

His response is a prime example of how Facebook algorithms can work for or against you. Listen in as Rick shares how to be sure to make these algorithms work for you.

I’m not converting leads. What am I doing wrong?

There’s no magic answer, which is a little stressful, I know. However, Rick provides a strategy for finding the answer that’s right for your outcome. So, you’ll find hope as he walks you through how to diagnose where your leads are going off-track.

Those are just two teaser Q&As, but listen here to hear them all.

As we near the end of our episode, Rick and I tackle how to write compelling copy for Facebook ads. Here’s what you will gain from listening in:

What you might be focusing on vs. what you should focus on.
How to write ad copy to attract your ideal audience.
Strategies for learning what your ideal audience member wants to hear from you.

I love the takeaways in this episode and I know you will find them extremely advantageous for your business, so let’s get listening!

#109: Battle-Tested Tools to Rock Your Business

12 maj 2016 | 44 min

#108: How Can I Be The Expert If I'm Just Starting Out?

26 april 2016 | 29 min

How can I be an expert if I am brand new at all of this and no one is paying attention—yet?

This is a valid, legitimate, understandable concern. My best advice: Get over that doubt as quickly as possible and get moving.

Here’s why:

We all started somewhere. All the experts you follow and admire today started at the bottom.

When I started my business 6 years ago, I was so afraid of so many different things.

A big lesson I learned along the way is that you are the expert of your content, your voice and your audience. Don’t think less than that at any moment.

In this episode I walk you through the Five Reminders that You Can Be The Expert Inside your Online Course. These reminders are drawn from what I have learned over the last six years. I share my secrets to success because I want you to break through those fears immediately.

Before I get into it, I want to tell you about this week’s freebie.

Whether you’re a coach, consultant, speaker, freelancer or service provider of ANY kind, owning your own course is a game changer that can have a dramatic effect on your income and impact.

Recently I’ve reverse-engineered the biggest lessons I’ve learned from five of my own successful online courses (that have served over 35,000 entrepreneurs while generating $6.4 million in revenue) and I’ve put all those key learnings in a brand new free master class.

My LIVE master class is called "How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days" and before it’s too late, I want you to grab your virtual seat!

Now, back to it—

The five reminders will let you know that you’re capable of embarking on this journey and more so that you are ready to take action NOW.

Listen in to learn the two areas where you might be holding yourself back when moving forward with building your online business.

Also, I give you the tips and strategies you need to assure yourself that you are the expert.

You will also learn the qualities that make a great online teacher and the surprise qualities that you think you might need, but don’t.

If you are thinking about building a course in the near future—or if you’ve ever felt like a fraud while growing your business— I think you will find these reminders incredibly valuable.

This episode is for you if you:

Wonder if your “newness” will impact the quality of your class
Want to learn more about cultivating your teaching skills
Are curious about just how much commitment you need to start a class (the answer may surprise you!)
Are nervous about the competition and how to push it away or embrace it

These reminders are a great trigger for me every time I start a new course. I hope you find them as valuable as I do.

Don’t forget to grab your virtual in my LIVE, Free Master Class, "How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.”

#107: How Do I Price My Online Course?

7 april 2016 | 47 min

I want you to price your next (or first!) online course with confidence.

In your heart of hearts, are you getting paid what you’re worth? Are you hitting the “sweet spot” of pricing perfection?

This week I tackle these questions and give you a seven-step pricing strategy so you can determine what you should really charge for your course—and feel whole about the entire process.

I am INCREDIBLY passionate about this topic. Creating my own profitable and content-driven online courses has been the key to my success and I want to make it the key to your success too.

But first, I have something really exciting to share with you. I have a new master class ready to be unveiled: “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.”

In this master class, I share the secrets I’ve learned from helping 38,000 entrepreneurs, while making more than $6 million in revenue.

Grab your spot (it’s free!)

Now, back to today’s topic: In your gut, are you charging what you’re worth?

I would bet that this is the hardest part to starting your first online course—or even maybe your second or third.

Ask yourself these three questions:

Are you afraid to ask for what you’re worth?
Are you willing to deliver 10x the value of what you’re charging?
Does your price point attract the clientele you want?

Let’s dig into the seven steps here.

One of the first steps I share is surprisingly missed by many entrepreneurs. It is such a crucial part in determining your price and I don’t want you to skip it.

Then, we tackle how your product fits into your business. This is key for determining the most attractive price point for what you are offering. I ask you a couple of questions to help you through this step. It can be a tricky road to navigate. Listen here.

Next, we talk about the length of time it can take to launch and re-launch your product.

Ultimately, I want to help you get solid on how you feel about the price you’ve set. Once you decide on the price point, you’ve got to own it.

These seven steps will help you do just that. Own your price. Be confident. And go sell it.

#106: Are You Repelling or Attracting Your Potential Customers with Jasmine Star

4 april 2016 | 47 min

#105: Where Do I Start?

28 mars 2016 | 43 min

I get asked all of the time: Amy, where do I start? And the answer is to start with building your business in Phase One, and progress to Phase Two. This is how to build a business that will endure in the long term, and really fulfill the lifestyle you are looking for.

I know this because I can look back and see what worked for my own business, and what I would have changed if I had to do it all again.

With Phase One, you focus on how to make money in the here and now.

In this phase, you are asking these kinds of questions: What skills and knowledge do you have right now to ensure you can make money quickly? Who’s your avatar? Do you have a solid plan in place to grow your list? What’s your strategy for your blog or posting to social media?

In this phase you are sharpening your skills and getting into the trenches with your ideal customer avatar so that you can understand their needs, wants and genuine pain points. This intel is incredibly valuable as you begin to hone in on your own messaging for your business.

I’ll walk you through several business models that are perfect for this level.

Then with Phase Two, we move into creating a business and life you love.

For this, you will ask yourself: What’s my ultimate business model?

There needs to be an alignment between what you want to do and what your avatar wants from you: That’s the sweet spot.

In many situations, including my own, a business model that offers A LOT of flexibility, consistent revenue and an abundance of opportunity to impact your audience is one that is built on you creating online training programs.

I also want to remind you to download my special freebie for today’s episode, called, “Where Should My Support Dollars Go?”

One aspect that ANY level should be thinking about is: How do I make the most of my time by hiring support? I want to give you a little cheat sheet to help you hire the right level of support for where you are at in your business.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Guide: Where Should My Support Dollars Go?

#104: Your Facebook Ad Questions Answered with Rick Mulready

26 mars 2016 | 39 min

Do you have questions about Facebook advertising? That’s a silly question, right? We’ve all got questions! (Why does Facebook have to make it so complicated sometimes?!)

This week I have my go-to-resource for all things Facebook ads with us, Rick Mulready.

You might remember Rick from previous episodes. He left the corporate world to help entrepreneurs like you optimize your online advertising. I could not be more excited that he’s back with the latest “need to know now!” details to help us optimize our Facebook ads.

In addition to answering the questions below in exquisite detail, he is also hosting a FREE workshop on how to create a lead system using Facebook ads. (Scroll to the bottom to learn how to grab your seat.)

Here’s a list of the questions we answered on this recent episode:

Could you share a case study about Facebook ad spend, list growth and conversions?
What do I do if my ads aren’t converting well?
How are people getting around the character limit on Facebook ads?
Should I use an image or a video?
Is there any way to get more insight as to why Facebook rejected my ad?
Is what I spend per ad too much?
How do I know if my pixels are set up properly and reporting accurately?
The pages I want to target are not coming up for me. Am I targeting correctly?

The answers from Rick are killer and I don’t want you to miss them. If you want to jump right in, click here.

During our chat, Rick shares the case study of a holistic health practitioner who saw an avenue for growth by teaching her way of business to her peers. She created a video campaign and ran with it. Only, she inadvertently made a “mistake” and drove traffic to a site that I would otherwise say is unwise—but it WORKED for her.

In making this “mistake” her conversion rate grew to 40%-50%. She spent $3,000 and earned a return of $30,000. You have to listen to Rick’s explanation of why this worked.

Rick insists that if you aren’t converting your leads, you must keep it simple and take a look at the top one or two statistics that are most relevant to your outcome. Do you have the right target audience? What is your conversion rate? What is your click through rate?

Rick tells you the general cost per conversion that you should strive to spend. He also likes to see a 20% and above conversion rate on a landing page. He explains strategies and actions that you can take to make sure you’re on the right track to achieve this.

For those of you dying to know how your competitors are adding more text to their Facebook ad than is allowed, Rick tells you precisely how. We also discuss when it’s best to post a video or an image with your ad.

One of my favorite insights was that Facebook’s chat helpline is up and running. You heard me right . . . LIVE FACEBOOK AD CHAT! He explains where to find the live chat session, and he raves about the good results he’s gotten from reaching out.

Lastly, Rick talked about targeting and what to do when you can’t find the Facebook Pages you want to target. He shares three sure-fire tips for successful targeting. It may take some detective work at times, but it will pay off.

Don’t forget to register for one of Rick’s three, FREE, live webinars (on April 12 and 13) to discover how you can create an automated system that gets leads and sales everyday for your business.

EPISODE 104 Register for Rick's Free Webinar Training on Facebook Ads

I’m thrilled to tell you that Rick has agreed to come on more regularly to answer your pressing questions. We know that you need these answers to keep moving forward. Look back for another “Amy and Rick FB Ad Q&A Session” in about six weeks!

#103: Scaling Your e-Commerce Business with Steve Chou

21 mars 2016 | 51 min

Google-ads, targeting, and Facebook-scaling, oh my!

We are LUCKY to have e-commerce expert and trainer Steve Chou in my latest episode to keep you in the know of what’s working now in e-commerce.

The great thing about this interview is that although we are talking about e-commerce, the insights are applicable across several areas—business coaching, information marketing, growing your email list, webinars, and so much more!

Quick story about Steve: He owns the site, mywifequitherjob.com. And she did. They live in the gorgeous (and pricey) Silicon Valley. She wanted to quit her job to have more time with their kiddos, but they had to figure out a way to supplement her $100,000 salary. They started the site and in the first year it became a success.

HOW did Steve do that? Steve goes into detail on how he and his wife grew their business by driving traffic to their e-commerce site in this week’s episode.

First and foremost determining the best sites for your e-commerce marketing depends on what your value proposition is. What are you looking to market online with e-commerce?

If it lends itself to searches; for example, Google shopping converts very well. But you see, if you’re selling something general like T-shirts, Google might not be your best bet. And, you might want to go with the targeted marketing on Facebook for better conversion rates. Other businesses like Steve’s e-commerce wedding site where he sells custom wedding handkerchiefs, use both Facebook and Google ads. He dives into that kind of detail in our chat.

Steve and I touched on

When Google shopping will work in your favor
When using Facebook is ideal
What the minimum price point is of something you would want to advertise on Facebook

Equally important for you, Steve sees content as the next wave of how to market products and services and I could not agree more. We got into an important discussion on why video will be the next major trend and why you need to know where you should use it.

It all comes down to REALLY knowing your audience and who will buy your product.

Want to know how to scale your Facebook ads? This is one of the topics Steve and I discuss and I’ve created a free training video for you to dive a little deeper.

Whether you’re looking to improve your e-commerce site, build your list, or grow your consulting business, these spot-on Facebook ad scaling tips are for you!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy's Free Training Video: Scaling Your Facebook Ads

Listen to Steve give you more strategies on content, training programs and growing your business via Facebook, Google, Instagram, and Pinterest here.

#102: How to Create Content Rituals to Get More Done

14 mars 2016 | 41 min

#101: How to Intentionally Design the Life You Want with Michael Hyatt

8 mars 2016 | 39 min

When my dear friend Michael Hyatt said he was going to come by to join us for our latest episode, I knew it was going to be good, and profound.

And in my latest episode, he doesn’t disappoint, ladies and gentlemen...

Because he’s talking about the ONE thing we should be focused on in our lives: Our life plan. It’s all tied to his latest book, Living Forward: A Proven Plan to Stop Drifting and Get the Life You Want, which Michael co-authored with Daniel Harkavy.

Why, you might ask, is a life plan more important than many areas of your business?

Because, as Michael says:

“A failure in one area can reverberate and cascade into other areas of our life.”

So when you’re overall life plan is off track, then your business is naturally off. According to Michael, when you’re what he calls “drifting,” you’re distracted, overwhelmed and unaware of where you should put your focus. This can create an environment for failure.

Michael helps you understand that by getting your priorities in line, so you can be prepared to make the little decisions you need to get the big results you want out of your business, and in life.

Because, it’s not the big moves that determine the quality of our output, it’s actually the little actions. In last week’s episode, I explained how I grew my business via incremental steps and not one large move.

Michael takes this one step further to help us decide what we should be focusing on in our lives, so that we are prepared and patient enough to conquer those little steps.

To get started, he prompts you to ask yourself:

How do you want to be remembered?
What is most important to you?
How do I get from here (wherever that is) to where I want to be?

Michael then shares the surprising reality about putting yourself first. (It’s a tough lesson.)

The book is packed with great insights, and Michael has a special deal if you buy the book tomorrow (March 11). If you purchase Living Forward by tomorrow, Michael will give you for FREE:

A detailed action plan guide
The Living Forward quick-start audio training
A custom Living Forward adult coloring book

To claim your bonus:

Visit the following link and follow the prompts http://livingforwardbook.com/#claimbonuses

After talking with Michael, I am more empowered than ever to determine a clear destination and make the tough choices I need to make to get me there.

So my friends, get ready to be present, be engaged and be fully focused. Get ready for a life of less drifting, and more fulfillment. Go here now to check out this special interview with Michael.

#100: When is the Right Time to Add Another Product to Your Business?

3 mars 2016 | 38 min

Today's episode is #100 (let's celebrate!)-- and I've got another hot topic I wanted to talk to you all about. This hot topic is focused on a big mistake I see a lot (especially in the first two years of business!) but I rarely talk about. Until now.

It begins with deciding on which path you should take for your business: Horizontal OR Vertical?

Which is best for your business right now? How do you know if you are on the right path? And which path did I choose from own my business (to see crazy good results)? You can see the answers to these questions and more in my latest podcast episode here.

Not only are we talking about such an important topic on today's episode, but I've also got something incredibly exciting to share with you!

I often get asked if I do one-on-one coaching and while I don't have the bandwidth to add coaching to my business currently, in honor of my 100th episode I wanted to create something extra special. That's why I'm giving one person the opportunity to get laser coaching from me in person, right here in San Diego, California.

If you are the winner, you get to come out to San Diego for the day where I will put you up at the Omni La Costa Resort and Spa right near my home. (You're going to love it--it's gorgeous.) Bright and early in the morning, we will meet in person and spend the day taking a deep dive into your entire business.

We'll look at everything: your avatar, your messaging, your positioning, your products, programs, offers, list-building funnel, all of it. I will give you my insights, my feedback, and advice to help you take your business to the next level whether it be horizontal or vertical.

After we're done and our brains are good and fried, we'll go out to a fun dinner together and celebrate our accomplishments. Sound good?\

I know it’s a big step to put yourself out there with this whole video entry thing. But I really want to encourage you to do so! This opportunity to meet with me and put a laser focus on you and your business could be business-changing and life-changing! I promise I will make it worth your time.

I'd also like to take a minute to thank you immensely for following me on my journey of creating this podcast. It truly is one of the most favorite things I do inside my business. It has probably made the biggest impact in my ability to reach bigger audience and connect with you and grow my business overall.

Thank you so very much for letting me do what I love. I cannot wait to continue this podcast with more and more episodes about building your business and list building and webinars and all the cool stuff I get to talk about. Here's to the next 100 episodes!

And I cannot wait to see what you create in your own business...starting with your videos!

#99: How to Create a List Building Blitz Campaign

25 februari 2016 | 38 min

Over the last few years, I've noticed that one of the big reasons my students struggle with list building is that they lack consistent original content in their marketing strategy.

It's an easy trap to fall into. After all, creating content takes time, effort and creativity.

You might even be thinking "Amy, all my focus is going into creating my product for sale. How am I supposed to come up with fresh original content every week?"

Well, good news--this episode is all about helping you create just one piece of amazing content each month.

You heard right. Each. Month.

When you have that one piece of amazing epic content, you can spin it out into every marketing channel in your toolbox with the overall goal of building your list.

Content Comes in Three Stages

I think there’s a lot of confusion out there around content. It seems simple, but when I sat down and started mapping what successful content looks like in different contexts, I'll admit that even I got confused!

So I checked in with a good friend from my corporate job days. She’s the best at dissecting content and explaining where it shines the brightest. And what she showed me is that there are three main stages of content:

Paid
Free lead magnet
Just plain free (not even for an opt-in)

Notice I said "stages." All three of these types of content are related to each other--which means every time you create one kind of content, the other two are super easy to create out of it. Click here to find out how you can use the main themes within your paid product to create epic content that builds your list!

Easy Strategies for Getting More Mileage Out of Your Epic Content

Now, like I said earlier, the "meat" of the strategy we’re diving into in this episode is getting deliberate about your content creation so you can extend it across all your marketing channels. When you really get intentional with your content (and create it with your email list in mind), you're all to get huge mileage out of one piece.

After all, we take our content creation seriously. So why not put a bigger focus on getting it in front of more people while we’re creating it?

In this episode, I'm going to walk you through three roadmaps for extending one piece of epic content into every major marketing platform you use.

To make it extremely easy for you, I've put together some free worksheets that show how to break up your content into different platforms within each roadmap. Click here to get them now!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Your Free Cheat Sheet: "The List Builders Blitz Campaign"

To get the most out of today's topic, you'll really want to listen to the whole episode. But I'll outline the roadmaps for you here:

Strategy 1: Start by writing an epic blog post that includes an epic upgrade (something your readers can take more action on to get more value).

From there, you'll move to emailing your list, creating videos, doing a Periscope, and more. Click here to get all the steps now!

Strategy 2: Start by creating an epic podcast episode with an upgrade.

Strategy 3: Start by creating an epic video.

The End Goal = Your Email List

Now, this whole strategy takes a little thought and effort to execute properly. That's why you won’t be using this strategy with every single piece of new content you create. Like I said, I’m suggesting you be selective with this concept and put it to work about once a month. That gives you lots of room to pace each appearance of the content within your various marketing channels (and to repost it at least once) without making it seem like overload.

Bottom line, the mindset around your campaign should always be about building your email list by getting people to your freebie. When you're creating core quality content with your email list in mind, it uplevels everywhere that content appears.

#98: Four Big Lies We Tell Our Entrepreneurial Selves

16 februari 2016 | 49 min

You know how much I love battle-tested, ultra-successful online marketing strategies. The only thing I love better is sharing strategies like these with you! It makes me so happy when we get in the trenches together and master the techniques that bring us the results we crave.

But this week, we're doing something a little different.

I'm in the midst of setting up my List-Builders Lab program right now, and I have to say that I'm really feeling the effect of all the strategies I've learned (and shared with you) over the past year. Let me tell you that the confidence I feel makes a world of difference in the midst of pre-launch craziness.

And that got me thinking about how insanely important it is in your business to have your mind right!

We don't think about this too much--we're too busy looking for the right tools, the right strategies, the right technology, etc. But if your confidence is struggling even just a bit, no strategy is going to work inside your business the way it should.

That's why today's podcast episode is all about lies, lies, lies...

And, of course, the truth that we need to replace them.

As you likely already know, to win the game of becoming a successful entrepreneur, you’ve got to focus occasionally on what’s going on between your two ears.

Today's post is all about the lies that I've personally dealt with! And sometimes, in low moments, I still hear them creeping up on me.

But with the help and advice of other friends in the online business world, I know what to tell myself when those lies show up...and that's what I want to pass on to you today.

Lie #1: You have to be the best in your market.

Lie #2: You have to find the balance between your work and your family and all that comes in between that.

Lie #3: Your failures that are adding up are proof that you’re never going to make this work.

Lie #4: Every opportunity that comes your way is big, and you can’t miss out on it or you’ll be left behind.

Stopping the Lies = Knowing the Truth

I know it’s not enough to just tell you what these lies are. You need to know how to flip them around with truth! Once you have the truth, those lies can't hold you back anymore, and you can really start building momentum in your business.

Since we're all about truth-telling today, I'll be honest and say that today's episode felt a little bit uncomfortable for me at times. It's not always easy for me to talk about topics that might not feel super good. And I don’t get to say, “Click this, go here, do that,” because we’re not talking about those specific strategies.

But I think it’s important to get really honest with ourselves, in order to be sure that those strategies will work. I hope that’s what this episode did for you, and that it redirects and recharges you, so that you start finding out how to create the business you absolutely love.

#97: How to Grow a Profitable Facebook Group

10 februari 2016 | 52 min

Today we're diving into a new aspect of Facebook marketing that may very well surprise you!

If you've hosted a webinar or an online course, you have probably also created a private Facebook group as a bonus for your clients. In addition to offering extra support and relationship, private Facebook groups are an amazing way to galvanize your clients into a true community. (Always a great thing when it comes to brand loyalty!)

But did you know that the community-creating power of private Facebook groups can be a hugely effective sales tool?

My guests on the podcast today are Josh and Jill Stanton from Screw the 9 to 5, and they're going to share their secret strategy for using private Facebook groups to warm up your audience for sales.

Using Facebook groups in this way is really unique to Josh and Jill--as far as I know, nobody else out there is using this strategy to grow revenue.

That's because we usually think of Facebook groups as being an "after the fact" thing. You create the product, people buy it and then they're part of the group.

But what Josh and Jill have realized that there's a ton of sales power in making your audience "part of the group" before they ever spend a dime with you!

Re-think Your Page

Right off the bat, Jill makes a statement that could ruffle the feathers of a lot of online marketers:

"Facebook Pages are dead to me."

Once you recover from that bombshell, don't rush to the "Delete" button on your page! There's definitely a place for Facebook Pages...even Jill and Josh still use theirs.

But what Jill is saying is that the Page setup is really more of a one-way street when it comes to interacting with your audience. For example, when fans comment on your page, their words show up in a sidebar...not exactly a real conversation, is it?

Turning Your Brand into a Facebook Family

By contrast, a Facebook group lets the "family atmosphere" of your brand really flourish. When you gather the people who have genuine interest in your business into a private setting--one in which they can interact with you as another member (an extra-knowledgeable and authoritative member, of course)--you're able to build a community of affinity and trust around your brand.

A community in which you are the go-to source for what your audience wants to know/solve/accomplish.

A community that is brought together by the experience of your program, product or service.

If you're ready to find out the nuts and bolts of this ingenious Facebook marketing strategy, click here to listen to the whole episode now!

...Oh, and be sure to pay attention for a special bonus topic in my conversation with Josh and Jill: what to do when you realize that you don't really like your business model. (Yes, it's possible to change!)

#96: How to Find Clarity & Get Focused with Marie Forleo

4 februari 2016 | 50 min

#95: How to Test Your Next Business Idea with Pat Flynn

28 januari 2016 | 55 min

Picture this: you wake up one morning with an amazing idea. You do a little research on it and, by the end of the day, feel a growing sense that this idea of yours has real selling potential. Maybe you even ask your audience directly if they'd be interested in this idea, and they give it a resounding "Yes, please!"

And then, after all this, you put your great idea into action...and it doesn't sell. Nothing comes of it.

When you spend time, effort, and money putting together something for your audience, only to hear crickets when you put it out into the world, it can really crush your confidence, not to mention put a dent in your bottom line.

But what if you could take your idea through a proven process that makes sure it's a good fit for you, your business, and for your audience?

Now that's a pretty good idea, right?

My good friend Pat Flynn has tested many, many great ideas over the course of his online career. And believe it or not, even Pat has had a few ideas that he thought were great end up dead in the water. That's what led to his new book Will It Fly?, which shows entrepreneurs how to test their great ideas for real value.

On today's podcast episode, Pat and I are going to walk you through some ideas, insights, and tips to help you learn how to test whether your idea will work for you and your audience. It's a great episode and you're going to want to hear the whole thing--trust me!

Pat is one of the hardest working guys out there. But even more impressive than his work ethic is his transparency. If you've visited his site, you've seen that he publishes his monthly revenue reports so that viewers can see real-life proof of how well his ideas work.

Success Isn't Overnight

As entrepreneurs, we're always talking about launching. Launching is a big part of what we do, but how often do we talk about what happens after you launch? Is your idea actually going to take off? Is it going to fly? Is it going to keep going or is it going to crash?

Whether you need permission to really get moving on your latest idea, or if you require some "tough love" in order to let this one go and keep searching for inspiration, Pat's book is going to give you some fundamental tools for entrepreneurial success.

EPISODE 95 Click Here to Check Out Pat's New Book "Will It Fly?"

The Three Validation Tests

The History Test

The Shark Bait Test

Want to check out Pat's book, where he dives deep into the content he shared with us? Click here to find out more about his new book, Will It Fly.

EPISODE 95 Check Out Pat's New Book "Will It Fly?"

#94: Using Periscope to Grow Your Business

21 januari 2016 | 49 min

By now you've probably heard about Periscope, the live streaming social media platform that lets you talk to your fans in real time. It's the fastest growing social media platform of all time! Since Periscope launched in March 2015, it already has 15 million users. And get this: those users upload three years' worth of video content every day.

I dabbled with Periscope for a while in 2015, and to be honest, I couldn't figure out if I loved it or hated it. Mostly, I just didn't really understand how to use it to its fullest potential.

That's why I was so glad to talk with today's podcast guest. Zack Spuckler is a genuine Periscope ninja, and he has used the platform to do amazing things with his email list.

Whether you're an early adopter who is already using Periscope on a daily basis, or a skeptic who wonders if this medium is really going to last long enough to be worth the time it takes to learn it, this episode is one you just can't miss.

I'll be the first to admit that my biggest obstacle in using Periscope is the whole "live stream" nature of it. Frankly, it makes me nervous--I like to have a plan, a script, and a lot of chances to correct my mistakes.

At the same time, I recognize the real power of livestreaming to break the barriers between you and your audience. They get to come inside your world, and you get to be more personal and engaging with them. It lets your audience see a side of you that really no other social media platform offers.

Having said that, there are some do's and don'ts that go a long way toward making Periscope truly effective as a marketing tool. That's where Zach's expertise comes in!

In addition to offering tons of pro tips and insider tricks on how to use Periscope to best advantage (and a good estimate on how long it takes to really hit your stride) Zach has created a freebie just for you. It's a worksheet with five simple steps to guide you through your first Periscope broadcast. Click here to get it now!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Simple Broadcast System Worksheet

"I sold about $1,200 of the course at a $97 intro price. Then I did it again the next day. We ended up doing about $2,200 in sales with about an hour and a half of Periscopes. We hadn’t sent emails. We didn’t even have a sales page.

"Then I launched my Periscope course and really drove people there from Periscope. This will really tell you the power of it: I didn’t have a freebie ready for Periscope. I threw together a lead page that said, “I’m going to make a really cool Periscope freebie. I have no idea what it’s going to be, I just know that you should sign up for it.” We had over 200 people opt in for that and when all was said and done, in the course of the first 30 days and a little beyond that because we had launch, we had sold 60 copies of the course." The Real Power Behind Periscope

Zach has tons of tips and tools that will help you create results like these on Periscope. But the real key to Zach's success isn't just the platform--it's the ability it gave him to really hear what his audience wanted.

Prior to using Periscope, Zach was facing that constant frustration of creating products that he thought his audience wanted from him, only to have nobody click the "Buy" button when he finally released it. But by engaging with his audience on live video, he could literally count the number of times people asked about something, and know exactly what it was they wanted.

"It’s just crazy, the engagement and conversion that you can get with live video. You don’t have to think anymore, you just have to listen. That's what I like about it."

If you're ready to really dive into Periscope and find out how to use it, click here to listen to the podcast now. And make sure to download the worksheet created especially for you by Zach himself.

#93: Affiliate Marketing Success with Rachel Luna

13 januari 2016 | 55 min

You know how important your list is to your business' growth. If you're measuring your list's health in terms of numbers, it can really get you down sometimes. It's easy to feel like the fate of your business is at a standstill until your list numbers in the thousands (or at least the high hundreds).

My guest on the podcast today is going to blow that myth out of the water! Rachel Luna is living proof that you don’t need a gigantic list to gain success. What really matters about your list isn’t the number of names and addresses on it, but the quality of those people in terms of their engagement with you.

Rachel’s success story is really a one-two punch. Not only does she show the power of what you can do with a highly engaged list, but she’s also a stellar example of how to do affiliate marketing right.

If you’ve thought about doing affiliate marketing but haven’t tried it…or if you’ve gone through it before with mediocre results…Rachel’s story is going to truly inspire you. And you’re also going to love the freebie Rachel created for us this week: it’s called the Confident Affiliate Marketing Starter Guide. You can get it by clicking here!

Secrets of an Affiliate Marketing Superstar

Last spring, Rachel worked with my business coach Todd Herman and chose to be an affiliate promoter of his 90-Day Year program. As a business/life coach to other entrepreneurs, Rachel is ultra-focused on taking action and setting goals, which made her a perfect fit for this promotion.

"Who is this Rachel Luna, and what is her secret?" Finally, I decided to get in touch with her to find out just that. And today she is sharing the secrets of her affiliate marketing success with all of us! Click here to start listening now.

You can see why Rachel was blowing us all away with her climbing numbers! This made it all the more devastating when, just one week before the official program kickoff, Rachel’s website got hacked. Everything she had planned for her promotion—blogs, sales pages, bonus materials that she’d created for her audience—was gone. Rachel considered not even doing the promotion. She’d spent hours putting all this together, only to have it wiped out overnight. But after talking with Todd, she decided to keep moving forward and see what happened.

"I sent off that first email which I had taken the time to write really well. I was very thoughtful about it. I was very intentional because I wanted to make sure it was something that would resonate with my audience."

And oh, did it ever resonate. By Day 1 of the promotion, Rachel had made $10k…almost 75% of her revenue goal. By Day 2, she’d surpassed her goal by $2000. By the time the launch ended, Rachel had made a $53,000 profit, almost four times her goal amount. By the way, this little fish, ended up finishing fourth overall out of all the affiliates promoting the program. Amazing!

You Don't Need a Big List to Get Big Results

Rachel shares a lot more details of what made her affiliate launch such a staggering success--how much she spent on Facebook ads, how she structured bonuses for her audience, etc.--in the full podcast episode. And of course you'll want to download her amazing freebie, the Confident Affiliate Marketing Starter Guide.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Confident Affiliate Marketing Starter Guide

But the biggest takeaway, in my view, was that Rachel didn't let the size of her email list stop her. She could have put off Todd's program until next time it came around, telling herself she was going to wait until her list was bigger. But instead, she took action with what she had, focused on maximizing her strengths, and didn't let setbacks slow her down.

"Sometimes, in my experience as a life coach, people aren’t so focused on taking action, they are focused on feeling better. They were happy with mediocre results. I want to have the best, most exciting. I want big."

#92: Facebook Ad Targeting 101

5 januari 2016 | 44 min

Let's kick off the New Year with an absolute game changer for your business: Facebook ad targeting.

Some of you by now have become really good at this. But if you're still struggling to nail your Facebook ad strategy, or if you're just getting started in this world, this episode is most definitely for you.

I work with a lot of business students who are just getting started with Facebook ads or have been dabbling in ads for a while without seeing much success. The number one mistake I see them making is targeting the wrong people. This usually happens for two reasons.

Some of my students truly don’t understand who their avatar is.

Others...the majority, in fact...know who their avatar is, but they just haven’t dug deep enough to understand them in a way that Facebook ad targeting could make a huge difference for them in their business.Specifically, they haven’t done the research or documented their successes and losses, so they aren’t really sure what’s working.

Here's what I always remind them: when you get really good at Facebook ad targeting, there is no doubt you are going to see some major shifts in the impact you have with your audience and a major increase in your revenue streams.

That's why I've created a roadmap that will let you know exactly where to focus, along with what needs to be on your radar from the get-go. It's really simple--just the way I like it--and it's set up so that you can keep adding to it as you learn exactly who your audience is and how to get in front of them. Basically, it's the key to unlocking the most valuable resource in your business.

I've put a lot into this episode for you, so make sure to listen to the whole podcast to get everything you need to start the new year off successfully!

I've also created a great freebie to help you with this plan--the Facebook Ad Targeting Starter Guide. It's a list of ten questions that you MUST be able to answer about your audience in order to fully optimize your Facebook ad targeting. Grab the special guide by clicking below!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy's Facebook Ads Targeting Starter Guide

Like I said, you've really got to listen to the whole episode to get all this great information I've put together for you. But to outline it for you, Facebook ad targeting breaks down into four specific opportunities:

Targeting Opportunity #1: Target Your Own Audiences

Targeting Opportunity #2: Targeting Your Own Facebook Fans

Targeting Opportunity #3: Target Other Facebook Pages

Targeting Opportunity #4: Creating Lookalike Audiences

Be Patient with Yourself

Finally, I have to remind you to be patient with yourself. This isn’t all going to fall into place tomorrow. My goal is to give you a roadmap and a bunch of examples, so you see where you want to go with your Facebook ad targeting and have the skills to get there day by day.

In addition to laying out the steps in each targeting opportunity, this podcast episode walks you through using two super-easy research tools that should become second nature to you when you start to dive into Facebook advertising. Click here to listen to the whole thing now.

And make sure to download this week's freebie so you can get super-prepared for making the most of your Facebook targeting.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy's Facebook Ads Targeting Starter Guide

#91: 100 Days of Goal Setting with John Lee Dumas

31 december 2015 | 47 min

Happy 2016, everyone! I am thrilled to ring in the New Year with you.

As I’ve mentioned before, I love new beginnings. The clean slate, the opportunity to brainstorm amazing new projects and create strategies and systems around getting them done…it gets my creative juices flowing like nothing else.

And the podcasts I have planned for 2016 are no exception! There are some really exciting episodes in store for you. We’ll be focusing on list building and building campaigns in your business so that you can sell more online. We’ll talk a lot about content creation and making sure that you’re getting in front of the right people to make the biggest impact. And we’ll make sure you are creating a business that you love as well as creating online training programs and products that your audience can’t get enough of.

But to get us set up for success in all these areas, I’m going to kick off the new year with some advice from my good friend John Lee Dumas. John is a favorite guest to have on this podcast because his brand Entrepreneur on Fire is a stellar example of the kind of success we’re all shooting for. And after hosting over 1200 interviews with successful entrepreneurs, John is definitely an authority on what it takes to achieve online business success.

SMART Goals = Surefire Success

John said that over the past few years, a pattern emerged in the emails he received from his audience. A lot of people were struggling with online business because they didn’t know how to set and accomplish goals in an effective way.

Contrast that with what John saw in the success stories of his Entrepreneur on Fire interviewees:

“I’m a big believer there is no silver bullet. It’s all hard work and getting your nose down to the grindstone, for sure. But I step back and ask what is one thing the Amy Porterfield’s and Pat Flynn’s and Michael Stelzner’s of the world all do well. … These people all know how to set and accomplish goals.”

So John decided to dedicate 2015 to creating a structure for his audience to take action with setting goals.

And now, in 2016, he has an amazing and beautiful product to help them do just that! It’s called the Freedom Journal: Accomplish Your Goals in 100 Days.

It’s a hardbound, 300-page physical book that walks you step by step through the process of not only setting a goal but accomplishing it within 100 days.

(True story: I have this journal right in front of me, and let me just tell you that simply holding it in your hands is a powerful thing. Something about this beautifully created physical product is inspiring and empowering in a whole new way. Looking at it makes you want to take action. Pretty amazing stuff!)

EPISODE 91 Click Here to Check Out The Freedom Journal

Step by Step Guidance for Your 2016 Goals

The Freedom Journal starts with John guiding you through setting a SMART goal. You probably already know this acronym: it stands for Smart, Measurable, Attainable, Relevant, and Time-bound.

The rest of the journal offers step-by-step guidance and accountability in carrying out your goal one day at a time.

In the remainder of this podcast, John and I talk through the process of two different real-life SMART goals. The first one is about John launching Entrepreneur On Fire; the second one is about how I launched Webinars That Convert. After hearing us explain how SMART goals guided our most successful ventures, you’ll have some super actionable example of how you can use the Freedom Journal to accomplish your own goals…did I mention in just 100 days?!

Click here to listen to the full episode now!

#90: 7 Ways to Work Smarter in 2016

31 december 2015 | 70 min

Can you believe 2015 is over already?

I know, it's a cliche thing to say, but it's true--I feel like the year has just flown by! Maybe you can relate. I know when a year is packed with as many projects, launches, milestones reached and lessons learned as 2015 has been for me, it makes time race by.

It's impossible to anticipate the new year without thinking about resolutions. Ugh. I've never been one of those people who respond well to those.

Instead of thinking about resolutions, I found myself drifting back to a book that I've read about a hundred times. I'm sure you've heard me talk about it before: ReWork, written by the guys who founded Basecamp. This book was like a manual for success, back when I was first getting started...but it seems to be turning into a tradition that at the end of one year, I review it for fresh inspiration on how to smartly approach the coming year.

Call it a New Year's Rejuvenation, if you will.

This year, I was going through it looking for how its principles could help build online business. And as usual, ReWork did not disappoint. I was taking so many notes that I had to turn it into a podcast for you.

The strategies I'm going over today are all about different ways to approach your work so that...

a) you get more done b) everything you do leads you to big results c) you end the day feeling more satisfied with your bottom line

In particular, if you want to build a business around creating online training programs and courses, these strategies are going to be really applicable. They'll help you get more done with less time, less money, less resources…you know, the precious things we always seem to be short on.

Each of these 7 tips will have to do with one of these three words: Strategy, Saving, and Selling. And I have to tell you, this is a very dense, deep episode--give me a break, it's the final episode of 2015!--so you really should listen to the whole thing.

I suggest curling up with the last Christmas cookie, stir a little eggnog into your coffee, and enjoy a final moment of holiday hibernation to brainstorm your 2016 business year.

Strategy #1: Embrace your constraints

Limited resources force you to do make do with what you’ve got, and that in turn forces you to be creative.

Strategy #2: Become a curator

It’s the stuff you leave out that matters--in terms of product value and saving yourself valuable time. Find out how--click here to listen now.

Strategy #3: Build a more focused product

What’s the one most important thing that your product is bringing to the table?

Strategy #4: Make decisions often

You’ll be amazed how strong your decision-making skills can get when you make it a habit.

Strategy #5: Create an offer your audience cannot refuse.

One of the best ways to do this is to offer more of you.

Strategy #6: Sell your by-product as an upsell or downsell

If you offer an upsell or downsell, you can work less! Find out how--click here to listen now.

Strategy #7: Make sure your work really matters

Nothing really matters if your work doesn’t matter to others…or to you.

In the end, your business' value is really all about your business' balance. Adding too little will leave your audience confused and you unsatisfied; adding too much value is just overkill for your audience and way too much stress for you.

Get the low-down on each of these tips...find out how they tie in with Strategy, Savings and Selling...and get your business systems aligned for an amazing new year!

#89: How to Fascinate Your Audience

17 december 2015 | 46 min

I've got a question for you. Ready?

What do Apple, Lululemon and Morton's Salt all share in common?

Take a minute to ponder each brand. What imagery does it conjure up? More importantly, what feelings do those images create inside you?

When I think of Apple products, I think of elegant, simple design and the feeling of effortlessly getting stuff done. Lululemon brings back that sensation of looking amazing when I'm working out (even if my workout itself feels less than amazing). And Morton Salt? I think of my mom's kitchen cupboard, which feels warm and nostalgic and makes me want to go bake cookies.

Here's the answer to the quiz: all three of those brands share the power of fascination.

Fascination, as my podcast guest Sally Hogshead defines it, means an intense focus.

"When you’re fascinated by a person or a brand, you’re completely consumed in that moment. It’s that feeling you have when you’re working on a project and you’re totally in the flow. You feel creative, you feel confident, you feel focused and energized by what you’re doing. Or when you’re out at drinks with a friend—the time flies by, and you seem to be building epiphanies together in your conversation."

Click here to listen to the full episode with Sally.

For years, Sally's day job was helping big name brands like Nike and BMW find the perfect words to describe themselves. The first half of that search was understanding what they offered to their customer base that nobody else did; the second half was knowing how to capitalize on that uniqueness and capture it in language.

At a certain point, Sally realized that nobody had really brought that idea over from products to people. Business owners were all about finding the right words to get customers fascinated with their products, but they weren't finding the right words to help people understand who they are and how they add value.

These days, she parlays her understanding of what works in advertising world into a training to help entrepreneurs understand how people perceive them through their communication.

#88: How To Boost Your Webinar Sales

30 november 2015 | 27 min

I know that I've talked a lot with you about webinars this year. The fact is that I've been learning a ton about them myself, and every time I learn a new technique or crack the code on a revenue-boosting system, I can't help but pass it on to you!

This week, though, I'm doing something a little different. Rather than walk you through a step-by-step system, I'm going to focus with you on one very specific strategy that I learned from Tim Paige, the host of the podcast Conversion Cast and the leader of all LeadPages webinars.

Today is all about an engagement strategy that I've just begun applying it to my webinars. I’ll be sure to let you know how it's going, once I really get it off the ground. But I'll be completely honest with you: it's a little awkward, in the beginning. I've done a lot of webinars, and I still am finding my sweet spot.

The thing is that Tim, in addition to being a pal, is a true webinar ninja. This man has done 410 webinars to date! (Who knows--he may be up to more, by the time this episode airs.) No joke--his application is pending for the Guinness Book of World Records for most webinars done in a 12-month period. This is a guy who really knows the ins and outs of webinar success.

So when he tells me this strategy is worth working through, I believe it!

Listen to the full episode to get all the details on this amazing strategy from Tim Paige.

You can also check out Tim putting this revolutionary engagement strategy into action--just click here to join his latest webinar.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy and Tim's Engagement Focused Webinar

We all know how important engagement is for our webinars. There's nothing worse than crafting and delivering a dynamic, informative presentation only to hear crickets during the Q&A.

Scratch that--there is one thing worse: delivering your presentation and seeing only a faint dribble of sales by the time you log off for the day.

What you're looking for is that special spark that sets fire to your content and gets your audience fired up in response to it.

Early on, I wanted to test the idea of taking every opportunity I could throughout the process of presenting a webinar to look over in the questions box and start answering questions live as we went, as long as they were relevant and weren’t off topic.

I found in answering questions, not only did I see a 98% stick rate (98% of the people that joined the webinar in the beginning stuck around all the way until the end) but in one split test I also saw a tripled revenue from one webinar to the next." Um...did you get all that? A 98% stick rate and a 300% revenue increase?

I'd say this strategy is well worth trying, wouldn't you?So how does this work? If you're like me, you may be already thinking about how taking questions in the middle of your presentation will interrupt your flow. What if the questions make me get ahead of myself? Am I allowed to not answer questions if they aren't on topic? How is this supposed to work with replays and automated webinars?

...And just what is it about this strategy that makes it so incredibly powerful?

Listen to the full episode for all the answers--it's a short but intense masterclass on a single technique that is a true webinar game changer.

Do you want to see Tim’s webinar engagement strategy in action? Click here to check out his special LeadPages webinar and pay close attention to when and how he asks questions and engages with his audience.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy and Tim's Engagement Focused Webinar

James Wedmore's Inner Circle Jamie Tardy Jeff Walker Fabienne Fredrickson Victoria Gibson's Breakout Success Mastermind The Shine Academy Natalie MacNeil's Conquer Club Leonie Dawson's Glow Academy

#87: How to Build a Dream Team with Melanie Duncan

23 november 2015 | 50 min

As you are building up your business and starting to see some solid success, sooner or later you're going to arrive at a certain point.

A point where you, as the founder, brand visionary and chief hustler, cannot do everything alone.

This is the moment where you need to hire some people.

Not just anyone will do, of course. You need to build out a dream team inside of your business so that you can spend more time in your areas of genius, the areas that you really excel, the areas that you love to spend time in where your skill set is the strongest, so that you can make a bigger impact for your audience and on your bottom line.

There is nobody I know who is better at this dream team creation thing than my friend Melanie Duncan.

The first thing you should know about Melanie is that she runs a multiple-seven figure empire. In other words, she's an authority on this whole online entrepreneurship thing.

The second thing you should know is that the ways she's developed her business are, in large part, the result of her amazing hiring system. She has a process for hiring that is extremely unique--it takes quite a lot of effort and focus, but it's allowed her to find amazing people that are the perfect fit to support her business. And let's be honest, when you love the people you work with, everything seems flow a whole lot better on all fronts.

But what's even more to the point is how her hiring system has also changed her perspective on hiring. I’ve seen her go through the transition of hating to hire to absolutely loving the hiring process. And as we all know, loving an IMPORTANT process you used to hate is a cornerstone of achieving the success you want.

If you're ready to dive into Melanie's amazing system, click here to listen to the full episode now.

Below, I've got the bullet-point version to get you primed for what you're about to learn.

Make a Dream Team List
Create a Revenue Goal
Hire with a Sales Page
Hire to Fit
Wondering how long the process should take? Cringing at the thought of sifting through resumes? Want to know how to spot a truly stand-out candidate from the crowd? Get all of Melanie's detailed insight on how to hire people for your dream team. Click here to listen to the full episode now!

#86: Creating An Honest Business From The Ground Up with Dale Partridge

14 november 2015 | 43 min

Over the last few weeks on this podcast, we’ve been doing some intensive tactical trainings.

We’ve talked about adding upsells to your sales promotions, adding bonuses, when to add them. We’ve talked about the mindset of list building, and then we’ve gotten really specific about what you need to do to build your list.

Today I want to step back a little bit and look at the big picture and look at our team and how we’re running our business and setting things up. I thought there was no one better to do that than my new friend, Dale Partridge.

You probably already know Dale, either from Sevenly (the company he founded that became one of the fastest growing social-good startups in history), or from his many keynote speeches and feature interviews on the topic of doing business with integrity, or maybe from his recent book People Over Profits.

Dale is a creative leader whose mission is to influence an industry to rethink the models of how we do business today. And I invited him on the show today to help you (and me) learn about how to set a solid foundation for our long-term success.

One thing Dale's book really dials into is the importance of recognizing the pivotal moments in our businesses when small decisions could have major impact.

Dale went into business for himself at 18 years old...which means that even though he's still a young man, he's old in entrepreneur years. Within that time, he says, his whole mindset around business shifted from making major profits to making a major difference in people's lives.

"In the search for purpose and meaning I wanted to create a company that was more than just putting money at the bottom line. It wasn’t until I really shifted my thinking from how to make a million dollars to how to help a million people that really pushed me into business."

This is the core of Dale's "people over profits" message . . . and what I really want to stress in today's episode is that it's never too early in your business to think about how you're prioritizing people against your profits.

When you're in the early years of building our business, you're all too aware that every interaction in every business relationship matters. You're hyper-focused on bringing real, personal value to your customers with your unique talent and expertise, because you know that it's the key to your success.

But Dale points out that greed, dishonesty and customer contempt are not relegated to big corporations . . . that's just when they get caught in a big way. It's super important, he says, to set the foundation of your business integrity in these early years, while you're small, and learn how to self-correct in those moments when it's easy to make small compromises.

"I don’t want to be the most successful person that nobody respects or that nobody trusts. And I don’t want to create the biggest company that has great products but people don’t really connect with it."

Dale has done some impressive research on the most successful companies (and the ones who fell the hardest) of the past century. According to his research, the companies (and leaders) who really stood the test of time have seven core beliefs in common:

People matter.
Truth wins.
Transparency frees.
Authenticity attracts.
Quality speaks.
Generosity returns.
Courage sustains.

Listen to the full episode to hear Dale explain more about how these principles show up in online business practice, and how we can train ourselves to build businesses that uphold them.

"Whatever your dream is, make sure you crush on it because it’s not about you, it’s about them."

In the end, Dale says, our businesses' potential for growth is dependent on the integrity we build into our relationships with clients, vendors and colleagues. It can take real courage to honor a long-term relationship over short-term convenience. But that kind of courage is what creates a brand that really stands the test of time.

#85: 5 Marketing Lessons That Have Shaped My Online Business

11 november 2015 | 9 min

Happy Thanksgiving, everyone!

First of all, can I just be a little corny and express my gratitude for all of you? It's hard to believe we're up to 85 episodes of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast . . . and with those episodes have come lots of free weekly giveaways, 17 interviews with the biggest names in online business expertise, 1.6 million audio downloads. Oh, and one very exciting mention on MSNBC as a Top 5 Online Business Podcast!

I am truly thankful for each one of you in this little community of go-getter entrepreneurs. Every time you opt in, leave a Facebook comment, write a review of the show or share this podcast with your friends, my heart is genuinely touched. Nothing makes me happier than to know that what I'm sharing is valuable and helpful to you. From the bottom of my heart, thank you.

Whew! Okay, on to business.

1) Masterminding and finding a business coach.

EPISODE 85 Sign Up for Amy's Free Masterclass: How to Create a Wildly Profitable Webinar (Even If You Don't Have a List)

SIGN UP

2) Finding your marketing vehicle sweet spot.

This one is about platform. I’m going to show you what it looks like in my business and how it made such a huge impact. Then I will give you some actions to start investigating this in your business.

3) My partnership.

You may or may not know that I actually have a business partner. I’ve never really talked about him much, and I want to share with you how that happened, when it came about, why it came about, and what it looks like in my business (if you’ve ever thought about maybe adding a partner to the mix). This one will be really transparent. I’m going to share things I’ve never shared before, but I think it's time for me to talk about it. Click here to listen now.

4) Affiliate partnerships and my philosophy around affiliates.

Again, I’ve talked about this in past episodes but I’m going to put a little more personal slant on it in this week's episode, end give you some tips to build you own affiliate partnership strategy.

5) Consistency.

If there is any marketing lesson I need to be even better at and really focus on more and really take seriously, it’s consistency. We’re going to talk about that, what it looks like, and how we can add more of that to our business.

As I look back on my past 6 years in business, I feel incredibly thankful for these lessons, as they have shaped my professional and personal life tremendously.

EPISODE 85 Sign Up for Amy's Free Masterclass: How to Create a Wildly Profitable Webinar (Even If You Don't Have a List)

SIGN UP

Don't forget, if you want to learn how to create a five-figure webinar (even if you don't have an email list) you can sign up free for my webinar training. Click here to sign up now.

If one of these lessons really resonated with you, I'd love to hear about it! Talk to me on Facebook or Twitter and tell me which one you’re going to focus on.

Have a wonderful holiday, everyone. Thank you for being part of our tribe.

Mastermind Opportunities:

Each of these mentors have offered mastermind opportunities in the past but their masterminds might not be currently accepting new members at the moment. Do some research to learn more about each.

#84: Growing a Lucrative Email List

7 november 2015 | 51 min

#83: Cultivating a List Building Mindset

5 november 2015 | 38 min

For the last several podcast episodes, we've been covering all manner of marketing tactics. Creating webinars, building urgency, writing copy. And we've taken a deep soul-searching dive into the personal "why's" and "how's" of online entrepreneurship.

This week, we're bringing it all back home. It's time to refocus on the foundation of every successful online business:

Your email list.

This week and next week, I'm devoting the podcast to some list-building straight talk.

And if you're thinking "Come on, Amy--I want the black-belt stuff that will take my business to the next level!" ... then this episode might be especially for you.

Here's how you know if you need this episode:

If you’ve been working on your business for over a year now and you have less than 4,000 people on your email list
If you’re not growing your email list by at least 75 new leads a week
If you already have a solid list but it’s not converting into sales or sign-ups
If you are struggling with confidence in your business and are feeling "less than" or comparing yourself to everybody
If you ever launched anything in your business and your results were lackluster (i.e., you sold only one or two of your products when you thought you were going to sell 100)
If you truly love the business you're creating and are passionate about seeing it succeed--in other words, if you're in this for the long haul

If you answered yes to any of those things, here's the first thing I want you to do after listening to today's episode. Download the short one-page inquiry that I created just for you. It's going to help you sort through the obstacles that are holding you back from building a healthy, growing list.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy's Cheat Sheet: "Uncover Your List Building Obstacles"

Let me say at the outset that, for all my talk about the crucial importance of list-building, I truly understand the difficulty involved. When you're in the beginning days and months of your business, it feels like every opportunity is more important than the simple, daily effort of building your email list.

But I learned from the sad experience of my very first product launch just how essential the list really is. Listen to the podcast episode for the full story--it's eye-opening. For now, let's just say that with all the bells and whistles of my program design and the sparkle of my marketing strategy, the promotion totally tanked.

The reason? I had a weak email list.

I couldn't understand it. I'd been networking with all the right people, even getting invited to speaking engagements and guest blog spots, and I'd spared no effort to create an amazing product.

But because I was not actively focused on list building, I wasn't able to build the business that I really wanted.

(By the way, when I say “actively” focusing on it, I mean that I would think about my list every day...but it was that horrible “I should be doing this, I’m far behind, I know I need a list" kind of thinking.)

Everything else about my business just seemed more important, in those stressful early days.

That's why I've created this download for you--to help you think through what is pulling your attention away from the cornerstone of building your business. Once you understand why it's so easy to focus on other things, you'll be able to turn the trend around and start seeing the results you want.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy's Cheat Sheet: "Uncover Your List Building Obstacles"

Listen to today's episode first--it will really help you with the mindset around list-building, and allow you to process the questions honestly.

And when you're done, drop me a comment to let me know what you're thinking! What is your mindset when it comes to building your list? How are your efforts coming along?

#82: How to Protect Your Facebook Ads Account

2 november 2015 | 42 min

Hey there! I have a fun topic to cover in today's episode:

The Online Entrepreneur's Worst Nightmare. (Cue spooky music.)

Sorry...I couldn't resist. Blame the post-Halloween sugar overload.

The actual topic is how to keep your Facebook account from getting shut down.

Now, this is a topic that I know truly does scare some of you...maybe you've received warnings from Facebook about your content, or maybe you know somebody whose account has been shut down.

I know how upsetting this can be, not just to the people it occurs to, but to every other online entrepreneur in their community. It's just like that feeling when someone you know gets their house or car broken into. Suddenly it feels like the whole world is out to get you.

I don't want you going through your business day freaking out about this. That's why I'm devoting this episode to defusing the scare out of this "nightmare." Seriously...breathe. It's going to be OK.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy's 10 Commandments of Protecting Your Facebook Ads Account

So what is an online entrepreneur to do? Answer: get creative! (Click Here to Listen to the Full Episode!)

As you're reading through the list of ten tips about protecting your Facebook ads account, try to adopt an innovator's perspective. Rather than feeling defeated, think about how you can beat Facebook to the punch by creating content that makes all users feel amazing, hopeful, inspired, uplifted. That's a win for everybody--Facebook, your audience, and you.

Tip #1: Add a privacy policy to your registration page.

Tip #2: Disable all pop-ups on the page where you are sending your ad traffic.

Tip #3: Pay attention to your reputation on Web Of Trust.

Tip #4: Use the Lead Pages plug in on your WordPress site.

Tip #5: Your landing page must accurately reflect what is being promoted in your ad.

Tip #6: Be mindful of your ad copy.

Tip #7: Create a feel-good story.

Tip #8: Stick to your account’s regular activity.

Tip #9: Pay attention to your overall activity because it all adds up.

Tip #10: Focus on the relationship.

Like I said at the beginning, this isn't something to freak out about. I just want you to be informed. Yes, it might take a little time to revamp your approach to ads, but in the long run, it's going to make for much stronger, more effective Facebook advertising for your business.

#81: Eight Principles of Greatness with Lewis Howes

22 oktober 2015 | 49 min

I first met Lewis Howes back in my days of working with Social Media Examiner. I liked his technique with video interviews, and wrangled up a lot of interviewees for him; he liked my Facebook trainings, and asked me to put together a book. That was not only the beginning of my career in online training courses; it was, as they say in the movies, the beginning of a beautiful friendship.

This week, Lewis and I got the chance to reconnect over the topic of "greatness." Sound a little abstract? Let Lewis persuade you otherwise.

Lewis is a true expert in lifestyle entrepreneurship--a business coach with a top-rated podcast, a huge online educational program, earnings in seven figures, and a recognition from President Obama as one of the Top 100 Entrepreneurs in the country under age 30. Truly a great example to all of us working on our online businesses!

And you'd better believe Lewis didn't get to this level by aiming for "good enough."

His recent book School of Greatness is all about the importance of striving for greatness--in our personal lives, our health, our relationships and, of course, in our businesses.

What Does "Greatness" Really Mean?

As entrepreneurs, we're a little obsessed with the idea of "success." The symbols are always changing--this year it might be making a decent profit, next year maybe it's hitting six figures, and the year after that, it could be landing a book deal or paying off your house or...who knows?

This is the danger of becoming too obsessed with success--the target is always moving. Which means we run the risk of never being satisfied, no matter how much we accomplish.

But by focusing our sights on greatness, Lewis says, we're able to experience satisfaction with where we are in our business, and so much more besides.

"Greatness is discovering what your greatest gifts are, your talents, what you were born to do, maximizing those gifts, and impacting the maximum amount of people in the world with those gifts."

8 Principles of Greatness

Lewis' book breaks greatness into eight simple steps:

1. Clarifying Your Vision

Before you set out on your personal quest, you have to clearly see the action steps to make it happen.

2. Embracing Adversity

Challenge and struggle are a natural part of growth.

3. Cultivating a Champion's Mindset

You can't guarantee that you'll win every time, but you can always set yourself up for the opportunity to win.

4. Committing to Hustle

A willingness to do whatever it takes will take you where mere talent can't.

5. Mastering Your Health

Your health (emotional, mental and physical) can either hold you back or drive you forward--which way do you choose?

6. Practicing Positive Habits

Without intentional habits, life turns into a nothing but a series of reactions.

7. Realizing You Can't Achieve Greatness Alone

A powerful, reliable team is the key to building something that’s bigger than yourself.

8. Being of Service to Others

The crowning moment of greatness is giving your gift to the world.

This is just a summary of Lewis' eight principles--you need to hear these in detail! So click here now to listen to the full podcast episode.

Going Deeper

My chat with Lewis did more than just outline what it means to be great. It illuminated some of the finer points that past experience had "muddied up" for me.

There's so much in this interview, I hope you'll take the time to listen to it today. But for now, I want to leave you with one final quote from Lewis that I thought was particularly...well, great:

"The biggest impact we can make is when we become a symbol of inspiration because we follow and chase our dreams. It is our greatest gift to follow our dreams...we are robbing ourselves and others around us when we cop out and don’t chase it out of fear."

#80: Ask Amy

14 oktober 2015 | 51 min

It's time for another edition of Ask Amy!

Every now and then, no matter how good your business system is, you reach a moment where everything kind of splinters. I'm having one of those moments this week, trying to reassemble my podcasting setup after moving it into a bigger home studio.

While I'm glad to have this bigger space devoted to my podcast, I don't have the acoustics worked out yet--which means I'm a little bit stalled in terms of production. Little issues like this can really bother me, if I let them!

I'm sure you've experienced this, too. Think with me about an area in your business where you feel stuck because something else has to happen before you move forward. Maybe something’s not working properly and you have to figure it out first. Or maybe you’re just not comfortable moving forward and you’re not sure why.

All of today's questions deal with different things, but they all center around this core issue of obstacles holding back the progress of our business.

Let's take a look!

Question #1: How early do you contact affiliates if you want them to work with you to promote your course?

Question #2: Remembering back to the first product you created, what would you tell us now that you wish you would have done differently back then?

Question #3: What do you do when you see another site steal your content and sell it?

Question #4: As an entrepreneur, how do you stay focused on what is at hand and not get distracted with wanting to start new projects, create new things, try a new form of social media? How do you stay focused?

Final Thoughts

A lot of times, those feelings of being held back or stuck are rooted in bigger fears or a lack of confidence we have in our business or message.

The truth is that a lot of the time, if I go ahead and move forward anyway, I'll mess it up once, figure out what went wrong, and now know what to do. I'll also have overcome the fear of failure because guess what? I failed and it didn't ruin my life!

I would rather be making those little mistakes along the way but still be moving forward. When you get the confidence to not really care about those little mistakes, you will usually fix them, keep moving forward and BOOM--you are way ahead of yourself, way more than you thought you would be!

#79: How to Add Urgency to Your Next Promotion

13 oktober 2015 | 47 min

It's a fact. Sometimes people are reluctant to buy from you.

Even when they want your product, even when they’re smitten with your brand, there will be some prospective buyers that seem to have a built-in pause command that holds a their finger poised above the “purchase” button on your website. It's just par for the course when we are doing business online.

There’s nothing wrong with this, until it stands in the way of you making a sale to someone who truly needs what you’re offering.

There is one thing that can overcome this buyers’ reluctance.

The most successful marketers know what it is, and I’m going to share it with you today.

It’s all about adding urgency.

This is something I had to learn for myself, through plenty of trial and error, so I’m thrilled to be able to pass it on to you. It’s going to put you way ahead of your competition.

It starts with recognizing that it’s simply human nature to take our time and stay on the fence as long as we can, until we are pushed one way or the other. That push comes from learning that we must act.

That’s what urgency is: making sure that your audience knows they need to act now.

You want to build urgency into every promotion you create. There are lots of ways to do this, but the best way I’ve found to build it in is with a one-two punch: a combination of bonuses and deadlines.

I'm going to share several of my favorite strategies in this blog post, but this week's free PDF has even more urgency tactics from some of the biggest names in online marketing. Click here to download it now!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy's Bonus "How It's Done: Genius Bonus Ideas from 11 of My Favorite Online Marketers

Bonuses

Believe it or not, I’ve actually had people buy my programs just for the bonuses! While you definitely want to spend the bulk of your time crafting a great core offer, bonuses can sometimes make or break the offer by pushing people just a little bit further to finally say, “Yes, I want this.”

Now, it’s important to note that not all bonus offers have urgency attached. Sometimes you’ll create a bonus add-on to your core offer just to sweeten the deal.

Urgency bonuses are the ones that show up later in the promotion. They come in different “flavors. You do not need to do them all. You can mix and match them, based on what feels best for your offer.

1. Timely bonus

2. Fast action bonus

3. The sweeten-the-pot bonus

As I mentioned earlier, one of the main places to showcase urgency is in your emails. Once I attract people to a webinar, I follow up that webinar with some really strategic email marketing. I work really hard on those emails to craft not just a compelling sales message, but to help my new audience to understand why this program is so valuable and why they need it.

But sometimes a picture is worth a thousand words. That’s why I love using the countdown timer.

As you are reading my email, the timer at the very top of the email is actively ticking away. When it comes to human instincts, the only thing strong enough to beat the buyer's resistance is being able to see time running out, second by second!

Finally, there is the “limited spots available” tactic. If you have a more exclusive version of your product (a special edition, a higher tier, etc.), it creates the perfect opportunity to email your list about the short supply of opportunities. Even if they weren't planning to buy in at this level, hearing the words "limited availability" again creates the urgency that you're looking for.

These are my favorite tools to create urgency. You'll learn about so many more when you download my free PDF for this week! Click here to get it now.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Amy's Bonus "How It's Done: Genius Bonus Ideas from 11 of My Favorite Online Marketers

#77: 5 Video Marketing Mistakes Most Businesses Make with James Wedmore

28 september 2015 | 54 min

I know it’s only October, but I’m already thinking about how to boost my business in 2016. And one of my biggest goals is to do more video.

Video is a complex issue for a lot of entrepreneurs. You know that it could help you make an amazing connection with your audience. But all the tinkering that goes into it--the lighting, the camera setup, the script--is a surefire way to fry your brain.

Now, you actually may be killing it with video right now. Maybe you have a natural eye for what looks good on camera, you’re a master of improvising quick, witty nuggets of wisdom on the fly, and talking into a lens brings out all the warmth and sparkle of your personality (instead of turning you into a cardboard cutout like…um…some people I know).

If that’s you, my hat is off to you. But if not, maybe you're more like me —you’ve made some videos, it went okay, you know you can do better…but it's easier to just save it for another day. (Or year.)

My good friend James Wedmore dropped by the other day, and we started chatting about video, and before long I had to ask him if we could turn the conversation into a podcast interview. He has so much great stuff to share about why video is important, and how to make it really practical for your business.

Our interview was OUTSTANDING video tips and tricks. I want you to listen to the whole thing so you don't miss any of it. I also want you to make sure to access the three-part FREE series he put together just for you on how to make great videos for your business.

Here’s just a tease of what we covered:

Five Video Marketing Mistakes

Shoddy camera work

You don’t have to be Martin Scorsese or anything, but you do have to avoid those black bars on either side of your video—they’re a huge turnoff to your audience. (Easy fix: record video with your camera or phone held lengthwise, not up-and-down.) Other no-no’s include shaky camera action, bad framing, and fuzzy focus.

(If these no-no’s are already breaking you out in hives, relax. All of these are easy, one-step fixes that James spells out.)

Lighting

Newer cameras and phones can correct for this, but it’s worth it for everyone to learn how to set up quality lighting. The bedroom lamp is just not going to cut it. Nothing makes your video (and your brand) look instantly amateurish like bad DIY lighting. James gives the name of his favorite lighting kit that's cheap and reliable. Click to listen.

Audio

James says stop using your in-camera microphone. Doesn’t matter if you have the fanciest phone or DSLR out there…the onboard microphones will not pick up quality audio and your beautifully shot video will either sound like it’s coming from the bottom of a well OR sound like your grandmother shouting over a long-distance call.

Again, just a little bit of cash outlay will get you a great-quality lapel microphone that connects into your camera or phone. Your audio will get instantly synched, and you’ll be able to talk in your normal tone of voice without worrying that the mic isn’t picking you up.

Don’t Be Boring

A lot of people protest that they can’t do video because they aren’t funny, they aren’t loud, they can’t talk fast, they aren’t an extrovert.

Well, guess what? You don’t have to be any of those things to have an engaging video. As James puts it,

"The opposite of boring doesn’t mean funny."

What you do have to be, James says, is passionate. And…well, just listen to what else he says. You’ll have no reason to doubt your “interestingness” ever again.

Not Doing Video

It’s not a rule that “he or she who has the most video wins.” (In fact, it’s definitely possible to do too much video, especially if you have no strategy.) That said, there are five types of video everyone should be doing in their business.

Learn more about what each of these videos accomplishes, and how you can pull them off seamlessly by signing up to get the free three-part video series James created on how to do videos.

#76: How to Be Happier (and More Profitable) with Gretchen Rubin

24 september 2015 | 62 min

#75: How to Launch -- The #1 Project Management Method I Can't Do Business Without

16 september 2015 | 50 min

If you’ve been listening for a while, you've heard me mention the word Scrum. When you hear this word, you do one of two things:

Feel your heart surge with pride and joy because, as a fellow Scrummer, you know how amazing this approach is for running a small business.
Scratch your head / do a Google word search / roll your eyes because you have no idea what I’m talking about.

Listeners in both these camps are going to love today’s episode, because I’m going to talk about this amazing project management method and how it has revolutionized the way I get my business done.

To start off, Scrum is not my own made-up word—I got it from a book called Scrum: The Art of Doing Twice the Work in Half the Time. (Sounds pretty good, right?)

And basically, the concept of Scrum is just that: managing a team of employees and contractors in the smartest way possible.

I used Scrum throughout the process of creating my newest product, “Webinars That Convert.” Basically, I set up a checklist of every single thing that needed to get done on this product—from creation to promotion to sales to management—and my team and I “Scrummed” our way through it!

Not coincidentally, it’s the same checklist I used for promoting the Profit Lab last spring. That’s why I’m offering the same giveaway this week—the step-by-step project plan checklist that puts all the chaos of a new product launch into sanity-saving order.

This checklist goes hand-in-hand with today’s topic—download it and you’ll be well on your way to Scrumming your first project.

Why Scrum?

There are the four main ways that Scrum really helps my business reach its productive sweet spot:

It increases your team’s speed to completion.

My team is able to get through projects so much faster now that we use Scrum.
The Scrum approach really pays attention to the work people are getting done and gives them the ownership on that performance.
People are empowered to make decisions.
This is probably my favorite part of Scrum—it allows us to make sure everything is working smoothly. When it’s not we fix it instantly.

How Scrum Works

#1: The Project Backlog

#2: The Sprint

#3: The Sprint Review

The bottom line is, if you don’t take the time to communicate well with your team, it will cost you money because they will do it wrong. And Scrum is an amazing way to keep that communication alive.

Best of all, the Scrum method gets easier and more efficient every time you use it! It’s kind of intense, it’s all-consuming, but when it’s over, it’s completely done and you’ve got a completed project.

Grab the free PDF project backlog (if you haven’t already) and start warming up to Scrum in your business. And let me know how it works for you!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get The Project Plan Checklist

#74: Write Better Copy: Quick Tips for More Confident Communication

30 augusti 2015 | 61 min

I know I have talked about copy many times. But can you blame me? It’s a hot topic!

Many of you that are growing your business online or have been growing your business for a while now still struggle with copy.

Believe me, I get it. I have definitely struggled for years with writing good copy for my business. And when I finally felt like I got that "copy mojo," things started to become easier in every aspect of my business.

That's why I'm so excited to bring you my guest today -- Nikki Elledge Brown. Along with being a proud military spouse, a mom, and a former park ranger, she's an amazing communicator and businesswoman. Nikki went from teaching communications at college-level to running a business that broke multiple six figures in under 18 months. (Wow, right?)

And the heart of her business is teaching entrepreneurs (like you and me) how to write their own copy, better than ever!

Nikki's approach to copy is putting it into "recipes." Sales pages, blog posts, video scripts, About pages...she breaks them all down into specific, doable steps that make copywriting easier than a "just add water" cake mix!

Today's show is packed with ridiculously simple recipes for every piece of copy you'll ever have to write, along with a few to help with your mindset around copywriting.

Stuff like...

How to write with purpose
The value of YOUR voice (+ how to use it in your copy)
Sales page tips (how to make it easy for people to buy from you)
Sample blog post recipe
Sample blog VIDEO recipe
How to write a great headline in under 10 minutes
What to do when you're not sure what to write about
How to avoid sharing TMI (too much information)
How to master your mindset around copywriting

Nikki also put together our freebie today, which is--you guessed it--a "recipe book" of copywriting formulas. Click here to get it now!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Nikki's "A Course About Copy Class Notes"

As I mentioned, Nikki has built a hugely successful business in an amazingly short amount of time on her way with words. She had over 90 new clients sign up with her in her first two months of business!

And in her words, the key to this kind of growth is not just being good at helping others communicate, but being able to communicate her own brand clearly to potential clients.

"You are losing money if you aren’t communicating effectively."

Find out Nikki's recipes for maximizing your revenue potential with easier-than-ever techniques for communicating with your audience. Her free PDF is about to become your copywriting "Joy of Cooking"--an indispensable guide to everything you'll ever need to write for your business. Click here to get it now!

#73: 3 Webinar Tweaks That Made a $62K Difference

30 augusti 2015 | 37 min

What a difference a tweak makes!

If you've spent any time on this blog (or podcast) in recent weeks, you know how firmly I stake my belief in webinars. Webinars offer a platform that lets you connect with people on an entirely new, personal level you just don’t get with most marketing strategies.

And what other marketing strategy can offer the opportunity for consistent on-the-spot revenue?

If you’ve done successful webinars in the past and are looking to make even bigger revenue, OR if you’ve never done webinars before or maybe have just dabbled with them in the past, today is going to be quite a pleasant surprise.

Starting with this number: $62,000

As the title says, just three little webinar-related tweaks made a $62,000 difference in my bottom line. I knew they'd have an impact, but the size of that number surprised even me.

See, I knew there were aspects of my webinar strategy that could use a shot in the arm.

I wanted more sales generated from my webinars
I wanted more people to show up live during my webinars
I wanted to attract a new audience and grow my email list with the webinars.

Whenever you want to reach a new goal, you know some parts of your strategy are going to have to change.

So I set to work making adjustments, starting with:

Tweak #1: The Sales Page

This might surprise you, but I always do a sales page for any promotion I put together. Where some people might drive webinar attendees right to their product order form, my style is to give people extra information, especially if they are on the fence.

In the past we used to send people directly from the webinar to the sales page to read all about the product and then buy. But over time, we realized I wasn’t getting as many sales on the webinar as I had thought I should.

And that's how this simple tweak came about. I still use the sales page, but I'm using it smarter. That single change resulted in instant sales from the very next webinar, as well as a bigger boost of those instant sales.

(Click here to listen to the full episode and find out the simple tweak that boosted instant webinar sales!)

Tweak #2: More Webinars During Promotion

I want to give a shout-out to a member of the mastermind I used to be in. He's the one who suggested this tweak to me.

He said if webinars work really well for me, I should be capitalizing on that.

This idea--do more of what's already working for you--was so simple, it was revolutionary.

In the past, I'd do one webinar for each promotion. But at his suggestion, I stepped up my game.

It took a while for this tweak to hit its stride. But once it did, I saw amazing results.

Tweak #3: Facebook Ads

This is one I learned from my amazing coach, Todd Herman.

I found that when I'm running Facebook ads for a webinar promo to a cold audience that probably doesn’t know much about me, that ad needs to look a whole lot different than an ad to a warm audience (my fan base, my own email list, or a retargeting list).

Here are some examples:

The warm-audience ad

The warm-audience ad is more "talky" and personable. It has a lot more of my branding in it, in terms of colors and design. These people already know me and like me, so it plays on that familiarity we have.

Compare that to...

The cold-audience ad

The cold-audience doesn't have a lot of branding to it. The text is short, punchy and blatant: "This is what we have going on, sign up here." Because this audience doesn't know me, I keep it much more generic.

Find out more about how to tailor your Facebook ads to different audiences. Click here to listen to the whole episode.

#72: The FIRST Action You Should Take Before Starting a New Project

15 augusti 2015 | 38 min

I love these opportunities to answer your questions directly. And lately, the questions have swirled around a specific theme. (It seems we're all on a very similar wavelength right now!)

What's the theme, you ask?

How to grow your business to the next level.

Whether you're just getting started or have been in business for years, the steps that take you from where you are to where you want to go remain pretty consistent.

In other words, we have a lot in common, you and I.

Question #1: What is the first thing you do before you start a brand new project?

The answer here may surprise you...unless, of course, you've participated in one of my programs in the past couple years. (I kind of can't shut up about it.) It's incredibly simple and incredibly effective cornerstone of every project that makes my process absolutely fly by. I can't live without it.

...and neither should you! Sign up for my free training to own this strategy for yourself!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get My Free Training Video: How I Organize My Dropbox Folders for Ultimate Success

Question #2: What is the biggest struggle in your business right now?

Glad you asked. This is something I've been thinking a lot about. It feels like I'm missing something important in my team--some vital role isn't being filled. As a result, it feels like there's a "chokehold" in my business. After much deliberation, I think I've figured out what it is.

Question #3: What’s one challenge you have overcome this year?

I am really proud of this answer. (And guess what? It involves you.) And in overcoming this challenge, I've learned that it's not always a matter of changing something in order to make the challenge go away. Sometimes it's a matter of changing the way you look at the challenge.

Question #4: I've noticed you haven’t been traveling much lately. Why the change?

Aren't you observant? It's true--I've scaled way back on the travel commitments. And no, I didn't develop a fear of flying or lose my interest in participating in big events. Instead, it was a shift in my focus, and a commitment to doing even better at the things I do best.

Question #5: When you were first starting out did you feel a bit alone in your business?

Not at first--I was so relieved to be out of the busy corporate environment, a little isolation was fine. But over time, yes, I felt the need for more company in my solo-preneurship. Feeling alone squashes your creativity...so don't go there! (Click here to listen to the full episode, where I break down my strategy for keeping good company.)

EPISODE FREEBIE Get My Free Training Video: How I Organize My Dropbox Folders for Ultimate Success

#71: Masterminding Your Way to Success

15 augusti 2015 | 54 min

Next time you're networking with a group of entrepreneurs, keep your ears peeled for a certain word floating above the conversation.

The word is "mastermind," and it's a concept that is trickling down from the multimillion-dollar start-up set to homegrown entrepreneurs like you and me.

If you're not familiar with the term, the term "mastermind" can have a very "Great and Powerful Oz" sound about it. Simply put, a mastermind is a small, very focused group of business owners who meet regularly to sharpen and strengthen their business strategies.

One of the biggest advocates around for mastermind groups is Jaime Tardy, founder of EventualMillionaire.com. Jaime is the kind of person anyone would want in their mastermind group--she has razor-sharp focus, unwavering commitment to her goals, an insatiable appetite to learn...and she's also a lot of fun to talk with!

Jaime joined me this week to talk all things mastermind, and the takeaway is hugely informative. If you've been thinking about creating or joining a mastermind, or even if this is the first time you've the term, this episode is going to spell out exactly what the benefits are, what kind of mastermind you should be looking for, and how to conduct operations once you get started.

Jaime also put together a worksheet for forming your own mastermind, complete with email scripts for contacting potential members. Click here to download it so you can get started right away!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the 6 Easy Steps for Forming a Mastermind

Should I Pay to Join a Mastermind?

"Peer masterminds," as they're sometimes called, have these advantages over paid groups:

You have equal say to everyone else in the group--no single person is controlling it.
They tend to last longer than paid subscription-based groups.
It's easier to form true friendships with others in the mastermind.

Should My Mastermind Only Have People from My Niche?

Definitely not! Jaime is in a mastermind with a financial advisor, an internet marketer, and a professional sword swallower! What they do have in common is a high regard for systems and processes, and a level of success that they're trying to reach.

How Do I Know if My Mastermind Is Working?

The same way you know if any relationship is working--if you feel mostly positive effects from being involved with it.

There are definitely masterminds that are not a good fit for you, that just don't offer what you're looking to get out of it.

Or perhaps it's going great for you, but someone else in the mastermind is routinely late to meetings, participates minimally, or contributes negative energy.In either case, a few meetings is usually all it takes to know that something's not working right.

Get Jaime's insights for keeping your mastermind on track! Click here to listen to the full interview now.

Commit to Your Own Success

It can take one or two tries to find the right group of people for your mastermind. But from my own experience, I can tell you that my entire business changed when I finally locked into the right group.

I want you to have the same experience, so if this is something you have been thinking about for a while, commit to yourself:

"In 30 days I will have created my own small mastermind of five people."

Best of all, forming your mastermind is so incredibly easy if you follow Jaime's step-by-step worksheet. Click here to download it now!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the 6 Easy Steps for Forming a Mastermind

#70: 4 Webinar Myths and How to Avoid Them

11 augusti 2015 | 47 min

If you’ve sought out training to help you build your business, or tracked the success of other entrepreneurs, you have firsthand experience of the power webinars have to not only engage and excite an audience, but to convert them to into paying clients.

Maybe you’ve even been one of those people who signed up for a webinar to get a little free education, and ended up making a purchasing decision that you were genuinely excited about!

So why does the idea of putting on your own webinar have you quaking in your boots?

Let me guess...

You don’t mind a little grunt work, but you doubt your ability to string together all that technology.
You love the idea of delivering content in a highly personal way to your audience, but you hate the idea of a sales pitch at the end.
You’ve got a foolproof concept in mind . . . however, you’re not sure how you’ll pull together an audience since your email list and sales funnel are still a work in progress.

Busy entrepreneurs (like you and me) don’t have a SECOND to waste on activities that aren’t directly linked to profit. If you’ve ever tried creating a webinar before, you know that sinking feeling of waiting, as the seconds tick by, for your sales to pick up speed. (Ugh! It’s the worst, isn’t it?)

In my experience, I’ve found that four major myths are to blame for a poor conversion rate.

I’m going to debunk those myths for you, and show you how to replace them with truly effective practices that will not only reward all your hard work, but have you out of your chair with excitement.

Myth #1: Webinars are just a marketing strategy (and not a whole system).

Myth # 2: Webinars are a TON of effort and involve too much expensive technology.

Myth #3 - I’m fine; I learned about webinars a few years ago.

Myth #4 - It’s too late. I already missed the boat on webinars.

If you’re reading this post RIGHT NOW, then you’re in a unique position to catch wind of this new strategic approach before anyone else in your niche does, and in doing so, claim your stake in the rich blue ocean ripe with sizeable and scalable profits.

So chances are that even if your competitors are already using webinars (the old way), you can gain a competitive advantage by being the FIRST to build a complete webinar funnel based on the proven frameworks, techniques, and strategies that I’m about to share with you.

Keep reading . . . now that you know the 4 webinar myths, I've created a DETAILED, free cheat sheet to help you with your first (or next!) webinar . . .

My wish for you is to sidestep the countless traps that make most webinars epic disasters, and instead learn how to create a masterpiece.

I’ve been doing webinars for over 5 years now and I’ve made MANY mistakes along the way. You don’t need to do the same! I’ve compiled a list of 5 of my biggest webinar mistakes over the years and how to avoid them before your first (or next!) webinar. Click here now to get that list!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Cheat Sheet: "5 Rookie Webinar Mistakes" (And How To Avoid Them)

#69: Blogging Essentials for Busy Entrepreneurs

26 juli 2015 | 47 min

When I say the word “blogging,” what’s the first emotion you feel?

If you’re like many entrepreneurs, it’s probably stress, mixed with a little bit of guilt.

Even if you truly love writing, keeping up a blog for your business can be one of the hardest things to get done…if you even get it done at all. Your business might be running full steam ahead, but your blog is lagging months behind!

Today’s episode is all about getting your blog back in gear, minus the stress. I’m talking to one of my favorite people in the online marketing world, Darren Rowse, the founder of ProBlogger.net and one of the first people to recognize the potential of blogging for entrepreneurs.

He’s going to walk us through the bare necessities of blogging, and show you how to streamline your process so that you gain traffic, convert leads and build community with every post you write.

Despite having written an encyclopedia's worth of information about blogging over the past few years, Darren is no stranger to the stress around blogging:

“It’s pretty easy to get to a stage where your blog is running you instead of you running your blog.”

So why keep blogging at all?

Simple—your blog is the cornerstone of your branding foundation. It's the best way to get your name out there, and to help people get to know you.

Reinvent the SWOT Test

Would you believe that when Darren started ProBlogger, he’d only been an actual pro blogger for less than a year? With so little experience under his belt, he was fearful of being called out for not being a seasoned expert. (I’m sure we can all relate to that!)

But rather than let his inexperience hold him back, Darren used this “weakness” to his advantage. He was transparent in his posts about aspects of blogging that he didn’t understand yet or was just learning about.

As it turned out, the transparency was a big hit with his audience, and earned him even more followers.

“To position myself as someone who was on the journey, maybe a few steps ahead of you but I still haven’t gotten it all together, really resonated well with my audience.”

Once you’ve run a SWOT test (strengths/weaknesses/opportunities/threats) on your blog, go back and reconsider the weaknesses and threats you found. They can actually be the ideal ways to differentiate yourself in your field. So many people out there position themselves as bulletproof experts, that your audience may find your “inexperience” very refreshing.

Become a Title Master

Darren leaves no uncertainty about the importance of titles:

"The title of your post changes the destiny of your post. …can be the difference between somebody reading it and sharing it and it just sitting in the archives and never being read again."

How to Find Readers (Without Google’s Help)

The constant changes in how Google ranking works mean that SEO tags and hyperlinks don’t work as well anymore for getting your blog to show up in a keyword search.

According to Darren, that doesn’t matter as much as knowing who you’re trying to reach with your blog, and showing up where those readers hang out online.

"I am a big believer in adding readers one by one. I don’t think you need to be attracting thousands of readers everyday to your blog. For me it’s really about building a presence in the places that my potential readers are and being useful in those places."

Try watching on Twitter for people who use your keywords and respond to them. Be helpful in forums. Join Facebook groups that are on your particular topic and add value to the conversation. What you’re looking for is the opportunity to bring a new reader on who will love your blog and bring their whole network along with them.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Free Download: "How To Boost Your Blog's Business Potential: ProBlogger's Top Ten Tips To Growing Your Email List and Selling More Online"

#68: Planning a Foolproof Live Event with Rich Brooks

25 juli 2015 | 61 min

A lot of you have asked me if it's a good idea for you to start planning live events. You see the entrepreneurs you admire staging weekend retreats where they get up and set their audience on fire with excitement, education and motivation. Maybe you've even been to one and thought "Hey, I could do that!"

The short answer is Yes! I started planning and participating in live events very early in my business, and while my inexperience made it a little terrifying at first, I couldn't deny the powerful boost it gave me--not just in terms of leads, but also in terms of confidence.

That's why I invited Rich Brooks to join me on the show today. Rich is a small business owner who just happens to be an event-planning powerhouse. I asked Rich to let me pick his brain for the fundamentals of planning a successful live event.

The Who and the Why

If you've ever attended Rich's amazing Agents of Change conference in Portland, Maine, it may surprise you to learn that his live event track record began with a simple lunch meeting.

The purpose of a live event isn't to wow everyone with your multimedia presentations and dynamic speeches. Those are great bells and whistles to add as you gain experience, but the real heart of a live event is to do four things:

Get your name out there and establish your credibility
Differentiate yourself from competitors
Generate leads for business
Turn a profit

The more you work on your online marketing, the more you start to notice how crowded it is out there. It's getting harder and harder to get noticed in people's social media feed, no matter how valuable your content is. So why not get the edge on your competitors and take your message directly to your audience, face to face?

Yes, it takes more time and effort to plan an event than to post something on Facebook. But, Rich says,

"A live event could be that thing that really separates you and raises you above all of the other people out there in your industry. If you are looking to kind of change up the way you engage with people, a live event may be the perfect thing for you."

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the "7 Mistakes to Avoid When Planning a Live Event"

Click here to download this week's free giveaway.

3 Phases of a Live Event: Speakers, Sponsors and Seats

Rich says that all live event planning boils down to these three phases.

Speakers - Getting people to offer valuable content for your audience
Sponsors - Getting people to contribute to your audience's experience
Seats - Getting people to show up in your audience

First Things First - Who Is This For?

Before you start worrying about getting people to show up (we'll talk about that later), spend some time thinking about who you want to show up. The key thing here is quality over quantity. Here's what Rich has to say about it:

"The #1 is that you are putting on an event for people. Who is this audience? What do they look like? Who is your avatar? What kind of information do they want to consume? What are they looking to accomplish? What are they looking to do?"

As in all other forms of marketing, you need to narrow in on your ideal audience member, and design the perfect event for them. I know it's counterintuitive, but being super specific will actually help you attract more people.

Once you know who you're planning this event for, you'll have a firm foundation to build on with the three phases.

Phase 1: Speakers

Phase 2: Sponsors

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the "7 Mistakes to Avoid When Planning a Live Event"

Phase 3: Seats

Find out more ways to fill the seats at your live event! Listen to the full episode here.

...And Just One Two More Things

What do I charge?

How much should I promote?

Try to time your more obvious promotions around FOMO-inducing moments in the sales process. Announcing Early Bird discounts, One Day Only specials, "Seats Are Rapidly Selling Out!" messages, etc. are perfect opportunities to jog people's memories that they want to attend.

#67: Should You Narrow Your Niche?

15 juli 2015 | 46 min

Do you ever find yourself in the middle of a challenge with your business and wondering,

“How did I get here…again?!”

Nothing feels worse than the suspicion that you’ve been spinning your wheels for the past month. (Or quarter. Or year.) The last thing we want is to get caught in a downward spiral, where we never get to overcome our struggles and rise past a certain level.

But what if that spiral was actually going up, not down?

I spoke with Nathalie Lussier, world-class digital strategist and email building expert, about this problem that confronts all of us: how to understand the recurring patterns in our business.

Not only does she give some sage advice on how to deal with these patterns, but she shows how embracing them can actually help you build your business by narrowing your niche.

We usually think of business strategy as being a line between Point A and Point B…and measure our success by how straight that line is.

But in real life, Nathalie says, the path is more like a spiral staircase. As we make our way up to the next level, we revisit the same issues, challenges and themes over and over again.

When you come up against circumstances that make you think “How did I get here again?”, flip the way you’re looking at them. Even if it’s the same issue, you’re in a different place with it than you were six months (or even six weeks) ago.

What’s more, each time you revisit that same situation, you learn something a new and deeper lesson about it, which you can then pass on to your target audience. They’re all climbing spiral staircases of their own, and they need your story to help them keep going.

EPISODE FREEBIE Click Here to Get Nathalie's "Spiral Staircase Exercise"

Narrowing Your Niche Helps You Ask for What You Want

Think about some of your mini-goals for this quarter. Maybe you want to get published in a prominent magazine or website. Maybe you want to speak at someone’s live event, or host an event of your own. Maybe you want to join forces with another business.

These kinds of opportunities don’t usually come knocking—you have to ask for them. Chances are, you’re one of several people asking.

But when you have a clearly defined, highly specific niche, you’re bringing something to the table that will stand out.

Your niche gives you leverage to show why what you have to say matters, who is going to listen, and how success in that opportunity can be measured. Those are win-wins for you and the person you’re asking.

EPISODE FREEBIE Click Here to Get Nathalie's "Spiral Staircase Exercise"

Narrowing Your Niche Reconnects You with the Deeper Meaning of Your Business

Take a minute to really search your soul. What are you really passionate about changing in the world? Whom do you feel the most empathy for? Whose troubles do you burn to solve?

Your compassion is a powerful indicator of where your niche really lies. Identify the people whose struggles motivate you the most, and let them become co-creators of your business by defining your work around their needs.

“A lot of times, we get caught up in the logistics and the analytics, what’s the conversation rate, what’s the opt-in rate… Just remember that there’s a human being on the other side of that screen who has their own heartbeat, hopes, dreams and goals. When I’m sending an email, I’m not sending an email to my list—I’m sending an email to all these incredible human beings.”

Next time you find yourself in an all-too-familiar position in your business, don’t lose heart. Look for the opportunities it offers—opportunities that you’d never have seen last time you were in this place. There’s nothing wrong with a spiral if it’s leading you upward.

#66: How to Get Your Business Back on Track

29 juni 2015 | 54 min

I started out this year with a fully fleshed-out calendar. I knew exactly what I was going to do, when we were going to promote, when we were not going to promote, when I was going to take vacations, etc. Everything was planned.

Well, as you probably know, things change as the year gets going. As entrepreneurs, the challenge is to be flexible enough to seize good opportunities, but not so flexible that we lose all our momentum.

Now that it's July--where did the time go?--I decided to hit "pause" in the calendar flow and regroup.

I'm going to walk you through a simple, powerful exercise to evaluate where you are right now in your business, what’s working, what’s not working, and what needs to change.

I've also created a downloadable template that helps you chart your progress in this exercise. You can get it by clicking here.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the "Back On Track" Action Assessment

Ready? Let's get started.

Step #1 - Review Your Week

Write down every single thing you can remember you’ve done in the last seven days. I mean everything--creating content, training, phone calls, reading emails, writing emails. It's crucial to know how you've been spending your time.

Step #2 - Perform a Brain Dump

Think ahead to the next six months, and write down all of the things you need to get done. People to contact, products to create, events to attend, blog posts to write . . . I mean everything. (Warning--don't use this as an opportunity to come up with new ideas! This is just for what you've got in the works right now.)

Step #3 - Identify the Revenue

Now that you've got your list of six months into the future, take a highlighter pen and highlight every item on that list that will produce revenue for you, either directly or indirectly.

Learn more about how you can successfully "regroup." Click here to listen to the full episode.

Step #4 - Identify Misspent Time

Now take another highlighter pen in a different color, go back to the list you made in Step #1, and highlight the tasks that were either a big waste of your time or that you could have delegated but didn't.

Now go back to the Six Month list, take a third highlighter pen, and highlight all of the things that you could either do farther into the future, or that can be leveraged or delegated.

Lots of highlighter action, I know. But this is all about identifying where you should and shouldn't be spending your time.

Step #5 - Color Code Your Calendar

I use Google calendar, which makes it very easy to highlight each entry in a certain color. The point is that to have different colors for different categories--planning a project, upcoming deadlines, content creation, podcasting, being interviewed with someone else, even time off or personal errands (like getting my hair cut).

Once you do this, you can step back and see the big picture of your schedule. Where are your biggest blocks of time being spent? Is that enough, given what you know about your work flow? Are you spending enough of your week doing the things you really love?

After all, isn't that a big part of why we start our own business?

Don't forget to download Amy's template that walks you through this whole exercise, step by step. Click here to get it.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the "Back On Track" Action Assessment

Click here to download it instantly.

At this point, it's time to pat yourself on the back, take a walk, breathe deeply.

That's the whole point of this exercise--giving yourself more room to breathe. You now have a bird's-eye view of what your schedule really looks like. You know where you need to focus your time. You know what things you can quit doing or delegate.

Without these moments to regroup, the day-to-day hustle can start to consume you. These regular check-ins with your schedule will put you back in charge of your business.

#65: Selling Yourself--The Art of a Winning 'About Page' with Melissa Cassera

29 juni 2015 | 60 min

For busy entrepreneurs, the About page of a website is one of the easiest to put off. You might throw a few vital details up there, like your name (always a good place to start) and your credentials, and promise yourself to fill it out later. Maybe you even go back and try adding some details that paint a fuller picture of you as a person.

But for many, no matter how hard they work on it, their About page just falls flat. It feels fake, like you’re pretending to be someone you’re not. And that makes sense—we’re all taught never to brag about ourselves…so it feels pretty strange to suddenly write a whole page about why your customers should think you’re so great!

That’s why I’m so happy to introduce you to Melissa Cassera. She’s a publicity expert (as well as a screenwriter and an actress), and if you read her own About page, you can see that she is an expert on how to write about yourself in a way that comes out warm, genuine and authentically irresistible.

Why Is An About Page Important?

Melissa compares the About page to the gown a Hollywood actress wears on the “red carpet.” It’s the way to show off both your importance and your individuality at once, impressing people and engaging them at the same time. The About page is where you give people just enough information about you to want to know more.

In other words, you don’t want to give away the whole story on your About page—it’s their intro to all the excitement that awaits if they choose to work with you. For the reader, it should feel like they’ve met you in person, looked you in the eye and shaken your hand.

So how do you convey that feeling in words?

Think About How You Serve the World

Rather than begin by talking about what you do, begin your About page with a line or two about why you do it. This should be the element that guides you through the writing process for your About page. If you get stuck or are wondering if you are including the right kinds of details, ask yourself if what you’ve written paints a picture of the world/society/lifestyle/change that you are trying to build with what you do.

Show Your Non-Professional Side

Would it surprise you to learn that the part of your About page that really sells you is the part where you talk about something besides work? This, Melissa says, is what really seals the emotional connection with people and allows them to get to know you on a more personal level. Not only that, but this section is what sets you apart from your competition. Nobody else has the same story, the same style, the same lovable quirks and personal motivations that you have.

As Melissa says in her "Better Bio Challenge" blog post,

"Personal details aren’t 'frivolous' — they anchor you in the reader’s mind and showcase the 'person' behind the 'business.' Try to include at least ONE little detail about your passions, guilty pleasures + personal life, in your bio — and you’ll sparkle off the page, every time."

Create an “Action Step”

By now, your audience has fallen head over heels in love with you…so what’s the next step? Where does the relationship go from here? Melissa says this is the moment to offer them a concrete action step. Offer a free opt-in gift, list links to your five most popular blog posts, tell them to contact you to set up a consultation. Whatever your specific action step is, make it simple and immediate for them to make the next move.

Get more of Melissa's suggestions for making your About page actionable. Click here to hear the full interview.

The Bottom Line: What Is Fame For?

Melissa has a stellar blog post called “Four Questions to Help You Identify What's Not Working in Your Biz...And Make It Better.” In it, she offers this really thought-provoking quotation:

#64: A Backstage Pass to My Most Successful Launch Yet

25 juni 2015 | 73 min

#63: How Podcasting Can Complement and Grow Your Business with John Lee Dumas

19 juni 2015 | 46 min

Last year, one of my most popular podcasts was an interview with John Lee Dumas. But I invited him back this week because I wanted to talk about podcasting again, in a whole new way.

Today, I want to focus on about podcasting for somebody who already has a platform. Maybe you have a business with a blog. Maybe you have an online training program or course that you’re constantly perfecting and promoting from one year to the next. Maybe you are a coach or consultant.

Bottom line, you have something important to say. And maybe you’ve been thinking the podcast thing seems to be growing even bigger, and might be a good way to help your business get bigger, too.

Well, you’re right. It is.

No question, podcasting requires a fair amount of work, especially to get it all set up. But it can also be a huge boost to your business’ visibility, to establishing your brand as a leader, and ultimately to your sales.

John is a podcasting superhero. His show Entrepreneur on Fire is consistently ranked among iTunes’ top business podcasts—he even got a Best of iTunes recognition within his first year! More impressively, though, he puts out a new episode every day! (As in seven days a week—no weekends off for this guy.) This makes him the perfect person to explain why podcasting is worth it, how he gets it done, and how he manages to stay fired up about it every single week.

Why Should You Podcast?

As entrepreneurs, we are always looking for other avenues to grow our audience. That’s why we use Facebook, Instagram, and Twitter, that’s why we blog and send emails to our list. The podcasting sphere is just another way to reach more people—a lot more people. iTunes has 525 million active subscribers, and SoundCloud, Stitcher and Spotify are catching up fast.

Podcasters are an obsessive crowd—they are constantly looking for new content to listen to during their commute, while walking their dog, while they’re waiting at the airport…you name it!

That’s the great thing about podcasting—it doesn’t require you to say “no” to something else, the way a lot of content does. In our multi-tasking culture, it’s the perfect way to get your message heard and deliver free, valuable and consistent content to your audience.

But Wait...There's More!

John has some incredible free content for you. If you want to learn about how to find your ideal podcast topic, your ideal podcast listener, how to get your show noticed in the ever-growing podcast arena, and so much more, click here to get into his free podcasting workshop.

#62: How to Create a Project Plan for Your Next Promotion

18 juni 2015 | 69 min

You know me--I teach what I know best. And what I know by now, more than anything, is that the key to making a sales plan work is having a proven, foolproof system.

So today, I'm going to walk you through my project management system, line by line. This is one I've spent hours mapping out with my team. Some of it will be familiar to you, but it's in the little details that you'll find the most value--the tiny things that make your promotion polished, professional and, most importantly, effective.

Another great thing about putting together a promotion with this system is that it sets up your content to be "evergreen"--meaning you can use it over and over again to sell your product and build your business.

There's a lot of content in this post and in the podcast. But don't worry. I've put together a special checklist for you, so that you can put all this information into action right off the bat. No matter what kind of promotion you're planning, this checklist has all the basic steps you need to make sure it launches successfully.

EPISODE FREEBIE Click Here to Get "The Project Plan Checklist"

I divide all my promotional planning into three categories:

The Pre category is everything you do before the cart opens (i.e., your product becomes available for sale).
The Live category is everything you do when the cart is open.
The Post category is everything you do after the cart closes.

I've launched promotions in the past that I've had just a few weeks to pull together. As my business has grown, I've had more time to plan and prepare. But here's the thing: it's never enough time! Let me encourage you to always get started on this system earlier than you think. There will always be last-minute tasks that have you scrambling. That scramble will be a lot less stressful, the sooner you get started. (Right now, I'm already starting on this system for a promo set to launch in October!)

Category #1: Pre-Promotion

Category #2: Live Promotion Maintain the New Customers Area

Category #3: Post Promotion Shut Down Ads Redirect Promo Pages to Your Waitlist Remove Promotional Imagery from Website/Social Media Celebrate!

I’m always ready for a virtual champagne toast by the end of the process. I also send out thank-you notes to everyone who has helped: team members, affiliates, experts, etc.

#61: How to Use Visual Content to Drive Traffic, Shares and Sales with Donna Moritz

3 juni 2015 | 48 min

As humans, we are hardwired to connect emotionally with visual content. Pictures in particular--we process them very quickly--faster than text, video, or audio. Pictures allow us to make a really quick decision about whether we are going to engage with something.

It's no secret that some of the most successful brands in the world owe their popularity to their visual content strategy. Notice I said strategy--in other words, not just any visual content will do.

Fortunately, one of the world's biggest experts in visual social media and content strategy is also a good friend of mine.

You probably know Donna Moritz already as the power behind Socially Sorted, the award-winning blog about using visual content on social media. I know her as my #1 student from the very first Profit Lab course I ever launched. She's also shown up on this site more than once.

But today, Donna is here to school me--and you--in how to set up a visual content strategy that supports your sales and sends your message.

She's also put together an amazing freebie for us--a three-part video series that walks you through the process of creating polished imagery. This is where you'll learn how to use all the tools mentioned in this episode. Trust me--it's a must-have.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Donna Moritz's Free Guide To Creating Visual Content

Before she became the renowned expert she is today, Donna learned all the ins and outs of visual content strategy through simple practice. After working in several different businesses--sometimes for others, sometimes for herself--she saw how visual content really created that initial resonance with a target audience that makes them want to learn more.

The main thing with your visual content is to "stop the scroll"--in other words, arrest your audience's attention so that their finger pauses above their mouse or smartphone screen, and they take the time to engage with your message.

The more Donna learned, the more excited she got about the potential of various kinds of visual content. If you've ever felt overwhelmed by the sheer variety of visual content styles out there, don't worry--Donna is here to break it into three basic levels.

These are the really easy-to-create, easy-to-share individual images that would be on Facebook, Pinterest and Instagram. Think funny photos, behind-the-scenes shots, images that incorporate quotes, tips or other short bits of text. They are really a good jumping-off point to lead into a longer message.

2. Step-by-Steps

3. Showpieces

There's so much more to learn about visual content strategy in my interview with Donna, so make sure to listen to the whole episode. Also, click here to get the amazing freebie she designed for us--it's a three-part video series where she walks you through the specifics of how to create images. It's a must-have for anyone who's ready to put their visual content strategy into action.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get Donna Moritz's Free Guide To Creating Visual Content

#60: Copywriting Tips to Persuade, Promote and Profit with Ray Edwards

28 maj 2015 | 58 min

When it comes to communicating the value of a product or service, Ray Edwards is a true legend in the industry. I met him way back in my corporate job days when my boss hired him to work his magic on a new sales letter for a product we were launching. That was when I saw the true power that words can have in generating sales and building a business. Since then, I decided to become a devoted student of copywriting, and a student of Ray’s, in particular.

Why Is Persuasion So Important?

In a perfect world, we could just say “Here’s what I have, it’s good, buy it if you want to,” and all the right people who need our product would click Purchase. But the thing is, we’ve all become really smart, and really skeptical.

Ray points out that even Apple isn’t immune to the need for writing sales copy—they’re just so good at how they present it that we don’t realize we’re consuming their copywriting!

Very few of us like thinking about “sales writing.” It makes us think of smarmy used car salesmen, trying to con hardworking people out of their money. Ray is familiar with this aversion to copywriting, and here’s how he explains the way to avoid sounding “sales-y”:

"I think people get confused about persuasion versus manipulation. I like to define the difference this way: persuasion results in you making a buying decision that you will celebrate later; manipulation leads to you making a buying decision that you will regret later.

"The key to guiding your clients toward a decision they will celebrate is—no surprise—knowing your clients really well! You think of the problem that you’re solving, and you write about it from the perspective of the person who has the problem, and you describe their pain. Someone once said that the more accurately you can describe the pain of the person you’re selling to, the more they feel as though you automatically have the solution to the problem.

Whew. Great stuff, huh?

Get even more of Ray's insights on how genuine, emotionally persuasive copy can make selling a breeze. Click here to listen to the whole episode.

Okay, now let’s get into the nuts and bolts of writing great copy.

Ray has a couple of frameworks that he teaches anyone who is trying to improve their copywriting skills. The first one is called...

The "Pastor" Framework

This one gets its name from the original meaning of the word “pastor”—having to do with being a shepherd. (Kind of an old meaning of the word…look it up.) Not only does this word help you remember the purpose of your business—to help and take care of people with what you sell—but it also just happens to be a handy acronym for setting up the points of your sales page.

P — Problem

A — Amplify

S — Story

T — Testimonial

O — Offer

R — Response

Ask people to take action.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get 100+ Email and Headline Templates from Ray Edwards

This last piece of the Pastor framework brings up an important point that should be present in your copy:

Any Decision Is Better Than No Decision

Step #1: The Existing Situation

Step #2: The Dream Solution

Step #3: Discovering the Trusted Guide

Step #4: Presenting the Unique Solution

Step #5: Describe the Features

Step #6: Describe the Benefits

Step #7: The Transformative Offer

Step #8: Present Proof

Step #9: Justify the Value

Step #10: Eliminate Fear and Risk

Step #11: Offer Bonuses

Step #12: Invite a Decision

Make sure to listen to my full podcast interview with Ray Edwards--we covered so much more than I could fit into this blog post! And don't forget to sign up to receive more than 100 templates for writing your own persuasive headlines and emails. This is the stuff that Ray normally offers only to students of his copywriting course, so you're not going to want to miss it!

#59: How to Create a Killer Sales Page Headline

21 maj 2015 | 46 min

#58: Facebook Q & A with Amy

14 maj 2015 | 37 min

Last week, I put out an invitation on my Facebook page. I invited you to throw all your questions about online marketing at me! What do you want to know? Where are you stuck? What are you confused about?

Well, the overwhelming majority of the questions people posted on my Facebook page were about--surprise!--Facebook. And the questions showed me that it's time for a major reframing of how we think about Facebook. Most people are just not looking at Facebook in a way that's going to serve them.

And since my mission is to help you get results with your online marketing, including your Facebook marketing, we’ve got to address that...stat!

The Facebook System that Changes Everything!

Larissa asks:

"How do I increase my FB followers? It seems I have hit a plateau. Also, I don’t want to spend copious amounts of money with FB ads…I feel they keep changing the algorithm to line their pockets by making you pay for advertising through them, and no one will see your post." If you feel this way about Facebook ads, then I’m guessing they haven’t been working for you. And believe me, I don't want you using Facebook ads if you're not generating revenue.

This is where we need a reframe. I want to help you see FB as a place where putting in a little bit of money will result in bringing back a lot of money.

The first thing to realize is that Facebook ads cannot work on their own. You have to incorporate them into a social media sales funnel--a system that turns your fans and followers into subscribers to your email list, and turn those names into paying clients.

I know lots of people who make money every week from Facebook ads, but they aren't just using that ad to send people to their sales page. They're using those ads as part of their sales funnel system. That’s the key to getting the Facebook marketing results you’re looking for.

How to Make Your Business Bloom

Tara asks:

"I would love to see a visual of how your business blossomed. I mean, there are so many things we’d like to do in our business, but how did you prioritize the tasks over the years, and most of all, what makes sense to do what when?" Back in 2010, I’d just quit my corporate job. I didn’t have a product ready to sell yet, so I took some social media consulting clients. By the end of 2011, I looked at my business and thought “Freedom is a joke!” I was a yes machine to 8 bosses, practically chained to my desk but never working on what I really wanted to do. I’d tried to sell a couple of my programs, but they never went anywhere…much like what some of you are feeling!

We all talk a lot about freedom when building our businesses, but there’s not really freedom when you’re not generating revenue!

2012 is when I hit upon the importance of this sales funnel system. With a product to sell and a lead magnet to capture interest, I fell in love with Facebook ads, because I realized how to make them work!

The secret to my business blossoming is all in using this system.

I don’t want you going to bed each night worrying about where the next dollar is going to come from! All that does is squash your creativity and confidence.

Instead, I want you to wake up excited to build your business each day, enjoying the freedom to work on all the projects that help your business grow, and taking time for the rest of your life.

*The masterclass registration has passed but to be sure to stay on the list for future webinars! Subscribe to my list or checkout one of my free cheat sheets here.

#57: 3 Core Beliefs of Truly Successful Entrepreneurs

24 april 2015 | 39 min

In case you haven’t noticed by now, I want you to succeed.

It is genuinely important to me to help you reach that place in your business where you can say, “Yes, I made it; I love my work and I love my life!”

But there is something else that is equally as compelling that I want for you:

I want you to enjoy the journey—the process of making it all happen.

If you’ve been with me for a while you know that I often talk about the kinds of strategies that have worked for me, that I know can work for you too. Things like building your email list early in the game, effective ways of using Facebook to engage with your audience, and the importance of having a marketing plan—knowing what you’re going to do before you set out to do it.

I stand behind all of these things 100%, but there is something else you need to know. Something so critical it can actually make or break your online business dreams.

I'm talking about what you believe regarding your ability to achieve success in your business.

The 3 Beliefs You Must Have to Achieve Success in Your Business

Belief #1 - I believe that one of the biggest strengths in my business is knowing my target market intimately. Knowing how they think, what they need, and what words and emotions they use to express themselves is crucial to my success.

Belief #2 - I believe that I am not alone, shipwrecked on a desert island needing to have all the answers myself. I thrive and my business thrives with a few core mentors that I trust and can turn to again and again.

Belief #3 - I believe I have a great idea (product/service) that will impact people’s lives, and that my idea needs a clear and easy-to-navigate system to generate sales.

Understanding the Three Beliefs

Let’s examine each belief more closely and see what’s important about it.

#1 Knowing Your Audience

#2 Finding Your Mentor

#3 Having a System

Why You Need These 3 Beliefs

I said at the beginning that belief is a tricky concept, because it’s not something I can teach you. I can only tell you, and back it up with my story and many others. But at the end of the day, the best proof of a belief is to look at your own situation.

If you don’t have these beliefs, how are things going for you? Is your business on track with your vision? Are your sales what you want them to be?

And if they’re not, isn’t it time to change your beliefs?

I know it isn’t easy at first. It’s scary to change, to risk spending money or time on learning to do things in a new way. Don’t let fear hold you back.

The purpose of belief is to shape the actions we take. And as soon as you begin taking action on these beliefs, you already have them. You will feel the difference inside you—you’ll feel your confidence growing, and your sense of purpose will feel more grounded than ever.

Before long, you’ll also be seeing the difference on the outside—more email subscribers, greater audience engagement, and an increase in sales. I want all of that for you, from the bottom of my heart. I would love to hear your experiences in the comments below. Have you tried a system that has worked well for you? How are you getting to know your audience? Do you have the kind of mentorship you need to succeed? Keep moving forward and know you are not alone!

Don't forget to join me on my FREE, Master Class where I'm revealing the EXACT marketing system I use (and where Facebook fits into it to!) generate multiple sales every single day.

*The master class registration has passed, but be sure to stay on the list for future webinars! Subscribe to my list, or check out one of my free cheat sheets here.

#56: How to Create Content to Attract Your Target Market

18 april 2015 | 52 min

There are two kinds of content in this world: content that attracts and content that sells.

It's easy to spend all your time and effort focusing on the second part. Eyes on the prize, right? And believe me, I want you focused on that end result.

But it's crucial to remember that the end result needs a strong beginning. In other words, you'll never get to that sale if you haven't attracted the people who want to buy your product!

Today is all about the first half of the sales equation.

The more you craft content geared toward your ideal customer, the more sales you'll make. And these won't just be one-time sales. You'll be talking to people who want to buy from you over and over, because they feel connected to you and your product. When you create content that makes them feel understood, that communicates an empathy for their situation and an excitement about helping them with your product, they are going to be watching their inboxes for your emails and jumping up and down each time you launch something new.

These are the people you want to find, right?

So let's talk about how you can reach them.

First, the Good News...

When you know your target market really well, creating content for them becomes incredibly easy. We talked last week about creating a survey that helps you get inside the heads of your target market. Once you're there, you'll be able to instantly rattle off ten things they need...

Which then become the topics of each piece of content you create.

Let me jump ahead really quick to tell you that our free giveaway for this week is a list of inspiration boosters for creating magnetic, empathetic content that your audience can't resist. Click here to get it now.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Free Guide: "15 Content Inspirations To Help You Attract Your Target Market"

What Counts as Content?

Ready for some more good news? Everything you do online is content.

A Facebook post counts as a content piece, whether it's video or words or simply an image. So does a tweet. An email (whether to your whole list or just a segment of it), the text and imagery on your landing page, a free giveaway, a podcast, a thirty-minute webinar...

You get the idea.

We all have our favorite places to post content. Maybe you're Twitter-happy and can post 140-character quips all day long. Or maybe you love doing quick video updates from wherever you happen to find yourself.

So don't worry if you're not the world's most prolific blogger. If you're making your voice heard online, you're creating and posting content, and you are ahead of the game.

Simplify by Diversifying

Okay, so say you have a lot of fun within creating short Facebook videos, but your brain dries up the second you sit down to write a blog. Does that mean you should abandon writing and just rely on Facebook videos to communicate with your audience?

Definitely not. First of all, you're going to miss a huge segment of your potential customers by relying on only one form of content. Second, there are just things that a blog can communicate that videos can't...and vice versa! You don't have to do all kinds of content in equal measure, but if you want to reach as many people as possible, you're going to want to use as many different kinds of content to catch their attention in all the places they might be hanging out.

Fortunately, every idea you come up with for one kind of content can be easily translated into a totally different piece of content. Your videos can be turned into a blog post. Your blog post can be turned into a slide deck. Your slide deck can be turned into a series of Twitter images.

In other words, creating different content pieces just got a lot simpler.

Get more of Amy's insights on creating content, including an interview with social media maven Donna Mortiz. Listen to Episode 56 in full.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Free Guide: "15 Content Inspirations To Help You Attract Your Target Market"

#55: How to Create a Survey to Find Your Target Market

11 april 2015 | 63 min

In the last several weeks, I’ve been getting a product ready for launch. It’s called the Profit Lab…or, if you want the full title,

The Profit Lab: How to Create Marketing Systems In Your Business So That You Can Find Your Target Market, Grow Your Email List and Sell More Products

I launch this product twice a year, and every year, I recreate it so that it stays fresh and valuable, even for people who have gone through it before. I make new videos, I rewrite the worksheets, all that good stuff.

This year, as I’ve been getting this product ready for launch, I wanted to make sure I was truly connecting with my target audience. After you’ve had some success with a product, it’s easy to start coasting on that success, which means you stay the same while your audience continues to grow and change and develop new needs. Not my style. ;-)

To find out more about my target market, I needed to find out:

Where they are at, in terms of their business goals and growth.
What they needed from me
Where they were struggling, not just in their business as a whole but with the versions of the Profit Lab I’d released before.

Knowing all this was going to help me tailor this new version of the Profit Lab into exactly what my target audience desperately needs right now.

So I put together a survey. And the responses knocked my socks off!

The thing is, I knew who my target audience was, but I didn’t really know them the way I thought I did. The survey gave me a chance to understand how they think, what kind of language they use, what keeps them up at night, and why they come to me as opposed to anybody else in the online marketing world.

I learned so much from this experience of surveying my audience that I wanted to share some of those insights with you…how to create a survey that gets you into the minds and hearts of your target audience, so you design, redesign or market your products in direct response to their needs.

The result of this will be that you sell more of your products to them.

And don’t worry if you’re just starting out and your list isn’t that big yet. You can still design a survey that gets you these answers and helps you build your list...and I’ll tell you how.

I've also got a great freebie for you to download this week, which will give you lots more insight on creating a survey, as well as how to use the information it yields. Click here to download it now!

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Free Guide: "The Product Maximizer: 4 Smart Ways To Sell Products Online"

First Step: Design Your Questions

Second Step: Get People Engaged

Third Step: Getting Your Survey Out There

The Bottom Line

Sending out a survey is kind of like going on a first date. If you spend the whole evening trying to make sure the other person understands you, you’re probably not going to get to see them again. But if you spend the whole time asking them questions about themselves, you’ll come away with a really good understanding of who they are, and whether you have what they need.

When you’re creating this survey, don’t think so hard about what you’re trying to accomplish in your business. Think about getting to know your target market, and the goals of your business will fall into line.

#54: The Secret Mindset Shifts For Success With Ramit Sethi

30 mars 2015 | 54 min

I hope you’re buckled in, because my guest this week is an online business expert who is renowned for “telling it like it is.” Ramit Sethi is a master communicator who pulls no punches. When it comes to sheer mental confidence, there's no one quite like him in the online marketing world.

As a result, he’s had massive success in developing products that get huge results for his clients. His secret to developing these products is just one of the things we discussed in our interview. Our conversation was a great mix of lessons on mindset and tactical product creation strategies.

You should really listen to the whole interview, because there's way too much to fit into a blog post. But here are some of the highlights:

Redefining a Rich Life

Ramit’s landmark book is called I Will Teach You To Be Rich. But the strategies he teaches in this book and elsewhere aren’t aimed exclusively at people who want to blow $5,000 on a weekend in Vegas (but if that's your jam, Ramit thinks it's great!). Ramit says that the rich life is different for each person. For many of us, a rich life simply means being able to work from home, take our kids to work with us, building a business where money is automated and we can focus more time on the things we love.

In other words, money is an important part of having a rich life, but money is not the whole picture.

No matter how you define a rich life, Ramit says it all comes down to just a few big “wins.” If you get just five or ten of these wins, you don’t have to sweat the small stuff, and you can focus more on the things you really love.

How Fear Will Hold You Back

Ramit talks candidly about the toxic influence of fear, which gets in the way of achieving these big wins. You’d never know it to hear him talk now, but Ramit himself struggled a lot with fear in the early days of starting his online brand.

"I had been writing my blog for about two or three years and I had never made a cent. I didn’t want people to think I started my blog just as a way to make money because that was never the intention.

I was absolutely petrified that people would not buy it or, even worse, that they would call me a sell out. You can see it in the sales copy that I wrote. The way I wrote that sales copy was so cowardly.

I literally said, 'Why should you pay for this? I know you can find a lot of stuff for free.' My self confidence was so low that anyone would buy it that … I literally tried to defend it before they even bought."

But people did buy it. And they thanked Ramit for putting his information out there. What’s more, those buyers ended up opening his emails, joined other courses he offered, and took action on the things he taught them.

"The real people, the people I actually wanted to focus on, were buying and they were delighted to pay."

In other words, Ramit had found his target market. (Want to listen to the entire interview? Click here now!)

"My belief is if I’m not adding multiple failures to that every month then I am probably not trying ambitiously enough. If you go talk to a successful person and ask them to tell you about their failures they ask you if you have all day, because they have 50 things they have had problems with."

To listen to my entire conversation with Ramit, click here now.

#53: How to Discover Your Calling with Jeff Goins

27 mars 2015 | 36 min

Today’s topic is very near and dear to my heart.

We are talking about how to find your calling--what you were put on this earth to do.

Even those of us with jobs we love can sometimes feel unclear on whether we're really making the best use of our talents and utilizing our passions to the fullest. Even I find myself in this place sometimes, wondering if I'm on the right track or if certain decisions or circumstances are causing me to veer off course.

I know there are a lot of you out there who feel this way. You have talent to burn, and dreams of putting your best out into the world. Some of you are hustling hard every day to make those dreams a reality. Others of you haven't found the right opportunity yet, and are maybe working hard at a job that...well, let's just say a job that you don't really love, that doesn't quite fit the size of your aspirations.

Whether you're an entrepreneur, a 9-to-5'er, happy in your work or desperate to get out, my interviewee on the podcast today has a tremendously empowering message about finding your calling no matter where you are, and taking steps toward doing the work that you are built to do.

His name is Jeff Goins, and he just released a fantastic new book called The Art of Work.

Take a minute to look through it by clicking here.

If you order it now, you can also get $250 worth of free bonus material, including exclusive access to Jeff himself, a workbook, extra video features, all kinds of good stuff.

There are lots of books out there about how to find fulfilling work. You've probably read a few of them. Jeff's book really stands alone, though, because he's not delivering his message from a pedestal of wealth or prestige. Instead, he offers beautiful stories of real-life people that have found their calling in a multitude of different ways. He gets into the day-to-day stuff that, if you pay attention, helps you discover what your calling is.

This was such a great interview, you should really just listen to it on the podcast. But I'll give you a few highlights from my talk with Jeff:

What Is a "Calling," Exactly?

Contrary to popular belief, your calling is not the same thing as your passion. Passions change as we mature, learn what really matters to us, and refine our understanding of what kind of impact we want to have on the world.

Calling has more to do with purpose. Jeff says it's not a single moment of sudden understanding; it's more a lifestyle, a constant evolution of understanding what you're here for.

It's Never Too Late

Start Where You Stand

Start thinking about what you love doing, and what you're really good at. Connect with others to get their take on what you're good at. Find people doing the kind of work you admire, take them out to coffee, and ask them how they got there. And learn to be both purposeful and flexible with the things life throws at you. You have to be really intentional, Jeff says, to make the most of whatever is happening right now. This is how life gives you clues as to what you should take action on.

If you are really going to move the direction of your life’s purpose, it may not happen overnight. The internal pivot is the first way to change your job from drudge work to a higher purpose. This is how you first become attuned to what your calling is.

You do have control. You have some control over your situation right now. So as you get an idea of what you might want to do try, use your current situation to practice for what’s to come. I don’t think you will regret it.

Visit The Art of Work to learn more about Jeff's book. And remember, if you order it now, you will get a bunch of bonuses including a freebie from Jeff himself that deals with these mindset shifts we talked about here.

#52: How to Use Short Video Clips on Facebook

25 mars 2015 | 44 min

If you've been following this blog (or podcast) for a while, you know we've come a long way since the days when everything about online marketing started and ended with Facebook.

Still, we all know that social media and Facebook in particular remain a BIG part of how we drive traffic to our websites, build community, grow our email lists and turn leads into happy paying customers.

The journey you create for your prospects that takes them from casual social media fans to loyal customers usually starts on social media. Which means you have to constantly be aware of what's changing in the social media world, and tweak your strategy to take advantage of these changes.

Don't worry--that's why I'm here! To help you master these tweaks and make social media your own.

That's why today we are diving into Facebook and video, to learn how the two together can make a big impact in your online marketing success.

In Episodes 50 and 51, we talked about the importance of videos for your business.

And of course you already know that Facebook is important for your business.

But do you know how crucial Facebook WITH Video is for your business right now? Here are some stats that prove it:

It’s been reported that there are over 1 billion videos viewed on Facebook each day.
The average Facebook user worldwide watched 75% more video this year compared to last year.
In the US, that increase in views was actually 94%!
Brands posted 20,000 more videos on Facebook than they did on YouTube in December 2014.

I can vouch for these stats from my own personal experience--I've been very impressed with the organic reach with any given video I post on Facebook. I've been seeing instant traction when I post a video on my page, much more than a post with a static image. The greatest thing about video is how it takes on a life of its own through sharing.

And no, I'm not talking about highly polished, professionally edited videos. I'm not a video editor and I don't have a big production budget for these. No, the traction I'm getting is with simple, quick videos made mainly on my smartphone and edited with simple software.

Simplicity and ease are the key to making these videos a practical part of your marketing strategy--if they're not easy, you won't do them...and if they're not simple, people won't pay attention to them! Studies have shown that short video across all social media platforms get the most views and engagement. Short and simple is good.

Today, I'm going to highlight some people and companies that take full advantage of this trend in online marketing through short, simple video posts.

I've also made a free cheat sheet for you, with tips for how to post great video to your own Facebook Page. It's called “The 7 Tried and Tested Tips to Increase Your Facebook Engagement with Simple Videos." Download it by clicking here.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Free Cheat Sheet "7 Tried and Tested Tips To Increase Your Facebook Engagement With Simple Videos"

Great Video Example #1: “3 Tips to Prep Your Yard for Spring” (Lowe's)

Great Video Example #3: "Check Out My Latest Podcast" (Chalene Johnson)

Great Video Example #4: "The Bus Pole" (Lysol)

Great Video Example #5: "Love Your Curls" (Dove)

Make Your Own

Ready to start making your own videos? Instantly download our free cheat sheet “7 Tried and Tested Tips to Increase Your Facebook Engagement Using Simple Videos" to speed your process along...and also learn about some really cool video apps that will give your video a lot of viewer-friendly polish.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Free Cheat Sheet "7 Tried and Tested Tips To Increase Your Facebook Engagement With Simple Videos"

If you have a great Facebook video that you've seen success with, or would like to get feedback about, share it with the community here! Post a link to your video in the comments below, or share the video on my Facebook page.

#51: Putting More “You” in Your Business—A Guide to Building Brand Personality

17 mars 2015 | 43 min

I have a question for you. What do Seth Godin, Kim Kardashian, Taylor Swift, and Richard Branson all have in common?

If the first thing that comes to mind is that they have millions of followers on social media, you are right about that. That’s definitely true.

But the answer I am looking for is the reason behind their millions of followers on social media. There’s a single strategy they all share, a strategy that drives enormous numbers of people to follow them.

The answer: their brands are big on personality.

It would actually be truer to say that their personalities are their brands. From their signature look to their unique ways of expressing themselves, these people package their content in a way that sets them apart from anybody else in their niche.

When you have great content, really smart offers, and a foolproof marketing strategy and you are still not getting the traction your brand deserves, what you may be missing is personality.

People respect someone who works really hard. But they love someone whom they feel is real, someone they can connect with. And in a marketplace that’s bursting with hard-working, hustling entrepreneurs, people are more likely to follow their heart than anything else.

What you want is for their heart to lead them to you.

Today’s episode is all about making that authentic connection with your audience by infusing your brand with personality--your personality.

Before I dive in, today’s free download is called “The Entrepreneur’s Guide To Infusing Your Personality In All You Do.” It shows some of the best examples of strategies I am going to highlight for you today. Download it by clicking here.

let’s jump into the various ways that you can start infusing your winning personality into your brand through various kinds of messaging.

Written Content

This applies to blogging, of course, but also to social media updates, email marketing, and anything else your audience might read from you.

It’s a pretty general rule that it’s best to write the way you talk. For some people that comes naturally. For others, it sometimes feels like rocket science.

It can also feel a little bit vulnerable if you want to be taken seriously as a professional. But believe me, it’s always better to sound like you—quirks and all—than to sound like a generic “professional” with nothing unique or charming to make your voice memorable.

If it’s hard for you to write the way you talk, then run your next piece of content by your best friend or spouse, and ask them to tell you honestly if it sounds like you.

Your “About” Page

About Pages can represent over 60% of your website’s total traffic. Sound crazy? It just goes to show that people really want to know who you are. When they click on your About Page, it means they like what they have been reading so far and they want to get to know more about the kind of person you are. Which means you’re more than halfway to getting a new customer!

One person whose About Page helps her stand miles apart from her crowd is publicity expert Melissa Cassera. Her About Page is so good that I’m including the entire thing in the free PDF that I’ve created for you. Click here to get the download now.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Entrepreneur's Guide to Infusing Personality in All You Do

I know that feels scary at times. You don’t want to lose potential customers because you say something one way and not another way. When you take risks and really put your personality out there, sometimes it can be a little polarizing. But that’s okay. All you really need to worry about is that

You are being yourself, and
You’re creating content that will resonate with your ideal audience.

Don’t forget to download the free PDF I’m offering with this episode. It will show you examples of infusing your personality in your brand. I’ve also included some practical steps on how to use storytelling to infuse your personality into your messaging. Click here to get it now.

#50: How to Automate Leads and Sales with Smart Paid Ads

11 mars 2015 | 47 min

#49: How to Know If Your Idea is Profitable

3 mars 2015 | 43 min

Today’s post reminds me why I love doing this podcast so much. Not only is the material great, but it comes from two of my favorite people—a power couple in the online marketing world.

Their names are Joshua and Jill Stanton and together, they run a business called Screw The Nine To Five where they teach people who are dissatisfied with their day-to-day jobs how to take their skills and transform them into a self-run online business.

Whether you’re well on your way in creating your online business, just getting started, or even simply circling the waters trying to decide whether to get your feet wet, this post is tailor-made for you. It’s all about mining the raw material from which online businesses are built, and crafting it into the cornerstone of your success.

Josh and Jill have been making money online for quite a while, but their spunkily named website came about after they were asked repeatedly how they did it. They decided to start a program specifically for training others to do the same thing they did--a place where they could just send everyone asking their advice.

Ever since, they've been helping people see how they can translate their day job skills into an online job that generates way more income in way less time. In other words, you don't have to learn a brand new skill set in order to start an online business. You simply take what you know and strategically build a business around it.

The "strategic" part is where we can all use Josh and Jill's expertise. Because of course you need to see whether your idea for how to translate your skills to your own business has wings...or not. Odds are it does, but it's not going to be a get-rich-quick situation. However, if you put the passion and hustle and hard work into it, you'll be amazed what you can do online.

I can speak to this personally. Back when I was working my own 9-to-5, I was dreaming of starting my own online business but resigned to the fact that none of my knowledge would translate into the outside world.

All it took was a good friend who reminded me that I worked in marketing...something every online business needs to know how to do well. I was sitting on a gold mine.

You might be, too. Here are the four tests that will help you find out.

Test #1: Udemy.com

Test #2: Amazon.com

Test #3: Google Keyword Tool

Test #4: Facebook Ads

What Next?

If you put your idea through these four tests and find its profitability is validated on all four...well, then, it might just be time start creating a program or product. Even if your idea is validated on just one or two of the tests, I agree with Josh and Jill that it is definitely worth pursuing. You just have to make sure you are actually willing to commit the time and energy to really giving this a good go.

As I said earlier, creating an online business not an overnight thing, by any means. It’s going to take some time. But these tests will also give you insight on where you want to be spending that time, as well as where you want to price your product.

If you want to see these ideas in action, you can join Josh and Jill in an upcoming webinar called the Money Test Webinar. In this free online class, Josh and Jill will walk you through each of the four validation tests, step by step.

You can get the sign-up link by downloading our free guide...which will be very helpful to use in the webinar, I might add.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Free Step-by-Step Guide: "The 4 Profit Validation Tests"

#48: The 2015 Guide to Facebook Engagement

25 februari 2015 | 50 min

Here we are, two months into 2015...is it the future yet? On one hand, still no flying cars. On the other, we talk to people directly through screens we hold in our hands! Every now and then, in the middle of a Skype session, I start to feel like I'm on the Jetsons.

This post is all about how to deal with the future happening right now...specifically with regard to Facebook.

We all know that Facebook changes rapidly. It’s changing all the time. Just a few years ago, Facebook engagement looked very different. And maybe you've started to feel frustrated by the changes, or have just given up keeping track of them.

I get where you're coming from, with that. It can be daunting to keep up with Facebook's constant changing of its own rules. But Facebook is still a valuable place for you to gain traction for your business. That's why my mission for you in this post is to help you understand what’s working right now on Facebook, and how to make it work to your advantage.

First, I want to tell you about the free download I have for this week. I've collected 20 different posts from all over Facebook that I've seen capture maximum engagement--not just views, but likes, comments, and shares.

On this free cheat sheet, I explain in a few words just what is so engaging about each post. Download this cheat sheet for free and use these posts as rough guides for creating your own super-engaging Facebook content.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Top 20 "High-Engagement" Facebook Posts

Are you beginning to understand the roadmap? As you consistently offer high quality, valuable content that captivates your audience and motivates them to engage, through an indirect process you will increase your sales.

12 Suggestions to Improve the Quality of Your Posts & Boost Engagement

1. Get personal.

2. Focus on the fans that are actually paying attention to you right now.

3. Make sure you ask questions that are going to ignite a true conversation.

4. Try to stick around a little bit, especially after you post a question, even if it’s for ten minutes.

5. Create posts that are relevant to your brand and tell a story.

6. People will share posts that put them in a good light.

7. Create each post as though you are talking to a friend.

8. It is all about the image.

9. Make sure when people share your content from your blog that it looks really good on Facebook.

10. Mix up your content on Facebook.

11. Upload video directly to a Facebook post.

12. You’ve got to check out one of my favorite scheduling tools.

Engagement Truly Matters

When you make an honest effort to understand your audience and you give BIG and share freely, your fans’ trust in you will snowball. Their loyalty to your brand will be obvious by their level of engagement. From there you are golden because you will have built a foundation of extraordinarily useful content and a tribe ready to consume it.

Now I would love to hear from you! What’s working for your business when it comes to Facebook engagement? Please post in the comments below.

Also, don't forget to download the free cheat sheet that I'm offering with this episode. It will make these tips come to life for you.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the Top 20 "High-Engagement" Facebook Posts

#47: How to Gain Confidence, Increase Productivity, and Move Toward Mastery Each Day

17 februari 2015 | 65 min

If you’re anything like me...or if you're just human...you have faced your share of challenges and fears in the process of growing your own business. That might not be so bad, if we could all solve those challenges by simply trading stories. But no two people's challenges and fears are alike!

The reason our challenges are so unique is because our minds are. Unique, that is. Struggles and fears originate in your brain, and how it processes whatever you're dealing with, from one day to the next.

That's why one day you can be flying high, confident and on top of your game, and the next day you're sunk into despair, wondering how you got into this mess and whether it's too late to get out.

As I've said before, the real key to every aspect of growing your business is CONFIDENCE. And we all need a little help with confidence sometimes.

That's what today's post is all about--getting your head "unstuck," learning how to move forward with purpose even when you're struggling, and using each day to take the action you want.

That's why I invited my personal business coach Todd Herman to join me in today's podcast episode. He's a bit of a legend when it comes to performance mentality; big-deal people come to him for help with achieving mastery and improving performance. I'm talking Olympic athletes, corporate billionaires, members of international royalty...plus thousands of online entrepreneurs just like me.

Todd is all about action, productivity and results…which is exactly what I need for my business right now. To put it simply, he helps people perform so that their vision and what they do matches up.

I have to tell you, this Q&A with Todd is a landmark episode for me. Lots of listeners sent in their questions about improving performance for Todd to answer right here on the show. His answers will blow you away; in fact, even my editor told me that this is the most insightful podcast episode I'd ever done.

Honestly, there's just too much great stuff to list in a single blog post, so why don't you click the play button at the top of the post to listen right now? Trust me--this is stuff you're going to want to hear.

Also, I'm offering as today's "freebie" a special task-tracker that Todd gave me to use as part of improving my professional performance and guide my daily actions. It's called an Entrepreneurial Scorecard, and it's a simple, one-sheet tool that has been rocking my world ever since I started using it.

You can get the Entrepreneurial Scorecard for free by clicking here.

EPISODE FREEBIE Click Here to Get the Entrepreneurial Scorecard

No matter where your business lies within the growth process, Todd's specific, detailed insights are going to help you achieve mastery and gain confidence...every single day you sit down to work.

As I mentioned, the Entrepreneurial Scorecard is all about helping your goals gain traction each day. Download this valuable freebie by clicking here. The Entrepreneurial Scorecard is going to help you identify where you are spending time wisely and not so wisely, along with the areas you should be leveraging for maximum return on your effort.

EPISODE FREEBIE Click Here to Get the Entrepreneurial Scorecard

#46: 5 Hidden Money Opportunities in Your Business

12 februari 2015 | 49 min

As a kid, I loved the Mrs. Piggle-Wiggle book series. It featured a magical and resourceful lady who lived with all her children in an upside down house. When money was tight for Mrs. Piggle Wiggle, she would send all of her kids through the house to find hidden treasures.

That story stuck with me from the moment I read it. As a kid, I felt ready for any moment when money came up short—I’d just go on a treasure hunt! Does it surprise you to learn that my perspective hasn’t changed, even now that I’m an adult? What's more, I no longer wait for the “running out of money” moment before I set out on a treasure hunt. Not when I have a five-step treasure map that leads me right to the gold.

As an entrepreneur, there are going to be times when cash is tight. It’s natural for you to feel the squeeze when you’re just starting out. Even after your business has liftoff, you might feel strapped from time to time. Or maybe you are looking at investing in some kind of new business tool or business opportunity and you need a little cash before you do so.

Running your business means living through cycles of financial growth and…dormancy, shall we say? If that’s where you find yourself now, these hidden money opportunities will definitely speak to you. I’m going to reveal five very specific hidden money opportunities that I’ve used in my own business to bring quicker cash flow.

The key to a good treasure hunt is knowing you have gold hiding somewhere. And you do! Let’s go on a treasure hunt together, and find the places where your gold is hiding.

Opportunity #1: Finish Your Online Training Program

Opportunity #2: Do a Mini-Promotion and Make an Offer

Opportunity #3: Creating a Four-Part Email Sequence That Leads to an Offer

Opportunity #4: Offering Your Services to Your Audience

Opportunity #5: Becoming an Affiliate to Somebody Else’s Program or Product

Three tips for smart affiliate marketing:

1. Believe in it.

You have to have used the program or product you’re helping to market. You must know that it works, have your own results that you can talk about, and be so excited to sing its praises. You know you’ve made a good affiliate marketing partnership or connection when you tell everybody about it even if you’re not going to get money for it.

2. Build a funnel with your affiliate.

Webinars, four-part email sequences, and mini trainings all work for this. For example, if you click here, you’ll find an affiliate promotion that I did a training for. I literally walk you through how to use Lead Pages. For B School, I have an entire B School bonus experience: five bonuses you can’t get anywhere else, including the live two-day event, including a special Facebook ads program, including my new webinar program that’s not even out yet. You only get this stuff in B School when you use my affiliate link.

3. Read this article

My good friend, Pat Flynn of Smart Passive Income, wrote a post on his blog “Smart Passive Income” called Five Ways to Unbox the Mystery and Increase your Affiliate Income. It’s a really smart strategy for affiliate marketing, especially for those just starting out. Definitely check that out, along with his other great article, How to Stop Hoping and Start Earning.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get "A Course Creation Starter's Guide"

Get the full story--listen to Podcast Episode 43.

Make sure to listen to the entire episode for more tips and personal insights from my experience in hunting out hidden money opportunities.

And don't forget to download this week's valuable freebie, "A Course Creation Starter's Guide" for creating your own online training programs. Click here to download it now.

#45: The 3 Crucial Stages of an Online Business

5 februari 2015 | 57 min

#44: The Secrets to Building a More Strategic, Valuable Blog

26 januari 2015 | 38 min

#43: How Your Subject Line Could Be Killing Your Emails

20 januari 2015 | 35 min

How many times has this happened to you? You’ve spent hours composing the perfect email to showcase your content, you’ve carefully segmented your list to a specific audience, you’ve queued it up to send at the optimal time…and a week later, your analytics reveal a dismal click-to-open rate. Ouch!

It’s frustrating and discouraging, the kind of thing that can make you second-guess everything you know about online marketing. But it could be that the only thing holding back your campaign’s potential is the email subject line.

Don’t underestimate the power of this one simple sentence. As I’ve mentioned in the past, email marketing is the most effective means of online marketing. The gateway to that email—the first thing your customers see—is your subject line.

It has to contain hints of everything your email has to offer—the specificity of your product, the authenticity of your brand, the urgency of your offer. It has to convey not only your knowledge and authority, but also your personal empathy for your audience’s needs. Tall order, right?

Fortunately, crafting an enticing subject line is not rocket science. The best subject lines can be broken down into five basic strategies, each built along a simple formula.

Strategy #1: Focus on the Benefit

Strategy #2: Be Specific

Strategy #3: Get Relevant

Strategy #4: Make It Personal

Strategy #5: Call Out a Problem

Don’t forget—you can listen to the entire podcast and get the full details on how to craft subject lines that get your emails opened! Just click here to go to iTunes and choose Episode 43.

In addition, I have even more formulas and examples outlined for you in a cheat sheet I created for this episode. You can download it for free right now by going to amyporterfield.com/43download, or you can text 43download to 38470 and I’ll send it to you right away.

EPISODE FREEBIE Get the 10 Highly Effective, Irresistible Subject Line Formulas